59 files changed, 38535 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/78053-0.txt b/78053-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ce9610
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16320 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78053 ***
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber’s Notes:
+
+  Underscores “_” before and after a word or phrase indicate _italics_
+    in the original text.
+  Equal signs “=” before and after a word or phrase indicate =bold=
+    in the original text.
+  Small capitals have been converted to SOLID capitals.
+  Illustrations have been moved so they do not break up paragraphs.
+  Deprecated spellings have been preserved.
+  Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected.
+
+
+
+
+                                       [_Crown Copyright Reserved._]
+
+                        FIELD ARTILLERY TRAINING.
+
+                                  1914.
+
+                        GENERAL STAFF, WAR OFFICE.
+
+                              [Illustration]
+
+                                 LONDON:
+
+      PRINTED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF HIS MAJESTY’S STATIONERY OFFICE
+          BY HARRISON and SONS, 45-47, ST. MARTIN’S LANE, W.C.,
+                   PRINTERS IN ORDINARY TO HIS MAJESTY.
+
+     To be purchased, either directly or through any Bookseller, from
+    WYMAN and SONS, LIMITED, 29, BREAMS BUILDINGS, FETTER LANE, E.C.,
+                                   and
+                     54, ST. MARY STREET, CARDIFF; or
+                H.M. STATIONERY OFFICE (SCOTTISH BRANCH),
+                     23, FORTH STREET, EDINBURGH: or
+            E. PONSONBY, LIMITED, 116, GRAFTON STREET, DUBLIN;
+      or from the Agencies in the British Colonies and Dependencies,
+       the United States of America and other Foreign Countries of
+                  T. FISHER UNWIN, LIMITED, LONDON, W.C.
+
+                            _Price Ninepence._
+
+
+This Manual is issued by command of the Army Council. It deals with
+the general principles which are to govern the training in peace and
+leading in war of Horse, Field, Mountain, and Heavy Artillery, and
+forms the basis of the Training of R.G.A. Companies armed with movable
+armament. The attention of commanders is drawn to “Training and
+Manœuvre Regulations,” Section 2.
+
+Any enunciation by officers responsible for training, of principles
+other than those contained in this Manual, or any practice of methods
+not based on those principles, is forbidden as tending to cause
+confusion of thought and to prejudice successful co-operation in war.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+    WAR OFFICE, S.W.
+        _9th April, 1914_.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+    Sec.                                             Page.
+
+       DEFINITIONS                                      1
+
+                   CHAPTER I.
+              PRINCIPLES OF TRAINING.
+
+     1. Object and method of training                   7
+     2. Responsibility for training                     8
+
+        TRAINING OF RECRUITS.
+     3. Preliminary training of recruits               10
+     4. Recruit training in the battery                14
+
+        THE ANNUAL TRAINING OF THE SOLDIER.
+     5. System of training                             14
+
+        INDIVIDUAL TRAINING.
+     6. General instructions                           15
+
+        COLLECTIVE TRAINING.
+     7. Section training                               17
+     8. Battery training                               17
+     9. Brigade training                               19
+    10. Annual practice                                20
+    11. Divisional artillery training                  21
+    12. Training of Special Reserve and Territorial
+        artillery and of the artillery of the
+        Overseas Dominions                             22
+
+                     CHAPTER II.
+    DISMOUNTED DRILL WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.
+
+        SQUAD DRILL WITH INTERVALS.
+    13. General instructions                           23
+    14. Position and movements at the halt             24
+    15. Saluting                                       27
+    16. Movements                                      29
+
+        SQUAD DRILL IN SINGLE RANK.
+    17. General instructions                           35
+    18. Movements                                      36
+
+        SQUAD DRILL IN TWO RANKS.
+    19. General instructions                           38
+    20. Movements                                      39
+
+        RIFLE DRILL.
+    21. General instructions                           44
+    22. Rifle exercises                                44
+    23. Inspection of arms                             51
+    24. Guards and compliments                         53
+
+                 CHAPTER III.
+           EQUITATION AND DRIVING.
+
+    25. Standard required of men and horses            54
+    26. Horsemastership                                55
+    27. Paces of the horse                             58
+    28. Terms used in equitation                       58
+
+        FITTING SADDLERY.
+    29. How to fit a saddle                            59
+    30. Saddling                                       61
+    31. Bridling                                       63
+    32. Miscellaneous details                          65
+
+        RIDING.
+    33. General instructions                           66
+    34. Hints to instructors                           68
+    35. Preliminary training                           71
+    36. First lessons to the recruit                   71
+    37. Mounting and dismounting                       73
+    38. The seat                                       75
+    39. How to hold the reins                          76
+    40. Position in the saddle at attention            79
+    41. First movements on horseback                   80
+    42. Teaching the recruit how to ride his horse
+        over a fence                                   81
+    43. The aids                                       83
+    44. Bending                                        86
+    45. Spurs                                          89
+    46. Various exercises                              89
+    47. Paying compliments mounted without arms        92
+    48. Leading horses                                 92
+    49. Securing horses                                92
+    50. Riding with the sword                          95
+    51. Riding with the rifle                          98
+    52. Revolver shooting                             101
+
+        DRIVING.
+    53. General principles                            102
+    54. Fitting harness                               102
+    55. Position of a driver standing to his
+        horses and mounted                            104
+    56. Use of the whip                               105
+    57. Driving without vehicles                      106
+    58. Hooking in and unhooking                      106
+    59. Traces                                        107
+    60. Moving off                                    108
+    61. Halting                                       108
+    62. Wheeling to the right                         108
+    63. Wheeling to the left                          109
+    64. Wheeling about                                109
+    65. Unlimbering                                   110
+    66. Limbering up                                  110
+    67. Driving up steep hills                        111
+    68. Jibbing                                       112
+    69. Driving down hill                             113
+    70. Applying the brake                            113
+    71. Reversing in narrow roads                     113
+    72. Driving a pair of horses from the box         113
+
+        TRAINING THE YOUNG HORSE.
+    73. General principles                            116
+    74. First stage                                   118
+    75. Second stage                                  120
+    76. Teaching a horse to stand still without
+        being held                                    123
+    77. Teaching the young horse to jump              123
+    78. Third stage                                   124
+
+        RIDING AND RETRAINING AWKWARD HORSES.
+    79. General remarks                               126
+    80. Pullers                                       127
+    81. Refusers                                      128
+    82. Horses that rush at their fences              130
+    83. Horses that decline to leave the ranks and
+        “fretting” horses                             130
+    84. Horses that decline to stand still when
+        being mounted                                 131
+    85. General vice and bad temper                   132
+    86. Refractory draught horses                     132
+
+        CARE AND DISPOSAL OF SADDLERY AND HARNESS.
+    87. Care of saddlery and harness                  133
+    88. Disposal of saddlery and harness in harness
+        rooms or stables                              134
+    89. Disposal of saddlery and harness in bivouac   135
+
+        CARE OF WAGONS.
+    90. General instructions                          136
+
+        LOADING A WAGON OR CART.
+    91. General instructions                          136
+
+        SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTAIN ARTILLERY.
+    92. Position of driver                            137
+    93. Fitting saddlery of ordnance mules            138
+    94. Training young mules                          139
+    95. Leading mules                                 140
+
+            CHAPTER IV.
+              GUNNERY.
+
+    96. General instructions                          142
+    97. Gunnery terms                                 142
+    98. Natures of artillery fire                     144
+    99. Gunnery                                       145
+    100. Rifling                                      147
+    101. Centring                                     147
+    102. Forces acting on a shell in the bore         148
+
+         FORCES ACTING ON A SHELL DURING FLIGHT.
+    103. The resistance of the air                    148
+    104. The force of gravity                         149
+    105. Trajectory                                   151
+    106. Elevation                                    151
+    107. Causes affecting the accuracy of shooting    154
+
+         AMMUNITION.
+    108. Cordite                                      155
+    109. Lyddite shell                                157
+    110. Shrapnel shell                               157
+    111. Star shell                                   161
+    112. Time and percussion fuzes                    161
+    113. Fuze indicator                               162
+    114. Range tables                                 166
+
+           CHAPTER V.
+             LAYING.
+
+    115. General instructions                         172
+    116. Direct laying                                173
+    117. Indirect laying                              175
+    118. Angle of sight                               176
+    119. Deflection                                   178
+    120. Aiming points                                181
+    121. Clearing the crest                           181
+    122. Parallelism of lines of fire                 182
+    123. Displacement                                 186
+    124. Gun layers and fuze setters                  190
+
+            CHAPTER VI.
+           MOUNTED DRILL.
+
+    125. General instructions                         191
+    126. Falling in for parade                        194
+    127. Intervals and distances                      195
+    128. Frontages and depths                         196
+    129. Posts of officers, N.C.Os., etc.             197
+    130. Commands and signals                         201
+    131. Leading and dressing                         206
+    132. Wheeling                                     207
+    133. Markers                                      208
+    134. The battery of horse artillery               209
+    135. The field battery                            213
+    136. The mountain battery                         214
+    137. The heavy battery                            214
+    138. Battery drill                                215
+    139. Brigade drill                                222
+
+                 CHAPTER VII.
+        EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY IN WAR.
+
+    140. General instructions                         227
+
+         CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY.
+    141. Field guns                                   227
+    142. Field howitzers                              228
+    143. Heavy artillery                              229
+    144. Mountain artillery                           229
+
+         PRINCIPLES OF EMPLOYMENT.
+    145. Objects of fire                              230
+    146. Concealment                                  231
+    147. Economy of force                             232
+    148. Protection                                   234
+    149. Intercommunication                           235
+
+         CO-OPERATION OF AIRCRAFT WITH ARTILLERY.
+    150. Employment of aircraft                       238
+    151. Signalling from aircraft                     239
+    152. Signalling from the ground to aircraft       239
+
+         DUTIES OF DIVISIONAL ARTILLERY COMMANDER.
+    153. General instructions                         240
+
+         ARTILLERY IN ATTACK.
+    154. Action of the advanced guard artillery       245
+    155. Opening phase of the attack                  246
+    156. Second phase of the attack                   247
+    157. Third phase of the attack                    250
+
+         ARTILLERY IN DEFENCE.
+    158. General instructions and preliminary
+         measures                                     252
+    159. Opening phase of the defence                 255
+    160. Second phase of the defence                  256
+    161. Third phase of the defence                   257
+
+         COUNTER-ATTACKS.
+    162. Artillery support to local counter-attacks   258
+    163. Artillery support to the decisive
+         counter-attack                               258
+
+          ARTILLERY IN WOOD AND VILLAGE FIGHTING.
+    163A. The employment of artillery in
+                   wood fighting                      259
+    163B. Artillery in the attack and
+                   defence of villages                261
+
+         ARTILLERY IN NIGHT OPERATIONS.
+    164. General instructions                         261
+
+         ARTILLERY IN RETIREMENTS AND RETREATS.
+    165. Retirements                                  263
+    166. Rearguards                                   264
+
+         EMPLOYMENT OF HORSE ARTILLERY WITH CAVALRY.
+    167. General instructions                         265
+    168. Position on the march                        267
+    169. Escorts                                      267
+    170. The approach march                           268
+    171. The advance into action                      270
+    172. The fight                                    272
+    173. Pursuit or retreat                           273
+    174. Horse artillery with cavalry acting
+         dismounted                                   273
+    175. Horse artillery in a general engagement      275
+    176. Ammunition supply                            275
+
+         MOBILE ARTILLERY IN THE ATTACK AND DEFENCE
+            OF A FORTRESS.
+    177. The attack                                   276
+    178. The defence                                  277
+
+         ARTILLERY IN IRREGULAR WARFARE.
+    179. General principles                           278
+
+                CHAPTER VIII.
+               BRIGADE TACTICS.
+
+    180. General instructions                         280
+    181. Reconnaissance                               280
+    182. Leading                                      283
+    183. Ground scouts                                284
+    184. Occupation of a position                     286
+    185. Intercommunication service                   288
+    186. Allotting objectives and ranging             288
+    187. Observation and control                      290
+    188. Change of position                           291
+    189. Night firing                                 292
+
+                   CHAPTER IX.
+                 BATTERY TACTICS.
+
+    190. General instructions                         293
+    191. Preparation for action                       294
+    192. Reconnaissance of a position                 295
+    193. Methods of occupying a position              297
+    194. Orders                                       300
+    195. Advance for action                           302
+    196. To come into action                          303
+    197. Duties of officers, etc., in action          308
+    198. Laying out the line of fire                  310
+    199. Observation of fire                          316
+    200. Look-out men                                 319
+    201. Control of fire                              320
+    202. Methods of fire                              323
+    203. Location of targets from aircraft            324
+    204. Observation of fire from aircraft            325
+    205. Signals from and to aeroplanes               328
+    206. Observation of fire from kites               329
+
+         RANGING.
+    207. General Instructions                         330
+    208. To find the elevation                        331
+    209. To find the fuze                             334
+    210. To find the line                             335
+
+         RANGING FOR HOWITZERS AND HEAVY GUNS.
+    211. General instructions                         336
+    212. Howitzers                                    336
+    213. Heavy batteries                              338
+
+         DISTRIBUTION OF FIRE.
+    214. General principles                           338
+    215. Searching                                    341
+    216. Sweeping                                     342
+    217. Change of target                             343
+
+         METHODS OF ENGAGING VARIOUS OBJECTIVES.
+    218. General instructions                         343
+    219. To register a zone                           344
+    220. Localities                                   344
+    221. Staffs                                       345
+    222. Cavalry                                      345
+    223. Artillery                                    346
+    224. Infantry                                     348
+    225. Machine guns                                 350
+    226. Aircraft                                     350
+    227. EXAMPLES OF RANGING                          351
+
+         CHANGE OF POSITION.
+    228. To advance                                   360
+    229. To retire                                    361
+
+         REPLACEMENT OF CASUALTIES.
+    230. Casualties on the move                       362
+    231. Casualties in action                         363
+
+              CHAPTER X.
+           AMMUNITION SUPPLY.
+
+    232. General instructions                         364
+    233. Ammunition supply within the battery         365
+    234. Replenishment of ammunition                  366
+    235. Brigade ammunition columns                   367
+    236. Divisional ammunition columns                370
+    237. Ammunition reserves on the line of
+         communication                                371
+
+              CHAPTER XI.
+           FIELD ENGINEERING.
+
+    238. Entrenching and concealing guns              373
+    239. Passage of obstacles                         377
+
+              CHAPTER XII.
+    RECONNAISSANCE DUTIES, RANGE-FINDING, AND
+            COMMUNICATION SERVICE.
+
+    240. General instructions                         380
+    241. Visual training                              381
+    242. Training in judging distance                 382
+    243. Training in observation                      383
+    244. Reports and sketches                         385
+
+         RANGE-FINDING.
+    245. General instructions                         388
+
+         SERVICE OF COMMUNICATION.
+    246. General system and principles                390
+    247. Internal communications                      391
+    248. External communications                      392
+
+              CHAPTER XIII.
+          MOVEMENTS AND QUARTERS.
+
+    249. Marches and march discipline                 394
+    250. Billets                                      396
+    251. Bivouacs                                     398
+
+         TRANSPORT OF ARTILLERY.
+    252. Transport by rail                            401
+    253. Slinging horses                              403
+    254. Slinging guns and vehicles                   407
+
+              APPENDIX I.
+    SYLLABUS OF TRAINING                              409
+
+              APPENDIX II.
+    PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN FIRING BLANK
+    AMMUNITION                                        411
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF PLATES.
+
+
+                                              To face
+                                                page.
+
+    Plate I.--Gunnery terms illustrated           144
+    Plate II.--Gunnery terms illustrated          144
+    Plate III.--Gunnery terms illustrated         144
+    Plate IV.--Protected observing station        376
+    Plate V.--Gun epaulment for shielded gun      376
+    Plate VI.--Gun pit for shielded gun           376
+    Plate VII.--Passage of obstacles              378
+    Plate VIII.--Passage of obstacles             379
+    Plate IX.--Panoramic sketch                   387
+    Plate X.--Range-Taker’s card                  387
+    Plate XI.--Temporary ramps                    402
+
+    INDEX                                         412
+
+    NOTE.--Amendments, other than minor corrections, are
+           indicated by a black line in the margin.
+
+
+
+
+FIELD ARTILLERY TRAINING.
+
+1914.
+
+
+
+
+DEFINITIONS.
+
+
+_Alignment._--The straight line on which a body of troops is formed, or
+is to form.
+
+_Base._--An alignment generally indicated by markers on which it is
+desired to form troops.
+
+_Base body._--That on which a formation is made, or on which the
+alignment is made at the halt, _e.g._, “base battery,” “base section.”
+
+_Battery._--A battery of horse, field or mountain artillery consists
+of two or three sections, each of two guns with their complement of
+ammunition wagons. In the case of heavy and territorial artillery as
+well as of most of the artillery of the Overseas Dominions a battery
+consists of two sections only.
+
+_Battery column._--A battery with the sections in open column.
+
+_Battery quarter column._--A battery with the sections in quarter
+column.
+
+_Brigade of artillery._--Two batteries of horse artillery or three
+batteries of field artillery, in each case with an ammunition column.
+
+_Change of front._--A new alignment facing to a new front.
+
+_Change of position._--A movement by which a body of troops moves
+altogether off its ground, either to the front, flank, or rear, and
+re-forms on a new alignment.
+
+_Close order._--The ordinary distance between front and rear rank when
+formed in line.
+
+_Column._--Bodies of troops formed one in rear of another. When they
+are at a distance from one another equal to their own frontage plus
+interval, if any, the formation is known as “open column.”
+
+_Column of batteries._--Batteries in open column.
+
+_Column of masses._--Two or more artillery brigades in open column,
+each formed in mass.
+
+_Column of sections._--A formation used in brigade drill, when all the
+sections are in open column.
+
+_Column of subsections._--A column of single guns, each with a wagon
+right or left of it, at full interval unless otherwise ordered.
+
+_Column of route._--A column of single carriages.
+
+_Covering._--The act of a body placing itself correctly in rear of
+another.
+
+_Deploying interval._--The interval between columns necessary to enable
+them to form line to the front.
+
+_Deployment._--The formation of line from column.
+
+_Depth._--The space occupied by a body of troops from front to rear.
+
+_Directing body._--The body on which the direction, pace and alignment
+of a line, or the direction, pace and relative positions of the several
+parts of a column or échelon depend.
+
+_Distance._--The space between men or bodies of troops from front to
+rear.
+
+_Divisional line of masses._--A line of two or more artillery brigades
+each formed in mass at deploying interval.
+
+_Divisional mass._--A divisional line of masses at 25 yards interval.
+
+_Double échelon._--A form of échelon in which the centre body is in
+advance with other bodies on its right and left rear.
+
+_Dressing._--The act of taking up an alignment correctly or of
+maintaining that alignment on the move.
+
+_Échelon._--Échelon when used with reference to drill signifies a
+formation of successive and parallel units facing the same way, each on
+a flank and to the rear of the unit in front of it. “Échelon” is when
+the units are at wheeling distance, and “short échelon” when they are
+at 20 yards distance.
+
+_File._--A front rank man with his coverer.
+
+_Firing battery._--Six guns and 6 ammunition wagons, except in the case
+of 4-gun batteries, when it consists of 4 guns and 4 wagons.
+
+In mountain artillery the firing battery consists of the mules carrying
+the various portions of the gun and carriage, and 2 ammunition mules
+per subsection, 1 pioneer mule per section, 1 mule for telephone
+equipment, and relief mules for the gun and carriage complete of one
+subsection.
+
+_First line wagons._--Those battery ammunition wagons not included in
+the firing battery.
+
+In mountain artillery the first line mules are those battery ammunition
+and relief mules not included in the firing battery.
+
+_Fixed pivot._--The term applied to the pivot when, during a wheel, the
+pivot man is halted and turns upon his own ground.
+
+_Flank._--Either side of a body of troops; also the direction to either
+hand of a body at right angles to its front.
+
+_Fours._--Four front rank men with their coverers.
+
+_Front._--The direction towards which a body of troops, or a single
+man, is facing; in a general sense, the direction of the enemy.
+
+_Frontage._--The extent of ground covered laterally by troops.
+
+_Ground scouts._--Men employed to ascertain whether the ground in the
+immediate vicinity is passable for artillery.
+
+_Half-section._--Two front rank men with their coverers.
+
+_Horse-length_--A term of measurement (8 feet).
+
+_Horse-width._--A term of measurement (3 feet), which includes 3 inches
+outside the rider’s knee on either side.
+
+_Inclining of carriages._--A movement in which each carriage of a
+subsection makes a half-wheel independently on its own ground.
+
+_Inner flank._--The flank which serves as a pivot when a body is
+changing its direction.
+
+_Interval._--The space between men or bodies of troops from flank to
+flank.
+
+_Line._--Bodies of troops formed on the same alignment.
+
+_Line of battery columns._--Battery columns in line at deploying
+interval.
+
+_Line of columns._--A line of two or more columns formed on the same
+alignment.
+
+_Look-out men._--Men specially detailed to assist the battery commander
+in watching the movements of the enemy and friendly troops, and in
+discovering new objectives.
+
+_Mass._--A line of battery columns at 25 yards interval.
+
+_Markers._--Men employed in certain cases to mark points on which to
+march.
+
+_Moving pivot._--The term applied to the pivot when, during a change of
+direction, the pivot man moves on the arc of a circle without halting.
+
+_Oblique march and inclining._--Movements by which ground is gained
+to the front and flank simultaneously, while a front parallel to the
+original alignment is maintained.
+
+_Outer flank._--The flank opposite to the inner flank.
+
+_Pace._--The denomination of different degrees of speed; also a
+measurement of distance (30 inches) on foot.
+
+_Parade line._--The line on which troops form for drill or for
+ceremonial purposes.
+
+_Parade movements._--The movements laid down for the inspection of a
+body of troops.
+
+_Patrols._--A party of men detached for any purpose, such as to
+reconnoitre, to prevent surprises, to report fire effect, to pick out
+and report favourable targets, or to keep a commander informed of
+movements of either side.
+
+_Pivot._--The flank on which a body wheels. The man on that flank is
+the “pivot man,” or simply the pivot.
+
+_Quarter column._--Batteries in column at 12 yards, sections in column
+at 6 yards, distance from one another. When at full interval, each gun
+has a wagon on its left at close interval.
+
+_Rank._--Two or more men in line side by side.
+
+_Scouts._--Selected men detached to obtain information of the enemy,
+country, supplies, &c.
+
+_Section._--A section consists of two subsections.
+
+_Serrefiles._--Officers, non-commissioned officers, and others whose
+posts are in rear of a battery when in line.
+
+_Shouldering._--Wheeling on a moving pivot.
+
+_Single file._--One front rank man or his coverer.
+
+_Subsection._--One gun, with its complement of men, horses, and
+ammunition wagons.
+
+_Taking ground to a flank._--A movement in which each carriage of a
+subsection wheels independently on its own ground.
+
+_Wheeling._--A movement by which a body changes direction on a fixed or
+moving pivot.
+
+
+_Special for Mountain Artillery._[1]
+
+_Subsection._--One gun with its complement of men and mules, divided
+into two parts called firing battery mules and first line mules.
+
+_Battery column._--A column of sections, in which the firing battery
+mules of each section follow each other in succession and are followed
+by the first line mules in the same order.
+
+_Column of route._--A column of single mules in which each subsection
+moves complete.
+
+_Column of sections._--A column in which each section moves complete.
+
+_Column of subsections._--A column of single mules, in which the
+mules of the firing battery of each subsection follow each other in
+succession and are followed by the first line mules in the same order.
+
+_Mule-length._--A term of measurement (6 feet).
+
+Width of a loaded ammunition mule = 4 feet.
+
+_Relief Mules._--For some of the more difficult loads a second mule is
+provided, which acts as a relief to the firing battery mule.
+
+[1] The mule is referred to as the normal pack animal with mountain
+batteries throughout this manual. The same principles are generally
+applicable to pack ponies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+PRINCIPLES OF TRAINING.
+
+
+=1.= _Object and method of training._
+
+1. The object of training is to fit all ranks for the performance of
+their duties in war. This volume deals with the general principles
+which govern the training in peace and leading in war of horse,
+field, mountain, and heavy artillery. It also forms the basis of the
+training of companies R.G.A. armed with movable armament (except 6-inch
+howitzers) for the defence of land fronts.
+
+2. The training must include both moral and physical instruction. The
+development of a soldierly spirit is needed to help the soldier to
+bear fatigue, privation and danger cheerfully; to embue him with a
+sense of honour; to give him confidence in his superiors and comrades;
+to increase his powers of initiative, of self-confidence, and of
+self-restraint; to train him to obey orders or to act suitably in their
+absence; to impress upon him that so long as he is physically capable
+of fighting, surrender to the enemy is a disgraceful act; and finally
+to produce such a state of discipline that each individual will perform
+his duty coolly and correctly in the stress of battle.
+
+The training of the body is required to develop the soldier’s capacity
+for resisting fatigue and privation, in order that he may always be fit
+to perform his duty.
+
+It is only after some development in these qualities of mind and
+body has been made by the individual that instruction in working
+collectively in the field should be undertaken.
+
+3. As soon as a man enters the service, every endeavour should be made
+to foster in him a soldierly spirit. Officers and non-commissioned
+officers must remember that it is chiefly by their example that the
+development of a soldierly spirit will be achieved.
+
+The soldier should be instructed in the deeds which have made the
+British Army and his own regiment famous, and as his education
+progresses simple lessons drawn from military history may be explained
+to him.
+
+The privileges which he inherits as a citizen of a great empire should
+be explained to him, and he should be taught to appreciate the honour
+which is his, as a soldier, of serving his King and country.
+
+4. The management, care, and handling of his gun and horse must always
+be the principal aim in the artilleryman’s training, but he must also
+have some knowledge of musketry and field engineering, either of which
+he may be called upon to employ in the course of a campaign.
+
+Drill is an essential factor of all training, in order to establish
+and maintain a mutual understanding between a commander and his
+subordinates.
+
+Mounted and dismounted games are also of value in teaching the
+importance of co-operation, discipline and determination. The greater
+number, therefore, that take part in such sports the better.
+
+It should be impressed on all ranks throughout their training that the
+sole object of the various courses of instruction is to fit them for
+their duties in war. By keeping this fact constantly in view training
+will develop on sound and practical lines.
+
+
+=2.= _Responsibility for training._
+
+_See also_ T. and M. Regs. Sec. =2=.
+
+1. Responsibility for the training of the troops committed to their
+charge rests on all commanders from those of sections upwards. Subject
+to the principles laid down in the various Training Manuals and
+Regulations, commanders are at liberty to employ such methods as appear
+best calculated to attain the desired end. Superior commanders while
+holding their subordinates responsible for the training of their
+units will never forego their functions of guidance and control, and
+will exercise a general and continuous supervision over their work.
+In carrying out this duty they must not curb the initiative of their
+subordinates or interfere unnecessarily so long as the training is
+conducted on sound lines.
+
+2. The importance of artillery being regularly trained to work with
+the other arms cannot be overestimated. It is the function of the
+divisional commander to afford the necessary opportunities to his
+batteries, when the divisional artillery commander reports that they
+are ready. (_See_ T. and M. Regs., Sec. =40= (6).)
+
+3. The divisional artillery commander is a subordinate commander and
+as such is responsible for the efficiency of the artillery of the
+division. (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part II, Sec. =9=.)
+
+It is his duty to superintend the tactical training of the artillery,
+to conduct the higher education of its officers, and to see that the
+principles laid down in the various training manuals for the guidance
+of the artillery are adhered to.
+
+4. The commander of an artillery brigade is responsible for the
+training and efficiency of his brigade and for supervising the
+instruction of his officers. He will also see that the numbers and
+efficiency of the officers, non-commissioned officers and men required
+for special duties are maintained in accordance with the regulations.
+(_See also_ Sec. =6= (6).)
+
+The commander of a reserve brigade, is responsible for the system of
+training the recruits as well as for the efficiency of the permanent
+cadres of the depôt and reserve batteries.
+
+5. The commander of a battery is responsible for the training and
+efficiency of his officers, non-commissioned officers, men and horses.
+He is also responsible that the equipment of his battery is complete
+and fit for service. He is assisted in these duties by the captain. A
+battery commander will hold his section commanders responsible for the
+training and efficiency of their sections, and also for the condition
+of the horses and equipment belonging to them to such an extent as
+he considers desirable. It should be his aim, while maintaining a
+general control, to develop the self-reliance and readiness to accept
+responsibility of all ranks.
+
+6. To qualify for the command of a section an officer should himself
+be capable of performing all the ordinary duties which his men may be
+called upon to undertake in the field.
+
+Young officers, before being dismissed drill, should therefore be
+capable of stripping and putting together a saddle, correctly saddling,
+bitting and turning out a horse in marching order, putting together
+the harness and harnessing a draught horse and driving in the centre,
+lead or wheel. He should also have a thorough knowledge of the gun, its
+equipment and ammunition, the system of laying and of the duties of the
+various numbers.
+
+When qualified they should personally train their own section to take
+its place in the battery, making the most of the opportunities thus
+afforded to study the characters of their men, to find out the special
+qualifications of each and to gain their confidence.
+
+
+TRAINING OF RECRUITS.
+
+=3.= _Preliminary training of recruits._
+
+1. The training of the recruit will commence as soon as he joins the
+depôt or training brigade. As it is here that the foundation of his
+military education is laid, great importance attaches to the system of
+instruction adopted.
+
+The daily programme of work should be varied so as to avoid monotony
+with its consequent loss of interest.
+
+A syllabus of training is given in Appendix I. This syllabus can only
+be taken as a guide since weather and other conditions will often make
+it impossible to carry out the programme laid down.
+
+2. A practical character should be given to the instruction from the
+beginning. Officers and non-commissioned officers should themselves
+show the proper position or way to do whatever they are teaching: for
+it is much easier to learn when the eye assists than when the ear alone
+is the medium of instruction.
+
+3. The language used should be as simple as possible and technical
+terms which are necessary must be carefully explained. Questions which
+admit of a simple answer should frequently be asked, but attempts
+to extract long parrot-like quotations from drill-books should be
+forbidden. Every encouragement should be given to recruits to take an
+interest in all details connected with their work and to question their
+instructors on any points they do not understand.
+
+The attainments of recruits on joining are to be noted and all should
+be encouraged to attend school until they obtain a second-class
+certificate.
+
+4. Recruits should be formed for instructional purposes in squads; the
+number of men in each squad should not exceed ten. It may be advisable
+to rearrange the squads periodically, so that the more intelligent men
+may not be kept back by those of inferior ability.
+
+Recruits should be called out in turn to drill when they have
+progressed sufficiently, for this gives a man confidence, helps him to
+learn, and causes him to take additional interest in his work.
+
+5. The squad instructors must be carefully selected and should, if
+possible, receive some previous training as instructors at the depôt.
+They must be firm, but patient, making allowances for the different
+capacities of the men, and it will be of advantage if the same
+instructors remain with the same squads throughout their course.
+
+An instructor should place himself where he can be seen and heard by
+all in the squad, should stand in a smart, soldierlike attitude, and
+should avoid pacing up and down, looking down on the ground, turning
+his back to the squad, and similar habits, which fidget the men and
+distract their attention. His explanations should be given in a
+distinct voice; his word of command should be sharp and decisive.
+
+6. Alertness of attitude and smartness of movement should be enforced
+throughout all drill; but while details or explanations of drill and
+equipment are being given, squads should be allowed to stand easy.
+
+7. The recruits course will consist of instruction in the following
+subjects:--
+
+                  _All recruits._
+     i. Physical training. (_See_ Manual of Physical Training.)
+     ii. Foot drill.
+    iii. Rifle exercises, and Musketry exercises.
+            (Musketry Regulations, Part I.)
+     iv. The use of cordage, tackles, knots, &c.
+      v. Semaphore signalling.
+
+                  _Gunners._
+     vi. Gun drill and elementary gunnery.
+     vii. Laying, fuze setting.
+    viii. Visual training.
+
+                  _Drivers._
+    ix. Fitting, cleaning and disposal of harness.
+     x. Stable management.
+
+                   _Boys._
+     xi. Signalling (flag, lamp and helio).
+    xii. Map reading.
+
+8. In addition to short lectures connected with the above, others
+should be given on the following subjects, illustrated whenever
+possible, by reference to incidents of actual warfare:--
+
+      i. Moral education, including patriotism, devotion to
+           duty, the soldierly spirit and self-respect.
+     ii. Interior economy and barrack duties, including the
+           organization of a battery; dress, clothing and its
+           care; names and ranks of superiors, &c.; regulations
+           and orders; leave and passes, hospital rules,
+           pay, promotion, school.
+    iii. Discipline: its object: punctuality, regularity and
+           obedience: saluting: method of making requests:
+           behaviour out of barracks: meaning of esprit de
+           corps, regimental motto, &c.
+     iv. Sanitation, its object and rules to follow: hints on
+           marching and care of feet, &c.
+
+Lectures should be given under the most comfortable circumstances to
+the hearers and use should be made of models and the blackboard, in
+order to engage and hold their attention and interest.
+
+9. No definite period for the course above outlined can be laid down,
+since it will depend on a number of varying circumstances, but it is
+considered that 12 weeks would be needed to give the average recruit a
+sound preliminary training. To enable his training in more important
+subjects to go on uninterruptedly after joining his unit, every effort
+must be made to complete that portion of the course which consists of
+physical training and marching drill.
+
+10. It should be impressed on recruits that their prospects of civil
+employment in after life depend on their conduct whilst in the army,
+that preference is given to such as have exemplary or very good
+characters, and that sobriety is a very important qualification for
+employment.
+
+
+4. _Recruit training in the battery._
+
+1. Recruits should, if possible, be posted to batteries in batches.
+Further training in the various subjects referred to in Sec. =3= will
+usually be necessary. The same instructors should, if possible, deal
+with the same subjects throughout this training and one officer should
+be specially charged with superintending the work and giving the class
+a series of lectures.
+
+2. During this period a careful watch should be kept for men who are
+likely to become useful non-commissioned officers, or who show an
+aptitude for any special duties; and every encouragement should be
+given them to improve themselves.
+
+
+THE ANNUAL TRAINING OF THE SOLDIER.
+
+=5.= _System of training._
+
+_See also_ T. and Man. Regs., Sec. =3=.
+
+1. The conditions in which the artillery is raised in different parts
+of the Empire vary so greatly that rigid adherence to any one system
+of training is impossible, but the methods described in the following
+pages should be followed as closely as circumstances allow.
+
+2. The training of the soldier must be progressive and continuous.
+
+With this object the training year will be divided into two periods,
+which will be devoted respectively to--
+
+     i. Individual training.
+    ii. Collective training.
+
+The object of individual training is to prepare the individual officer,
+non-commissioned officer or soldier for the duties which he will be
+required to carry out in war.
+
+The object of collective training is to render the sections, batteries
+and larger units and formations capable of manœuvre and co-operation in
+battle.
+
+3. Whatever periods are allotted for individual and collective training
+the instruction of individuals and units is not to be considered as
+limited to these periods respectively. Advantage must be taken of any
+opportunities which may arise for individual training during the period
+of collective training, and _vice versâ_. (_See_ T. and Man. Regs.,
+Sec. =7=.)
+
+4. It is undesirable to lay down fixed courses of training, and it
+will rest with commanders to design for themselves programmes for each
+training period which will ensure the necessary standard of efficiency
+being reached within the limits of time allowed.
+
+Under special circumstances, detailed instructions may be issued by
+higher authority for the training of subordinate commands. Detailed
+instructions should, however, be sparingly employed as they cramp
+initiative and increase rather than facilitate the work of subordinates.
+
+
+INDIVIDUAL TRAINING.
+
+_See also_ T. and Man. Regs., Chap. II.
+
+=6.= _General instructions._
+
+1. Individual training must be, as far as possible, progressive and
+uninterrupted.
+
+The success of each year’s collective training will largely depend
+on the care and attention devoted to the individual training which
+precedes it.
+
+2. Leave and furlough should, if possible, be so arranged that each
+battery is at full strength for a period, or periods amounting in
+all to not less than 24 working days. When this is not possible, the
+application of this rule may be limited to the section. During this
+period or periods the battery or section should be struck off duty
+in order to allow its commander to carry out a complete and thorough
+course of individual training for his officers and men.
+
+3. Short lectures, practically illustrated, form one of the best means
+of imparting instruction and are also of value in educating officers
+and non-commissioned officers to express themselves in clear and simple
+terms.
+
+4. Individual training comprises:--
+
+       i. Instruction of officers in professional duties (King’s
+            Regulations, and T. and Man. Regs., Chap. II).
+      ii. Instruction of non-commissioned officers and men
+            likely to become non-commissioned officers in the
+            duties which they may be called upon to perform.
+     iii. Reconnaissance duties.
+                  (Secs. =240-244= and F.S. Regs., Part I.)
+      iv. Range-finding. (Sec. =245=.)
+       v. Intercommunication duties. (Sec. =246-248=.)
+      vi. Physical training and marching drill.
+     vii. Gun drill, laying, and fuze setting.
+    viii. Equitation. (Chap. III.)
+      ix. Musketry.
+       x. Training of eyesight and observation, and in judging
+            distances. (Secs. =241-243=.)
+      xi. Semaphore signalling for captains, subalterns, and
+            non-commissioned officers, and at least 20% of the
+           gunners and drivers.
+     xii. Practice, so far as means are available, or can be improvised,
+            in entraining and embarking guns and horses,
+            and in slinging horses, vehicles and stores which form
+            part of their war equipment. (Secs. =252-254=.)
+
+5. In addition, lectures on the following should also be included:--
+
+     i. The principles of artillery tactics, ammunition supply,
+          the employment of artillery in war in conjunction
+          with the other arms and the general characteristics
+          of those arms.
+    ii. The care of horses, saddlery, and equipment and
+          stable management, combined with practical
+          illustration. (_See_ Animal Management.)
+
+6. The instruction in signalling, range-finding and reconnaissance
+duties should be carried out under the direct instructions of the
+brigade commander, who will also supervise the training of the officers
+in professional duties.
+
+
+COLLECTIVE TRAINING.
+
+_See also_ T. and Man. Regs., Chap. III.
+
+=7.= _Section training._
+
+1. At the commencement of battery training each section will be trained
+in the field under its own section commander to such an extent as the
+battery commander considers desirable. For this purpose one or two
+sections, as convenient, can be lent the horses and carriages of the
+remainder, the latter being meanwhile trained in dismounted work, gun
+drill, laying, fuze setting, semaphore signalling, &c. Arrangements
+should be made so that every man may be trained with his own section
+during this time.
+
+2. The battery commander will personally supervise the section
+commanders and thus ensure that each section is fit to take its place
+in the battery.
+
+The period of section training offers a convenient time for the
+education of the battery headquarters by the battery commander or
+captain.
+
+
+=8.= _Battery training._
+
+1. To ensure efficiency in the command of a battery it is essential
+that its training should be devoted to foreseeing and removing all
+possible causes of friction between its component parts.
+
+2. Each battery should be struck off duty for at least 36 days
+(inclusive of section training). It will seldom be possible for these
+to be consecutive, but the brigade commander is responsible for making
+the best arrangements possible for the general good of his command.
+
+3. The chief points to which the battery commander should devote his
+attention are:--
+
+      i. Fire discipline.
+     ii. Supply and replenishment of ammunition.
+    iii. Internal communication in the battery and co-operation
+           between the various members of battery headquarters.
+     iv. Fire tactics (the selection, occupation and preparation
+           of positions and co-operation with the other arms).
+      v. Field engineering. (_See_ M.F.E. and Secs. =238=, =239=.)
+
+4. At first it will often be advisable to take out only the officers,
+senior non-commissioned officers and parties required for observation
+and communication. When these individuals have got to know their work
+and to understand each other, the whole battery can be taken out.
+
+Parties may with advantage be sent out to the positions against which
+the guns are to come into action to note where and when any of the
+personnel or material of the battery are exposed to view, and to form
+targets for the guns. By such means the men will be enabled to see the
+mistakes made, and learn to avoid them.
+
+5. The difficulties which attend the supply of ammunition in the field
+make it important that each battery should practise it with its full
+number of wagons as often as possible. In order to do this arrangements
+should be made to place the horses of the brigade at the disposal of
+each battery in turn.
+
+6. Before the training of the battery is finished an opportunity of
+bivouacking for 24 hours should be obtained. It will be of advantage if
+the site selected affords facilities for practising swimming horses,
+entrenching and the passage of obstacles.
+
+If arrangements can be made for issuing flour and live stock, useful
+training in the preparation of rations under active service conditions
+may be gained.
+
+7. All training, other than formal parades, carried out beyond the
+precincts of barracks, whether other arms are present or not, should
+be based on some simple tactical scheme, which should be explained to
+all ranks beforehand.
+
+
+=9.= _Brigade training._
+
+1. As soon as the batteries have completed battery training they will
+be inspected by their brigade commander, after which the training of
+the brigade should commence.
+
+Each brigade should be at the disposal of its commander for at least 18
+working days.
+
+2. The object of brigade training is to fit the brigade to take
+part, either alone or as part of a larger force of artillery, in any
+operation involving the employment of other arms.
+
+To achieve this object training in the following is necessary:--
+
+      i. The selection, and change of positions and of objectives
+           in accordance with the tactical plan.
+     ii. The concentration and distribution of fire in accordance
+           with the progress of the fight, and the
+           procedure to be adopted to carry out these objects.
+    iii. Co-operation with the other arms, and intercommunication
+           between the artillery brigade commander,
+           his batteries and ammunition column, and also
+           between the artillery brigade commander and the
+           divisional artillery commander and subordinate
+           infantry commanders.
+
+3. If arrangements cannot be made to carry out tactical training with
+the other arms (_see_ Sec. =2= and T. and Man. Regs. Secs. =40= and
+=42=) the action and effect of those arms must be considered in the
+solution of tactical problems.
+
+
+=10.= _Annual practice._
+
+1. The object of the annual course of gun practice is two-fold, viz.:--
+
+     i. To instruct all ranks in the application in the field of the
+          approved principles of gunnery and artillery tactics
+          with service ammunition.
+    ii. To accustom commanders to acquire the habit of appreciating
+          a situation quickly and correctly, of arriving
+          at an immediate decision, of translating that decision
+          into suitable orders and of ensuring their intelligent
+          and rapid execution.
+
+2. The schemes on which the tactical practice is based should deal with
+problems such as would be likely to confront a commander in war. These
+schemes for batteries and brigades of divisional artillery will be
+drawn up by the divisional artillery commander in consultation with the
+general staff officer of the division. Schemes for larger formations
+will be prepared by the general staff officer of the division under the
+direction of the divisional commander.
+
+In the case of horse artillery the camp commandant will draw up the
+schemes for tactical practice in consultation with the inspector of
+cavalry. In the case of heavy artillery and unallotted brigades of
+field artillery the tactical schemes will be prepared by the camp
+commandant.
+
+The divisional commander will, whenever possible, be present at the
+tactical practice of his divisional artillery and act as director of
+the operations, assisted by the commandant, who is the divisional
+artillery commander in the case of batteries and brigades of divisional
+artillery. The commandant will act as director in the absence of the
+divisional commander.
+
+The director or assistant director will give out the schemes and,
+if he himself is acting as the commander of the force engaged, will
+explain the tactical situation and will issue such orders as he would
+in war. Should the divisional commander so desire, a senior officer of
+another arm may be placed in command, in which case he will describe
+the situation and issue his orders. Before doing so he should be made
+fully acquainted with the lessons which the director wishes to teach,
+and with any limitations imposed by range conditions.
+
+3. It is the duty of practice camp commandants to record the state of
+efficiency of the various batteries and brigades, to bring to notice
+matters affecting the efficiency of the equipment and to report on the
+suitability for war of the technical methods employed.
+
+4. Accurate observation of fire is of very great importance. Practice
+camp commandants should, therefore, make sure that officers and
+selected non-commissioned officers are given opportunities of watching
+as many series fired as possible.
+
+5. Further instructions for the conduct of practice are contained in
+“Instructions for Practice, Horse, Field, and Heavy Artillery.”
+
+
+=11.= _Divisional artillery training._
+
+1. Divisional artillery training will generally take place between the
+annual practice and divisional training, and under the supervision of
+the divisional commander who will decide the duration and locality of
+the training.
+
+2. During this period attention will first be devoted to perfecting
+the methods by which orders are issued to brigades, and communication
+maintained between them and the commander of the divisional artillery
+and to the reconnaissance and selection of artillery positions.
+
+It will not always be necessary to take out the batteries in the
+earlier stages of the training as much of the work in connection
+with the above can be carried out by the headquarters of divisional
+artillery and of brigades and batteries working together under the
+divisional artillery commander.
+
+3. Subsequently, schemes, in which the whole divisional artillery will
+take part, should be framed to illustrate definite points in connection
+with the tactical employment of artillery in various situations, the
+higher command of artillery in battle, the allotment of zones or tasks,
+the application of fire, and the replenishment of ammunition.
+
+The other arms should usually be associated with the divisional
+artillery in working out these schemes. Infantry may be utilised for
+the purpose of showing in skeleton the positions and movements of that
+arm in a scheme designed principally for the training of the divisional
+artillery. When units are not available officers of other arms should
+be attached for the purpose of stating the action that would be taken
+by their arms.
+
+Occasionally the artillery of a division may carry out exercises
+independently of the other arms, but in such cases the effect which the
+presence of other troops would have on the operations must never be
+ignored.
+
+
+=12.= _Training of Special Reserve and Territorial Artillery and of the
+artillery of the Overseas Dominions._
+
+1. The annual training should be earned out on the same principles as
+have been indicated above for the Regular Forces. It is not possible
+for citizen forces, in the limited time at their disposal, to carry
+out the whole course. The perfecting of the battery as the fire unit
+should be the principal object kept in view. Beyond this officers,
+senior non-commissioned officers and battery headquarters should be
+instructed, both with respect to their battery duties and also as
+part of a brigade, for which purposes the presence of the batteries
+themselves is not essential.
+
+2. The training of the Special Reserve should be devoted to fitting
+individuals to take a place in the battery suited to their special
+qualifications. Thus any men who show aptitude as layers, signallers,
+&c., should be encouraged to perfect themselves so far as the time
+available for their training will allow.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+DISMOUNTED DRILL WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.[2]
+
+
+SQUAD DRILL WITH INTERVALS.
+
+=13.= _General instructions._
+
+1. Instruction can be imparted most easily to a squad in single rank. A
+squad of recruits should, therefore, be placed in single rank at arm’s
+length apart; but if want of space makes it necessary, the squad may
+consist of two ranks, in which case the men of the rear rank will cover
+the intervals between the men in the front rank.
+
+2. At first recruits may be placed in position by the instructor,
+afterwards they should not be touched, but made to correct themselves,
+when faults are pointed out. The instructor should teach as much as
+possible by illustration, performing the movements himself, or making a
+smart recruit perform them.
+
+[2] Heavy and mountain artillery drill as laid down for infantry.
+
+Recruits will be advanced progressively from one exercise to another,
+men of inferior capacity being put back to a less advanced squad.
+
+When the various motions have been learnt, instruction by numbers will
+cease.
+
+3. Commands which consist of one word will be preceded by a caution.
+The caution, or cautionary part of a command will be given deliberately
+and distinctly; the last or executive part which, as a rule, should
+consist of only one word or syllable will be given sharply. A pause
+will be made between the caution and the executive word.
+
+When the formation is moving, executive words will be completed as
+the men begin the pace which will bring them to the spot on which the
+command is to be executed. The caution must be commenced accordingly.
+
+Young officers and non-commissioned officers should be frequently
+practised in giving words of command.
+
+4. In the following sections the various words of command are printed
+in small block capitals, the cautionary part of the command being
+separated from the executive part by a stroke thus--
+
+=14.= _Position and movements at the halt_.
+
+    1. _The position_       Heels together and in line. Feet turned
+       _of attention._      out at an angle of about 45 degrees. Knees
+                            straight. Body erect, and carried evenly
+    ATTENTION.              over the thighs with the shoulders (which
+                            should be level, and square to the front)
+                            down and moderately back--this should
+                            bring the chest into its natural forward
+                            position, without any straining or
+                            stiffening. Arms hanging easily from the
+                            shoulders as straight as the natural bend
+                            of the arm, when the muscles are relaxed,
+                            will allow, but with the hands level with
+                            the centre of the thighs. Wrists straight.
+                            Palms of the hands turned towards the
+                            thighs, with the heel of the hand and the
+                            inside of the finger tips lightly touching
+                            them, fingers hanging naturally together
+                            and slightly bent. Neck erect. Head
+                            balanced evenly on the neck, and not poked
+                            forward, eyes looking their own height and
+                            straight to the front.
+
+                            The weight of the body should be balanced
+                            on both feet, and evenly distributed
+                            between the fore part of the feet and the
+                            heels.
+
+                            The breathing must not in any way be
+                            restricted, and no part of the body should
+                            be either drawn in or pushed out.
+
+                            The position is one of readiness, but
+                            there should be no stiffness or forced
+                            unnatural straining to maintain it.
+
+    2. _To stand_           Keeping the legs straight, carry the left
+       _at ease._           foot about one foot-length to the left so
+                            that the weight of the body rests equally
+    STAND AT--EASE.         on both feet, at the same time carry the
+                            hands behind the back and place the back of
+                            one hand in the palm of the other, grasping
+                            it lightly with the fingers and thumb, and
+                            allowing the arms to hang easily at their
+                            full extent. (It is immaterial which hand
+                            grasps the other.)
+
+    3. _To stand easy._     The limbs, head and body may be moved, but
+                            the man will not move from the ground on
+    STAND--EASY.            which he is standing
+
+                             _Note._--Troops “_standing easy_” who
+                             receive a caution such as “_squad_,”
+                             “_section_,” &c., will assume the
+                             position of “_stand at ease_.”
+
+    4. _Dressing a squad_
+       _by the flank._
+
+    EYES--RIGHT              On the word “_Right_” the head will be
+    (_or_ LEFT).             turned, and the eyes directed to the right.
+
+
+        DRESS.          On the word “_Dress_,” each recruit, except
+                        the right-hand man, will take up his dressing in
+                        line by moving, with short quick steps, until he
+                        is able to see the lower part of the face of the
+                        second man from him, taking care to keep his
+                        body in the position of attention.
+
+                        At the same time, all but the right-hand man
+                        will extend their right arm, back of the hand
+                        up, finger tips just touching the shoulder of
+                        the man on their right.
+
+    EYES--FRONT.        On the word “_Front_” the head and eyes
+                        will be turned smartly to the front, and the
+                        arm dropped, and the position of attention
+                        resumed.
+
+    5. _The turns._     Keeping both knees straight and the body
+                        erect, turn to the right on the right heel
+                        and left toe, raising the left heel and right
+                        toe in doing so.
+
+    RIGHT TURN--ONE.    On the completion of this preliminary
+                        movement, the right foot must be flat on
+                        the ground and the left heel raised, both
+                        knees straight and the weight of the
+                        body, which must be erect, on the right
+                        foot.
+
+         TWO.           Bring the left heel smartly up to the right
+                        without stamping the foot on the ground.
+
+    LEFT TURN--ONE.     Turn to the left, as described above, on
+                        the left heel and right toe, the weight of
+                        the body being on the left foot on the
+                        completion of the movement.
+
+         TWO.           Bring the right heel smartly up to the left
+                        without stamping the foot on the ground.
+
+    ABOUT--TURN         Turn fully about to the right, as described,
+    ONE.                for the “_Right turn_” by numbers.
+    TWO.
+
+As soon as the recruit understands the different motions he should be
+practised in performing these movements, judging the time.
+
+    =15.= _Saluting._
+
+    1. _Saluting_     Bring the right (left) hand smartly, with a
+    _to the front_    circular motion, to the head, palm to the
+     _by numbers._    front, fingers extended and close together,
+                      point of the forefinger touching the peak of
+    RIGHT (LEFT)      the cap in front of the right (left) eye, thumb
+    HAND--SALUTE      close to the forefinger, elbow in line and
+      ONE.            nearly square with the shoulder.
+
+      TWO.            Cut away the arm smartly to the side.
+
+    2. _Saluting_       On the word “_Salute_,” go through the two
+    _to the front_      motions described in para. 1 and, after a pause
+    _judging the time._ equal to two paces in quick time, cut away the
+                        arm.
+    RIGHT (LEFT)
+    HAND--SALUTE.
+
+             Recruits should also be practised in marching two or three
+             together, saluting points being placed on either side, and
+             the man nearest to the point giving the time.
+
+3. _Rules as to saluting._
+
+The salute will always be with the hand farthest from the person
+saluted.
+
+When a soldier passes an officer he will salute three paces before
+reaching him, and will lower the hand on the third pace after passing
+him. As the hand is brought to the salute, the head will be turned
+towards the person saluted; if carrying a whip, the soldier will place
+it smartly under the disengaged arm, cutting away the hand before
+saluting. If standing still, he will face the officer as the latter
+passes and salute.
+
+A soldier, if sitting when an officer approaches, will rise, stand
+at attention, and salute; if two or more men are sitting or standing
+about, the senior non-commissioned officer or oldest soldier will call
+the whole to “_Attention_,” facing the officer, and will alone salute.
+
+When a soldier addresses an officer, he will halt two paces from him
+and salute. He will also salute before withdrawing.
+
+When appearing before an officer in a room, he will salute without
+removing his cap.
+
+A soldier, without his cap, or when carrying anything other than his
+arms will, if standing still, come to attention, and face the officer
+as he passes; if walking without his cap or riding a bicycle, he will
+turn his head smartly towards the officer in passing him.
+
+A soldier when wearing a sword will salute with the right hand.
+Officers and soldiers passing troops with uncased colours will salute
+the colours, and the commander if senior to them. When passing a
+military funeral, they will salute the body.
+
+A soldier driving a vehicle will bring his whip to a perpendicular
+position, with the right hand resting on the thigh and turn his head
+smartly towards an officer when passing him.
+
+A soldier riding on a vehicle will turn his head smartly towards an
+officer when passing him.
+
+=16.= _Movements._
+
+1. Before the squad is put in motion, the instructor will take care
+that the men are square individually and in correct line with each
+other. Each soldier must be taught to move straight to his front by
+fixing his eye upon some object on the ground directly in front of him
+and then observing some nearer point in the same straight line, such as
+a stone or a tuft of grass. The two objects must be kept in line when
+he advances.
+
+2. The legs should be swung forward freely and naturally from the hip
+joints, each leg as it swings forward being bent sufficiently at the
+knee to enable the foot to clear the ground. The foot should be carried
+straight to the front and, without being drawn back, placed firmly upon
+the ground with the knee straight, but so as not to jerk the body.
+
+3. The body should be maintained as erect as possible, its relative
+position being as described for the position of “_Attention_,” well
+balanced over the legs and carried evenly forward without swaying from
+side to side, and with head erect.
+
+4. The aims must not be stiffened but should swing freely and naturally
+from the shoulders, the right arm swinging forward with the left leg
+and _vice versâ_. If the arms are swung in this way they will bend
+naturally at the elbow as they swing forward and will straighten as
+they swing back, the movement being free without being forced.
+
+5. _Length of pace._--In _slow_ and _quick time_ the length of pace is
+30 inches. In _stepping out_ it is 33 inches, in _double time_ 40, in
+_stepping short_ 21, and in the _side step_ 14 inches.
+
+6. _Time._--In _slow time_ 75 paces are taken in a minute. In _quick
+time_, and in the _side step_ 120 paces, and in _double time_ 180 paces
+are taken in a minute.
+
+        7. _Marching_
+        _in quick time._
+
+        QUICK--MARCH.       On the word “_March_,” the squad will
+                            step off together with the left foot, in
+                            quick time, observing the instructions
+                            contained in the previous paragraphs.
+
+        8. _The halt._
+                            The moving foot will complete its pace,
+        SQUAD--HALT.        and the other will be brought smartly up
+                            in line with it, without stamping.
+
+        9. _Stepping_       On the word “_Out_” the moving foot will
+          _out when_        complete its pace, and the soldier will
+          _marching_        lengthen the pace by 3 inches, leaning
+          _in quick_        forward a little but without altering the
+          _time._           time.
+
+                            _Note._--This step is used when a slight
+             STEP--OUT.     increase of speed, without an alteration of
+                            time, is required; on the command QUICK--MARCH,
+                            the usual pace will be resumed.
+
+        10. _Stepping_
+        _short when_
+        _marching_
+        _in quick time._    On the word “_Short_,” the foot advancing
+                            will complete its pace, after which each
+        STEP--SHORT.        soldier will shorten the pace by 9 inches
+                            until the command QUICK--MARCH is
+                            given, when the quick step will be resumed.
+
+        11. _Marking_      On the word “_Time_,” the foot then advancing
+            _time._        will complete its pace, after which the time
+                           will be continued, without advancing by
+           MARK--TIME      raising each foot alternately about
+                           six inches, keeping the feet almost
+                           parallel with the ground, the knees
+                           raised to the front, the arms steady
+                           at the sides, and the body steady. On
+                           the command FORWARD, the pace at which
+                           the men were moving will be resumed.
+
+        12. _Stepping_       On the word “_March_,” step back the
+           _back from_       named number of paces of 30 inches straight
+           _the halt._       to the rear, commencing with the left foot.
+
+        ----PACES           _Note._--stepping back should not exceed
+        STEP BACK--MARCH             four paces.
+
+
+      13. _The_           On the word “_March_,” step off with
+      _double march._     the left foot and double on the toes
+                          with easy swinging strides, inclining the
+                          body slightly forward, but maintaining its
+      DOUBLE--MARCH.      correct carriage. The feet must be picked
+                          up cleanly from the ground at each pace and
+                          the thigh, knee, and ankle joints must all
+                          work freely and without stiffness. The whole
+                          body should be carried forward by a thrust
+                          from the rear foot without unnecessary effort,
+                          and the heels must not be raised towards the
+                          seat but the foot carried straight to the
+                          front and the toes placed lightly on the
+                          ground. The arms should swing easily from the
+                          shoulders and should be bent at the elbow,
+                          the forearm forming an angle of about 135
+                          degrees with the upper arm (_i.e._, midway
+                          between a straight arm and a right angle at
+                          the elbow), fists clenched, backs of the hands
+                          outward, and the arms swung sufficiently clear
+                          of the body to allow of full freedom for the
+                          chest. The shoulders should be kept steady and
+                          square to the front and the head erect.
+
+        14. _Halting_
+           _from the_
+           _double march._
+
+          SQUAD--HALT.        As in para. 8, at the same time dropping
+                              the hands to the position of attention.
+
+       15. _Marking_
+          _time in_
+          _double time_
+          _from double_   On the word “_Time_,” act as in para. 11, the
+          _march._        arms and hands being carried as when marching
+                          in double time, but with the swing of the arms
+                          reduced.
+           MARK--TIME.
+
+        16. _Moving_
+          _to the right_
+          _or left by_
+          _the side step._
+
+        RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)
+         CLOSE--MARCH.
+          _or_--PACES
+        RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)
+         CLOSE--MARCH.
+
+                           On the word “_March_,” each man will carry
+                           his right foot 14 inches direct to the right,
+                           and instantly close his left foot to it, thus
+                           completing the pace; he will proceed to take
+                           the next pace in the same manner. Shoulders
+                           to be kept square, knees straight, unless on
+                           rough or broken ground. The direction must
+                           be kept in a straight line to the flank.
+
+        17. _Halting_         On the command “_Halt_,” which will be
+           _from the_         given when the number of paces has not been
+           _side step._       specified, the men will complete the pace
+                               they are taking, and remain steady.
+
+           SQUAD--HALT.       _Note._--Soldiers should not usually be
+                                       moved to a flank by the side step
+                                       more than twelve paces.
+
+      18. _Turning_          On the word “_Turn_,” each soldier will
+      _when on the march._   turn in the named direction, and move on at
+                             once, without checking his pace.
+        RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)  _Note._--A soldier will always turn to the
+           --TURN.              right on the left foot; and to the left
+                                on the right foot. The word TURN will be
+                                given as the foot on which the turn is
+                                to be made is coming to the ground; if
+                                it is not so given the soldier will move
+                                on one pace and then turn.
+
+            ABOUT--TURN.     On the word “_Turn_,” the soldier will turn
+                             right-about on his own ground in three beats
+                             of the time in which he is marching. Having
+                             completed the turn about the soldier will at
+                             once move forward, the fourth pace being a
+                             full pace.
+
+        RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)    On the word “_Incline_,” each soldier will
+           --INCLINE.        make a half-turn in the named direction and
+                             move forward diagonally.
+
+                             The soldier will turn in the original
+                             direction on the word FORWARD.
+
+
+SQUAD DRILL IN SINGLE RANK.
+
+=17.= _General instructions_
+
+1. Recruits will next be formed in single rank without intervals, each
+man occupying a space of 27 inches.
+
+2. When soldiers are on the alignment they have to occupy, they will
+except at the commencement of drill, or at ceremonial parades, take up
+their own dressing without orders. When a squad is halted each man will
+look towards the flank by which the squad was previously dressing with
+a smart turn of the head and commencing with the man nearest the flank
+will move up or back to his place. Each man will look to his front as
+soon as he has got his dressing.
+
+     3. _Numbering_    The squad will number off from the right
+        _a squad._     hand man, the right hand man calling out
+                       “one,” the next on his left “two,” and so
+     SQUAD--NUMBER.    on. As each man calls out his number he will
+                       turn his head smartly towards his left and at
+                       once turn to the front again.
+
+     4. _Proving._    Those ordered to prove stretch out their
+                      right hands to the full extent of the arm,
+                      palm of the hand to the left, fingers extended
+       EVEN (ODD)     and close together, thumb close to the forefinger,
+     NUMBERS--PROVE.  and in line with the top of the shoulder.
+
+     AS YOU WERE.     Those proving bring their right hands
+                      to the side, bending the elbow in so doing.
+
+     5. _Opening_     The odd numbers will take two paces forward;
+     _a squad to_     when the paces are completed the whole
+     _drill with_     squad will look to the flank ordered and
+     _intervals._     correct the dressing quickly, looking to the
+                      front as soon as the dressing is correct.
+    OPEN RANKS--MARCH.
+
+     6. _A squad
+        with intervals
+        closing to
+        single rank._
+
+    REFORM RANKS--MARCH.  The odd numbers will step back two paces,
+                          when the paces are completed the squad will
+                          dress.
+
+=18.= _Movements._
+
+1. _Marching in squad._
+
+The caution will be given “THE SQUAD WILL ADVANCE,” followed by the
+command “EYES RIGHT, QUICK--MARCH.” The man on the flank by which the
+dressing is ordered will take up a point to march on.
+
+During the march the shoulders must be kept square to the front, and
+the eyes kept off the ground, everybody moving at the same pace, and
+keeping their correct distances and intervals by uniformity of pace and
+an occasional glance towards the directing flank.
+
+The recruit will be practised in changing the pace, without halting,
+from quick to double, by the command, “DOUBLE MARCH.” On the command
+“QUICK MARCH,” the arms will be dropped to the usual position.
+
+The instructor will insure that the flank man selects two distant
+points to march on, and, before approaching the first, takes another in
+advance on the same line, and so on.
+
+    2. _The_        On the word “_Incline_,” the men will
+    _diagonal_      all turn half right together, and march
+    _march._        in that direction, each regulating his pace
+                    so that his own shoulders are parallel with
+                    the shoulders of the man on his right.
+
+    RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)
+      --INCLINE.
+
+       FORWARD.     On the word “_Forward_” every man will
+                    move forward together in the original
+                    direction.
+
+                 _Note._--If the incline is properly performed
+                          the squad after the word FORWARD will
+                          be parallel to its original position.
+
+3. _Wheeling._
+
+Recruits will first be taught to wheel from the halt, after which they
+will be instructed to wheel while on the march. It will be explained
+to the squad that, in wheeling, the flank which is brought forward is
+termed the outward flank; the other, the inward, or pivot, flank.
+
+The method of wheeling will be the same as laid down in Sec. =20= (3).
+
+4. _Movements by fours, half-sections, and single files._
+
+The above will be performed in accordance with the instructions given
+in Secs. =19= and =20=.
+
+    5. _Dismissing._    The squad will turn to the right, and, after
+                        a pause, break off quickly and leave the
+                        parade ground. If an officer is on parade the
+          DIS-MISS.     men will salute together as they break off.
+
+
+SQUAD DRILL IN TWO RANKS.
+
+=19.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The recruits, when thoroughly grounded in the foregoing
+instructions, will be practised on foot in two ranks, the rear rank
+at three paces distance from the front rank. The two ranks will be
+equalized, as far as possible, a blank file being, if necessary, the
+second from the left of the rear rank. The squad having been formed
+up, the instructor will give the command, “FROM THE RIGHT TELL OFF
+BY FOURS.” The man on the right of the front rank numbers himself
+1, the next man on his left 2, and so on to the fifth man, who then
+begins a fresh sequence by numbering himself 1. The same procedure is
+continued till the left flank is reached. As soon as the squad has
+finished telling off, the instructor will prove the flanks of four by
+the command, “FLANKS OF FOURS, PROVE.” Each number 1 and 4 in the front
+rank will then prove as described in Sec. =17= (4), as well as those
+who cover them in the rear rank.
+
+2. All movements and formations will be made from or on a named flank.
+When moving by fours, half-sections or files, if there should be an
+incomplete unit on the left, the files will open out to cover the front
+of the whole unit. Should the incomplete unit consist of only half the
+number of files in the full unit, or less, the rear rank will move up
+on the left of, and in line with its front rank.
+
+3. When on the move, increasing or decreasing the front on foot the
+pace is not increased, but the front or rear is ordered to mark time as
+necessary.
+
+4. N.C.Os. or more advanced recruits should be posted without coverers
+on the flanks of the front rank and the point of direction for dressing
+will be given to one or other flank as a rule. These men are termed
+flank guides and do not tell off.
+
+=20.= _Movements._
+
+    1. _The_        On the word “_March_” the whole squad
+     _march in_     moves off together at the pace ordered.
+     _line._
+                    The principles which regulate the march in
+                    line are:--
+
+    EYES RIGHT      (_a_) STRICT UNIFORMITY OF PACE.
+    QUICK (_or_     (_b_) Correct direction.
+    DOUBLE)--       (_c_) Correct intervals and distances without
+    MARCH.                crowding. Every man looking
+                          straight to the front, except
+                          for an occasional glance to the
+                          flank of direction.
+
+    2. _Inclining._    On the word “_Incline_,” each man turns
+                       half right (or left). The rear rank moves in
+    RIGHT (_or_        the same manner, regulating itself by the
+    LEFT)--            front rank, so that each individual would
+    INCLINE.           cover the corresponding front rank number
+                       if both were turned to the front.
+
+                       The flank guide of the directing flank
+                       having made the half turn, picks up a point
+                       on which to march, and moves forward at
+                       the original pace. The remainder of the men
+                       move parallel to him, preserving the same
+                       relative direction and position with regard
+                       to each other, as when the turn was first
+                       made.
+
+                       On the command FORWARD each man at
+                       the same instant turns to the former front
+                       when the frontage of the squad should be
+                       parallel to the original frontage. The incline
+                       should be employed for short distances only.
+
+    3. _Wheeling._     On the word “_Wheel_,” the inner flank
+                       guide marks time, glancing to the outer flank
+      RIGHT (_or_      and coming gradually round with his rank.
+      LEFT)--WHEEL.
+                       The outer flank guide glances inwards and
+                       quickens his pace, regulating his direction
+                       so as to maintain the same extent of front.
+                       Each front rank man keeps touch with the
+                       next man to him on the inner flank, glancing
+                       to the outer flank and increasing or decreasing
+                       his pace in accordance with the relative position
+                       which he occupies in the wheel.
+
+                       As soon as the front rank begins to wheel
+                       the rear rank men gain ground towards
+                       the outer flank by a combination of inclining and
+                       wheeling.
+
+                       The following are the words of command for
+                       the different degrees of wheel:--
+
+                    QUARTER RIGHT (_or_ LEFT). HALF RIGHT (_or_ LEFT).
+                    RIGHT (_or_ LEFT) WHEEL. THREE-QUARTERS
+                    RIGHT (_or_ LEFT) ABOUT. RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)
+                    ABOUT WHEEL.
+
+    4. _Decreasing_
+       _the front from_
+       _the halt._
+
+    ADVANCE IN       The right section of fours advances, followed
+    FOURS FROM       by the next on its left, which inclines
+    THE RIGHT        so as to cover the leading section. the
+    QUICK--MARCH.    remainder follow in succession.
+
+    ADVANCE IN       Nos. 1 and 2 of the right section, followed
+    HALF-SECTIONS    by their coverers advance and these in turn
+    FROM             are followed by nos. 3 and 4 and their
+    THE RIGHT        coverers. the remaining half-sections follow
+    QUICK--MARCH.    in succession inclining and covering the leading
+                     half-sections.
+
+    ADVANCE IN       No. 1 of the right section of fours advances,
+    SINGLE FILE      followed by his coverer. nos. 2, 3 and 4, followed
+    FROM THE         by their coverers move off in succession,
+    RIGHT.           inclining and covering the leading file. the
+    QUICK--MARCH.    remainder act similarly. If an advance from
+                     the left is ordered, the same rules as above
+                     will apply if left be substituted for right and
+                     Nos. 4, 3, 2, 1, for 1, 2, 3, 4.
+
+                     When done on the move the command
+                     REAR, MARK TIME, must be substituted for
+                     QUICK MARCH in the above words of command.
+
+                   _Note._--Each of the movements can be
+                           carried out in a similar manner from the
+                           left by substituting “_Left_” for “_Right_.”
+
+    5. _Increasing_
+        _the front._
+
+       _From single_
+         _files._
+
+    TO THE           The leading man advances 6 paces and halts,
+    HALT, FORM--     his rear-rank man moving up to his proper
+    HALF-SECTIONS.   distance and covering him; the remainder
+                     move up into line by inclining to the left.
+
+    _From_
+    _half-sections._
+
+    TO THE HALT,    The leading half-section advances 6 paces
+    FORM--FOURS.    and halts. those in rear conform as above.
+
+    _From fours._   The leading section of fours advances
+                    6 paces and halts. Those in rear conform as
+    TO THE HALT,    above.
+
+    FORM--SQUAD.    This command will also be used when it is
+                    required to form squad from Single Files or
+                    Half-Sections.
+
+                    If an advance from the left has been made
+                    and it is desired to increase the front, the
+                    same command as above will be given, but
+                    the files, &c., will move up on the right of
+                    those in front.
+
+                    When done on the move the command FRONT
+                    MARK TIME, must be substituted for the words,
+                    TO THE HALT, in the above commands.
+
+    6. _Formations_ On the word “_Right_ (or _Left_),” the leading
+    _to a flank._   body will wheel at once to the flank
+                    named, advance 6 paces and halt; those in
+                    rear advance until nearly opposite the inner
+    _Forming_       flank of the body next in front of them and
+    _squad to a_    then wheel and come up into the alignment.
+    _flank._
+                    In order to maintain the relative position
+    TO THE          of the numbers in each section of fours,
+    HALT,           “fours” must be formed before the order
+    FOURS--RIGHT    to wheel is given when advancing in single
+    (_or_ LEFT).    files or half-sections.
+
+    7. _Moving to_  A squad may be moved to either flank in
+    _a flank._      column of Fours, Half-sections, or Single
+                    Files.
+    FOURS
+    (HALF-SECTIONS  In each case on the word “_March_,” the men
+    _or_ SINGLE     of the front rank wheel in the required
+    FILES)          direction, followed by their rear rank men.
+    RIGHT (_or_     The remainder of the squad follow in succession.
+    LEFT).          A squad may be moved a short distance
+    QUICK--MARCH.   to a flank in file by the command RIGHT (_or_
+                     LEFT) TURN.
+
+
+8. _Formations to the rear._
+
+Formations to the rear are made when in single files, half-sections
+or fours by wheeling about, or when in line by wheeling fours
+about and then acting as described above. In these cases the
+first command will be FILES, HALF-SECTIONS _or_ FOURS--ABOUT,
+the wheel being carried out to the right on a fixed pivot.
+
+
+RIFLE DRILL.
+
+=21.= _General instructions._
+
+1. Recruits, before they commence the Rifle Exercises, are to be taught
+the names of the different parts of the rifle and the care of arms as
+laid down in the “Musketry Regulations,” Part I.
+
+2. The rifle exercises will not be performed at inspections, and will
+only be practised by formations larger than a squad for ceremonial
+purposes.
+
+3. Drilling by numbers should be restricted in the regular forces to
+the instruction of recruits, and should be curtailed as far as possible
+in the other forces.
+
+4. The recruit having learnt the rifle exercises by numbers, will be
+taught to perform them in quick time, the words of command being given
+without the numbers, with a pause of one beat of quick time between
+each motion.
+
+5. Squads with arms will be practised in the different marches and
+variations of step, described in the foregoing sections. During these
+practices, the closest attention must be paid to the position of each
+individual recruit.
+
+The disengaged arm will be allowed to swing naturally as described for
+marching in quick or double time without arms.
+
+6. The following instructions apply to the Short Lee-Enfield,
+Lee-Enfield, and Lee-Metford Rifle.
+
+
+=22.= _Rifle exercises._
+
+1. _Falling in with the rifle at the order._
+
+The recruit will fall in as described in Sec. =14= (1), with the rifle
+held perpendicularly at his right side, the butt on the ground, its toe
+in line with the toe of the right foot. The right arm to be slightly
+bent, the hand to hold the rifle at or near the band (with the L.E. or
+L.M. rifle near the lower band) back of the hand to the right, thumb
+against the thigh, fingers together and slanting towards the ground.
+The left arm in the position of attention.
+
+When each man has got his dressing he will _stand at ease_.
+
+
+     2. _Standing_    Keeping the legs straight, carry the left
+       _at ease_      foot about one foot-length to the left so that
+       _from the_     the weight of the body rests equally on both
+       _order._       feet, at the same time incline the muzzle of
+                      the rifle slightly to the front with the right
+     STAND AT--EASE.  hand, arm close to the side, the left arm to be
+                      kept in the position of _attention_.
+
+     3. _The_
+     _attention_
+     _from stand_
+     _at ease._
+
+     SQUAD--          The left foot will be brought up to the right
+     ATTENTION.       and the rifle returned to the order.
+
+     4. _The slope_
+     _from the order_
+     _and vice versâ._  Give the rifle a cant upwards with the right
+                        hand, catching it with the left hand behind
+                        the backsight, and the right hand at the
+     SLOPE              small of the butt, thumb to the left, elbow to
+     ARMS--ONE.         the rear.
+
+           TWO.       Carry the rifle across the body, and place it
+                      flat on the left shoulder, magazine outwards
+                      from the body. Seize the butt with the left
+                      hand, the first two joints of the fingers grasping
+                      the upper side of the butt, the thumb
+                      about one inch above the toe, the upper part
+                      of the left arm close to the side, the lower part
+                      horizontal, and the heel of the butt in line
+                      with the centre of the left thigh.
+
+            THREE.    Cut away the right hand to the side.
+
+     5. _The order_
+        _from the_
+        _slope._      Bring the rifle down to the full extent of
+                      the left arm, at the same time meeting it
+     ORDER            with the right hand just above the backsight
+     ARMS--ONE.       (at the lower band L.E. and L.M. rifle), arm
+                      close to the body.
+
+           TWO.       Bring the rifle to the right side, seizing it
+                      at the same time with the left hand just
+                      below the foresight, butt just clear of the
+                      ground.
+
+         THREE.       _Place the butt quietly on the ground_, cutting
+                       the left hand away to the side.
+
+     6. _The slope_
+     _from the  stand,_
+     _easy and vice versâ._
+
+     SQUAD            After taking up the positions of _stand at
+    SLOPE--ARMS.      ease_ and _the order_ in succession,
+                      the squad will slope arms as described in para. 4.
+
+                      The squad orders arms as described in para.
+     STAND--EASY. 5   and, after taking up the position of _stand at
+                      ease_, will stand easy.
+
+     7. _The present_
+     _from the slope,_
+     _and vice versâ._
+
+     PRESENT          Grasp the rifle with the right hand at
+     ARMS--ONE.       the small, both arms close to the body.
+
+           TWO.       Raise the rifle with the right hand perpendicularly
+                      in front of the centre of the body,
+                      sling to the left; at the same time place the
+                      left hand smartly on the stock, wrist on the
+                      magazine, fingers pointing upwards, thumb
+                      close to the forefinger, point of the thumb
+                      in line with the mouth; the left elbow to be
+                      close to the butt, the right elbow and butt
+                      close to the body.
+
+         THREE.       Bring the rifle down perpendicularly close
+                      in front of the centre of the body, guard to
+                      the front, holding it lightly at the full extent
+                      of the right arm, fingers slanting downwards,
+                      and meet it smartly with the left hand
+                      immediately behind the backsight, thumb
+                      pointing towards the muzzle; at the same time
+                      place the hollow of the right foot against the
+                      left heel, both knees straight. The weight
+                      of the rifle to be supported by the left hand.
+
+     SLOPE            Bring the right foot in line with the left
+     ARMS--ONE.       and place the rifle on the left shoulder as
+                      described in the second motion of the _slope_
+                      from the _order_.
+
+           TWO.       Cut away the right hand to the side.
+
+     8. _To trail_   By a slight bend of the right arm give the
+     _arms from_     rifle a cant forward and seize it at the point
+     _the order,_    of balance, bringing it at once to a horizontal
+     _and vice_      position at the right side at the full extent of
+     _versâ._        the arm, fingers and thumb round the rifle and
+                     behind the seam of the trousers.
+     TRAIL--ARMS.
+
+     ORDER--ARMS.    Raise the muzzle, catch the rifle at the
+                     band (with L.E. or L.M. rifle at the lower
+                     band) and come to the _order_.
+
+     9. _To_         Give the rifle a cant upwards with
+     _shoulder_      the right hand, catching it with the left hand
+     _arms_          in line with the elbow; at the same time
+     _from the_      slipping the second finger of the right hand
+     _order, and     inside the guard, close the first and second
+     _vice versâ ._  fingers on the magazine, thumb and remaining
+                     fingers pointing downwards; the upper part
+     SHOULDER--ARMS. of the barrel to rest in the hollow of the
+           ONE.      shoulder.
+
+           TWO.      Drop the left hand to the side.
+
+     ORDER--ARMS.   Take hold of the rifle with the left hand
+           ONE.     immediately below the band (with L.E. or
+                    L.M. rifle at the lower band), arm close to
+                    the body.
+
+           TWO.     Bring the rifle down in the left hand nearly
+                    to the ground, keeping the arm and rifle close
+                    to the body; then seize it with the right hand
+                    at the band (with L.E. or L.M. rifle at the
+                    lower band), drop the left hand to the side,
+                    and place the butt quietly on the ground at
+                    the _order_.
+
+     10. _To_
+     _shoulder arms_
+     _from the trail,_  Tightening the grasp of the right hand,
+     _and vice versâ._  bring the rifle to a perpendicular position,
+                        and hold it with the left hand in line with the
+     SHOULDER--ARMS.    elbow, then seize it with the right hand as at
+         ONE.           the _shoulder_.
+
+         TWO.           Drop the left hand to the side.
+
+        TRAIL--ARMS     Hold the rifle with the left hand in line with
+         ONE.           the elbow, arm close to the body.
+
+         TWO.           Take hold of the rifle with the right hand
+                        at the point of balance; then bring it down to
+                        the _trail_, at the same time dropping the left
+                         hand to the side.
+
+     11. _The short_
+     _trail._         Raise the rifle about three inches from the
+                      ground, keeping it otherwise in the position
+                      of the _order_.
+
+                      If standing with ordered arms, and directed
+                      to close to the right or left, to step back,
+                      or to take any named number of paces forward,
+                      men will come to the _short trail_.
+
+     12. _To_
+     _ground arms_
+     _from the order,_
+     _and vice versâ._  Place the rifle gently on the ground at the
+                        right side, magazine to the right. The right
+                        hand will be in line with the toe as it places
+     GROUND--ARMS.      the rifle on the ground. Then return smartly
+                        to the position of _attention_.
+
+     TAKE UP--ARMS.     Bend down, pick up the rifle and return to
+                        the _order_.
+
+     13. _Dismissing_.  The squad will turn to the right, and after
+                        a pause break off quietly and leave the parade
+         DIS-MISS.      ground with sloped arms.
+
+              _Note._--Arms will be sloped before the squad is dismissed.
+
+
+=23.= _Inspection of arms._
+
+1. When arms are inspected at the _port_ only, the officer will see
+that the wind-gauge is properly centred, the fine adjustment at its
+lowest point, the keeper screw and the screw on the right charger guide
+in proper position, and that the magazine platform works freely.
+
+Each soldier, when the officer has passed the file next to him, will,
+without further word of command, _ease springs_ and _order arms_ and
+_stand easy_.
+
+    2. _To port arms_
+     _for inspection_    Cant the rifle, muzzle leading, with the
+     _on parade from_    right hand smartly across the body, guard to
+     _the order._        the left and downwards, the barrel crossing
+                         opposite the point of the left shoulder, and
+                         meet it at the same time with the left hand
+                         close behind the backsight, thumb and fingers
+                         round the rifle, the left wrist to be opposite
+                         the left breast, both elbows close to the body.
+
+    FOR INSPECTION      Turn the safety catch completely over to
+    PORT--ARMS.         the front with the thumb or forefinger of the
+                        right hand (_Charger-loading Lee-Enfield rifle._
+                        Lower the safety catch with the thumb of the
+                        right hand). Pull out the cut-off if closed,
+                        first pressing it downwards with the thumb,
+                        then seize the knob with the forefinger and
+                        thumb of the right hand, turn it sharply
+                        upwards, and draw back the bolt to its full
+                        extent, then grasp the butt with the right
+                        hand immediately behind the bolt, thumb
+                        pointing to the muzzle.
+
+    3. _To ease_        Close the breech (with L.E. or L.M. rifle,
+    _springs and come_  the cut off should first be closed) press the
+    _to the order._     trigger, close the cut off by placing the right
+                        hand over the bolt and pressing the cut off
+                        inwards, turn the safety catch over to the rear,
+                        and return the hand to the small.
+    EASE--SPRINGS.
+                        Close the breech (with L.E. or L.M. rifle,
+    OR (_if the_        the cut off should first be closed), then turn
+    _magazine is_       the safety catch over to the rear and return
+    _charged_)          the hand to the small.
+    LOCK BOLT.
+     ORDER--ARMS--      Holding the rifle firmly in the left hand,
+                        seize it with the right hand at the band (with
+                        L.E. or L.M. rifle at the lower band).
+         ONE.
+
+         TWO.           As in the second motion of the _order_ from
+                        the _slope_.
+
+       THREE.           As in the third motion of the _order_ from
+                        the _slope_.
+
+    4. _To examine_     If it is necessary to examine arms, the men
+    _arms from_         will be cautioned to remain at the _port_.
+    _the position_      Both ranks will come to the position for
+    _for inspection._   loading (_see_ Musketry Regulations, Part I),
+                        with the muzzle so inclined as to enable
+                        the officer to look through the barrel, the
+    EXAMINE--ARMS.      thumb nail of the right hand being placed
+                        in front of the bolt to reflect light into
+                        the barrel.
+
+                     The soldier, when the officer has passed the
+                     next file to him, will act as detailed in para. 3.
+
+
+=24.= _Guards and compliments._
+
+1. When a soldier carrying a rifle passes or addresses an officer he
+will do so at the _slope_ and will salute by carrying the right hand
+smartly to the small of the butt, forearm horizontal, back of the hand
+to the front, fingers extended. The salute will begin and end at the
+same number of paces from the officer as when saluting without arms
+(_see_ Sec. =15= (3).)
+
+In passing an officer the soldier will always turn his head towards
+him, in the same manner as when unarmed.
+
+A soldier, if halted when an officer passes, will turn towards him and
+stand at the _order_.
+
+2. _Guards and sentries._--Guards, including reliefs, will march with
+sloped arms.
+
+Sentries, when saluting otherwise than by presenting arms, will halt,
+turn to the front, and carry the right hand to the small of the butt as
+directed in para. 1.
+
+Further instructions concerning guards and sentries are given in
+“Ceremonial.”
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+EQUITATION AND DRIVING.
+
+
+=25.= _Standard required of men and horses._
+
+1. The efficiency of horse and field artillery depends so largely on
+the riding of the men and on the training and condition of the horses
+that the maintenance of a high standard of equitation must be the aim
+of the commander of every unit.
+
+2. Horsemanship and horsemastership are as essential to success as
+good eyesight or a knowledge of gunnery. The development of a horse’s
+powers by means of a progressive course of physical training and by the
+adoption of uniform methods of control is as important as the training
+of a man to ride.
+
+3. Horsemastership is a necessary qualification for all artillery
+commanders, and horse-training should also be studied to ensure a high
+standard of equitation in a unit. Every section commander should be
+capable of instructing his men in horsemastership. In addition to being
+good military horsemen and instructors in riding, all officers must be
+able to train and direct the training of remounts.
+
+4. The qualifications of a good horseman from an artilleryman’s point
+of view, are as follows:--
+
+      i. He should have a strong seat, quite independent of the reins;
+         in this way alone can he have good hands.
+     ii. He must understand and be able to apply correctly the “_aids_”
+         by which the horse is controlled.
+    iii. He must be a good groom, have a practical knowledge of the care
+         of horses both in barracks and in the field, and must understand
+         how to detect and treat the minor ailments to which horses are
+         liable.
+     iv. He should be able to cover long distances on horseback
+         with the least possible fatigue to his horse.
+
+If a driver, he should be able to drive a pair of horses in any
+position in a gun team and make them do even work, without distressing
+them. He should also be able to get a fallen horse out of harness or
+out of a ditch.
+
+No mounted man who does not attain this standard can be considered a
+really efficient horseman.
+
+In every unit a limited number of men should be able to train an
+unbroken horse, and improve a badly-trained one.
+
+5. The requisites of a useful artillery horse are as follows:--
+
+      i. He must be a quiet ride, and capable of conveying a heavy
+          weight over long distances, without undue fatigue.
+     ii. Handy and quick in obeying the correct “_aids_.”
+    iii. Steady both in and out of the ranks or team and capable of
+         being ridden with one hand at any pace either in the company
+         of other horses or alone.
+     iv. Be a good jumper and ready to face water and swim.
+
+
+=26.= _Horsemastership._
+
+1. _General instructions._--The importance of being a good horsemaster
+should be impressed upon the mind of every recruit from the moment of
+his joining. He should understand that the efficiency of any body of
+mounted troops on service depends first and foremost on the condition
+of each horse, and that one tired horse in a gun team puts more work
+on the other five, and may necessitate extra weight being put on some
+other vehicle.
+
+This important part of the soldier’s education demands individual
+attention on the part of every battery officer and non-commissioned
+officer, and it is their duty to see that the principles of
+horsemastership are so thoroughly explained to each man that the care
+of his horse becomes a second nature.
+
+The recruit should receive careful instruction in the prevention and
+cure of the minor ailments of a horse, in his feeding and watering,
+and in his treatment on the march, in the field and in quarters. (_See
+also_ Animal Management.)
+
+2. _Watering._--Men should be impressed with the importance of watering
+their horses when opportunity offers, particularly on hot days. Many
+a horse has died on service through his rider not taking what proved
+to be the only chance of giving him water during a long day. Horses
+which are accustomed to be watered in buckets drink slowly at a shallow
+stream, and consequently they should be given plenty of time. They
+never suffer ill-effects from being watered when heated, unless they
+are put to very severe exercise soon after it or are left to stand and
+get chilled.
+
+All horses will benefit if water is available in their stalls.
+
+3. _Feeding._--Every opportunity should be taken when on service, or
+on a long march or field day to allow the horses to water and feed.
+Even a few mouthfuls of grass during a five minutes’ halt are worth
+consideration.
+
+4. _Weight off the back._--Even the lightest driver is a heavy burden
+(generally more than 11 stone including the saddle), and every minute
+that weight is removed from the horse’s back is a refreshing period of
+relief.
+
+Instructors should impress this on recruits by frequently making them
+dismount for a few minutes at a time, so that it may become second
+nature with them to dismount and walk a good deal, especially down
+hill, if they should be called upon to work alone at any time. It
+should hardly ever be necessary for a man to remain on his horse at the
+halt, except in the case of teams that may come under fire.
+
+5. _Off saddling._--The two most frequent causes of sore backs are:--i.
+continued friction on one spot; ii. the stoppage of the circulation by
+continued pressure. Either of these is liable to occur if the saddle is
+left on for hours without being shifted or the girths slackened.
+
+The “_off saddle_” can be effected very rapidly by all outriders and by
+horse artillery gunners if it be regularly practised. It is advisable
+in warm weather to do so once a day on the drill ground, or in the
+open county, whenever the horses are absent from their stables for
+any length of time. When the saddles are removed, the backs should be
+immediately hand-rubbed, slapped, or massaged by means of the flat of
+the hand for a few minutes, with steady pressure against the direction
+of the hair, in order to restore circulation. In cold weather, the
+girths should only be slackened, and the saddle shifted, as its removal
+may result in a chill.
+
+The horses of gun teams cannot readily be off saddled, but any
+opportunity for loosening their girths and shifting the saddles should
+be taken. Such action relieves the horses in the same way that the
+removal of a tight boot does a man.
+
+6. _Shoeing._--From the first men should be taught to pay attention to
+their horses’ shoes, both in stables and in the field. The least sign
+of a shoe loose or clinches broken or knocked up should be reported and
+put right without delay.
+
+A shoe lost in the field is a reflection on the man in charge of the
+horse as well as on the section commander, No. 1 and farrier.
+
+7. _Rolling in the sand._--Nothing rests a horse and freshens him up
+more than a good roll in the sand, and, when it can be arranged, a sand
+bath in barracks is most useful for teaching horses to roll in when
+sweating. The bath should be about 20 feet square, with sand 1 foot
+deep. A handful of sand poured over the back often induces a horse to
+lie down and roll. After rolling, any sand remaining on the horse’s
+back must be removed before he is again saddled.
+
+
+=27.= _Paces of the horse._
+
+1. The following are the regulation paces for drill and manœuvre:--
+
+      i. Walk 4 miles an hour, at which rate 117 yards are passed
+           over in 1 minute, or ¼ mile in 3 minutes 45 seconds.
+     ii. Trot 8 miles an hour, at which rate 235 yards are passed
+           over in 1 minute, or ¼ mile in 1 minute 52 seconds.
+    iii. Gallop is 12 miles an hour, at which rate 352 yards are
+           passed over in 1 minute.
+
+2. The canter, about 9 miles an hour, and the jog or slow trot, 6 miles
+an hour, should be constantly employed, both in teaching recruits to
+ride and in training young horses. Except in the case of artillery
+moving with infantry horses should always be made to walk up to the
+regulation pace of 4 miles per hour.
+
+3. In marching, especially along a road, and when men are riding singly
+or in small groups not at drill a much slower trot should be used than
+the regulation drill or manœuvre trot of 8 miles per hour.
+
+
+=28.= _Terms used in equitation._
+
+1. “_Right rein_” and “_Left rein_.”--A horse is said to be on the
+“_right rein_” when he is going round the school to the right, or
+on a circle to the right. The term “_left rein_” is used when he is
+proceeding to the left in a similar manner.
+
+To avoid confusing the pupils the instructor as far as possible should
+use the terms “Right” or “Left” instead of “Outward” or “Inward” when
+giving explanations.
+
+2. “_The true canter_” is a pace of three time. The legs of the horse
+should move in such a manner that whichever fore leg leads, the hind
+leg on the same side also leads. (_See_ Sec. =43= (8)).
+
+3. “_The true gallop_” is a pace of four time, in which the feet
+follow one another in succession, with an interval of suspension
+between the coming down of the leading fore foot and that of the
+opposite hind foot. As when cantering whichever fore leg leads, the
+hind leg on the same side must also lead.
+
+4. “_Cantering disunited_” or “_galloping disunited._”--When a horse is
+cantering or galloping in such a way that the leading hind leg is on
+the opposite side to the leading fore leg, _e.g._, when he leads with
+the off fore and near hind leg, he is said to be “_disunited_.” It is
+a common fault with bad riders in changing the bend of their horses
+to allow them to change their fore legs but not their hind legs. This
+results in the horse going “_disunited_,” a faulty action which should
+not be allowed.
+
+5. “_Cantering false_” or “_galloping false._”--A horse is said to be
+cantering false or galloping false, when at either of these paces, he
+goes on a circle to the left with the off fore and off hind leading, or
+to the right with the near fore and near hind leading.
+
+6. _Balance._--A riding horse on the move is said to be balanced when
+he carries his head and neck in the right position for balancing his
+weight and that of his rider.
+
+7. _Collected._--A horse is said to be collected when he is made to
+bring his limbs properly under him so that he has the maximum control
+over them. The collected paces are the school, or regulation, walk or
+trot, and the canter. The extended paces are the walk out, the trot
+out, and the gallop.
+
+
+FITTING SADDLERY.
+
+(_See also_ Animal Management.)
+
+=29.= _How to fit a saddle._
+
+1. There are four axioms in saddle-fitting:--
+
+      i. The withers must not be pinched or pressed upon.
+     ii. The spine must have no pressure on it.
+    iii. The shoulder-blade bones must have free and
+           uncontrolled movement.
+     iv. The weight must not be put on the loins, but upon
+           the ribs through the medium of the muscles
+           covering them.
+
+2. In fitting a saddle the bare tree should first be placed on the
+back, the front arch resting in the hollow behind the shoulder.
+
+The arch and seat should be clear of the spine. This is not always
+possible with horses possessing high withers, but it is desirable in
+order to ascertain the fit of the side bars.
+
+The front arch must be wide enough to admit the hand on either side of
+the withers, and its points must clear the ribs.
+
+The side bars must not be too long and must bear evenly on the back, or
+as nearly so as possible. Care must be taken that their edges do not
+press the withers or ribs.
+
+3. The numnah pannels should then be fitted on and the tree replaced on
+the back, but without a blanket.
+
+The proper thickness of the blanket having been estimated, it is folded
+and placed on the horse’s back with the tree on it. The blanket must be
+pressed up well into the front arch, and before girthing up it should
+be noticed whether the burrs are off the shoulders and the fans off the
+loins; if they are not, the thickness of the blanket beneath the side
+bars must be increased by turning it up on either side.
+
+4. The girths should now be pulled up and a man placed in the saddle.
+The first thing to ascertain is whether there is freedom from wither
+pressure. The hand must readily find admission beneath the blanket and
+over the top and along both sides of the withers. To make the test
+effective, the man should lean forward, and the examiner must not be
+satisfied with anything less than the introduction of his entire hand.
+
+The next thing is to ascertain whether there is freedom for
+shoulder-blade bone pressure. This is done by passing the hand beneath
+the blanket to the play of the shoulder. It should be possible to
+advance the horse’s foreleg to its full extent without the examiner’s
+fingers being pinched between the blade-bone and side-bar, even if
+the man is leaning forward in the saddle. If the fingers are pinched
+the blade-bone will also be pinched, and the saddle must be raised by
+fitting thicker numnah pannels on the side bar or by an extra fold of
+blanket.
+
+5. To ascertain whether the pressure of the side-bars is evenly
+distributed, the saddle, having been ridden in for about half an hour,
+is carefully ungirthed, and the tree lifted from the blanket without
+disturbing it. The blanket will be found to bear the imprint of the
+side-bars, and a glance will show whether they are pressing evenly from
+top to bottom and from front to rear.
+
+The examination must be made without delay, as the elasticity of the
+blanket soon causes it to lose the impression of the side-bars.
+
+If there is a deeper impression on one part of the blanket than
+elsewhere, the pressure is not evenly distributed, and a sore back is
+liable to result.
+
+Irregularity in the fit of the side-bars may be remedied by the
+introduction of pieces of numnah to fill up the space between the
+side-bars and the blanket.
+
+In peace these strips of felt can be fixed in position with glue, but
+in the field they may have to be tied on, or secured with tacks, or
+best of all, bound in position by means of a piece of leather (basil)
+which can be tacked to the edge of the side-bar or laced with string
+across the top.
+
+By means of these strips of felt the most radical alterations in the
+fit of a side bar can be effected in a few minutes by a man who has no
+technical skill.
+
+
+=30.= _Saddling._
+
+1. The _saddle_ should be placed in the middle of the horse’s back; the
+front of it so much behind the withers as not to interfere with the
+play of the shoulder.
+
+The fans should clear the back, and the front arch should clear the
+withers to the breadth of not less than 2 fingers when the rider is in
+the saddle. The saddle, to afford a suitable seat for the rider, should
+have a level bearing on the horse’s back.
+
+2. The _blanket_ is not to rest on the horse’s withers, but should be
+slightly raised by placing the hand under it.
+
+It can be folded in several ways. With a horse of normal shape and
+condition the following method is recommended:--The blanket is folded
+lengthways in three equal folds, one end is then turned over 24 inches,
+and the other turned into the pocket formed by the folds; the blanket
+thus folded is placed on the horse’s back with the thick part near the
+withers. Size when folded 2’ O“ × 1’ 8”, when unfolded 5’ 5“ × 4’ 8”.
+The folding of the blanket may be modified to suit special horses and
+to meet alterations in shape consequent upon falling way in condition,
+or from other causes. In the case of a horse which has fallen away
+in condition, and for certain shapes of back, a useful method is the
+“_channel fold_” The blanket is folded lengthways in three equal parts,
+each end is then turned over and folded towards the centre (two or
+three folds may be taken as required to suit the horse’s back), leaving
+a channel in the centre.
+
+3. The _girth_ should be sufficiently tight to keep the saddle in its
+place and no tighter. In saddling a horse, the girth must be tightened
+gradually, and not with violence. It is recommended that the girths of
+all except young and growing horses should be fitted with the buckle in
+the second or third hole from the free end of the tab.
+
+4. The _surcingle_ should lie flat over the girth, and be no tighter
+than the latter.
+
+5. _Adjustment of the “=V=” attachment._--The =V= attachment, fitted
+to the saddle as issued, admits of limited adjustment to suit the
+conformation of the horse.
+
+The front straps of the =V= attachment, Marks II and III, should not be
+buckled and unbuckled daily when girthing, nor utilised for shortening
+or lengthening the girth.
+
+The normal position of the attachment is with the buckle in the centre
+hole of the three--6½ inches from the rivet--this position will suit a
+very large number of horses; the upper and lower holes are provided for
+the adjustment; additional holes are not to be punched.
+
+On animals with straight shoulders that carry the saddle too far
+forward, the strap should be buckled in the lower hole.
+
+On animals that have deep chests and sloping shoulders, and are thick
+in front of the saddle, the front strap should be worn long.
+
+But in no case is it to be worn as a true =V=, _i.e._, the front and
+rear straps of equal length, which would depress the hinder part of the
+saddle, and cause other difficulties.
+
+Care should be taken in all cases to buckle the “near” and “off” straps
+in corresponding holes.
+
+
+=31.= _Bridling._
+
+1. Care should be taken to fit each horse with a bit of the correct
+size. A narrow bit pinches the horse’s lips, and a wide bit moves from
+side to side and bruises them.
+
+The bit should be fitted so that the mouthpiece is 1 inch above the
+lower tusk of a horse, and 2 inches above the corner tooth of a mare.
+
+This can only be laid down as a general rule, as much depends on the
+shape and sensitiveness of the horse’s mouth and on his temper.
+
+2. Figs. 1 and 2 represent bits, with and without a port, with a
+section of the horse’s tongue and lower jaw.
+
+The tongue is less sensitive than the bars of the mouth. A straight
+mouthpiece, Fig. 1, rests on the tongue and bars of the mouth. When
+the reins are pulled the tongue is able to take the greater part of
+the pressure. A mouthpiece with a port, Fig. 2, rests chiefly on the
+bars. When the reins are pulled the tongue slips into the port and is
+unable to relieve the bars of the greater part of the pressure. A bit
+with a straight mouthpiece is therefore less severe than one with a
+port.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1.]
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 2.]
+
+3. The _curb_ should be laid in the chin-groove and be so adjusted
+that when the bit is pulled back to its greatest extent the angle
+which the bit forms with the mouth should never exceed 45° even with
+the lightest-mouthed horse, and should vary between that and 30°
+according to the degree of hardness of the mouth. The curb should be
+fixed permanently on to the off curb-hook. The chain should be adjusted
+by twisting it to the right, putting the last link on to the near
+curb-hook, and then taking up as many more links as may be necessary.
+It should admit two fingers easily between it and the jawbone.
+
+4. The _headstall_ should be parallel to and behind the cheek-bone.
+
+5. The _noseband_ should be the breadth of two fingers below the
+cheek-bone and should admit two fingers between it and the nose.
+
+6. The _throat lash_ should fit loosely, being only sufficiently tight
+to prevent the headstall slipping over the horse’s ears.
+
+7. The _reins_ should be of such a length that when held by the middle,
+in the full of the left hand, with a light feeling of the horse’s
+mouth, they will touch the rider’s waist.
+
+
+=32.= _Miscellaneous details._
+
+1. The _head rope_ is put on as follows:--The point of the rope is
+passed through the lower ring of the jowl piece from the near to
+the off side, and then through its own ring. It is next passed over
+the horse’s neck from the off to the near side, and fastened off by
+doubling back the end, and laying the loop so formed on the standing
+end of the rope 6 inches from the ring. The free end is then wound
+round the three returns, passed through the loop, and the loop is
+hauled taut to it. The number of times the free end is wound round the
+returns will vary according to the length of the horse’s forehand.
+
+_Special for mountain artillery ponies._--Buckle the strap at the end
+of the rope, buckle down, to the rear D of the head collar: pass the
+free end from off to near side over the animal’s neck, fasten off by
+doubling a piece of the rope long enough to make five complete turns,
+and lay this loop on the standing end of the rope 6 inches from the
+brass ring; the free end is now wound five times completely round the
+three returns, and passed down through the loop which is hauled taut to
+it. The bight of the rope is fastened off the front D on the saddle by
+a leather tie.
+
+2. The _wallets_ (officers only) are to be placed on the pommel of the
+saddle with the hollowed side of the connecting piece to the front. The
+wallet strap is to be passed from the rear through the rearmost staple
+on the saddle, then through the rear keeper of the wallet, next through
+the front staple of the saddle, and finally through the front keeper of
+the wallet and buckled, the point of the strap pointing to the rear,
+the buckles being in line with the front edge of the wallet.
+
+3. The _sword frog_ is attached to the rear arch of the saddle on the
+near side, the girth being passed through the steadying strap.
+
+4. The _breast-piece_ should hang horizontally from the supporting
+straps, the bottom of it about 1 inch above the point of the shoulder,
+and should admit the breadth of the hand between it and the horse’s
+chest.
+
+5. The _breastplate_ should be so fitted that the upper edge of the
+rosette or leather is the breadth of three fingers above the sharp
+breast bone, and it should admit the breadth of the hand between it and
+the flat of the shoulder.
+
+6. The _martingale_ should be used only for exceptional horses. It may
+be either running or standing, according to which suits the horse the
+better.
+
+It should be of such a length that it will not interfere with the horse
+until he gets his head above the proper position. If it is shorter than
+this it will tend to make him set his head and neck, and lean against
+it.
+
+If a running martingale is used on reins other than those sewn to the
+bit or bridoon they should be fitted with “stops” to prevent the rings
+of the martingale getting caught by the buckles or studs, which fasten
+the reins to the bit or bridoon.
+
+Running martingales should, as a rule, be put on the bit reins and
+sufficiently loose to have no bearing on the reins till the horse
+attempts to raise his head.
+
+The standing martingale should, as a rule, be fastened to the noseband,
+but under exceptional circumstances it may be fastened to the bridoon
+or cheek of the portmouth bit.
+
+
+RIDING.
+
+=33.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The instructions should be divided into three periods, and the pupil
+should be gradually advanced from one to the other.
+
+The proper sequence of instruction is a matter of extreme importance,
+in order to obtain early and satisfactory results and to avoid spoiling
+horses.
+
+2. The first period should be devoted to the attainment of a firm seat
+independent of the reins, and its natural consequence--suppleness of
+the body from the hips upwards. Individual instruction should be the
+rule during this period.
+
+It is important to give the recruit confidence from the first, and to
+start with he should be given a quiet, well-trained horse. He should
+be allowed a saddle and stirrups for the first few days, after which
+some of his work each day should be without stirrups. The greater part
+of the instruction at this stage should be without reins. To save the
+horse’s mouth the pupil should only be allowed to hold his reins when
+he is riding with stirrups.
+
+As soon as the recruit begins to be at home in the saddle and can rise
+in his stirrups, cantering and jumping should commence.
+
+3. Before he enters the second period the recruit should be able to
+control his horse in straightforward movements and simple turns in
+the school or manège and be able to ride over low jumps at all paces
+without reins. From now onwards a considerable portion of the work
+should be outside the riding school.
+
+This second period should be devoted to teaching what are commonly
+called the “_aids_,” _i.e._, the use of the hand and lower part of the
+leg and the distribution of the rider’s weight to indicate the rider’s
+will to his horse. (_See_ Sec. =43=.)
+
+The instructor should aim at cultivating freedom and elasticity in the
+shoulders, arm, and wrists. Stiff shoulder-action cramps the play of
+the elbow-joints and wrists and makes good hands impossible.
+
+The recruit should be instructed to keep the knee firm to the saddle
+when the lower part of the leg is used.
+
+4. In the third period more advanced instruction in horsemanship is
+given. This should commence when the pupil has attained to suppleness
+of the body and the limbs, and consists in combining the play of both
+so that the rider may learn to move in unison with his horse.
+
+Exaggerated movement of any sort must be discouraged, and the necessity
+of quietness and of sitting still emphasized. The best horsemen attain
+their ends with the minimum of exertion to themselves and to their
+horses.
+
+During this period the horse artillery recruit should be taught to use
+his sword, and mounted men should receive instruction in riding with
+the rifle.
+
+5. After the first few lessons the recruit’s horse should be constantly
+changed, and he should not be passed in riding until the average animal
+goes pleasantly with him at any pace.
+
+Concurrently with his instruction in riding the recruit should be
+taught the principles of saddling and bitting, also the points of the
+horse and other elementary but useful knowledge connected with horses
+and stables.
+
+6. By following out the methods described an average man, with careful
+individual instruction, should be able to ride at a trot and canter and
+over small jumps without reins after about 30 continuous lessons. He
+should be fit for dismissal in about 60 lessons.
+
+
+=34.= _Hints to instructors._
+
+1. It is necessary that an instructor should himself be a practical
+horseman.
+
+2. Recruits should be carefully taught from the first how to put on
+and fit their saddles and bridles. The ill effects resulting from bad
+fitting saddlery should be explained to them.
+
+Examples of horses badly saddled and bridled should be shown to the
+men, and they should be made to point out what is wrong, and how
+the mistake should be put right, _e.g._, if the front tab of the
+=V=-shaped girth attachment is not buckled tightly up, the saddle will
+slip forward. They should also be taught clearly how the bit acts on
+the bars of the mouth, and how it should be fitted.
+
+3. An instructor should be mounted, and in addition to a short verbal
+description, should give a practical illustration of what he requires.
+A recruit who may have great difficulty in learning his work by mere
+verbal instruction will quickly do so by copying an expert horseman.
+
+4. A feature of all instructional work should be its quietness; an
+instructor should never shout and must always keep his temper. He must
+endeavour from the first to create a spirit of emulation amongst his
+pupils, and avoid keeping the more forward amongst them back for the
+sake of the others.
+
+5. An instructor should aim at making his lesson progressive, and as
+interesting as possible. In order to give recruits confidence, they may
+be allowed occasionally to amuse themselves in the riding school with
+their horses, by doing anything they like without interference from the
+instructor, beyond his taking care that the horses are not ill-treated.
+
+When teaching men in the open they should be encouraged to ride about
+independently, so as to get into the habit of making their horses
+go where they like and do what they wish. As the men improve, the
+instructor should accustom them to riding under as varied conditions as
+possible.
+
+6. The first portion of the early training can be pushed on much more
+quickly in a riding school than in the open. The horses are under
+better control, the nervousness natural to beginners and usually felt
+by recruits is greatly lessened, for they know that the horse cannot
+run away, and there is nothing to distract the attention of men or
+horses. The more advanced training must, however, always be carried out
+in the open, in order that the pupil may learn real control over his
+horse and improve his hands.
+
+7. The first object of the instructor is to give his pupils confidence,
+to teach them balance, the knee and thigh grip, and to sit well down
+in the saddle. The lungeing whip should not be allowed inside the
+school, it does more harm than good, frightens the other horses and
+upsets the men; if necessary, the recruit should be allowed to carry a
+stick or whip. No riding school lesson should exceed one hour.
+
+8. Falls should be avoided: they tend to spoil the beginner’s nerve
+and retard his progress. To this end the recruit’s stirrups should be
+connected in the initial stages by a strap passing under the horse’s
+belly, of such a length that the man’s knees are not drawn away from
+the saddle. The strap saves falls, because it prevents the rider’s legs
+from flying out far in any direction and the confidence it engenders
+enables him to acquire balance more quickly. It should not be used when
+jumping obstacles over 2 feet high.
+
+9. More horses are spoilt from being “_jobbed_” in the mouth than
+from any other cause; particularly when jumping; hence the immense
+importance of teaching the men from the first to leave their horses’
+heads alone except for the purpose of control and for applying
+particular aids.
+
+Men may, with advantage, be taught to ride with their reins fully long.
+
+10. An instructor should be careful not to keep horses reining back,
+passaging, or bending for more than a few minutes at a time. Generally
+speaking, half the length of the school is sufficient for one of these
+exercises.
+
+11. In order to teach a man to have a strong seat, with the knee firmly
+in the saddle, and at the same time to keep his feet pressed down
+home in the stirrups with the leathers practically taut, he should
+frequently be practised in standing up in his stirrups. At first this
+should be done with the horse standing still, the man resting his hand
+on the horse’s neck, if necessary, to assist his balance. Afterwards at
+the walk, trot and canter.
+
+
+=35.= _Preliminary training._
+
+1. Before a recruit is allowed to mount a horse his riding muscles
+should, if possible, have been strengthened on a wooden horse, either
+under a riding instructor or under a gymnastic instructor who is a good
+horseman. At the same time he should be taught the correct seat. (_See_
+Sec. =38= and Fig. 4.)
+
+2. The following are good exercises:--
+
+      i. Rising from the knee with stirrups.
+     ii. Rising from the knee without stirrups.
+    iii. Touching the foot with the hand on each side, with
+           and without stirrups.
+     iv. Leaning forwards and backwards in the saddle, with
+           and without stirrups.
+      v. Swinging the lower part of the leg, with a circular
+           motion to the rear, and towards the horse’s side.
+     vi. Without stirrups and with arms folded, making the
+           horse rock by swinging the body backwards and
+           forwards, maintaining a firm grip with the thighs.
+
+iii and iv should be practised on the move when riding proper begins.
+Before commencing, the pupil must be placed well down in the saddle,
+and he must be taught to keep his knees firm to the flap and not to
+cling with the lower part of the leg.
+
+3. These exercises on the wooden horse may be usefully employed during
+subsequent training, but should not immediately precede or follow
+a riding lesson. Exercising tired muscles is not only useless, but
+harmful.
+
+
+=36.= _First lessons to the recruit._
+
+1. Squads should not exceed 8 in number, and should parade in line,
+leading their horses.
+
+    “STAND TO YOUR HORSES.”--The man stands at attention on the
+        near side of the horse, toes in line with the horse’s
+        fore feet; the reins, taken over the horse’s head, are
+        held in the palm of the right hand near the ring of
+        the bit, little finger between the reins, back of the
+        hand up; the right arm bent, the hand as high as the
+        shoulder; the end of the reins in the left hand, which
+        hangs down by his side without constraint. This is the
+        position of _attention_ when the man is leading his
+        horse.
+
+When the horse is about to be ridden, the position of attention will
+be the same as above, except that the reins will not be taken over the
+horse’s head and will be held by the right hand only near the bit.
+
+    “STAND AT EASE.”--The right hand slides down the near rein
+        to the full extent of the arm, the end of the reins
+        being retained in the left hand. The position of the
+        man’s legs and feet are the same as at dismounted drill.
+
+_Note._--If the reins have not been taken over the horse’s head, they
+will be held in the right hand only, the left arm hanging by the man’s
+side without constraint.
+
+    “IN FRONT OF YOUR HORSES.”--Each man being at _attention_
+        will take a full pace forward with the right foot, turn
+        to the right-about on the ball of it, and take one rein
+        in each hand near the rings of the bit, still holding
+        the end of them in the left hand if the reins are over
+        the horse’s head; hands and elbows to be as high as the
+        shoulders.
+
+This is the position in which a man should stand when showing a horse
+at the halt.
+
+    “STAND TO YOUR HORSES.”--Each man will take a full step
+        forward to the horse’s near side with the right foot,
+        and turn left-about on the ball of it.
+
+    “QUICK MARCH.”--Each man will move off holding the reins as
+        above.
+
+    “SINGLE FILES RIGHT (OR LEFT)” “QUICK MARCH.”--Each man will
+        move off in succession, one horse-length from the file
+        in front of him.
+
+
+2. A man when leading a horse through a narrow gate or doorway should
+walk slowly backwards, taking care that the horse’s hips clear the
+uprights. The head collar should be held in both hands, one on either
+side of the horse’s head, which, however, should be sufficiently free
+for the horse to see where he is going.
+
+When a soldier, leading a horse, passes an officer he will look towards
+him.
+
+3. _How to pick up a horse’s foot._--The recruit should be taught the
+right way to pick up a horse’s foot. To do this he should face the rear
+and run his hand lightly down the leg from the shoulder or quarter
+along the back of the knee or hock before attempting to lift the foot
+from the ground.
+
+4. _How to run a horse in hand._--The reins should be held as described
+above in “_Stand to your horses_” and the horse led off. As soon as he
+breaks into a steady trot the man should leave go the reins with the
+hand nearest the horse, and only hold the end of the reins in his outer
+hand. In turning a horse about when in hand, the man should always move
+round the horse and not swing the horse round himself. In leading a
+horse past an officer for inspection, the man should place himself on
+the side nearest the officer.
+
+
+=37.= _Mounting and dismounting._
+
+1. _Without stirrups._--The reins hanging evenly on his neck, the
+command will be given:--
+
+    “PREPARE TO MOUNT.”--Turn to the right and close 6 inches
+        to the right. Take the reins in the left hand properly
+        separated as for riding (_see_ Sec. =39=), and place
+        the left hand on the front of the saddle. The reins
+        should be of such a length that the horse’s mouth is not
+        interfered with while mounting. The right hand will grip
+        the back of the saddle.
+
+    “MOUNT.”--Spring up, straightening the arms to assist, pass
+        the right leg over the horse and drop gently into the
+        saddle. When mounting without a saddle the left hand
+        will be placed in front of the horse’s withers, and the
+        right arm on his loins, forearm well to the off side,
+        fingers closed.
+
+    “PREPARE TO DISMOUNT.”--Place both hands, with a rein or
+        reins in each, on the front of the saddle, and rise from
+        the horse’s back by straightening the arms. Without
+        saddles, both hands will be placed on the horse’s
+        withers.
+
+    “DISMOUNT.--Vault lightly to the ground and assume the
+        position of ”_Stand to your horses_.”
+
+    Mounting and dismounting should also be practised on the
+        offside.
+
+2. _With stirrups._--“PREPARE TO MOUNT.”--Turn to the right about. Take
+the reins in the left hand properly separated as for riding (_see_
+Sec. =39=) and with a light and equal feeling on the horse’s mouth.
+Place the left hand on the horse’s withers, and grasp his mane, or the
+front of the saddle if he has no mane; then place the left foot in the
+stirrup, and the right hand on the back of the saddle.
+
+    “MOUNT.”--Spring quietly into the saddle, place the right
+        foot in the stirrup without looking down and assume the
+        position of attention (_see_ Sec. =40=).
+
+Mounting on the offside will be taught in the same manner, and recruits
+should be made to practise it regularly.
+
+    “PREPARE TO DISMOUNT.”--Shorten the reins (_see_ Sec. =39=)
+        and grasp the mane with the left hand, place the right
+        hand on the front part of the saddle and take the right
+        foot out of the stirrup.
+
+    “DISMOUNT.”--Carry the right leg over and lower the body
+        gently to the ground; place the left foot in line with
+        the horse’s fore feet, turn to the left and come to the
+        position of “_Stand to your horses_.”
+
+3. Whenever the men are dismounted and have been allowed to _Stand
+easy_ from the position of _Stand at ease_, they will be recalled to
+attention by the command “STAND TO YOUR HORSES.”
+
+4. For instructional purposes the order for mounting and dismounting is
+given by two words of command, _e.g._:--
+
+“PREPARE TO MOUNT.”--“MOUNT”; “PREPARE TO DISMOUNT.”--“DISMOUNT”; but
+for trained men there is only one word of command in each case, _i.e._,
+“MOUNT” or “DISMOUNT.”
+
+
+=38.= _The seat._
+
+1. The recruit must be made to sit evenly on his seat, well down in the
+saddle, and not on his fork; the flat of the thigh and the inside of
+the knee pressed against the saddle, but not so tightly that the man
+rides on his thighs, as the weight of the body should rest principally
+on the seat. Below the knee the leg should hang free, and in the early
+stages much attention need not be paid to the position of the body,
+though from the first the recruit should be taught to get his seat well
+under him.
+
+2. Great care should be taken to fit the stirrups to the right length
+to suit the build of the rider. The man should be made to place himself
+in the saddle with his knees at the height which appears to suit his
+thigh. The stirrups should then be adjusted so that the bars are in
+line with the soles of his boots. If a man standing in his stirrups can
+just clear the pommel with his fork the stirrups are about the right
+length.
+
+The end of the stirrup leather should be passed under both returns and
+then under the surcingle. It should not be passed downwards through the
+buckle.
+
+A man with a short thick leg, however, requires his stirrups shorter
+in proportion than a man of equal height but with a flat thigh and
+thin leg. The stirrups are intended to be an aid and convenience to the
+rider; if they are too long he will lose his seat by leaning forward in
+his endeavour to retain them; if they are too short, the seat becomes
+cramped and the rider is prevented from using the lower part of the leg
+correctly.
+
+In ceremonial work the stirrups should be kept on the ball of the foot,
+but at other times the feet may be pushed right home.
+
+
+=39.= _How to hold the reins._
+
+1. The recruit should next be taught how to hold the reins as described
+below. In the early stages he should only be allowed a snaffle or
+single rein attached to the cheek of the universal bit, and no curb,
+and should ride with the reins in both hands. The instructor should
+impress upon him the importance of not hanging on by the reins and
+explain that if he does so he will not make progress, but by injuring
+his horse’s mouth will make him difficult to ride.
+
+2. The hands should be low and close in front of the body, thumbs
+uppermost, back of the hands to the front. Wrists should be rounded and
+supple and the movements of the horse should be followed by means of
+the play of the shoulders, elbows (which should be kept close to the
+body), and wrists.
+
+3. _Reins in left hand._ i. _Bridoon or check reins only._--Take the
+two reins in the left hand, the right rein between first and second
+fingers, the left rein outside the fourth finger, slack passed across
+the palm and secured between the thumb and first finger.
+
+ii. _All four reins._--Place the right bit rein between the second
+and third fingers, and the left bit rein between the third and fourth
+fingers. The right bridoon rein between the first and second fingers,
+and the left bridoon rein outside the fourth finger, the slack of all
+four reins thrown back over the first finger and secured by the thumb.
+
+At riding drill drivers when holding the reins in the left hand should
+place the right hand on the thigh, as described in Sec. =55=.
+
+4. _Reins in both hands._--In the first place, whether using single or
+double reins, take them in the left hand as described above, then take
+up the right rein or reins in the right hand by placing it in front of
+the left, pulling sufficient of the slack forward through the left hand
+to obtain an even bearing on the mouth with both hands held low, just
+in front of the body and close to the horse’s withers.
+
+In the case of single reins only, the right rein should be held between
+the third and fourth fingers; with double reins, the two right reins
+should be separated by the third finger. In each case the right hand
+should hold only the right rein or reins, the slack of these being
+secured between the right thumb and forefinger and passing thence into
+the left hand which holds both the left and right reins. (_See_ Fig. 3.)
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 3.
+
+(_Bit reins shown shaded._)
+
+VIEW FROM FRONT.]
+
+[Illustration: VIEW FROM ABOVE.]
+
+5. _To lengthen the reins._--Allow sufficient rein to slip gently
+through the fingers.
+
+_To shorten the reins._--Keep the reins in the left hand but drop the
+slack from between the thumb and forefinger, and take hold of this in
+the right hand behind the left, slide the left hand forward until the
+desired length is obtained. Then as before secure the slack, and if
+riding with both hands on the reins, take up the right rein or reins
+again in the right hand.
+
+6. The recruit should be well grounded in the proper manner of holding
+the reins, and frequently practised in changing them quickly from one
+hand to both and _vice versâ_, also in shortening and lengthening them
+at all paces. The importance of keeping the reins supple and unpolished
+should be impressed on him.
+
+7. Normally the reins should be held in the left hand only, bit reins
+inside except in the case of beginners, and when riding young or
+awkward horses, when both hands should often be used. Occasionally the
+left hand may be required to be free, as when leading another horse, in
+which case the reins of the ridden horse can be held in the right hand.
+
+
+=40.= _Position in the saddle at attention._
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 4.]
+
+1. The correct position of the rider at attention is shown in Fig. 4.
+The head and body should be erect and square to the front; upper arm
+hanging perpendicular; forearm nearly horizontal; thighs flat on the
+saddle; legs from the knee down nearly vertical; knees turned inwards
+so as to enable the toes to point towards the front; the heels should
+be sunk lower than the toes and the feet pressed down into the stirrups
+(_see_ Fig. 4).
+
+2. On the command “SIT AT EASE” the reins should be relaxed by dropping
+the left hand on the front of the saddle. The right hand should rest on
+the left, back up.
+
+
+=41.= _First movements on horseback._
+
+1. The recruit should now be shown how to start his horse off at a walk
+from the halt, _i.e._, he should be made to ease the reins slightly,
+though still keeping a light feeling on the horse’s mouth, and press
+him forward with the legs from the knees downwards. He should be
+prevented from jogging his horse in the ribs with his heels and from
+advancing his hands to slacken the reins. At the same time he should be
+taught how to halt without jerking his horse’s mouth.
+
+The trot should be slow and for short periods and there should be no
+cantering for the first few lessons.
+
+2. _How to rise in the stirrups._--The loins must be perfectly lissom,
+so that the seat may be easy and comfortable; the back should not be
+hollowed, but the upper part of the body should be inclined a little
+forward.
+
+The recruit should not try, by rising, to follow or to anticipate the
+movements of the horse, but should let himself be raised.
+
+His knees (and ankle-joints if riding with the stirrup on the ball
+of the foot) will sustain his movement and will allow him to descend
+softly into the saddle. It is advisable to let the recruit commence
+this at a walk.
+
+3. At the trot without stirrups the recruit should allow his body to be
+thrown up at each step, and fall on his seat.
+
+In cantering, the knees, the inside of the thighs and the seat
+itself must remain close to the saddle, the whole body pliant and
+accompanying the movement of the horse, so that with each stride the
+rider feels a forward thrust through his seat from the animal’s back.
+
+4. A few turns and circles may now be introduced, and in executing them
+the recruit should be told how to use the weight of his body. He should
+be instructed, whilst preserving the grip of his knees and thighs, to
+incline his weight from the hips slightly backwards and to the side to
+which he is turning.
+
+5. As soon as he has gained some confidence, the recruit should ride
+without reins; he should then be taught to jump, at first over small
+obstacles, such as the bar lying on the ground. (_See_ Sec. =42=.)
+
+The recruit should not be allowed to cling with the back of the calf;
+it should be explained to him that the principal use of the lower part
+of the leg will be taught to him later.
+
+6. Much of the early training should be without reins, the arms being
+folded in front of the body, never behind, as the latter tends to throw
+the upper part of the body forward.
+
+
+=42.= _Teaching the recruit how to ride his horse over a fence._
+
+1. Jumping, when carried out with discretion, is an excellent training
+for men and horses. Constant practice throughout the recruit’s training
+will enable the man to acquire, and afterwards to maintain, a firm
+seat, whilst at the same time the muscles of the horse’s back and
+thighs are developed and strengthened.
+
+2. Riding over the bar laid on the ground makes a good beginning, the
+men trotting round the school with suitable distances between horses
+and jumping it in turn. This has the advantage of leading both men and
+horses to think that they are doing nothing out of the common, and
+results in an orderly and quiet procedure.
+
+The recruit should at first be allowed to hold the end of the rein in
+the flat of the hand to give him confidence, but should be encouraged
+as soon as possible to drop the reins altogether. The arms should
+be folded across the chest. Stirrups should be allowed until the
+instructor considers it advisable for the beginner to jump without them.
+
+In the first jumping lessons the recruits may be allowed to hold the
+mane, head rope, or front of the saddle in one hand and the reins
+loosely in the other. With this assistance they will be found to get
+confidence, attain their proper balance in a short time and be in a
+position to control their horses without jerking their mouths.
+
+3. As the horse takes off, the pupil should be instructed to lean
+forward and to tighten his leg-grip; if he is successful in this his
+body will soon swing in harmony with the horse. The movements of the
+body from the hips upwards when riding over a jump vary so much with
+different horses and different fences, that it is impossible to lay
+down any rule. It is a matter of the rider balancing his body assisted
+by a leg-grip. The horse should be eased up gently after a jump, on no
+account should his pace suddenly be checked.
+
+When the initial stage is passed frequent change of horses expedites
+progress.
+
+4. The pupil should be gradually trained to handle the reins when
+jumping, and the greatest care must be exercised to avoid ill-treatment
+of the horse’s mouth during the process. If the shoulder-joints are
+given free play when the horse requires more rein, all jerky movements
+of the arms and wrists will be avoided as the hands go forward. Reins
+must be held long, and the man taught to keep his hands low and allow
+them to come freely forward as the horse is on the downward plane. When
+riding with the reins in one hand, the left shoulder can be brought
+forward as the horse is descending.
+
+5. Jumping low obstacles is very little exertion to the horse, and the
+more the recruit has of it the sooner he will be ready to enter the
+third period of instruction. Before he enters this stage he should sit
+his horse with ease, both with and without reins, and, when jumping,
+should be able to keep a light feeling on the horse’s mouth without in
+any way interfering with it.
+
+6. The pupil should then be given horses that require “_riding_”
+at their fences, and be taught to handle them with resolution. A
+combination of the qualities of determination and patience are
+invaluable in a horseman, and should be developed and encouraged at
+this stage of the training.
+
+The method of dealing with refusers is given in Sec. =81=.
+
+
+=43.= _The aids._
+
+1. _General principles._--The “_aids_” are the signals used by the
+rider to assist him in directing his horse. These signals are made by
+means of the reins, legs, spurs, shifting the weight of the body, whip,
+and voice. For instance, the reins can be used to bend the neck, to
+raise, lower, or turn the head to any one side; and to make the horse
+decrease his speed, halt, or rein back.
+
+The necessity of impressing on all recruits the importance of
+preserving the sensitiveness of the horse’s mouth cannot be over-rated.
+
+The pressure of both legs is an indication to the horse to go forward,
+and should normally be applied just behind the girth; the leg should
+only be drawn back when the horse fails to respond to ordinary
+pressure. The pressure of the leg drawn back on one side is employed to
+make the hind quarters turn towards the opposite side, or to prevent
+them from turning towards the side on which the pressure is applied.
+
+When it is necessary to use the spur it should be applied as described
+in Sec. =45=. If when the horse is on the move the weight of the body
+is shifted, say to the right, the horse will be inclined to put out a
+foot on that side, in order to equalize the distribution of weight on
+its limbs. The hind quarters and forehand are respectively lightened
+by the rider’s body being brought forward and back, or by lowering or
+raising the horse’s head. The movement of the body as an “_aid_” should
+be slight, except in the case of a man riding a heavy horse, when more
+movement may often be necessary, but it should not lead to interference
+with the horse’s mouth.
+
+The indications of the whip are closely akin to those of the leg and
+spur.
+
+2. _To walk or trot._--Without drawing them back, close both legs to
+the horse according to his temperament, and slightly ease both reins
+by a slight turn of the wrist or wrists. As soon as the horse advances
+at the desired pace relax the pressure of the legs and feel the reins
+again as before.
+
+3. _To halt._--Close both legs and feel both reins, at the same time
+bring the weight of the body slightly back. As soon as the horse halts
+relax the pressure of the legs.
+
+4. _To turn to the right on the haunches._[3]--Close both legs to the
+horse, using more pressure with the left leg drawn back to prevent his
+haunches from flying out to the left. At the same time feel the right
+side of the horse’s mouth, press the left rein against his neck, and
+lean the body slightly back and to the right.
+
+_To turn to the left on the haunche.s_--Reverse the above.
+
+[3] NOTE.--Trained horses should never be turned except on their
+haunches.
+
+5. _To turn right about on the haunches._--The same as “_right turn_,”
+except that the rider should lean his body slightly back as well as to
+the right and as required apply more continued pressure on the right
+rein and firmer pressure with the drawn back left leg to compel the
+horse to turn on his haunches.
+
+6. _To collect the horse._--Make the horse bring his hindquarters well
+under him by a pressure of both legs, and induce him to flex his jaw
+and bring his nose slightly in by a light feeling of the bit rein.
+The pressure of the legs should precede any feeling of the reins. In
+this way the rider causes the horse to stand, walk, trot or canter, at
+attention.
+
+7. _To rein back._--Collect the horse as described in the previous
+paragraph, then feel the horse’s mouth as an indication for the horse
+to step backwards; the rider must never have a dead pull on the horse’s
+mouth, but when the horse has taken a step back, should ease the reins
+and then feel them again. The horse should be kept up to his bit by a
+pressure of both legs.
+
+The trained horse should rein back collectedly, with head carried
+fairly high, and the body balanced on all four legs. He must move in
+a straight line, and must not be allowed to run back out of hand, but
+must make each movement in obedience to the properly applied indication
+of the rider. He should not be allowed to halt in an uncollected
+position.
+
+8. _To canter off fore and off hind leading._--Collect the horse, and
+by a strong pressure of the drawn back left leg make him strike off
+into a canter. Prevent him from turning his quarters to the right by a
+supporting pressure of the right leg as required. When cantering the
+horse’s body, head and neck should be kept in the direction in which
+he is moving. The horse should be collected and slightly bent in the
+direction of the leading leg. The horse must be made to canter true and
+united.
+
+_To canter near fore and near hind leading._--Reverse the above aids.
+
+Methods of telling if a horse is cantering true:--
+
+     i. Look at his shoulders and fore feet: the shoulder and
+          foot of the leading leg should be the most advanced.
+    ii. Look at his hind legs. The leading one of these should
+          be on the same side as the leading fore leg. The horse’s
+          croup will be slightly turned towards the side of the
+          leading legs.
+
+If “_disunited_,” the movement felt in the seat will be a jolting and
+twisting motion.
+
+9. _To change from off fore and off hind to near fore and near hind at
+the canter._--Close both legs to the horse and turn his head slightly
+to the right; prevent him from turning his body to the right by the
+pressure of the left leg, put the weight of the body slightly backwards
+and cause him to change by a stronger pressure of the drawn back right
+leg.
+
+_To change from near fore and near hind to off fore and off hind, at
+the canter_.--Reverse the above aids.
+
+10. _To circle right at canter_ (from the halt, walk, or trot).--Apply
+the aids described for the “_Canter, off fore and off hind leading_,”
+and guide the horse round to the right.
+
+_To circle left at the canter._--Apply the aids described for the
+“_Canter, near fore and near hind leading_,” and guide the horse round
+to the left.
+
+
+=44.= _Bending._
+
+1. Bending affords the advanced recruit a lesson in applying the
+“_aids_.” It is tiring exercise for the horse and should be practised
+with discretion.
+
+In all bending work it is very important to get the horse to yield his
+jaw slightly as this conduces to lightness of hand.
+
+As a rule, bending should be done on the move.
+
+2. _To bend a horse:_--
+
+     i. _On the snaffle._--If to the right, the rider
+           should bend the horse by a gentle pressure on the right
+           rein, at the same time giving to him slightly with the
+           left rein but still retaining a gentle feeling on the
+           left side of his mouth, and using the pressure of the
+           legs as required; as soon as the horse bends to the
+           hands cease bending and make much of him.
+    ii. _On the bit._--The left hand, holding the reins,
+          should have an equal feeling on all four reins. In
+          bending to the right, place the third finger of the
+          right hand between the two right reins and slightly
+          feel the horse’s mouth, using the pressure of the legs
+          as required; when the horse yields to the feeling by
+          relaxing his jaw and bending as required, the hand
+          should immediately yield to him.
+
+The outer rein in bending should always retain a steady feeling to
+support the inner and to ensure the bend being made at the poll.
+
+3. _Bending lesson._--With beginners it is advisable that this should
+take place in the riding school or closed-in manège, but as the
+instruction progresses it should be practised outside.
+
+The following movements should be practised (_see_ Fig. 5):--
+
+    _Right shoulder in._
+    _Left shoulder in._
+    _Right pass_       } To move across the school or to a flank.
+    _Left pass_        }
+
+In all these movements the horse’s neck should be kept straight from
+the withers onwards to near the poll, his head itself being turned in
+the direction in which he is moving.
+
+In the “_shoulder in_” the horse’s body should be inclined at about a
+half turn to the direction in which he is to move.
+
+In “_right_” or “_left pass_” the horse’s body should be kept
+approximately at right angles to the direction in which he is moving,
+being inclined only just sufficiently in that direction to enable him
+to cross his legs.
+
+These movements should all be made in the same way. Thus in “_right
+shoulder in_,” the left rein bends and leads the horse assisted by
+the right rein. The pressure of the rider’s right leg makes the horse
+cross his legs (except in the case of the half passage) whilst the
+rider’s left leg keeps him up to the hand and prevents him from
+swerving.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 5.]
+
+Horses should not be turned at the corners when in the position of
+“_shoulder in_.” On reaching a corner each horse should be walked on
+and again “_shoulder in_” after passing it.
+
+To turn to the right when passaging to the right:--Stay the hind
+quarters with the right leg, lead the forehand round with the right
+rein, keep the left leg closed to prevent the quarters from flying out.
+
+In working the shoulder in and passages, fore and hind feet should move
+on four distinct lines parallel to each other.
+
+
+=45.= _Spurs._
+
+When the recruit has learned to preserve his proper seat and balance,
+and has a knowledge of the “_aids_” made with hands and legs, he may
+ride with spurs. In making use of them he must not open his thighs or
+move his body forward; the leg from the knee downwards only should
+move. Spurs with sharp rowels should only be allowed in exceptional
+circumstances.
+
+The spurs should be used as little as possible, but when they are
+necessary the horse should be made to feel them; a continual light
+touch will either make the horse kick or cause him to become insensible
+to them; a jogging motion of the leg with the heel drawn up should,
+therefore, never be allowed.
+
+
+=46.= _Various exercises._
+
+1. _General principles._--The recruit’s course should proceed by
+degrees according to the progress made, and any or all of the following
+exercises may be found useful.
+
+Others which suggest themselves to the instructor may be added. Each
+exercise or game, however, should have some definite object, and should
+be looked on merely as a means to an end.
+
+2. _To circle._--The ride being told off by fours, on the command “Nos.
+1 CIRCLE RIGHT (or LEFT),” each No. 1 will ride his horse in a circle
+and fall-in the rear of his section of fours, Nos. 2, 3 and 4 doing the
+same when ordered by the instructor.
+
+    “ODD (or EVEN) NUMBERS CIRCLE RIGHT (or LEFT).”--Each odd
+        (or even) number will ride in a small circle and fall-in
+        behind the even (or odd) number immediately behind him.
+
+    “HEADS OF FOURS CIRCLE RIGHT (or LEFT).”--The leading man
+        of each fours will ride in a circle followed by 2,
+        3, 4, and will continue in the circle until he gets
+        the command “GO LARGE,” when he will cease circling
+        and resume his original direction; or the rein may be
+        changed by the word of command “HEADS OF FOURS--CHANGE.”
+
+3. _Figure of 8._--For preliminary training in this movement the horse
+should be cantered quietly on a large circle or an oblong of about the
+same length as the school.
+
+i. _In the riding school or manège._
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 6.]
+
+The change of rein and leading legs should be made as soon as the new
+circle is commenced at X. (_See_ Fig. 6.)
+
+ii. _Outside._--First start off at a canter on a moderate sized
+circle on either rein. As soon as the horse is moving correctly and
+collectedly, turn inwards and describe a small circle still on the same
+rein, but about half the size of the first, when this is completed
+change the bend of the horse and the leading legs, and make a similar
+circle on the other rein, the two circles describing the figure of 8
+within the original circle. (_See_ Fig. 7.)
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 7.]
+
+In changing the bend, jerking the horse’s head across from one side to
+the other should not be allowed; to compel the horse to change legs it
+is necessary to turn his head slightly outwards, the rider at the same
+time inclining his weight to the side to which he wishes the horse to
+change, and pressing with his outer leg; these movements should be made
+gently, and as soon as the horse has changed the leading legs, both
+fore and hind, his neck and head should be turned to look the way he is
+going.
+
+4. The “_Ladies Chain_” is a useful practice for both man and horse.
+The leading file turns about, and rides a slightly zig-zag course
+through the remainder of the ride (who will be at three or four
+horse-lengths distance from each other), passing on their right and
+left hands alternately. When each man in succession has done this, the
+rear file, at increased pace, will zig-zag through the ride from the
+rear, and the remainder will follow in succession.
+
+5. Practice in crossing a big V-shaped ditch, about 18 feet wide and
+10 feet deep, _i.e._, large enough to compel the horses to go down one
+side and up the other, is a particularly valuable exercise, as no horse
+will face the opposite bank unless his head is left absolutely alone.
+
+
+=47.= _Paying compliments mounted without arms._
+
+When riding with both hands on the reins a soldier passing an officer
+turns his head and eyes in the direction of the officer without moving
+his hands. When holding the reins in one hand only he should drop
+the right hand to the full extent of the arm behind the right thigh,
+fingers half closed, back of the hand to the right, and turn his head
+in the direction of the officer.
+
+
+=48.= _Leading horses._
+
+1. When riding one horse and leading another, the led horse should be
+on the near side, so that when meeting or being overtaken by traffic
+the man, by keeping on the left of the road, will have the ridden horse
+between the led horse and the traffic. The end of the led horse’s rein
+should be held in the left hand lying flat against the reins of the
+ride horse. If the led horse is fresh his rein should be held short,
+about 1 foot from his head. If he tries to break away, the man should
+circle the two horses to the left.
+
+2. When leading two horses one should be on each side.
+
+3. When leading three horses one should be on the near side and two on
+the off side. When leading two horses on the same side the reins of the
+outer horse should be passed between the jaw and the jowl piece of the
+head collar of the inner horse before being gathered up.
+
+
+=49.= _Securing horses._
+
+1. _Tying up a horse._--The chief considerations in securing a horse
+by the reins or head rope are to prevent him injuring himself (wire
+fences or spiked iron railings should obviously not be used) or
+breaking his reins by treading on them. The knot used should be capable
+of being quickly tied and untied and should not be likely to come
+unfastened through the horse fidgetting about.
+
+Fig. 8 shows how a horse may be secured to a suitable branch by first
+placing the loop of the reins under and round it, and then doubling
+back the end of the branch and passing it through the reins. A piece
+of stick will answer the same purpose. The more the horse pulls the
+tighter the knot becomes.
+
+2. Single horses can also be kept from straying as follows:--
+
+    i. By knee-haltering. One end of a rope is made fast above
+        the knee by a clove hitch, fairly tight, with a keeper
+        knot (half-hitch) round the rope to prevent it from
+        coming loose. The other end is then carried back to the
+        head collar and so secured that the horse cannot tread
+        on it. The rope should be from 1 foot to 1 foot 6 inches
+        from the knee to lower ring of jowl piece of head-collar.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 8.]
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 9.]
+
+     ii. By securing the bit to the stirrup iron by means of the
+           rein or a strap.
+    iii. By securing the bridoon rein to the girth on the near
+           side; this is done by taking the bridoon reins over in
+           the usual way and passing them under the girth from
+           front to rear. They should then be drawn sufficiently
+           tight to bend the horse’s head to the left and fastened
+           by a single hitch, but without drawing the slip end
+           through. (_See_ Fig. 9.) When mounting in haste the
+           rider can easily loosen the slip knot after mounting,
+           and then pull the reins clear and pass them over the
+           horse’s head.
+
+3. _Coupling horses._--Horses can be securely coupled by turning them
+head to tail and tying each with the bridoon rein to the off back-strap
+or arch of the saddle of the other, taking care that the reins, when
+tied, are not more than 6 to 8 inches long. (_See_ Fig. 10.)
+
+With three horses one can be tied to the head collar of either of the
+two horses so coupled. Four horses are secured by tying a horse to each
+of the two originally coupled. No horse should have more than 1 foot
+length of rein, and the best knot to be used is a slip knot round the
+rein itself.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 10.]
+
+4. _Linking horses._--The head ropes are brought over the horses’ heads
+clear of the reins, without unfastening the coil or knot. Each man
+hands his rope to the man on his right, who passes it through the upper
+ring of his own horse’s head collar, and ties it with two half-hitches.
+
+
+=50.= _Riding with the sword._
+
+    -----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    1. _To draw_     |  Pass the right hand smartly across the
+       _swords._     |body, over the bridle arm, draw out the blade
+                     |the sword knot on the wrist, give it two turns
+    DRAW--SWORDS.    |inward to secure it, and then grasp the handle
+        ONE.         |with the right arm close to the body, shoulders
+                     |square to the front.
+                     +-------------------------------------------------
+        TWO.         |  With an extended arm draw the sword
+                     |slowly from the scabbard, in the rear of the
+                     |left shoulder, and bring it smartly to the
+                     |“_Recover_,” that is, with the bar of the hilt in
+                     |line with the bottom of the chin, blade
+                     |perpendicular, edge to the left, elbow close to
+                     |the body.
+                     +-------------------------------------------------
+       THREE.        |  Lower the sword smartly to the “_Carry_,”
+                     |that is, with the top of the guard resting on
+                     |the top of the hand, blade perpendicular, edge
+                     |to the front, the first and second fingers
+                     |gripping the handle under the resistance
+                     |piece, the little finger behind the handle to
+                     |steady it, the wrist resting on the leg and the
+                     |pommel pressed against the side of it, upper
+                     |part of the arm close to the body, and the
+                     |elbow lightly touching the hip.
+    -----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+       _To slope_    |  Bring the lower part of the arm at right
+        _swords._    |angles to the upper, hand in front of the
+                     |elbow, relax the grasp of the second and third
+    SLOPE--SWORDS.   |fingers, and allow the sword to fall lightly on
+                     |the shoulder, midway between the neck and
+                     |point of the shoulder, the top of the hilt resting
+                     |on the top of the hand, the little finger
+                     |still in rear of the hilt.
+    -----------------+------------------------------------------
+    3. _To sit at_   |  Keeping the sword at the slope, place the
+       _ease._       |hands on the front part of the saddle, with the
+                     |right hand over the left.
+      SIT AT EASE.   |
+    -----------------+------------------------------------------
+    4. _To come_     |
+    _to position_    |
+    _of attention._  |  Come smartly to the position of “_Slope
+                     |swords_.”
+      ATTENTION.     |
+    -----------------+------------------------------------------
+    5. _To carry_    |  Resume the grasp of the second and third
+       _swords._     |fingers and bring the blade perpendicular,
+                     |the hilt resting on the thigh, as in the third
+                     |motion of drawing swords.
+      CARRY--SWORDS. |
+    -----------------+------------------------------------------
+    6. _To return_   |  Carry the hilt smartly to the hollow of the
+       _swords._     |left shoulder, blade perpendicular, edge to
+                     |the left, elbow level with the shoulder; then
+                     |by a quick turn of the wrist drop the point
+    RETURN--SWORDS.  |in rear of the left shoulder slowly into the
+                     |scabbard, and resume the position at the end
+         ONE.        |of the first motion in “_Draw swords_,”
+                     |shoulders being kept square to the front
+                     |throughout this motion.
+                     +-----------------------------------------------
+         TWO.        |  Push the sword lightly into the scabbard,
+                     |release the hand from the sword knot by giving
+                     |it two turns outwards, the right hand remaining
+                     |across the body in line with the elbow,
+                     |fingers extended and close together, back of
+                     |the hand up.
+                     +-----------------------------------------------
+       THREE.        |Drop the right hand smartly to the side.
+    ------------------------+------------------------------------------
+
+7. When “_Draw swords_” is ordered at the walk, the men after drawing
+will remain at the “_Carry_” until ordered to “_Slope_”; but if “_Draw
+swords_” is ordered at the trot or gallop, the men will come to the
+“_Slope_” after drawing.
+
+8. _Proving._--In proving with a drawn sword, the sword is brought to
+the “_Carry_,” and again sloped on the command “AS YOU WERE.”
+
+9. _Paying compliments with drawn sword._--An officer or soldier should
+“_Carry_” his sword and turn his head and eyes in the direction in
+which the compliment is to be paid.
+
+10. _Officers’ salute._--i. The officers’ salute in marching past
+commences ten yards from the reviewing officer, the sword being at the
+“_Carry_.”
+
+First motion: Carry the sword direct to the right to the full extent of
+the arm, hand as high as the shoulder, back of the hand to the rear,
+blade perpendicular.
+
+Second motion: Bring the sword by a circular motion to the “_Recover_,”
+keeping the elbow as high as the shoulder.
+
+Third motion: Still keeping the elbow the height of the shoulder, bring
+the hilt to the right shoulder; during this motion let the finger nails
+come in line with the edge of the sword.
+
+Fourth motion: Lower the sword to the front to the full extent of the
+arm, blade 3 inches below the knee, edge to the left, thumb extended
+in the direction of the point, hand directly under the shoulder. There
+should be no pause between these motions, but all should be combined in
+one graceful movement.
+
+The head is slightly turned towards the reviewing officer whilst
+passing him.
+
+After passing the reviewing officer ten yards, the sword is brought to
+the “_Recover_” carrying it well to the front, and to the “_Carry_” in
+two deliberate movements.
+
+ii. _The officers’ salute at the halt._--The sword being at the
+“_Carry_.” First motion: Bring the sword to the “_Recover_,” but with
+the thumb pointing upwards.
+
+Second motion: As described in fourth motion of the salute when
+marching past.
+
+Third motion: Bring the sword to the “_Recover_.”
+
+Fourth motion: Bring the sword to the “_Carry_.”
+
+
+=51.= _Riding with the rifle._
+
+    ----------------+----------------------------------------------
+    1. _To mount._  |  Take hold of the barrel of the rifle with the
+                    |left hand, about 3 inches below the muzzle,
+                    |butt downwards, and prepare to mount, but
+    PREPARE TO      |with the rifle held in the left hand on the
+     MOUNT.         |off side of the horse.
+                    +----------------------------------------------
+    MOUNT.          |  Mount as usual, raise the rifle with the left
+                    |hand, seize it with the right hand in front of
+                    |the magazine, and place it in the bucket.
+    ----------------+----------------------------------------------
+    2. _To          |
+    dismount._      |
+                    |
+    PREPARE TO      |  Seize the rifle with the right hand at the
+    DISMOUNT.       |small of the butt.
+                    +--------------------------------------------------
+        TWO.        |  Draw the rifle out of the bucket far enough
+                    |to allow the hand to re-grasp it just in front
+                    |of the magazine; raise it so as to clear the
+                    |front of the saddle.
+                    +--------------------------------------------------
+      THREE.        | Lower the butt under the bridle hand, and
+                    |hold the barrel with the left hand about
+                    |3 inches below the muzzle.
+                    +--------------------------------------------------
+       FOUR.        | Place the right hand in front of the saddle,
+                    |and quit the right stirrup. On the command
+                    |“DISMOUNT,” dismount as usual, bringing the
+                    |rifle to the position of the “_Order_” in the left
+                    |hand, and hold the bridle with the right hand.
+                    |
+                    |If required for dismounted service, as soon
+                    |as the horse is given up, the rifle is passed
+                    |from the left hand to the right.
+    ----------------+---------------------------------------------
+    3. _The_        |  The rifle is held with the right hand in front
+    _advance._      |of the magazine resting on the upper part of
+                    |the right thigh, thumb and fingers round the
+                    |rifle, muzzle pointing to the left front and
+                    |just clear of the horse’s near ear, trigger guard
+                    |to the front.
+    ----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    4. _To draw     |
+       _arms._      |
+                    |
+    DRAW--ARMS.     |  Grasp the rifle at the small of the butt.
+    ----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+         TWO.       |  Draw the rifle out of the bucket far enough
+                    |to allow the hand to re-grasp it just in front
+                    |of the magazine.
+    ----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+       THREE.       |  Retaining the same grasp, bring the rifle to
+                    |the “_Advance_.”
+    ----------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    5. _To carry_   |  From the “_Advance_.”--Without moving the
+       _arms._      |right hand from its grasp of the rifle, place,
+                    |the butt on the upper part of the right thigh,
+    CARRY--ARMS.    |with the right eye, trigger guard to the left,
+                    |back of the hand down, arm slightly bent,
+                    |elbow close to the side.
+    ----------------+--------------------------------------------------
+    6. _To return_  |  This is done in one motion as follows:--Raise
+       _arms._      |the butt of the rifle and lower the muzzle
+                    |into the mouth of the bucket, pressing the
+     RETURN--ARMS.  |rifle well home with the right hand, trigger
+                    |guard to the rear, taking care that the bolt lever
+                    |does not catch on the edge of the bucket.
+    ----------------+--------------------------------------------------
+
+
+=52.= _Revolver shooting._
+
+1. Revolver shooting is to be practised mounted by all ranks armed with
+that weapon.
+
+2. At least 10 days’ preliminary instruction, including snapping,
+should be given immediately before firing the first year’s course,
+while 5 days’ practice will generally be advisable before subsequent
+courses. This preliminary instruction is important, in order to
+inculcate correct methods and to train the eye and muscles of the hand,
+wrist and arm.
+
+3. The allowance of blank ammunition is required to accustom men to the
+shock of discharge and horses to the noise. Firing should be carried
+out first at a walk and finally at a canter.
+
+4. When loaded the revolvers should be carried muzzle down and the
+finger away from the trigger.
+
+5. To take aim the revolver should be raised on to the mark, keeping
+the wrist stiff with the forearm, wrist and barrel in the same vertical
+plane, or it may be brought direct into the alignment. The arm may be
+kept straight or slightly bent.
+
+Mounted men should learn to shoot, without taking aim along the sights,
+at the centre of the body of the target. With a little practice they
+should learn to keep their eyes on the object and, as it were, “throw
+the bullet” at it.
+
+6. Practice with ball ammunition should be divided into two parts,
+dismounted and mounted. The latter should not be carried out until a
+man thoroughly understands the handling of the weapon.
+
+
+DRIVING.
+
+=53.= _General principles._
+
+1. All officers, non-commissioned officers, and drivers must possess a
+thorough knowledge of the principles of driving and of fitting harness.
+
+2. Even and steady draught is a matter of paramount importance; the
+respective weights behind teams are calculated on the assumption that
+every horse will do his fair share of work; this is impossible unless
+the driving is of a high order. If the driving is not good, neither
+quick manœuvre, long marches, nor efficient transport serviceman be
+assured.
+
+3. When draught is even and steady every trace in the team is taut, and
+the horses’ heads are facing straight to the front. If, for example, an
+off horse’s head is pulled inwards, his draught power is reduced and he
+is liable to become collar galled.
+
+4. The lead driver is responsible for direction, distance, and pace; it
+is the duty of the centre and wheel drivers to keep the traces taut and
+cover him.
+
+5. Temperament should be the first consideration in teaming horses. A
+slug should therefore, if possible, not be included in a team of very
+willing horses.
+
+6. The position of the horses should frequently be changed; a hand
+horse, for example, loses his back muscles if he is never ridden, and
+is also apt to acquire the habit of leaning on the off side of the bit.
+
+
+=54.= _Fitting harness._
+
+1. The _saddle_, _saddle blanket_, _girth_, _surcingle_, _bit_, _curb_,
+_chain_, _head rope_, _nose band_, and _throat lash_ will be fitted as
+for the riding horse. (_See_ Secs. =30-32=.)
+
+2. The _riding rein_[4] should be fitted of such a length that the
+driver has complete control over his horse.
+
+In the _leading rein_ the short piece on the near side should be
+carefully fitted so that the bearing of the bit in the horse’s mouth
+may be even when the rein is held in the driver’s hand.
+
+[4] NOTE.--Special reins for near and off horses will eventually be
+abolished and ordinary reins substituted.
+
+The _side rein_, if required, should be buckled to the cheek of the bit
+of the horse, the end being buckled to the saddle.
+
+4. The _breast collar_ should hang horizontally from the padded neck
+straps, the lower edge about one inch above the point of the shoulder.
+The higher it is in reason the less chance there is of the horse
+galling.
+
+5. The _pole bar supporting straps_ should be sufficiently short to
+carry the bar the width of a hand above the sharp breast bone; if
+lower, the bar will gall the horse’s chest. Care must be taken to have
+the bar horizontal.
+
+6. The _loin straps_ should be so fitted that the traces shall be in a
+straight line when the horse is in draught.
+
+7. The length of the _traces_ must depend on the size of the horses.
+The distance between horses in a team should not be less than one yard
+from nose to tail, but the traces of each pair of horses must be the
+same length.
+
+8. The _breeching_ should be fitted about 16 inches below the upper
+part of the dock; it is kept horizontal by the long loin straps. When
+put back in the breeching the horse should be at least a foot from the
+footboard.
+
+9. _Pole chains_ should be so fitted that when wheel horses are
+standing up to their collars there is no pull on the chains. By the use
+of a tug neck piece in connection with the pole bar supporting straps,
+horses with wheel harness can be harnessed to G.S. wagons whether the
+latter are fitted with pole chains or pole straps.
+
+10. _The kicking strap_ should be so fitted as to give the play of a
+hand’s breadth between it and the horse’s croup when he is standing in
+his collar.
+
+
+=55.= _Position of a driver standing to his horses and mounted._
+
+1. The driver stands to his horses on the near side of his riding horse
+in line with the fore feet, holding the reins of both horses (the
+leading rein passing over the riding horse’s neck) in his right hand,
+right arm extended and level with his shoulder; left arm hanging down
+by his side; whip, stock upwards, in his legging.
+
+2. On the command “PREPARE TO MOUNT,” the driver turns to his right
+about, places the leading rein over the riding rein in the palm of his
+left hand, puts his left foot in the stirrup, and takes hold of the
+front of the saddle with his left hand and the back of the saddle with
+his right; if he cannot reach the back of the saddle, he must take hold
+of the flap.
+
+With the universal reins, the riding horse’s rein is held in the full
+of the hand, the end hanging down between the first finger and thumb,
+little finger dividing the reins. The leading rein is held in the full
+of the hand, the end hanging down from the opposite side of the hand to
+that of the ride horse’s reins.
+
+At “MOUNT” he raises himself in the stirrup, passes his right leg over
+the horse and drops quietly into his saddle. He then adjusts his reins
+so that he has an even feeling on both horses’ mouths, takes the whip
+out of his legging with his right hand, which he passes through the
+loop at the end of the stock and places on his right thigh back up,
+grasping stock and thong close together, with his elbow a few inches
+from his body.
+
+_This is the position of attention, mounted._
+
+3. On the command “SIT AT EASE,” both hands are placed on the pommel
+of the saddle, the right hand holding stock and thong of whip over the
+left.
+
+4. On the command “PREPARE TO DISMOUNT” the driver places the whip in
+his legging.
+
+At “DISMOUNT.”--If the driver cannot reach the ground with his right
+foot while the left is still in the stirrup, he takes both feet out of
+the stirrups, and the body, at first supported by both hands, is gently
+lowered to the ground. He then comes to the position of standing to his
+horses.
+
+5. On the command “STAND AT EASE,” keeping both legs straight, he
+carries the left foot about one foot-length to the left, and slides the
+right hand (retaining hold of the leading rein) down the riding rein of
+the riding horse as far as it will go; his left hand hanging down the
+thigh.
+
+“STAND EASY.”--He fastens the leading rein to the riding rein by means
+of a thumb knot.
+
+
+=56.= _Use of the whip._
+
+1. The whip is chiefly used to control the off horse: _i.e._, to start
+him, to keep him in the collar, and to guide him when turning. It
+should be applied lightly on to the off side of the neck just in front
+of the withers, fingers closed on stock and thong.
+
+2. The driver also salutes with his whip when at a walk, in the
+following manner:--He brings it to the recover as with a sword, passes
+it over the withers of the off horse, right arm extended, but with the
+elbow raised and slightly bent, hand in a line with the waist, back
+of the hand up and inclined to the front, fingers firmly closed on
+the stock and thong. The driver should hold his body erect with the
+shoulders square to the front, and look the officer full in the face.
+When the salute is finished, the whip is brought to the recover and
+then down to the position of attention. The salute commences four paces
+from the officer, and finishes four paces beyond him. A driver when
+halted, or at the trot, salutes by coming to attention and looking the
+officer full in the face.
+
+3. On rare occasions the whip may be used to punish a horse, when the
+thong should be applied once on the shoulder. This procedure is seldom
+justified, and is liable to upset the other five horses in the team.
+
+At all other times the thong should be held close against the stock
+with the end of the lash hanging down.
+
+
+=57.= _Driving without vehicles._
+
+1. Before recruits are allowed to drive horses in draught they should
+be practised in manœuvring the team alone. The centre and wheel drivers
+thus learn in the initial stages to keep the traces taut, and all
+likelihood of either spoiling or overtiring horses is avoided.
+
+2. The riding school is well suited for this training; three teams can
+be worked together in an ordinary sized building, and they are more
+under the instructor’s eye than in the open.
+
+3. The positions of the drivers in the teams should frequently be
+changed.
+
+
+=58.= _Hooking in and unhooking._
+
+1. Hooking in and unhooking should be done as in action, that is in
+complete teams with drivers mounted, and by the same men who perform
+the duty in action. The supporting bars for the poles are brought up
+from the footboards of the carriages and attached to the neck pieces of
+the wheelers. If possible the team should come up on the left of the
+carriage, as it is easier for the wheel driver to get his horses into
+position from the near than from the off side.
+
+2. Traces should be fastened and unfastened at the swingle-trees. The
+two highest available numbers at the gun and wagon respectively hook in
+and unhook the teams of their own carriage. All numbers work on their
+own side.
+
+3. The inside traces of the centre horses pass over the supporting bar
+to prevent the pole tipping up. When hooking in, the outside trace of
+each horse is attached before the inside one. In unhooking, each man
+unfastens what he fastened when hooking in, commencing where he left
+off.
+
+4. In the case of heavy artillery, should additional horses (over the
+normal team of eight) be required, they should be attached to the
+outriggers on the limber and not hooked in front of the team, as the
+traces are not designed to stand the extra strain.
+
+5. _Hooking in._--At “HOOK IN” the higher number holds up the pole near
+the footboard, and the lower number goes round by the head of the off
+wheeler, and as the wheel driver backs his horses guides the ring of
+the supporting bar on to the pole. As soon as the ring is on the pole
+the two gunners fasten the wheel traces (_see_ paras. 2 and 3).
+
+_Drivers only._--The centre driver dismounts, and having secured his
+leading rein to his driving rein, raises the pole at the point and
+guides it into the ring on the pole bar. He then fastens the wheel
+traces (_see_ para. 3).
+
+6. _Unhooking._--The two gunners unhook the wheel traces (_see_ paras.
+2 and 3), and as soon as the attachments are released, the wheel driver
+gives the word “DRIVE ON.” The team drives on, allowing the pole to
+fall to the ground.
+
+_Drivers only._--The centre driver dismounts and unhooks the wheel
+traces.
+
+7. In exceptional circumstances the team can be unhooked in the
+following manner. The wheel driver releases the trace attachments
+of both wheel horses at the breast-collars, and the team drives on,
+allowing the pole to fall to the ground. The breechings and traces
+should be replaced on the horses as soon as possible.
+
+
+=59.= _Traces._
+
+1. When not in draught, the traces of lead and centre horses are
+crossed in rear of the saddle and the ends passed forward under the
+neck strap of the breast collar. In the case of spare horses the ends
+of the traces are brought forward and fastened by the quick release
+attachment to the rings on the breast collars, the short traces being
+carried on the footboards of the vehicles.
+
+In the case of wheel horses the traces are passed through the trace
+bearers, then turned up under the loin straps and fastened back to the
+bearers by their quick release attachment.
+
+
+=60.= _Moving off._
+
+1. On the command “MARCH” the drivers ease the reins and close their
+legs to the riding horse, laying the whip over the neck of the off
+horse, to ensure both horses starting together. On the command being
+given every man in a team should start his horses to prevent loss of
+distance.
+
+2. In all alterations to a quicker pace the drivers use their legs on
+the riding horse, and the whip on their off horse as described in Sec.
+=56=.
+
+
+=61.= _Halting._
+
+1. The lead and centre drivers raise the whip hand as high as the head,
+the whip horizontal across the front, as a signal to the wheel driver.
+
+All three drivers feel their reins and take their horses out of the
+collar. The wheel driver, with his right hand on the leading rein, puts
+his horses back in the breeching.
+
+As soon as the carriage stops, every horse is again put into the collar.
+
+2. At any pace but the walk the lead and centre drivers must allow the
+wheel driver sufficient time to stop the carriage before they come to
+the halt.
+
+
+=62.= _Wheeling to the right._
+
+1. The lead driver wheels his riding horse by leaning his body to the
+right and feeling the right rein; he brings his off horse round at the
+same time by feeling the leading rein with his right hand.
+
+The centre and wheel drivers follow the track of the lead driver,
+laying their whips over their hand horses’ necks in front of the
+withers to keep them from flying out or hanging back.
+
+_Note._--On a horse that is not properly trained the lead driver may
+have to apply his right leg as an additional aid. No application of the
+left leg is necessary, as the traces prevent the horse’s quarters from
+flying out. (_See_ Sec. =43=.)
+
+
+=63.= _Wheeling to the left._
+
+1. The lead driver wheels his riding horse by leaning his body to the
+left and feeling the left rein; he brings his off horse round at the
+same time by applying the whip over his neck.
+
+The lead driver may have to apply his left leg on an untrained horse
+(_see_ note above).
+
+The centre and wheel drivers follow the track of the lead driver,
+applying the same aids at the point of wheel.
+
+Riding horses must not be allowed to hang back.
+
+
+=64.= _Wheeling about._
+
+1. In this case the drivers lean their bodies slightly back, and to
+whichever side they are turning. In going to the right about the wheel
+driver should take the leading rein in his right hand instead of
+placing his whip over the neck of the off horse. In wheeling to the
+left about it may be necessary for him to use both hands on the riding
+horse to keep him from turning too soon. Otherwise the aids are the
+same as for wheeling to the right or left, but are continued longer.
+
+2. In order to prevent the carriage from locking, the wheel driver must
+be very careful to keep up his hand, or riding horse, as the case may
+be, and the lead driver must on no account make the circle too small.
+
+3. Carriages should be advanced one yard before being wheeled about
+from the halt.
+
+
+=65.= _Unlimbering._
+
+1. On the command “ACTION FRONT” the guns are unlimbered and brought
+into action as detailed in the respective handbooks. As soon as the
+limber is free, the order is given “LIMBER DRIVE ON.” The drivers
+advance one yard, wheel to the right about at a trot, and proceed
+direct to the wagon line.
+
+2. On the command “ACTION RIGHT (or LEFT)” the guns are unlimbered and
+the order “LIMBER DRIVE ON” is given.
+
+The drivers advance one yard, wheel to the left (or right) and proceed
+to the wagon line as directed.
+
+
+=66.= _Limbering up._
+
+1. On the command “FRONT LIMBER UP” the gun is reversed, the drivers
+trot up on the right of the gun, keeping one yard clear in passing it.
+
+When clear of the gun wheel they throw their right shoulders forward,
+until the near wheel of the limber has just passed the trail eye.
+
+They then halt and pass their horses off to the right until square, the
+lead and centre drivers easing their traces sufficiently to do so.
+
+The wheel driver must be careful not to let the limber run back on the
+gun.
+
+2. On the command “REAR LIMBER UP” the drivers trot up on the right of
+the trail eye inclining to the right, if necessary, to allow room for
+wheeling. The lead driver when he is level with the trail eye wheels to
+his left and again to his left as soon as he has passed it. To enable
+the wheel driver to wheel short round, the lead and centre drivers must
+ease their traces as soon as they have passed the trail eye. The wheel
+driver by holding in his riding, and keeping up his hand horse, squares
+the limber, at the same time preventing it running back on the gun.
+
+3. To limber up to the right the drivers trot up; the lead driver
+passing close to the trail turns to the right when the wheel driver is
+in line with it; the lead and centre drivers then case their traces and
+pass their horses off until square. The wheel driver, as soon as he is
+in line with the trail, turns his horses to the right. In all limbering
+up the limber is halted by order of the No. 1, but the drivers must
+look over their shoulders to see that the limber is properly placed.
+
+In limbering up to the left the procedure is similar to the above
+except that either the wagon or the gun must first be moved clear.
+
+
+=67.= _Driving up steep hills._
+
+1. To exert his strength to the utmost when pulling up hill, the
+draught horse must get as much weight as possible forward and into the
+collar. By assuming a lower and more advanced carriage of the head and
+neck than he would do if moving balanced and out of draught, he is able
+to add considerably to his power. He should therefore be allowed full
+liberty of rein when ascending a steep hill.
+
+2. A draught horse can put more weight into his collar if ridden.
+Gunners should, therefore, be mounted on the off lead and centre horses
+when circumstances demand it. All men riding draught horses up hill
+should lean forward.
+
+3. When manœuvring off the road, steep ascents should be taken in line
+to avoid checks.
+
+When on a road or track, and if circumstances permit, the battery
+should be halted at the foot of the hill and sent up either by sections
+or subsections, with about 10 yards’ distance between carriages.
+
+4. On exceptional occasions, such as when the team is exhausted, an
+extra pair may be hooked in to each carriage, but it must be remembered
+that this is of little use unless the ascent is straight, and that in
+any case it makes steady draught more difficult.
+
+5. Should a check occur when the column is closed up, the lead drivers
+in rear must be prepared to throw off their horses to the right or left.
+
+6. The pace should be a steady walk during the whole ascent, by which
+the top will be reached more easily and surely than if an attempt is
+made to “_spring_” the hill.
+
+7. The detachments can also assist with drag ropes hooked into the drag
+washers, or by applying “_wheel purchases_,” if the carriage actually
+sticks. To use a drag rope as a “_wheel purchase_” it is hooked round
+the felloe near the lowest spoke, and is then laid on the tyre and
+passed over the wheel to the front. Should the wheel slip round, a drag
+rope may be wound round the felloe and tyre, with the turns about a
+foot apart to enable it to get a grip.
+
+8. After going up a steep hill, the horses should be halted, but when
+this cannot be done, they should be allowed to move slowly to recover
+their wind.
+
+
+=68.= _Jibbing._
+
+Horses jib from various causes, such as sore shoulders, a too heavy
+load, bad driving, sore mouth, lameness, and vice.
+
+The whip only aggravates the evil. A handful of gravel placed in the
+horse’s mouth often starts a jibber pulling at once especially if the
+wheels are manned at the same moment. The latter is important in any
+case.
+
+
+=69.= _Driving down hill._
+
+1. In driving down hill, the lead and centre drivers hold their horses
+back to allow the wheel driver the management of the carriage, but the
+traces must be kept up; the wheel driver with his right hand on the
+leading rein keeps his horses steadily in the breeching, taking care
+not to throw them on their haunches, and, in the case of shaft draught
+harness, not to let too much work fall on the off horse.
+
+2. For moderately steep descents, the brake can be used. Should a
+descent be so steep that the brake is not sufficient, the detachment
+must hold on with the drag ropes hooked into the drag washers on the
+gun carriage or wagon body.
+
+
+=70.= _Applying the brake._
+
+The brake should be put on sufficiently tight to check but not to skid
+the wheel. In crossing a valley the man in charge of the brake must
+begin taking it off soon enough for the wheels to be quite free before
+the beginning of the rise on the other side is reached, or in fording a
+river before the carriage gets into the water.
+
+
+=71.= _Reversing in narrow roads._
+
+Before attempting to reverse, the carriage should be drawn up as close
+to the side of the road as possible. The carriage is next unlimbered,
+and the lead and centre horses unhooked and taken out. The gun or wagon
+body is then reversed, followed by the limber.
+
+
+=72.= _Driving a pair of horses from the box._
+
+1. When driven from the box, horses will neither work comfortably nor
+be under perfect control, unless so coupled that when on the move with
+an even bearing on the reins their heads are straight. The bearing of
+the bits on their mouths should be light, but constant, and the reins
+should never be allowed to slip through the driver’s fingers.
+
+A pair of horses, worked as such, should frequently be interchanged.
+This will prevent the acquirement of bad habits, such as pulling away
+from the pole, shouldering the pole, &c.
+
+2. _To put to._--The horses should be led up alongside the pole by the
+noseband (not by the bit), the chain should then be passed through
+the ring of the breast collar or kidney link of the hames. The traces
+should next be fastened, the outer ones first, and finally the horses
+should be poled up and coupled together. In unhooking the above
+procedure is reversed.
+
+The correct adjustment of the _coupling reins_ requires great care.
+With a view to this, the outer reins have a number of holes punched
+in them, up and down which the buckles of the coupling reins can be
+shifted, thus enabling them to be shortened or lengthened to suit each
+particular horse’s mouth. For instance, if the near horse carries his
+head to the near side, the coupling rein on the off side should be
+taken up, when his head will be straightened, and _vice versâ_.
+
+3. _Sitting on the box._--The driver should sit square to his front on
+the box, which should be low enough to allow of his legs being well
+bent at the knee. If the box seat is too high he is liable to be pulled
+off when a horse stumbles.
+
+4. _How to hold the reins and whip._--The near rein passes over the
+forefinger, the off rein between the middle and third fingers of the
+left hand, both reins fall through the palm of the hand and hang loose
+on the left side of the driver’s knees. The reins are kept in position
+in the hand by the pressure of the third and fourth fingers assisted
+by the second; the thumb and forefinger should not be used for this
+purpose. The wrist should be rounded.
+
+The whip should be held between the lower part of the thumb and the
+base of the forefinger of the right hand, thus leaving the fingers
+free. The point of the whip should be carried up, the stick inclined
+across the body and to the front. The position of the whip should not
+be changed when the right hand manipulates the reins. When required,
+the right hand can be placed on the reins in front of the left, the
+first and second fingers on top of the near rein, and the other two
+between the reins. The former grip the near rein and the latter the off
+rein.
+
+Reins should always be shortened or lengthened from the front; _i.e._,
+either pushed back through the left hand or pulled out through the left
+hand.
+
+5. _Use of the whip._--The whip should be employed as sparingly as
+possible. When used, the thong should be applied on the shoulder and
+drawn across from right to left, or _vice versâ_.
+
+6. _Turning._--To turn or incline to the right, the right hand grasps
+the right rein in the full of the hand, knuckles up and inclined to the
+front. This gives the firmest hold and at the same time allows of the
+position of the whip being maintained. To turn to the left, the left
+rein is grasped in the same manner.
+
+7. _Driving up hill._--An even and steady walk should be maintained
+when travelling up a steep hill; if the load is exceptionally heavy and
+circumstances permit, the horses should be allowed to incline from one
+side of the road to the other as the wagon ascends.
+
+8. _Driving down hill._--The pace cannot be too slow in descending a
+hill, and the brake should not be applied until the horses take the
+breeching. When the shoe is used the wheel to which it is applied
+should be chained to the carriage; this prevents all chance of accident
+should the shoe become unshipped when travelling over rough ground.
+
+
+TRAINING THE YOUNG HORSE.
+
+=73.= _General principles._
+
+1. The training of the horse must be gradual, and accompanied by a
+steady development of his physical powers.
+
+It is better to give a remount two short lessons a day than one long
+one, for it must be remembered that the tendons and muscles of a young,
+immature animal are easily injured by too much continuous work, and
+they must be gradually strengthened in order to stand the strain to
+which they will be subjected.
+
+Simplicity and suggestion should be prominent features in the first
+stage of training; the horse not only has to learn the meaning of the
+bridle and the leg, but must also adjust his balance to carrying a
+weight on his back.
+
+2. Free forward movement should, therefore, be the first aim of the
+trainer, and as the horse learns the meaning of the bridle he should
+gradually be made to move well up to it and at the same time taught to
+carry his head for height in as good a position as nature will allow.
+
+This may be called the first stage of the training, and should be
+carried out on a snaffle, if available. When the horse will go forward
+quietly he should be worked in the open.
+
+3. The second stage of the training should consist in balancing and
+collecting the horse, in teaching him to turn on his hocks, to passage,
+to rein back, and to obey the aids quickly when ridden with one hand;
+to go quietly by himself or in company and to leave other horses
+freely; and where necessary to become accustomed to sword and rifle.
+
+A few horses are naturally so well balanced, that if they have good
+tempers and are properly ridden, this part of their education offers
+no difficulties, but most artillery remounts will be heavy in front
+and awkward to turn excepting on the forehand. For handiness and for
+the safety of the rider they should be taught to carry more weight
+on their hocks--in fact to move in the most balanced manner that is
+possible, having regard to their make and to the retention of their
+liberty of movement.
+
+This portion of the training, or most of it, should be carried out with
+the universal bridle, and while the pressure of the legs will often
+have to be strong, the handling of the reins should be of the gentlest,
+or the trainer will defeat his own ends.
+
+4. The third stage of the training consists in teaching the horse to go
+quietly in draught in any position in a team.
+
+5. Patience, firmness, and pluck are necessary to all entrusted with
+the training of young horses. Some horses are very much quicker at
+learning than others, and no rule can be laid down; on no account
+should the trainer attempt to hurry matters.
+
+The trainer should communicate to his pupil his appreciation of any
+progress made by immediately rewarding him with a handful of corn or
+a carrot. Under no circumstances should he lose his temper with his
+horse, and punishment should only be resorted to when it is certain
+that the horse understands what he is required to do, but will not do
+it.
+
+Instructors must not imagine that the animal can learn a lesson only by
+constant repetition. A horse is quick to receive new impressions, and
+remembers them after comparatively few lessons, provided they are given
+in a proper way.
+
+6. As with recruits, jumping should be constantly practised throughout
+the training, commencing at an early stage over very low obstacles and
+always with a due consideration for the horse’s legs.
+
+7. The same system of training is not applicable to every breed and
+condition of horse. The principles, however, are the same, and must be
+modified to suit the temperament of the animal, and his condition when
+he reaches the trainer.
+
+Factors, which greatly influence the duration of the training and its
+ultimate success, are the capability of the rider and instructor; the
+temperament, make, and condition of the horse; and the training ground
+available.
+
+
+=74.= _First stage._
+
+1. Remounts arrive in all kinds of condition, and the methods adopted
+with them should be those best suited to their nature, condition and
+age.
+
+The first day or two will be profitably spent by the trainer in getting
+thoroughly acquainted with his pupil. A snaffle having been put in the
+horse’s mouth, the trainer should lead him about, giving him confidence
+and making him acquainted with his voice. He may then handle him about
+the head and forehand. To prevent injuries to the mouth, it is a good
+plan at this early stage to lead the horse by reins attached to the
+D’s. of the head-collar, the snaffle being left to hang loosely in his
+mouth. During these lessons the horse should be given a handful of corn
+or green meat from time to time.
+
+2. _Backing a remount._--As soon as the remount has become accustomed
+to being led from either side and is quiet, he may be saddled, but
+before he is mounted he should be allowed time to accustom himself to
+the feel of the saddle.
+
+An assistant should stand in front of the horse, holding a rein of
+the snaffle in each hand; the man saddling him should hold the saddle
+by the back arch with the pommel over his right hip (the stirrups and
+girths having previously been thrown over the seat); he should then
+place the saddle, quickly and quietly, on the horse’s back, let the
+girths down, and tighten them gradually.
+
+In backing a horse for the first time the help of two assistants is
+advisable, one on the off side, who should hold the head collar in his
+right hand and the off stirrup in his left, the other on the near side
+holding the snaffle rein in his left hand. The trainer grasping the
+back arch of the saddle in his right and the front arch in his left
+hand, should stand close to his horse on the near side, and raise his
+left foot up behind him by bending his knee; the second assistant will
+then grasp his leg just above the ankle and raise him quietly into the
+saddle on his stomach. This should be repeated several times until the
+horse is accustomed to the weight, when the assistant will place the
+rider’s left foot in the stirrup, who will then raise himself in the
+stirrup and throw his right leg clean over the horse’s quarters and
+drop quietly into the saddle; the remount should then be led a pace or
+two forward by the assistant in order to accustom him to the weight
+whilst moving; the rider avoiding too strong a pressure with the legs.
+
+After two or three lessons, if the horse is quiet, the trainer may
+mount with the stirrup in the usual way, great care being taken not to
+touch him with the toe.
+
+3. Considerable time and special pains should be taken to teach the
+young horse to stand absolutely still when being mounted or dismounted.
+
+In dismounting the first few times it is advisable for an assistant to
+stand in front of the horse, and the rider after throwing his right
+leg over to the near side should remain lying across the saddle as in
+mounting, then quit his left stirrup and slide quietly to the ground.
+This method will prevent any possibility of the rider sticking his toe
+into the horse’s ribs, which is liable to make him unsteady.
+
+4. During this period the trainer should devote his time to riding the
+horse about at a free walk, slow trot and canter, and to teaching him
+to stand still when required, and to lead easily.
+
+To teach the remount to move forward freely at the walk, the rider
+should hold his reins long and use his legs.
+
+To teach him to stand still, constant practice and the use of an
+assistant when necessary are required; the trainer should mount and
+dismount from either side, time after time, not allowing the horse to
+move forward immediately after mounting.
+
+The horse should also be taught to do large circles to either hand
+and practised over very small jumps and should be ridden frequently
+outside barracks.
+
+5. In exceptional cases it may be necessary to devote time to raising
+or lowering the horse’s head to the right position as far as nature
+will allow. It should be borne in mind that the same good carriage of
+head and suppleness of neck cannot be expected of all makes and shapes
+of horses.
+
+The raising or lowering of the horse’s head must be done gradually, and
+as much as possible on the move, for if done at the halt he is apt to
+get behind the bit, and his freedom of action will be endangered. It
+should be effected by the combined action of the legs and hands. The
+legs compel the horse to move forward, drive and keep him up to the
+bit; the hands through the reins and snaffle regulate the position of
+the horse’s head and neck. The trainer must ride with a sympathetic
+hand; that is, he must relax the pressure as soon as the horse places
+his head in the required position, only retaining sufficient feeling
+on the mouth to maintain the head in position. If the horse’s head
+requires raising, the rider does so by holding his hands high. If the
+head requires lowering, the hands are depressed, but without jerking
+the reins.
+
+6. This stage may seem tedious, but it must not be hurried. It is most
+important towards moulding the horse’s future disposition, and for
+building up his physical strength and preparing him for harder work
+later on.
+
+
+=75.= _Second stage._
+
+1. _Balancing and collecting the young horse._--Hitherto the rider’s
+only endeavour has been to teach the horse to go freely up to the
+bridle keeping his head at the proper height. He must now be taught
+to give to the bridle by bending his neck at the poll and slightly
+yielding his lower jaw, care being taken that in yielding the head is
+not lowered.
+
+The trainer must not attempt much at one time. The longer a continuous
+pressure on the reins is maintained, the less inclined is the horse
+to yield, for the discomfort becomes less, the mouth losing its
+sensitiveness. The application of the legs must often be strong to make
+the horse yield.
+
+A natural law of leverage governs the position of the horse’s head
+as the head and neck are moved forward and downwards, the centre of
+gravity of the whole horse is brought forward and he becomes heavier in
+the forehand and freer or lighter behind. At a trot or canter the horse
+naturally draws his head up to lighten the weight on his fore legs, and
+to give them free and equal play with the hind legs.
+
+The young horse should be trained to carry his head fairly high at the
+trot and canter, and at such angle with the neck as will allow the bit
+to have the best bearing on the bars of the mouth. As a horse cannot
+put his fore feet down on the ground beyond his nose, he extends his
+neck when galloping in order to lengthen his stride. By thus moving his
+centre of gravity forward he lightens the weight on his quarters and
+obtains the full propelling power of his hind legs.
+
+A horse when jumping makes use of his neck both as an assistance in
+taking off and to adjust his balance on landing; his head therefore
+should remain perfectly free during every phase of the jump.
+
+_The bending lesson_ (_see_ Sec. =44=) is useful for balancing and
+collecting the young horse and for teaching him to obey the rider’s
+legs. Instruction should commence either on foot or with the horse’s
+head towards the wall, care being taken to make him bend correctly.
+
+The exercises described in Sec. =46= are useful for teaching the young
+horse to walk, trot and canter collectedly, but at first plenty of time
+must be allowed for the horse to settle down quietly at each successive
+period of cantering, trotting or walking.
+
+2. _The rein back_ is also a useful exercise in the training of a young
+horse. It collects him and teaches him to get his haunches under him,
+but it should never be practised for more than a few minutes at a time,
+nor should it be attempted until the horse will move well up to his
+bridle.
+
+To teach a horse to rein back, it is best to begin on foot and to
+continue mounted, assisted by a man on foot.
+
+The man on foot should stand in front of the horse and endeavour to
+make him go back quietly one or two paces at a time. He should feel the
+bit gently, but without a dead continuous pressure; if necessary, he
+may give a light tap to the horse’s leading foreleg, should he decline
+to move backwards.
+
+When mounted, collect the horse by leg pressure and bring the weight of
+the body slightly forward; feel one side (say the right) of the horse’s
+mouth by the least movement of the wrist, at the same time apply the
+pressure of the left leg to the horse’s side so as to prevent him from
+moving his hindquarters to the left; lean the body a little to the
+right, and feel both reins. As soon as the horse draws back the off
+fore leg, reverse the aids until he draws back the near fore leg and so
+on. The ultimate object in view is to teach him to go backwards with
+his head carried as high as when going forward.
+
+3. During this stage the remount should also be taught to change his
+legs at the canter, for which purpose the figure of eight (_see_ Sec.
+=46=) is a good exercise, provided the horse is first of all made to go
+kindly and collectedly on the larger circle.
+
+4. In order that the horse may retain his full freedom of movement he
+should frequently be made to walk out fast and canter with a loose
+rein. To make a horse walk out, ease the reins and close the legs
+alternately, not both legs together as in the trot.
+
+
+=76.= _Teaching a horse to stand still without being held._
+
+A horse can be trained to stand still without being held in the
+following way:--
+
+Replace the rein with a strong piece of rope, throw the rope rein thus
+made over the animal’s head, and fasten a sack to the end of it; the
+effect of this is that as the horse moves forward he treads on the
+sack, and gives himself a severe job in the mouth; after a few lessons
+it will be found that the horse will not move when the reins are thrown
+over his head, and the sack can be left off.
+
+
+=77.= _Teaching the young horse to jump._
+
+1. _General principles._--The aim of the instructor should be to teach
+the horse to jump ordinary natural obstacles willingly and safely. To
+this end outdoor jumping courses will be found very valuable. There
+should be one with small and another with fair-sized jumps, all as much
+like natural fences as possible, and laid out on cinder-tracks so as to
+be available all the year round.
+
+Jumps in the school should not only represent height, but breadth; the
+horse to be useful must learn to jump out as well as up.
+
+The secret in making a safe fencer is gradual and systematic training;
+even if a horse shows great promise when first jumped his education
+should in no way be hurried. He may lose his courage through an early
+and unnecessary fall.
+
+2. _First lessons._--There are many ways of commencing; if the horse
+is fairly fit and will answer to the hand and leg he may be ridden
+over low and simple fences at once. To avoid all chance of failure it
+will, however, generally be found best to begin on foot and either to
+lead or lunge him over the jump. In a school or confined space the best
+method is first to lead the horse over a bar laid on the ground, and
+afterwards to lead him up to it and let him go. The obstacle should be
+gradually raised, always being put up firmly, and a man should stand at
+the far end of the school with a basket of corn. In a very short time
+most horses will jump a fence 3 feet 6 inches high with enjoyment. The
+class of obstacle should be varied as much as possible as time goes on.
+
+The lungeing whip should never be used, as the horse will watch it
+instead of measuring his distance and calculating the jump.
+
+If the single lungeing-rein and cavesson are used, the rein may be
+attached to the front of the cavesson and the animal led over the
+jump, or it may be fastened to a side D, when he should be made to
+take the fence on the circle. If done in this way it is a good plan to
+have a wing made to carry the rein over and prevent it catching in the
+obstacle and checking the horse suddenly.
+
+3. _Further training in jumping._--After a sufficient schooling
+following any of the above methods, the remount may be sent down a
+jumping-lane if one is available, an old horse acting as pilot on the
+first occasion, or if there is no lane he may be ridden over small
+fences in the open. The first jumping lessons should be given at a
+trot. At this pace horses learn where to take off and jump from their
+hocks without chancing a fence.
+
+When a young but not impetuous horse is being ridden at a fence, he
+should be allowed to go his own pace in reason; in this way he learns
+to adopt the pace most suited to the obstacle and to get back on his
+hocks for a high one.
+
+
+=78.= _Third stage._
+
+1. Before a horse is put into draught he should fulfil the following
+conditions:--
+
+      i. Stand still to be mounted or dismounted.
+     ii. Be balanced, as well as make and shape will allow.
+    iii. Be able to do a figure of 8 correctly, passage, rein
+           back, halt collectedly; change his legs when turning, so
+           as to lead with the correct fore and hind leg, and when
+           turned about do so actively on his hocks and not on his
+           fore hand.
+     iv. Be a good jumper.
+      v. Be accustomed to gun fire and traffic.
+     vi. Go alone or in company, at any pace required of him
+           without pulling, and be ready to shorten his stride and
+           pull up when required.
+
+2. All officers should understand how to train horses to draught.
+
+The remount should be harnessed with great care, and led about until
+the novelty has worn off. He should then be put into the hand centre in
+the following manner:--
+
+The drivers being mounted, and the remaining five horses in the team
+standing just out of draught, the remount should be led up to his place
+by two men, one on each side, the man on the off side holding the
+horse’s head rope, which should previously have been undone. The man on
+the near side should then hand the leading rein to the centre driver,
+and go to the off quarters of the remount, moving round the horse’s
+head to get there. He should next push the horse’s quarter gently over
+until the animal stands square to its front in the team, and make much
+of him. He should then take the traces quietly and hook in as described
+in Sec. =58=. The remaining five horses should now be put into their
+collars, and at the command “WALK MARCH” the team should move straight
+to its front. The centre driver’s whip should be in his leg iron,
+and he should use his right hand to make much of his hand horse. The
+remount should not be asked to take the collar until he settles down
+and walks along quietly, When this is the case, the man who has been
+holding the head rope on the off side may knot it round the animal’s
+neck. He must, however, keep with the team, and be prepared to hold
+the rope or head collar again when turning is undertaken. All wheeling
+should be to the left at first. When turns to the right are attempted
+the greatest care should be taken to prevent the remount from running
+back and getting a leg over a trace.
+
+As soon as the animal goes quietly in the off centre, knows his work,
+and understands the application of the whip as an aid, he should be put
+into the hand lead and then into the hand wheel. When he goes well in
+any place in the team his education is complete.
+
+
+RIDING AND RETRAINING AWKWARD HORSES.
+
+=79.= _General remarks._
+
+Remounts joining the Service unbacked or unspoilt, unless exceptionally
+vicious, ought never to come under this heading. A horse properly
+trained in the first instance will only develop faults through
+subsequent bad riding or ill-treatment.
+
+The results of bad handling are shown in defective carriage and paces;
+in a nervous, sulky, or irritable temperament; or in a combination of
+the two.
+
+When the animal is put back into the ranks, he should be given to a
+good horseman, and if possible not be ridden by anyone else. Horses
+rarely forget bad habits, and quickly relapse into them.
+
+The work of retraining a horse is much more difficult than that of
+“_making_” a young and untrained one; riders should therefore be
+specially selected.
+
+The trainer should first make himself thoroughly acquainted with the
+animal’s faults, and then set to work to systematically and patiently
+eradicate them. It will, in some cases, be found best to treat the
+horse as untrained and begin his education afresh.
+
+As the work will usually be of a corrective character the horse’s corn
+and exercise should be carefully regulated according to his amenability
+to discipline: good results cannot be obtained as long as the animal is
+“above himself.”
+
+
+=80.= _Pullers._
+
+1. The usual causes of pulling are:--
+
+      i. Excitability.
+     ii. Pain.
+    iii. Fear.
+     iv. Freshness and want of work.
+      v. Hard-mouth.
+     vi. Bad training.
+
+2. _Excitability._--Some horses, which are naturally of a nervous,
+highly-strung disposition, become upset by unaccustomed sights and
+sounds, a crowd, or galloping at a fast pace, especially in company
+with other horses.
+
+No special bit will cure this kind of puller, the only remedy is plenty
+of work commencing at slow paces. Only the best horsemen in the unit,
+possessing patience and good hands, should be allowed to ride them.
+
+3. _Pain._--Another frequent cause of pulling is pain. A horse’s mouth
+is most sensitive, and many horses pull through the pain caused by the
+bit, or because their grinder teeth are long and sharp and thus cut the
+sides of their cheeks. Horse’s mouths, especially of those who have
+suddenly taken to pulling, should be constantly examined, particularly
+the bars, under the tongue and close up against the grinders. A
+neglected wound in the mouth may make a young horse pull or spoil his
+mouth by forcing him to hold the bit on one side to protect the injured
+part. If a horse’s mouth is found to be sore, he should be given a
+rest, being exercised if necessary on a cavesson, and when the wound
+is healed ridden for a time in a snaffle. If the grinders are long and
+sharp it is a simple operation to remove the sharp points and edges
+with a rasp. The corners of the lips also may become sore owing to the
+bit being too narrow, or through being rubbed; the curb chain may also
+injure the chin-groove, in which case the wound should first be healed
+and then a guard should be used.
+
+4. _Fear._--Some horses pull through fear. The only remedy for this is
+to endeavour to accustom them to the cause of their alarm. They should
+be treated kindly and only ridden by careful, patient men. If a horse
+in his early training has been taught to obey the voice, this will
+often be of great assistance in calming him.
+
+5. _Freshness._--The remedy for a horse which pulls from this cause is
+to give him more slow, steady work, and less food.
+
+6. _Hard-mouth and bad training._--The best results are, as a rule,
+obtained from retraining by a good horseman and plenty of school work,
+especially cantering in small circles and figures of 8. If he pulls
+with his mouth open, it should be shut by an adjustable noseband.
+
+7. The great object with a puller is to get him to go collectedly. His
+head should be kept up, but a dead pull on the reins must be avoided,
+as this enables him to set his head and neck against the pressure on
+the bit; instead, give and take to him alternately with the reins.
+
+If a horse throws his head up, and pulls with his head in that
+position, the standing martingale, properly applied, will stop him.
+
+
+=81.= _Refusers._
+
+1. Refusals may be due to any of the following reasons, or to a
+combination of several:--
+
+       i. Insufficient elementary schooling.
+      ii. Want of heart or nerve in the rider.
+     iii. From the horse having been jobbed in the mouth or
+          unintentionally spurred when jumping, thus receiving
+          severe punishment for obeying the rider’s wishes.
+      iv. Sickened by too much jumping, especially on hard ground.
+       v. Seeing other horses refuse.
+      vi. Lameness or sore shins.
+     vii. Ill-fitting or too severe a bit.
+    viii. Sore back or badly fitting saddle.
+      ix. Want of heart or nerve in the horse.
+       x. Vice.
+
+2. Before attempting to effect a cure every effort should be made to
+diagnose the cause.
+
+In many cases it is advisable to do a good deal of work on foot,
+leading and lungeing the horse over low fences. As soon as obedience is
+assured, the horse should be mounted again.
+
+3. The best way to deal with a horse that has been unintentionally
+ill-treated in the mouth is to remove the curb chain if he has one, and
+to jump him over low obstacles without reins, and then gradually to
+bring him on to jumping with reins.
+
+4. A horse may sometimes refuse because he has lost his nerve
+temporarily. In such a case, if he is taken three or four times over
+quite a small fence, and then brought back to the original one, he will
+probably jump it all right.
+
+5. Sharp rowels may be necessary on a slug or a cur, but the liability
+of the rider to spur his mount under some conditions without meaning to
+do so is a disadvantage.
+
+6. The faint-hearted or vicious horse should be treated with
+resolution, and be made to feel that the rider is determined to jump.
+This is communicated to the horse by holding the reins in both hands
+and feeling his mouth with firmness, but not roughly or with undue
+pressure, and above all by pressing him to the bit by the legs. Care
+must be taken not to ride the horse slantingways at the jump or at a
+spot near the outside edge of the fence; the rider should be on the
+look out for the horse swerving round or running out. The horse should
+be taken slowly up to within a few lengths of the fence and then put
+straight at it by the rider increasing his leg pressure and decreasing
+slightly the feeling on the horse’s mouth.
+
+If he whips round, the horse should be turned back the opposite way
+to face the fence, then reined back a short distance and when quite
+square, put at it again. If necessary he should be helped on with the
+spur without relaxing the leg pressure. Once over the fence the horse
+should be made much of.
+
+
+=82.= _Horses that rush at their fences._
+
+1. Horses that persist in rushing at their fences and that get very
+excited when jumping are best cured by steady, quiet practice. Such a
+horse should be circled round in front of the fence as though he were
+not going to jump it, until he settles down, when he may be jumped over
+the obstacle.
+
+He should be taught to stand quietly in front of a fence.
+
+On no account should he be spurred or have his mouth jerked. After
+landing over a fence he should be eased up gently to a slow pace and
+never allowed to get out of hand.
+
+He should not be jumped when very fresh.
+
+
+=83.= _Horses that decline to leave the ranks, and “fretting” horses._
+
+In addition to putting a good man on their backs such horses may be
+greatly improved by being kept stabled alone and ridden alone for some
+months. If a horse refuses to leave the ranks, do not slacken the reins
+by pushing the hands forward, but feel his mouth and press him on with
+the legs. Jogging the horse in the ribs with the heels or spurs and
+slackening the reins will make him worse. It he continues to decline
+to leave the ranks, rein him back two or three feet, then suddenly take
+him unawares and urge him forward with leg pressure.
+
+
+=84.= _Horses that decline to stand still when being mounted._
+
+1. Such horses should be mounted and dismounted on both sides slowly,
+time after time every day.
+
+2. If the horse refuses to stand still after this treatment the
+following method may be efficacious.
+
+Put a loop under the horse’s upper lip and over the poll with a
+slip knot, and when he becomes restive give it a slight jerk and
+say “Steady.” The horse connects the sound of the voice with the
+pain caused by the twitch, and he will learn to remain still even
+without the word being said. The twitch must never be used except in
+conjunction with the voice.
+
+After doing this a few times, when mounting, the trainer should
+dispense with the twitch, and with the left hand holding the reins and
+the cheek piece of the bridle, should say the word “steady,” and swing
+himself into the saddle, without leaving go of the cheek piece till he
+is firmly seated; the horse connects the word and the pressure of the
+hand on the cheek piece with the twitch, and will, as a rule, stand as
+steadily as he would with the twitch still on him.
+
+3. The best way to mount a horse that will not stand still is as
+follows: With the left hand gather the reins loosely and seize the
+cheek piece, hold the stirrup iron in the right hand and allow the
+horse to walk round. Then place the left foot in the stirrup, and
+transfer the right hand to the pommel or other part of the saddle. The
+horse will then revolve in a small circle, of which the right toe of
+the rider is the centre, and the latter should be able to mount without
+difficulty.
+
+
+=85.= _General vice and bad temper._
+
+1. Such horses are most likely to be improved by a careful regulation
+of work and feeding, by being stabled by themselves, and by gentle
+treatment both in the stable and outside.
+
+2. _Kicking and bucking._--If a horse begins to kick or buck, sit back,
+and take the reins in both hands--keep the horse’s head up or pulled
+right round to one side--get him on the move and away from other horses
+as quickly as possible.
+
+3. _Rearing._--If a horse starts to rear, take the reins in both hands,
+lean forward and leave his mouth alone. If the rider leans his weight
+on that part of the reins which passes from one hand to the other over
+the withers (_see_ Sec. =39=, 4) it is an assistance. Get the horse on
+the move at the first opportunity, if necessary hitting him over the
+quarters, but not between the ears.
+
+
+=86.= _Refractory draught horses._
+
+1. The vices enumerated in this section should only occur in the case
+of hired horses or of remounts joining on mobilization.
+
+2. _A horse that refuses to be led up to his place in draught._--If all
+persuasion fails he should be blindfolded with a horse rubber, and then
+led up; the cloth should not be removed until the team starts.
+
+3. _A horse that refuses to stand still when being hooked in._--One
+fore leg should either be held up or strapped up.
+
+4. _A horse that jibs at starting._--Jibbing has already been dealt
+with in Sec. =68=. If there is plenty of time one of the horse’s fore
+legs should be strapped up until he tires, and then the attempt may
+be made to start him. Tapping a horse below and behind the knee is
+sometimes effective.
+
+5. _A kicker._--Use either a kicking strap or a tight bearing rein.
+
+6. _A puller._--Use a bearing rein and side rein.[5] Both should be
+fitted tight when the horse is standing still, or they will be useless
+when he moves.
+
+7. _Leaning on the pole._--A dandy brush strapped to the pole will
+often cure this.
+
+8. _Leaning away from the pole._--Change the horse’s side.
+
+[5] Neither bearing reins nor side reins are part of peace equipment
+stores, but they can be made up by the saddler.
+
+
+CARE AND DISPOSAL OF SADDLERY AND HARNESS.
+
+
+=87.= _Care of saddlery and harness._
+
+1. Care should be exercised in the handling of all articles of harness
+and saddlery. Saddles should not be dropped or thrown about as
+fractured arches or broken side bars may result, and the usefulness of
+collar pads is liable to be destroyed if subjected to unfair usage.
+
+Minor defects should be attended to at once. Stitching should be tested
+from time to time, as the life of thread is short compared with that of
+leather.
+
+Stirrup leathers should be exchanged occasionally or be shortened at
+the buckle end, so as to bring the wear on fresh holes.
+
+Girth tabs require special attention and must be renewed as the holes
+wear.
+
+2. The leather work of all saddlery should be kept soft and supple.
+Seats and flaps of saddles and handled parts of reins should not be
+polished. It is particularly important to keep leather girths supple
+with grease.
+
+3. It is rarely necessary to scrub leather work. Parts affected by
+sweat from the horse, such as inside surfaces of breast collars,
+girths, &c., should be sponged after use with clean cold water, and
+then soaped.
+
+4. Leather must not be washed with soda or in very hot water, as its
+vitality is quickly affected by either; nor must it be subjected to
+heat from a fire, as this destroys its durability.
+
+5. All saddlery and harness should be taken to pieces periodically
+and carefully inspected. Once or twice a year certain parts, such as
+the inside of breechings, should be dubbed, the leather having first
+been moistened with a sponge, and in cold weather the dubbin should be
+warmed before use. After two or three days the residue of the dubbin
+should be removed with a dry brush or rubber.
+
+All leather work should be dubbed before being put away in store, and
+should be overhauled from time to time, especially in hot or damp
+climates.
+
+6. Ropes, web girths and whips should be scrubbed with clean cold water
+when necessary, and pipeclay should not be used on them.
+
+Saddle blankets, panne’s, and numnahs should be placed in the sun or
+wind to dry, and then beaten and brushed.
+
+7. Steel or iron work such as bits should be wiped over immediately on
+arriving in billets, stables or camp, and then rubbed with an oil rag.
+This will save much subsequent trouble if done before rust has time to
+form.
+
+
+=88.= _Disposal of saddlery and harness in harness rooms or stables._
+
+1. _Saddlery._--The _breastpiece_ is placed on the saddle peg, the
+sides hanging straight down.
+
+The _traces_ are folded in three equal lengths, secured by the bearing
+straps, and are hung by the hooks to the Ds on the breastpiece.
+
+The _bridle_ should be hung up complete, as on the horse’s head, the
+curb hooked over the front of the bit.
+
+The _head rope_ is hung up as on the horse.
+
+The _saddle_ is placed on the peg cantle outwards, with the surcingle
+and girth buckled as if on the horse. The stirrups hang at riding
+length inside the backband of the head collar.
+
+_Nose bags_ if not in use are kept with the other articles of horse kit.
+
+2. _Harness._--The _saddles_ are hung from the pegs, the blankets being
+placed over the pegs and under the breast collars.
+
+The _breast collar_ is hung on the harness peg by the padded neck strap
+under the blanket. In the case of lead harness the short traces are
+hooked to the end link of the chains attached to the tugs and hang
+straight down. The traces are hung by hooking the Ds on to small pegs
+on each side of the harness peg.
+
+The _bridle_ is hung on the harness peg as if on the horse’s head--the
+reins should hang down from the bit.
+
+The _head rope_ is hung up as on the horse.
+
+The _breeching_ is hung under the padded neck strap.
+
+The _legging_ is hung on the same peg as the inside trace of the riding
+set, by the top strap, which is buckled; the other straps are left
+unbuckled ready to put on.
+
+The _whip_ is hung by the hand loop on the same peg as the inside trace
+of the hand set of harness.
+
+
+=89.= _Disposal of saddlery and harness in bivouac._
+
+1. _Saddlery._--The _saddle_ complete is placed on the ground resting
+on the pommel; the stirrup irons are hooked on the points of the side
+bars.
+
+The _bridle_ is placed with the head piece of the bit on the side bars.
+
+The whole is wrapped in the harness wrapper.
+
+2. _Harness._--_Harness and saddlery_ are to be laid down one yard
+in rear of the line of heel pegs. The _breast collar_ is placed on
+its lower edge in a circle. The _breeching_ is coiled round it. The
+traces are round the breeching. The _saddle_ is placed on top, seat
+uppermost, the bottom of the flaps being turned up inwards--this keeps
+the breast collar from being crushed when the harness is tied up.
+
+The whole of the head gear is laid across the top of the seat.
+
+The _legging_ is placed inside the breast collar under the saddle of
+the riding set. The _whip_ is placed inside the breast collar of the
+hand set. The whole is wrapped in the harness wrapper.
+
+
+CARE OF WAGONS.
+
+
+=90.= _General instructions._
+
+(_See also Handbooks of the various guns._)
+
+1. It is only by giving constant attention to the vehicles that
+transport service can be efficient.
+
+The axles and the pipe-boxes of wheels should be frequently greased,
+and should be kept free of dust, grit and old grease which contains
+small particles of metal and sand, that wear down the surrounding parts.
+
+2. To grease the axle, remove the wheel and carefully clean the axle
+and inside of the pipe-box. Then smear the inside of the pipe-box and
+the outside of the axle with fresh grease and replace the wheel.
+
+3. Wheels, showing too much play on the axletree arm, should have a
+leather or steel washer placed on the arm at the outer end of the
+pipe-box, between it and the linch-pin washer.
+
+In very dry climates it may be necessary at times to keep the wheels
+constantly wetted to prevent the woodwork warping, cracking and
+shrinking.
+
+
+LOADING A WAGON OR CART.
+
+
+=91.= _General instructions._
+
+1. _Wagons._--The battery commander should have an inventory of what
+each wagon is to carry made out the day previous to a march, unless
+they are G.S. wagons horsed and loaded according to the official tables
+in the Field Service Manual. Bulk as well as weight must be taken into
+consideration in assessing the loads, this is necessary to secure good
+packing and efficient transport service. The weights of the various
+articles are given in the Field Service Manual.
+
+The load which is to go in each wagon should be placed beside it before
+the packing begins. An experienced man should then get up into the
+wagon and name the articles in the order in which he wishes them to be
+handed up to him. When the packing is complete the tarpaulin should be
+roped carefully over the wagon to ensure against wet and loss.
+
+2. _Loading a two-wheeled cart._--Care should be taken that the cart
+when loaded is properly balanced. There should be a weight of about
+10 lbs. on the tugs. If the load is placed too far forward, the off
+horse is unnecessarily weighted: if too far back, draught becomes more
+difficult.
+
+
+SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTAIN ARTILLERY.
+
+
+=92.= _Position of driver._
+
+1. On parade the driver stands to attention on the near side of his
+mule, holding the loop of the rein in his left hand, which should hang
+down by his side; while with the right hand he takes hold of the double
+rein about 6 inches behind the mule’s jaw, keeping the animal’s head in
+its natural position.
+
+“STAND AT EASE.”--Keeping both legs straight, carry the left foot about
+one foot-length to the left as at dismounted drill, and slide the right
+hand down the rein to the full extent of the arm.
+
+“MARCH.”--Every driver will at once step off as at dismounted drill,
+causing the mule to start off steadily at the same time by a gentle
+feeling of the leading rein. He will march abreast of his mule, and
+should rarely pull at the leading rein, as mules move best with a loose
+rein and require a light hand.
+
+“HALT.”--The driver halts as at dismounted drill, coming to the
+position of attention and halting the mule at the same time by a gentle
+pressure on the leading rein. Drivers should be taught to lead their
+mules from either side.
+
+To salute when passing an officer, a driver should look towards him
+without moving his hand or altering his position.
+
+
+=93.= _Fitting saddlery of ordnance mules._
+
+1. The saddle should be placed in the middle of the mule’s back so
+as to interfere as little as possible with its free action. The two
+pannels should contain the same quantity of stuffing, should feel
+elastic, and have an even bearing on the back and sides throughout. It
+is best to have a distinct channel between the pannels along the top of
+the mule’s back; the broader the channel the better.
+
+The pannels should be so fitted that the saddle rides level along the
+mule’s back as low as possible. They must not pinch the withers, nor
+touch the backbone, and should allow of at least three fingers being
+inserted in front and rear of the saddle.
+
+2. _Girths._--Should be crossed beneath the mule, and should be drawn
+slightly tighter than with riding saddles, but should be loose enough
+to allow one finger to be inserted between them and the mule’s body
+when the load is on.
+
+3. _Breast-piece and breeching._--Should hang from their supporting
+straps as horizontally as possible at such a height as will not impede
+the free action of the limbs or breathing.
+
+4. _Crupper._--Should not be tighter than is necessary to keep the
+saddle from shifting forward, and should be loose enough to admit the
+breadth of the hand between it and the mule’s croup. Care must be taken
+that none of the mule’s hair remains between it and its dock. The dock
+of the crupper must at all times be kept very soft and pliable.
+
+5. _Bits_, _head collar_, and _curb chain_ as for horses.
+
+6. _Leading rein._--To be fastened to both rings of bridoon bit. The Ts
+of the rein passed through from inside to outside, the reins double in
+the driver’s right hand, loop of rein in left hand.
+
+The following method of attaching the rein to the bridoon bit may be
+adopted to gain more control over restive mules and to prevent mules
+stampeding when under fire, etc.:--
+
+     i. Pass one of the Ts of the rein through the near ring of
+          the bit from inside to out.
+    ii. Pass the other T through the off ring of the bit from
+          outside to in and then through the near ring from inside
+          to out.
+
+The rein can now be used in the ordinary way; when, however, it is
+required to restrain a restive mule, or it is apprehended that mules
+may be frightened by coming under fire or otherwise, pull the T of the
+near rein, thus pulling the rein through the near ring of the bit, pass
+the loop of the rein in round the mule’s nose and haul fairly taut. The
+rein is now single in the driver’s hand, and when hauled on, compresses
+the mule’s nose and stops him.
+
+
+=94.= _Training young mules._
+
+1. Young mules are naturally timid and easily startled, but they are,
+as a rule, docile and easily broken in, if treated with great kindness
+and patience. Rough treatment of any kind must be avoided as likely
+to prove fatal to the successful training of the mule. Men must be
+carefully selected to break remount mules, and gunners will assist, if
+the drivers are natives, so as to accustom the mules to be handled by
+Europeans.
+
+2. Saddling must be done at first with great caution, the saddle only
+being placed gently on the mule’s back and moved about quietly so as
+to accustom the animal to the feel of it before putting on the girths.
+In girthing up care must be taken not to draw the girths so tight as
+to cause any uneasiness to the mule, which will then be walked about
+and allowed to get used to the saddle before the other harness is
+gradually added. With the crupper especially great patience must be
+exercised, as it is likely at first to upset a timid mule.
+
+3. A mule should be thoroughly accustomed to walking about with the
+saddle and harness before it is tried under a load. It is as well
+to start training a mule to carry loads by using two bags of sand
+or earth, weighing 80 lbs. each, and when it walks about with these
+quietly the training can be completed by substituting other loads. A
+young mule should always be allowed to become familiar with the sight
+of a load before this is tried on the saddle.
+
+4. Young mules should accompany the battery on all hill parades from
+the first to accustom them to difficult ground and train their head and
+wind for hill work. They should be barebacked at first and when broken
+to the saddle should be saddled for parade.
+
+5. They should not be loaded on the hillside till five years old, and
+at first the load should be a light one and only carried for a short
+distance; it should be gradually increased up to the full weight which
+the mule will be required to carry.
+
+6. Finally, young mules must be trained to jump small ditches and
+similar obstacles without hesitation, and, at the end of the training,
+this should be done with a load on. In leaping a mule, the rein must
+always be left loose and a whip should not be used.
+
+
+=95.= _Leading mules._
+
+1. On good ground pack animals should always move closed up to their
+proper distance, but in going up or down hill and in crossing difficult
+ground the drivers will increase their distance and regulate their pace
+as circumstances may require. Should any mules appear distressed, they
+should be halted to enable them to recover their breath.
+
+2. The driver should always give the mule a long rein when moving over
+rough or hilly country; this is quickly effected by the driver letting
+go the rein with the right hand, seizing the T-piece from the outside
+of the ring of the bit and pulling the rein through. In difficult
+ground the gunners will assist by steadying the loads and helping the
+mules along. It may even be necessary to unload the mules and carry the
+loads over an obstacle by hand. It is frequently advisable to attach
+drag ropes to top loads when descending steep places.
+
+For ascents the driver must tighten the breastpiece and loosen the
+breeching of his mule, and for descents he will tighten the breeching
+and loosen the breastpiece. This can be quickly done without halting by
+means of the chain attachments of the breastpiece and breeching.
+
+3. When a halt is ordered, any driver who has lost ground will continue
+to move with his mule until he has recovered his proper distance.
+Closing up to recover distance must be done steadily and by a gradual
+increase of pace, not by rushing. Trotting should not be allowed except
+by order.
+
+When halting on hill roads, mules should be turned to stand level
+across the roads with their heads outwards from the hillside. If the
+width of the road does not admit of this, the drivers must stand to
+the head of their mules and keep them from turning, so as to avoid
+accidents.
+
+4. It will happen sometimes on narrow roads that the driver must
+march in front of his mule. When this is the case, he must resume his
+position beside the mule and close up again to his proper distance as
+soon as the road widens sufficiently.
+
+5. If a load becomes disarranged, the driver will fall out to the most
+convenient flank as soon as he can find room on the road, and when the
+load has been readjusted, he will, as soon as practicable, regain his
+place in column.
+
+When a laden mule falls, its head should be held down to prevent it
+struggling, and the load must be removed before the mule is allowed
+to get up. In very difficult or dangerous ground the saddle should be
+removed as well as the load.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+GUNNERY.
+
+
+=96.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The subjects dealt with in this chapter are only divided into
+sections for purposes of reference. The contents of many of the
+sections are so closely connected that portions of several of them must
+often be included in one lecture. In addition it must be realized that
+it is impossible to deal fully within the limits of a manual with the
+various subjects mentioned. All that is attempted is to give a brief
+outline of the principles of modern gunnery.
+
+2. A description of the various patterns of ordnance used in the field,
+their stores and drill will be found in the respective handbooks; while
+for further information of a more technical nature reference should
+be made to the “Text Book of Gunnery,” the “Treatise on Ammunition,”
+and the “Treatise on Service Explosives.” Instructors should endeavour
+to use the simplest language; but, as a large number of more or less
+technical terms must be employed, they must take care that their
+meaning is clear.
+
+
+=97.= _Gunnery terms._
+
+_Angle of Departure._--The angle which the line of departure makes with
+the horizontal plane, in other words, the quadrant angle plus the jump.
+(_See_ 5, Plate II.)
+
+_Angle of Descent._--The angle which the trajectory makes with the line
+of sight at the point of their second intersection.
+
+_Angle of Incidence._--The angle which the trajectory makes with the
+normal to the surface struck.
+
+_Angle of Elevation._--The angle which the line of sight makes with the
+axis of the gun. (_See_ 2, Plate II.)
+
+_Angle of Sight._--The angle which the line of sight makes with the
+horizontal plane. (_See_ 3, Plate II.)
+
+_Axis of the Gun._--A line passing down the centre of the bore. (_See_
+A B, Plate I.)
+
+_Axis of the Trunnions._--A line passing through the centre of the
+trunnions. (_See_ C D, Plate I.)
+
+_Battery Angle._--The angle formed at the battery by imaginary lines
+drawn to the target and the observing station.
+
+_Calibre._--The diameter of the bore in inches measured across the
+lands.
+
+_Drift._--The constant deflection of the shell due to the rotation
+imparted by the rifling. (_See_ A, Plate III.)
+
+_Direct Laying._--When the gun is laid by looking over or through the
+sights at the target.
+
+_Indirect Laying._--When the gun is laid for direction on an aiming
+point, or on aiming posts, the angle of sight is adjusted by clinometer
+and the elevation by the range indicator or drum. (With the 5“ B.L.
+howitzer the range drum is set at the quadrant elevation.)
+
+_Jump._--The angle between the line of departure and the axis of the
+piece before firing. It is due to the vertical movement of the gun
+on firing, and for any gun differs according to the mounting and the
+charge used. (_See_ 6, Plate II.)
+
+_Lateral Deviation._--The distance of the point of impact of the
+projectile right or left of the line of fire.
+
+_Line of Departure._--The direction of the shell on leaving the muzzle.
+(_See_ 4, Plate II.)
+
+_Line of Fire._--A line joining the muzzle of the piece and the target.
+
+_Line of Sight._--A straight line passing through the sights and the
+point aimed at. (_See_ E F, Plate III.)
+
+_Muzzle Velocity_--The velocity in feet per second with which a shell
+leaves the muzzle.
+
+_Point Blank._--A gun is laid point blank when the line of sight is
+parallel to its axis.
+
+_Quadrant Angle._--The angle which the axis of the piece makes with
+the horizontal plane. It is termed quadrant elevation or depression
+according as the gun is laid above or below the horizontal plane.
+(_See_ 1, Plate II.) The angle of elevation and the quadrant angle are
+the same when the line of sight is horizontal.
+
+_Range._--The distance to the second intersection of the trajectory
+with the line of sight.
+
+_Ranging._--Ranging is the process of finding the elevation, fuze, and
+line.
+
+_Remaining Velocity._--The velocity of a shell at any given point of
+its trajectory.
+
+_Striking Velocity._--The velocity of a shell at the point of impact.
+
+_Trajectory._--The curve described by the shell in its flight. (_See_ D
+F, Plate III.)
+
+
+=98.= _Natures of artillery fire._
+
+(_See_ Fig. 11.)
+
+_High Angle Fire._--Fire from guns and howitzers at all angles of
+elevation exceeding 25 degrees. But in coast defence the term “High
+Angle Fire” is used in connection with guns of mountings specially
+designed for extreme angles of elevation laid by means of instruments
+specially provided.
+
+[Illustration: Plate I.]
+
+[Illustration: Plate II.]
+
+[Illustration: Plate III.]
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 11.]
+
+_Enfilade Fire._--Fire which sweeps a line of troops or defences from a
+flank.
+
+_Frontal Fire._--When the line of fire is perpendicular to the front of
+the target.
+
+_Oblique Fire._--When the line of fire is inclined to the front of the
+target.
+
+_Reverse Fire._--When the rear instead of the front of the target is
+fired at.
+
+
+=99.= _Gunnery._
+
+1. Gunnery is the science of directing a projectile so that it will
+strike a given object.
+
+2. A gun serves two purposes. First to confine the gases of the charge
+so as to allow them to act upon the base of the shell; and second to
+give the shell the proper initial direction. In order to maintain the
+shell in its proper direction after it leaves the bore of the gun, some
+means of making it spin or rotate rapidly is necessary; since it is a
+well-known fact that any rapidly-rotating body tries to keep the same
+direction in which it was pointed when first made to spin. Rifling
+which consists in a number of grooves cut down the bore, leaving raised
+ribs called “_lands_” between them, is the means employed in modern
+guns, in combination with a soft copper band called a “_driving band_”
+secured to the shell near its base. The result of this combination is
+that when the gun is fired the shell is forced along the bore, but,
+the diameter of the driving band being bigger than that of the bore,
+the lands cut into the copper of which it is made and the shell is
+consequently compelled to follow their course and rotate. Without this
+spin an elongated shell would soon lose its velocity and accuracy of
+direction and become as unreliable in its flight as round shot were in
+the days of smooth bore guns.
+
+3. By the use of elongated shell the following additional advantages
+besides accuracy of direction are obtained:--
+
+      i. A longer and therefore heavier shell can be fired from a
+           field gun than would be possible if the shell had to be
+           round (spherical). Consequently there is more room in
+           the shell for explosive or bullets.
+     ii. Greater range and greater power at a given range are
+           obtained, because there is a smaller surface, as
+           compared with a round shot of the same weight, offered
+           to the resistance of the air.
+    iii. By varying the length different kinds of shell for
+           the same gun can be brought to the same weight and
+           thus complications in range tables can be avoided. If
+           necessary a specially heavy projectile can be used.
+     iv. The flight of the shell being regular, allowance can
+           be made for any deviation observed and thus increased
+           accuracy may be obtained.
+
+
+=100.= _Rifling._
+
+1. The “_system of rifling_” is the term applied to the method adopted
+in any particular type of rifled gun for giving rotation to the shell.
+
+2. The aim of each system is to produce accuracy of fire, but it is
+also essential that it should be simple, that it should not seriously
+weaken the durability of the gun, and that the shell should not be
+liable to jam in loading or firing. The “_twist of rifling_” by which
+is meant the distance measured in calibres, in which the grooves make
+one complete circuit of the bore, may be uniform, increasing or a
+combination of the two.
+
+3. In the case of a uniform twist the distance in which the grooves
+make a complete circuit of the bore is the same wherever measured,
+but with an increasing twist the distance decreases as the muzzle is
+approached.
+
+With a uniform twist the shell is compelled to rotate rapidly as soon
+as it begins to move, and thus a severe strain is caused both to the
+gun and shell.
+
+With an increasing twist, this rotation is imparted more gradually,
+thus relieving the strain, but at the same time causing more friction,
+and consequent loss of velocity. The shell, moreover, is not so well
+centred as with a uniform twist.
+
+4. In designing a gun the twist has to be made to suit the shell which
+it is desired to employ, and its intended velocity. Generally speaking,
+a long shell with low velocity necessitates a rapid twist to make it
+steady in flight.
+
+
+=101=. _Centring._
+
+It is important that the shell when it leaves the bore should be
+centred, _i.e._, that the shell should rotate round its longer axis
+which should coincide with the prolongation of the axis of the gun at
+the moment it leaves the bore. Should this not be the case, the shell
+becomes unsteady and noisy in its flight, and the shooting will be
+irregular.
+
+
+=102.= _Forces acting on a shell in the bore._
+
+1. The velocity attained by a shell at the muzzle of a gun is due to
+the pressure of the gas during its passage through the bore. The more
+gradually this velocity is imparted to the shell the less will be the
+strain upon it and the gun. The object sought is to distribute, as far
+as possible, the pressure over the whole length of the bore and to
+obtain the maximum work from a given charge without undue strain on
+either gun or shell. Theoretically the last atom of the charge should
+be converted into gas as the shell leaves the muzzle.
+
+
+FORCES ACTING ON A SHELL DURING FLIGHT.
+
+
+=103.= _The resistance of the air._
+
+1. The air consists of innumerable small particles through which a
+shell has to force its way. This produces a rapid loss of velocity; for
+instance, the velocity of a shell from the 18-pr. Q.F. gun, which at
+the muzzle is about 1,610 feet a second, is at 2,000 yards only about
+1,030 feet a second, and at 6,000 yards about 740 feet a second.
+
+2. The retardation due to the resistance of the air varies according to
+the weight and diameter of the shell. If, for instance, two shells of
+equal diameter, but of different weights, start with the same muzzle
+velocity, the heavier will lose its velocity more slowly and have the
+longer range, because it has the greater weight with which to overcome
+the resistance of the air. On the other hand, if two projectiles are of
+the same weight but of different diameters, the one with the smaller
+diameter will have the advantage, because it presents less surface to
+the resistance of the air.
+
+3. The shape of the head also materially affects the question, for a
+shell with a blunt head is plainly not so suited for forcing its way
+through the air as one with a more pointed head. Thus the longer the
+shell (other things being equal), the greater will be its remaining
+velocity at any given range, and the greater will be its range for any
+given muzzle velocity; but other considerations limit its length, such
+as the strength of its walls, and the liability to turn over in flight.
+
+4. The relationship between the weight and diameter of a shell,
+represented by the expression
+
+       W
+    ------,
+    (n d²)
+
+is called the “_ballistic coefficient_” of the gun. The factor n
+includes sub-factors which vary with the density of the atmosphere,
+the shape of the head, the steadiness in flight, &c. The greater the
+ballistic coefficient the less rapidly does the projectile lose its
+velocity.
+
+5. It has already been pointed out (Sec. =99=) that spin is necessary
+to the shell if elongated projectiles are to be used. The effect of the
+resistance of the air on a spinning shell is to deflect it in the same
+direction as the spin. With all service shell this spin or rotation is
+right handed, and consequently all shell deflect towards the right in
+the course of their flight. This deflection is called “_drift_.”
+
+As this rotation is definite and diminishes very slightly during the
+flight of the shell, the amount of drift can be determined for each
+nature of gun by actual experiment and compensation made for it. A
+description of the method by which this is done will be found in Sec.
+119.
+
+
+=104=. _The force of gravity._
+
+1. The force of gravity is the natural attraction which causes every
+unsupported body to fall towards the centre of the earth. Moreover,
+the longer a body is exposed to its influence the faster does it fall;
+thus a body falls,
+
+    About 16 feet in the 1st second
+      ”   48   ”    ”    2nd   ”
+      ”   80   ”    ”    3rd   ”
+
+that is, the total drop at the end of any given second of time is
+proportionate to the square of the time.
+
+Now a shell leaves the muzzle of a gun with a certain velocity, due to
+the forces which acted on it in the bore, and, if the effect of these
+forces and of the resistance of the air had alone to be taken into
+account, it would proceed in a straight line, but at a decreasing pace.
+
+Gravity, however, comes into play and causes the shell to fall with a
+constantly increasing velocity. Thus in Fig. 12, supposing AB is the
+direction in which a shell starts, the distances it would travel in the
+first three seconds of its flight, if there were no gravity, might be
+represented by AC, CE, EG. Owing to gravity, however, it would at the
+end of the 1st second have dropped to some point D; at the end of the
+2nd second it would have dropped four times as far, to a point F; while
+at the end of the 3rd second it would have fallen nine times as far, to
+a point H.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 12.]
+
+2. The force of gravity is to some extent counterbalanced by the air,
+which acts as a cushion and tends to support a body falling through it.
+In the case of a heavy body, such as a bullet or shell, the distances
+fallen are but slightly affected by the air.
+
+Gravity is, however, appreciably counterbalanced by the “_planeing_”
+effect on an elongated projectile forced at considerable velocity
+through the air at high angles of elevation so that the value of “g”
+drops below 32 to about 26.
+
+
+=105.= _Trajectory._
+
+1. The result of the three forces acting on the shell--the force
+of projection tending to drive it forward in a straight line in
+prolongation of the axis, the force of gravity drawing it down from
+that line, and the resistance of the air tending to stop its progress
+in each successive instant of time, and also to deflect it to the
+right--is that it describes a curve, whether regarded from the side or
+from above. This curve is called the trajectory. (_See_ ADFHI, Fig. 12.)
+
+2. The shell in consequence of its high velocity, and of the short
+time gravity has had to act upon it, falls at first very little, but
+this fall--and consequently the curve--increases very rapidly with the
+range; for example, at 100 yards the 18-pr. Q.F. shell if fired point
+blank would fall about 8½ inches, but at 500 yards its drop would be
+about 18¼ feet; at 1,000 yards, about 80 feet; at 2,000 yards, about
+372 feet; at 3,000 yards, about 970 feet. The greatest height attained
+by the trajectory is roughly four times the square of the time of
+flight.
+
+
+=106.= _Elevation._
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 13.]
+
+1. It is evident from what has been said that a shell fired from a gun
+at a mark, S (Fig. 13) will not hit that mark, but will strike some
+point, D, below it. To allow for the fall, it is necessary to point the
+axis as much above the object to be hit as the shell would have fallen
+below it if the axis had been pointed straight at the mark. This act of
+tilting the gun so as to allow for the curve of the trajectory, is what
+is meant by the expression “_giving elevation_.”
+
+2. The theory of giving elevation may be illustrated by reference to
+the flight of an 18-pr. Q.F. shell for the first 100 yards. This shell
+falls about 8½ inches below the line at which the projectile leaves
+the bore in passing over the first 100 yards of its flight. Assuming
+that S (Fig. 13) is 100 yards from the muzzle and that SD represents 8½
+inches, the axis of the gun must be elevated so that, when produced, it
+would pass 8½ inches above S, viz., through F (Fig. 14), if an object
+at S is to be hit.
+
+3. The method of giving elevation to the gun to enable the shell to
+reach a certain distance called the “_range_” should then be explained,
+and it should be shown how the elevation can be marked in yards on the
+range drum, tangent sight or clinometer.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 14.]
+
+4. The principle of the sighting can be shown by means of a rifle
+barrel placed on a tripod a few yards from a blackboard. If then aim be
+taken at some mark on the board with the leaf of the sight upright, and
+set to (say) 1,000 yards; and subsequently, without moving the barrel,
+the bore be looked through, it will be seen that the axis produced
+meets the blackboard considerably above the mark aimed at.
+
+5. The effect on the shooting of the gun, if the wheels are not level,
+can be explained by similar means. A stick to represent the trunnions
+of the gun should be fastened across the barrel. It can then be shown
+that if the wheels of a gun are not level, or in other words if the
+axis of the trunnions is not horizontal, the gun (barrel) will not
+elevate in a vertical plane; the muzzle will move towards the lower
+side and the breech towards the higher, thus causing the shell to move
+towards the lower wheel.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 15.]
+
+6. The effect on the sight, if the axis of the trunnions is not level,
+can also be demonstrated. The more the sight is tilted over to one side
+the less will the elevation become and the more will the gun point to
+the right or left of the target, according to the way the sight is
+inclined. In these circumstances the shell, instead of hitting the
+target, will fall below it and to one side. The greater the elevation
+on the sight and the more it is inclined, the greater will be the
+resulting error.
+
+To make this clear, a vertical line, AB (Fig. 15), may be drawn on the
+blackboard, with A as a spot to aim at. The recruit should then be
+directed to aim at this spot with the sight, which must be perfectly
+upright, set at 1,000 yards, and afterwards to look through the rifle
+barrel, his attention being drawn to the fact that the axis cuts the
+vertical line at C above the spot aimed at. He should then be made to
+aim at the same spot with the same sight, _but inclined to one side_,
+and to look through the barrel again, when he will see that the axis,
+instead of being directed upon C as before, is now directed low, and
+to that side to which the sight is inclined, as at D; consequently as
+the trajectory always conforms to the movement of the axis, the bullet,
+instead of hitting the mark, would strike as much below D as A is
+below C. Draw a new vertical line through D and measure off on it a
+distance equal to CA; this will give the spot E, which the bullet would
+hit. From A draw a horizontal line AF to the new vertical line DF, then
+AF will show the error of direction, and FE the loss of elevation. The
+latter may practically be neglected; and a rule is given in Sec. =119=
+for correcting the former, when the small size of the target renders it
+necessary.
+
+If it can be arranged it is better to show this with a gun, but a rifle
+barrel is usually more convenient.
+
+
+=107.= _Causes affecting the accuracy of shooting._
+
+1. With the exception of the effect of the difference of level of
+wheels, the various forces which act on a projectile and their effects
+on its flight are calculated and compensated for before the gun is
+issued for service.
+
+They will not, therefore, come under the observation of the practical
+gunner; but there are other causes affecting the accuracy of shooting
+about which he must have a knowledge.
+
+These are:--
+
+      i. Varying effect of the charge due to:--
+            Incorrect weighing.
+            Variation in strength.
+            State of the atmosphere.
+            Variation in space occupied by the cartridge
+               in the bore (_Loading density_).
+     ii. Force and direction of wind.
+    iii. Trail not being well supported.
+
+2. If the shell is not rammed home to the same spot each round, the
+amount of space available for the cartridge will vary and this will
+cause the shooting to be irregular. The smaller the space left for the
+cartridge the greater will be the range, but the greater also becomes
+the pressure of the gas in the chamber.
+
+The possibility of this occurring in the case of Q.F. guns is prevented
+if fixed ammunition is used.
+
+3. Wind has considerable effect on the range and direction of the
+shell. According to its direction it may increase or reduce the range,
+or drive the shell to right or left. If gusty, and of great force, the
+shooting will be irregular, especially at long ranges. This becomes of
+importance only when the target is a narrow one.
+
+4. Unless the trail rests on firm level ground, and is similarly
+supported during successive rounds, the shooting will be irregular,
+on account of the variation of the jump. A carriage allowing of axial
+recoil has practically no jump.
+
+5. It is important that the effect which the above conditions may have
+on the shooting should be fully understood, in order that the necessity
+of the process called “ranging”[6] may be realized. By means of this
+process the total effect of these causes is found out and the sight set
+so as to counterbalance them. (_See_ Sec. =103=.)
+
+[6] “Ranging” and “Range-finding” must not be confused with one
+another. The latter is the measurement of the distance in yards
+to the target by mechanical means, and the former the process by
+which the elevation necessary to make a shell travel that distance
+is ascertained, an elevation which, owing to the various causes
+mentioned above, will rarely correspond with the distance given by the
+range-finder.
+
+
+AMMUNITION.
+
+
+=108.= _Cordite._
+
+(_See also_ Treatise on Service Explosives.)
+
+1. Cordite is the smokeless explosive adopted for propulsive purposes.
+
+2. Cordite consists of nitro-glycerine, gun cotton and mineral jelly,
+worked into a dough and forced through a die, from which it comes
+out in long cords. Its composition for small arms and all natures of
+ordnance is the same, the required rate of combustion being obtained by
+varying the diameter of the cord. The smaller the diameter the quicker
+the rate of burning.
+
+3. The cordite in general use for modern guns is termed “Cordite MD”
+(modified) when in sticks or cords, “Cordite MDT” when in tubes, in
+order to distinguish it from the earlier pattern of cordite which was
+found to wear out the rifling of the gun too quickly. Cordite Mk. I is
+still used in India and for the older patterns of guns and howitzers.
+
+4. Tubular cordite is distinguished by two numbers representing in
+hundredths of an inch the mean external and internal diameters of
+the finished article. Other cordite is distinguished by a number
+representing in hundredths of an inch the diameter of the die through
+which it was pressed in the course of manufacture.
+
+5. When any particular size is made to more than one length, the length
+will be included, _e.g._:--
+
+    Cordite, Size--, length 12-inch.
+    Cordite, Size--, on drums.
+
+6. Cordite will keep in all climates, but it is laid down that the
+temperature of magazines in which cordite is stored should not
+habitually exceed 80° F. or fall below 45° F.
+
+The nitro-glycerine in cordite freezes at about 40° F., and if frozen
+cordite is suddenly thawed it is liable to “sweat.” It should not be
+handled till the nitro-glycerine has been reabsorbed.
+
+7. The ballistic properties of cordite are affected by heat; the
+higher the temperature of a charge the greater the muzzle velocity and
+pressure.
+
+8. Cordite charges are somewhat difficult to ignite, so that a priming
+of guncotton yarn, fine grain gunpowder, or some other easily-lighted
+substance is necessary to assist the flame from the cap or tube.
+
+9. Cordite is safe to handle and store. It is not affected by damp or
+water; this does not apply, of course, to the gunpowder priming. If
+wetted with fresh, water a cordite charge may be fired when dried.
+Before returning a wetted charge to store it should be thoroughly dried
+in a ventilated building. Cordite wetted with sea water should be well
+washed in fresh water and dried before repacking.
+
+10. In some cases, after firing cordite charges to windward, a flame
+issues from the breech when it is opened. This is not of sufficient
+importance to require, in the case of field guns, any special
+precautions being taken.
+
+
+=109.= _Lyddite shell._
+
+1. Lyddite is the high explosive used for filling common shells.
+
+It consists of picric acid, melted and poured into the shell, where it
+solidifies. In order to detonate the charge the shell are primed with
+exploders containing picric powder. Complete detonation of a lyddite
+shell may be assumed to have occurred when the smoke is black and not
+tinged with yellow, when there is no picric acid colouring the crater
+formed by the burst, and when the fragments of the forged steel shell
+present a torn and jagged appearance.
+
+2. Shell filled with lyddite are effective against _matériel_ and
+artificial cover. They are not intended nor are they suitable for use
+against personnel in the open owing to the limited numbers of pieces
+into which they break up and to the very local effect caused by their
+explosion.
+
+Lyddite shell are carried with howitzer, heavy batteries and mountain
+batteries armed with 2·75“ B.L. equipment.
+
+
+=110.= _Shrapnel shell._
+
+1. Shrapnel shell are hollow shell containing as many bullets as
+possible together with a bursting charge sufficient to open the
+shell, release the bullets, and give enough smoke to allow the burst
+to be observed. They are provided with T. and P. fuzes, thus making it
+possible to burst them, either on graze (percussion action) or at some
+selected point of their trajectory (time action).
+
+In the latter case each bullet as soon as it is free follows a
+trajectory of its own, according to its position in the shell, to the
+direction and velocity given to it by the bursting charge and by the
+centrifugal force imparted by the rotation of the shell. Regarded as a
+whole, however, the bullets form a cone the apex of which is located
+at the spot where the shell bursts. This cone is called the “_cone of
+dispersion_.”
+
+2. If the height of burst is normal, the body of the shell which does
+not as a rule break up has a trajectory which corresponds approximately
+to, but is always lower than, that which the shell would have described
+if it had not burst.
+
+3. The effect of an individual shrapnel depends upon:--
+
+      i. The number of bullets.
+     ii. The energy of the bullets on impact.
+    iii. The spread of the bullets.
+     iv. The size of the target.
+      v. The curve of the trajectory, or the angle of descent.
+
+4. The number of the bullets is very closely connected with the weight
+and construction of the shrapnel, and also depends upon the weight and
+specific gravity of the bullets.
+
+The greater the weight of the shell, the greater under similar
+conditions will naturally be the weight and also the number of the
+bullets. The weight of the total content of bullets increases, however,
+more rapidly than the weight of the shell, so that of two shells
+constructed on the same principles, the heavier contains more bullets
+in proportion to its weight than the lighter. Thus for example, the
+13-pr. Q.F. shell which has a weight of 12½ pounds contains 236 bullets
+of 41 to the pound, while the 18-pr. Q.F. has a weight of 18½ pounds
+and contains 375 bullets.
+
+5. A very small energy is required to put living targets out of action.
+According to experiments it is considered that a striking energy of 60
+foot-lbs. is sufficient; which means that a bullet of 41 to the pound
+would require a striking velocity of about 400 foot-seconds.[7]
+
+[7] NOTE.--This is obtained from the formula
+
+       v2
+    -------
+     w × 2g
+
+representing the energy of a body. In this case
+
+      v2
+    ------- = 60; whence v = 400 (approx.).
+    41 × 2g
+
+
+
+The velocity on impact of shrapnel bullets depends upon their velocity
+at the point of burst, their weight and upon the distance they travel
+after burst. The latter is of the more importance, since the light
+shrapnel bullets fall off very much in velocity owing to the resistance
+of the air.
+
+6. In shrapnel shell with base bursters the spread of the bullets is
+principally caused by the rotation of the shell. In the 13-pr. and
+18-pr. shell, however, the central tube is filled with powder, which
+tends to increase the angle of opening.
+
+It is difficult to measure this angle accurately; but its tendency is
+to increase as the range increases. In estimating the front covered by
+the spread of the bullets, it may be taken as about 35 per cent. of the
+distance burst short.
+
+7. The effect of the shrapnel depends largely on the nature of the
+target and the position of the burst. As the distance of the burst
+short of the target increases, the density of the hits diminishes,
+and theoretically this distance should be regulated according to the
+surface presented by the target. The normal height of burst of 13 and
+18-pr. Q.F. shrapnel is about 10 minutes above the line of sight at all
+ranges. In the case of the 15-pr. B.L.C. and 15-pr. Q.F. this height is
+12½ minutes, and in the case of 4·5-inch howitzers about 20 minutes, of
+5-inch howitzers 30 minutes, and in the case of the 60-pr. B.L. and
+4·7-inch Q.F. about 15 minutes. If the target be of the nature of a
+column, a lower burst must be obtained.
+
+8. The curve of the trajectory diminishes the depth of the forward
+effect of the shrapnel. The flatter the trajectory the greater the
+depth of effect. On the other hand there is little searching effect
+on troops behind cover, and for this reason the shrapnel of howitzers
+fired at high angles of elevation are particularly effective, although
+the ground covered by their cone of dispersion is small.
+
+9. Shrapnel shell is the principal field artillery projectile, and is
+carried for most natures of field artillery.
+
+10. _Percussion shrapnel._--Percussion shrapnel is used for ranging,
+and in the case of the 18-pr. Q.F. has given excellent results at
+targets placed behind a brick wall 24 inches thick. It may therefore
+be considered that the fire of percussion shrapnel will be effective
+against troops defending any ordinary buildings.
+
+Good effect has also been obtained with it against guns and personnel
+behind shields when direct hits are obtained.
+
+11. The action of percussion shrapnel differs from that of time
+shrapnel, for the shell opens after graze, having an ascending angle,
+and a velocity considerably lessened by the retardation on graze. Its
+effect depends largely on the nature of the ground at the point of
+impact; in soft or marshy soil the shell are smothered and results are
+usually poor.
+
+12. Percussion shrapnel, even at short ranges, must be burst very
+close to the foot of the target to be effective, otherwise the cone
+of dispersion passes over it, and descends in a shower some 250 yards
+beyond graze: consequently, a small error in range is a matter of great
+consequence.
+
+13. _Time shrapnel._--Time shrapnel is used against living targets,
+against aircraft and balloons, and for ranging.
+
+14. The best effect from time shrapnel fire is obtained when the
+trajectory passes through or close to the target, and the position
+of the mean point of burst should be as close as possible to the
+target without entailing an undue proportion of grazes. To attain this
+“ranging” must be carried out till the correct range and length of fuze
+are determined. (_See_ Sec. =207= _et seq._)
+
+
+=111.= _Star shell._
+
+Star shell are carried by mountain artillery. They contain a number of
+stars and are fired with T. fuzes. When the shell bursts these stars
+are ignited and illuminate the foreground.
+
+
+=112.= _Time and percussion fuzes._
+
+(_See_ Handbooks for description of various fuzes.)
+
+1. Fuzes manufactured under varying atmospheric conditions have
+variable rates of burning; care should, therefore, be taken in packing
+limbers and wagons that fuzes of the same thousand should be as far as
+possible together, so as to obtain uniformity of results.
+
+2. The rate of burning of a time and percussion fuze is influenced
+by the climate in which it has been kept, and the pressure of the
+atmosphere.
+
+3. Fuzes also burn longer as the height above the sea level increases,
+that is, as the height of the barometer decreases. For each fall of 1
+inch in the barometer (corresponding to about 1,000 feet in height) the
+time of burning increases by ¹/₃₀.[8]
+
+[8] NOTE.--¹/₄₄ for the No. 80 fuze.
+
+4. The _mean error_ in the time of burning of the No. 80 time and
+percussion fuze in use with the 18-pr. Q.F. gun may be taken as about
+·14 seconds.
+
+This error represents a distance of 48 yards at 2,000 yards range, and
+this distance multiplied by 1·69 (= 81) gives the length of the zone
+which will contain 50 per cent. of the bursts. If 10 per cent. of the
+bursts are on graze, the distance of the mean point of burst from the
+target should be equal to half the length of the 80 per cent. zone,
+since 10 per cent. must be taken off the other end in order to keep
+the mean point of burst in the same place. The 80 per cent. zone is
+equal to the 50 per cent. zone × 1·90, _i.e._, 81 × 1·90 = 154. Thus at
+2,000 yards, the mean point of burst should be approximately 80 yards
+short, and at 5,000 yards 55 yards short. Though with the 13-pr. Q.F.
+the error of the fuze is rather greater than with the 18-pr. Q.F., the
+same data may be accepted. A larger percentage of grazes must, however,
+be expected.
+
+
+=113.= _Fuze indicator._
+
+1. The object of the fuze indicator is to give the correct fuze setting
+for effective burst at any range, when once the instrument has been
+adjusted for _one_ range.
+
+2. _Theory._--When the graduation 150 on the corrector scale is
+opposite the arrow on the fuze scale slider, the length of fuze
+opposite each range is that which will give “_an effective point of
+burst_” under normal conditions. It will be noted that any corrector
+setting found suitable with any particular range will be approximately
+correct for all ranges under like conditions.
+
+To arrive at this result the indicator has to be graduated on the same
+principle as a “slide rule.” The fuze scale is graduated in such a way
+that the linear spaces occupied are proportional to the logarithms
+of the times of flight. The yard scale is similarly graduated. This
+explains how in the table in para. 5 below an alteration of corrector
+makes a proportional correction at various ranges and not an equal
+correction throughout.
+
+3. In the case of the 18-pr. Q.F. the effective points of burst are
+taken to be as follows:--
+
+    At 2,000 yards                 80 yards short.
+    At 3,000   ”                   70   ”     ”
+    At 4,000   ”                   60   ”     ”
+    At 5,000   ”                   55   ”     ”
+    At 6,000   ”                   50   ”     ”
+
+These distances represent approximately an angular height of 10 minutes
+at all ranges.
+
+The corrector settings likely to give effective points of burst at
+various altitudes are with the bar indicator as follows:--
+
+    At sea level, or with barometer 30         Corrector 150.
+    At 1,000 ft. altitude or with barometer 29       ”   144.
+    At 2,000         ”      ”        ”      28       ”   138.
+    At 3,000         ”      ”        ”      27       ”   132.
+    At 4,000         ”      ”        ”      26       ”   126.
+
+4. Alterations in the barometer will affect the corrector setting, the
+normal being when the barometer stands at 30. A fall in the barometer
+necessitates a decrease, and a rise in the barometer an increase in the
+corrector setting.
+
+5. Different corrector settings give different heights of burst. To
+raise the point of burst the corrector settings have to be shortened,
+and to lower the point of burst the corrector settings have to be
+lengthened. The amount of the alteration in the corrector settings
+depends upon the range and the amount that it is desired to alter the
+point of burst.
+
+By altering the corrector setting from 150 to 140, the fuzes may be
+expected to burst as follows:--
+
+    At 2,000 yards range  70 yards shorter.
+    At 3,000   ”     ”   100       ”
+    At 4,000   ”     ”   125       ”
+    At 5,000   ”     ”   150       ”
+    At 6,000   ”     ”   175       ”
+
+It will be seen, therefore, that even smaller alterations than 5 in the
+corrector settings may be made at long and distant ranges, when it is
+desired to alter the point of burst of shell already bursting in the
+air. (_See_ Sec. =227= Examples.)
+
+6. Comparing the first and third of the above tables it will be seen
+that 150 corrector at 2,000 yards gives bursts approximately 80 yards
+short and that an increase or decrease of 10 in the corrector varies
+the burst 70 yards. Consequently if it is desired to bring the burst on
+to the line of sight (as in time shrapnel ranging), the corrector must
+be increased by an amount equal to
+
+     80
+    ---- × 10 (_i.e._, 10 for each 70 yards) = 11.
+     70
+
+7. The following tables show the approximate difference in corrector
+settings necessary to effect an alteration in the angular height of
+burst at various ranges:--
+
+    ------+--------------+----------------+-------------+---------------
+    Range.| 13 and 18-pr.| 4·5-inch Q.F.  | 60-pr. B.L. |15-pr. Q.F.
+          |     Q.F.     |Howitzer ranging|             |    and
+          |              |   in yards.    |             |15-pr. B.L.C.
+          |              |  All charges.  |             |
+          |              |  “Gun range.”  |             |
+    ------+--------------+----------------+-------------+---------------
+          |  To raise    |To raise height |  To raise   |  To raise
+          |   height     |  20 minutes.   |   height    |   height
+          | 10 minutes.  |                | 15 minutes. |  12½ minutes.
+    ------+--------------+----------------+-------------+---------------
+    1,000 |              | 20 corrector.  |             |
+    2,000 | 11 corrector.| 10      ”      |             | 13 corrector.
+    3,000 |  7    ”      |  6      ”      |24 corrector.|  8    ”
+    4,000 |  5    ”      |  4      ”      |18    ”      |  5    ”
+    5,000 |  4    ”      |  2      ”      |12    ”      |  4    ”
+    6,000 |  3    ”      |                | 9    ”      |  3    ”
+    7,000 |              |                | 6    ”      |
+    8,000 |              |                | 5    ”      |
+    9,000 |              |                | 4    ”      |
+    ------+--------------+----------------+-------------+---------------
+
+                  4·5-inch Q.F. Howitzer.
+                _Ranging in degrees._
+
+    ------------------------+---------------------------
+    Elevation (all charges).|To raise height 20 minutes.
+    ------------------------|---------------------------
+          5 degrees.        |     16 corrector.
+         10   ”             |     10    ”
+         15   ”             |      6    ”
+         20   ”             |      4    ”
+         25   ”             |      3    ”
+         35   ”             |      2    ”
+    ------------------------+---------------------------
+
+Officers should know the figures for the equipment with which their
+unit is armed.
+
+8. _Use._--When a corrector is ordered, the fuze scale slider is moved
+till the arrow is opposite the required graduation, and clamped. The
+fuze for any range can now be read off. For the purpose of recording
+the particular range and so avoiding possible error, the sliding
+pointer on the top can be moved and set to such range.
+
+Once having found the corrector setting, it is the “corrector setting
+for the day,” provided that, if indirect laying is employed, the angle
+of sight is correct. If, when finding the corrector setting, the angle
+of sight is incorrect, the corrector setting found will be a false one,
+being too short if the angle of sight is underestimated, and _vice
+versâ_.
+
+9. To obtain the corrector setting, an échelon of three rounds may be
+fired, each round at a different corrector setting. When selecting the
+échelon of corrector settings an endeavour should be made to choose
+such lengths of corrector as will give bursts in air and on graze.
+
+10. Bursts should always be judged with reference to the “_line of
+sight_,” otherwise when the target is situated on sloping ground, an
+unsuitable length of corrector may be selected, as rounds bursting in
+air short of the target below the “_line of sight_” would, with the
+same corrector, give bursts on graze when the trajectory passes through
+the target.
+
+
+=114.= _Range tables._
+
+1. Range tables represent the ordinary performance of the gun with
+service ammunition under normal conditions. They can, therefore,
+only be taken as a guide. With the object of compiling these tables
+and of finding out, in a general way, the relative accuracy of the
+service ordnance and ammunition, series of rounds are fired at varying
+elevations for range and accuracy.
+
+From these series mean ranges and deviations are obtained for each
+elevation; the difference of each round from the “_mean_” gives the
+“_error_” and the mean of the errors of the series gives an estimate of
+the accuracy.
+
+2. The chief causes of inaccuracy, which may exist on the experimental
+practice ground, where all the conditions are most favourable, are as
+follows:--
+
+     i. Want of accuracy in the gun, faulty ammunition, or
+          unsuitable mounting.
+    ii. External causes, such as wind, and varying density
+          of the air.
+
+Errors due to the gun will arise if the twist of rifling is unsuited to
+the length of the projectile.
+
+Errors due to the projectiles will arise if their density has not been
+distributed in the best manner, or if they are inaccurately centred or
+vary in weight.
+
+Errors due to the charge can be reduced to a minimum by using explosive
+of the same lot throughout the experiment, and by giving each charge
+the same air space to secure uniformity of loading density.
+
+Errors will also arise if the mounting, or the gun on its mounting, is
+unsteady when the gun is fired, as this would cause a variable “_jump_”
+and consequently a variable angle of departure.
+
+3. The following is an example of one series:--
+
+    ------+---------+-----------+---------+-----------
+      No. | Range.  |Difference |Deviation|Difference
+      of  |         |   from    |  right. |   from
+    round.|         |   mean.   |         |   mean.
+    ------+---------+-----------+---------+-----------
+          |   yds.  |   yds.    |   yds.  |    yds.
+      1   |  4,968  |   22·8    |   24·4  |    3·0
+      2   |  4,954  |    8·8    |   21·6  |    0·2
+      3   |  4,962  |   16·8    |   22·8  |    1·4
+      4   |  4,908  |   37·2    |   20·0  |    1·4
+      5   |  4,934  |   11·2    |   18·4  |    3·0
+    ------+---------+-----------+---------+-----------
+          | 24,726  |   96·8    |  107·2  |    9·0
+          +---------+-----------+---------+-----------
+    Mean  | 4,945·2 |   19·4    |   21·4  |    1·8
+    ------+---------+-----------+---------+-----------
+
+The second column in the above table gives the actual ranges. The mean
+range is obtained by adding all together and dividing by 5, since 5
+rounds were fired.
+
+The third column contains the difference of each round, _irrespective
+of sign_, from the mean range just found. The mean of these differences
+is then obtained, and called the mean error in range or mean
+longitudinal error. Evidently, if all the projectiles fall nearly at
+the same range, this mean error must be small.
+
+The fourth column gives the lateral deviation from the direction in
+which the axis of the gun points; the mean deviation is at the bottom
+of this column. If any shot had fallen to the left, then the deviation
+would be reckoned from a line passing through either the extreme right
+or the extreme left shot.
+
+The fifth column gives the difference from the mean deviation, with a
+mean at the bottom called the mean error in deviation or mean lateral
+error.
+
+Collecting the results from the table we have:--
+
+    Mean range                      4945·2 yards.
+    Mean longitudinal error           19·4   ”
+    Mean deviation right              21·4   ”
+    Mean lateral error                 1·8   ”
+
+It can be shown by the theory of probabilities that if each mean error
+is multiplied by the factor 1·69, the breadths of zones (of infinite
+length), which will contain 50 per cent. of the hits, are obtained.
+
+4. As a result of these and other tests the following information is
+embodied in the various columns of the range table.
+
+i. _Elevation and Range._--The angle of elevation in degrees and
+minutes is shown for every hundred yards up to the limit of effective
+range of the gun.
+
+ii. _Fuze Scale._--The fuze scale column shows the graduation at which
+the fuze must be set due to the time of flight for the range shown
+on the table. In the range table for the 18-pr. Q.F. we find for a
+range of 4,000 yards the fuze graduation is 12·8. As the fuze scales
+are compiled for a barometric pressure of 30 inches, this means that
+a shell with a fuze set at 12·8 will burst at 4,000 yards from the
+gun when fired at the sea level under normal conditions. For various
+reasons mentioned in Sec. 112, the fuze scale can only be taken as a
+guide.
+
+iii. _Angle of Descent._--The angle of descent is shown either in
+degrees and minutes or as a slope.
+
+As a field gun has only one charge, the only way to increase the angle
+of descent is to increase the range. With field howitzers varying
+charges are used, so that any required angle of descent can be obtained
+by a judicious selection of the position of the gun and the charge to
+be used.
+
+iv. _Remaining Velocity._--This column shows the actual velocity of the
+projectile at any given range.
+
+v. _Five Minutes Alteration of Elevation or Deflection._--These columns
+show what alteration in the range or point of impact is caused by an
+alteration of 5 minutes in elevation or deflection. The former is
+useful in ranging a howitzer battery, and the latter is useful in
+calculating the deflection to be given to concentrate the fire of
+the guns of a battery on to one point, and also in calculating the
+correction required to get parallel lines of fire when using an aiming
+point (_See_ Sec. =122=.) Thus, suppose the range to an aiming point
+is estimated at 2,800 yards, and the virtual displacement of the gun
+16 yards, the displacement difference will be 20 minutes, as the range
+table shows that 5 minutes deflection alters the point of impact 4
+yards at that range.
+
+vi. _Time of Flight._--Time of flight is shown in seconds.
+
+vii. _Deflection for Drift._--The sights of some howitzers not being
+arranged to counteract the drift of the projectile, it is necessary to
+give deflection. The amount required at the various angles of elevation
+is shown in the table. It is always given to the left.
+
+viii. _Accuracy Tables._--These columns give the length or breadth or
+height within which 50 per cent. of rounds should fall and are based
+upon actual practice.
+
+_Example._--As an example take the 18-pr. Q.F. gun. At 3,000 yards
+the 50 per cent. length is given as 20 yards, and the breadth as 1·44
+yards. A series of rounds might fall, as in Fig. 16, round about a
+target T. Of these 50 per cent. would be contained between the two
+lines AB, CD, 20 yards apart, 10 yards on each side of the centre of
+the group. All the rounds should fall within two lines four times that
+distance apart, that is 40 yards on each side of the centre of the
+group.
+
+Again, of the rounds that fell right and left of the centre of the
+group 50 per cent. would be enclosed by the two lines FE, HG, Fig. 17,
+1·44 yards apart, and all should be contained by two lines four times
+that distance apart.
+
+If now one pair of parallel lines are placed over the other as in Fig.
+18, evidently the rectangle enclosed by them will contain 50 per cent.
+of 50 per cent., that is 25 per cent. of the total.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 16.]
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 17.]
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 18.]
+
+The width of other zones (containing a different percentage of hits)
+can be obtained by multiplying the width of the 50 per cent. zone by a
+varying factor (_see_ Text Book of Gunnery).
+
+If the target is a vertical one, the figures in the column “_height_”
+should be taken, instead of those under “_length_.”
+
+5. It is important to realize the effect of these laws in cases of
+ordinary practice, where errors in range are of chief moment. We have
+seen that at 3,000 yards, with the 18-pr. Q.F. gun, a series of rounds
+would fall within two lines 40 yards on each side of the centre of
+the series; therefore a shell falling 39 yards short is within normal
+limits of error, but it should be counterbalanced by other shots
+falling over.
+
+6. Accuracy of fire is a comparative term; it is said to be good when
+a group of projectiles, fired under as nearly as possible the same
+conditions, falls close together.
+
+The probable percentage of hits obtainable from an 18-pr. Q.F. on a
+shield 4 feet 6 inches high and 5 feet wide, fired under experimental
+conditions,
+
+    is at 2,000 yards          60 per cent.
+          2,500   ”            33    ”
+          3,000   ”            16    ”
+          3,500   ”             8½   ”
+          4,000   ”             5    ”
+
+Under service conditions these percentages would be considerably
+reduced.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+LAYING.
+
+
+=115.= _General instructions._
+
+1. All guns are so mounted that two motions can be given to the axis
+of the gun, viz., motion in a vertical direction, termed elevation,
+and motion in a horizontal direction, termed traversing. Elevation
+is always given by mechanism, traversing is sometimes carried out by
+mechanism and sometimes by hand.
+
+A gun is said to be “_laid_,” when, by elevating and traversing, its
+axis is made to point in the required direction.
+
+2. Accuracy and rapidity are the two main factors in good laying.
+Accuracy is required against stationary targets, while rapidity becomes
+of more importance against large and moving targets.
+
+3. Instruction in laying should be divided into four stages:--
+
+_1st Stage._--Instructional target at close distance, explanation of
+terms and rules, &c.
+
+_2nd Stage._--Laying at well-defined natural objects at effective
+ranges, and continued at less well-defined objects at long and distant
+ranges.
+
+_3rd Stage._--Laying at moving targets. This can be practised by
+sending out men, mounted or on foot, to move at the pace and in the
+direction desired. In order to check the laying they should be halted
+by signal on the word “_fire_.”
+
+_4th Stage._--Indirect laying.
+
+4. The instructional target will be found valuable in teaching the men
+of a battery to lay guns correctly and uniformly, as with it personal
+errors can be shown, both in elevation and direction, and the practical
+rules for correcting errors can be demonstrated.
+
+5. When laying with open sights, in order to obtain uniform results,
+one method should be strictly adhered to. The service method of laying
+a gun is to direct it so that the centre of the imaginary line joining
+the two highest points of the notch of the hind sight, the point of the
+fore sight and the target are in line.
+
+The gun should be approximately laid before looking over the sight; the
+laying should then be completed by depressing the gun and sights on to
+the target so as to avoid any error due to play of the elevating gear.
+
+The distance of the eye from the sight should be the same from round to
+round, and all layers of a battery should be trained to keep the eye at
+the same distance.
+
+6. After the gunner has attained a thorough knowledge of the sights,
+and can lay accurately and rapidly on well-defined targets, he should
+be taught to lay on natural objects, such as troops halted and in
+motion, hedges, batteries, entrenchments, crest lines, at varying
+ranges and under varying conditions of light, background, &c. The
+ground line should always be laid on unless orders to the contrary are
+given.
+
+
+=116.= _Direct laying._
+
+1. Direct laying can only be employed when the target is visible over
+or through the sights.
+
+2. With 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. field guns the elevating mechanism is
+so designed that, after the sights have been directed on the target,
+the axis of the gun can be moved independently of the sights, and
+inclined in a vertical direction at any angle to the line of sight,
+which remains directed on the target. The angle at which the axis of
+the gun is inclined to the line of sight, and the range due to it, is
+shown on the range indicator on the right side of the gun. With the
+independent line of sight, once the sights are laid on the target any
+angle of elevation can be given without having to re-lay the gun. To
+lay the gun, align the sights, or telescope, on the target, and adjust
+the range indicator to the elevation ordered.
+
+With other field guns the sight is set at the elevation ordered, and
+the gun is laid by directing the sights or telescope on the target.
+
+3. The advantage of direct laying is that, when the gun is laid, the
+correct angle of sight is automatically included, and complications
+will not arise in determining the corrector settings or length of fuze.
+
+The disadvantages are the personal error of the layers, and the
+difficulties due to light and distance; with the telescopic sight,
+slowness, over-laying for direction, and difficulty in picking up the
+target.
+
+4. At medium ranges and against moving targets direct laying, or an
+aiming point as described in Sec. =120=, should be used, according as
+the formation of the ground and local circumstances render advisable.
+The telescopic sight is particularly useful against guns in action,
+trenches, &c., when great accuracy of line is important.
+
+5. When laying direct the sight clinometer should be set level at the
+earliest opportunity. This enables the laying for elevation to be
+checked, or a change from direct to indirect laying to be made, should
+the target become obscured from any cause.
+
+
+=117.= _Indirect laying._
+
+1. Indirect laying can be employed whether the target is visible over
+the sights or not, and _is the normal method employed in the field_.
+
+If a change from direct to indirect laying is desired, the order
+“INDIRECT” must be given, and the layer must immediately pick up an
+auxiliary aiming point to lay on for direction.
+
+2. _For elevation._--With sights provided with an adjustable level the
+level is set at the angle of sight, and the range indicator or drum
+at the elevation ordered. The gun is elevated and depressed until the
+bubble is level.
+
+With sights not provided with an adjustable level, or with field
+clinometer, the angle of sight is added to the elevation due to the
+range, if it is one of elevation, and subtracted if it is one of
+depression. The sight or clinometer is set at the elevation ordered,
+the gun elevated and then depressed until the bubble is level.
+
+3. The advantages of laying in this way are that the personal error of
+the layer is eliminated, and the accuracy of the laying is not affected
+by light or distance.
+
+The disadvantage is that, if the angle of sight has not been accurately
+measured and allowed for, the range shown on the range indicator or
+drum will not be the true range, and complications will arise in
+determining the corrector setting or length of fuze.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 19.]
+
+In Fig. 19 let T be the target, G the gun (18-pr. Q.F.), T being on a
+higher level than G.
+
+If the angle of sight be underestimated, the range on the range
+indicator will not be the true range.
+
+    Supposing true range GT        = 3,900 yards.
+        ”       ”  angle of sight  = 2° 45′ elevation.
+    Angle of sight ordered         = 2° elevation.
+
+It follows that, in order to hit T, the range on the range indicator
+must be 3,900 yards + 45 minutes, or about 4,150 yards.
+
+The fuze, however, required will be that for 3,900 yards, but the
+battery commander being unaware that he has wrongly estimated the angle
+of sight, the fuzes will be set for 4,150 yards with the corrector
+ordered, and all grazes may be expected. The corrector setting obtained
+will not be a true one for the day, nor will the range be true.
+
+4. _For direction._--Direction is obtained by laying on an aiming
+point, or on a line marked by two aiming posts. The method of carrying
+this out is described in Sec. =198=.
+
+When indirect laying is used in the open with guns not provided with
+the No. 7 Dial Sight, the layer after the gun has been put on the line
+by the section commander will pick up an auxiliary aiming point with
+his rocking bar sight or over the dial sight to lay on from round to
+round. (_See_ Sec. =198=, b, ii.)
+
+
+=118.= _Angle of sight._
+
+1. The angle of sight can be measured by the sights on the gun, by
+the level on the director, or by any other angle of sight instrument.
+Considerable care should be taken in making this measurement, as on it
+depends the accurate determination of the fuze.
+
+2. When the target is not visible from the guns, or from a position
+near the guns, the angle of sight can be found by means of the
+following formula:--
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 20.]
+
+     (_a_¹ × BO + _a_² × OT),
+     ---------------------------------
+                  BT
+
+    where T is the target, B the battery, and O the observer.
+         _a_¹ is the angle of sight from B to O.
+         _a_² is the angle of sight from O to T.
+
+Angles of elevation are read as plus. Angles of depression as minus.
+
+The No. 3 director is designed to work out this problem automatically,
+excepting when battery, observing station, and target are approximately
+in line.
+
+3. When indirect laying is employed, and the sights are provided with
+adjustable levels, the battery commander should invariably order the
+angle of sight to the battery, both on first coming into action, and on
+every subsequent change of target, either by giving out a fresh angle
+of sight, or by raising or lowering the old angle of sight (_see_ para.
+=4= below).
+
+The battery commander must also order the necessary correction in the
+angle of sight to allow for the differences in levels between the guns
+or different parts of the target.
+
+4. Any alteration in angle of sight will be effected by the order
+“RAISE (OR LOWER) ANGLE OF SIGHT--MINUTES.” When engaging stationary
+targets and the correct trajectory has been found, it is unwise to
+alter the angle of sight to correct the height of burst.
+
+At moving targets, however, it is better to alter the angle of sight
+rather than to vary the corrector, except for small final adjustments.
+
+
+=119.= _Deflection._
+
+1. During its flight various causes are at work tending to make a
+projectile deviate to right or left of its initial direction.
+
+To counteract deviation it is necessary to set the line of sight at an
+angle to the axis of the gun in a horizontal direction. This angle is
+called “_deflection_.” If the hind sight is moved to the right (called
+right deflection) the axis of the gun will point to the right of the
+line of sight and the shot will fall more to the right in accordance
+with the amount of deflection allowed. Similarly, if the shot is
+required to go to the left, left deflection must be given.
+
+2. _Difference in level of wheels._--_See also_ Sec. =106=.
+
+The practical rule for making corrections for difference in level
+of wheels with gun carriages having a wheel track of 60 inches or
+thereabouts, is: number of inches or degrees difference in level of
+wheels × number of degrees of elevation on the range indicator or
+tangent sight = number of minutes deflection to be given on the side
+of the higher wheel. When possible, it is better to dig in the higher
+wheel and level the wheels in this way. This also helps to steady the
+carriage and improve the shooting.
+
+3. _Drift_ is the deviation of a projectile, due to rotation, that
+occurs in all rifled guns. The deviation is to the right or left
+according as the gun has a right or left-hand twist. Drift increases
+with the elevation and range of the gun, and is counteracted either
+by:--
+
+      i. Permanently inclining the sight (15-pr. B.L.C.) or axis
+           of the trunnions (13 and 18-pr. Q.F.);
+     ii. The “_set_” of the dial sight (5-inch B.L. Howitzer);
+    iii. An automatically actuated mechanism in the sight
+           carrier (4·5-inch Q.F. Howitzer).
+
+4. _Moving targets._--In the case of a target moving across the line of
+fire, it may be necessary to give deflection; if so, the following is a
+useful guide:--
+
+    If the target is moving at a walk  give 20′.
+     ”        ”        ”       a trot    ”  40′.
+     ”        ”        ”       a gallop  ”   1°.
+
+This should be given by the battery commander.
+
+5. _Wind._--The wind, especially at long ranges, causes a shell to
+deviate to the right or left. Although the strength of a wind may vary
+at different points of the trajectory of a shell, allowance can be
+approximately made for it by observing its strength and direction.
+
+A rough estimate of the deflection per thousand yards in the range
+necessary to allow for a wind blowing directly across the line of fire
+is given below:--
+
+    15 minutes when the wind is “Very strong.”
+    10         ”       ”        “Strong.”
+     7         ”       ”        “Fresh.”
+     5         ”       ”        “Moderate.”
+
+In the case of howitzers these amounts should be slightly increased.
+
+These corrections decrease as the direction of the wind approaches the
+line of fire.
+
+Practically each minute of deflection on the sight gives a difference
+of 1 inch in every 100 yards of range.
+
+6. All officers and N.C.O’s. should know what angles are subtended by
+various parts of the hand when placed at arm’s length. Thus:--
+
+Thumb and fingers extended, as in Fig. 21 (about 19 degrees), fist
+clenched (8 degrees), first and second fingers extended (6 degrees),
+the various knuckles, &c.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 21.]
+
+For the purpose of instruction a degree scale calculated for a given
+distance and painted on a wall will be found useful.
+
+7. In ordering deflection it must be clearly understood that the
+amount ordered is in addition to any deflection that may be already
+on the sight, for this reason the word “more” is always to be used.
+Thus:--sight has 25′ right deflection; if “10′ more right” be ordered
+the sight will be set at 35′ right. Similarly, if “10´ more left” had
+been ordered the sight would have been set at 15′ right.
+
+
+=120.= _Aiming points._[9]
+
+1. Aiming points are conspicuous points capable of easy description
+on which the gun sight or dial sight is laid. They are used for two
+specific purposes, namely:--
+
+[9] NOTE.--An aiming point must not be confused with a reference point.
+(_See_ Sec. =186=.)
+
+     i. For obtaining the original lines of fire to a target.
+    ii. For laying on from round to round.
+
+As regards i. the aiming point should be as distant as possible and,
+with a view to reducing the necessary correction for parallelism, as
+much in prolongation of the line of guns as practicable.
+
+It should, however, be noted that a well-defined aiming point not in
+prolongation of the line of guns is better than an ill-defined one
+which is in prolongation, provided that the correction for parallelism
+is not forgotten. (_See_ Sec. =122=.)
+
+As regards ii. when the aiming point cannot be laid on from round to
+round an auxiliary aiming point must be picked up by the layer.
+
+2. The aiming point or auxiliary aiming points must be made known to
+the section commander and No. 1, and to the other numbers at the gun as
+opportunity offers.
+
+3. When the lines of fire are laid out by means of an aiming point,
+then either two aiming posts can be planted in the line of fire and
+laid on over the rocking bar sight, or the aiming point or an auxiliary
+aiming point can be laid on through the No. 7 dial sight, or over the
+No. 1 dial sight if neither the aiming point nor the auxiliary aiming
+point are within the field of the rocking bar sight.
+
+
+=121.= _Clearing the crest._
+
+When guns are in action under cover the section commanders are
+responsible that the shell will clear the crest. Immediately on coming
+into action the section commanders must report to the battery commander
+the lowest elevation which will clear the crest with zero angle of
+sight, if no angle of sight has been ordered. The various methods of
+carrying out this operation are fully dealt with in the handbooks of
+the guns.
+
+
+=122.= _Parallelism of lines of fire._
+
+1. =It is very important that the lines of fire of the guns of a
+battery should be parallel when first laid out, and every effort should
+be made to attain this object.= Its commander will then have a definite
+condition from which to make his calculations, and should be able to
+switch his guns from one target to another without losing parallelism,
+to distribute his fire correctly over a given front, or to concentrate
+it on a given point.
+
+2. When the guns of a battery are laid off an aiming point with the
+same angle, their lines of fire will not be parallel unless the aiming
+point is either at an infinite distance, or in exact prolongation of
+the line of guns.
+
+In Fig. 22 A and B are the positions of the flank guns and CD is the
+prolongation of the line of guns.
+
+Suppose P is an aiming point which, for simplicity, is taken as the
+correct line of fire for the right gun, and is at right angles to the
+line of guns.
+
+If AE is drawn parallel to BP, it will represent the line of fire
+required for the left gun.
+
+The correction for parallelism for the left gun is consequently
+the angle EAP, which is equal to the angle APB, _i.e._, the angle
+subtending the front of the battery at the range of the aiming point.
+
+This position of the aiming point, namely, at right angles to the line
+of guns, entails the greatest amount of correction for parallelism for
+an aiming point at any given distance.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 22.]
+
+If the aiming point is in any other position at the same distance, such
+as P¹, the angle AP¹ B becomes smaller, as the front of the battery
+A¹ B becomes foreshortened when viewed from the aiming point. This
+foreshortening continues until the frontage of the battery disappears,
+_i.e._, the aiming point is in prolongation of the line of guns, in
+which case no correction for parallelism is necessary.
+
+3. The correction necessary to make the line of fire of A parallel to
+the line of fire of B varies with the distance BP, and the angle PBD.
+
+The total correction, divided by the number of gun intervals, gives the
+amount of distribution or concentration necessary for each gun.
+
+When the aiming point is in front of the line of guns distribution is
+required; when in rear the same rule holds good, but concentration is
+required.
+
+4. The following table gives angular corrections for each gun interval
+for different positions of the aiming point:--
+
+    --------------+------------------------------------------------
+    Angle between |            Range to aiming point.
+    line to aiming|
+    point and line+------+------+------+------+------+------+------
+       of guns.   |1000ˣ |2000ˣ |3000ˣ |4000ˣ |5000ˣ |6000ˣ |7000ˣ
+    --------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------
+                  |Mins. |Mins. |Mins. |Mins. |Mins. |Mins. |Mins.
+    10 degrees.   | 10   |  5   |  5   |  5   |  5   |  5   |  5
+    20    ”       | 25   | 10   | 10   |  5   |  5   |  5   |  5
+    30    ”       | 35   | 15   | 10   | 10   |  5   |  5   |  5
+    40    ”       | 45   | 20   | 15   | 10   | 10   |  5   |  5
+    50 to 70 “    | 60   | 30   | 20   | 15   | 10   | 10   | 10
+    80  ” 90 “    | 70   | 35   | 25   | 20   | 15   | 10   | 10
+    --------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------
+
+A good rough rule to ascertain the parallelism required is to divide
+the angle between the line to the aiming point and the line of guns by
+the number of thousands of yards range to the aiming point. The result
+is the number of minutes concentration or distribution for each gun.
+
+5. Another method is as follows:--Two guns (preferably the flank guns)
+after their sights have been laid on the aiming point at the angle
+ordered, may be ordered to lay on each other and report to the battery
+leader the angles read. The battery leader then adds them together,
+subtracts their sum from 180° and the result divided by the number of
+gun intervals gives the distribution or concentration required per gun.
+
+Thus in Fig. 23, supposing No. 1 gun reports “my angle 15°,” and No. 6
+gun reports “my angle 160°,” the battery leader knows that 5° is the
+total distribution for the battery and that 1° is the distribution per
+gun.
+
+
+=123.= _Displacement._
+
+1. _Single displacement._--When the battery leader is unable to place
+his director in or quite near to the line of guns a correction known as
+single displacement becomes necessary to compensate for the difference
+in the angles between the aiming point and the target, measured at the
+director and at the battery respectively.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 23.]
+
+This correction is given to all guns in such a way as to bring the
+lines of fire towards the director.
+
+In Fig. 24 suppose T is the target, B the battery, D the battery
+leader’s director and P the aiming point. If no allowance for
+displacement was made the lines of fire would be as much to the left of
+the target as B is to the left of D.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 24.]
+
+2. A simple rule for calculating the displacement angle is as follows:--
+
+      6          Base in yards
+    ---- × -------------------------- = Displacement angle.
+     10    Range in hundreds of yards
+
+_Example._--Suppose in Fig. 24 the base (BD) is 200ˣ, the range (DT) is
+4,000ˣ, and the angle to the aiming point (PDT) is 79°.
+
+                                   6      200
+    Then the displacement angle = ---- × ----- = 3°,
+                                   10      40
+
+and the battery leader would give out the angle “82° (_i.e._, 79 and 3)
+Right” to the battery.
+
+If the aiming point had been to the right of the target, the
+displacement angle would have been deducted from the battery angle.
+
+3. When it is desired to give the line of fire to the battery leader’s
+director, or to the flank gun, from the observing station and the
+distance is not enough to warrant the use of the plotter, the above
+method of computing the displacement angle will be found useful. (_See_
+Sec. =198= (2).)
+
+The battery commander will make the necessary correction before sending
+the angle to the gun or director.
+
+4. _Double displacement._--When the observing station is some distance
+from the battery, the switch angle measured to a new target will
+usually differ from that required at the guns. This difference is known
+as _double displacement_.
+
+5. In Fig. 25, suppose B is the battery, D the director, A the original
+target, and T the new target.
+
+The angle measured between the original target and the new target at
+the director will only coincide with that required at the battery, that
+is the angle ADT will only be equal to ABT, when all the four points
+happen to be on the circumference of a circle. If T is in any position
+such as T¹, outside that circle, the angle at D is less than the angle
+at B; if in any position T², inside the circle, the angle at D is
+greater than that at B.
+
+6. In practice it is useless to attempt to calculate the difference of
+the apex angles at A and T. The most accurate method is to work out
+the problem on the plotter as described in Sec. =198=. The difference
+between the battery angle and that for the first target will be the
+switch angle.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 25.]
+
+If the line to the first target has been found otherwise than by the
+plotter, and the observing station is some distance from the battery,
+the battery leader should measure the battery angle to the first target
+as soon as possible, and communicate it to the battery commander.
+
+With this information the battery commander, after working out the new
+battery angle, can ascertain the switch angle to order to the guns.
+
+7. If the tactical situation does not admit of this method, or when,
+owing to a small difference in range between the two targets, the
+displacement is likely to be small, an approximation may be arrived at
+as follows:--
+
+Decide whether the line joining the two targets is more foreshortened
+to the battery or to your own eye. If the former the switch angle will
+be less than that measured, if the latter it will be greater.
+
+8. Another method is to switch over one gun through the estimated angle
+to the new target, correct its line by observation of fire, and, when
+line is correct, to order parallel lines to that gun.
+
+
+=124.= _Gun layers and fuze setters._
+
+1. In all batteries of horse, field and heavy artillery, a list
+of qualified layers and fuze setters is to be kept by the battery
+commander.
+
+2. In order to qualify to be placed on the list of layers, a
+non-commissioned officer or gunner is to be examined as described in
+“Instructions for Practice.” All serjeants should also be tested in
+laying.
+
+3. Every battery should have at least 3 men qualified as layers and
+6 men as fuze setters per subsection, exclusive of serjeants. These
+should be tested periodically.
+
+Any non-commissioned officer or gunner with good sight should be able
+to pass this test.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+MOUNTED DRILL.
+
+
+=125.= _General instructions._
+
+1. At drill or manœuvre, the sections of a battery are termed “right,”
+“centre” or “left,” and the subsections are numbered from 1 to 6 as
+they stand in line without reference to any number or letter in use for
+administrative purposes. In column they are termed “leading,” “centre,”
+and “rear.”
+
+A four-gun battery is organized on similar lines.
+
+At brigade drill batteries are termed “right,” “centre,” and “left,” or
+“leading,” “centre,” and “rear,” according to their position in line or
+column respectively.
+
+2. The object of drill is to acquire accuracy and flexibility in
+carrying out movements necessary for manœuvre.
+
+These movements should be as few and simple as possible, and the
+brigade or battery should be trained to execute them with precision and
+rapidity in any direction passing over as little ground as possible.
+
+3. When a general order is not distinctly heard by a part of the line,
+each commander (when the intention is obvious) will conform as quickly
+as possible to this movement.
+
+4. Numbering in line is from right to left; in column from the right of
+the head of the column.
+
+The relative position of batteries within a brigade, of sections within
+a battery, or of subsections within a section, may be changed at any
+time, but sections must not be broken up.
+
+The battery or the section on the right of the line is always, for the
+time being, the right battery or section. Line is to be formed in any
+required direction with the utmost rapidity possible, without regard
+to the original positions which batteries or sections or subsections
+within sections, occupied when they were last told off.
+
+5. The command “MARCH,” unless preceded by some other command, means
+“Trot.” This does not refer to heavy batteries.
+
+When moving at any pace exceeding a walk, the command “WALK” will
+precede by a few seconds the command “HALT.”
+
+Movements and formations will be made on the move unless the order “to
+the halt” is given; in the case of formations “to the halt” the base
+body advances its own depth before halting.
+
+If a formation be ordered when a battery is on the move the original
+pace will be preserved by the base body, while that of each portion
+of the remainder will be increased or diminished as may be necessary,
+until the formation is completed; but in field and heavy batteries, if
+moving at the trot, and the formation is to the head of the column, the
+pace of the base body will be reduced to the walk until the formation
+is completed, when the trot will be resumed.
+
+6. Horse and field artillery cannot be reversed on its own ground;
+when acting with other troops, the battery interval should be allowed
+on each flank to enable the subsections to wheel outwards if required.
+It is generally advisable in parade movements to remain in rear of any
+intended alignment until the other troops are finally formed.
+
+7. When it is intended to increase the front the formation may be to
+either or both flanks. If no special order is given the formation will
+be outwards, the body which is immediately in rear of the head going to
+the right. If it is intended to form on the right or left it must be so
+stated.
+
+To pass obstacles, and to facilitate movement, the batteries may
+increase or decrease the battery intervals.
+
+
+_Mountain Artillery._
+
+8. Mountain batteries are organized in two lines for drill and
+manœuvre, the firing battery, and 1st line.
+
+The relief mules which form part of the firing battery should be taken
+one from each subsection.
+
+At drill and manœuvre the firing battery moves independently of the 1st
+line, which, if present, follows some distance in rear and conforms
+generally to the movements of the firing battery.
+
+9. Mountain batteries move usually at the walk, and the command “MARCH”
+means walk, unless some other pace is ordered. A pace of four miles an
+hour should be maintained on level ground.
+
+A distance of one yard between mules, measured from nose to croup, is
+always maintained on a good road.
+
+Batteries should also be able to move some distance at a slow trot and
+should be trained accordingly.
+
+10. To reverse or take ground.--Every animal is at once turned about,
+or to the right or left, as ordered, the gun detachments moving round
+with the mules and maintaining their position relative to them. As a
+general rule mules are reversed to the left.
+
+In executing a movement to a flank, the half wheel of subsections is to
+be preferred.
+
+11. In the detail of drill movements contained in sections, the
+instructions are generally applicable to mountain batteries with the
+following modifications:--
+
+     i. All reference to the movement of wagons of field
+          artillery may be neglected.
+    ii. Where the incline of subsections or carriages is ordered
+          for a field battery, the movement will be executed by
+          the half wheel of subsections except for diminishing or
+          increasing intervals in line. Where a formation into
+          line or column is effected in field artillery by one
+          part of the battery increasing its pace, in mountain
+          artillery that part of the battery makes no change, but the
+          remainder of the battery checks its pace.
+
+
+=126.= _Falling in for parade._
+
+1. The men of each subsection will fall in on foot in front of their
+own stables, where they will be inspected by their Nos. 1, and the
+reports made to the battery serjeant-major. The drivers and mounted men
+of each subsection will then be marched into stables ready to turn out
+when ordered, and the dismounted men marched to the gun park.
+
+2. The teams will be inspected by the Nos. 1 before they proceed to
+the gun park. When ordered to turn out, the subsections are formed up,
+mounted in front of their stables, marched to the gun park and hooked
+in. Teams should not be hooked in until shortly before the hour for
+parade.
+
+3. Each section will also be inspected by its section commander, whose
+duty it is to see that every man, animal, and carriage is properly
+equipped, that each gun is in working order, the buffer filled and the
+bore clear.
+
+He should then dismount drivers and detachments and make his report to
+the captain.
+
+If a section is without an officer, the senior non-commissioned officer
+of that section takes his place and commands it.
+
+4. When bare charges are carried and when the cartridge is contained in
+a case which is not attached to the shell, all drill ammunition will be
+left in barracks or camp.
+
+
+_Mountain Artillery._
+
+5. When ordered to turn out, the drivers will turn out with their mules
+by subsections and be marched to the gun park, where they will form up
+behind the guns in the position for action.
+
+Mules will not be loaded or the girths tightened till the last possible
+moment.
+
+
+=127.= _Intervals and distances._
+
+1. Intervals are measured from No. 1 to No. 1 when limbered up, from
+muzzle to muzzle when in action, and from knee to knee between files.
+
+    Between files                                        6 inches.
+    Open files                                           2 yards.
+    Half extended files                                  4   ”
+    Extended files                                       8   ”
+    Close interval between subsections                   4   ”
+         ”            ”         ”      heavy batteries   6   ”
+    Half interval between subsections                   10   ”
+         ”            ”         ”      heavy batteries  12   ”
+    Full interval between subsections                   20   ”
+         ”            ”         ”      heavy batteries  25   ”
+    Battery intervals--
+      Between batteries at full intervals               25   ”
+          ”        ”       close    ”                   10   ”
+    Intervals--
+      between brigades                                  25   ”
+          ”   artillery and other troops                25   ”
+
+2. Distances are measured between animals from tail to head, between
+carriages from rear end of carriages to head of the following team, and
+between the units of a column or Échelon from No. 1 to No. 1, except
+when otherwise stated:--
+
+    Between ranks                          half a horse-length (4 feet).
+    Battery column, column or
+      échelon of sections                   40 yards.
+    Column or échelon of sections,
+      heavy batteries                       50   ”
+    Column of batteries                    125   ”
+       ”           ”    heavy batteries    100   ”
+    Short échelon of sections or
+      batteries                             20   ”
+    Short échelon of section or
+      batteries, heavy batteries            25   ”
+    Quarter column of batteries             12   ” between carriages
+                                                 and lead horses’ heads.
+       ”           ”  sections               6    ”     ”     ”     ”
+    Column of route                          4    ”     ”     ”     ”
+    Between brigades and larger bodies
+      in column of route                    20    ”     ”     ”     ”
+    Between batteries in column of route    10    ”     ”     ”     ”
+    Column or échelon of sections
+      of mountain batteries                100    ”     ”     ”     ”
+
+
+=128.= _Frontages and depths._
+
+1. The frontage at full interval of a horse, field or mountain battery
+(6 guns) may be taken to be 100 yards, and that of a heavy battery 75
+yards.
+
+2. The depth in column of route of a horse battery with detachments on
+a flank, or of a field battery, is obtained by allowing 20 yards for
+each carriage with an allowance for the headquarters. Horse artillery
+with detachments front or rear requires an extra 8 yards for each
+detachment; if the detachments are in files, 4 yards must be allowed
+for every two horses in the detachment.
+
+The road spaces occupied by batteries in column of route are as
+follows:--
+
+A horse artillery battery (6 guns and 12 wagons):--
+
+    With detachments right or left of the guns     390 yards.
+      ”      ”       front or rear                 440   ”
+      ”      ”       in files                      490   ”
+    A field battery (with 6 guns and 12 wagons)    390   ”
+    A heavy battery (with 8 wagons)                340   ”
+
+The depth of a mountain battery, in column of route, is obtained by
+allowing 3 yards for each mule or pony, and adding 25 yards for Nos. 1,
+coverers, range-takers and signallers.
+
+
+=129.= _Posts of officers, N.C.Os., &c._
+
+1. The positions assigned to the brigade and battery commanders are
+those to be taken up when the formation is completed; while it is in
+progress their posts are wherever they can best superintend and be seen
+and heard by their commands.
+
+In order to carry out this principle effectually, commanders of
+batteries and brigades should not remain too close to their commands.
+When moving in line, or in line of battery columns, their normal
+position is in front of the centre.
+
+In quarter column formations officers (other than those in front) and
+serrefiles take half distance.
+
+2. BRIGADE COMMANDER. _In line._--In the centre, two horse-lengths in
+front of battery commanders.
+
+_On other occasions._--In the best place from which he can command the
+brigade.
+
+3. BATTERY COMMANDER. _In line._--One horse-length in front of the
+centre of the line of section commanders.
+
+_In column or quarter column of batteries._--One horse-length in front
+of, and three from the directing flank of, the battery.
+
+_In all other formations._--In front of the battery.
+
+4. CAPTAIN. _In line._--One horse-length in rear of the centre of the
+serrefile rank.
+
+_In column of batteries._--As in line.
+
+_In quarter column of batteries, full or close interval._--Half a
+horse-length on the outer flank of the battery, in line with the front
+rank or gun leaders.
+
+_In battery column._--Three horse-lengths on the right flank of the
+centre of the battery.
+
+_In column of subsections and column of route._--One horse-length in
+rear of the rear carriage.
+
+5. SECTION COMMANDER. _In line._--One horse-length in front of the
+centre of his section.
+
+_In battery column or quarter column._--The leading section commander
+as in line, the remainder in centre of sections in line with front rank
+or gun leaders.
+
+_In column of subsections and column of route._--Where he can best
+command his section.
+
+6. OBSERVATION OFFICER (HEAVY BATTERIES).--With the observation party.
+
+7. ADJUTANT.--The adjutant will, as a rule, accompany the brigade
+commander and assist him as required.
+
+When a formation is completed he will place himself as follows:--
+
+_In line._--On the right flank of the brigade, one horse-length from
+and in line with the front rank or gun leaders.
+
+_In column and échelon._--Three horse-lengths on the right flank of the
+leading battery in line with the front rank or gun leaders.
+
+8. BRIGADE SERJEANT-MAJOR. _In line, in column, and in
+échelon._--Covering the adjutant at one horse-length distance.
+
+9. BRIGADE TRUMPETER.--With brigade commander.
+
+10. BATTERY STAFF-SERJEANTS. _In line and in column of batteries._--One
+horse-length in rear of the flank subsections; the serjeant-major on
+the right.
+
+_In quarter column of batteries, full and close interval._--As in line,
+but half a horse-length in rear.
+
+_In battery column._--The serjeant-major and the
+quarter-master-serjeant in the centre of the leading and rear section
+respectively in line with the gun axles. In mountain artillery as for
+line.
+
+_In column of subsections and in column of route._--The serjeant-major
+on the off side of the leading gun in line with the leaders (in column
+of route, with the battery commander); the quarter-master-serjeant one
+horse-length in rear of the rear carriage in line with and on the left
+of the captain.
+
+11. SERJEANT-FARRIER AND MOUNTED SHOEING-SMITH. _In line._--The
+farrier, one horse-length in rear of No. 2 subsection, and the
+shoeing-smith (saddler in a British mountain battery) the same distance
+in rear of No. 5.
+
+_In quarter column of batteries, full and close interval._--As in line,
+but half a horse-length in rear.
+
+_In battery column._--One horse-length in rear of the rear carriages,
+the farrier in rear of that on the right. In mountain artillery as for
+line.
+
+_In column of subsections and in column of route._--One horse-length
+in rear of the captain and quartermaster-serjeant, except in mountain
+artillery, where they will be in single file, farrier leading.
+
+12. TRUMPETERS.--One with the battery commander, the other with the
+captain.
+
+13. NOS. 1.--Of horse artillery, on the left of the lead driver of the
+gun or with their detachments. (_See_ Sec. =134= (2).)
+
+Of field artillery, on the left of their gun leaders.
+
+Of mountain and heavy artillery at drill and manœuvre in front of their
+subsections.
+
+14. COVERERS.--On the left of their wagon leaders (of heavy artillery
+in front).
+
+15. PATROL, RANGE-TAKERS, SIGNALLERS, AND OBSERVERS.--_In line._--In
+line one horse-length in rear of the centre of the battery from right
+to left in the order named; at open files when the battery is at full
+or half interval; at close files when it is at close interval.
+
+In mountain artillery these men are dismounted and form in single rank
+one pace in rear of the centre of the battery.
+
+_In column of subsections and column of route._--In a column of parties
+from front to rear in the order named; the men of each party abreast
+of one another, and the rear party one horse-length in front of the
+leading section commanders.
+
+_In battery column or quarter column._--In column as above, one
+horse-length on the right flank of the centre of the battery.
+
+_In quarter column of batteries full or close interval._--As in line,
+but at half a horse-length distance.
+
+16. SPARE HORSES. _In line._--In the serrefile rank in rear of the
+centre of their sections, those of the centre section on the left of
+the line of patrols, range-takers, &c.
+
+_In quarter column of batteries, full or close interval._--One
+horse-length in rear of the rear battery. Those of the leading battery
+on the right, and those of the rear battery on the left.
+
+
+_Mountain artillery._
+
+17. SENIOR DRIVER N.C.O. _of British Mountain Batteries_, (Driver
+Havildar Major).
+
+_In line._--One pace in rear of the pioneer mule of the right section.
+
+_In action._--He is in charge of the firing battery mules.
+
+18. PIONEER MULES. In column of route and subsections.--Leading their
+section.
+
+_On all other occasions._--In the centre of the section, in line with
+the second ammunition mule.
+
+Two gunners, or one only if short-handed, per subsection are detailed
+as pioneers, and walk alongside the pioneer mules in the order of march.
+
+19. RELIEF MULES WITH FIRING BATTERY. _In line._--Distributed in rear
+of the 2nd ammunition mules.
+
+_In battery column and in column of subsections._--Following in rear of
+the firing battery.
+
+_In column of route._--With their subsections.
+
+20. WHEEL AND AXLE MULE. (10-pr. B.L. equipment only.) _In line and
+battery column._--One yard in rear of the pioneer mule of the centre
+section.
+
+_In column of subsections._--One yard in rear of the last mule of the
+relief mules with the firing battery.
+
+_In column of route._--The last of the firing battery mules of its
+subsection.
+
+
+_Indian mountain batteries._
+
+21. INDIAN OFFICERS. _In line at close order and in battery
+column._--One horse-length in rear of the centre of firing battery of
+their sections.
+
+_At drill and in action._--Two native officers assist the captain, the
+third is with the battery commander.
+
+_On all other occasions._--On the outer flank of and near the rear of
+their sections.
+
+22. BATTERY STAFF-SERJEANTS.--The havildar-major and
+quartermaster-havildar as for the battery serjeant-major and battery
+quartermaster-serjeant, but at one pace instead of a horse-length
+distance.
+
+23. PAY HAVILDAR.--_In line_ in rear of No. 3 subsection.
+
+_In battery column._--In rear of right subsection of centre section.
+
+_In column of subsections and column of route._--In front of the
+quartermaster-havildar.
+
+
+=130.= _Commands and signals._
+
+1. Orders may be given:--
+
+      i. By word of command.
+     ii. By signal.
+    iii. By trumpet sound.
+
+
+_Words of command._
+
+2. Direct word of command is not suitable for any larger body at the
+halt than a brigade, or on the move than a battery.
+
+3. All words of command should be given in a firm and explicit manner,
+and loud enough to be heard by all concerned. The executive part of the
+command must be clearly distinguished from the preparatory part, and
+must not follow it too quickly. =Commands will be accompanied by the
+corresponding signals.=
+
+4. Battery commanders repeat the brigade whistle and then give their
+own executive word or signal.
+
+Section commanders, as a rule, command by signal, and give orders by
+word of mouth only in case of necessity.
+
+Nos. 1 do not repeat commands or signals.
+
+The leader of every unit is responsible that the command is passed on
+correctly to the next leader.
+
+
+_Signals._
+
+5. The following signals are to be employed to represent the words of
+command mentioned:--
+
+                 _Signal._               |        _To Indicate._
+                                         |
+    i. Arm swung from rear to front      |“_Advance_,” _or_ “_Forward_,”
+       below the shoulder, finishing with| or “_Commence movement_.”
+       the hand pointing to the front.   |
+                                         |
+    ii. Arm circled above the head.      | “_Retire_,” or “_Subsections_
+                                         | --_Right about wheel_.”
+                                         |  (In mountain batteries)
+                                         |   “_Left reverse_.”
+                                         |
+    iii. Hand raised in line with the    | “_Walk_,” or “_Quick-time_.”
+         shoulder, elbow bent, and       |
+         close to the side.              |
+    iv. Clenched hand moved up and       |“_Trot_” or “_Double_.”
+         down between thigh and shoulder.|
+                                         |
+    v. Circular movement of hand below   |“_Gallop_.”
+        the shoulder in a vertical plane.|
+                                         |
+    vi. Arm raised at full extent above  |“_Halt_.”
+        the head.                        |
+                                         |
+    vii. Body or horse turned in the     |“_Incline_.”
+      required direction and arm extended|
+      in a line with the shoulder.       |
+                                         |
+    viii. Clenched hand brought to the   |“_Right_ (or _left_) _take_
+      shoulder, and the arm then extended|_ground_.”
+      sharply in the required direction  |
+      two or three times.                |
+                                         |
+    ix. Circular movement of extended    |“_Shoulders_,” or
+       arm in line with the shoulder in  |“_Wheel_.”
+       the required direction.           |
+                                         |
+    x. Arm waved from above the head     |“_Sections right_ (or _left_)
+       to a position in line with the    |_wheel_.”
+       shoulder, pointing in the required|
+       direction.                        |
+                                         |
+    xi. Arm waved horizontally from right|1. “_Form line_” from
+    to left and back again as though     |battery column or line
+    cutting with a sword, finishing with |of battery columns or mass.
+    the delivery of a point to the front.|
+                                         |
+                                         |2. “_Form mass_” from
+                                         |line, column of route
+                                         |or column of sections.
+                                         |
+                                         |3. “_Advance in battery_
+                                         |_column_” (for a single
+                                         |battery in line) or
+                                         |“_Advance in mass_”
+                                         |(from brigade in line).
+    xii. Two or three slight movements   |“_Form line_” from échelon.
+       of the open hand, palm to the     |
+       front (arm extended, hand waist   |
+       high) denoting a forward movement |
+       looking to each flank in turn.    |
+                                         |
+    xiii. As above, but arm to the rear, |“_Form échelon_” from line.
+       denoting a backward movement.     |
+                                         |
+    xiv. Two or three slight movements of|“_Dismount_” or “_Lie down_.”
+       the open hand towards the ground. |
+                                         |
+    xv. Two or three slight movements    |“_Mount_.”
+    with the open hand upwards (palm up).|
+                                         |
+    xvi. Arm raised as for “_Halt_”      |“_Action_.”
+        and then pointed to the ground.  |
+                                         |
+    xvii. Weapon held up above and as if |“_Enemy in sight in
+       guarding the head.                |small numbers_.”
+                                         |
+    xviii. As in xvii, but weapon        |“_Enemy in sight in_
+       raised and lowered frequently.    |_large numbers_.”
+                                         |
+    xix. Weapon held up at full extent of|“_No enemy in sight_.”
+       arm, point of muzzle uppermost.   |
+
+Signals for formations from line also apply to échelon.
+
+For signals to first line wagons in action, _see_ Sec. =201=.
+
+6. Officers giving signals should, as far as possible, face the same
+way as those to whom the signals are made, but when a signal ordering a
+change of direction is made, the body or horse should be turned in the
+required direction.
+
+All signals should be made with whichever arm will show most clearly
+what is meant.
+
+In order to ensure uniformity in the system of giving signals, they
+must be practised in the riding school.
+
+7. Signals of position, such as “_Halt_” or “_Incline_,” should be
+maintained. Signals of movement, such as “_Advance_” or “_Shoulders_,”
+should be repeated until it is clear that they are understood.
+
+8. The whistle (_see also_ Sec. =201=) will be used:--
+
+i. By brigade and battery commanders to draw attention to a signal
+about to be made--a short blast. The whistle must not be used when
+approaching guns or infantry already in action.
+
+ii. To turn out troops from bivouac or camp to fall in or to occupy
+previously arranged positions--a succession of alternate long and short
+blasts.
+
+When a battery is manœuvring as part of a brigade, the battery
+commander will only repeat the brigade commander’s whistle, to whom he
+will look for his signal.
+
+Section commanders will wait for their battery commander’s whistle and
+act on his signals, not on those of the brigade commander.
+
+
+_Field calls._
+
+9. The following field calls should be understood, and such as are
+applicable maybe used _see_ (Trumpet and Bugle Sounds for the Army):--
+
+    “Forward” _or_ “advance.”
+    “Walk.”
+    “Trot.”
+    “Gallop.”
+    “Charge.”
+    “March.”
+    “Halt.”
+    “Annul,” _or_ “As you were.”
+    “Troops, half-right.”
+    “Troops, half-left.”
+    “Form line.”
+    “Retire” or “Troops right (or left) about wheel,”
+      or (for artillery) “Subsections--Right about wheel.”
+    “Squadron columns.”
+    “Head of column change direction, half-right.”
+    “Head of column change direction, half-left.”
+    “Pursue.”
+    “Rally,” _or_ “Close.”
+    “Mass.”
+    “March at ease,” _or_ “Sit at ease.”
+    “Attention.”
+    “Stand to your horses.”
+    “Prepare to mount, or dismount.”
+    “Mount.”
+    “Dismount.”
+
+
+=131.= _Leading and dressing._
+
+1. To preserve uniformity of movement, men and horses must be trained
+to maintain the regular pace of trot and gallop.
+
+For the same reason the trot and gallop must commence simultaneously
+throughout the battery.
+
+As large bodies cannot move in perfect order as rapidly as smaller
+bodies, the leader must regulate the pace accordingly.
+
+2. The “_battery leader_” is the officer personally leading and
+controlling the movements of the battery. He should be well to the
+front.
+
+Should the battery commander for any reason temporarily cease to act as
+battery leader, his place will be taken by the senior section commander.
+
+3. The “_battery guide_” is the commander of the directing section,
+which is the second from the right (or in column and échelon the
+leading section). He is responsible for the direction and pace of the
+battery, following and conforming to the movements of the battery
+leader.
+
+The other sections will keep their relative positions from the
+directing section.
+
+4. Similarly in brigade the officer personally leading is the “_brigade
+leader_,” and the battery leader of the second battery from the right
+the “_brigade guide_.” A line of columns is considered a line in all
+matters connected with dressing.
+
+In échelon or column movements the battery leader of the leading
+battery is the brigade guide.
+
+
+=132.= _Wheeling._
+
+1. When wheeling, dressing is to the opposite flank to that to which
+the wheel is made. This flank regulates the pace at which the wheel is
+made, care being taken that the correct interval is preserved from the
+pivot.
+
+2. To wheel half or quarter, right or left, the word of command is
+“HALF (or QUARTER), RIGHT (or LEFT).” If it is required to complete the
+wheel to the full quarter circle, after having wheeled half right or
+half left, the command is “RIGHT (or LEFT).” When a definite degree of
+wheel has been ordered no further command is required, the battery or
+brigade guide being responsible for taking up the proper direction at
+the conclusion of the wheel ordered.
+
+3. In throwing shoulders forward both flanks are kept in motion, the
+pivot describing part of a circle, and the outer flank and intermediate
+subsections by a compound of inclining and wheeling, conforming to the
+pivot movements. To perform wheels on this principle the command is
+“RIGHT (or LEFT) SHOULDERS,” followed by “FORWARD” when the required
+degree of wheel has been attained.
+
+4. In small changes of direction (which are usually done by
+shouldering) the battery leader takes the new direction and the battery
+guide conforms. When a wheel amounts to a quarter of a circle or nearly
+so, the battery leader must give the signal to wheel and if desired
+the word of command and place himself in front of where the centre of
+the battery will be when the wheel is completed. He gives the signal
+“FORWARD” and moves in the new direction as soon as the battery is
+facing in the required direction.
+
+5. If it is desired to move the line or column consisting of guns and
+wagons to a flank, the command is “RIGHT (or LEFT) TAKE GROUND,” upon
+which each carriage wheels at once to the flank named. To move each
+carriage to the rear the command is “RIGHT REVERSE,” upon which each
+carriage wheels about to the right.
+
+When horse artillery receive the command “RIGHT (or LEFT) TAKE GROUND,
+or RIGHT (or LEFT) REVERSE,” if the detachments are in front or rear of
+their guns they wheel right, left, or about on their own ground.
+
+
+=133.= _Markers._
+
+1. The duties of markers will be restricted at drill to indicating the
+points for the assembly and formation of the battery or brigade for
+rendezvous.
+
+2. The markers for a battery are the battery serjeant-major and battery
+quartermaster-serjeant, who are termed respectively the right and left
+markers. Battery markers mark for the points nearest to their positions
+in the original formation. They are placed and dressed by the captain.
+
+3. The markers for a brigade are the brigade serjeant-major and the
+right marker of each battery. They are termed the brigade and battery
+markers respectively. They are placed and dressed by the adjutant.
+
+4. On the command “MARKERS” being given they move to their places, are
+dressed by the officer in charge of them, and when dressed receive the
+word “STEADY” from him. When the formation is completed he gives the
+command “EYES FRONT” and the markers fall in.
+
+5. When marking for line, markers face the new alignment, their horses’
+heads 6 inches from it, battery markers opposite the points where the
+horses of the Nos. 1 of the flank subsections will be, and the brigade
+marker in line with, and 1 yard outside, the flank marker on the
+directing flank.
+
+6. When marking for column of batteries, each marker should place
+himself 1 yard to the left of the spot where the No. 1 of the
+subsection for which he is marking will rest when the formation is
+completed, and should face the front. The brigade marker faces the
+marker on the directing flank of the leading battery; the adjutant
+places himself behind the brigade marker and corrects the covering.
+
+Markers are not required for a single battery in battery column.
+
+A line of columns is considered a line in all matters connected with
+marking.
+
+
+=134.= _The battery of horse artillery._
+
+1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is 11, of
+whom 9 are mounted. In addition a man is required with each section as
+section commander’s horseholder. He is numbered 12, and falls in on the
+right of the detachment of the left subsection of his section, except
+in column of route, when he rides with the leading subsection of his
+section.
+
+2. The senior N.C. officer of each detachment is the No. 1 in charge
+of the gun, and rides on the left of the lead driver of the gun,
+except in the case of “_detachment front_” when he is on the right of
+the detachment. The next senior is No. 7 the coverer in charge of the
+wagons, who rides on the left of the lead driver of the firing battery
+wagon. Having taken this wagon into action he returns with the team
+or limber to the selected position and is employed in the supply of
+ammunition as the commander of the wagon line may direct. Nos. 1, 2,
+3, 4, 5, 6 are active numbers (_see_ Handbook); Nos. 10 and 11 are
+horseholders and hold the horses of the active numbers, except those
+of 1 and 6 which are held by the centre driver of the gun and wagon
+respectively. Nos. 8 and 9 are dismounted men and are carried on the
+first line wagon. The horses of the battery commander and of the man,
+who works the director, are held by the first trumpeter.
+
+3. A section of horse artillery, with full detachments, is shown in
+Fig. 26 (the shaded figures representing the horses of active numbers).
+
+In cases of reduced detachments Nos. 6, 5, 10 are omitted in succession.
+
+4. A battery forms for drill and manœuvre as above. Detachments one
+horse-length on the right of and in line with the gun muzzles. This
+formation is termed “Detachments right rear.” Lead horses of the firing
+battery wagons one horse-length on the left of and in line with the gun
+muzzles.
+
+5. To decrease the front of the subsection the following formations may
+be adopted:--
+
+    Detachments  { Lead horses of guns one horse-length
+       front.    { in rear of the detachments covering
+                 { the centre.
+
+    Detachments  { Detachments one horse-length in rear
+       rear.     { of and covering the guns.
+
+In each case the firing battery wagons will cover the gun or detachment
+at a distance of four yards.
+
+The front may be still further reduced by advancing from the right or
+left of detachments by files.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 26.]
+
+    6. _To dismount and mount detachments, in line,_
+          _close interval, guns rear._
+
+                          {   At the caution, the front rank advances
+    PREPARE TO            { one horse-length and halts; the odd
+    DISMOUNT--DISMOUNT.   { numbers, both of front and rear ranks,
+                          { advance one horse-length,and at the word
+                          { “_Dismount_,” the whole dismount together.
+
+                          {   After mounting, the odd numbers of both
+                          { front and rear ranks rein back and dress
+                          { on the even numbers. The front rank then
+    PREPARE TO            { reins back one horse-length and halts.
+    MOUNT--MOUNT.         {
+                          {   If this is required to be done with
+                          { “detachments left” at close interval, the
+                          { detachments must be advanced one
+                          { horse-length in front of the guns, and
+                          { then dismounted, as laid down above.
+
+
+=135.= _The field battery._
+
+1. The number of men required for the service of each nature of gun
+is given in the handbooks. No. 1 is the senior; and the coverers, who
+are the next senior, are mounted non-commissioned officers. Nos. 1
+ride on the left of the lead drivers of their guns and the coverers
+will occupy a similar position as regards the wagons of the firing
+battery, will take them into action, and will return with the teams
+to the first line wagons. They will subsequently be employed for the
+supply of ammunition, as the commander of the wagon line may direct.
+The positions of the other numbers of the detachment are given in the
+handbook of the gun.
+
+2. In action the horses of officers and non-commissioned officers are
+held as follows. (_See_ Fig. 29, p. 306.)
+
+      i. Battery commander’s and that of the man who works the
+           director by the 1st trumpeter;
+     ii. Captain’s by the 2nd trumpeter.
+    iii. Battery leader’s or that of the officer accompanying
+           the battery commander, by an orderly.
+     iv. Battery serjeant-major’s by one of the battery
+           headquarters.
+      v. Section commander’s by the lead drivers of right
+           subsections.
+     vi. Nos. 1 by their centre drivers.
+
+
+=136.= _The mountain battery._
+
+1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is given in
+the handbook. No. 1 is the senior and leads his subsection, walking in
+front of the leading mule. The gunners walk alongside the mules in the
+order shown in the handbook. In bad or hilly ground they help the mules
+whenever necessary.
+
+2. A N.C.O. is detailed to be in charge of and lead the 1st line mules
+of each subsection, and will be employed in the supply of ammunition.
+
+3. In action the horses of the battery commander and battery
+serjeant-major are taken by the 1st trumpeter, that of the captain by
+the 2nd trumpeter, and those of the section commanders by a N.C.O. or
+driver of their right subsection.
+
+
+=137.= _The heavy battery._
+
+1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is given in
+the handbooks. The senior N.C.O. is called the No. 1, and the next
+senior, the coverer. The No. 1 is in charge of the gun, and the coverer
+in charge of the wagon.
+
+2. In action the horses of officers and non-commissioned officers are
+held as follows:--
+
+i. Battery commander’s and serjeant-major’s by the 1st trumpeter.
+
+ii. Captain’s by the 2nd trumpeter.
+
+iii. Section commander’s by a man detailed for the purpose.
+
+
+=138.= _Battery drill._
+
+i. The formations of a battery are:--
+
+      i. Line.
+     ii. Échelon or short échelon.
+    iii. Battery column.
+     iv. Battery quarter column.
+      v. Column of subsections.
+     vi. Column of route.
+
+    ------------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    2. _From_         |  The battery leader moves in the required
+    _line to          |direction. The battery guide follows preserving
+    _advance._        |smooth and uniform pace. The remaining
+                      |section commanders dress by the battery
+                      |guide and keep section interval from him, but
+                      |without constantly fixing their attention on him.
+                      |
+        MARCH.        |  The Nos. 1 keep correct interval and distance
+                      |from the section commanders. If
+                      |obstacles are met section commanders lead
+                      |their sections round them, or direct individual
+                      |guns to evade them.
+    ------------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    3. _From line to_ |
+    _advance in_      |
+    _échelon or short_|
+    _échelon._        |
+                      |
+    ADVANCE IN        |  The named section advances, the others
+    ÉCHELON (_or_     |follow at the distance ordered.
+    SHORT ÉCHELON)    |
+    FROM THE RIGHT    |
+    (CENTRE _or_      |
+    LEFT)--MARCH.     |
+    ------------------+-------------------------------------------------
+    4. _From line to_ |
+       _retire._      |
+                      |
+    i. SUBSECTIONS    |  Wagons and serrefiles follow their gun
+       RIGHT ABOUT    |round.
+       WHEEL--MARCH.  |
+                      +-------------------------------------------------
+    ii. RIGHT         |  Each carriage wheels to the right about and
+       REVERSE--MARCH.|follows in rear of the serrefiles, who turn about
+                      |on their own ground.
+                      |
+                      |_Note._--If it is required to make the rear
+                      |the front the order is “GUNS FRONT, SERREFILES
+                      |REAR.”
+    ------------------+-------------------------------------------------
+
+_Note._--The retirement of a mountain battery at full and half interval
+is usually carried out by the order “LEFT REVERSE--MARCH.”
+
+Nos. 1 and serrefiles turn about on their own ground.
+
+On the order “GUNS FRONT, SERREFILES REAR,” the leading mules step
+short, and the axle mules move to the front by inclining to the right,
+followed by the others in succession from the rear.
+
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    5. _From line_       |  The odd subsections advance at the pace
+    _to retire_          |ordered while the even subsections check the
+    _when at half_       |pace. When the odd subsections are clear of
+    _interval._          |the even subsections the battery commander
+                         |orders “SUBSECTION RIGHT ABOUT WHEEL,”
+                         |and when the subsections are all in line again
+    THE BATTERY          |  The original pace is taken up.
+    WILL RETIRE--MARCH.  |
+                         |
+                         |_Note._--A line may reverse when at half
+                         |interval in a similar manner.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    6. _From line_       |  All the section commanders turn half right
+     _to incline._       |(or left) while the lead drivers of all the
+                         |carriages wheel their horses half right (or
+    i. RIGHT             |left), and all move off in the new direction.
+    (_or_ LEFT)          |The lines of the section commanders, guns and
+    INCLINE--MARCH.      |wagons remain parallel. To resume the original
+                         |direction the order is “FORWARD.” In horse
+                         |artillery the detachments preserve their
+                         |positions relative to their guns.
+                         |
+                         |  In a mountain battery the incline is
+                         |executed by every man and animal turning
+                         |half right (or left) on his own ground and
+                         |moving in the new direction.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    ii. SUBSECTIONS HALF |  In this case, the wagons follow the guns
+        RIGHT (_or_ LEFT)|instead of inclining independently. all resume
+        --MARCH.        |the original direction on the command
+                         |“SUBSECTIONS HALF LEFT (or RIGHT).”
+                         |
+                         |  Inclining should only be done for short
+                         |distances.
+                         |
+                         |   In a mountain battery each subsection
+                         |follows its No. 1, who turns half right
+                         |(or left) as ordered.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    7. _From line_       |
+    _to take_            |  Each carriage wheels at once. Officers, &c.,
+    _ground to_          |move to their places in column.
+    _a flank._           |
+                         |  In a mountain battery every animal is at
+      RIGHT (_or_        |once turned to the right (or left) as ordered,
+      LEFT) TAKE         |Nos. 1 and serrefiles turn on their own
+      GROUND--MARCH.     |ground. The dressing is towards the axle
+                         |mules.
+    ---------------------+--------------------------------------------
+    8. _From line_       |  The closing or opening is done upon the
+    _to diminish_        |battery guide. He moves straight forward,
+    _or increase         |while the other section commanders and the
+    the intervals._      |carriages incline inwards or outwards, and
+                         |when at the required interval, move forward
+                         |in succession. When all are in their places,
+      HALF               |the trot is resumed by order of the battery
+    (CLOSE _or_ FULL)    |leader.
+    INTERVAL--MARCH.     |
+                         | Should it be required to diminish or increase
+                         |the intervals without advancing the battery,
+                         |the battery guide stands fast, the carriages
+                         |reverse, move inwards or outwards, and form
+                         |up to the halt at the required interval.
+                         |
+                         |  Should the battery commander desire it, he
+                         |may order the formation on any section or
+                         |subsection, when his command will be “HALF
+                         |(CLOSE or FULL) INTERVAL ON THE RIGHT (or
+                         |LEFT) SECTION (or No.    ).”
+    ---------------------+--------------------------------------------
+    9. _From line_       |  The subsection on the named flank (or, in
+    _to advance_         |the case of an advance from the centre, the
+    (_or retire_)        |right subsection of the centre section) moves
+    _in column_          |forward, the section commander placing himself
+    _of route._          |in front. The remaining subsections
+                         |incline to their right or left, checking the
+                         |pace as required, and turn forward in
+                         |succession when in rear of the head of the
+                         |column.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    ADVANCE IN           |  In advancing from the centre, the left
+    COLUMN OF            |subsection of the centre section follows the
+    ROUTE FROM           |right subsection, then those of the right
+    THE RIGHT            |section.
+    (LEFT _or_ CENTRE)   |  A retirement is carried out in a similar
+     --MARCH.            |manner, the command being, “RETIRE IN
+                         |COLUMN OF ROUTE FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT, or
+                         |CENTRE)--MARCH.” The subsections wheel
+                         |about and proceed as before.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    10. _From_           |
+    _line to_            |  This is carried out in a similar manner to
+    _advance_            |the previous movements, except that on
+    (_or retire_)        |leaving the alignment the wagons move up
+    _in column_          |as ordered on the right or left of their guns
+    _of subsections._    |at 20 yards interval.
+                         |
+    ADVANCE IN           |  The command for a retirement is “RETIRE
+    COLUMN OF            |IN COLUMN OF SUBSECTIONS FROM THE RIGHT
+    SUBSECTIONS          |(LEFT, OR CENTRE)--WAGONS RIGHT (OR LEFT)
+    FROM THE             |--MARCH.”
+    RIGHT (LEFT          |  In mountain artillery the advance or
+    _or_ CENTRE)--       |retirement in column of subsections is done in
+    WAGONS RIGHT (_or_   |a similar way, the firing battery mules of
+    LEFT)--MARCH.        |subsections following each other in succession,
+                         |and the 1st line, when this is on parade,
+                         |moving in the same order in rear.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    11. _From_           |  The advance unless otherwise ordered is
+    _line to_            |always from the centre or directing section.
+    _advance in_         |The centre section advances straight to its
+    _battery column._    |front. The right section inclines to its
+                         |left and follows immediately in rear of the
+                         |centre section, checking the pace as required
+    ADVANCE IN           |to do so. similarly the left section inclines
+    BATTERY              |to its right and follows the right section.
+    COLUMN (_or_         |  The wagons of 3 and 2 disengage and move
+    FROM THE             |forward at an increased pace so as to allow
+    RIGHT _or_           |the guns of the right and left sections to get
+    LEFT)--MARCH.        |into their places without checking. This done
+                         |they drop back again.
+                         |
+                         |  To advance in battery column from a flank
+                         |the named section advances, followed by the
+                         |remainder in succession.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    12. _From_           |
+    _line to_            |
+    _retire in_          |  After the subsections have wheeled about
+    _battery column._    |the movement is carried out as in para. 11,
+                         |the section is now on the right following the
+                         |centre section.
+    RETIRE IN            |
+    BATTERY              |_Note._--In mountain artillery the retirement
+    COLUMN--SUBSECTIONS  |in battery column may be done similarly by
+    ABOUT                |reversing, the order being “RETIRE IN BATTERY
+    WHEEL--MARCH.        |COLUMN--LEFT REVERSE--MARCH,” and the
+                         |movement is carried out as above when the
+                         |reversing is completed.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    13. _From_           |  The rear subsections of sections incline to
+    _column_             |their right and move up at the prescribed
+    _of route_           |interval on the right of those in front.
+    _to form_            |
+    _battery             |  If the order “ON THE LEFT FORM BATTERY
+    _column._            |COLUMN” is given, the rear subsections form
+                         |in a similar manner on the left of those in
+                         |front.
+                         |
+    FORM                 |  In mountain artillery battery column is
+    BATTERY              |formed from column of subsections in the
+    COLUMN--MARCH.       |same way.
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    14. _From_           |
+    _battery_            | The right (or left) subsection of the leading
+    _column_             |section moves straight to the front, the other
+    _to advance_         |inclines and follows.
+    _in column_          |
+    _of route._          |  The rear section acts similarly, checking
+                         |the pace until there is room for them to move
+    ADVANCE IN           |forward.
+    COLUMN OF            |
+    ROUTE FROM           |In mountain artillery an advance in column
+    THE RIGHT            |of subsections is similarly carried out.
+    (_or_ LEFT)--        |
+          MARCH.         |
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    15. _From_           |
+    _battery_            |  The wagons incline to the left and move
+    _column_             |up on the left of their guns at close interval.
+    _to form_            |The sections close up to quarter column
+    _battery_            |distance.
+    _quarter_            |
+    _column._            |  Should it be desired, the wagons can be
+                         |brought on the right or at half interval by
+    FORM                 |the command “WAGONS RIGHT,” or “WAGONS
+    QUARTER              |HALF INTERVAL.”
+    COLUMN--MARCH.       |
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    16. _From_           |
+    _battery column_     |  The leading section follows the battery
+    _to form line._      |guide.
+                         |
+                         |  The centre and rear sections incline outwards
+                         |and follow their commanders on to the
+    FORM                 |alignment.
+    LINE--MARCH.         |
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+
+                      _Special for Mountain Artillery._
+
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+    17. _From_           |
+    _battery_            |
+    _column to_          |
+    _form line_          | The right (or left) subsections of sections
+    _to a flank._        |come into action at once in the required
+                         |direction. The left (or right) subsections
+    LINE TO THE          |wheel to the right (or left) at their proper
+    RIGHT (_or_          |interval, moving at a trot, if possible, and
+    LEFT) FOR            |come into action on the alignment.
+    ACTION--MARCH.       |
+    ---------------------+----------------------------------------------
+
+
+=139.= _Brigade drill._
+
+1. The formations of a brigade are:--
+
+       i. Line.
+      ii. Échelon or short échelon.
+     iii. Line of battery columns.
+      iv. Mass.
+       v. Column of batteries.
+      vi. Column of sections.
+     vii. Column of subsections.
+    viii. Column of route.
+
+    ----------------------+-------------------------------------------
+    2. _From_             | The brigade advances straight to the front
+    _line to_             |at an even pace. The brigade leader gives
+    _advance._            |the direction to the brigade guide, and the
+                          |other battery leaders regulate themselves
+    MARCH.                |and consequently their batteries, by the
+                          |latter.
+    ----------------------+-------------------------------------------
+    3. _From_             |
+     _line to_            |
+     _advance._           |
+     _in échelon_         |
+     _or short_           |
+     _échelon of_         |
+     _batteries._         |
+                          |
+    ADVANCE IN            | The named battery advances--the others
+    ÉCHELON (_or_         |follow at the distance ordered.
+    SHORT ÉCHELON)        |
+    FROM THE RIGHT        |
+    (CENTRE _or_          |
+    LEFT)--MARCH.         |
+    ----------------------+-------------------------------------------
+    4. _From_             |
+    _line to_             |
+    _advance._            |
+    _in line_             |
+    _of battery_          |
+    columns._             |
+                          |
+    ADVANCE IN            |  Each battery advances straight to the front
+    LINE OF               |in battery column, the direction, dressing,
+    BATTERY               |and pace being regulated as in line.
+    COLUMNS--MARCH.       |
+    ----------------------+--------------------------------------------
+    5. _From_             |  The batteries advance in battery column.
+    _line to_             |The heads of the flank columns make half
+    _advance._            |a wheel inwards and move up in line with the
+    _in mass._            |centre column, at 25 yards interval.
+                          |
+    ADVANCE IN            |  With two batteries, the battery of
+    MASS--MARCH.          |direction moves straight forward, the other
+                          |closes on it.
+    ----------------------+--------------------------------------------
+    6. _From_             |  The battery of direction forms line and
+    _mass to_             |moves straight forward.
+    _form_                |
+    _line to_             |  The leading sections of the flank batteries
+    _the front._          |make a half wheel outwards and move in that
+                          |direction till they have taken their correct
+    FORM LINE--MARCH.     |distance in line from the brigade guide. They
+                          |then wheel to the front and line is formed.
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+    7. _From_             |  The leading battery forms battery column,
+    _column of_           |continuing to move straight forward.
+    _route to_            |
+    _form mass._          |  The centre and rear battery form battery
+                          |column and incline to the right and left
+                          |respectively, coming up on either side of the
+    FORM MASS--MARCH.     |leading battery at 25 yards interval.
+                          |
+                          |  In a similar manner mass may be formed
+                          |on either flank.
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+    8. _From_             |
+    _column of_           |
+    _sections to_         |
+    _form mass._          |
+                          |
+    FORM MASS--MARCH.     |As in 7.
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+    9. _From_             |
+    _line to_             |
+    _advance_             |
+    _in quarter_          |
+    _column_              |
+    _of batteries_        |
+    _from a_              |
+    _flank (or_           |  The right battery advances to clear the
+    _the centre)._        |front and the other batteries incline to the
+                          |right.
+                          |
+    ADVANCE IN            |  They successively incline to the front and
+    QUARTER               |close up to quarter column, the wagons of all
+    COLUMN OF             |coming up on the left of their guns at close
+    BATTERIES             |interval (or on the right or at half interval if
+    FROM THE              |ordered).
+    RIGHT--MARCH.         |
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+    10. _From_            |
+    _line to_             |
+    _form_                |
+    _quarter_             |
+    _column_              |
+    _of batteries_        |  The centre and left batteries reverse and
+    _to the_              |move to the rear. The centre battery takes
+    _halt._               |ground to its left, and again to its left
+                          |when in rear of the right battery, and closes
+    TO THE                |up to quarter column. the left battery
+    HALT,                 |inclines to its left, again to its left when
+    QUARTER               |it has room, and takes ground to its left
+    COLUMN OF             |when in rear of the column, also closing up
+    BATTERIES.            |to quarter column. the wagons all come up on
+    ON THE                |the left of their guns at close interval
+    RIGHT--MARCH.         |(or on the right or at half interval if
+                          | ordered).
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+    11. _From_            | The leading battery moves forward till clear
+    _quarter_             |of the one behind it. The centre battery
+    _column of_           |inclines (shoulders at close interval) to its
+    _batteries_           |right and continues in that direction till
+    _to form_             |the battery guide has got his interval in
+    _line to_             |line from the brigade guide, when it inclines
+    _the front._          |to the left and comes up in line on the right
+                          |of the directing battery. Similarly the rear
+    FORM LINE--MARCH.     |battery inclines to the left and comes up on
+                          |the left.
+                          |
+                          | When the line is formed the trot is taken up
+                          |by all. The wagons drop into their places as
+                          |soon as possible.
+                          |
+                          |  When this movement is performed from the
+                          |halt to the halt, the rear batteries take
+                          |ground to the right and left respectively,
+                          |and come up in line by a square movement.
+    ----------------------+---------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY IN WAR.
+
+
+=140.= _General instructions._
+
+1. F.S. Regs., Part I, lay down certain principles for the guidance of
+commanders in the combined employment of the various arms. A knowledge
+of these principles by artillery commanders is essential for effective
+co-operation.
+
+2. The instructions contained in this chapter are based on those
+principles, and are intended further to assist artillery commanders
+in the solution of problems which will confront them on the field of
+battle and in training their commands on a uniform system.
+
+=These principles are generally applicable to any force of artillery
+acting under an independent commander, whether his command is of a
+temporary nature or not.=
+
+
+CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY.
+
+=141.= _Field guns._
+
+1. The principal characteristics of modern field guns are the flatness
+of the trajectory of their shell, the rapidity and accuracy of their
+fire and their power to deliver effective fire from concealed positions
+as well as from those in the open. Other characteristics are mobility,
+increased power of concealment, owing to the use of smokeless powder,
+and decreased vulnerability, due to the adoption of shields.
+
+2. The effect of field guns is most fully developed against troops in
+the open, either in movement or stationary.
+
+They may be used effectively against personnel in entrenchments, in
+buildings or behind gun shields. Against personnel protected by
+entrenchments the effect will be slight unless the defenders are
+compelled to man their entrenchments by the action of the other arms.
+Against buildings the effect is usually limited to the rooms facing
+the guns, as the projectiles are arrested by a second wall, and their
+destructive and incendiary effect is not great. The destructive effect
+of direct hits on artillery _matériel_ is considerable, but at long
+ranges this would entail a great expenditure of ammunition. (_See_ Sec.
+=114= (6).)
+
+
+=142.= _Field howitzers._
+
+1. Field howitzers by reason of their high explosive shell and the
+steep angle of descent of their shrapnel bullets are specially suited:--
+
+      i. To attack artillery personnel protected by shields.
+     ii. To destroy artillery _matériel_.
+    iii. To attack the defenders of entrenchments.
+     iv. To destroy defended localities such as villages, farms,
+           or the strongly entrenched portions of a position.
+      v. To support an attack up to the moment of assault.
+
+2. Their wide field of fire enables howitzers to cover a zone of
+considerable extent, and they are particularly adapted to the support
+of infantry in the later stages of an attack, owing to the steep angle
+of descent of their projectiles. (_See_ Sec. =157=.)
+
+Troops in movement or other targets presenting only a fleeting
+opportunity do not come within the normal rôle of howitzers, which,
+however, should be prepared to engage such objectives, if circumstances
+make such action advisable.
+
+3. The chief conditions for effective howitzer fire are good gun
+platforms, and facilities for both observation of fire and the exercise
+of command. A position behind natural cover is obviously preferable,
+provided these conditions are fulfilled.
+
+
+=143.= _Heavy artillery._
+
+1. The special characteristics of heavy artillery are accurate
+long-range fire and great shell power, but these advantages are to a
+certain extent discounted by a limited mobility. The long-range fire
+of guns of this nature should be utilized to bring enfilade and cross
+fire to bear on the enemy’s positions. The sites chosen for them should
+be such as to facilitate fire being brought to bear on as much of the
+ground occupied by the enemy as possible. In normal circumstances these
+conditions are most likely to be obtained by dispersion.
+
+The fire of guns of this nature is of special value against shielded
+guns, fortified localities and buildings.
+
+2. Owing to the limited mobility of these guns and the fact that they
+are unprovided with shields, considerable risk may be incurred without
+adequate compensation, if they are placed too far forward, or exposed
+on a flank.
+
+Occasions may, however, occur, when to gain decisive results, it will
+be necessary to use them in line with those of lighter calibre.
+
+3. If well protected and placed on the flanks of a defensive position
+in an open country, their long-range fire may compel a turning movement
+to be made on so wide an arc, that time, valuable to the defenders, may
+be gained.
+
+
+=144.= _Mountain artillery._
+
+1. In country where wheeled traffic is impracticable, light guns
+carried on pack animals are the only substitute for field artillery,
+but the use of mountain artillery is not restricted to such country.
+Infantry requires effective support throughout the attack, and as pack
+animals can go practically anywhere that an infantry soldier can go
+without using his hands, batteries of mountain artillery are peculiarly
+suited to work with infantry in difficult country of any kind.
+
+2. Hills, woods, and broken or enclosed country, which might be
+impassable to wheeled artillery, present little difficulty to pack
+animals, and, as cover, which will conceal a man standing upright is
+sufficient for them also, batteries of mountain artillery will often
+be able to work their way forward on a battlefield without attracting
+attention, where the movement of wheeled artillery could not escape
+detection.
+
+Moreover, the utility of mountain artillery is not confined to
+supporting the infantry in the various forms an attack may assume, for
+in the defence of woods, in temporary forward positions occupied by the
+defence, and in rearguard action, its mobility and easy concealment
+will often enable it to render valuable service.
+
+In short, mountain batteries are capable of being of great value on
+many occasions when circumstances are unfavourable to the use of
+wheeled artillery, with which, however, they compare unfavourably in
+respect of shell power.
+
+
+PRINCIPLES OR EMPLOYMENT.
+
+=145.= _Objects of fire._
+
+=1. Artillery cannot ensure decisive success in battle by its own
+destructive action.= It is the advance of the infantry that alone is
+capable of producing this result.
+
+=To help the infantry to maintain its mobility and offensive power by
+all the means at its disposal should be the underlying principle of all
+artillery tactics.=
+
+The primary objects of artillery fire should therefore be:--
+
+     i. To assist the movements of its own infantry.
+    ii. To prevent the movements of the enemy’s infantry.
+
+These objects may be attained by--
+
+    (_a_) Inflicting losses on the enemy, and breaking down
+            his fighting spirit.
+    (_b_) Destroying his _matériel_.
+    (_c_) Reducing the resisting power of fortified
+            localities and rendering them more easy of approach.
+
+It is legitimate, therefore, to use artillery fire for any of these
+purposes, in so far as they contribute towards the end in view.
+
+
+=146.= _Concealment._
+
+1. The provision of suitable equipment enables batteries to deliver
+effective fire from positions in which they are completely concealed
+from the enemy. The batteries may thus be able to retain their
+mobility, and remain at the disposal of the commander of the force in
+the event of a change in the situation.
+
+2. =Concealment in action increases the difficulties of the hostile
+batteries, possibly even to the extent of conferring immunity from
+their fire, thus enabling the concealed artillery to devote its
+attention to the support and assistance of its own infantry.=
+
+Although the employment of aircraft for reconnaissance has modified the
+possibilities of complete concealment to some extent, guns in action
+may escape observation from the air if they are carefully sited.
+
+Groups of horses and wagons in the open are very easily seen from
+aircraft and even when the guns are not visible may be an indication
+of the presence of artillery. Advantage should therefore be taken of
+woods, avenues of trees, or other features whenever possible to conceal
+the limbers, first line wagons and horses of artillery.
+
+The power of delivering effective fire from concealed positions is,
+however, limited. Rapid movement or very fleeting opportunities are
+difficult to deal with. Distant observing stations involving the
+passage of orders by mechanical means increase the difficulty. The
+amount of dead ground which can be left in front of the guns may also
+be a matter of serious concern.[10]
+
+[10] Supposing that guns and target are on the same level, then to
+guns 60 yards in rear of a crest and 16 feet below it all ground is
+dead within 3,000 yards; if 9 feet below it all ground is dead within
+2,000 yards; if 3 feet below it all ground is dead within 1,000 yards.
+
+On the other hand batteries exposed to view will usually be compelled
+to enter into an artillery engagement for their own protection, in
+which they will start at a disadvantage. This is less likely to occur
+at the crisis of the fight when the struggle of the infantry at close
+quarters may monopolize the attention of the combatants.
+
+=3. Concealed manœuvre favours surprise=, and should therefore be
+sought for up to the moment of opening fire, due regard being had to
+tactical requirements. Even if the enemy is at once able to locate
+the flashes the more vulnerable portions of the battery will probably
+have been safely disposed and some measure of surprise attained. The
+advantages to be gained from moving batteries into position under
+cover of darkness have increased owing to the difficulty of evading
+observation by hostile aircraft.
+
+=4. Concealment, both as regards position and manœuvre, must invariably
+be foregone for adequate reasons. To support infantry and to enable it
+to effect its purpose the artillery must willingly sacrifice itself.=
+
+To move in column of route on a road in circumstances where a lucky
+shot will bring the column to a standstill is to court disaster. On the
+other hand, when deployed, rapid movement over open ground exposed to
+fire for a short distance is accompanied by but slight risk; or, when
+the enemy’s attention is fully occupied elsewhere, movements may become
+possible which would have no reasonable chance of succeeding if the
+enemy was on the look out for them.
+
+5. Knowledge of the general tactical situation and discrimination are
+essential on the part of all who order artillery movements on the
+battlefield.
+
+
+=147.= _Economy of force._
+
+1. Artillery, owing to its mobility till subjected to effective fire,
+its great rapidity of fire and its power to fire effectively while
+remaining concealed, is able in most situations to conserve its energy,
+selecting its own time for action and realizing to a great extent the
+value of surprise effect.
+
+=The principle of economy of force is, therefore, particularly suitable
+to the tactical employment of the arm, but must always be subordinate
+to the necessity of employing sufficient force to attain the object in
+view.=
+
+2. When an encounter with the enemy takes place sufficient artillery
+should be deployed to support the advanced troops and to cover the
+deployment of the infantry. The remaining batteries should be assembled
+in positions of readiness.
+
+As the plan of action develops, tasks will be assigned to the different
+artillery units, and they will be brought into positions suitable for
+their purpose. If it is not necessary to open fire immediately they
+will remain in observation of the zones assigned to them.
+
+3. =Fire will not be opened with more guns than are necessary for
+the task in hand.= In deciding on the number of guns with which
+to open fire, the total number available, the frontage that they
+can conveniently cover with their fire and the extent and tactical
+importance of the objective must be considered. Efforts must also be
+made to foresee the course of the action, and to keep a reserve of
+fire power in hand to meet successive requirements as they arise.
+
+To justify the opening of fire there must be a definite tactical object
+and a reasonable probability of attaining it. Ineffective fire is not
+only a waste of ammunition, but affords encouragement to the enemy and
+gives him information. It should therefore be avoided whenever possible.
+
+4. =Expenditure of ammunition should, as a rule, be proportionate
+to the tactical importance of the objective and the probability of
+obtaining results commensurate with the expenditure.= In deciding
+whether to engage an objective its vulnerability and tactical
+importance should, therefore, be considered.
+
+When an objective is both vulnerable and tactically important a
+considerable expenditure of ammunition is obviously justified, but
+important tactical objectives are frequently invisible or relatively
+invulnerable. The expenditure of ammunition in such cases must be
+governed by the urgency of the tactical situation.
+
+5. The objects of keeping artillery in hand are:--
+
+      i. To be able to open fire on new objectives that become
+           menacing without disturbing the allotment of tasks of
+           that already engaged.
+     ii. To be in a position to deal with unforeseen
+           contingencies.
+    iii. To have guns available for any force detached to a
+           distance, such as a general reserve employed on a wide
+           turning movement.
+
+The methods by which these objects may be attained are:--
+
+    (_a_) By bringing batteries into action in concealed
+            positions, where they can remain in observation, their
+            fire power being in hand till they are actually ordered
+            to open fire. A battery need not employ the fire of the
+            whole of its guns; some may be kept temporarily in hand.
+
+    (_b_) By keeping batteries in positions of readiness
+            in which they retain their mobility and can be moved to
+            other parts of the field.
+
+    (_c_) By keeping batteries actually in reserve, if
+            their withdrawal from action or from positions in
+            readiness would cause delay and compromise the success
+            of any contemplated operation.
+
+It follows as a consequence of the above that the power of the Q.F. gun
+must be utilized on occasion to its full extent to compensate for the
+small number of guns employed on a given task.
+
+
+=148.= _Protection._
+
+1. On the march, artillery, owing to its inability to defend itself,
+requires protection which is provided by the other arms under the
+orders of the commander of the force to which the artillery belongs.
+
+2. On the field of battle artillery will generally be protected by the
+distribution of the other arms. When, however, guns are in an exposed
+position, an escort should be detailed, and, if this has not been done,
+it is the duty of the artillery commander concerned to apply to the
+commander of the nearest troops, who will provide an escort.--(_See_
+F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec. =105=). In moving from one part of a
+battlefield to another artillery commanders must consider, if no escort
+has been provided, whether one is necessary or whether to avoid delay
+they should rely on their own patrols.
+
+3. When an escort is provided its commander is responsible for the
+protection of the artillery. This fact, however, does not absolve the
+artillery commander from all care for the safety of his guns. He should
+consult with the escort commander when necessary and should be ready to
+assist him with any available artillery patrols, when their employment
+would conduce to greater security.
+
+4. Once in action artillery should be able to protect its own front,
+provided there is no ground within effective rifle range upon which the
+fire of the guns cannot rapidly be brought to bear in case of need.
+
+5. Rifles are carried on artillery wagons, except in horse artillery.
+In action these rifles should, if considered necessary, be distributed
+to the gunners with the wagon lines, who should assist the escort, if
+one has been provided, in protecting these vehicles. This precaution is
+especially desirable in the case of artillery in action on the exposed
+flank of a force, where hostile cavalry may be operating.
+
+
+=149.= _Intercommunication._
+
+1. Intelligent co-operation depends largely on the receipt of timely
+information, and this in turn is dependent on the efficiency of the
+system of intercommunication.
+
+2. In open country where the features are bold and the field of fire
+and view extensive, infantry can often be supported more effectively
+from a flank than by batteries situated in its immediate zone; and
+the possibility of bringing effective converging fire to bear on a
+given locality may be capable of realization. For this to be done the
+divisional artillery commander must have the means of readjusting
+from time to time the tasks that have been assigned to the artillery
+brigades in the original dispositions for battle.
+
+In close or intricate country, on the other hand, where the view is
+restricted, artillery will rarely be able to do more than support
+the infantry in its own immediate front. In these circumstances the
+artillery and infantry may be formed temporarily into groups and
+the units thus associated must co-operate closely with one another.
+The limitations of central artillery control must then be met by
+an increased devolution of responsibility to subordinate artillery
+commanders. (_See_ Sec. =153=, (7).)
+
+Artillery communications therefore involve two distinct ideas, viz.,
+i. communication between the divisional artillery commander and
+his subordinates; ii. between infantry and artillery subordinate
+commanders. Both must be kept in view and organized as far as possible,
+but the relative importance of each varies to a great extent with the
+nature of the country.
+
+3. The means of communication available are:--
+
+      i. Staff or orderly officers.
+     ii. Mounted orderlies.
+    iii. Artillery brigade telephones.
+     iv. Visual signalling.
+      v. Divisional signal service.
+
+For the purposes of communication between the divisional artillery
+commander and his subordinates orderlies are probably the most
+reliable, but the number of officers and men available for the purpose
+is limited, and moreover their employment involves the expenditure of
+considerable time and horseflesh.
+
+The telephone equipment with which each artillery brigade is provided
+is primarily intended to link up the brigade commander with his
+batteries. But it may also be possible to utilize this equipment for
+communication with the divisional artillery commander. When it is
+desired to maintain direct communication with the divisional artillery
+commander, and the nature of the country makes it possible, the
+telephone should be employed. It is impossible, however, to trust
+entirely to this means, and arrangements must be made to supplement it
+by others that will be available in the event of breakdown.
+
+Visual signalling is apt to disclose positions to the enemy and, except
+when the use of the heliograph is possible, is slow and uncertain. In
+any case the number of signallers available make it impossible to trust
+exclusively to this method of communication. In open country, and for
+lateral communications, where it is possible to conceal the use of
+flags, etc., from the enemy’s view visual signalling is valuable as a
+means of supplementing other methods.
+
+The divisional signal service affords a useful alternative. When it
+is desired to use this means of communication it will be advantageous
+if the subordinate artillery commander can station himself near the
+infantry brigadier with whom he is co-operating, as it is then possible
+for him to communicate with the divisional artillery commander by using
+the cable that connects divisional and infantry brigade headquarters.
+This line, however, cannot be relied on for urgent messages, as it is
+often very congested.
+
+4. For the purpose of establishing an understanding between infantry
+and artillery subordinate commanders the most satisfactory results in
+a combined operation are obtained by a personal exchange of views
+between the commanders concerned before the operation begins. (_See_
+sec. =153=. (7).)
+
+If this is impossible or if the artillery commander is unable to remain
+in the vicinity of the infantry commander he should be represented by
+an officer.
+
+5. It is of the utmost importance that communication should be
+maintained between the artillery and infantry commanders throughout the
+operation. It is unsafe to rely on one means of communication only,
+and two, or even more, should usually be arranged for. The mutual
+adoption of some system of describing the features of the ground,
+such as squared maps or panorama sketches, will often save delay and
+misunderstanding.
+
+
+CO-OPERATION OF AIRCRAFT WITH ARTILLERY.
+
+
+=150.= _Employment of aircraft._
+
+1. Both during the period of tactical reconnaissance which precedes the
+battle, and in the battle itself, the employment of aircraft may assist
+the artillery.
+
+2. If it is possible before a battle to ascertain the general position
+and number of the hostile batteries by reconnaissances from aircraft, a
+valuable clue to the probable grouping of the hostile artillery may be
+obtained and the allotment of tasks to his artillery by the divisional
+commander facilitated.
+
+3. During the battle aircraft can assist artillery as follows:--
+
+     i. By the indication of concealed targets.
+    ii. By observation of fire.
+
+Aeroplanes may be used for both these objects, but kites are of
+value chiefly for observation of fire. The latter, however, can only
+operate in a wind of from 20 to 40 miles an hour. They can lift an
+observer to a height of 1,500 to 2,000 feet and can keep in telephonic
+communication with the ground. They cannot easily be damaged by fire.
+
+
+=151.= _Signalling from aircraft._
+
+1. The means of communication from aircraft are:--
+
+      i. Wireless telegraphy.
+     ii. Visual signals.
+    iii. Sound signals.
+     iv. Dropping written messages.
+
+Wireless telegraphy, in its present state of development, can be used
+only in a limited number of aircraft and will not generally be provided
+in aeroplanes allotted for work with artillery.
+
+Visual signals can be made by means of Very’s signal lights, coloured
+flags or weighted streamers. Electric lamps may also prove of value.
+Very’s lights are used in three colours; white, red and green.
+The distance at which they can be seen and distinguished varies
+with atmospheric conditions, but on a clear day they are easily
+distinguishable at 3,000 feet overhead, and if the sun is not very
+bright and in the eyes of the observer at a distance of 2 miles with
+the naked eye. On a clear evening they can be seen and distinguished
+as far as 6 miles. Specially prepared lights can be seen at greater
+distances. Red, yellow, or blue flags, 18 inches square, held out by an
+observer can be seen with field glasses at a distance of 1 mile with
+the aeroplane at a height of 2,000 feet. Dark and light streamers can
+be distinguished with the naked eye at a distance of 1 mile.
+
+A Klaxon horn in an aeroplane can be heard on the ground from a height
+of 2,000 feet and a distance of 1 mile.
+
+Messages may be written on special weighted message blocks and thrown
+over, or written on an ordinary form and placed in a weighted bag with
+streamers, or in a parachute.
+
+
+=152.= _Signalling from the ground to aircraft._
+
+Any place where it is desired to have messages dropped will be marked
+by a cross on the ground, made of two strips of white cloth about 15
+feet by 3 feet.
+
+White strips on the ground, 6 feet by 1 foot, can be seen from a height
+of 3,000 feet, and a prearranged code of signals can be made by this
+means. (_See_ Sec. =205=.)
+
+On a clear evening Very’s lights fired from the ground can be seen from
+aircraft at a height of 2,000 feet and a distance of 6 miles, and the
+different colours distinguished.
+
+
+DUTIES OF THE DIVISIONAL ARTILLERY COMMANDER.
+
+
+=153.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The divisional commander is at all times responsible for the
+tactical employment of the artillery under his command. The divisional
+artillery commander is responsible for the execution of his orders so
+far as they affect the artillery.
+
+2. When a force is marching towards the enemy and an encounter is
+anticipated, the divisional artillery commander will detail officers’
+patrols (_See_ Sec. =240=) to accompany the advanced troops. These
+patrols will be found by the artillery brigades of the division, their
+number depending on the nature of the country and the front occupied
+by the division when on the march. As soon as an action appears likely
+these officers’ patrols will rapidly reconnoitre the ground on which it
+is probable that the force will deploy, and send information as soon
+as possible to the divisional artillery commander as to the nature and
+extent of the available artillery positions. A brief report received
+at the right time will be of greater value than a more elaborate and
+detailed report which is received too late to be acted upon.
+
+3. The divisional artillery commander will usually accompany the
+divisional commander on the march. He must be careful to let all
+concerned, particularly his patrols, know where reports can reach him,
+both on the march and in action.
+
+4. Should time be of importance and a rapid deployment essential there
+may be no opportunity for a detailed reconnaissance by either the
+divisional or the artillery commander. If time permits, however, it is
+advisable for the divisional artillery commander to make a personal
+reconnaissance and report the result to the divisional commander before
+the manner of the deployment is settled, stating how best in his
+opinion the artillery can be utilized to further the object in view.
+
+5. In forming a plan of action the manner in which the artillery and
+infantry will co-operate should be clearly defined, and will depend, as
+a rule, on the character of the country. If the country is such that
+the task assigned to the division can be carried out by the troops of
+the division acting in combination under the immediate control of the
+divisional commander, it will, generally, be inadvisable to delegate
+the command of portions of the divisional artillery to subordinate
+commanders.
+
+Batteries may be able by crossing their fire to afford effective
+support to infantry other than that operating in their immediate front.
+To tie them down to limited tasks might reduce the fighting capacity
+of the division as a whole. In such circumstances, the bulk of the
+artillery will deploy and occupy positions under the orders of the
+divisional artillery commander, who will allot tasks to each brigade
+commander or zones in which he thinks their fire can be employed most
+effectively.
+
+6. The country may, however, be such as to necessitate the employment
+of the division on more than one tactical operation, in such a manner
+that their efforts cannot be directly combined. In such cases it
+will be advisable that the artillery and infantry should be formed
+temporarily into groups. =The units of the two arms thus associated
+for a distinct tactical operation should be under one commander.=
+It is the function of the divisional commander to organize these
+temporary groups. It is then the function of the divisional artillery
+commander to convey the necessary orders to the subordinate artillery
+commanders, placing them at the disposal of the group commanders.
+
+It is the duty of a group commander to report to divisional
+headquarters when his special task is accomplished. When the special
+task has been accomplished, unless a new combined task is then to be
+allotted, the artillery of that group should be again placed at the
+disposal of the divisional artillery commander without delay, with
+a view to the issue of fresh instructions by him for its further
+employment. The artillery commander of the group is responsible for
+keeping the divisional artillery commander informed as to the course of
+the operation in which he is engaged, the general disposition of his
+batteries and the expenditure of ammunition.
+
+7. =Whenever a subordinate artillery commander is allotted a task
+necessitating co-operation with a certain force of infantry, whether he
+is placed under the orders of the commander of that force or not, it
+becomes his duty to open communication with its commander, reporting
+to him in person, if possible, in order to obtain full information as
+to the character of the operation that he is to support and as to the
+proposed method of its execution.= (_See_ Secs. =149= (4) and =248=
+(2).)
+
+8. The manner in which the divisional commander’s plan is translated
+into orders and in which these orders are conveyed to the artillery
+must depend to a great extent on the nature of the operation.
+Divisional operation orders lay down what is required of the artillery
+and contain such information about it as it is necessary for the
+other arms to know. If infantry and artillery are grouped together
+temporarily as indicated above, divisional operation orders will give
+particulars of the grouping, and will also state the task or mission
+that is assigned to each group. Consequently in cases where divisional
+operation orders are issued to commanders of artillery brigades the
+divisional artillery commander will usually only require to supplement
+them with a few technical instructions.
+
+In his capacity as a subordinate commander (_see_ F.S. Regs., Part II.
+Sec. 10), however, the divisional artillery commander is responsible
+that the necessary orders are issued to his own units. When, therefore,
+divisional orders are not issued to artillery brigades, or when they
+do not give sufficient information respecting the artillery, it is
+his duty to issue his own orders, and he is responsible that they
+convey to the units under his command all the information respecting
+the intention of the divisional commander and the movements of the
+other arms which it is desirable for them to know. It will frequently
+be necessary to give these orders verbally, and for this purpose the
+divisional artillery commander may find it convenient to assemble his
+brigade commanders.
+
+It is his duty to make sure that the necessary orders are issued to
+the divisional ammunition column commander and that the latter is
+acquainted with the dispositions of the various artillery units.
+
+9. The divisional artillery commander must bear in mind that during the
+course of an action unexpected developments are always liable to occur
+and that the artillery must be prepared to deal with them promptly.
+
+Concealed positions have greatly facilitated this task. Batteries that
+are in action, but have not been located by the enemy, can often be
+moved rapidly to other parts of the field. The tasks allotted to some
+of these batteries may have become of minor importance and they will
+be available if required. Other batteries may have accomplished the
+tasks assigned to them and thus be at the disposal of the divisional
+artillery commander. Notwithstanding these possibilities, however, it
+may often be advisable to keep some guns in hand ready to reinforce
+guns already in action or to open fire in a new direction.
+
+10. As the action progresses it may be necessary to rearrange the
+tasks or zones allotted to artillery brigades to meet the changing
+circumstances, or to order changes of position. The position of the
+divisional artillery commander during an action should, therefore, be
+chosen with a view to the facilities it affords for keeping in touch
+with the divisional commander as well as for observing the progress of
+events and for communicating with his subordinate artillery commanders.
+(_See_ Sec. =149= (2).) If the divisional artillery commander cannot
+find a suitable position in the vicinity of divisional headquarters, he
+must take steps to keep himself in constant touch therewith, in order
+that he may learn at once all information reaching the headquarters
+which might be of use to him.
+
+11. For the purposes of directing and controlling the fire of his
+batteries the information that is of primary importance to an artillery
+commander is firstly to know exactly where the infantry that he is
+supporting is from time to time; secondly, what is its immediate
+objective; and thirdly, what it is that prevents it from attaining its
+object.
+
+The comparative effect of fire from different portions of the enemy’s
+position is, however, difficult to estimate from the artillery
+positions. The establishment of advanced observation posts may,
+therefore, be necessary to watch the situation generally, to obtain
+information from infantry commanders, and to report to the artillery
+commander concerned. Responsibility for establishing posts for this
+purpose will rest either with the divisional artillery commander or
+with the commander of the artillery in a temporary group. (_See_ para.
+6.)[11]
+
+[11] This does not preclude subordinate artillery commanders from
+making the arrangements for observation of fire referred to in Sec.
+=199=.
+
+12. The task of the artillery is likely to be much facilitated in
+future by the use of aircraft, by means of which targets may be located
+and the observation of fire assisted.
+
+The divisional artillery commander should therefore point out to
+the divisional commander whenever necessary the directions in which
+aircraft can be usefully employed in obtaining information which would
+be of value to the artillery.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN ATTACK.
+
+
+=154.= _Action of the advanced guard artillery._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 68.)
+
+1. The advanced guard affords protection to the main body and obtains
+information; either function may compel it to fight. When the enemy
+is encountered, and offensive action is intended, the advanced guard
+should drive back the enemy’s advanced troops till the dispositions
+of his main body are disclosed, after which the advanced guard will
+usually be compelled to limit its action to holding the ground gained
+until the commander has formed his plan and deployed his force.
+
+=It follows that the action of the advanced guard may alternate between
+the offensive and the defensive. The action of the artillery must
+conform.=
+
+2. The commander of the artillery of the advanced guard will accompany
+the advanced guard commander on the march, so that he may receive early
+instructions as to his action. The artillery will be allotted positions
+that will enable it to co-operate with the rest of the advanced guard
+in carrying out the plan of action that the advanced guard commander
+may decide to adopt.
+
+The occupation of concealed positions, a wide dispersion of the
+available guns and a liberal expenditure of ammunition will then assist
+to deceive the enemy as to the strength of the force opposed to him,
+and may so contribute materially to the success of the operation.
+
+3. If the enemy is in strength the advanced guard will eventually
+encounter opposition which it is unable to overcome. The artillery
+should then occupy the best positions available to assist the advanced
+guard in holding the ground gained and in repelling any attack that may
+be made upon it, in which case the principles involved are identical
+with those discussed later under the heading “Artillery in Defence.”
+(_See_ Sec. =158= _et seq._)
+
+4. As it is impossible to foresee, when an advanced guard action
+is entered upon, where and when the main battle will be fought,
+considerations as to possible eventualities should not be allowed to
+influence the choice of the most suitable positions for the immediate
+purpose. Any breaking up of units that may result must be rectified
+later, if possible.
+
+
+=155.= _Opening phase of the attack._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 105.)
+
+1. If the divisional commander decides to attack, the first functions
+of the artillery will be to support the advanced guard against any
+possible offensive on the part of the enemy in order to cover the
+deployment of the infantry of the main body. Usually concealed
+positions will be the best for this purpose.
+
+2. If the infantry deployment takes place successfully and the enemy is
+definitely thrown on the defensive the next stage will be the advance
+of the infantry through the zone swept by the hostile artillery fire.
+The enemy will probably use his artillery to delay this advance and to
+inflict loss on the infantry whenever opportunity offers. His guns are
+likely to be concealed. =The task of the artillery at this stage will
+usually be to locate the enemy’s batteries and, by subduing the fire of
+those in action, to support the infantry.=
+
+To carry this out observation posts must be established and every
+effort made to locate the hostile batteries or their observation posts.
+Valuable help can be rendered by aerial reconnaissance, but artillery
+officers and look-out men should be trained to detect readily the
+flashes of guns, the dust thrown up by their discharge and the other
+indications of the presence of a battery in action or of an observing
+party. When a hostile battery that is impeding the advance of the
+infantry has been located, every effort should be made to subdue its
+fire. The range should be obtained as accurately as circumstances
+permit, and the battery should be subjected to an accurate, rapid,
+and intense fire[12] with the object of demoralizing the personnel and
+driving them temporarily from their guns or compelling them for the
+time being to cease fire. Should this object be achieved the hostile
+battery should be closely watched and any further attempt to intervene
+should be dealt with by a repetition of the same process. (_See_ Sec.
+=223= (3).)
+
+[12] Should the limits within which the hostile battery is located be
+wide the fire must be of a searching nature.
+
+3. Unless the enemy’s artillery by exposing itself offers an
+opportunity for its destruction, commensurate with the expenditure of
+ammunition involved, fire should be confined to those hostile batteries
+that can be located, which are impeding the infantry advance. If the
+hostile batteries cannot be located ammunition should be husbanded and
+efforts directed towards further reconnaissance. =The primary object
+being to assist the infantry to close with the enemy, an artillery
+engagement should not be entered into at this stage for its own sake.=
+
+
+=156.= _Second phase of the attack._
+
+1. As soon as the infantry reach a point where the effect of the
+enemy’s rifle fire begins to be seriously felt a fresh stage of the
+operations is entered upon.
+
+=The forward movement of the infantry is henceforward dependent
+largely on effective covering fire. To be effective this covering fire
+must be developed by guns, machine guns and rifles in combination.
+The artillery commanders must therefore have a thorough grasp of the
+tactical situation and appreciate fully the needs of the infantry.=
+
+The two arms must communicate freely and the artillery must watch the
+progress of the infantry closely. The actual method by which this
+co-operation should be obtained will vary in accordance with the
+general nature of the operation. (_See_ Sec. =153= (5).)
+
+2. The defence of a position usually takes the form of the occupation
+of certain localities with unoccupied intervening spaces. If the
+terrain is suitable to defence these localities will mutually support
+one another and will each be supported by artillery. It follows that
+the attack must resolve itself into the attack of these localities, and
+protracted struggles will take place for their possession. When the
+country is intricate and enclosed the attacks on localities tend to
+become isolated actions and the system of temporary groupings referred
+to in Sec. =153= will be resorted to. The mission assigned to each
+group will be the capture of a certain locality. When the country is
+open the attacks on the localities, like the defence, can and should be
+mutually supporting.
+
+3. The fire which prevents the development of an attack on a defended
+locality may come from the locality itself, or from other localities
+which are able to give support, or from supporting artillery. Inasmuch
+as infantry has difficulty in bringing fire to bear on objectives other
+than those in its immediate front, it follows that the artillery fire
+of the attack must be distributed according to requirements on all
+objectives from which effective fire is being brought to bear on the
+attacking infantry, if it is to be effective in helping the infantry
+forward.
+
+Judicious distribution rather than over-concentration of artillery
+fire is therefore indicated, and to arrange for this distribution, and
+to allot suitable tasks or zones to each unit, is the function of the
+divisional artillery commander. (_See_ Sec. =153= (5) and (6).)
+
+The method of fire to be employed by each unit will depend on the
+nature of the actual target that it is engaging. A battery engaging
+hostile artillery which is seriously impeding the advance of the
+infantry by its fire should endeavour to overwhelm the hostile
+artillery as described in Sec. =223=. A battery engaging infantry
+should, by bursts of fire, endeavour temporarily to disturb the enemy’s
+aim and reduce the volume and effect of his fire so as to afford its
+own infantry an opportunity of gaining ground. These bursts of fire
+should become more frequent and intense as the infantry approaches the
+enemy’s position and the further advance becomes more difficult. (_See_
+Sec. =224=.) Covered in this manner by the fire of the artillery the
+infantry approaches nearer and nearer to the enemy till it reaches a
+point from which it is possible to assault.
+
+4. During the progress of the fight it will usually become necessary
+for the artillery to move forward to positions from which it will
+have a clearer view of the infantry fight and thus be able to afford
+to the infantry more effective support, especially against local
+counter-attacks. For this forward movement to be carried out with
+success and to attain its object certain conditions are necessary,
+namely:--
+
+     i. A line of advance that is either protected from fire or
+          over which the guns can move deployed and at speed, so
+          as to avoid the risk of columns of guns and wagons being
+          brought to a standstill under fire.
+
+    ii. The possibility of reasonable protection from fire
+          during deployment and up to the moment of opening fire.
+
+These conditions may be found to obtain for small forces of artillery
+such as sections or single guns, when they do not obtain for a large
+number of batteries moving simultaneously. In such cases guns should
+be dribbled forward a few at a time as may be found practicable. The
+advancing batteries should, when necessary, be supported by the fire of
+those in action. In cases of extreme difficulty it may be necessary for
+the forward movement to take place under cover of darkness.
+
+5. To support an attack with success a battery commander must be able
+to see the ground over which the infantry is advancing and also be able
+to control the fire of his battery rapidly and effectively, but the
+more cover that can be obtained compatible with control by voice the
+better.
+
+6. Artillery as at present equipped has certain limitations as regards
+dealing with rapid movement from under cover, such as might be the case
+if a counter-attack were made unexpectedly, and must reach the crest to
+develop the full effect of its fire against such targets. Its conduct
+in such cases must be guided by the principle laid down in Sec. =146=
+(4).
+
+
+=157.= _Third phase of the attack._
+
+1. The infantry covered by the fire of the artillery will endeavour to
+reach a position from which it will be possible to deliver the assault.
+The distance between this position and the enemy must depend upon the
+ground and the resisting power of the enemy.
+
+2. The bursts of artillery fire should become frequent and intense
+at this period, the object of the artillery being to demoralise the
+defenders and reduce the volume and effect of their fire so as to
+afford to the infantry the opportunity to assault.
+
+3. =Every effort should be made to bring a converging fire to bear on
+the immediate objective of the attack, such fire being by far the most
+demoralizing and decisive in its effect.=
+
+At the same time no portion of the enemy’s position from which
+effective fire is being brought to bear on the attackers should be
+ignored.
+
+4. The number of batteries employed should be limited to the number
+that can be effectively controlled, and should be proportionate to
+the extent of the objectives that it is necessary to engage. Provided
+sufficient batteries are in action for the extent of the objectives a
+greater volume of fire, if required, should be obtained by an increased
+rapidity of fire from those batteries that have got the range, rather
+than by engaging fresh batteries.
+
+5. The losses that may be inflicted by wild artillery fire at this
+period may imperil the success of the whole operation, and unless the
+infantry has confidence in the artillery the effect of the covering
+fire of the latter may be to delay and hamper rather than facilitate
+the delivery of the assault.[13]
+
+[13] The distance at which artillery other than howitzers can with
+safety fire over the heads of its own troops varies. At ranges under
+1,500 yards _on the level_ it would be dangerous to fire over friendly
+troops; at longer ranges infantry should be sufficiently safe at 500
+yards (with heavy artillery 800 yards is necessary) from the guns.
+
+=Battery commanders must, therefore, do all in their power to improve
+their facilities for observing closely the course of the action and
+must keep the most complete control over the fire of their batteries
+that it is possible for them to exert.=
+
+6. Whether the artillery can continue its fire until the assaulting
+infantry is actually on the point of closing with the enemy, or whether
+it should increase its range on the first signs of the commencement
+of the assault, must depend on the circumstances of each case. The
+distance between the combatants just prior to the assault and the slope
+of the ground are important factors. Where the ground in front of
+the enemy’s position is steep and broken this distance will probably
+be short, but a steep slope gives a better view to the artillery and
+small errors in elevation will not be so dangerous to the infantry as
+on flat ground. If the ground is flat and exposed the infantry may
+be compelled to assault from further off, while the artillery will
+experience increased difficulties in estimating the relative positions
+of the combatants, and errors in elevation and fuze setting will be
+more dangerous to the attacking infantry.
+
+The advantages of artillery support at this period are, however, so
+great that the danger from a few shells falling short must not be
+allowed to prevent the artillery from continuing their fire till the
+latest possible moment. (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec. =106=.)
+
+By changing from time shrapnel to percussion shrapnel it may be
+possible to defer the moment when the artillery must cease firing at
+the immediate objective of the infantry. When it is no longer possible
+to continue firing at that objective the range of the artillery
+should be increased so as to search the rear of the position, but no
+considerable amount of ammunition should be devoted to this object.
+
+7. If the assault is seen to succeed, it is more important to move
+some batteries forward to pursue the enemy with fire or to support the
+successful infantry in holding the ground gained against a possible
+counter-attack than to continue firing over the position. The flanks of
+the locality that has been captured will often prove the best positions
+for support against counter-attack.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN DEFENCE.
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 107-109.)
+
+
+=158.= _General instructions and preliminary measures._
+
+1. When an encounter takes place a force may be thrown temporarily on
+the defensive by the numerical superiority of the enemy or by his more
+rapid deployment and greater readiness for action. In such a case time
+may be required in which to deploy or to bring up reinforcements, or
+possibly it may be desired to extricate the troops that are engaged and
+break off the action.
+
+2. If it is desired to gain time for deployment, or to bring up
+reinforcements, it is usually gained by the action of advanced troops
+or the occupation of advanced posts. The artillery plays an important
+part in the support of these troops and in covering their withdrawal
+later. To give effective support an early deployment of a sufficient
+force of artillery for the purpose is necessary.
+
+A commander may, however, deliberately assume a defensive attitude in
+one part of the field in order to exhaust the enemy’s powers, while he
+prepares an offensive stroke elsewhere. In such a case he will occupy
+a position with a portion of his force; strengthening it artificially
+if time permits, in order to reduce as much as possible the force to
+be locked up in its defence and to free as many as possible for the
+subsequent offensive. It is the action of the artillery in the defence
+of a position of this kind that is considered in the following sections.
+
+3. The defence of a position usually takes the form of the occupation
+of certain localities with unoccupied intervening spaces. (_See_ Sec.
+=156= (2).) The troops holding these localities are supported by local
+reserves, whose functions include the attack of any hostile force
+penetrating between the localities and the recapture at once of any
+locality that may be successfully assaulted by the enemy.
+
+In order to carry out this general scheme of defence the position to
+be defended is divided into sections each comprising one or more of
+these localities. Commanders are appointed to the sections and troops
+allotted for their defence, including the local reserves. The remainder
+of the force forms the general reserve, which is kept in hand for the
+decisive counter-attack. The artillery allotted to the position will be
+distributed, in accordance with the general scheme of defence, by the
+divisional commander after a careful reconnaissance of the ground, in
+which the divisional artillery commander will take part.
+
+4. The tasks which the artillery allotted to the defence of the
+position may be called upon to perform are:--
+
+      i. To make the enemy’s infantry deploy at a distance, to
+           delay the advance through the zone in which the hostile
+           infantry is exposed to artillery fire only, and to make
+           this advance as laborious and as costly as possible.
+     ii. To prevent the hostile artillery obtaining the mastery
+           in such a way as to facilitate the advance of its
+           infantry.
+    iii. To combine with the infantry in the close defence of
+           each defended locality so that if possible there is
+           no line of approach by which the enemy can move without
+           being subject to the fire of the two arms in combination.
+     iv. To support local counter-attacks and, if possible, the
+           decisive counter-attack. (_See_ Secs. =162=, =163=.)
+
+=The distribution of the artillery will be settled in accordance with
+the relative importance of each of the above tasks in the general plan
+of battle and with due regard to the nature of the ground.=
+
+5. When the country is enclosed and the field of fire restricted it
+will usually be desirable to distribute a large proportion of the
+artillery to the sections of the defence and to form temporary groups
+of the two arms as has been advocated in the case of the attack. (_See_
+Sec. =153= (5), (6), (7).) In such country the close defence of each
+defended locality is the chief requirement, and the other tasks assume
+a minor importance.
+
+When the country is open with bold features and a good field of fire it
+will often be found that the defended localities can be made mutually
+supporting, and that artillery posted in one section of the defence can
+assist the defence of a locality in another section better than the
+batteries actually posted in that section. In this case the formation
+of more or less independent groups should seldom be necessary, and the
+positions will be selected and tasks allotted to the artillery by the
+divisional artillery commander under instructions from the divisional
+commander.
+
+In either case it is inadvisable to commit many guns to action until
+the direction of the enemy’s attack is definitely ascertained.
+
+=6. At the commencement of the action it is advisable that the
+artillery should be concealed as much as possible.=
+
+If the intricacies of the ground make such a course desirable, it is
+permissible to post guns in open positions for the close defence of
+a locality and to reserve the fire of these guns for the crisis of
+the fight. If this is done great care should be taken to conceal the
+emplacements.
+
+A ridge in rear of the main position and dominating it will facilitate
+the co-operation of the artillery with the infantry defence, provided
+the distance between the two is not too great.
+
+Positions where the defender receives the support of his artillery,
+while the attacker does not, are usually strong for defence.
+
+
+=159.= _Opening phase of the defence._
+
+1. The use to be made of the artillery fire of the defence during the
+opening phase of the attack must depend on the general plan for the
+conduct of the action. A commander may desire to draw the enemy on and
+induce him to commit himself in a certain direction so as to offer a
+favourable opportunity for early counter-attack, or he may desire to
+delay the enemy’s advance and make the progress of his attack as slow,
+laborious and costly as possible.
+
+In the former case he will reserve his artillery fire and will rely
+largely on surprise effect when he eventually decides to open fire.
+Communication must be established throughout the position and control
+must be rigidly maintained.
+
+In the latter case the artillery of the defence will endeavour to
+make the enemy deploy at a distance and to delay the advance of his
+infantry. The enemy will make use of covered approaches and will cross
+open spaces as rapidly as possible when exposed to view, adopting
+formations that are the least vulnerable to artillery fire.
+
+2. Searching the covered approaches when the effect of the fire cannot
+be observed is not likely to have the desired result, and will lead to
+the waste of valuable ammunition.
+
+The limits of the open spaces over which the enemy is likely to
+attempt to move and, if necessary, the range of any prominent objects
+within those limits should be registered (_See_ Sec. =219=), and all
+arrangements made to establish a belt of fire through which the enemy
+must pass (_see_ Sec. =224= (4)). =The fire should be of such a nature
+as to impress upon the enemy the certainty of loss if he attempts to
+cross open spaces without deploying.= The result will be to instil
+caution, cause deployment to take place at a distance, and make the
+advance slow and difficult.
+
+3. The enemy’s artillery will endeavour to support the advance of the
+infantry. The best way to defeat this object is for the defending
+batteries to be concealed. Batteries that are located at this stage may
+be moved and take up other positions, if such are available.
+
+
+=160.= _Second phase of the defence._
+
+1. =It is only in exceptional circumstances that the artillery of
+the defence can hope, by the effect of its own fire, to prevent the
+attacking infantry closing with the defence.= A new phase of the
+operations will be entered upon when the attacking infantry comes under
+the effective rifle fire of the defence.
+
+2. The object of the attacking infantry at this stage will be to build
+up firing lines in suitable positions from which to develop effective
+covering fire to support a further advance.
+
+From now onward the hostile infantry will be compelled to move in
+extended order by rushes; the number of men moving, and the length of
+the rushes, depending on the ground, the distance from the defender’s
+position, and the volume and effect of his fire. The shorter the
+distance from the position and the more effective the defender’s fire,
+the shorter will be the length of each rush and the fewer the number of
+men taking part in it.
+
+Artillery cannot hope to deal effectively with each individual rush.
+=At this stage the object of the artillery should be to foresee the
+positions where the hostile firing lines will be formed, and to subject
+these firing lines to bursts of fire of such rapidity and intensity as
+to keep them glued to the ground, and to prevent them from developing
+effective covering fire.= The more threatening the hostile infantry is
+the more frequent and intense should be the bursts of artillery fire.
+
+3. The hostile artillery will do all in its power to reduce the volume
+and effect of the fire of the defence, both gun and rifle fire.
+
+If the hostile artillery is able to locate the position of the
+defender’s infantry the latter may suffer severely, and the power of
+the defence may be seriously weakened thereby. The artillery of the
+attack therefore must not be ignored, but instead of endeavouring to
+destroy the hostile batteries by an overwhelming concentration of fire,
+the object will be to neutralize their fire with as few batteries as
+possible, so as to free as many as possible to fire on the attacking
+infantry.[14]
+
+[14] The methods by which a hostile battery should be neutralized are
+described in Sec. =155= (2).
+
+4. =Infantry conquers and retains the ground. The principal effort must
+therefore be directed to bringing the infantry advance to a standstill.
+When the infantry loses its power of forward movement it is no longer
+capable of forcing a decision.=
+
+When this occurs the enemy’s reserves should be expected and a careful
+watch kept for their appearance, so that they may be crushed without
+delay.
+
+
+=161.= _Third phase of the defence._
+
+1. If the attacking infantry is successful in reaching a position
+from which it is possible to threaten an assault, no effort must be
+spared to increase the effect of the fire of the defence. If a forward
+movement to an open position is likely to contribute to this object it
+must be undertaken without hesitation. The principle laid down in Sec.
+=146= (4) applies to this situation.
+
+Should a successful assault be delivered there is sure to be some
+confusion in the ranks of the attackers, who will probably endeavour
+to re-form. The captured locality should at once be subjected to
+artillery fire, converging if possible.
+
+2. If a counter-attack is launched for the recapture of the locality
+the artillery will give it the most effective support that is possible
+in the circumstances. If time permits the divisional artillery
+commander should organize this support under instructions from the
+divisional commander; but subordinate artillery commanders must not
+wait for orders, when aware that such an attack is taking place.
+
+
+COUNTER-ATTACKS.
+
+
+=162.= _Artillery support to local counter-attacks._
+
+1. During the course of the fight all favourable opportunities for
+local counter-attacks must be seized. (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec.
+109.) These local counter-attacks must be assisted by the fire of any
+guns conveniently situated for the purpose. The time for preparation
+will usually be short, and subordinate artillery commanders must
+therefore often decide for themselves how this support can best be
+given and what proportion of the guns to employ. Extensive changes of
+position should be avoided and should rarely be necessary.
+
+
+=163.= _Artillery support to the decisive counter-attack._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 110.)
+
+1. The nature of the artillery support to the decisive counter-attack
+must depend on the nature of the ground over which it is delivered and
+the direction which it takes.
+
+It may be that the counter-attack can best be supported from the
+positions already occupied by the artillery in the main position. If
+that is the case it will not be necessary to keep artillery in reserve
+for the purpose. A change of zones or objectives may suffice to afford
+the necessary support.
+
+This will not always be the case. If the troops with which it is
+intended to carry out the counter-attack have been placed at a distance
+from the main position, and if the direction of the counter-attack
+and the ground over which it moves prevents adequate artillery support
+being given from the main position, special provision must be made.
+Either artillery must from the outset form part of the troops destined
+for the counter-attack or batteries must be withdrawn from the main
+position for the purpose.
+
+Either course is legitimate, and the method to be adopted is a matter
+for the decision of the commander of the force. If he decides to
+withdraw guns that are in action every effort must be made to ensure
+their timely arrival in their new positions. As the success of the
+counter-attack is usually dependent on correct timing this is a matter
+of great importance.
+
+2. =The action of the artillery in support of the counter-stroke should
+be characterized by boldness.= The moral effect of batteries advancing
+boldly in support of their infantry may decide the issue, when success
+or failure hang in the balance.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN WOOD AND VILLAGE FIGHTING.
+
+=163= A. _The employment of artillery in wood fighting._
+
+1. As obstacles to movement and view woods exercise an important
+influence on artillery tactics both in attack and defence. A wooded
+area increases the difficulty of observation of fire.
+
+2. A wood of small extent that is held by the enemy lends itself to
+envelopment, and the hostile troops will usually be posted outside it.
+In such a case the wood itself should not materially interfere with
+artillery support for the attacking infantry.
+
+3. A wood of large area presents a serious obstacle to effective
+co-operation between the attacking artillery and infantry. The enemy
+may have prepared the wood for internal defence, using existing
+clearings and making others; or he may have taken up a position behind
+it, sufficiently near to bring a concentrated artillery and rifle fire
+to bear upon the attacking troops as they attempt to debouch. In either
+case the problem which confronts the attacking infantry is the same,
+namely, to issue from a belt of wood and cross an open space under
+close fire from hostile artillery and infantry.
+
+Provided observation parties can establish themselves in suitable
+positions and adequate means of intercommunication are available, the
+attacking artillery may be able to support the infantry from positions
+outside the wood.
+
+The most effective means of assisting the infantry, however, will be
+the employment of sections or even single guns in the wood itself in
+close support of the firing line.
+
+4. In dealing with a wood of considerable extent the best position for
+troops compelled to act on the defensive will often be in rear of the
+wood at such a distance from it that artillery and infantry fire can be
+brought to bear at close ranges on the hostile infantry as it attempts
+to issue from the wood.
+
+The edge of the wood should be prepared with abatis or entanglements
+and arrangements should be made for artillery fire to be brought to
+bear on any gaps between the obstacles or other places where hostile
+bodies are likely to assemble when emerging from the wood.
+
+Arrangements should further be made for artillery to support the action
+of local reserves against hostile bodies that may succeed in issuing
+from the wood, and to deal with outflanking movements by the enemy.
+
+If a clearing of suitable extent exists or can be made within the wood,
+troops may be placed in position along the edge of it furthest from the
+enemy, the opposite edge being prepared with obstacles as explained
+above. Guns should be placed in position with the infantry, care being
+taken to dispose them so that their fire can be brought to bear on any
+open spaces likely to be crossed by the enemy.
+
+Special arrangements should be made for the timely withdrawal of the
+guns to positions behind the wood should the infantry be driven back to
+the main position.
+
+5. Against troops located in a wood high explosive shell or percussion
+shrapnel will be more effective than time shrapnel.
+
+
+=163= B. _Artillery in the attack and defence of villages._
+
+1. Villages not only lend themselves to conversion into strong tactical
+localities, but troops are instinctively attracted towards them.
+
+2. In defending a village infantry will usually be entrenched outside
+it, in front of it, and on its flanks. Artillery should also be placed
+outside the village in positions where the guns command the approaches
+to it and the exits from it.
+
+A portion of the artillery may be posted in advance of the village at
+the outset, in order to compel the enemy to make an early deployment.
+In this case careful arrangements should be made for the timely
+withdrawal of the guns to positions on the flanks or in rear of the
+village, as the attack develops.
+
+As in the case of wood fighting it is important to arrange for adequate
+artillery support for local counter-attacks by the local reserves.
+
+3. In the attack of a village artillery fire should be concentrated on
+the hostile infantry as soon as it is located.
+
+When the enemy has been driven from his trenches the fire of the
+artillery should be concentrated on the village itself in order to deny
+its cover to the hostile troops retiring through it.
+
+When the attacking infantry reaches the village the artillery should
+push forward on the flanks and engage any hostile bodies posted in rear
+of the village to command the exits from it.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN NIGHT OPERATIONS.
+
+=164.= _General instructions._
+
+1. “Night operations may be classified as _night marches_, _night
+advances_ and _night assaults_.” (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 129.)
+Artillery must be prepared to take part in any of these operations.
+It may also be required to participate in the defence, at night, of a
+position or locality.
+
+2. In a night march artillery usually marches at the least exposed
+portion of the column, _i.e._, in rear or on the protected flank. In
+this case preliminary reconnaissance by the artillery is not possible,
+its preparations being chiefly directed to reducing the noise caused by
+the horses’ harness and by the vehicles.
+
+3. “The purpose of a night advance is to gain ground from which further
+progress will be made in daylight and not to deliver a decisive assault
+during darkness.” (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 134.)
+
+Such advances are made when in contact with the enemy, either as a
+preliminary to opening a battle, or to gain an advantage during its
+course. The ultimate object in view in each case may be either an
+assault at dawn, or to gain better fire positions. The immediate aim of
+the artillery must be to get the guns during darkness into favourable
+fire positions, ready to open fire at dawn. Careful reconnaissance of
+the positions to be occupied is an essential preliminary. (_See_ Sec.
+=189=.)
+
+4. Night assaults may be undertaken to gain a point of support for
+further operations in daylight, to drive in an enemy’s advanced troops
+or to secure an outpost position as a preliminary to an attack at dawn.
+(_See_ F.S. Regs., Pt. I, Sec. 135.)
+
+The extent to which artillery can participate in a night assault
+depends principally on whether the assault follows immediately on a
+night march or is a continuation of previous operations. In the former
+case artillery can rarely be of assistance during darkness; in the
+latter, guns may occasionally be able to assist, provided thorough
+preparations have been made in daylight, and careful steps taken to
+ensure the timely cessation of fire.
+
+5. In the defence artillery may be able to give effective assistance
+when the front to be defended is narrow, and there is limited ground
+over which the enemy must pass if he wishes to attack. In these
+circumstances all arrangements for concentrating fire on various zones
+should be made in advance.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN RETIREMENTS AND RETREATS.
+
+=165.= _Retirements._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 113.)
+
+1. It must be a point of honour with troops never to retire, without
+orders, from a position they have been detailed to hold to the end.
+On occasions it may be advisable to order batteries when exposed to
+accurate and destructive fire to cease fire temporarily; or they may
+be compelled to do so by want of ammunition. In either case they must
+remain in action and wait for the fire to diminish, or the arrival of
+more ammunition. When any movement to the rear is ordered it must be
+carried out in an orderly manner, otherwise it cannot fail to have a
+bad moral effect.
+
+2. Should it become necessary to abandon a position, a portion of the
+artillery will usually be required to establish itself as quickly as
+possible in positions from which the retirement of the rest of the
+force can be covered. The fire of heavy guns from positions overlooking
+the main position, combined with that of field guns which, owing to
+their greater mobility, may occupy more advanced positions, would
+usually form the most effective means for securing the withdrawal of
+the rest of the force.
+
+When it is a question of ensuring the safe withdrawal of the main body,
+artillery must be ready to take any risk, and loss of _matériel_ is
+then fully justified.
+
+3. The organization of a rearguard to cover further retreat is the
+function of the commander assisted by the general staff, but, in order
+that the most efficient artillery units may be allotted to such a
+force, it is necessary for divisional artillery commanders to keep
+themselves acquainted with the position and relative condition of each
+artillery brigade as regards losses and ammunition.
+
+It is also the duty of the artillery commander to appoint a commander
+of the rearguard artillery, and to inform him of the batteries at his
+disposal and of the name of the commander of the rearguard.
+
+4. The withdrawal of the rest of the artillery and its subsequent
+formation on the march is the next most important duty for the
+divisional artillery commander in co-operation with the general staff
+of the division.
+
+
+=166.= _Rearguards._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 71, 72.)
+
+1. The object of a rearguard is to gain time and then to withdraw
+without becoming too deeply engaged. This is best effected by
+compelling the enemy to halt and deploy for attack as frequently and at
+as great a distance as possible.
+
+With these objects in view a rearguard is usually strong in artillery.
+
+2. The commander of the artillery of a rearguard should, as a rule,
+accompany the rearguard commander, in order that he may have early
+information as to the next position to be occupied, its extent and the
+general dispositions for its occupation.
+
+3. Batteries in direct fire positions are apt to be pinned to their
+positions by the hostile artillery, and withdrawal from such positions
+is often difficult. As, moreover, the close defence of a position
+is rarely required in a rearguard action it will not, as a rule, be
+necessary for artillery to bring fire to bear on the ground close in
+front of the position. Positions in rear of the crest are therefore
+preferable but battery commanders must arrange to keep their immediate
+front under observation.
+
+4. The flanks of a rear guard position are specially important and some
+guns should usually be employed in their defence. It is the duty of the
+commander of these guns to see that they have an escort. Any artillery
+patrols that may be available should also be allotted to them rather
+than to guns centrally situated whose position is more secure.
+
+5. While it is the duty of the rearguard commander to select the
+time and method of retiring and the position where the next stand is
+to be made an artillery officer should, if possible, accompany the
+officer detailed to reconnoitre this position in order to select the
+most suitable positions for the batteries and to supply the artillery
+commander with information.
+
+Subordinate artillery commanders must endeavour to have lines of
+retirement reconnoitred, in order to avoid interfering with the
+movements of other troops.
+
+6. The supply of ammunition to a rearguard requires careful
+arrangements to be made by the divisional artillery staff in accordance
+with the orders of the divisional commander. Sections of brigade
+ammunition columns may be disposed at suitable points; or sometimes
+small depôts of ammunition may be left in easily recognized localities
+at which empty ammunition wagons can refill. The commander of the
+rearguard artillery must be informed of the arrangements made for
+replenishing ammunition.
+
+
+EMPLOYMENT OF HORSE ARTILLERY WITH CAVALRY.
+
+(_See also_ “Cavalry Training.”)
+
+=167.= _General instructions._
+
+1. =The paramount duty of horse artillery is to prepare the way for the
+cavalry and to support it in the fight.=
+
+The principles laid down in the preceding sections regarding the
+employment of artillery apply equally to the horse artillery, although
+the special characteristics and functions of cavalry may call for
+modification in methods.
+
+2. The main functions of cavalry in war are--
+
+      i. To discover the enemy’s dispositions and movements.
+     ii. To screen and protect its own army from the observation
+           of the enemy and hostile interference,
+    iii. To take its place as part of the fighting machine in
+           co-operation with the other arms on the battlefield.
+
+3. Cavalry is trained to fight either mounted or dismounted, and the
+power to combine shock with fire action, or to adopt either method at
+will, not only increases its independence, but adds materially to its
+offensive and defensive power.
+
+For the full development of fire power artillery is required, hence a
+force of cavalry is usually accompanied by one or more batteries of
+horse artillery.
+
+4. The duty of the horse artillery commander being to help and support
+the cavalry, it is essential that he should know the general intentions
+and tactical plan of the cavalry leader. It will, however, frequently
+be impossible for the cavalry leader to do more than give a general
+indication of his plans and intentions; the horse artillery commander
+must therefore study his superior’s methods, and endeavour to regard
+the situation, as it develops, from the point of view of that officer,
+training himself to appreciate his wishes rapidly and to anticipate his
+orders.
+
+5. The horse artillery commander and his subordinates must have a
+thorough understanding of the principles upon which the conduct of a
+cavalry fight is based, to enable them to grasp at once the object of
+each movement and to ensure co-operation on the part of the guns.
+
+6. The methods to be adopted by the horse artillery will vary according
+as the cavalry to which it is attached is opposed to cavalry or other
+troops and whether fire or shock action is to form the principal means
+of reaching the desired result.
+
+Where shock action is anticipated, opportunities for effective
+participation in the fight will occur with so little warning, and be
+of so fleeting a nature that horse artillery must be granted a greater
+measure of independence than is the case with other artillery in the
+field.
+
+To take advantage of such opportunities promptness of decision,
+readiness of resource, and rapidity of action are essential, and these
+characteristics should distinguish all ranks.
+
+
+=168.= _Position on the march._
+
+1. On the march the distribution of the horse artillery will be decided
+by the commander of the force. As a rule, the artillery of a mounted
+force is kept concentrated with the main body. When marching in column,
+horse artillery is usually placed near the head of the column, normally
+in rear of the leading unit.
+
+2. Whether the first line wagons accompany the guns or march in rear
+of the fighting portion of the column will depend upon the tactical
+situation; within striking distance of the enemy, and when the power
+to deploy quickly and manœuvre with freedom is desirable, the latter
+course will usually be advisable.
+
+3. When moving on a broad front, or across country, guns should be
+allowed a certain latitude in conforming to the pace and movements of
+the cavalry, advantage being taken of roads or firm ground.
+
+
+=169.= _Escorts._
+
+1. In normal conditions horse artillery requires no special escort.
+When guns are detached from the main body or otherwise exposed, it is
+the duty of the horse artillery commander to ensure that a suitable
+escort is detailed.
+
+Should no escort have been detailed and should the development of the
+situation at any time render an escort desirable, it is the duty of the
+horse artillery commander on the spot to call upon the commander of the
+nearest body of cavalry to provide one.
+
+2. The principal duties of the escort are--
+
+      i. To give timely warning of any threatened attack.
+     ii. To keep hostile riflemen beyond effective range of
+           the guns.
+    iii. To cover the withdrawal of the guns if attacked by
+           greatly superior forces.
+
+3. It is important that communication be maintained between the guns
+and their escort. For this purpose the escort commander will attach an
+officer or non-commissioned officer to the artillery commander.
+
+4. The senior officer with the wagon line, whether in action or on the
+move, will make such dispositions as may be possible for their defence.
+
+
+=170.= _The approach march._
+
+1. The object of the approach march of a force of cavalry is to close
+upon the enemy in order to attack him. The principles governing the
+disposition of the force are dealt with in “Cavalry Training.”
+
+2. The position of the horse artillery will be ordered by the cavalry
+commander. As a rule, horse artillery will move massed on the flank
+of the cavalry in line with the head of the main body. The formation
+adopted must ensure elasticity and allow the guns some latitude in
+conforming to the pace of the main body when moving over undulating
+country.
+
+The guiding principle is that the guns shall be readily detachable and
+free to move at a rapid pace to the selected fire position without
+interfering with the deployment of the remainder of the force.
+
+3. On commencing the approach march the horse artillery will assume
+the most convenient formation, probably divisional mass or column of
+brigade masses, all wagons other than those of the firing batteries
+joining the first line transport of the force.
+
+4. The horse artillery should usually remain concentrated with a view
+to bringing the most intense fire possible to bear on the hostile
+formations when encountered, but occasions will occur especially in
+undulating country when it will be advisable to leave some guns on
+one ridge, to cover the occupation of the next. It may sometimes be
+advisable to place the guns on both flanks, in order to deny ground to
+the enemy by which he might otherwise approach.
+
+5. The horse artillery commander must accompany the cavalry commander
+during the approach march. He will thus be in a position to receive the
+earliest information regarding his superior’s plans and will himself be
+well placed to watch the situation and examine the ground on which the
+action is expected to take place. His headquarters will not actually
+accompany him, but such of its members as he requires will remain in
+close touch.
+
+6. As a general rule, the plan will consist of a mounted attack
+combined with the fire attack of guns, machine guns and, if the range
+admits, of their escort.
+
+In combining fire action with mounted action the chief factors of
+success are:--
+
+     i. The timely separation of the guns, etc., from the
+          mounted attack, so that their fire may be available
+          the moment that collision is inevitable, and in order
+          that the freedom of manœuvre of the cavalry may not be
+          cramped nor the fire of the guns masked by the movement
+          of the cavalry which they are supporting. Fig. 27
+          illustrates this principle, which generally holds good.
+    ii. The correct timing of the attacks, so that the enemy
+          will not be allowed to deal with the two separately. For
+          this reason it will often be necessary to push the guns
+          and machine guns boldly forward.
+
+The nature of the country, the time available, the action of the enemy
+and the safety of the guns are factors to be considered when deciding
+to what extent the guns can be separated from the cavalry.
+
+7. As soon as the cavalry commander has settled on his general plan of
+attack he informs his artillery commander of the general rôle that he
+wishes the artillery to take in it. The situation is liable to change
+with such rapidity that more than this is usually impossible, and the
+exact spot for coming into action, and the moment for opening fire or
+changing position, can only be decided by the artillery commander in
+accordance with the development of the fight.
+
+After receiving his instructions, therefore, the artillery commander
+proceeds to reconnoitre for positions and will have complete freedom of
+action within the limits of the instructions he has received. It will
+generally be advisable for the artillery commander to leave an officer
+with the cavalry commander, to keep him informed, as far as possible,
+of the latter’s plans and intentions.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 27.]
+
+
+=171.= _The advance into action._
+
+1. The manœuvres which precede the charge take place in such rapid
+succession that little time will be available for elaborate orders
+or dispositions. Horse artillery brigade commanders must therefore be
+ready to join the artillery commander as quickly as possible, when he
+proceeds to carry out his reconnaissance, so as to receive his verbal
+orders and communicate them without delay to brigade leaders.
+
+2. The two chief duties of the horse artillery commander are to
+reconnoitre a position for his brigades and to watch the manœuvres
+of his own and the corresponding movements of the opposing cavalry.
+To save delay and to enable him to devote more time to the tactical
+situation he should usually be accompanied and assisted in his
+reconnaissance by the commanders of horse artillery brigades.
+
+3. =The principal considerations involved by the above duties are,
+firstly, the selection of a position the fire from which will not
+easily be masked by the advance of the cavalry, and, secondly, the
+correct moment for coming into action, taking into account the time
+which must elapse between opening fire and obtaining effect.= If
+the cavalry machine guns are to act on the same flank as the horse
+artillery their commander must ascertain the position of the guns, so
+that he may avoid masking their fire at a critical moment.
+
+4. Every effort should be made to conceal the guns till the last
+moment, so that the fire may come as a surprise. A covered line of
+advance, to the selected position should, therefore, be sought, while,
+if exposed ground has to be crossed, the distance of the enemy and the
+possibility of coming under fire must be considered in deciding on the
+formation to be adopted, it may be possible to deceive hostile patrols
+by masking the guns with the detachments. The position itself must be
+suitable for direct laying.
+
+5. Both in the advance to and occupation of the position the artillery
+commander should ensure that the exposed flank of the guns is watched
+by artillery patrols, if no escort has been provided. If no natural
+obstacle covers this flank in action, it may be advisable to dispose
+some of the guns so as to cover it with their fire.
+
+6. Batteries should be retained in positions of readiness as long as
+possible, in order not to lessen their mobility, should the situation
+change unexpectedly.
+
+The temptation of gaining a temporary advantage must not be allowed to
+lead artillery into premature action. Such tactics, far from assisting
+in the defeat of the hostile cavalry, are liable to divulge the cavalry
+leader’s plans and may give the enemy a chance of immobilizing, with
+a fraction of his own artillery, the guns thus engaged, while the
+remainder of his troops are able to manœuvre in a direction out of
+reach of fire.
+
+As a general rule, fire should not be opened until the cavalry is in a
+position to take immediate advantage of its effect. On the other hand
+the cavalry commander’s plan may render it desirable to open fire for
+some special purpose, such as to occupy the enemy’s attention or to
+force him to deploy prematurely or in a faulty direction.
+
+
+=172.= _The fight._
+
+1. =The most favourable moment for the guns to open fire will usually
+be when the opposing cavalry has definitely committed itself.=
+
+2. As success depends on the result of the cavalry charge, it is the
+paramount duty of the horse artillery to concentrate its fire on that
+portion of the enemy’s cavalry on which the decisive attack is about to
+be delivered.
+
+The time during which this portion of the enemy’s force is likely to be
+exposed to fire being of very brief duration, effect must be sought by
+the greatest rapidity of fire and well judged distribution.
+
+3. When the guns can no longer engage the immediate object of the
+attack, fire should be directed on any supports or reserves that may be
+visible. It is most important that any formed bodies of fresh troops
+be dealt with at once.
+
+As a rule, it is only when the guns become masked from the hostile
+cavalry, that their fire should be directed on to the enemy’s
+artillery. If, however, the enemy’s artillery exposes itself while
+limbered up or is bringing a heavy fire to bear on the main body of
+the cavalry during its approach march, the artillery commander will be
+justified in modifying the above procedure to meet such cases.
+
+
+=173.= _Pursuit or retreat._
+
+1. If the attack succeeds the artillery commander should send forward
+part of the artillery at once to support and assist the immediate
+pursuit. The object of these guns is to prevent the enemy re-forming or
+holding positions which would check the pursuit.
+
+At the same time the artillery commander should retain control of
+some portion of the artillery so that he may be ready to comply with
+any demand which the cavalry commander may make on him for guns to
+co-operate in an organized pursuit.
+
+2. If the attack fails the horse artillery must remain in action and by
+its fire form a screen in rear of which the cavalry may rally.
+
+
+=174.= _Horse artillery with cavalry acting dismounted._
+
+1. Occasions will frequently occur on reconnaissances, in advanced
+or rearguard actions, and in the seizure of advanced positions, when
+mounted troops will be involved in a fire fight, where mounted shock
+action is either not contemplated or is not of primary importance.
+
+2. In such circumstances the mobility of mounted troops is generally
+employed in enabling successive fractions to move rapidly from one
+tactical point to another covered by the fire of those at rest. When
+taking part in such a fight, horse artillery should be guided by the
+general principles laid down for artillery co-operating with infantry.
+(_See_ Sec. =154= _et seq._)
+
+As a rule an action of this nature will be initiated more deliberately
+than in a purely mounted combat.
+
+The first requisite is information. The second that, in order to keep
+in touch with the developments of the action--conducted as it will
+probably be over a wide area--the positions for the guns should be
+chosen with a view to affording facilities for movement as well as for
+effective fire support.
+
+3. A combination of a mounted attack with the fire attack will often
+form part of the plan of action.
+
+In this case the mounted attack will usually endeavour to gain the
+flank of its objective while the artillery with the dismounted part of
+the force brings fire to bear at the right moment, in order to distract
+the enemy’s attention and pin him to his ground and so prevent any
+change of position to meet it.
+
+4. Sometimes, however, it will be essential for mounted troops to drive
+home an attack against a locality on foot. On such occasions they must
+be formed for attack in depth, the object being to establish a firing
+line in a position as close as possible to the enemy and to obtain
+superiority of fire over him. When such is the case the action of the
+horse artillery will resemble that of field artillery in co-operation
+with infantry, and time will usually be available to draw up a
+systematic plan of attack. (_See_ Sec. =153=.)
+
+5. The assistance of horse artillery will also be of great value when
+a mounted force has recourse to dismounted action either with a view
+to holding a locality till other troops arrive or simply to denying
+it to the enemy. Its method of employment will approximate to that of
+field artillery in the defence, but full advantage should be taken of
+its mobility to support any extensions or changes of front which may be
+adopted.
+
+
+=175.= _Horse artillery in a general engagement._
+
+1. Occasions for the employment of shock tactics against infantry or
+artillery may arise on the battlefield of the future, as they have in
+the past. Success can, however, only be anticipated when the enemy is
+either taken by surprise or when demoralized.
+
+2. Surprise may be achieved by a skilful use of the ground or through
+the enemy’s attention being absorbed by the attack of the other arms.
+The enemy’s demoralization will depend on the action of the guns and
+infantry. Hence cavalry before attacking the enemy’s infantry or
+artillery must chiefly look to the way being prepared for it by the
+action of the other arms.
+
+Horse artillery must be ready to assist in this preparation, and it
+will be the duty of its commander, under the instructions of the
+cavalry commander, to ascertain how best this assistance can be
+rendered. To this end the establishment of communication with the
+commanders of adjacent bodies of troops will be advisable.
+
+
+=176.= _Ammunition supply._
+
+1. Previous to an action the commander of each horse artillery brigade
+ammunition column should send an officer or non-commissioned officer to
+artillery headquarters.
+
+2. The artillery commander is responsible for informing the ammunition
+column commanders as early as possible of the intended course of action
+and of the localities to which they are to move.
+
+The original positions of these columns should be chosen with a view to
+the facilities for replenishing ammunition and suitability for defence.
+
+3. If the force is to operate on a wide front, or if part of it is to
+act independently, instructions as to detaching sections or attaching
+orderlies to the various cavalry and artillery brigades will be
+necessary.
+
+4. In the event of a cavalry or horse artillery brigade requiring more
+ammunition its commander will either send back the orderly to the
+ammunition column or apply direct to cavalry divisional headquarters as
+may be most convenient. The place to which the ammunition is to be sent
+and what arrangements, if any, have been made for its protection should
+be stated.
+
+
+MOBILE ARTILLERY IN THE ATTACK AND DEFENCE OF A FORTRESS.
+
+=177.= _The attack._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 118-125.)
+
+1. In the attack of a fortress the first object will be to capture any
+advanced positions which the enemy may have occupied. These positions
+will often be provided with field works the extent of which will depend
+on a variety of circumstances. To drive the enemy out of such positions
+the employment of heavy mobile artillery may be necessary, but
+opportunities will also occur for the employment of the lighter guns in
+support of the infantry attacks.
+
+These operations should be conducted on the same principles as laid
+down in Secs. =154-157=, every opportunity being taken to cause losses
+to the enemy which he cannot replace.
+
+2. During the siege operations the field artillery will be employed
+as directed by the commander of the besieging force. The whole, or
+a portion of it, may be temporarily or permanently placed under the
+orders of the siege artillery commander.
+
+The positions of batteries, which have not been placed under the siege
+artillery commander’s orders, will be selected by divisional artillery
+commanders, under the orders of divisional commanders. Care must be
+taken to ensure that the fire from these batteries will assist, and not
+interfere with, the siege artillery.
+
+3. In the attack of permanent works, the fire of field guns being
+of little or no value, their use should be restricted to supporting
+infantry assaults, or to repelling sorties, which compel the enemy’s
+troops to expose themselves.
+
+Howitzers and heavy artillery, on the other hand, would usually be
+called upon to take part in destroying the enemy’s armament and works.
+
+4. Accuracy of fire being most important, the judicious selection of
+observing stations and positions is as important for field batteries as
+for heavier guns. The gun sites should be concealed and artificially
+protected, and, when possible, platforms for the howitzers should be
+provided. A good system of intercommunication and an efficient supply
+of ammunition are additional factors of importance.
+
+
+=178.= _The defence._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 126-128.)
+
+1. In the defence of a fortress delay is usually one of the principal
+objects. The longer the close investment can be prevented the more will
+it assist this object.
+
+2. If assisting in the defence of a coast fortress, the first duty of
+the mobile artillery will be to oppose hostile landing parties. For
+this purpose it must be able to sweep the probable landing-places with
+shrapnel fire. It should, if possible, be screened from view of the
+ships supporting a landing. The best positions for opposing a hostile
+advance, from whatever quarter it may come, should be chosen in peace,
+and the sites for the guns thoroughly reconnoitred.
+
+3. With the object of delaying the investment of the fortress one or
+more advanced positions may be occupied in front of the main line
+of defence. The distance of an advanced position from the main line
+of defence cannot be precisely laid down, but it must be far enough
+forward to deny to the enemy artillery positions from which fire can
+be opened against the main works, and should be strengthened by all
+artificial means available. In the advanced position will be placed the
+heavier guns of the movable armament; the light guns being employed in
+the counter-attacks that will be made from it with a view of inflicting
+loss upon the enemy, and hindering the establishment of his batteries.
+Sites for the various guns and howitzers available should be got ready
+in good time if this has not been done in peace.
+
+4. As the assailants make good the ground, the last of the advanced
+positions will eventually be evacuated. The mobile artillery will
+then be distributed amongst the various sections of the defence, a
+proportion being retained with the general reserve.
+
+5. As soon as the direction of the main attack has been made clear, the
+artillery on this front will be reinforced by all the guns that can
+be spared from elsewhere. The disposition of this armament will vary
+according to its nature and local conditions. Well-concealed positions
+for the howitzers and for Q.F. guns, positions from which they can fire
+direct against assaulting infantry, must be sought.
+
+6. The same general rules apply to the use of projectiles in the
+defence as in the attack; high explosive shell being employed against
+_matériel_, and shrapnel fire against personnel.
+
+
+ARTILLERY IN IRREGULAR WARFARE.
+
+=179.= _General principles._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. X.)
+
+1. The extent to which tactical methods differ in small wars from those
+obtaining in regular campaigns varies widely in different cases.
+
+In each instance the special characteristics, armament and tactics of
+the enemy must be considered, in addition to the nature of the country
+in which the operations are to take place, and the object in view.
+General indications, therefore, can alone be given as to the form which
+artillery tactics should assume.
+
+2. The importance of impressing such foes as are met with in these
+campaigns with a feeling of inferiority cannot be overestimated.
+Consequently a bold offensive is generally adopted and every endeavour
+made to inflict serious loss on the enemy. Against opponents such
+as are met with in irregular warfare the moral effect of guns is
+very great, but without material effect, moral effect is like to be
+transitory. Sometimes it may be expedient merely to drive the enemy off
+by shell fire, but, as a rule, this should not be the primary object of
+the guns.
+
+3. In irregular warfare, guns should generally be dispersed rather
+than concentrated, so as to bring effective fire to bear at any point
+where opportunities may present themselves. Moreover any artillery the
+enemy may possess will usually be inferior in numbers and certainly
+in training and efficiency, and therefore direct fire and shorter
+ranges than are usual in regular warfare should be employed. Against
+irregulars armed with rifles, who rely chiefly on fire action, covering
+fire from part of the artillery may be necessary, but a prolonged
+preparation of the attack may cause the enemy to disperse before the
+attack can be pushed home and is incompatible with anything in the
+nature of a surprise. The guns not used for covering fire should be
+pushed forward in order that when the enemy is finally driven out of
+his position he may be vigorously pursued by shell fire.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+BRIGADE TACTICS.
+
+
+=180.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The brigade is the tactical unit. Its commander is responsible for
+reconnoitring and selecting positions for the batteries composing the
+brigade, for the method of occupying them, and for the allotment of
+zones, tasks, or objectives to each battery within the limits of the
+orders he has received.
+
+2. When the brigade commander finds it necessary to change the
+objective of one of its batteries he should inform other batteries whom
+it may concern.
+
+Should it become necessary to open fire on a target outside the area
+allotted to him, he must be careful to report the circumstances to the
+divisional artillery commander.
+
+As changes of target entail fresh ranging and consequently some loss of
+fire effect, they should not be lightly ordered.
+
+3. The brigade commander exercises general control over the expenditure
+of ammunition, but the ranging, the method of engaging an objective and
+the rate of fire should be left in the hands of battery commanders.
+The brigade commander may, if in close touch with a battery commander,
+give him precise orders as to the nature and rate of fire; otherwise he
+should only interfere if he has convinced himself that the fire of a
+battery is ineffective, or unsuited to the tactical situation.
+
+
+=181.= _Reconnaissance._
+
+1. As soon as the brigade commander has received his orders, which
+should include full information as to the tactical situation and
+the intention of the divisional artillery commander with regard to
+the action of his batteries, he communicates them to his battery
+commanders, and informs them if they are to accompany him during his
+reconnaissance.
+
+=As a rule, he should then seek out the commander of any infantry with
+which he is to co-operate, and obtain from him full information as to
+his intended action.= (_See also_ Sec. =153= (7).)
+
+2. Before proceeding to reconnoitre with a view to selecting the most
+suitable positions from which to carry out the task allotted to him,
+the brigade commander should indicate to the brigade leader the pace
+and general direction of the advance.
+
+If he is unable to direct the brigade to any definite spot near its
+probable position in action he should select a point or series of
+points, if possible marked on the map, which the brigade is to pass in
+its advance and at which he can communicate to the brigade leader any
+necessary instructions as to its further movements.
+
+If the brigade commander thinks it necessary to supplement this system
+of intercommunication he may be accompanied in his reconnaissance by a
+few additional men to direct the brigade at doubtful points. These men
+will join the brigade when it reaches them unless they receive orders
+to the contrary.
+
+In carrying out his reconnaissance the brigade commander should be
+accompanied only by such men as are essential for the purpose and for
+communication between himself and the brigade, the remainder of the
+headquarters with the telephone wagon following at the head of the
+brigade.
+
+A natural eye for country, and previous training will materially assist
+him in coming to a decision as to the best position to be occupied. At
+the same time he should be well ahead of his batteries, so that he may
+have as much time as possible to reconnoitre the position before they
+arrive.
+
+3. The selection of an observing station, which is not likely to be
+readily recognized as such by the enemy, which affords cover to the
+observing officer and his assistants, from which the tactical situation
+can be watched, and which offers facilities for intercommunication with
+the infantry and the batteries should be one of the brigade commander’s
+first cares. This position should be occupied and the enemy observed by
+himself or another officer from the earliest possible moment.
+
+4. In selecting the position for the batteries the first consideration
+is that they should be able to carry out the task allotted to them. If
+this task involves bringing fire to bear over an extensive area, it may
+be advisable to divide the area into zones, and to select positions for
+the batteries, which will ensure each of them observing a different
+zone.
+
+5. The extent to which dispersion, combined with concealment, may be
+possible, must depend partly on the ground available and partly on the
+amount of dead ground that can safely be left near the guns.
+
+The further a position is in rear of a crest the greater become the
+difficulties of command or of a change to a position in which direct
+fire is possible, and the greater must the interval be between units.
+On the other hand greater immunity will be obtained from hostile fire,
+of which oblique or enfilade fire is the most dangerous.
+
+At a distance of 400 yards from the crest it is doubtful if the enemy’s
+searching fire would be effective.
+
+6. A position with rising ground behind and with a wood or rising
+ground in front has the advantage that concealment can be obtained
+without sacrificing spaces for observation, since the battery
+commanders can observe and control the fire from a position in rear.
+In such a position special arrangements for the replenishment of
+ammunition will be necessary, if concealment is to be maintained.
+
+7. The following points, some of which must often be left to battery
+commanders to decide, are also important:--
+
+      i. A good platform for the guns.
+     ii. The position and cover available for wagon lines.
+    iii. If the position is under cover the shell must be able
+           to clear the crest at all ranges at which fire is likely
+           to take place (_See_ See. =121=).
+     iv. The position, if not behind cover, should give a clear
+           view over the sights not only of the target, but also of
+           all ground on to which fire may have to be turned.
+      v. The approaches should facilitate the supply and
+           replenishment of ammunition.
+
+
+=182.= _Leading._
+
+1. Having due regard to the urgency of the tactical situation the
+leader’s aim is to bring the brigade to its position for action
+without being discovered by the enemy and with as little distress as
+possible to the teams. Correct utilization of the ground is, therefore,
+important.
+
+To judge whether troops moving by a certain route will be concealed or
+not from ground which the enemy may be occupying requires experience
+and a good eye for country.
+
+2. The brigade leader should keep well to the front to get early
+information as to the brigade commander’s intentions, and to
+reconnoitre the routes between the various points which the brigade
+is to pass in its advance (_See_ Sec. =181= (2)). The brigade guide
+will follow and conform to the directions he receives from the brigade
+leader.
+
+The number of men required to maintain communication between the
+brigade guide and the brigade leader may sometimes be reduced if the
+latter selects intermediate points, which the brigade is to pass in its
+advance and at which any necessary changes of direction or formation
+can be communicated to the brigade guide.
+
+3. The brigade leader should try to avoid ground, such as a dusty road,
+which would be likely to give indication of movement to a vigilant
+enemy. He will sometimes have to make up his mind whether to make
+a long detour to ensure concealment or to risk detection by moving
+over a sky line. If he selects the latter alternative he must decide,
+according to his knowledge of the situation, in what formation he
+should move.
+
+To take advantage of local conditions, column of sections or even
+column of route may often be retained until close to the position,
+but changes of formation and flank movements within view of the enemy
+should be avoided and line or double échelon is then the most suitable
+formation.
+
+4. The procedure of each battery need not be identical. Each battery
+leader, while employing the formation that appears most suitable, must
+conform as far as possible to the general direction and pace of the
+brigade.
+
+In passing through obstacles where only a few passages exist, no
+battery or section should increase its proper frontage, if by so doing
+it will interfere with troops on its flank.
+
+5. When artillery is obliged to move through other troops, notice
+should be sent to their commander so that an opening may be made.
+
+6. Movements under fire should be carried out as rapidly as is
+consistent with steadiness and a proper regard for the horses and
+equipment. Modern equipments are complicated and delicate and care must
+be taken that guns are not moved over rough ground with unnecessary
+rapidity.
+
+7. Battery commanders should ride at the head of the brigade when in
+column, so as to be ready to join the brigade commander quickly.
+
+
+=183.= _Ground scouts._
+
+1. Ground scouts are mounted men, whose duty it is to precede the
+brigade and ascertain whether the ground is suitable for its movement,
+to point out obstacles, and to look for and indicate the best points
+of passage. Artillery should never manœuvre without them.
+
+In mountain artillery dismounted men are employed as ground scouts and
+the gunners detailed to act as pioneers may often be used for this
+purpose.
+
+2. The number of scouts employed must depend upon the nature of the
+ground and the rapidity with which the movement is to be made. In
+ordinary circumstances one man per battery is sufficient, but when a
+single battery is moving fast over difficult ground, two or more scouts
+may with advantage be sent out; one man can then halt to point out a
+passage while the others explore further on.
+
+3. Ground scouts must be told the original direction of the movement,
+but they must be careful to keep an eye on their batteries so as to
+conform to any change in pace or direction, and must avoid exposing
+themselves to view on high ground or against the sky line.
+
+They must be sufficiently far in advance to give ample warning of
+obstacles, but never out of sight of their batteries. As a rule they
+should not be less than 200 or more than 500 yards to the front.
+
+4. If the ground is boggy or otherwise impassable, a scout will halt
+and raise his right arm perpendicularly; he will then make for whatever
+point appears practicable, indicating the direction in which the
+brigade or battery should move. If the ground within view in front and
+on either side is quite impracticable, a scout will face the brigade,
+raise his right arm, and ride in to report.
+
+5. Ground scouts must be careful not to ride on to the position on or
+behind which the brigade is about to come into action.
+
+
+=184.= _Occupation of a position._
+
+1. The brigade commander, having completed his reconnaissance, will
+send an officer back to meet the brigade. This officer will point out
+the position of the brigade commander to the battery commanders, who
+at once ride on to receive their instructions. He will direct the
+telephone detachment to the brigade observing station and, if ordered
+to do so, the remainder of the headquarters, and will lead the brigade
+in the required direction.
+
+2. The brigade commander should first point out the areas to be
+observed by each battery or the objectives for their fire, and his
+own observing station. He should then give orders as to the positions
+for the batteries and whether they are to occupy “_positions in
+readiness_,” “_positions in observation_,” or to open fire without
+delay.
+
+A “_position in readiness_” implies that a battery is limbered up under
+cover, but that all possible alternative positions in the immediate
+neighbourhood have been reconnoitred and preparations made for their
+occupation.
+
+The actual positions for the guns should be determined, aiming points,
+reference points, and observing stations selected, and arrangements
+made to watch the situation.
+
+A “_position in observation_” implies that a battery is in action,
+concealed as much as possible, that it is ready to open fire, and that
+it is watching all ground within the zone allotted to it.
+
+3. In deciding whether he will occupy positions in observation or
+retain all or any of his batteries in readiness, the brigade commander
+will be guided by the principles laid down in Sec. =147=, bearing in
+mind that to commit his batteries to action prematurely may, upon
+the development of the tactical situation, necessitate a change of
+positions and consequent delay in opening fire.
+
+4. The extent, to which detailed instructions for the occupation of the
+position can be given will vary, but, as a rule, some latitude should
+be allowed battery commanders in the choice of the actual sites for
+their batteries.
+
+If, however, the position is a covered one, confusion and delay will be
+avoided if the brigade commander indicates generally the positions for
+the battery observing stations. This difficulty does not arise in the
+case of howitzers, where observation can take place from immediately in
+front of the battery.
+
+5. The brigade commander’s orders to battery commanders should in every
+case include instructions as to opening fire.
+
+If the batteries are to come into action, the brigade commander decides
+by which of the two following methods he will occupy the position.
+
+6. _Ordinary method._--The adjutant or other officer leads the brigade
+to the position, taking care not to arrive too close to it before the
+battery commanders have completed their reconnaissance and marked the
+line of fire. If necessary, he must check the pace or even halt the
+brigade under cover.
+
+The subsequent procedure is as described in Sec. =193=, unless the
+advance into action is to be simultaneous, in which case the adjutant
+or other officer himself gives the order to advance when he sees that
+all is ready.
+
+To facilitate the leading of the brigade, the brigade commander may,
+if he thinks desirable, mark the line of fire for the centre of the
+brigade by placing the brigade serjeant-major about 200 yards in rear
+of his own position, or by any other method so long as the officer
+leading the brigade understands it.
+
+7. _Special method._--The brigade commander selects the preliminary
+position (_See_ Sec. =193= (7)), and the adjutant or other officer
+guides the brigade to it.
+
+The battery commanders select the exact positions for their batteries
+and then proceed as laid down in Sec. =193= (8).
+
+The batteries come into action independently by their own commander’s
+order.
+
+
+=185.= _Intercommunication service._
+
+Communication between brigade and battery commanders should be
+established immediately on coming into action, and it is the duty of
+the battery commanders to see that it is so established. The adjutant
+is responsible for organizing the communications between the brigade
+observing station and their points. (_See_ Secs. =149=, =246= and
+=247=.)
+
+Instructions regarding field artillery telephone equipment and drill
+for its use are contained in “Training Manual--Signalling.”
+
+
+=186.= _Allotting objectives and ranging._
+
+1. The extent of front which a battery can cover is given in Sec. =214=
+(2). As a general rule it is better to increase the rate of fire rather
+than add to the number of guns engaging any given objective.
+
+2. If the batteries of a brigade are in action close together, and
+the objective is sufficiently broad, it would usually be desirable to
+divide it into suitable widths and allot one to each battery.
+
+The batteries of the brigade may, however, be dispersed in order to
+obtain the advantages of enfilade, oblique or cross-fire as well as for
+the sake of concealment. Or it may be desired to cross the fire of the
+whole or a portion of the guns of the brigade with those of another
+brigade for the same purpose. In such cases special arrangements may be
+necessary to enable each battery to obtain the range. The principle of
+economy of force still applies, and when once the fire of the desired
+number of batteries has been made effective an increased volume of
+fire should be obtained by the increasing rapidity of fire of the
+batteries engaged rather than by the introduction of fresh batteries.
+
+3. When the probable objectives are dispersed, the extent to which
+oblique or cross-fire can be secured, and the facilities for observing
+its effect will be the principal factors in deciding which battery
+shall engage any particular target, and the latitude to be allowed its
+commander in the selection of other objectives.
+
+4. It will be of great assistance in allotting objectives it
+conspicuous features and prominent points are given names, and all
+concerned made acquainted with them.
+
+5. One method of pointing out objectives is to describe them with
+reference to some prominent point, making use of the figuring of the
+face of a clock. This point is termed the “_reference point_” and must
+not be confused with the “_aiming point_.” (_See_ Sec. =120=.)
+
+The reference point being considered to be the centre of the face of
+the clock, the direction of any object with reference to it can be
+indicated by the figuring of the face thus:--
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 28.]
+
+    Reference point--Chimney of cottage on Green Hill.
+    Nature of objective--Artillery in action behind hedge,
+        flashes visible.
+    Left extremity of objective--2.30 o’clock, 3 degrees.
+    Extent of objective--4 degrees 30 mins.
+
+In Fig. 28, A is the left of the objective, AB its extent, C is the
+chimney of the cottage on Green Hill.
+
+Having pointed out the objective and its extent as above, it can be
+allotted to batteries by naming a number of degrees and minutes for
+each to engage. Thus:--
+
+    Reference point. Chimney of cottage on Green Hill.
+    Left battery.    From 3° to 4° 30′.
+    Centre battery.  From 4° 30′ to 6°.
+    Right battery.   From 6° to 7° 30′.
+
+Changes of objective can be indicated in the same manner.
+
+6. Another method of indicating targets is by means of panorama
+sketches. (_See_ Sec. =244= (2).)
+
+Each battery having prepared sketches of the enemy’s position forwards
+two copies to the brigade commander, who letters all prominent points
+on the sketches in such a way that the same letter refers to the same
+point on each sketch. The duplicates are returned to the batteries, and
+the brigade commander can then refer to any target or locality with
+reference to the letters on the sketches.
+
+Thus:--“Target H” or “crest of hill, 3 o’clock, from Wood B”. The
+brigade commander having a copy of the sketch from the position of
+each battery, can at once tell which battery is best able to engage
+any target, also whether all batteries can concentrate fire on any
+particular spot or not.
+
+
+=187.= _Observation and control._
+
+1. Responsibility for watching the tactical situation and
+redistributing the fire of his batteries in accordance with the
+progress of the fight rests with the brigade commander.
+
+To maintain touch with the situation a position near the commander of
+the infantry brigade or other body with whom the artillery is acting
+has many advantages. (_See_ Sec. =149=.)
+
+2. If the brigade commander is unable to accompany the infantry
+commander himself, it will usually be advisable to detail an officer
+with the necessary means of communication to do so. The duty of this
+officer will be to keep the brigade commander informed as to the
+position of the infantry and as to the localities from which the
+hostile fire is most damaging. (_See_ Sec. =149= (4) (5).)
+
+3. If the batteries of the brigade are dispersed the brigade commander
+can usually only indicate fresh targets by means of telephone,
+signalling or messenger. Such instructions may be amplified by the use
+of panoramic sketches. (_See_ Sec. =186= (5) (6).)
+
+
+=188.= _Change of position._
+
+1. During the fight, the brigade commander should endeavour to have
+fresh positions and the best lines of advance to them reconnoitred. In
+the event of an advance to a new position being ordered, the procedure
+is as far as possible the same as described in Sec. =181=.
+
+2. Before going forward himself, the brigade commander will send word
+of his intention to the battery commanders, indicate the general
+direction of the advance, and give orders when it is to commence,
+and if all the batteries are to move together or not. The subsequent
+procedure is similar to that described in Sec. =184=.
+
+3. In the case of a retirement, the adjutant precedes the brigade
+and selects the new positions. He is accompanied by one or more
+range-takers from the batteries if they can be spared and by sufficient
+men of the brigade headquarters to guide the brigade commander to the
+position. He will communicate the dispositions to the battery captains.
+
+
+=189.= _Night firing._
+
+(_See also_ Secs. =164= and =199= (3).)
+
+1. In favourable circumstances a fairly effective fire can be achieved,
+both in attack and defence, at close and effective ranges.
+
+2. The use of searchlights is confined to defensive action, and is
+referred to in F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 140. In addition to their use
+as fixed beams, as therein stated, they may be used to search for
+targets.
+
+Up to 3,400 yards under favourable conditions of atmosphere and
+background a well-defined target can be picked up, but not an
+ill-defined one. Movement, however, can be detected and ranging can be
+carried out at this distance.
+
+3. Before moving guns into positions by night the following
+arrangements should be made:--
+
+i. The roads or tracks leading to the gun positions should be
+thoroughly reconnoitred by those who will lead the guns.
+
+ii. The route should be marked where required by patches of white,
+bundles of straw, or anything else that will be visible.
+
+iii. The actual gun positions should be carefully marked and the
+bearing of the line of fire taken. In doing this every precaution must
+be taken not to give any hint to the enemy of the intended occupation.
+
+iv. The officers concerned should be furnished with orders in writing
+notifying the time of moving off from rendezvous, order of march, route
+they are to follow, and time of opening fire.
+
+4. Care must be taken to prevent limbers or teams of a battery which
+has occupied its position clashing with batteries or other troops which
+are still advancing.
+
+5. All ranks must understand that no lights or smoking are allowed, and
+that the occupation of the position as well as the entrenching must be
+carried out as silently as possible.
+
+Steps should be taken to deaden the noise of wheels and jingling of
+harness as far as possible.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+BATTERY TACTICS.
+
+
+=190.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The battery is the fire unit, except in heavy artillery, in which,
+each section being self-contained, the battery or the section is the
+fire unit according to circumstances. To enable effective fire to be
+brought to bear in the shortest possible time on such objectives as
+the tactical situation may require, correct observation and promptness
+of decision on the part of the battery commander are as essential as a
+high standard of fire discipline throughout the battery.
+
+2. By fire discipline is meant not only careful attention to all the
+details of drill when in action, but also ready response to the signals
+and orders of all superiors. It demands, in addition, endurance of the
+enemy’s fire, even when no reply is possible.
+
+3. The battery commander should be allowed latitude as regards the
+choice of objectives within the task allotted to him, which may be wide
+or circumscribed. (_See_ Sec. =184= (2).) If the battery commander
+assumes the responsibility of departing from his allotted task he must
+be prepared to justify his action, which should be reported at once to
+the brigade commander.
+
+4. The principles which guide a commander in applying the fire of his
+battery in different circumstances should be known to all officers and
+non-commissioned officers.
+
+5. When a battery is acting independently, its commander is responsible
+not only for its fire action, but for those other duties which are
+described under the head of brigade tactics, In this case it may be
+desirable for the commander to devote his whole attention to watching
+the tactical situation, and to leave the conduct or fire to the next
+senior officer; this may sometimes be advisable even when the battery
+is in brigade,
+
+6. For manœuvre the battery is divided into:--
+
+    The firing battery.
+    The first line wagons.
+
+The “_firing battery_” consists of 6 guns and 6 ammunition wagons,
+except in the case of 4-gun batteries, when it consists of 4 guns and 4
+wagons. The wagon of the firing battery always accompanies its gun.
+
+The “_first line wagons_” consist of the remainder of the ammunition
+wagons authorized to accompany a battery. In Q.F. batteries these are 6
+in number.
+
+The 1st line mules of a mountain battery correspond to the 1st line
+wagons of a field battery for the purpose of manœuvre. References to
+the procedure of the 1st line wagons in the succeeding paragraphs apply
+therefore to the 1st line mules of mountain batteries. (_See also_ Sec.
+=125= (8).)
+
+
+=191.= _Preparation for action._
+
+1. The object of preparation for action is to minimise as far as
+possible the pause between coming into action and opening fire. The
+exact time and place for this cannot be laid down. If the enemy is
+likely to be met it is advisable to prepare for action before the march
+commences; if this has not been done a short halt will be necessary for
+the purpose.
+
+2. When preparing for action the firing battery will be separated from
+the first line wagons which will be formed up by the captain as may be
+most convenient. If preparation for action takes place while in column
+of route on a road, the 1st line wagons will follow in rear of the
+battery when it moves oil, but if the road is narrow it may be better
+to delay the separation of the firing battery from the 1st line wagons,
+in order to avoid blocking the road.
+
+
+=192.= _Reconnaissance of a position._
+
+1. The battery commander, as soon as he receives his orders, rides
+forward to the brigade commander accompanied by not more than two
+of his headquarters. The latter should remain under cover while the
+battery commander is receiving his instructions, when they proceed with
+him to reconnoitre the position for the battery.
+
+It may also be advisable for the battery commander to take a section
+commander with him. This officer should be accompanied by a signaller
+and horseholder with director, and he can then be utilized to select
+the actual position for the guns, to convey any information required to
+the battery leader, and to mark the line of fire, should the battery
+commander remain at his observing station.
+
+2. The remainder of the battery headquarters, including the observation
+wagon will follow at the head of the battery until they are required
+by the battery commander, who will then send for such portions of the
+headquarters as he requires before the arrival of the battery. They
+should then be brought up under suitable command, care being taken to
+make use of any available cover, so as not to attract the attention
+of the enemy. For the same reason they should not follow the battery
+commander on to the actual position, nor should ranges be taken from it.
+
+3. The first object of this reconnaissance, if a position under cover
+is to be occupied, should be the selection and occupation of the
+observing station (_see_ Sec. =199=), the concealment of which from the
+enemy is of great importance. The battery commander must then decide on
+the approximate position for the guns, ascertain that the trajectory
+will clear the crest, settle how the position is to be occupied and
+mark the line of fire, unless he delegates this duty to the section
+commander, who may have accompanied him. He must also decide whether
+he will use his observation wagon or not, and must give orders as to
+the placing of the wagon, with a view to its concealment, as far as
+possible, from all portions of the enemy’s position.
+
+4. In estimating the amount of cover that will be necessary, regard
+must be paid to the general tactical situation. Defilade from the
+immediate objective is not sufficient. All ground in occupation of the
+enemy from which fire may be observed and controlled should receive
+consideration.
+
+5. The orders issued to the battery commander will, as a rule, include
+instructions as to the position to be occupied.
+
+A battery position may be either an “_open position_,” a “_semi-covered
+position_” or a “_covered position_.”
+
+6. An “_open position_” is one in which the objective can be seen over
+the sights and in which direct laying is possible. In such positions
+the guns may or may not be exposed to the enemy’s view before fire is
+opened. If they can be concealed up to the moment of opening fire the
+value of surprise effect may be gained coupled with good facilities for
+control of fire, for distribution, and for dealing with movement. When
+once located accurately by the enemy the guns are fully exposed to the
+effects of hostile fire, and in conditions favourable to the enemy are
+liable to destruction by direct hits and by oblique fire.
+
+7. A “_semi-covered position_” is one in which it is necessary to
+employ indirect laying but in which the degree of cover obtained is
+insufficient to conceal the flashes of the guns or the dust raised by
+them after fire has been opened. Such positions, as a rule, enable
+direct control by voice to be used. As compared with covered positions
+they facilitate the engaging of fresh objectives, and if required the
+guns can be run up to the crest. Heavy manual labour is sometimes
+necessitated in their occupation. Searching fire may be effective
+against such positions.
+
+8. A “_covered position_”[15] is one in which the guns and their
+flashes are completely concealed from the enemy and in which it is
+necessary to use indirect laying. Such positions confer immunity
+from fire, but they increase the difficulty of control, frequently
+necessitating artificial means of communication such as telephones,
+signalling and the use of plotters. For this reason they increase the
+difficulties of engaging fresh objectives and of dealing with movement.
+
+[15] NOTE.--In normal circumstances the amount of cover necessary to
+hide the flashes is about 13 feet for field guns, and 20 feet for
+howitzers and heavy guns.
+
+
+=193.= _Methods of occupying a position._
+
+1. There are two methods of occupying a position:--
+
+     i. The ordinary.
+    ii. The special.
+
+=The words ordinary and special apply to the method by which the
+battery is brought to the firing position and have no reference to
+cover, concealment, or the method of fire.=
+
+
+_The ordinary method._
+
+2. The battery commander having completed his reconnaissance and
+selected the exact position for the battery, places himself where its
+centre will halt for action, the battery serjeant-major marking the
+prolongation of the line of fire at least 50 yards in his rear. The
+battery commander will use his discretion as to whether he and his
+serjeant-major, or he alone, should dismount while marking the line
+of fire, but he must ensure that they are both visible to the officer
+leading the battery.
+
+3. This will be the procedure in an open position when the battery
+commander intends to command from the centre of the battery, but if
+he decides to command from a flank the line of fire may be marked by
+the battery serjeant-major and another man, or by any other means so
+long as the battery leader understands them. In many cases instead of
+marking the line of fire it may be preferable to mark where the flanks
+of the battery will rest.
+
+The battery is then led up, halted and brought into action by the
+battery leader.
+
+4. When the battery commander is at an observing station some distance
+from the battery the exact position for the guns may be chosen by
+the battery leader, or by the section commander, who accompanies the
+battery commander in his reconnaissance, see Sec. =192= (1). The
+battery leader or the section commander with the battery commander
+assisted by a signaller marks the line of fire for the battery, or the
+position where its flanks will rest. The battery leader brings the
+battery into action. The officer who chooses the position for the guns
+is responsible that the battery commander’s observation station shall
+not be within the danger angle of the guns when in action. To ensure
+that the observing station shall not be within the danger angle (Sec.
+=197= (3)) the battery commander should after laying his director on
+the target or on the centre of the zone allotted to him, swing it round
+through an angle of 120° towards the position for the battery. The
+battery must not be behind this line, which allows for a subsequent
+switch of about 15°.
+
+5. _On rough ground_ the Nos. 1 should be sufficiently ahead to enable
+them to select the best platforms for their guns. They must be careful
+to halt their guns on the selected spots, for which purpose it may be
+advisable for them to dismount. They should not, however, be so far
+ahead that they prematurely disclose the position.
+
+6. A covered position should be occupied by the ordinary method if the
+cover is sufficient to completely conceal the guns and teams while
+coming into action.
+
+If the nature of the ground compels the battery to adopt a column
+formation till the position itself is nearly reached, and it is
+important to open fire without delay, guns may be brought into action
+by sections, or even singly.
+
+
+_The special method._
+
+7. This method should only be employed when it is impracticable to
+occupy the position by the ordinary method.
+
+The battery commander, having chosen his position of observation,
+selects or indicates a position for the battery in action and a
+preliminary position under cover and close in rear, and sends his
+serjeant-major, or section commander if he has one with him, to guide
+the battery to it.
+
+8. The battery commander then gives the order “SECTION COMMANDERS
+(mounted or dismounted, as the case may be), ONE AIMING POST.” The
+section commanders, with an aiming post for each of their guns, fall
+out to the battery commander, who points out to them the target,
+general alignment of the battery and position of one gun. They then
+mark with an aiming post the exact spot for each of their guns
+according to the accidents of the ground, care being taken to avoid
+danger angles. (_See_ Sec. =197= (3).)
+
+If the soil renders the planting of aiming posts difficult, the layers
+may be fallen out to mark the positions the guns will occupy.
+
+As soon as these arrangements are completed each section commander
+brings his section into action by the simplest method.
+
+9. When using the special method in a semi-covered position, in order
+to avoid exposing the battery, the guns and wagons should be driven as
+near the position as possible, and run up the remainder of the distance
+by hand. It may sometimes be advisable to bring up the carriages with
+wheel horses only, leaving all other horses under cover.
+
+10. In the case of guns not fitted with the No. 7 dial sight care must
+be taken when occupying a semi-covered position to select an aiming
+point which can be laid on from round to round, as the planting of
+aiming posts might disclose the position to the enemy. If it is found
+necessary to plant aiming posts, care should be taken that the men
+planting them are not exposed.
+
+11. When using the special method in a covered position it should
+be possible to drive the guns to the position they will occupy by
+following the line formed by the aiming posts, and coming into action
+right or left. After the guns are in position, the wagons should be
+driven as near as possible to the position they ought to occupy.
+Drivers should not be dismounted to lead their horses if there is any
+danger of coming under fire.
+
+12. This method has many advantages for heavy artillery, where
+platforms are all important, and the guns difficult to man handle.
+
+
+=194.= _Orders._
+
+1. The battery commander should give section commanders as much
+information as possible before bringing the guns into action, in order
+to eliminate as far as possible the pause that takes place after the
+guns are unlimbered and before fire is opened.
+
+2. He must clearly point out or indicate the target and extent to be
+engaged by each section when visible, and the aiming point or reference
+point (if one is used).
+
+His orders must also include:--
+
+    The angle of sight, or the sight to be used.
+    The method of ranging.
+    The nature of projectile, if necessary.
+    The corrector settings, if necessary.
+    The first elevation or elevations.
+    The interval, if required.
+    If under cover, the order to fire.
+
+These orders should always be given out in the above sequence.
+
+3. The following abbreviated words of command will be used:--
+
+    Collective      for      Collective ranging.
+    Right ranging    ”       Right section ranging.
+    No. 1 ranging    ”       No. 1 gun ranging.
+    Fire             ”       Commence firing.
+    Stop             ”       Stop firing.
+    Corrector        ”       Time shrapnel corrector.
+    Échelon          ”       Échelon corrector.
+
+4. To avoid mistakes and for the sake of uniformity the elevation will
+be ordered as shown in the following examples:--
+
+    1,000 yards      “One thousand.”
+    1,800   ”        “Eighteen hundred.”
+    1,950   ”        “Nineteen fifty.”
+    2,000   ”        “Two thousand.”
+    2,100   ”        “Two one hundred.”
+    2,350   ”        “Two three fifty.”
+
+If two ranges are ordered at the same time the order would be as
+follows:--
+
+    1,800-1,500 yards      “Eighteen hundred, fifteen hundred.”
+    2,400-2,100   ”        “Two four, two one,”
+    5,000-4,700   ”        “Five thousand, four seven.”
+
+5. Corrector settings will be ordered as shown in the following
+examples:--
+
+    136   “One three six.”
+    150   “One five o.”
+
+6. Angles from an aiming point will be ordered as shown in the
+following examples:--
+
+    80 degrees    “Eight o degrees.”
+    58   ”        “Five eight degrees.”
+
+
+=195.= _Advance for action._
+
+1. The senior section commander with the battery leads it, and the
+captain directs the movements of the first line wagons, which will
+be led by a non-commissioned officer detailed by him, communication
+between the two being kept up by means of the mounted non-commissioned
+officers of the wagon line.
+
+2. The directions for the maintenance of communication between the
+brigade commander and his brigade, for the leading of a brigade and for
+the employment of ground scouts (_see_ Secs. =181=, =182= and =183=)
+are applicable to a battery acting by itself. The officer leading
+the battery must avoid pressing on the battery commander during his
+reconnaissance, and should not lead the battery on to the position
+until he sees that the line of fire has been marked, if it is to come
+into action by the ordinary method. If the special method is to be
+employed he will receive instructions as to the preliminary position to
+be occupied. (_See_ Sec. =193= (7).)
+
+3. Section commanders and Nos. 1 when advancing in line will ride
+ahead of their guns to select the best ground and to give warning of
+obstacles.
+
+It is the duty of section commanders to dismount their detachments if
+necessary.
+
+4. The first line wagons conform to the movements of the firing
+battery. The distance to be maintained between the firing battery and
+the first line wagons cannot be laid down, but should not, as a rule,
+exceed half a mile. The captain must go forward and obtain information,
+as soon as possible, as to the intended position of the battery, in
+order to select a position for the wagon line, which offers facilities
+for the supply of ammunition, and where the men and horses will be
+under cover.
+
+To avoid searching fire directed at the firing battery, the position of
+the wagon line should be to a flank, or if directly in rear of the guns
+not less than 400 yards distant.
+
+If it is impossible to obtain cover for the whole wagon line in one
+place, the captain must use his discretion as to how best he can
+sub-divide it.
+
+In selecting the position for the wagon line the captain must be
+careful not to block lateral communication, or the lines of advance of
+troops in rear, nor must he endeavour to forestall another battery in a
+position which more naturally belongs to the latter. Easy access to his
+own battery is essential.
+
+5. As soon as the battery is in action he will select alternative
+positions of assembly for possible use when changing position (_See_
+Sec. =228= (1) iii and Sec. =229= (1) ii).
+
+
+=196.= _To come into action._
+
+(_See also_ Secs. =65=, =66=, and =233=.)
+
+1. _Horse artillery._--On approaching the position the wagons do
+not drop back unless ordered to do so, but on the command “ACTION
+FRONT” are at once driven up alongside their guns, halting with their
+axletrees one yard in rear of the axletrees of the gun and 6 inches to
+a flank. They are then unlimbered (unless otherwise ordered) by No.
+6, who lowers the perch to the ground at the same time giving “LIMBER
+DRIVE ON.” The limbers reverse to their left and go to the place
+selected for the 1st line wagons, forming up in front of their own gun
+limbers.
+
+2. One of the wagon limbers of the firing battery may be utilized to
+give protection to the battery headquarters and will be placed where
+ordered by the battery commander. Instructions to this effect must be
+sent to the battery before it arrives on the position.
+
+As soon as the limbers and teams are clear, they will proceed to the
+wagon line under the direction of the captain, who, however, will not
+wait to collect them, but will indicate the direction they should take
+and allow all horses to get clear as soon as possible.
+
+3. All led horses except those accompanying the teams go at once to the
+wagon line independently.
+
+4. Detachments should remain as far as possible under cover of the
+shields and unnecessary movement in the battery must be avoided, as
+such movement may enable the enemy to locate the position of the guns.
+If, however, the guns are in action on a forward slope it will usually
+be necessary to dig in the trails.
+
+5. _Field artillery._--On approaching the position the wagons will drop
+back about 10 yards in rear of the guns. As soon as the trail of each
+gun is on the ground, its wagon will drive up on its left and halt with
+the axletree of the wagon body one yard in rear of the axletree of the
+gun and not more than 6 inches to a flank, in order to obtain the full
+benefit of the shields. Wagons may, however, be placed on the right of
+guns by order of the section commander, when he considers it advisable.
+In either case the wagon teams will be immediately unhooked.
+
+When the battery is coming into action under cover and the line of fire
+has to be obtained, the wagons should not drive up to their guns until
+the latter are in the correct line.
+
+The procedure of the wagon limber for the protection of the battery
+commander, and of teams, led horses and detachments will be similar to
+that laid down above for horse artillery.
+
+In special cases, the wagons of the firing battery may be unlimbered.
+
+The approximate positions[16] of individuals and led horses not
+mentioned in the handbook of the gun are as shown in Fig. 29.
+
+The position of the wagon line in the figure has no reference to the
+position of the battery.
+
+The 2nd trumpeter, farrier, and shoeing-smith will be used as desirable
+to maintain communication between the firing battery and 1st line
+wagons.
+
+6. _Howitzer and heavy batteries._--The procedure is as described above
+for field gun batteries, except that 2 yards must be left between guns
+and wagons in the case of 5“ B.L. howitzers and 1 yard in the case of
+heavy batteries, for the free working of the guns in action, and in
+howitzer and heavy batteries the centre of the perch should be in line
+with the gun axletree.[17]
+
+7. _Mountain batteries._--On the command “ACTION FRONT,” the guns
+are unlimbered and brought into action just in front of the wheel
+and axle[18] mule of each subsection. The mules move off to the rear
+independently as each is unloaded, and proceed to join the 1st line
+mules under the direction of the captain. The ammunition boxes of the
+firing battery are placed on the ground immediately to the left of the
+gun, unless cover is available close by.
+
+[16] Ground scouts’ horses will also be with the wagon line.
+
+[17] In batteries armed with 4·7-inch Q.F. guns the wagons will be
+placed 2 yards to the left flank and 10 yards in rear of the trail eye,
+poles to the rear.
+
+[18] Axle mule in the case of the 10-pr. B.L. gun.
+
+Sometimes a suitable position for the firing battery mules can be
+obtained under cover in close proximity to the battery, where it is
+inconvenient to bring, or there is not sufficient space to accommodate,
+all the 1st line mules as well. In such cases the captain will select
+another position for the 1st line mules further to the rear, and only
+order up such extra ammunition mules to join the firing battery mules
+as are necessary to ensure facility of ammunition supply.
+
+[Illustration: _Field battery in action._
+
+FIG. 29.
+
+Look-out men and signallers posted as convenient.
+
+Range-takers under cover if not employed.]
+
+
+[Illustration: _Explanation of the symbols used in FIG. 29._]
+
+
+=197.= _Duties of officers, &c., in action._
+
+1. _Battery commander._--The battery commander controls and directs the
+fire of the battery.
+
+2. _Captain._--The captain commands the 1st line wagons and in
+action controls the vehicles and horses of the firing battery. He is
+responsible for the supply of ammunition to the firing battery and for
+seeing that the wagon line is kept filled with ammunition. It is his
+duty to arrange for the replacement of casualties in men, horses, and
+_matériel_ (_see_ Sec. =230= _et seq._), and to select positions of
+assembly (_see_ Sec. =195= (5)). To carry out these duties in action
+the captain must be as much as possible in personal communication
+with the firing battery; when he is not with the line of guns he will
+leave one of his assistants with the firing battery to carry orders
+to him. The commander of a wagon line situated on an exposed flank is
+responsible for taking measures for protecting the wagon line (_see_
+Sec. =148= (5)).
+
+3. _Section commanders._--Section commanders will place themselves
+where they can best see and hear the battery commander and will only
+move about their sections when necessary for the supervision of their
+command. In ordinary circumstances each should be in rear of the wagon
+of his section which is the nearer to the battery commander.
+
+They will acknowledge the battery commander’s orders by saluting. When
+the orders cannot be heard throughout the battery they are to be passed
+from one section commander to the next, not repeated simultaneously.
+Each section commander is responsible that the next section commander
+receives the order. If in giving an order the battery commander makes
+an obvious verbal slip, it is the duty of the section commander nearest
+to him to draw his attention to it.
+
+They are responsible that their guns are laid in the direction
+ordered. When the target is visible from the battery, they will give
+alterations in deflection to their guns when ordered to do so by the
+battery commander.
+
+They are responsible that their guns are not fired when within the
+danger angle, _i.e._, the line of fire of any gun must not make a less
+angle than 45 degrees with a line joining its muzzle and the muzzle of
+any other gun.
+
+In firing from behind cover they must ascertain that the trajectory
+will clear the crest (_see_ Sec. =121=), running their guns up or back
+as necessary without waiting for orders if slight alterations only are
+required, but informing the battery commander if a considerable change
+of position is necessary.
+
+Before reporting a gun out of action or a casualty to any part of the
+equipment of their section, section commanders must first ascertain
+personally whether it is possible to repair the damage with the means
+at their immediate disposal in the firing line; if not, application
+should be made to the captain. No casualty should be reported to the
+battery commander during ranging, unless it is of a permanent nature or
+likely to interfere with the process of ranging.
+
+4. _Observing officer, heavy artillery._--He is responsible for the
+efficiency of the observing parties in all respects.
+
+5. _Battery serjeant-major._--The battery serjeant-major supervises the
+placing of the battery commander’s limber or observation wagon, and the
+work of the battery headquarters.
+
+During ranging he reports the number of each gun as it is fired, if the
+battery commander wishes him to do so; reports prematures, and calls
+the attention of the battery commander to verbal slips or omissions.
+(_See_ =210= (3).)
+
+He will be frequently used to pass the battery commander’s orders, but
+if desired some other man from the battery headquarters may be employed
+for this purpose instead of him. The megaphone should be used when
+necessary.
+
+If the battery commander becomes a casualty the battery serjeant-major
+must be in a position to give all information as to the situation,
+target, and point on which lines of fire were laid out, &c., to the new
+battery commander, and to carry on until he arrives.
+
+6. _Nos. 1._--Nos. 1 are responsible for the correct service of their
+guns. They will see that the correct angle of sight has been put on,
+and will order the necessary allowance in deflection for difference in
+level of wheels. They will acknowledge all orders relating to their
+guns by saluting, and when difficulty is experienced in passing orders
+they should assist.
+
+If a section commander is temporarily absent from his section or
+occupied with damaged equipment, the senior No. 1 not engaged with him
+must act for him.
+
+
+=198.= _Laying out the line of fire._
+
+(a) _In a covered position._
+
+1. If the target can be seen from the vicinity of the position selected
+for the battery to come into action, or its direction obtained from
+the flashes of the enemy’s guns, from a map, or from patrols, &c., the
+battery commander, or the section commander who has accompanied him in
+his reconnaissance, marks the line by planting two aiming posts.
+
+2. The battery having been brought into action on the selected
+position, lines of fire in the direction of the target can be obtained
+by one of the following methods:--
+
+i. The battery leader, or section commander who accompanied the battery
+commander in his reconnaissance, sets up his director in line with the
+two aiming posts and as close to the battery or its intended position
+as possible, and selects an aiming point. He then measures the angle
+between the direction of the target and the line from the director to
+the aiming point and gives it out as an order to the battery. (_See_
+Sec. =123= (3).) He will leave the director laid and clamped on the
+aiming point for the information of the battery. The dial sight of
+each gun is set at the angle ordered and laid on the aiming point.
+
+ii. The director is clamped at zero and laid in the line of the aiming
+posts with the foresight towards the target. The battery commander or
+battery leader then faces the battery and laying back over the director
+(namely, foresight--backsight) aligns it on the dial sight of each gun
+in turn. The angles are noted down and communicated to the battery, or
+by word of mouth to each individual gun. Thus:--
+
+                   (Director     (Director in front
+                behind battery.)    of battery.)
+
+        “LINES OF FIRE”
+
+    “No. 1        152 Right” }        { 28 Right
+    “No. 2        164 Right” }        { 16  ”
+    “No. 3        176 Right” }   or   {  4  ”
+    “No. 4        172 Left”  }        {  8 Left
+    “No. 5        160 Left”  }        { 20  ”
+    “No. 6        148 Left”  }        { 32  ”
+
+The dial sight of each gun is set at the angle ordered, and laid on the
+director.
+
+When using this method the director must be at least 80 yards in front
+or rear of the line of guns.
+
+iii. If the line of fire cannot be marked by planting two aiming posts
+(_See_ para. 1) the procedure will be as follows, or as in method
+iv. below. From his observing station the battery commander, using
+his director as in ii., sends down the angle to one gun or to the
+battery director. In the latter case the battery leader or officer
+who is working the director obtains the line of fire by setting it to
+the angle ordered. He then measures the angle to an aiming point as
+described in i. and gives it out to the battery. When the angle is sent
+to one gun the section commander to whom the gun belongs directs his
+gun on to the line of fire and the subsequent procedure is as in para.
+4 below. In both cases the battery commander will make the necessary
+correction for displacement before sending down the angle. (_See_ Sec.
+=123= (3).)
+
+iv. From his observing station the battery commander, having fixed the
+compass on the No. 3 director, measures the angle which the direction
+of the target makes with magnetic North, and after making the necessary
+correction for displacement sends this angle down to the battery as ...
+degrees Right or Left of magnetic North.
+
+The officer working the battery director, having fixed his compass to
+the director, sets the director at the angle ordered with reference to
+magnetic North and the subsequent procedure is as in i or ii.[19]
+
+[19] At present this procedure is only possible with batteries provided
+with two No. 3 directors.
+
+3. In each method the aiming point is laid on, either through the No.
+7 dial sight or over the No. 1 dial sight, or else auxiliary aiming
+points are picked up and laid on, from round to round. Should aiming
+posts be used, they are planted in line with the No. 7 dial sight, or
+the rocking bar, or gun sights set at zero.
+
+4. To obtain parallel lines of fire to that of a gun whose line is
+correct, the battery commander gives the order “PARALLEL LINES TO NO
+________” The dial sight of the named gun is used as a director, and
+lines obtained as in method i.
+
+5. In the case of guns which are not provided with dial or panoramic
+sights, but with gun arcs, or the shields graduated as gun arcs, slight
+modifications of the three methods mentioned above are necessary.
+
+i. The best aiming points will be such as are within the capacity of
+the arc, right or left of the line of fire, either to the front or to
+the rear. Any angle can, however, be employed either by repeating the
+process of switching, or by using the whole extent of the gun arc, or
+by using the prolongation of the gun arc in order to obtain an angle
+of 90°,
+
+ii. When the director is behind the battery the gun layer must lay back
+on the director. As the large angles cannot be read on the gun arc the
+officer laying out the lines of fire will, after clamping the director
+at zero on the target, align it backsight--foresight on the centre of
+each breech and give out the angles.
+
+6. If the direction of the target cannot be obtained from a position
+near that selected for the battery and the distance of the observing
+station is too great to render any of the above methods available, the
+battery commander as soon as he has completed his reconnaissance and
+pointed out the approximate position of the battery to the battery
+leader, returns to his observing station; where he has previously
+left his range-takers, signallers, and such other portions of his
+headquarters as he requires.
+
+Communication is at once opened up, the signallers taking care to keep
+under cover. The telephone if available is laid between the battery and
+the observing station. The range-takers take the range to the target,
+and to the battery (if the “sub-base,” para. 7, is not used), and
+afterwards to other objects in the field of fire.
+
+The battery commander sets up his director under cover and measures the
+angle between the battery and the target.
+
+When necessary, a flag is placed on the battery director, but the
+observing station director should be rendered conspicuous in some other
+manner.
+
+He then works out by means of the plotter the battery angle (T B O in
+Fig. 30) and the range from the battery to the target, and communicates
+them to the battery leader, =taking care that the battery angle is sent
+down right or left according as the target is right or left of the line
+joining the battery and the observing station= (B O in Fig. 30). He
+then calculates the angle of sight and communicates it to the battery
+leader.
+
+If the dial sight is used, it is set at the battery angle, and when
+laid on the observing station director the gun is in the line of fire.
+If the director is used, it is set at the battery angle and laid on the
+observing station director; the direction of the target is shown, when
+the arrow head is brought to zero.
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 30.
+
+    _T = Target._
+    _B = Battery._
+    _O = Observing Sta._
+    _F = Flag._
+
+]
+
+The direction of the target having been obtained at the battery, lines
+of fire for the guns can be given by one of the methods described above.
+
+7. The distance from the observing station to the battery can be
+rapidly measured by the use of a sub-base at the battery. An aiming
+post or signalling flag, F (_see_ Fig. 30) having been placed at a
+convenient distance, 20 to 50 yards, from the battery director and at
+right angles to the line B O, the angle that this base subtends at O
+is measured with the director and the range deduced from the formula:--
+
+     6       Sub-base in yards
+    ---- × --------------------- =  Base in hundreds of yards.
+     10    Apex angle in degrees
+
+8. Should preparations for opening fire be required and no target be
+visible, a suitable reference point in the enemy’s position is selected
+and lines of fire laid out to this point.
+
+The switch angles, ranges, and angles of sight to all points on which
+fire may have to be directed are then ascertained, and all other
+preparations made which will conduce to fire being opened as quickly as
+possible when required.
+
+The fire is controlled and the ranging carried out in the ordinary
+manner by the battery commander.
+
+If the observing station is so far from the battery or the intervening
+ground so broken that in case of emergency it would be difficult for
+the commander of the battery to reach the guns in time, it may be
+necessary for him to remain with the guns and to detail another officer
+to control the fire. (_See_ Sec. =199=(2).)
+
+(b) _In an open or a semi-covered position._
+
+9. In an open or semi-covered position where the target can be seen by
+the section commanders standing up, the target and its extent may be
+indicated:--
+
+i. By the director placed in the centre of where the battery will be
+when in action, pointing on the centre of the target or zone, with a
+N.C.O. in charge to inform the section commanders on their arrival as
+to its direction and extent, or--
+
+ii. By the director placed as before, but pointing on the reference
+point, the target and its extent with reference thereto being described
+to the section commanders by the N.C.O. left in charge.
+
+In both i. and ii. the section commanders will throw their guns on to
+the line themselves but the battery commander will frequently put the
+first gun on to the line himself.
+
+When indirect laying is used in such a position, the layer, after his
+gun has been thrown on to the line by the section commander, will
+immediately pick up an auxiliary aiming point to lay on from round to
+round. With guns not provided with No. 7 dial sights, an auxiliary
+aiming point must be picked up which is in the field of the rocking bar
+sight or which can be laid on over the dial sight.
+
+In a semi-covered position when the section commander cannot see the
+target, the procedure will be as in a covered position.
+
+10. Guns not provided with No. 7 dial sights will be laid if possible
+on auxiliary aiming points; otherwise they will be laid from round to
+round over the No. 1 dial sight on the original aiming point. Aiming
+posts should seldom be necessary.
+
+
+=199.= _Observation of fire._
+
+1. To derive full benefit from the accuracy and rapid fire of modern
+equipment and to ensure effective support to the other arms, correct
+observation with reference to the objective is most important.
+
+2. To enable a battery to engage an objective, a position must be
+selected from which to observe and control the fire of the battery.
+This is called the “_observing station_.”
+
+The position of this station should be as close to the battery as
+possible, provided a good view of the field of fire is obtainable.
+With this object use should be made of any means such as a tree,
+house, haystack, limber, ladder, &c. When the observing station is
+near the battery it should, if possible, be behind the line of section
+commanders to facilitate the passage of orders, due regard being paid
+to the direction of the wind.
+
+The officer who observes and controls the fire from the observing
+station is the battery commander for the time being. Any other officer
+sent out to assist in the observation of fire is called an “_observing
+officer_.”
+
+Observation should be made with glasses having as large a field of
+view as is compatible with good power of magnification, and graticules
+will be found of the greatest assistance. The telescope, on account of
+the smallness of its field, is unsuited for the observation of fire
+when ranging, but is very useful for watching the effect of fire when
+ranging has been completed.
+
+3. _Combined observation._--In the case of targets which are distant,
+very difficult, or behind an intervening crest, and in night firing,
+the battery commander will generally find it useful to combine his own
+observations with those of a flank or advanced observing party. In the
+case of a flank party the method of its employment is illustrated in
+the figure which follows:--
+
+[Illustration: Fig. 31.
+
+    T. is the target.
+    B. C. is the battery commander.
+    O. P. is the observing party.
+
+       B.C.’s              O.P.’s           B.C.’s
+    Observations.      Observations.       Deductions.
+     1. Right              Left                -
+     2. Left               Right               +
+     3. Left               Line                +
+     4. Line               Line                T
+     5. Left               Left       Left, give right deflection.
+
+]
+
+This method is also applicable when the battery commander, being unable
+to observe himself and great accuracy being required, decides to make
+use of two observing parties.
+
+When this system is employed each observing party will only send in
+results of its observations as right or left of the line from it to
+the target. The amount right or left should be measured in degrees and
+minutes.
+
+
+_Heavy batteries._
+
+4. In a heavy battery there are two observing parties, one to each
+section. When the battery is intact both parties are under the
+direct command of the “_observing officer_.” When a section acts
+independently, its own observing party accompanies it.
+
+When the battery commander goes forward to reconnoitre he will be
+accompanied by the observing officer, in addition to the section
+commander mentioned in Sec =192= (1).
+
+The observing officer will take charge of the observing party when one
+is employed. If two observing parties are employed he will superintend
+the work of both as far as possible. When the battery commander
+observes for himself, the observing officer will assist as may be
+required.
+
+
+=200.= _Look-out men._
+
+1. As the attention of battery commanders is so much taken up by the
+observation and control of the fire of their batteries, men, termed
+“_look-out men_” are to be trained in every battery, whose duty it is
+to assist the commander in watching areas of ground and the movements
+of hostile and friendly troops.
+
+2. Look-out men should be selected for their intelligence and good
+sight, and should be adepts in the use of the telescope. There should
+usually be two in each battery (not the range-takers or signallers).
+One of these men may be employed, if desired, by the battery commander
+to assist him in taking angles of sight, &c.
+
+In action they should take up a position as near the battery observing
+station as is compatible with the instructions they have been given.
+
+They should be trained to co-operate with the range-takers so that the
+latter may receive early information as to possible objectives.
+
+=It is not their business to observe the fall of the shell, nor should
+they be used as patrols.=
+
+
+=201.= _Control of fire._
+
+1. The fire of a battery is controlled by means of the voice or through
+the medium of the telephone, signalling, orderlies, or whistle.
+
+2. _Voice._--If the observing station is near the battery, the battery
+commander gives his orders direct to the battery, or he may employ a
+selected man to call them out.
+
+If the observing station is at a distance the battery leader repeats
+the orders of the battery commander. Whilst performing this duty he
+will cease for the time to act as section commander, and will supervise
+the means of communication at the battery. In this case a position
+in rear of the line of section commanders, with due regard to the
+direction of the wind, is generally best.
+
+3. _Telephone._--When the telephone is the means of communication,
+signalling communication should also be established. (_See_ “Training
+Manual--Signalling.”)
+
+4. _Signalling._--The semaphore code will be used.
+
+Semaphore signalling with small flags can be read in a clear atmosphere
+without glasses up to 1,200 yards, and with the telescope up to
+2,000 yards; signalling with the arms can be read up to 600 yards in
+favourable conditions.
+
+A quick method of utilizing semaphore signalling is to employ two sets
+of signallers, each pair having different coloured flags. Those with
+the same coloured flags should communicate with each other only.
+
+The procedure for “attracting attention,” “moving of signallers,” and
+“erasing of signals,” will be as ordinarily employed in signalling.
+Special attention should be paid to light, background, &c.
+
+5. In sending orders or the result of observations by signal, the
+following abbreviations will be used:--
+
+    Aiming point           AP      Fuze                   FZ
+    Air                    AR      Go on                  GO
+    Air high               AR      Graze                  GZH
+    All guns               AL      Gun fire               GFL
+    Angle                  AN      Left                   LG
+    Angle of sight         AS      Left-half battery      LH
+    Battery fire           BY      Line                   LIF
+    Both guns              BO      Line of fire           LOTH
+    Centre                 C       Lyddite                LY
+    Collective ranging     CO      Minutes                MIL
+    Commence firing        FI      More left              MLRE
+    Common shell           CS      More right             MR
+    Concentrate            CO      One round              ORN
+    Core only or first     CO      Over or increase       PLRE
+    Core and one ring      CO      Parallel               PAOR
+    Core and two rings     CO      Percussion shrapnel    PSTR
+    Corrector              CO      Probably               PBR
+    Deflection             DF      Put flag on director   PFN
+    Degrees                DE      Range                  RGG
+    Depression             DE      Ranging                RGP
+    Distribute             DI      Repeat                 RES
+    Doubtful               QY      Right                  RT
+    Échelon                EC      Right-half battery     RHH
+    Effective fire         EF      Round                  RD
+    Elevation              EL      Seconds                SE
+    Far                    F       Second charge          SC
+    Fourth charge          FO      Section                XC
+    Full charge or fifth   FC      Section fire           XF
+
+    Short or drop      MN (minus)  Third charge           TC
+    Stop firing            STOP    Time shrapnel          TS
+    Target                 TG      Unload or empty guns   MT
+    Take flag off director TFD     Unobserved             UN
+
+6. For communicating by signal with the wagon line the following
+abbreviations may be used:--
+
+    “Send up wagons to replenish ammunition”--W N.
+    “Send up gun limbers”--G L.
+    “Send up wagon limbers”--W L.
+    “Send up wagon teams”--W T.
+
+Any of these signals may also be used in combination with one another,
+thus:--
+
+    “Send up gun limbers and wagon teams”--G L W T.
+
+_Mountain artillery._--“Send up one ammunition mule per
+subsection”--Both arms above the head.
+
+“Send up firing battery mules to limber up”--Both arms extended
+horizontally.
+
+7. _Orderlies._--A long chain of orderlies is an unsatisfactory means
+of communication which multiplies opportunities for error and is not
+well suited to service conditions, but a chain of not more than two
+specially trained men may be very useful when flag signalling would
+disclose the position.
+
+8. _Whistle._--A long drawn out blast denotes “_Stop Firing_,” only to
+be used when rendered necessary by the fact that a word of command is
+likely to be either unheard, or to take a long time getting through the
+battery. On hearing the whistle, section commanders will order “STOP
+FIRING.” Firing will be resumed on the command “GO ON.”
+
+Batteries in brigade, or in action close to other batteries, must avoid
+using the whistle unless it is an absolute necessity.
+
+
+_Section control._
+
+9. Should the battery commander consider it advisable at any time to
+place the control of fire in the hands of the section commanders he
+will order “SECTION CONTROL.” On this order section commanders will
+direct the fire of their sections, making any alteration in elevation,
+line, or corrector setting that may be necessary, or range their
+sections independently as may be required. The senior No. 1 may perform
+the duties of section commander.
+
+The battery commander will watch the tactical situation and control the
+expenditure of ammunition. When he desires to resume control he will
+give the order “BATTERY CONTROL.”
+
+
+=202.= _Methods of fire._
+
+1. There are three methods of fire:--
+
+    Battery fire.
+    Section fire.
+    Gun fire.
+
+2. In all methods of fire, guns are loaded and fired by order of Nos. 1.
+
+3. _Battery fire._--In battery fire the guns are fired in succession
+throughout the battery commencing from the right at an interval of 5
+seconds, unless another interval is ordered.
+
+4. _Section fire._--In section fire the guns of each section are fired
+at the interval ordered by the battery commander, without reference to
+other sections.
+
+5. _Gun fire._--In gun fire the battery commander orders the number of
+rounds to be fired, with or without an interval. The specified number
+of rounds is then fired at the interval ordered; if no interval is
+ordered, each gun is fired when reported “_ready_” and “_set_.”
+
+In the case of an attack at close ranges, the number of rounds to be
+fired is not ordered, but fire is continued until an order to stop
+firing is given.
+
+
+=203.= _Location of targets from aircraft._
+
+1. The general method of procedure is as follows:--The pilot, or
+observer, or both, remain close to the artillery commander. When the
+latter wishes to use an aeroplane to locate a target he explains
+what he requires, and if possible the nature of the target and its
+general direction. The aeroplane then rises to the necessary height
+behind the battery in order to run less danger of injury by hostile
+fire. Meanwhile, two strips of white cloth are laid out on the ground
+near the battery so as to give the supposed direction of the target.
+The aeroplane, having got to the required height, flies out over the
+battery to find the exact position of the target.
+
+2. Three different methods may be adopted to convey this information:--
+
+      i. A white Very’s light may be fired from the aeroplane when
+           it is vertically over the target. At the battery end one
+           observer follows the machine with a director and another
+           takes the range with a one-man range-finder. The director
+           is clamped and the range read as soon as the shot is fired.
+           Provided the aeroplane is flying at a pre-arranged height
+           the direction and range of the target can then be found.
+     ii. The aeroplane returns along the line target-battery, and
+           continues its flight over and past the battery in the same
+           straight line. No light need be fired in this system but
+           the range of course cannot be communicated.
+    iii. An enlargement of the map or in certain cases a written
+           message may be dropped from the aeroplane giving the exact
+           position of the target.
+
+A combination of any two or of all these methods may be used.
+
+
+=204.= _Observation of fire from aircraft._
+
+1. For observation of fire from aeroplanes a different system to that
+ordinarily employed for ranging must be adopted. It is generally
+necessary to correct for line, range and fuze in succession, and not
+simultaneously.
+
+As a rule single rounds are sufficient for observation, but it may
+sometimes be necessary in the case of Q.F. batteries to fire salvoes of
+two or more guns.
+
+Salvoes may also be used when it is desired to carry out the
+observation of fire of one particular battery by aeroplane, and it is
+necessary to distinguish its fire from that of several others firing at
+the same target.
+
+2. Shrapnel bursting in the air can be easily seen, but it is difficult
+to determine the height of burst, and consequently the position
+relative to the target. Bursts on graze are generally visible. In the
+case of 18-pr. guns, it is usually impossible to observe the strike of
+the bullets on the ground. The burst of lyddite shell from howitzers
+can be seen easily.
+
+3. Very’s lights form the best means of signalling from the aeroplane
+to the ground, and white strips of cloth, 6 ft. by 1 ft., for
+communication from the ground to the aeroplane. If available a Klaxon
+horn in the aeroplane is also useful. For code of signals, _see_ Sec.
+=205=.
+
+When possible, the observing aircraft should remain close to their
+own guns at the best height for observation, in order to facilitate
+communication. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to fly out
+further towards, or even over, the target in order to ensure accurate
+observation. In such cases much delay will ensue if the aeroplane has
+to come back over its own guns to signal the results; on the other
+hand, if it remains out in front the signals may not be seen.
+
+4. The observer, having located the position of the target and conveyed
+the information to the artillery commander (_See_ Sec. =203=) receives
+from him the signal “Observe for line” (_See_ Sec. =205=).
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 32.]
+
+The aeroplane now moves as in Fig. 32, keeping on that side of the
+battery furthest from the sun, so that the signals can be easily seen.
+
+Shots can only be seen with ease when the aeroplane is moving out
+towards the target. If the distance A to B is about 1 mile, two
+rounds can be observed during each outward flight. As soon as line is
+obtained the signal “Observe for range” (_See_ Sec. =205=) is sent; the
+aeroplane now moves in an elongated figure of eight, as in Fig. 33,
+always turning towards the target. It will keep behind or in front of
+the battery according to the position of the sun. Shots can be seen at
+any time.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 33.]
+
+Range having been obtained the signal “Observe for fuze” (_See_ Sec.
+=205=) is sent, the aeroplane still moving as in Fig. 33.
+
+Subsequent observation as to the general effect of the fire can best be
+made from over the target, the results being written out in a message
+and dropped at the battery.
+
+When the signal “Land” is sent the aeroplane comes down at a place
+previously selected and not necessarily at the spot whence the signals
+are sent.
+
+Two men should be detailed from the battery to watch the observing
+aeroplane, one with field glasses looking for the signals, the other
+with his naked eye keeping a continuous watch on it so as to make
+certain that no mistake is made as to the actual machine, since, when
+there are several aircraft out in observation, confusion between them
+is very likely to arise.
+
+
+=205.= _Signals from and to aeroplanes._
+
+1. With Very’s lights the following code of signals will be used for
+communication from the aeroplane to the ground:--
+
+    (_a_) Before fire is commenced--
+
+        One white light      I am over the target.
+        One green   ”        I am ready to observe fire.
+
+    (_b_) While ranging--
+
+     --------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------
+         Light used.     |  For Line.  |  For Range. |  For Fuze.
+     --------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------
+          One red.       |    Right.   |    Over.    |    Air.
+         Two reds.       |  Far right. |  Far over.  |     --
+         One green.      |    Left.    |   Short.    |   Graze.
+        Two greens.      |  Far left.  |  Far short. |     --
+     One red, one green. |    Line.    |   Range.    | Fuze correct.
+     One green, one red. | Unobserved. | Unobserved. |  Unobserved.
+     --------------------+-------------+-------------+--------------
+
+     Succession of blasts on
+           Klaxon horn         Am about to fire two signals.
+
+The signal “Far right” or “Far left” should be made when the shell
+bursts 8 degrees or more from the target. Any shell bursting 500 yards
+or more short of or beyond the target should be signalled as “Far
+short” or “Far over.” “Fuze correct” will be signalled when some of the
+shells burst on graze and others in air.
+
+    (_c_) After fire for effect has commenced--
+
+         Red, green     Fire effective.
+
+A white light fired at any time after fire has commenced means “Stop,
+am about to drop a message.”
+
+2. Strips of white cloth 6 feet by 1 foot, placed on the ground, can be
+used for signalling from the ground to aeroplanes. The following code
+of letters formed from the white strips placed on the ground will be
+employed.
+
+    3. I }    Direction of target.
+       I }
+       L      Observe for line.
+       X      Observe for range.
+       Z      Observe for fuze.
+       V      Observe for general effect of fire.
+       N      Repeat last signal.
+       T      Land.
+       F/     Fresh target on right.
+
+           The letters I, K or A may be placed immediately after
+           the F to indicate to the aeroplane observer the nature
+           of the target, viz., I for infantry, K for cavalry,
+           and A for artillery.
+
+All letters should be placed on the ground so that the top of the
+letter is towards the target.
+
+
+=206.= _Observation of fire from kites._
+
+1. When kites are available the results of the observation can be
+telephoned down to the guns and there is no waste of time, but they can
+only operate in a wind (_See_ Sec. =150=), and their range of vision
+and power to see behind cover is limited.
+
+Kites require special consideration and the exact place from which
+they should be flown should be chosen by a kiting officer. Some of the
+requirements are:--
+
+      i. Concealment from the enemy of the winch and carrier kite
+           when on the ground.
+     ii. Ground not obstructed by obstacles.
+    iii. Sufficient room in a straight line to haul down 600
+           or 1,000 yards. This should be measured out down wind
+           and must be free from obstructions. It is possible to
+           haul down in a smaller space, but this involves much
+           preparation and a number of holdfasts are necessary.
+
+
+RANGING.
+
+
+=207.= _General instructions._
+
+1. Ranging is the process of finding the elevation, fuze and line.
+
+2. When the battery commander has given an order to load with any
+nature of projectile, that loading will be continued until an order to
+change is given.
+
+3. With fixed ammunition, if a change of elevation or corrector be
+ordered when time shrapnel is being fired, Nos. 1 order “UNLOAD,” and
+guns are reloaded for the new elevation or corrector. A similar order
+should be given when for any other reason it is desired to empty guns
+already loaded, as, for instance, when ceasing fire.
+
+If fixed ammunition is not used, and a change of elevation is ordered,
+guns loaded with the fuze for the old elevation will be fired at the
+new elevation. If for any reason it is required to empty guns already
+loaded, the order is “EMPTY GUNS,” and the guns are fired at once
+without any fixed interval.
+
+4. As soon as ranging is completed the battery commander will send the
+angle of sight, elevation, corrector or fuze to the brigade commander,
+and in the case of howitzers the charge also.
+
+
+=208.= _To find the elevation._
+
+1. Under service conditions it is seldom possible to estimate with
+accuracy the distance the burst of a shell is short or over with regard
+to the target. The principle of ranging for elevation is, therefore, to
+find two elevations, the longer of which will throw the shell beyond
+and the other short of the target, thereby enclosing it in what is
+called a “_bracket_.”
+
+This bracket is large at first, usually 300 yards.[20] If a smaller
+bracket is required one or more rounds, according to the nature of
+the ranging employed, are fired at the intermediate hundreds. This
+gives the 100 yard bracket, which in ordinary circumstances is the one
+required. The elevation is then verified by repeating the two ends of
+the bracket. =The important point is to make certain of this bracket.=
+
+2. Ranging is either “_Collective_,” “_Single Gun_,” “_Section_,” or
+“_All Guns_.”
+
+The method adopted should be that best calculated to obtain effective
+fire with the least delay, and with this end in view a combination of
+the different methods may sometimes be used. An example of combined
+“section” and “collective” ranging is given in Sec. =227=.
+
+By “_Collective Ranging_”[21] is meant more than 2 guns fired in quick
+succession at the same elevation and fuze. The form that collective
+ranging should take in a 6-gun unit is the fire of half batteries
+alternately; in a 4-gun unit the fire of the three right guns.
+
+[20] Or multiple of 300.
+
+[21] Collective ranging does not apply to howitzers and heavy guns.
+
+By “_Single Gun Ranging_,” “_Section Ranging_” and “_All Guns Ranging_”
+is meant ranging with one, two, or all guns fired singly.
+
+In “_All Guns Ranging_” a single initial elevation is ordered,
+subsequent elevations being given out singly on the observation of the
+previous round.
+
+In “_Section Ranging_” two elevations are ordered with or without an
+interval.
+
+In “_Single Gun Ranging_” either of the above two methods may be
+followed, but only one gun is used.
+
+3. The fall of the rounds is judged from the smoke of the burst of the
+shell or splash of the bullets, which should be clearly observed as
+short of or beyond the target.
+
+4. In order to obtain good results when ranging with time shrapnel a
+length of corrector or fuze should be employed, which will give bursts
+on or just below the line of sight. When indirect laying is employed
+it may occasionally be advisable to commence with a corrector or fuze
+échelon series, in order to select a suitable length. (_See_ Sec. =209=
+(2).)
+
+5. Elevation should always be given at first in round numbers,
+beginning, in the case of yards, at the nearest 100, or in degrees, at
+the nearest degree or half degree. It is seldom worth while to make a
+smaller change of elevation than 25 yards, or its equivalent.
+
+When the whole series depends on the correct observation of a single
+round, that round should be repeated and another fired with 100 yards
+more (or less) elevation.
+
+Further alterations in the elevation from the observation of the splash
+of the bullets and fall of the case of the shell, when visible, are
+made as required. This will often be necessary for individual guns.
+
+If a shell is observed to strike the target, a verifying series of one
+or two rounds should be fired.
+
+6. The battery commander details the method of ranging and the nature
+of the projectile thus:--
+
+       “COLLECTIVE”         }      { “CORRECTOR”
+               or           }      {
+     “RIGHT (CENTRE or      }      {     or
+      LEFT) RANGING”        } ...  { “PERCUSSION”
+               or           }      {
+    “NO. ... RANGING”       }      {     or
+               or           }      {
+    “ALL GUNS RANGING”      }      {  “LYDDITE.”
+
+
+“_Collective Ranging._”
+
+7. When collective ranging is employed the battery commander gives out
+one elevation and corrector for example:--
+
+“Collective--Corrector 156--4600.”
+
+This elevation is fired by the right half battery,[22] commencing from
+the right at battery fire 3 seconds unless otherwise ordered. The
+battery commander from the result of these rounds alters the corrector
+if necessary, and orders a fresh elevation to the left half battery to
+obtain his 300 yard or other bracket. He then sends down corrections
+for line for the right half battery unless one correction to the whole
+battery is advisable, in which case he will send it down before the
+new corrector and range. This process is continued until the size of
+the bracket is, if possible, reduced to 100 yards. (_See_ Sec. =227=,
+Example 1.)
+
+[22] In a 4-gun battery by the three right guns.
+
+
+“_Section Ranging._”
+
+8. When a section is being used for ranging the battery commander gives
+out two elevations differing by 300 yards or multiple of 300 (the
+longer elevation first). The elevation which is given out first is
+fired by the right gun, the second by the left gun of the section, at
+an interval of 5 seconds, unless another interval is ordered. If the
+target is not bracketed two fresh elevations are ordered.
+
+Should a gun of the ranging section become temporarily or permanently
+disabled, the section commander continues with the other gun of the
+section, or informs the section commander next him, who will place the
+nearest gun temporarily under his command.
+
+
+“_Single gun Ranging._”
+
+9. If one gun is used for ranging, elevations will be given out singly
+or in pairs, the general procedure for bracketing the target being
+similar to the above.
+
+
+“_All guns Ranging._”
+
+10. Ranging with all guns is in certain circumstances admissible,
+particularly when high explosive shell are alone to be used. Elevations
+will be given out singly. In the case of field guns this method would
+only be an advantage in very exceptional cases. It presupposes that the
+range from each gun is identical and that observation is easy.
+
+
+=209.= _To find the fuze._
+
+1. =As a rule no special ranging for fuze should be necessary.= The
+battery commander before or after ranging for elevation will select
+what he considers to be a suitable length of corrector and modify it
+later according to circumstances.
+
+2. When fighting in a hilly country or when from any cause no
+reasonable estimate of the corrector can be formed it may prove
+economical in ammunition to fire an échelon before proceeding to fire
+with time shrapnel. (_See also_ Sec. =208= (=4=).) When an échelon is
+considered necessary it will, except in the case of howitzers and heavy
+guns, be fired before ranging for elevation commences. The échelon is
+fired by the three right guns from right to left at 5 seconds interval
+unless another interval is ordered. The fuze indicators, or fuze
+setters, are set at lengths increasing by 10, the order being “ÉCHELON]
+... RANGE....” In ordering the initial corrector settings, the battery
+commander should endeavour to select an échelon which will give bursts
+in the air and on graze.
+
+On this order the No. 1 of No. 1 gun orders his corrector to be set
+at the graduation ordered. The Nos. 1 of the other guns order their
+correctors to be set at a successive increase of 10. It may in very
+exceptional circumstances be necessary to fire a second échelon. The
+above procedure is then repeated.
+
+3. If a gun misses its turn during the échelon the fact will be
+reported to the battery commander, and the gun will be fired when ready
+unless otherwise ordered. The section commander will, however, be
+careful that the gun is not fired during the échelon.
+
+4. When fire is being corrected by observation from a distant observing
+station and the battery angle proves to be correct, any considerable
+discrepancy between the gun range and the plotter range will be due to
+a miscalculation of the angle of sight. The correct fuze will then be
+that for the plotter range.
+
+
+=210.= _To find the line._
+
+1. Except in the case of fleeting opportunities, battery fire will be
+continued till the battery commander is satisfied that the correct line
+of fire for each gun has been obtained. Even in the case of fleeting
+opportunities it will sometimes be advisable to fire a round of battery
+fire at small intervals to check the lines.
+
+To avoid waste of ammunition, especially in the case of guns which
+cannot be unloaded, it may be advisable to increase the normal interval
+between the rounds of an échelon or at battery fire. Line corrections
+are preferably made on the fall of each round, but _see_ Sec. =208= (7).
+
+2. The battery commander will correct the deflection for each gun
+unless he has delegated this duty to the section commanders. (_See_
+Sec. =197= (3).) Should he consider from the first ranging rounds that
+his lines are not correct he should order an initial correction for the
+remaining guns.
+
+3. To assist the battery commander in correcting for line when the
+observing station is not close to the battery, the number of each gun
+as it fires, also all prematures, should be reported by signalling or
+telephone. (_See also_ Sec. =197= (5).)
+
+
+RANGING FOR HOWITZERS AND HEAVY GUNS.
+
+
+=211.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The general principles of ranging are the same as for field guns,
+but certain differences exist owing to the equipment, weight of shell,
+etc.
+
+2. As a general rule, a steep angle of descent is a paramount condition
+for effective howitzer fire. When firing lyddite, an angle of descent
+of at least 20° is desirable.
+
+3. Against troops in the open, the full charge should be employed in
+order to obtain the forward effect of a comparatively flat trajectory.
+When engaging objectives such as a wall, or buildings, which present a
+high vertical target, the full charge should also be used.
+
+Redoubts or overhead cover on the contrary require a steep angle of
+descent; the same applies to trenches and shielded guns.
+
+4. Howitzers frequently require individual corrections due to
+variations in the muzzle velocities of the guns, but such corrections
+should only be made on the observation of groups of rounds. The
+smallest correction which it is worth making is one equivalent to 25
+yards.
+
+5. When a change from lyddite to time shrapnel is made and it is known
+that lyddite shell range differently to the shrapnel a few rounds of
+time or percussion shrapnel should be fired to verify the elevation.
+Owing to the steep angle of descent it is often easier to observe the
+splash of the bullets of time shrapnel than the burst of percussion
+shrapnel.
+
+
+=212.= _Howitzers._
+
+1. Ranging can be carried out with lyddite, percussion or time shrapnel.
+
+The ranging is carried out with one section or one gun of the
+battery, but all guns may be used for ranging if lyddite is to be
+used subsequently, and the target is of narrow front, or presents no
+obliquity to the battery.
+
+2. When a section is employed for ranging, a bracket to approximate
+as nearly as possible to 300 yards, or multiple of 300 yards, should
+be ordered, but round numbers should usually be adhered to, such as
+28°-25°, not 28°20´-25°20´.
+
+This bracket is further reduced to one corresponding to about 100
+yards, or 1-3rd of the original bracket. The elevation is then verified
+by repeating the two ends of this bracket.
+
+When lyddite only is to be used, the bracket will be further reduced to
+50 yards, and the two ends of the bracket repeated.
+
+For howitzers fitted with the range drums graduated in yards for the
+fourth charge, the B.C. will range in yards as with other field guns,
+and will select the approximate ranges to start with, in accordance
+with the charge to be used, by means of the ranging rule provided.
+
+If the range rule is not available, the following calculation will give
+the approximate range for different charges:--
+
+    When using full charge      subtract ¼ from the _real_ range.
+        ”      fourth charge    give the _real_ range.
+        ”      third charge     add ⅓ to the _real_ range.
+        ”      second charge    add ⅔ to the _real_ range.
+        ”      first charge     double the _real_ range.
+
+3. When ranging with one gun, or with all guns, only one elevation will
+be ordered at a time, the principles of bracketting as laid down above
+being adhered to.
+
+4. _To find the fuze._--The battery commander, after ranging for
+elevation, may find it necessary to order an échelon (this will nearly
+always be necessary for batteries not provided with fuze indicators).
+The échelon is fired from right to left by the three right guns at 5
+seconds interval, unless another interval is ordered, as in field gun
+batteries.
+
+5. In the case of batteries not provided with fuze indicators, a fuze
+and an increment will be ordered, such increment to be a division or
+half division according to which most nearly corresponds with 100 yards.
+
+If the battery commander begins ranging with time shrapnel the
+procedure will be the same as for other field guns except that
+collective ranging will not be used. (_See_ Sec. =208= (4)).
+
+
+=213.= _Heavy batteries._
+
+1. The procedure of these guns is identical with that of field
+howitzers, except that ranging will not be carried out with time
+shrapnel. At long ranges it is advisable to order one elevation at a
+time.
+
+2. When firing with lyddite, as with howitzers, the 50 yard bracket
+should be verified. At distant ranges, however, the bracket should not
+be less than twice the 50 per cent. zone.
+
+When time shrapnel is to be used the 300 yard bracket may be found with
+lyddite or percussion shrapnel.
+
+3. The procedure in ranging for fuze is that of firing an échelon as
+laid down for howitzers.
+
+
+DISTRIBUTION OF FIRE.
+
+
+=214.= _General principles._
+
+1. =Distribution of fire over the target allotted to the battery
+should, whenever possible, commence from the first round.=
+
+This should not prevent a battery commander in the case of an
+indistinct target from ranging on the most conspicuous portion, and
+distributing his fire subsequently.
+
+2. Assuming 50 yards to be the average distance required to burst a
+shell short of the target, and that the lateral space covered by the
+cone of dispersion of a shell is about 35 per cent. of the distance
+burst short, it will be seen that the width a battery at normal
+intervals can effectively cover when the lines of fire of its guns
+are parallel is approximately equal to its own front. By “_sweeping_”
+(_see_ Sec. =216=) it can cover a width of 3 times its own front.
+
+3. When section commanders are ordered to correct for line (_See_ Sec.
+=197= (3)), each of them should be made responsible for a definite
+portion of the target. The extreme edge of a target should not be laid
+on, as a small error might cause the shell to be wasted.
+
+4. If it is required to concentrate or distribute the fire of a battery
+over a front of a lesser or greater width than that covered when the
+lines of fire are parallel, it is effected by ordering concentration
+on, or distribution from, a named gun. When an aiming point is
+employed an angle is given to the battery, followed by the amount of
+concentration or distribution required.
+
+5. The amount of concentration or distribution to be given will depend
+on the width of the target, the angular measurement of which varies
+with the range.
+
+Thus:--
+
+    At 2,000 yds., 100 yds. measure 3°,   60 yds. measure 1° 45′.
+    ”  3,000  ”       ”        ”    2°       ”       ”    1° 10′.
+    ”  4,000  ”       ”        ”    1½°      ”       ”       50′.
+    ”  5,000  ”       ”        ”    1° 10′   ”       ”       40′.
+    ”  6,000  ”       ”        ”    1°       ”       ”       35′.
+
+These may be taken as the front covered by a 6-gun or 4-gun battery
+respectively when the lines of fire are parallel.
+
+6. The angle given to the battery must bring the flank guns inside the
+flanks of the target. The total distribution required is the difference
+between the front covered by the battery and the extent of the target.
+This must be divided by the number of gun intervals to obtain the
+distribution between each gun. If the target is narrower than the front
+covered by the battery a similar rule applies, but concentration will
+be needed.
+
+If a switch from one target to another is involved, the angle between
+the line of fire of a flank gun and the spot on which it is desired to
+direct the new line of fire of the same gun should be measured.
+
+7. _Example I._--Supposing a 6-gun battery is required to fire at
+a range of 3,000 yards against a target measuring 3°, the fire of
+the battery with parallel lines will cover a front of 2°. An extra
+distribution of 1° is, therefore, needed. This amount divided by 5
+will give 12 minutes for each gun interval, which would be taken as 10
+minutes to prevent the fire of the further flank gun being outside the
+target. The order would then be “DISTRIBUTE 10 MINUTES, FROM NO. 1.”
+
+No deflection is given to the named gun, but each of the remaining
+guns would be given 10 minutes left deflection for every gun interval
+between it and No. 1 gun.
+
+_Example II._--Supposing it is desired to concentrate the fire of
+the above battery on the right to cover a front of about 30 minutes
+at a range of 3,600 yards, the battery commander’s order would be
+“CONCENTRATE 15 MINUTES ON NO. 1.” No deflection is given to the gun
+named; each of the remaining guns would be given 15 minutes deflection
+for every gun interval between it and the gun named, viz., No. 2 gun 15
+minutes more right, No. 3 gun 30 minutes more right, and so on.
+
+_Example III._--A 4-gun battery firing at a target whose angular extent
+is 4°. It is desired to switch the fire on to a target whose angular
+extent is 2°, therefore the difference 2° or 120 minutes divided by
+3 (gun intervals) gives 40 minutes which is the concentration to be
+ordered.
+
+When there is a considerable difference in range from one target to the
+other, parallelism should be first given to the guns before making the
+switch.
+
+After the operation of ranging has been completed, the battery
+commander has to determine by what method of fire he will engage the
+objective. He may do so by one of the three methods described in Sec.
+=202= (1), combined, if desired, with “searching” or “sweeping.”
+
+
+=215.= _Searching._
+
+1. “_Searching_” means distributing fire in depth over an area of
+ground by successive alterations in elevation.
+
+2. It will often be impossible to obtain the true range of a target,
+either owing to the difficulty of locating its exact position, or to
+want of time. All that can then be done is to ascertain two limits
+within which the target lies, and to search within those limits. Ranges
+at which fire is seen to be ineffective are cut out and the space under
+fire is thus gradually reduced.
+
+3. Sometimes it will be necessary to range on a crest line behind which
+the target is located. In this case searching should not be attempted
+to a greater depth than 400 yards from the crest or other obstacle
+to view, unless the battery commander can obtain information as to
+the result of his fire or the approximate position of the target,
+as results are unlikely to be proportionate to the expenditure of
+ammunition. In this connection flank observing parties may be of great
+value.
+
+4. Orders as to changes in elevation and number of rounds to be fired
+are given by the battery commander.
+
+The amount by which the elevation should be increased for each series
+of rounds will depend on the depth of ground which is effectively
+covered by the burst of the shell. This amount varies from 100 yards at
+short ranges to 50 yards at extreme ranges.
+
+Should the ground to be searched slope considerably to the front, the
+above increments should be increased; if to the rear, they should be
+diminished. When such is the case the angle of sight will be different
+for each successive range. It is generally inadvisable to alter this
+angle on the sights, but the slope can be allowed for by altering the
+corrector setting, decreasing it if the angle of sight is increased and
+_vice versâ_.
+
+
+=216.= _Sweeping._
+
+1. “_Sweeping_” means distributing fire in width over a front greater
+than a battery can cover in the ordinary way.
+
+2. When sweeping fire is employed the lines of fire of the guns must
+first of all be opened out, the amount depending on the width of the
+target. To obtain the amount of sweep required after the guns have been
+opened out multiply the frontage subtended by the target in degrees
+by three for a 6-gun battery, five for a 4-gun battery, and ten for a
+section. This gives approximately the number of minutes sweep required.
+In giving the order to sweep, the battery commander will state in
+degrees or minutes the amount of sweep necessary, and such order
+will always be prefaced by the rate of fire required, thus:--Battery
+commander orders “RANGE ... SECTION (OR BATTERY) FIRE ... SECONDS,
+SWEEP ... DEGREES OR MINUTES.” On this order the first round from
+each gun is fired in the line ordered, and the second ... degrees (or
+minutes) to the right, and the third ... degrees (or minutes) to the
+left of the line of the first. This procedure is repeated for as long
+as is necessary, the fourth round being fired on the line of the first
+and so on.
+
+The guns must be re-laid for elevation and direction after each round.
+If the battery is already at section or battery fire and sweeping fire
+is required, the battery commander must give the order:--“AT SECTION
+(OR BATTERY) FIRE ... SWEEP ... DEGREES (OR MINUTES),” as otherwise the
+procedure will be as in para. 3.
+
+3. If it is desired to sweep an area with great rapidity, the battery
+commander will order:--“SWEEP ... DEGREES (OR MINUTES),” and the guns
+will be fired at gun fire. With guns fitted with traversing gear on
+the carriage the layer lays for direction for the first round only,
+the line for the second and third rounds being obtained by moving the
+traversing gear to the amount of sweep, right or left. The guns must be
+re-laid for elevation after each round. After the third round is fired
+the gun is traversed on to the original line and the direction checked
+by the sights. If it is necessary to repeat this procedure, the battery
+commander orders:--“REPEAT.”
+
+4. _Searching and sweeping combined._--If the target possesses
+considerable width and depth a combination of searching and sweeping
+may be employed.
+
+
+=217.= _Change of target._
+
+1. When a change of target is ordered, the battery commander measures
+the angle between the new and old target. He determines whether any
+allowance is necessary to counteract the difference between the angle
+he has taken and that required for the battery. (_See_ Sec. =123= (4).)
+He then orders or communicates the angle to the battery thus: “ALL GUNS
+... DEGREES MORE RIGHT (_or_ LEFT).”
+
+2. With guns not fitted with No. 7 dial sight, if the angle is within
+the amount of deflection which can be given on the deflection scale,
+the position of the aiming posts may not have to be changed, and the
+order is given thus:--
+
+    “ALL GUNS ... DEGREES MORE RIGHT (OR LEFT).”
+
+otherwise it is necessary to move the aiming posts and the order will
+be--
+
+    “LINES OF FIRE ... DEGREES MORE RIGHT (OR LEFT).”
+
+
+METHODS OF ENGAGING VARIOUS OBJECTIVES.
+
+
+=218.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The choice of objective, the opening of fire, and the expenditure of
+ammunition are governed by the tactical situation and are dealt with
+in Chapter VII. The following sections deal primarily with the methods
+by which fire can be applied with effect to various objectives.
+
+2. The methods of ranging are described in Sec. =208=, and the examples
+in Sec. =227= illustrate those methods. Officers are responsible for
+using their discretion as to which method should be employed so that
+the fire of their batteries may achieve the object in view.
+
+
+=219.= _To register a zone._
+
+1. A battery occupying “_a position in observation_” (_see_ Sec. =184=)
+may be called upon to “_register_” a certain zone or area of country.
+To do this the range should be obtained to various points in such
+a manner that fire may be opened rapidly on any objective that may
+subsequently appear in their neighbourhood.
+
+Such points may be crest lines, hedges, bridges, roads, clumps of
+trees, buildings, the edges of woods, or the limits of open spaces over
+which the enemy may be expected to move.
+
+Registering may be carried out with a section or single gun, time or
+percussion being used. It is advisable to number or letter the objects
+registered from the right, a careful record being kept of the points
+registered.
+
+2. The degree of accuracy to which it is desirable to obtain the range
+to such points must vary according to the nature of the objective that
+may be expected to appear. The range to a crest on which artillery is
+expected to come into action must be accurately found. The limits of
+open spaces over which movement may be expected cannot, as a rule, be
+accurately defined. A few trial shots, therefore, may give sufficient
+indication for the purpose.
+
+
+=220.= _Localities._
+
+1. Villages or individual houses may be fired on by artillery in order
+to reduce their resisting power and render the approach to them
+easier. Field howitzers or heavy artillery firing lyddite should be
+used if available.
+
+2. To destroy an individual house accurate ranging is necessary, only a
+sufficient number of guns or howitzers being employed for the purpose.
+
+3. To destroy a village by setting it on fire or to prevent the massing
+of reserves in the streets a searching fire should be used.
+
+4. To facilitate the attack on a village or house occupied for defence,
+field guns firing percussion shrapnel may be used, as well as howitzers
+and heavy artillery, as their projectiles are effective against
+personnel behind all ordinary walls. Accurate ranging is necessary;
+particularly for line, as it is necessary to hit each individual house.
+
+5. If the edge of a wood is occupied by the enemy’s infantry, it should
+be ranged on in the same manner as a trench (_see_ below). A searching
+fire may be employed against troops taking cover in a wood, but as it
+will usually be difficult, if not impossible, to establish a bracket
+with any certainty, effect must depend to a great extent on chance.
+
+
+=221.= _Staffs._
+
+1. It may be possible to locate groups of officers forming staffs
+either mounted or dismounted. Such objectives should be ranged on
+rapidly and a quick rate of fire opened for effect till they either
+disperse or disappear.
+
+
+=222.= _Cavalry._
+
+1. Cavalry when mounted must usually be engaged on the move. It may
+present a variety of targets; a mass, a line more or less at right
+angles or parallel to the line of fire, or an area over which a number
+of comparatively small bodies is moving. The direction and pace of
+movement must always be reckoned with.
+
+2. A mass will break up under artillery fire, so should be dealt with
+by rapid ranging, and an extremely rapid and intense fire till it
+breaks up, followed by a searching fire with suitable deflection to
+allow for movement.
+
+3. To stop an advancing line the chief considerations are a suitable
+distribution and rapid changes of elevation, arranged so that the
+cavalry is always advancing into the fire.
+
+At ranges under 2,000 yards it may be advisable to order lengths of
+fuze instead of corrector settings.
+
+4. To enfilade a cavalry line moving across the front requires
+concentration of the lines of fire with varying elevations for each
+section and suitable deflection to compensate for movement.
+
+5. Cavalry, covering a wide area, requires distribution both laterally
+and in depth, with deflection and alterations of range to compensate
+for movement.
+
+6. Dismounted cavalry will usually be dealt with as infantry. Its led
+horses, if they can be located, form a vulnerable objective, which
+should be dealt with by rapid ranging followed by rapid fire for effect
+till the horses either disperse or gain cover.
+
+
+=223.= _Artillery._
+
+1. To engage a battery of which the flashes or dust thrown up by
+discharge are visible behind a crest, the crest should be bracketed,
+and searching fire employed for a suitable distance behind the crest.
+If the slope of the ground behind the crest is known, or can be
+ascertained, it may afford an indication of the distance behind the
+crest to which it is desirable to search.
+
+2. A battery in action or attempting to come into action in the open
+engaged by a battery also in the open should be ranged on as quickly as
+possible and should be subjected to fire for effect at the earliest
+possible moment. The bracket should then be narrowed down and the fire
+maintained till the enemy’s fire slackens or becomes inaccurate. If the
+range is suitable and observation sufficiently easy, efforts may then
+be made to destroy the _matériel_ with percussion shrapnel. To do this
+each gun should engage a hostile gun, and the fire of each gun should
+be carefully corrected.
+
+A concealed battery engaging a hostile battery in the open will adopt
+a similar procedure, but there is not the same need for haste, and the
+ranging may be more deliberate.
+
+3. To neutralize a battery it should be subjected to a rapid, accurate
+and intense fire till its fire is mastered. It should then be observed
+and if it endeavours to intervene again it should be subjected to the
+same treatment. A hostile battery, the fire of which has been mastered,
+may be neutralized by a portion only of a battery, which should employ
+a rapid sweeping fire to compensate for the reduction in the number of
+guns.
+
+If a rapid and intense fire is desired against hostile artillery it is
+preferable to employ a quick rate of section or battery fire.
+
+4. Guns coming into action in the open can usually establish themselves
+in action before the process of ranging on them is completed, unless
+the range to some point in the immediate neighbourhood of the position
+has been previously ascertained. If this has been done the rapid
+opening of fire for effect may cripple the hostile battery before it is
+able to open fire.
+
+5. Howitzers and heavy artillery, if available, are especially suitable
+for dealing with entrenched guns, the former using shrapnel against
+the personnel and lyddite against the entrenchments. The latter would
+preferably use lyddite against the entrenchments. Very accurate ranging
+is desirable.
+
+6. Every effort should be made to locate the enemy’s observing
+stations. When located they should be engaged with a portion of the
+guns available.
+
+7. The wagon lines of batteries in action form a vulnerable objective
+if they can be located. They should be dealt with in the same manner as
+the led horses of cavalry (_see_ Sec. =222= (6).)
+
+
+=224.= _Infantry._
+
+1. Artillery may fire on hostile infantry for any of the following
+reasons:--
+
+      i. To facilitate the advance of its own infantry.
+     ii. To cause the hostile infantry to deploy.
+    iii. To delay its advance, bring it to a standstill,
+           or prevent it resuming its advance.
+
+These objects are not likely to be fulfilled unless the fire of the
+artillery is sufficiently accurate to cause the infantry loss. The
+losses inflicted should, however, be looked upon as the means to the
+end.
+
+2. To facilitate the advance of its own infantry against the hostile
+infantry the enemy’s fire position must be subjected to an accurate
+and well distributed fire. The fire position, whether it be a trench,
+a series of trenches, a crest line, the edge of a wood or some other
+tactical feature, will seldom be a continuous straight line parallel
+to the front of the battery. The line may be broken and the range and
+angle of sight to various portions of it may vary.
+
+When engaging irregular shaped targets, such as these, it is advisable,
+after obtaining a bracket on a portion of the target, to correct lines
+and range during battery fire, and to order individual guns or sections
+to add or drop the necessary number of yards.
+
+This applies equally to other irregular targets besides infantry.
+
+In the open “_section control_” may be desirable, if the target is wide
+and the line broken, but during the infantry advance bursts of fire
+should be in the hands of the battery commander.
+
+Fire for effect should be arranged in bursts of section or battery fire
+during which the infantry may gain ground.
+
+3. To cause hostile infantry in close formation to deploy requires
+rapid ranging, the obtaining of the best bracket possible in the
+shortest possible time and a rapid searching fire for effect within the
+limits of the bracket found.
+
+If the appearance of formed bodies of hostile infantry in a certain
+locality has been foreseen and the zone has been registered the process
+of ranging may be dispensed with, and the full value of surprise effect
+may be obtained.
+
+4. When the enemy’s infantry is still beyond the range of rifle fire
+it will endeavour to cross open spaces exposed to artillery fire as
+rapidly as possible in the least vulnerable formations. If these open
+spaces have been registered the advance of the infantry may be delayed
+and possibly prevented by establishing a belt of fire through which it
+must pass. This belt can be moved at will but if the enemy’s infantry
+is only visible at intervals, accurate prediction is required as to the
+places where it will be exposed to fire.
+
+5. When the infantry comes under effective rifle fire it will be
+compelled to form firing lines in the best fire positions available.
+These positions should, if possible, be foreseen and the ranges
+ascertained. The method of engaging the infantry when it occupies these
+positions will be similar to that referred to above for supporting
+the advance against infantry in position. The essentials are accuracy
+and suitable distribution. The moral effect of a great volume of fire
+should be borne in mind. A rapid and intense fire for a short period
+may bring an advance to a standstill or prevent it being resumed. In
+a similar way infantry advancing by rushes in extended order may be
+stopped or driven to cover by bursts of fire.
+
+6. The most intense fire possible should be employed to prevent the
+delivery of an assault.
+
+7. Infantry advancing rapidly to counter-attack must be dealt with by
+rapid ranging and rapid fire for effect directed against the front line
+of the infantry and corrected as regards range and line in accordance
+with its movements. If the advance is checked a searching fire directed
+so as to include the supporting troops may be usefully employed.
+
+
+=225.= _Machine guns._
+
+1. Machine guns often form objectives of great tactical importance, and
+it may be necessary to subject them to a very intense fire in order
+to silence them. When employed in sections they present a target with
+a narrow front and accuracy of line is important. Only a sufficient
+number of guns for the purpose should therefore be employed. This
+would usually be a section. When entrenched it may be desirable to use
+howitzers with either shrapnel or lyddite or both against them.
+
+2. The difficulty in dealing with machine guns in action lies in the
+facility with which they can be concealed. If they can be located
+accurate ranging for elevation and line are necessary and a few well
+placed rounds should either disable the detachments or drive them to
+cover. If they cannot be located accurately it may still be possible
+to obtain sufficient indication of their whereabouts to enable a wide
+bracket to be obtained. Searching fire between the limits of such a
+bracket must then be resorted to.
+
+
+=226.= _Aircraft._
+
+1. It is at present difficult to distinguish hostile from friendly
+aircraft, but this difficulty will probably decrease in the future as
+the aircraft of different nations tend to develop on distinctive lines.
+
+The strictest control must be exercised over all fire directed against
+aircraft as indiscriminate fire may endanger neighbouring units and may
+disclose the position of the troops to the enemy’s observers.
+
+2. To engage such objectives certain preparations should, if possible,
+be made beforehand. These preparations consist in digging trenches for
+the trails and in organizing flank observing parties with telephones.
+Some modification of the usual procedure is necessary owing to the
+variations which occur in height, range, and direction of these objects
+under different influences.
+
+3. _Captive balloons or kites._--Efforts should be made to enclose such
+targets within the limits of a 500 or 600 yards bracket, employing a
+corrector which gives bursts near the line of sight. The layer must
+devote his attention to keeping the gun on the part of the target
+indicated.
+
+Subsequently the bracket having been reduced and the corrector
+shortened, occasional rounds of gun fire should be fired, each section
+using a different elevation.
+
+4. _Airships._--Provided an airship is not moving across the front at
+a rapid rate it may be engaged successfully in a similar manner. The
+principal points to be attended to are the establishment of a bracket,
+and the employment of a corrector, when fire for effect is being
+attempted, which will give high bursts. A similar procedure will be
+employed against aeroplanes.
+
+
+=227.= EXAMPLES OF RANGING.
+
+_Note._--These examples are only intended to illustrate the different
+methods of ranging.
+
+The methods of engaging various objectives are described in Secs. =218=
+to =226=.
+
+            I.--_Example of “Collective Ranging.”_
+
+         (For all batteries except howitzer and heavy.)
+
+     Position of battery--Under cover.
+     Target--6-gun battery in action in semi-covered position.
+             Tops of shields visible from observing station.
+
+    +------+-------+------+-----+------------+---------------------------
+    |      |       |      |Corr-|  Observed. |
+    |  No. |  No.  |      |ector+--+--+------+
+    |  of  |  of   | Elev-| or  |+ |A |Height|  Battery Commander’s
+    |round.|  Sub- |ation.|P.S. |or|or|  of  |      Orders.
+    |      |section|      |     |- |G.|burst.|
+    +------+-------+------+-----+--+--+------+---------------------------
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“Guns in action.”
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“Angle of sight
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |       1° 30′ elevation.”
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“Collective.” “Corrector
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      | 154.”
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“3400.” “Fire.”
+    |  1   |   1   | 3400 | 154 |? |A | 20′  |“No. 1--30′ more right.”[23]
+    |  2   |   2   |   ”  |  ”  |? |A | 20′  |“No. 2--1° more right.”[24]
+    |  3   |   3   |   ”  |  ”  |+ |A |  5′  |“No. 3--30′ more right.”[25]
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“All guns 30′ more
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |  right.”[26]
+    |      |       |      |     |  |  |      |“Corrector 162.” “3100.”
+    |  4   |   4   | 3100 | 162 |- |A |  5′  |“No. 4--10′ more left.”[27]
+    +------+-------+------+-----+--+--+------+---------------------------
+
+      N.B.--Notes [23] and [24] apply to 6-gun batteries only. In 4-gun
+      batteries individual corrections for line must be sent down
+     _before_ the new corrector or elevation is given.
+
+[23] These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down
+to the battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.
+
+[24] These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down
+to the battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.
+
+[25] These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down
+to the battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.
+
+[26] As the correction is one for all guns it is sent down _before_ the
+new corrector and elevation.
+
+[27] Individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery until the elevation for the next salvo has been given.
+
+         I.--_Example of “Collective Ranging”--continued._
+
+    ------+-------+------+-----+------------+---------------------------
+          |       |      |Corr-|  Observed. |
+      No. |  No.  |      |ector+--+--+------+
+      of  |  of   |Elev- | or  |+ |A |Height|  Battery Commander’s
+    round.|  Sub- |ation.|P.S. |or|or|  of  |      Orders.
+          |section|      |     |- |G.|burst.|
+    ------+-------+------+-----+--+--+------+---------------------------
+      5   |   5   | 3100 | 162 |- |G | ...  |“No. 5--20′ more right.”[28]
+      6   |   6   |  ”   |  ”  |- |G | ...  |“3300.”
+      7   |   1   | 3300 |  ”  |- |A |  5′  |
+      8   |   2   |  ”   |  ”  |- |G | ...  |“No. 2--20′ more right.”
+      9   |   3   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A |  5′  |“Corrector 158” “3350.”
+          |       |      |     |  |  |      | “Battery fire 10 seconds.”
+     10   |   1   | 3350 | 158 |- |A | 10′  |
+     11   |   2   |  ”   |  ”  |+ |G |      |
+     12   |   3   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A | 10′  |
+     13   |   4   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A |  5′  |
+     14   |   5   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A | 15′  |
+     15   |   6   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A | 10′  |
+     16   |   1   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A |  5′  |
+     17   |   2   |  ”   |  ”  |- |G |      |
+     18   |   3   |  ”   |  ”  |- |A | 10′  |“5 seconds.” [29]
+    ------+-------+------+-----+--+--+------+---------------------------
+
+[28] Individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery until the elevation for the next salvo has been given.
+
+[29] Line having been accurately found the battery commander varies
+his rate of fire to such speed as the tactical situation may demand.
+
+     II.--_Example of combined “Section” and “Collective Ranging.”_
+           (For all batteries except howitzer and heavy.)
+
+    Position of battery--Under Cover.
+    Target--6-gun battery in action (visible).
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----------------+------------------------
+          |       |      |Corr-|    Observed.   |
+      No. |  No.  |      |ector+---+---+--------+
+      of  |  of   |Elev- | or  | + |A  | Height |  Battery Commander’s
+    round.| Sub-  |ation.|P.S. |or |or |   of   |      Orders.
+          |section|      |     | - |G. | burst. |
+    ------+-------+------+-----+---+---+--------+------------------------
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Guns in action.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Angle of sight
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |      1° 30’ elevation.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Right Ranging.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |      “ Percussion.”[30]
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“45--42.” “Fire.”
+       1  |   1   | 4500 | P.S.| + |...|   ...  |“No. 1--30′ more right.”
+       2  |   2   | 4200 |  ”  | - |...|   ...  |“No. 2--30′ more right.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Remainder 30’ more
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |  right.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Collective.” “Corrector
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |  154.”
+          |       |      |     |   |  {    20′  |“4300.”
+       3  |   1   | 4300 | 154 |...| A{ (Bullets|
+          |       |      |     |   |  {  short).|
+       4  |   2   |  ”   |  ”  | ? | A |   20′  |
+       5  |   3   |  ”   |  ”  | - | A |    5′  |“Corrector 162.” “4400.”
+       6  |   4   | 4400 | 162 | + | A |    5′  |“No. 4--10′ more left.”
+       7  |   5   |  ”   |  ”  | + | G |   ...  |“No. 5--20′ more right.”
+       8  |   6   |  ”   |  ”  | + | G |   ...  |“Corrector 158.” “4350.”
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |“Battery Fire
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |       10 seconds.”
+       9  |   1   | 4350 | 158 | - | A |   10′  |
+      10  |   2   |  ”   |  ”  | - | A |   10′  |
+      11  |   3   |  ”   |  ”  | + | G |   ...  |“No. 3--10′ more left.”
+      12  |   4   |  ”   |  ”  | - | A |   10′  |
+      13  |   5   |  ”   |  ”  | - | A |    5′  |
+      14  |   6   |  ”   |  ”  | - | A |   10′  |“Section fire
+          |       |      |     |   |   |        |       10 seconds.”[31]
+    ------+-------+------+-----+---+---+--------+------------------------
+
+[30].--NOTES Or “Corrector 154.” “45--42.”
+
+[31].--Or “Battery fire ... seconds.”
+
+              III.--_Example of “Section Ranging.”_
+                         (For all batteries.)
+
+    Position of battery--In the open, supporting an infantry attack.
+    Target--A trench clearly visible from the battery. The trench,
+            its extent and the portion allotted to each section are
+            communicated to the section commanders.
+
+    ------+-----+------+----+-------------------+-----------------------
+          | No. |      |Cor-|     Observed.     |
+      No. | of  |Eleva-|rec-+-----+---+---------+
+      of  |Sub- |tion. |tor |  +  | A |  Height |    Battery Commander’s
+    round.|sec- |      | or | or  |or |   of    |         Orders.
+          |tion.|      |P.S.|  -  | G.|  burst. |
+    ------+-----+------+----+-----+---+---------+-----------------------
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |“Open Sights” (or
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  “Telescope sights”).
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  “Right ranging.”
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |      “Percussion.”[32]
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |“28--25.” “10
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  seconds.”[33]
+       1  |  1  | 2800 |P.S.|  +  |...|   ...   |“Section Commanders
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  correct for line.”
+       2  |  2  | 2500 | “  |  -  |...|   ...   |”27--26.“ ”2
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  seconds.“[34]
+       3  |  1  | 2700 | ”  |  +  |...|   ...   |
+       4  |  2  | 2600 | “  |  +  |...|   ...   |”26--25.”
+       5  |  1  | 2600 | “  |  +  |...|   ...   |
+       6  |  2  | 2500 | ”  |  -  |...|   ...   |“Corrector 144”
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |  “2550.” “Battery
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         | Fire, 10 seconds.”[35]
+    ------+-----+------+----+-----+---+---------+-----------------------
+
+[32] Or “Corrector 152”--“28--25.”
+
+[33] Interval suitable to time of flight is ordered as the battery is
+firing over the heads of its own infantry which is approaching the
+objective.
+
+[34] The battery commander is satisfied that his infantry is in no
+danger from his fire, so he shortens the interval.
+
+[35] As battery commander is not certain that the whole extent of the
+target is parallel to the front of the battery, he orders a longer
+interval in order that he may correct the range of individual guns if
+necessary.
+
+              III.--_Example of “Section Ranging”--continued._
+
+    ------+-----+------+----+-------------------+------------------------
+          | No. |      |Cor-|     Observed.     |
+      No. | of  |Eleva-|rec-+-----+---+---------+
+      of  |Sub- |tion. |tor |  +  | A |  Height |   Battery Commander’s
+    round.|sec- |      | or | or  |or |   of    |        Orders.
+          |tion.|      |P.S.|  -  | G.|  burst. |
+    ------+-----+------+----+-----+---+---------+------------------------
+       7  |  1  | 2550 |144 | ... | A |    5’   |
+       8  |  2  |   ”  | “  |  +  | G |   ...   |
+       9  |  3  |   ”  | ”  |  -  | G |   ...   |“Corrector 138.”
+      10  |  4  |   ”  |138 | ... | A |   10′   |
+          |     |      |    |     |   |{  10′   |
+      11  |  5  |   ”  | “  | ... | A |{(Bullets|
+          |     |      |    |     |   |{  over) |
+          |     |      |    |     |   |         |
+          |     |      |    |     |   |{  10′   |
+      12  |  6  |   ”  | ”  | ... | A |{(Bullets| “Left section drop 50.”
+          |     |      |    |     |   |{  over) |
+      13  |  1  |   ”  | “  | ... | A |   10′   |
+      14  |  2  |   ”  |... |Range| G |   ...   |
+      15  |  3  |   ”  |... | ... | A |   10′   |
+      16  |  4  |   ”  |... | ... | A |    5′   |
+      17  |  5  | 2500 |... | ... | A |   10′   |
+      18  |  6  |   ”  |... | ... | A |   10′   |
+      19  |  1  | 2550 |... | ... | A |   10′   |”2 seconds.“[36]
+      20} |     |      |    |     |   |         |
+      to} | ... | ...  |... | ... |...|   ...   |”20 seconds.“[37]
+      40} |     |      |    |     |   |         |
+    ------+-----+------+----+-----+---+---------+------------------------
+
+[36] Battery commander sees that his infantry is checked, so orders a
+burst of fire.
+
+[37] Battery commander seeing that his own infantry has been helped to
+advance, as desired, comes back to a slow rate.
+
+    IV.--_Example of engaging advancing (or retiring) infantry._
+
+    Position of battery--In observation under cover, with orders to delay
+    the advance of hostile infantry in a certain zone. Ground has been
+    registered.
+
+    Target--Lines of infantry. The angle of sight to a point towards which
+    they are advancing has been previously registered as 20’ depression,
+    the range as 3,650 yards.
+
+    ------+-----+------+----+--------------+----------------------------
+          | No. |      |Cor-|  Observed.   |
+      No. | of  |Eleva-|rec-+---+---+------+
+      of  |Sub- |tion. |tor | + | A |Height|   Battery Commander’s
+    round.|sec- |      | or |or |or |  of  |        Orders.
+          |tion.|      |P.S.| - | G.|burst.|
+    ------+-----+------+----+---+---+------+----------------------------
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“All guns 3° more right.”
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“Angle of sight
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |         20′ depression.”
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“Right ranging.”
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“Percussion.”[38]
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“37--36.” “Fire.”
+       1  |  1  | 3700 |P.S.| + |   |      |
+       2  |  2  | 3600 | “  | - |...| ...  |”All guns 1° more right.”
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“Corrector 146.”
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |“3650.” “One round battery
+          |     |      |    |   |   |      |  fire 10 seconds.”
+       3  |  1  | 3650 |146 | - | A | 10′  |
+       4  |  2  |  ”   | “  | - | G | ...  |”No. 2--20′ more right.”
+       5  |  3  |  ”   | “  | - | A | 15′  |
+       6  |  4  |  ”   | ”  | - | A | 10′  |
+       7  |  5  |  ”   | “  | + | G | ...  |”No. 5--10′ mere left.”
+       8  |  6  |  ”   | “  | - | A |  5′  |[39]
+    ------+-----+------+----+---+---+------+----------------------------
+
+[38]--Or “Corrector 154.”
+
+[39]--Battery commander has now corrected his lines and has
+established a “belt” of fire parallel to the front of his guns, through
+which the infantry must pass. In this example lines are not opened
+out. The whole “belt” can be shifted up and down, right or left, as
+the subsequent movement of the enemy may dictate, and a quick rate of
+battery or section fire can be employed as necessary.
+
+                   V.--_Example of “Section Ranging.”_
+                   (Howitzer battery. Ranging in degrees.)
+
+    Position of battery--Under cover, supporting an infantry attack.
+    Target--A trench.
+    Battery commander issues instructions for obtaining the line of fire.
+    Range-takers range 3300.
+
+    LEGEND:
+       A = No. of Subsection
+       B = Elevation.
+       C = Projectile.
+       D = Corrector.
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----+-------------------+---------------
+          |       |      |     |    |    Observed.      |
+      No. |   A   |  B   |  C  |  D +--+-----+---+------+
+      of  |       |      |     |    |+ |     |A  |Height|     Battery
+    round.|       |      |     |    |or|Line.|or |  of  |   Commander’s
+          |       |      |     |    |- |     |G. |burst.|     Orders.
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----+--+-----+---+------+---------------
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Trench.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Angle of
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |  sight.......”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Right ranging
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   lyddite.[40]
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   3rd charge.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“26°--23°, fire.”
+       1  |   1   | 26°  |  L  |... |+ |Left |   |      |
+       2  |   2   | 23°  |  L  |... |- |  ”  |...| ...  |“All guns 1°
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   more right.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   “25°--24°.”
+       3  |   1   | 25°  |  L  |... |+ |Right|...| ...  |“No. 1--20’
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    more left.”
+       4  |   2   | 24°  |  L  |... |- |Line |...| ...  |“Repeat.” “Time
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |     shrapnel.”
+       5  |   1   | 25°  |  L  |... |+ |  ”  |   |      |
+       6  |   2   | 24°  |  L  |... |- |  ”  |...| ...  |“Échelon 140.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    “24° 30′.”
+       7  |   1   |24°30′| T.S.|140 |? |  ”  | A | 60′  |
+       8  |   2   |  ”   |  ”  |150 |+ |  ”  | A | 40′  |
+       9  |   3   |  ”   |  ”  |160 |? |Right| A | 10′  |“No. 3--1° more
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |     left.”[41]
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Corrector 154,
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |      one round
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      | battery fire.”
+      10  |   1   |  ”   |  ”  |154 |- |Line | G |      |
+      11  |   2   |  ”   |  ”  | “  |- |  ”  | A |      |
+      12  |   3   |  ”   |  ”  | ”  |? |Left | A | ...  |“No. 3--20′ more
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    right.”[42]
+      13  |   4   |  ”   |  ”  | “  |? |Right| A | ...  |”No. 4--30′
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    more left.”
+      14  |   5   |  ”   |  ”  | “  |+ |Line | A |      |
+      15  |   6   |  ”   |  ”  | ”  |+ |  ”  | G | ...  |“Section fire
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |      40 secs.”
+    ------+-------+----------+------+--+-----+---+------+---------------
+
+    NOTES.--With 3rd Charge 1° elevation = 85 yards.
+            With 3rd Charge 50% zone     = 45 yards.
+
+[40] Or “Right ranging, 3rd Charge, Corrector 150, 26°--23°. fire.”
+
+[41] Splash of bullets visible.
+
+[42] Splash of bullets visible.
+
+               VI.--_Example of “Single Gun Ranging.”_
+                           (Heavy battery.)
+
+     Position of battery--Under cover.
+     Target--Guns in open.
+     Battery commander issues instructions for obtaining parallel
+        lines of fire.
+
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----+-------------------+---------------
+          |   No. |      |     |    |    Observed.      |
+      No. |   of  |Eleva-|Pro- |Cor-+--+-----+---+------+
+      of  |Subsec-|tion. |jec- |rec-|+ |     |A  |Height|    Battery
+    round.|  tion |      |tile.|tor.|or|Line.|or |  of  |   Commander’s
+          |       |      |     |    |- |     |G. |burst.|    Orders.
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----+--+-----+---+------+---------------
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Guns in action.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Angle of sight
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |  --1° 30′”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    elevation.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“No. 1 ranging.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Lyddite.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“6800.” “Fire.”
+       1  |   1   | 6800 |  L  |    |+ |Left |   |      |“All guns 20′
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   more right.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“6500.”
+       2  |   1   | 6500 |  L  |    |- |Line |   |      |“6700.”
+       3  |   1   | 6700 | P.S.|    |- |  ”  |   |      |“6800.”
+       4  |   1   | 6800 |  ”  |    |+ |  ”  |   |      |“6700.”  “Time
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |     shrapnel.”
+       5  |   1   | 6700 |  ”  |    |+ |  ”  |   |      |“Échelon 140.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |       “6700.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |
+       6  |   1   |   ”  | T.S.|140 |? |  ”  | A |  40′ |
+       7  |   2   |   ”  |  ”  |150 |- |Left | A |  10′ |“No. 2--30′
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   more right.”
+       8  |   3   |   ”  |  ”  |160 |+ |  ”  | G |      |“No. 3--20′
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   more right.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Corrector 146.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |      “One
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      | round battery
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |    fire.”
+       9  |   1   |   ”  |  ”  |146 |- |Line | A |  30′ |
+      10  |   2   |   ”  |  ”  | “  |+ |  ”  | A |  20′ |
+      11  |   3   |   ”  |  ”  | ”  |- |  ”  | A |  10′ |
+      12  |   4   |   ”  |  ”  | “  |? |Left | A |  25′ |”No. 4--10′
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   more right.”
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |“Section fire,
+          |       |      |     |    |  |     |   |      |   40 seconds.”
+    ------+-------+------+-----+----+--+-----+---+------+---------------
+
+
+CHANGE OF POSITION.
+
+
+=228.= _To advance._
+
+1. The alternative methods are as follows, that adopted depending upon
+the circumstances of the moment.
+
+      i. The battery commander orders “PREPARE TO ADVANCE” and
+           issues his instructions to the battery leader. The
+           captain orders up the gun limbers followed by the first
+           line wagons. As these approach the position the battery
+           commander orders “CEASE FIRING,” “FRONT (OR REAR) LIMBER
+           UP.” The firing battery wagons remain on the position
+           and are removed under the orders of the captain.
+
+     ii. If it is proposed to advance with the firing battery
+          wagons the battery commander orders “WITH FIRING BATTERY
+          WAGONS PREPARE TO ADVANCE.” Procedure is similar to that
+          in i., except that the teams (or limbers, if wagons have
+          been unlimbered) of the firing battery wagons are sent
+          up in the place of the first line wagons.
+
+    iii. The battery commander orders “PREPARE TO LIMBER UP,”
+          and issues instructions to the battery leader and
+          section commanders. The guns are run back to cover by
+          hand and limbered up independently under the supervision
+          of section commanders. The captain directs the first
+          line wagons under charge of a non-commissioned officer
+          to the position of assembly (Sec. =195= (5)), and sends
+          up each limber to its gun as soon as he sees that
+          it is required. When limbered up each gun proceeds
+          independently to the position of assembly, where it is
+          formed up by the non-commissioned officer in charge of
+          the first line wagons. The firing battery wagons are
+          left on the position to be removed under the orders of
+          the captain as circumstances permit.
+
+In a covered position it will generally be possible to adopt methods i.
+or ii.
+
+In an open or semi-covered position a cessation of hostile fire may
+permit of method i., but more often it will be necessary to adopt
+method iii.
+
+On occasions it may be advisable to move a portion of the battery
+covered by the fire of the remaining guns.
+
+
+=229.= _To retire._
+
+1. When a retirement is contemplated the battery commander informs
+the captain of his intentions, specifying the general direction to be
+followed, and, should he intend the battery to come into action again,
+the approximate locality of the new position. He will also give orders
+as to whether the first line wagons are to accompany or precede the
+battery in the retirement. The captain arranges for the movement of the
+first line wagons accordingly.
+
+Two alternative methods of carrying out the retirement are given, that
+adopted depending upon the circumstances of the case, and being subject
+to modifications if the battery is under heavy hostile fire.
+
+      i. The battery commander orders “PREPARE TO RETIRE”
+           and issues his instructions to the battery leader. The
+           captain orders up the gun limbers, followed by the teams
+           (or limbers, if wagons have been unlimbered) of the
+           firing battery wagons. As these approach the position
+           the battery commander orders “CEASE FIRING,”
+           “REAR (OR FRONT) LIMBER UP.”
+
+    ii. The battery commander orders “TO RETIRE, PREPARE TO
+          LIMBER UP,” and issues any necessary instructions to
+          the battery leader and section commanders. A few rounds
+          are taken from each wagon and laid on the ground beside
+          the gun. The firing battery wagons are run back under
+          cover by hand. Their teams (or limbers, if wagons have
+          been unlimbered) are then sent up by the captain as
+          required, and the wagons driven to the position of
+          assembly. As soon as the battery commander sees that the
+          firing battery wagons are clear, he orders “CEASE
+          FIRING,” and the guns are run back by hand and
+          limbered up as in method iii., Sec. =228=.
+
+It may sometimes be advisable to withdraw a portion of the battery
+covered by the fire of the remaining guns.
+
+Should it be intended to come into action again, the captain (or a
+section commander), as soon as his duties allow, accompanied by the
+range-takers, and such other members of the battery headquarters as can
+be spared, proceeds to reconnoitre and select the new position.
+
+In a covered position it will generally be possible to adopt method i.
+
+In an open or semi-covered position a cessation of hostile fire may
+permit of method i., but more often it wall be necessary to adopt
+method ii.
+
+
+REPLACEMENT OF CASUALTIES.
+
+
+=230.= _Casualties on the move._
+
+1. If during an advance or retirement a wagon becomes separated from
+its gun, the gun will proceed and come into action with the battery.
+The wagon will drive up into its place as soon as it is able to catch
+up, or in case of a serious breakdown, the captain will send up a wagon
+from the first line wagons. Till the arrival of the wagon, ammunition
+will be obtained from the wagon limber of the other gun of the section.
+
+Should a casualty occur to a gun, the damage should, when possible, be
+made good from its wagon.
+
+2. In mountain artillery, if a firing battery mule becomes a casualty,
+its load will at once be transferred to the relief mule, another relief
+mule to replace this one being immediately ordered up from the first
+line mules. It will sometimes save delay, when the distance to the
+position for action is short, to bring up the load by hand.
+
+
+=231.= _Casualties in action._
+
+1. The following rules refer to the immediate replacement of casualties
+in action. They do not preclude other arrangements being subsequently
+made by superior authority. (_See also_ Handbook of the gun.)
+
+1. Casualties are replaced by the next senior as soon as circumstances
+permit. All ranks must, therefore, know what duties they will perform
+in the event of casualties occurring.
+
+ii. If, when the battery commander becomes a casualty, the captain is
+not with the line of guns, the senior section commander will command
+until the latter arrives.
+
+In cases where the battery commander only leaves the battery
+temporarily (as, for instance, when he is the senior battery commander,
+and takes command of the brigade while its commander is reconnoitring),
+the senior section commander leads the battery, the captain remaining
+in charge of the wagons.
+
+iii. Men sent up to replace casualties will report themselves to the
+section commanders who should order such changes of duties in their
+detachments as they consider necessary. Section commanders must
+remember that the layer will probably not show any visible signs of
+fatigue until long after he has for the time being lost his efficiency
+as a layer. When firing is continuous he should be changed after about
+half an hour.
+
+iv. Wounded will be sent back to the line of wagons, if it can be done
+without impediment to the service of the guns, from whence they will be
+removed to the dressing station.
+
+2. Ammunition wagons may be ignited on being struck either by
+projectiles or bullets, the liability increasing with the amount of
+wood used in the construction of the wagons or boxes. Should a wagon
+be ignited by a projectile there is usually very little danger of it
+blowing up immediately; attempts should therefore at once be made to
+put out the fire, remove the ammunition from the wagon, or move the
+wagon away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+AMMUNITION SUPPLY.
+
+
+=232.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The necessity for an ample supply of ammunition for guns and rifles
+makes the position of wagon lines and ammunition columns in action a
+matter of great importance.
+
+2. The object to be kept in view therefore is that the various échelons
+should be so situated on the march that when an engagement takes place
+it may be possible to arrange for a regular supply of ammunition from
+rear to front to replace that expended in action.
+
+The supply from ammunition columns is not necessarily restricted to
+troops of their own division or brigade; any troops are to receive
+ammunition on demand during an action, from any column which may be at
+hand.
+
+3. The work of replenishment is divided between:--
+
+     i. Units with the fighting troops.
+    ii. Units on the line of communication, working under the
+          inspector-general of communications.
+
+4. The artillery ammunition available with the fighting troops is
+distributed in action as follows:--
+
+      i. The firing battery.
+     ii. First line wagons. (Mtn. Art., 1st line mules.)
+    iii. Brigade ammunition columns.
+     iv. Divisional ammunition columns.
+
+Details regarding the amounts carried for the various types of ordnance
+are shown in “War Establishments.”
+
+
+=233.= _Ammunition supply within the battery._
+
+(_Wagon supply._)
+
+1. The supply of ammunition will be, as a rule, first from the wagon
+body and next from the wagon limber. When the ammunition in the wagon
+body is exhausted it will be unlimbered and run out of the way, and the
+limber will be run back till its axletree is in line with that of the
+gun.
+
+The captain is responsible for maintaining the supply of ammunition in
+the battery.
+
+_Mountain artillery._--The battery supply of ammunition is carried on
+8 ammunition mules, of which 2 accompany the firing battery and 6 go
+with the 1st line mules. The supply of ammunition will be from the
+first pair of boxes with the firing battery, while the ammunition in
+the second pair of boxes will be kept as a reserve, and only used in
+emergency.
+
+
+(_Limber supply._)
+
+2. It may sometimes be necessary for the guns of a firing battery to
+leave the wagons and trust to the ammunition in the limbers. The horses
+will then be unhooked from the limbers as soon as the limbers have
+reversed, and the limbers will be placed in position by hand on the
+right of the guns, poles to the front, axletrees of limbers in line
+with, and 6 inches from, the axletrees of the guns.
+
+In the case of horse artillery taking part in a cavalry action, or of
+field artillery, when limbered up, being charged by cavalry, it may be
+necessary to draw ammunition from the limbers without unhooking. The
+battery commander orders “WITHOUT UNHOOKING LIMBER SUPPLY,” and on
+coming into action, the limber is halted 5 yards in rear of the trail
+eye, the team facing to the rear.
+
+In either case if the wagons arrive, they will not be brought up to the
+firing battery, unless specially ordered, but will be halted in such a
+position as to be available for the next move, when, if required, the
+wagon limbers may be substituted for the gun limbers.
+
+
+=234.= _Replenishment of ammunition._
+
+1. When the captain becomes aware, either by personal observation or
+by the receipt of information from the battery that ammunition is
+required, he will send or order forward the first line wagons.
+
+2. It is his duty to arrange how the wagons can best be brought up to
+the firing battery and to inform section commanders of his proposed
+arrangements.
+
+If the battery is not under a heavy fire, and there is no danger of
+disclosing the position of guns hitherto undetected by the enemy, the
+wagons can be driven into position on the right of the guns, the teams
+subsequently hooking into the empty wagons and taking them back to the
+wagon line.
+
+Sometimes it may be feasible to push forward a few wagons from the
+first line wagon position to a point nearer to the battery, from which
+the replenishment of ammunition can be carried out by hand, using
+ammunition carriers.
+
+3. Whenever the brigade commander, or battery commander if acting
+independently, considers that the tactical situation or the position
+the guns will occupy, make it desirable to have more ammunition with
+the guns than is contained in the six wagons, he may order the first
+line wagons to accompany the battery into action. In this case the
+first line wagons follow the firing battery wagons. The latter form up
+and unhook in the usual manner; the former halt as close as possible
+in rear of the guns, unlimber, and the limbers return with the gun
+limbers.
+
+
+_Mountain Artillery._
+
+When the ammunition in the first pair of boxes is becoming exhausted,
+the captain orders up one mule per subsection from the 1st line; these
+will be sent up under a N.C.O.
+
+The reserve numbers take off the full boxes and load up the empty ones,
+while No. 5 takes out any rounds that may be unexpended from the first
+pair of boxes, placing them under the lid of one of the second pair.
+
+The mules with the empty boxes will be led back to the 1st line by the
+N.C.O. who brought them up. If the firing battery mules are separated
+from the 1st line, six more ammunition mules will then be sent under a
+N.C.O. to join them.
+
+In order that the battery may always move with two full pairs of
+boxes per subsection in the firing battery, the captain will see that
+one ammunition mule per subsection loaded with a full pair of boxes
+accompanies the firing battery mules, when the order to limber up is
+given. The partly empty pair of boxes will be loaded upon the mule sent
+up for the purpose, which will then join the 1st line.
+
+The ammunition in partly empty boxes will be redistributed so as to
+keep as many full boxes as possible, and mules with empty boxes will be
+sent to the ammunition column to replenish.
+
+
+=235.= _Brigade ammunition columns._
+
+1. Brigade ammunition columns form an integral part of the artillery
+brigades to which they belong. Besides supplying ammunition, they form
+a reserve in men, horses, and _matériel_ to the batteries of their
+brigade. If necessary their own efficiency must be sacrificed to make
+good losses in the batteries. In cases of emergency help should also be
+extended to batteries of other brigades.
+
+2. Brigade ammunition columns usually march in the rear of the
+fighting troops of their division, or brigade in the case of a cavalry
+brigade not allotted to a cavalry division. =When an action is
+probable a non-commissioned officer from the ammunition column should
+accompany the headquarters of the artillery brigade for purposes of
+intercommunication=.
+
+3. The position of the columns during a battle will normally be
+regulated by artillery brigade commanders in accordance with the
+instructions of divisional artillery commanders. It may sometimes be
+necessary for the higher commanders to issue special orders as to
+their positions and as to the units they are to supply. The positions
+selected should offer facilities for intercommunication and movement,
+and should be about a mile in rear of the battery wagon lines.
+
+4. On arriving at the position allotted him the commander of a
+brigade ammunition column will inform the commander of the artillery
+brigade of his arrival, and place himself in communication with the
+units he receives orders to supply. He will provide the commander of
+the infantry brigade ammunition reserve and each battery wagon line
+commander with an orderly, who is to be used only in connection with
+ammunition supply. One of the mounted men with the battery wagon line
+should also know the position of the column and the best way to it.
+
+5. If troops are scattered, it may be necessary to distribute the
+sections of the ammunition column in order to bring the reserves of
+ammunition nearer the troops engaged. Commanders of sections will then
+deal direct with wagon line or infantry brigade ammunition reserve
+commanders, keeping the brigade ammunition column commander informed
+of the issues made by them.
+
+6. On receipt of a message that ammunition is wanted, the column
+commander will send forward the number of wagons or carts demanded
+(under an officer if possible) the orderly who brought the message
+being used to guide them to their destination. The ammunition is then
+either transferred from the full to the empty vehicles, or an exchange
+of vehicles is effected. If the latter procedure is adopted, it will be
+necessary to transfer men’s cloaks and equipment from one set of wagons
+to the other.
+
+If the position of the wagon line or infantry brigade ammunition
+reserve is much exposed, the empty vehicles should be withdrawn and the
+transfer of ammunition carried out under cover.
+
+7. Indents on ammunition columns are unnecessary. Receipts will be
+prepared by the officer handing over the ammunition for the number of
+full wagons or carts issued from the column, and will be signed by the
+officer receiving them, who is responsible for seeing that they contain
+what he requires.
+
+The account of rounds fired by any unit during an action is not the
+affair of the brigade ammunition column commander. Such accounts must
+be kept under the orders of the commander of the unit.
+
+
+_Field artillery (howitzer) brigade ammunition columns, and ammunition
+columns with mountain or heavy batteries._
+
+8. The procedure of field artillery (howitzer) brigade ammunition
+columns and ammunition columns with mountain or heavy batteries, will,
+as regards artillery ammunition, be similar to that laid down in the
+foregoing paragraphs.
+
+
+_Horse artillery ammunition columns._
+
+9. The procedure of horse artillery ammunition columns, as regards the
+provision of gun ammunition to batteries will be carried out as far as
+possible on similar lines to those laid down in paras. 1 to 7 above.
+(_See also_ Sec. =176=.)
+
+
+=236.= _Divisional ammunition columns._
+
+1. Divisional ammunition columns form part of the divisional artillery.
+They are under the immediate orders of divisional artillery commanders.
+Normally, their position on the line of march is regulated by
+divisional headquarters, but may, if necessary, be fixed by army or
+general headquarters.
+
+2. Each divisional ammunition column consists of four sections, of
+which the first three carry small arm and 18-pr. ammunition and the
+fourth ammunition for the howitzer brigade and heavy battery.
+
+3. When an action is imminent sections of the divisional ammunition
+columns will be ordered to form reserves of ammunition at convenient
+points, which will also be the refilling points for such sections.
+(_See_ Sec. =237= (4).) The position of these points will be fixed by
+divisional headquarters, if necessary under instructions from army
+headquarters, and should usually be about two miles in rear of brigade
+ammunition columns.
+
+4. The divisional ammunition column commander should establish his
+headquarters at the rendezvous selected for the divisional ammunition
+park. (_See_ Sec. =237= (4).)
+
+It is his duty to ascertain the position of this rendezvous if this
+information is not sent to him, and to arrange for the replenishment of
+ammunition within the limits specified in such orders as he may have
+received from the divisional artillery commander.
+
+5. Each commander of a section which is detached will notify his
+arrival at his destination to the divisional artillery commander and
+to the divisional ammunition column commander, and will also send an
+orderly to open communication with each brigade ammunition column which
+he is to supply.
+
+6. The supply of ammunition from these sections to brigade ammunition
+columns will be carried out on the same principles as those laid
+down for brigade ammunition columns and batteries, ammunition being
+sent forward to the brigade columns in the vehicles belonging to the
+divisional columns.
+
+7. There are no divisional ammunition columns for the cavalry division
+or army troops.
+
+
+=237.= _Ammunition reserves on the line of communication._
+
+1. The ammunition held in reserve on the line of communications is
+divided between ordnance depôts and ammunition parks. The proportion
+of ammunition to be held at each depôt is determined by the
+inspector-general of communications in accordance with the instructions
+he receives from general headquarters.
+
+2. The inspector-general of communications is responsible that the
+ammunition reserves are pushed up by means of the railway and parks to
+within reach of the fighting troops.
+
+3. During an action, the ammunition park will be sent forward to a
+rendezvous as directed by the inspector-general of communications under
+instructions from general or army headquarters. This rendezvous should
+be placed sufficiently far behind the fighting troops to ensure freedom
+of movement to the latter.
+
+As a rule the best position for the headquarters of the ammunition park
+will be at railhead or corresponding locality but either the commander
+of the park or his representative will be required at the rendezvous,
+which will also be the headquarters of the divisional ammunition
+column. (_See_ Sec. =236= (4).)
+
+4. From the rendezvous sections or portions of sections will be sent
+forward to the refilling points (Sec. =236= (3)) to replenish sections
+of the divisional ammunition column in accordance with the demands of
+the divisional ammunition column commander, who is responsible for
+regulating the amount of ammunition sent forward from the parks to
+refill these sections.
+
+In favourable circumstances it may be possible to refill brigade
+ammunition columns direct from park vehicles.
+
+After reaching the rendezvous the movements of the ammunition park for
+a cavalry division and for a cavalry brigade (with attached troops)
+not allotted to a cavalry division will normally be regulated by the
+headquarters of the cavalry formations concerned under instructions
+received from general headquarters. Ammunition parks for these troops
+carry ammunition direct to brigade ammunition columns or to regiments,
+&c., as may be convenient.
+
+5. Ammunition required to replenish ammunition parks will be demanded
+by park commanders through the headquarters of the inspector-general
+of communications, who is responsible that the ammunition required to
+refill the parks is sent to suitable localities on the railway.
+
+6. An artillery officer is allotted to each ammunition park who is
+responsible for seeing that the lorries forwarded to the various
+refilling points contain the nature of ammunition required. In order to
+carry out this duty he should, during an action, locate himself at the
+rendezvous.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+FIELD ENGINEERING.
+
+(_See also_ “Manual of Field Engineering.”)
+
+
+=238.= _Entrenching and concealing guns._
+
+1. The importance of concealment, both in attack and defence, has
+increased with the destructive effect of quick firing artillery, but
+is valuable only so long as its employment does not interfere with
+effective fire.
+
+2. There is a two-fold object in making use of cover, viz., concealment
+from view and protection from fire. By these means the possibility of
+surprising the enemy with fire is increased, while the possibility of
+being immobilized by hostile fire is diminished.
+
+3. Guns may be concealed either by making use of natural or artificial
+cover, and sometimes by the selection of sites with a suitable
+background, but reconnaissance of the position can alone show if
+concealment is likely to be temporary or permanent. If circumstances
+permit, the sites for the guns should be viewed from the most suitable
+observation posts for the enemy’s artillery before they are finally
+fixed, bearing in mind that positions which are effectively hidden from
+the front often become visible by moving a short distance to a flank.
+
+4. Advantage should invariably be taken of any natural cover available,
+but to give efficient protection against fire some artificial cover
+will usually be required.
+
+When the contour of the ground is favourable trees will give valuable
+cover from view, and so make it more difficult for the enemy to obtain
+the range. A position behind a wood, a hedge or belt of trees can often
+be found where the guns can be brought into action unseen by the enemy,
+the fire being observed from a position in rear.
+
+5. Experience shows that anything that breaks the view close in front
+of distant objects greatly increases the difficulty of seeing them.
+Such material as nets or bamboo trellis with bits of the surrounding
+vegetation stuck into them may be used for this purpose. If guns have
+to be placed on a skyline, a strip of sacking stretched in front
+of them may serve as a false skyline when viewed from the enemy’s
+position. Similarly brushwood hurdles placed behind guns to act as a
+background will often conceal them for the time being.
+
+To prevent guns being located by the dust thrown up on discharge the
+ground should be watered for some yards in front of the muzzles, or
+such material as raw hides, and sacking, pegged down over it.
+
+For a similar reason the movements of guns and individuals must be
+restricted as much as possible when there is any likelihood of the
+enemy being able to observe them.
+
+6. In entrenching guns the first consideration is fire effect, the
+second that while getting some cover in the shortest possible time the
+form of the work should be such as to admit of gradual improvement in
+the event of more time being available.
+
+The site of a gun emplacement having been selected, the first step is
+to decide whether an epaulment or pit is most suitable, the next is to
+mark out the platform for the gun, which must be large enough to enable
+it to be traversed so as to engage any likely objective.
+
+In deciding whether gun pits or epaulments are to be made, it must be
+remembered that sinking the guns reduces their field of fire and makes
+more dead ground in front of them if the position is not already under
+cover.
+
+On the other hand the difficulty of locating guns from aircraft is
+greater if sunken sites without parapets are employed.
+
+7. At first, a simple parapet to supplement the cover afforded by the
+shield and to protect the detachment, when kneeling, from oblique
+fire should be provided. For this purpose some empty corn sacks may
+be carried by guns on active service. These may also be found useful
+in bright weather in preventing the glint from the tyres disclosing
+their position. Subsequently the cover can be improved and pits, with
+ammunition shelves or recesses in front or rear to cover the detachment
+standing, may be added, but a clear space of 13 feet between these
+pits is necessary for working field guns. The breadth of the embrasure
+will depend on the field of fire to be covered. The recoil of the gun
+carriage should be prevented by digging a trench for the spade, butting
+it against a plank or sleeper.
+
+8. Every effort should be made to assimilate the emplacement with its
+surroundings. Sharp angles, steep ends and clearly defined embrasures,
+which throw dark shadows, should be avoided as likely to attract
+attention, and the intervals between the emplacements themselves may be
+filled with some form of screen with advantage.
+
+Any newly-turned earth, if liable to be seen by the enemy, should be
+covered with turf, bushes, &c.
+
+9. If time and tools permit, cover for an ammunition wagon near each
+gun, and a blinded communication trench for the men replenishing
+ammunition should be provided; or, where this is not practicable, some
+shelter pits to afford resting places for the men supplying ammunition
+by hand from the wagon line.
+
+Where still more time is available traverses against enfilade fire and
+overhead splinter-proof cover may be prepared. For the latter purpose
+uprights are needed to carry horizontal transoms on which planks or
+corrugated iron are arranged to support earth to the thickness of 12
+inches. Uprights and transoms should be 8 to 10 inches in diameter,
+except in the case of such of the latter as are only required for short
+spans.
+
+Special cover is required for the battery commander and his
+headquarters, the battery leader and his signallers, and section
+commanders. A type of protected observing station is shown in Plate IV.
+If time admits, head cover with some form of loophole should be added.
+
+10. Diagrams of an epaulment and gun pit are shown on Plates V and
+VI, but they are not intended as types to be rigidly copied on all
+occasions.
+
+For heavy guns a parapet about 3 feet in height should be carried round
+in front of the carriage, and should be constructed with a radius
+admitting of ample interior space and a wide field of fire. The gun
+should be run as close to the parapet as possible. It is generally
+inadvisable, unless artificial platforms are available, to disturb the
+natural surface of the ground.
+
+11. Cover from both view and fire may sometimes be obtained by a
+combination of natural and artificial cover:--
+
+     i. By scarping the reverse crest of a steep ridge
+         (_See_ Fig. 34).
+
+    ii. By sinking pits close to the front crest of a feature
+         (_See_ Fig. 35).
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 34]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IV.
+
+PROTECTED OBSERVING STATION.]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE V.
+
+GUN EPAULMENT FOR SHIELDED GUN.
+
+(_Not drawn to Scale._)
+
+The breadth of the embrasure must depend on circumstances; if the field
+of fire is limited by ground or by the target it can be narrowed, if
+not it must be fairly broad.]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VI.
+
+GUN PIT FOR SHIELDED GUN.
+
+(_Not drawn to Scale._)
+
+The breadth of the embrasure must depend on circumstances; if the field
+of fire is limited by ground or by the target it can be narrowed, if
+not it must be fairly broad.]
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 35.]
+
+12. In some circumstances guns may have to be entrenched under cover
+of darkness in readiness to open fire at daylight. Careful preliminary
+reconnaissance is the chief essential to avoid mistakes in carrying out
+the various works (_See_ Sec. =189=), special care being taken to make
+sure that the principal line of fire is laid out correctly.
+
+While the nature of the soil, the proximity of the enemy and the time
+available will all have their influence on the details of the works,
+every endeavour should be made to conceal them from view.
+
+
+=239.= _Passage of obstacles._
+
+1. The obstacles likely to be met with will vary from walls or ditches
+to unfordable rivers. In the case of the smaller obstacles a few
+minutes’ use of the tools carried with the battery will often be all
+that is required.
+
+2. Obstacles should be crossed at right angles and in column of route,
+as each carriage will make the way easier for the one which follows.
+In the case of boggy places, however, each carriage should cross at
+a different spot. The gunners should always be dismounted from the
+carriages if there is any likelihood of the latter being overturned.
+
+3. For the passage of small ravines a serviceable bridge can be
+quickly made by using a pair of wheels on their axle to support the
+road-bearers. _See_ Fig. 36.
+
+If the bottom of the ravine is soft, two spars, D and E, should be
+lashed to the wheels as shown. The wheels are then lowered, hauled into
+position, and secured by guys AB, BC.
+
+One or two transoms (H) are then lashed across the top of the wheels
+with square lashing and the road-bearers (R, R) placed in position. The
+number of the latter depends on their strength and on the weight to be
+passed over.
+
+Transoms 4 × 9 inches (8 inches in mean diameter if round) and 5
+road-bearers, mean diameter 6½ inches, will bear field guns and
+howitzers. The road-bearers should be butted against pieces of timber
+(F, G) sunk in the ground.
+
+If planks are procurable to form the roadway, they should be used. If
+not, the road-bearers must be placed close together and covered with
+branches of trees and brushwood. If horses are to cross the bridge, it
+should be covered with earth to deaden the sound.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 36.]
+
+4. Plate VII shows another type of bridge constructed with stores, most
+of which are carried with a battery.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VII.]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VIII.]
+
+5. Should it be required to pass field guns across a river quickly, the
+gun and carriage can be floated across by means of four casks lashed as
+shown in Plate VIII.
+
+The number of casks required can be calculated from the following
+rule:--
+
+The available buoyancy of a cask (_i.e._, weight which it will support)
+in pounds is found by multiplying its contents in gallons by 9. Thus a
+108-gallon cask has an available buoyancy of 972 lbs.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+RECONNAISSANCE DUTIES, RANGE-FINDING, AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE.
+
+
+=240.= _General instructions._
+
+1. The primary object of artillery reconnaissance is to collect and
+transmit information, which is important from an artillery point of
+view, to the commander who orders the reconnaissance. At the same time
+anything which is likely to prove of value to the other arms should be
+noted. While smokeless powder and long-range weapons have increased the
+difficulties of reconnaissance, they have also added to the value and
+importance of accurate information. It is essential, therefore, that
+artillery should be well trained in this difficult work.
+
+2. In each artillery brigade there should be at least one officer’s
+patrol, the members of which are accustomed to work together, and
+capable of carrying out a combined reconnaissance.
+
+These patrols, which should ordinarily consist of an officer with one
+or two selected non-commissioned officers and range-takers, may often
+be required to carry out reconnaissances for the divisional artillery
+commander. (_See_ Sec. =153= (2).)
+
+When not so required they are at the disposal of the brigade commander.
+As batteries may also have to act singly, there should be some men in
+each capable of carrying out a simple reconnaissance.
+
+Men selected for this work should be good riders and horse-masters.
+
+3. The mounted men of brigade or divisional artillery headquarters
+should also be trained in reconnaissance and scouting, so that they may
+be capable of:--
+
+      i. Reconnoitring the enemy’s position and observing the
+           effect of fire.
+
+     ii. Watching and reporting the progress of friendly troops
+           during an attack.
+
+    iii. Reconnoitring and watching ground in the vicinity of
+           batteries to assist in ensuring their safety.
+
+     iv. Supplementing other means of intercommunication.
+
+These duties cannot all be performed simultaneously with the number of
+men available. A commander must, therefore, husband his resources so as
+to have one or more of his headquarters available in an emergency.
+
+4. The training should be individual and progressive and should be made
+as interesting as possible. The following sections are intended to
+serve as a guide to the principal points to which attention should be
+directed.
+
+
+=241.= _Visual training._
+
+1. The men should be taken to some ground with a good view all round,
+and each in turn questioned as to what he makes of distant objects such
+as men, cattle, bushes, rocks, &c.; his answers being checked with
+field glasses by the instructor. These practices should be repeated
+till the men are proficient at picking out objects under varying
+circumstances of light, atmosphere, background and surroundings.
+
+2. The effect which these conditions have on the appearance and
+apparent distance of objects should be pointed out. Thus the ranges to
+objects are underestimated in a bright light or clear atmosphere, when
+background and object are of different colours, with the sun at one’s
+back, with water or snow to look over and when looking up or down hill.
+
+With a dark background, with the light in the eyes, on broken ground
+and when looking over a valley or undulating ground, the ranges to
+objects are overestimated.
+
+Objects dimly seen at evening, and in misty weather, appear
+more distant and larger than in reality. When the sun shines on
+entrenchments, the salient parts project their shadows on to the
+re-entering parts and when freshly raised they look lighter than the
+surrounding ground.
+
+
+=242.= _Training in judging distance._
+
+1. The faculty of judging distances correctly can be developed by
+practice, but rapid and accurate estimates cannot be expected until the
+visual powers of the soldier have been developed.
+
+When judging distance a man must not be allowed to guess, but must be
+made to give reasons for his estimate.
+
+2. The following is the system usually recommended:--
+
+i. Measure out distances of hundreds of yards, from 100 to 500, and
+accustom the soldier to recognize these distances.
+
+ii. Ascertain the exact range of certain objects visible from the
+drill ground or barracks and teach him to note from these places the
+appearance of the objects under varying atmospheric conditions. When he
+has got the measured distances and the appearance of the objects firmly
+into his mind he should be exercised at longer ranges. To judge these
+he should measure the intervening ground by mental comparison with the
+distances with which he is familiar, or, should all the ground up to
+the object not be visible, he must judge the range from the impression
+conveyed to his eye by the object, bearing in mind how this impression
+may be affected by the conditions mentioned in Sec. =241= (2), as well
+as those which follow.
+
+3. Under normal conditions:--
+
+      i. Movement of legs and arms can be distinguished at 1,000 yds.
+     ii. Individual men become vertical lines at 1,500 yards.
+    iii. Infantry and cavalry at 1,500 yards can be
+           distinguished only by their mode of motion.
+     iv. At 2,000 yards infantry presents a thick line, cavalry a
+           thicker line with a jagged top.
+
+4. In estimating long distances, the time taken in going over them
+should form a very fair guide. A man should know his own normal pace
+and the various rates at which his horse walks and trots.
+
+5. Distance can also be judged by sound. The time in seconds between
+the flash of a gun and hearing the report multiplied by 370 gives
+the distance (in yards) travelled by the sound approximately: this,
+however, may be affected by wind and atmosphere.
+
+
+=243.= _Training in observation._
+
+1. The habit of noting and remembering small signs or details, both at
+a distance and near at hand, is important. It is closely connected with
+the two subjects discussed above, and should be gradually introduced
+while they are being taught.
+
+2. The following is one method of training men in this subject:--
+
+The whole terrain in front is roughly divided into right, centre and
+left sections.
+
+These again are divided into:--
+
+     i. The background.
+    ii. The foreground.
+
+The men are formed up in extended order and allowed to observe the
+landscape for a few minutes, and then turned about. The instructor then
+ascertains the number, nature, and distance, of the objects each man
+has noted in these divisions. Even if only one object is noted in each,
+it makes six objects noticed, and this is more than the untrained mind
+usually identifies.
+
+They should learn to classify the objects they see under various
+headings, as for example:--
+
+    Human beings.
+    Animals.
+    Houses, farms, roads, paths, &c.
+    Trees and vegetable growths.
+    Water and rivers.
+    Rocks, hills, &c.
+
+They should also know such facts as that dust raised by cavalry forms
+a high light cloud; by infantry a lower and denser one; by wheeled
+vehicles denser still, and broken.
+
+3. Regular instruction of this kind, whether held indoors or in the
+open, gradually educates men to make an intelligent use of their eyes
+until an automatic connection is established between the eye and brain,
+and sight becomes observation.
+
+When the instruction of the men has advanced sufficiently, they may be
+classified both by a “time test” and a “number of objects” test, which
+increases the interest.
+
+4. The men who prove themselves most proficient in these exercises
+should be further instructed in the use of the telescope and field
+glasses. When ground is available, a military aspect should be given
+to the training as much as possible. For instance, a number of objects
+such as dummies, kneeling and lying behind rocks, hats or helmets
+resting on stones or bushes, horses or dummies standing against a dark
+background, and dummies’ heads on the sky line may be arranged on some
+position the distance of which from the selected point of observation
+will depend on the atmospheric conditions. The class is then taken out
+by the instructor, the battery telescope on the tripod set up, each man
+looks through it, identifies as many objects as he can, and writes them
+down. When a certain amount of proficiency has been attained in this
+way the tripod should be dispensed with and the men taught to use the
+telescope kneeling or prone, making use of any improvised rest that may
+be available.
+
+Practice at locating and identifying moving objects should also be
+given.
+
+5. Exercises in observation may be carried out during a march or at
+exercising order. Thus, after going a certain distance each man may
+be questioned upon, or required to jot down what he has observed
+of any military importance, _e.g._, rivers, bridges, cross roads,
+sign posts, villages, provision shops, smithies, post and telegraph
+offices, haystacks, &c. These occasions also afford the instructor an
+opportunity of pointing out such objects of interest as the varieties
+of trees and vegetation, and the habits of animals.
+
+
+=244.= _Reports and sketches._
+
+(_See also_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 16.)
+
+1. Officers who may be called upon to carry out reconnaissances should
+be capable of executing rough maps and also panorama sketches. They
+should be trained in selecting aiming points, in calculating the
+necessary deflection from them to various objectives, and in estimating
+slopes over which guns can fire at given ranges.
+
+They should be able to write a concise report containing only such
+information as will be of use to the officer for whom it is intended,
+and which is relevant to the object in view. If an area is being
+reconnoitred for artillery positions the report should commence with
+a brief description of the area reconnoitred, the positions available
+with their special advantages or disadvantages.
+
+The positions recommended to be occupied should then be given and
+information furnished on such points as the following:--
+
+       i. The approaches, whether concealed or exposed: and the
+            nature of the ground, whether hard or boggy.
+      ii. What formation batteries can advance in.
+     iii. Positions of readiness in their vicinity.
+      iv. Suitability for direct or indirect laying.
+       v. Nature of gun-platform.
+      vi. Number of guns for which there is room at full interval.
+     vii. Best positions for observation of fire.
+    viii. Positions for first line wagons.
+      ix. Description and position of any natural screen in front
+            or to the flanks.
+       x. Necessity for any field work.
+      xi. Best method of protecting position from surprise; dead
+            ground in front or to the flanks.
+     xii. Best lines of advance from the position and the extent
+            to which they are concealed from view.
+    xiii. Obstacles to movement, such as streams with high banks
+            and bogs.
+
+If time admits a rough map on a scale of about 4 inches to 1 mile,
+showing the proposed positions of the guns and 1st line wagons, the
+approaches to them and the position of any natural screens, will be a
+valuable addition to the report and will often save much writing.
+
+Concurrently with the above any information obtainable on the following
+points should be noted and reported:--
+
+    (_a_) Description of the enemy’s position giving
+            approximate relative heights.
+    (_b_) Likely positions for the enemy’s guns or
+            observing stations.
+    (_c_) Any earthworks that can be observed.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IX.
+
+Position P
+
+_VIEW FROM FARM LOOKING NORTH._]
+
+[Illustration: Plate X.
+
+RANGE-TAKER’S CARD.
+
+Ranges taken from position P.]
+
+2. A panorama sketch of the enemy’s position should, if possible, be
+made and will save much writing. For firing at moving objects from
+under cover, for switches, and in night firing a sketch of this nature
+is invaluable.
+
+Plate IX shows a form on which the sketch may be made so as to render
+it a most useful and practical aid more particularly adapted to hilly
+country. It will be seen that the lateral angle and the angle of sight
+to any point can be judged with considerable accuracy at a glance.
+It has, moreover, the great advantage that, with its assistance, the
+poorest draughtsman can produce a useful, panoramic sketch.
+
+The sketch should show the principal features in outline, one of
+which near the centre of the field of view is chosen as the reference
+point. A line is drawn from each of these features, with the range and
+description marked thereon, also the angle of sight on the right of the
+line and the lateral angle, in degrees, between it and the reference
+point on the left of the line, thus--=L.A. 4° | L 3°=.
+
+The sketch should state clearly the point from which it is made.
+
+3. If time does not admit of this sketch, it may be replaced by a
+range-taker’s card (Plate X), on which the following should appear:--
+
+i. A line, if possible in red, drawn to the most prominent object near
+the centre of the field of view. (_See_ P.T., Plate X.) The object so
+selected is called the reference point. In drawing this line the card
+should be set so that its longer edge roughly corresponds to the line
+of the position to be occupied. The lateral angle, in degrees, between
+the line to the reference point, and a line to all prominent features
+for ranging upon should be given.
+
+ii. The range to and the angle of sight of these features which should
+be given names. It may often be more convenient to letter and describe
+them with their ranges and angles of sight on a separate paper.
+
+4. The above instructions apply to officers, but in order that N.C.Os.
+and men employed on reconnaissance work may be of use to them, they
+will require training in the following subjects:--
+
+i. _Map reading._--They should be able to find the way in a strange
+country, first, by practical map reading; then by memory of the map;
+by sun and compass; by landmarks; by questioning natives of the
+country. As maps may not always be available on service, they should be
+practised in working without their aid.
+
+It should be a habit with them to notice the general direction taken
+and changes of direction subsequently made.
+
+ii. _Sketching._--When they have learnt to read a map, elementary
+instruction in sketching should be given. This to include instruction
+in conventional signs; judging distances by time or by eye; making a
+simple approximate scale, finding approximate north point; dictating a
+map; sketching a piece of simple country; drawing a map from memory;
+estimating heights.
+
+iii. _Reporting._--As the value of the men’s work depends largely on
+their ability to furnish a clear report they should receive instruction
+in this subject. Written reports should be in telegraphic language, and
+verbal reports thought out beforehand.
+
+iv. _Concealment._--Their attention should be drawn to the great
+importance of dismounting and taking cover and of selecting a
+background to suit the colour of their clothing when observing; the
+importance of remaining perfectly still; of avoiding the sky line; of
+selecting look-out points when on the move, and of getting from one to
+another quickly, and unseen.
+
+
+RANGE FINDING.
+
+=245.= _General instructions._
+
+1. However accurate in itself the instrument for finding the range may
+be, satisfactory results can only be expected if the range-takers are
+themselves efficient. To ensure this, careful training and regular
+practice are essential. In order that the system of instruction may
+be similar in each brigade, the brigade commander should personally
+supervise it; an officer or qualified non-commissioned officer being
+detailed annually to take charge of the instruction of all range-takers
+in the brigade.
+
+2. In addition to the authorized establishment of range-takers an
+adequate and efficient reserve to replace possible casualties must be
+maintained.
+
+3. These requirements necessitate a class being formed each year, which
+should commence work during the period of individual training.
+
+4. The men selected for a course must be active and willing to learn.
+They must have good hearing and eyesight and a steady hand. They should
+be able to write clearly, and it will be an advantage if they can read
+a map and be a good judge of distance before commencing work.
+
+5. The course should be a progressive one, beginning with a few short
+lectures, which should be devoted to explaining the working of the
+instrument, the names of its various parts and their uses, and the
+errors that are commonly made. The proper way to handle the instrument
+can also be taught.
+
+6. The next step is to take the class out of doors and practise them
+in taking ranges to well-defined upright objects, such as chimneys and
+later to smaller objects, such as posts, at close and known ranges. Any
+errors in the handling of the instrument or in the methods employed
+should be pointed out at the time.
+
+7. The men should now be ready to be taken into the country and
+practised in taking ranges at first to well-defined objects from three
+to four thousand yards away, and subsequently to others, such as crest
+lines and hedges, which would form the more usual and less distinct
+objectives in war.
+
+8. =It is a matter of the greatest importance that the men should learn
+to take ranges with the least possible exposure, in order to avoid
+giving any information to the enemy as to the artillery positions.= The
+instructor should, from the earliest moment possible, act as though he
+were a battery commander and, having pointed out the objects to which
+he requires the range, should insist on the men withdrawing under cover
+and moving to another position before taking it, unless well concealed
+in their present position. The same precautions should be taken when
+reporting the range, due allowance being made for any extra distance to
+the front or rear that the range was taken from.
+
+9. =All officers should understand the general working of the
+instrument in use in their unit and be capable of taking ranges with
+it.=
+
+
+SERVICE OF COMMUNICATION.
+
+=246.= _General system and principles._
+
+1. Artillery communications in the field are divided into:--
+
+i. Internal communications, consisting of those established between the
+various artillery headquarters and units.
+
+ii. External communications, which are those formed as a temporary
+measure to link up artillery with infantry.
+
+2. The means of communication available for horse and field artillery
+are given in Sec. =149=.
+
+3. The signalling personnel allowed is laid down in War Establishments.
+This establishment is based on the principle that signalling personnel
+is required for the purpose of providing communications downwards,
+_i.e._, with subordinates, and laterally, _i.e._, with equals.
+
+To enable commanders of artillery brigades to carry out this principle
+they must be able to communicate with brigade stations of the
+divisional signal service as well as with their subordinates. The
+standard of efficiency of a proportion of the signallers must therefore
+be equal to that required of the divisional signal service. On the
+other hand, as long distance work is not needed within the batteries,
+the standard required of their signallers need not be so high.
+
+The signalling personnel is therefore divided into two classes--
+
+     i. Brigade signallers.
+    ii. Battery signallers.
+
+4. As it is usually of importance to ensure the continuity of
+communications when once they have been opened between any two points,
+alternative methods should be established, if possible. To enable
+this to be done it is essential that men employed on the service of
+communication should be capable of acting in any of the capacities laid
+down for the classes to which they belong. All signallers should also
+be capable of acting as despatch riders, since it will often be quicker
+to send a message in this way than by signal. Instructions for training
+despatch riders are laid down in Signal Training, Part II.[43]
+
+[43] In course of preparation.
+
+
+=247.= _Internal communications._
+
+1. For communicating between brigade headquarters and the headquarters
+of batteries and ammunition columns an establishment of brigade
+signallers is provided as an integral part of brigade headquarters.
+These men should be fully qualified signallers as laid down in Training
+Manual--Signalling.
+
+This establishment has been calculated on the assumption that
+communication with one battery at least will be more conveniently
+carried out verbally or by message. Communication by telephone or
+visual signalling will not, therefore, be required with more than
+two batteries, orderlies being used to communicate with the brigade
+ammunition column.
+
+The officer in charge of communications at brigade headquarters is
+responsible for allotting the brigade signallers to batteries for
+the purpose of maintaining communication between them and brigade
+headquarters in accordance with circumstances.
+
+2. Communication within the battery from the battery commander to his
+guns and observers will be carried out by the battery signallers. These
+battery signallers are maintained solely for purposes of communication
+within the battery. Their training is limited to the use of semaphore,
+telephone and buzzer.
+
+Communication may be carried out by means of:--
+
+    (_a._) Telephones.
+    (_b._) Semaphore.
+    (_c._) Orderlies.
+
+For the purpose of maintaining communication between a battery and its
+observing station, four signallers are necessary, two at each station.
+They should be provided with telephones and flags, so that alternative
+means of communication may be available.
+
+Semaphore signalling is the most rapid system of visual signalling with
+small flags. (_See_ Sec. =201= (4).)
+
+The best way of utilizing semaphore signalling is to employ two sets of
+signallers, each pair having different coloured flags. Those with the
+same coloured flags should communicate with each other only.
+
+In sending orders, or the result of observations, by signal the
+abbreviations laid down in Sec. =201=, will be used.
+
+
+=248.= _External communications._
+
+1. Effectual co-operation between artillery and infantry depends
+largely on the receipt of timely information. An efficient system of
+communication is therefore very important.
+
+2. A personal exchange of views between subordinate infantry and
+artillery commanders is likely to produce the best results in a
+combined tactical operation. If unable to remain in the vicinity of the
+infantry commander, the artillery commander should be represented by an
+officer (_See_ Sec. =153= (7).)
+
+3. No rules can be laid down as to the means by which communication is
+to be maintained between this officer and the artillery commander.
+
+If circumstances are favourable communication may be maintained by
+the brigade telephone or by visual signalling, but as the infantry
+commander will usually change his position as the fight progresses, it
+may be necessary to rely on orderlies, or a combination of orderlies
+and telephone or visual signalling.
+
+4. It may be possible to arrange direct communication between the
+artillery commander and advanced observation posts, with a view to
+keeping him informed as to the progress of the attacking infantry and
+the effect of the artillery fire. (_See_ Sec. =153= (11).)
+
+The means of communication which can be employed will depend on the
+nature of the country.
+
+Visual communication will usually be inadvisable on account of the
+difficulty of finding positions which are invisible to the enemy,
+and the telephone may be expected to give the best results. When no
+artillery telephone is available the possibility of sending information
+of equal importance to the artillery and infantry through the infantry
+communication service should be kept in view. It must be borne in mind
+that a message sent by orderly will take an appreciable time to reach
+its destination.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+MOVEMENTS AND QUARTERS.
+
+
+=249.= _Marches and march discipline._
+
+(_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. III.)
+
+1. March discipline includes everything that affects the efficiency of
+man and horse during a march. On it depends not only the comfort of
+a column of troops as a whole, but also the time which is needed to
+perform a march or deploy for battle.
+
+The principles which govern the order of march of a body of troops are
+laid down in F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. III.
+
+2. The following rules should be observed by artillery:--
+
+      i. The order of units should be changed daily.
+     ii. Brigade signallers and range-takers should ride three
+           abreast at the head of the brigade to which they
+           belong.
+    iii. Batteries should always march in column of route on
+           the left of the road. The regulation distance between
+           carriages should be strictly preserved, and care must
+           be taken that, when a halt is ordered, each carriage
+           is drawn up on the left side of the road. Cross roads
+           must be left clear.
+     iv. Dismounted detachments should keep on the inner flank
+           of the column, but if this is not possible they should
+           march in fours behind their respective guns and
+           wagons. They should never march on the off side of the
+           carriages.
+
+Men may mount or dismount when the column is moving at a walk.
+
+3. In column of route when two ammunition wagons per subsection are
+present they immediately follow their gun until the batteries prepare
+for action, when those which do not accompany the guns into action,
+will assume a preparatory formation under the command of the captain.
+(Sec. =191=.)
+
+4. On a march the first halt usually takes place not long after
+the start, when a careful examination should be made of the horses
+and harness. Subsequent halts are made at regular intervals at the
+discretion of the commander of the column. The duration of these halts
+and the time when they are to take place, should be made known in
+advance.
+
+5. It is of great importance to relieve horses as much as possible of
+the heavy weights they have to carry. They should be harnessed up as
+short a time as possible before turning out, and should not be hooked
+in until just before the time for marching off.
+
+When they are standing in harness the drivers should be dismounted.
+
+When marching at a slow pace with other troops men are inclined to
+lounge in their saddles and thus to cause sore backs. On this account
+mounted men should be instructed to walk and lead at intervals, and the
+drivers may be relieved occasionally by capable gunners. For the same
+reason slouching in the saddle, even when riding at ease, should be
+prevented and, when trotting, every man should rise in his stirrups.
+
+6. Opportunities which may occur for watering and feeding horses should
+always be seized. Watering requires to be carried out on a regular
+system if it is to be done smoothly and expeditiously.
+
+7. When artillery is moving independently of other troops, very early
+starts are undesirable, except for some special reason. The men should
+have time to get breakfast and the horses should be fed before the
+march commences.
+
+The maintenance of an even and regular pace is essential, otherwise
+the constant opening out and closing up, which occurs in rear, becomes
+trying, both to men and horses.
+
+In some circumstances, such as when the roads are hilly or dusty, the
+intervals between files and the distances between carriages may be
+increased.
+
+The last couple of miles of a march should be at a walk, so as to bring
+the horses in cool, and during this period they should be watered, if
+there be a convenient place.
+
+
+=250.= _Billets._
+
+1. The principles to be observed in the allotment of billets, and
+instructions for administration and discipline in billets, are laid
+down in F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. IV.
+
+2. Billets are of three descriptions, viz.:--
+
+      i. Billets with subsistence.
+     ii. Billets with partial subsistence.
+    iii. Billets without subsistence.
+
+When billets with subsistence are provided, officers and others must
+be satisfied with the usual fare of the householder on whom they are
+billeted.
+
+All billets will include attendance and, when required, the use of
+ordinary cooking utensils, but bedding cannot be demanded as a right.
+
+3. Billeting areas are allotted by the quartermaster-general’s
+branch of the staff. The commanders of these areas then distribute
+the accommodation among the units to be quartered in them and issue
+billeting demands to their representatives.
+
+4. A billeting party should consist of one officer or senior
+non-commissioned officer per brigade, and one rank and file N.C.O. per
+battery or ammunition column. Before starting for his allotted area,
+the commander of the party should obtain a statement showing the number
+of officers, men, and horses for whom accommodation is required.
+
+5. On arrival in the locality in which his formation is to be billeted,
+the commander of the billeting party will first proceed to the mayor,
+or other chief official, hand him the billeting demand, and notify
+him of the hour at which the troops may be expected. If time permits
+billeting orders should be obtained from the local authority for each
+inhabitant on whom men and horses are to be quartered.
+
+6. On receipt of these orders the commander of the billeting party will
+issue them in proper proportion to the representative of each unit, who
+will be given instructions as to the posting of any special notices,
+arrangements for watering, &c., and the rendezvous, when the billets
+have been inspected. The men of the party then proceed to the houses
+and stables allotted to their units, inspect and mark them and hand the
+billeting orders to occupiers. In arranging for billets horses should
+be billeted near the men, and as close as possible to the guns and
+vehicles. Each unit should, if possible, be allotted both sides of a
+street.
+
+7. In the meantime the commander of the party will select and mark
+the position of the headquarters of the brigade, guard-room, sick
+inspection room, and gun parks. (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. =49=.)
+He will also ascertain the most suitable lines for communicating with
+neighbouring units and the best lines into and out of the area.
+
+8. In fixing the sites of gun parks and arranging accommodation for
+horses, precautions must usually be taken against discovery by hostile
+aircraft.
+
+Although to avoid blocking roads and communications it may be necessary
+to place guns and other vehicles outside towns or villages, they should
+not be parked in a regular formation in the open. As many vehicles and
+horses as possible should be placed under cover, the remainder being
+concealed by placing them close to hedges, buildings, stacks, or any
+other object which will screen them against observation from the air.
+
+Subject to the conditions above, guns and wagons should be parked,
+where possible, on dry ground, but near water, with easy approaches
+and plenty of room. Additional entrances may be needed to facilitate
+movement. Provided there is plenty of room for movement and it is
+possible to conceal the carriages from observation by aircraft a single
+gun park has advantages.
+
+9. After completing the above, the commander of the billeting party
+should, if possible, prepare a rough plan of the area, showing the
+allotment of billets, main roads and communications, position of gun
+parks, together with a statement as to any special arrangements that
+may be necessary as regards watering horses, and other details.
+
+10. On reassembling his men, he will notify them of the positions of
+headquarters, guard, gun parks, etc., and will despatch a proportion to
+convey this information to the units. (_See_ F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec.
+48.)
+
+11. When time is not available for the above procedure troops will
+be halted outside their billeting areas. Meanwhile brigade billeting
+parties will proceed to the town hall or similar place, where a
+representative of the commander of the area will allot certain streets
+or groups of houses to them, which they in turn will assign to units.
+
+12. A list of the addresses of the officers should be given to the
+commander of the main guard.
+
+
+=251.= _Bivouacs._
+
+1. The general rules for the occupation of a bivouac are given in F.S.
+Regs., Part I, Sec. 56.
+
+2. The commander of the billeting party, as soon as he has been shown
+the area allotted to him, selects the sites for the bivouacs for each
+battery, and has the positions of kitchens, slaughter-places, and
+latrines marked out.
+
+He then goes to meet the artillery commander with information on the
+various details dealt with in F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 56 and 57.
+
+Orders dealing with any of these points, which it is necessary for the
+troops to know, should be communicated to them before leaving the gun
+park.
+
+3. It will generally be necessary to take precautions against
+observation by hostile aircraft, and when this is the case regular
+formations should be avoided and all possible arrangements made to
+conceal the guns and horses (_See_ Sec. =250= (8)). Bivouac shelters,
+if used, should not be put up till after dark. When artillery reach
+their bivouac in darkness and when it is not necessary to take
+precautions against discovery by hostile aircraft the method of
+arranging a bivouac for a battery in Fig. 37 may be used.
+
+This method, which is quick and economical of space is given as a guide
+and should be followed only so far as the ground allows.
+
+The guns are formed in line at half interval (10 yards) with the firing
+battery wagons on their left at 2 yards interval, three of the first
+line wagons in rear of and at right angles to the line of guns and 5
+yards from them. The remaining three are then formed up parallel and
+about 60 yards from the above.
+
+4. The picketing ropes are stretched between the upper spokes of the
+1st line wagons. The rope can be stretched taut by lifting and heaving
+on the wagons furthest from the gun park, and, if necessary, sinking a
+small trench for the wheels to rest in. If the length of rope required
+is considerable it may be advisable to use other wagons to support it
+half-way.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 37.]
+
+The horse lines of each section should be as far as possible in rear of
+the guns of its own section.
+
+The horses of each section are then fastened to one rope, using both
+sides of the rope. No horse should be fastened within 5 yards of a
+carriage in order to prevent the possibility of damage.
+
+The harness is placed in rear of the heel pegs, blankets folded on the
+saddles and the whole bound up in the harness cover: forage 5 yards
+from the horse lines at the opposite end to the gun park.
+
+The sections are arranged so that the personnel may be as near their
+own horses as possible. The right and left sections parallel to the
+horse lines, the centre section at right angles to them at 10 yards
+distance. The officers 20 yards in rear of the centre section.
+
+
+TRANSPORT OF ARTILLERY.
+
+=252.= _Transport by rail._
+
+The transport of troops in peace by land and sea is dealt with in the
+“King’s Regulations.” Owing to the variations in size of carriages and
+trucks in the different countries where campaigns may take place, it
+is impossible to fix the number of vehicles or trains required for a
+battery.
+
+Rolling stock, such as in common use in the United Kingdom, will take:--
+
+    8 men with their equipment in each compartment.
+
+    7 harnessed riding or light draught or 6 heavy draught
+        horses in a cattle truck.
+
+    2 or 3 pairs of wheels on the average wagon truck.
+
+The number of vehicles in a train varies on different railways,
+according to the ruling (_i.e._, maximum) gradient, speed, and the
+types of locomotives and trucks.
+
+In the United Kingdom each six gun battery of horse or field artillery
+at war strength would require 2 trains, while the brigade headquarters
+and ammunition column for a howitzer, 13-pr. and 18-pr. artillery
+brigade would occupy 2, 3 and 4 trains respectively.
+
+It may be necessary to entrain and detrain horses and carriages without
+the use of raised platforms by means of ramps. Regular practice in
+doing this is required in order to avoid delay.
+
+Fixed ramps can be made with earth revetted with sleepers, or sleepers
+alone may be used.
+
+Plate XI shows ramps which can be quickly improvised if portable ramps
+are not available. The stores required are two rails, 21 ft. to 24 ft.
+long, and 40 or 50 sleepers for each ramp.
+
+The following are the principal points to which attention should be
+paid when loading horses and guns and carriages.
+
+
+i. _Horses._
+
+1. The entrainment and detrainment of horses will be carried out in
+accordance with the instructions given in F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec. 38.
+
+2. The floors of trucks used for the conveyance of horses should, if of
+wood, be at least 1½ inches thick. Cinders, sand or gravel should be
+sprinkled on them to prevent the horses slipping; on no account should
+straw or any inflammable material be used for this purpose.
+
+3. A man leading a horse into a truck should walk freely in with a
+loose head rope, as though leading it into a stall. He should not stare
+in the animal’s face. Much time may be lost in dealing timorously with
+a jibbing horse; two men should be ready to clasp hands above its hocks
+and hustle it into the truck.
+
+4. If possible, on long journeys, horses should be taken out of a train
+at least once every 24 hours, walked about, and allowed to roll on sand
+or grass.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XI.
+
+TEMPORARY RAMP
+
+_For Entraining Guns._
+
+(_End Loading_)]
+
+
+[Illustration: TEMPORARY RAMP
+
+_For Entraining Horses._
+
+(_Side Loading_)]
+
+
+ii. _Guns and carriages._
+
+The general points which should be attended to are:--
+
+To distribute the load evenly over the floor, and if any of the
+flooring planks are rotten, to put a sleeper across them under the
+wheels. The minimum thickness of floor should be 2 inches.
+
+To see that the points of poles or shafts do not stick up so that they
+would strike against bridges, &c., as would usually occur if they were
+more than 7 feet above the floor of the trucks.
+
+To lash the wheels nearest to the ends of the trucks securely to the
+false buffers or to rings by a rope, which is also given a turn round
+the axle of each pair of wheels on the truck to prevent them shifting
+with the jerks of the train.
+
+Generally the best way to stow the carriages is, poles, trails, and
+perches resting on the floor, poles to the front, perches and trails
+to the rear, the wheels of each vehicle interlocking with those of the
+carriage in front of it.
+
+
+=253.= _Slinging horses._
+
+(_Transports alongside._)
+
+1. If horses are to be embarked by slinging, they should on arrival
+alongside the ship be unsaddled or unharnessed, the head rope should be
+fastened in the ordinary way round the neck; the ship’s halter will be
+put on under the head-collar; the bridoon reins should be left loose
+(as they may be required for keeping the head in the proper position
+while lowering down the hatchways), but they should be knotted to
+prevent them getting entangled in the horse’s legs. Slings should be
+minutely inspected before the embarkation begins. A double guy should
+be made fast to the horse’s head, one end being held on shore and the
+other on board, in order to keep the head steady; the surcingle must be
+moved round so that the buckle is on the seat.
+
+2. In slinging horses, five men are required, one at the head, one at
+each side, one at the breast, and one behind. One end of the sling is
+passed under the horse’s belly, and both ends are brought up to meet
+over his back; one man passes his loop through the other loop, and it
+is received by the man on the other side, who hauls it through, hooking
+the tackle to it, both men holding up the ends of the sling until it
+is taut. The men at the breast and behind bring their ropes round and
+make them fast to the grummets, and the man who holds the horse’s
+head makes fast the guys to the ship’s head-collar. The breech band
+and breast girth must be securely fastened. Timid or restive horses
+should be blindfolded. When all is ready, the words “HOIST AWAY” will
+be given, and the horse is to be rapidly run up from the ground to the
+necessary height, and then carefully lowered down to the hatchway. Two
+or three men should be stationed at the hatchway and between decks to
+guide the horse in being lowered. A soft bed of straw or coir mats must
+be provided for the horse to alight upon, and the men stationed in the
+lower deck must be ready to receive him and take off the sling, as on
+first feeling his legs, unless firmly handled, he is apt to plunge and
+kick violently.
+
+3. In disembarking, sand or straw must be laid on the wharf for the
+reception of the horses. Horses are apt to fall on their knees at once
+unless carefully held up.
+
+
+(_Transports not alongside._)
+
+4. The method of embarking horses in boats or flats will vary according
+to circumstances. If the boats can come alongside a wharf, or can
+approach close to an open beach, the horses can either be led on board
+by gangways (horse brows), or be slung in the manner described above,
+sheers or a derrick being erected. Horse brows may be at steep angles
+of ascent or descent if there is considerable rise and fall of tide.
+When the boats cannot come sufficiently near the shore to enable horses
+to be hoisted on to them, piers or platforms must be constructed. The
+piers should always be provided with stout side railings about three
+feet high, and the floor covered with shingle, straw, or something to
+prevent the horses slipping.
+
+5. When embarking in boats, the detachment should be formed up opposite
+them, and the same rules, so far as practicable, followed as when
+embarking in vessels alongside a wharf. A man must be told off to each
+horse, and take with him in the boat the whole of his kit, equipment,
+saddlery, &c. The men should take off arms, belts, and spurs. The
+horses should, if possible, be placed athwart the boat alternately, the
+head to tail. Each man must hold his horse until the vessel is reached.
+Sand or straw should be put in the boats to prevent the horses slipping.
+
+6. In the absence of boats and appliances, the following method of
+embarking horses by swimming may be employed:--
+
+The horses having been halted a short distance from, and out of sight
+of, the point of embarkation, are stripped of all appointments except
+the bridoon and headstall, which latter should be close fitting.
+
+A horse having been led to the landing place, two men prepare him for
+the water. No. 1 holds his head. No. 2 places the sling in position
+and secures the straps with yarn, so as to prevent the sling opening
+in the water; he then fastens the breast rope and breeching securely.
+A rope of about eight yards in length, with an eye at one end, is next
+passed round the neck and fastened rather tightly by an overhand knot,
+so as to prevent its becoming either looser or tighter. The bridoon is
+then taken off, and to support the horse in the water another rope is
+attached to the lower ring of the headstall under the chin, or else a
+short rope is passed round the girth in front of the sling and close
+behind the elbows, the ends being brought up and fastened over the
+withers. The horse is controlled altogether by the neck rope.
+
+The horse is then led into the water as far as he will walk towards the
+boat, in the stern of which should be a man, who receives the neck rope
+in his right hand, and immediately reeves it through the stern ring of
+the boat to secure additional power in the event of the horse plunging;
+the headstall or girth rope he receives in his left hand.
+
+When once the horse is swimming, the neck rope should be hauled close
+up while the headstall or girth rope gently supports him in the water.
+
+A small rowing boat with two oars will be sufficient. It should not be
+pulled too fast, or the horse will make no attempt to swim.
+
+On reaching the ship’s side the hook and tackle should be lowered, the
+hook passed through the sling’s eye, and the horse hoisted up on board.
+
+Care should be taken to arrange the tackle so that the horse, in being
+hoisted in, is kept clear of the ship’s side.
+
+7. Horses may, in cases of emergency only, be disembarked by swimming.
+When this method is adopted, the horse should be lowered in the sling
+over the side of the vessel without fastening the breast rope or
+breeching. When the tackle is unhooked the sling opens, and is at once
+slipped from under the horse. The neck rope should be hauled up and
+secured, and the horse supported, as explained above. If necessary,
+four horses may be made to swim ashore at a time, two on each side of
+the boat. It is important that horses should be kept at the point to
+which the others are to swim.
+
+Horses should be cool before being put into the water.
+
+
+=254.= _Slinging guns and vehicles._
+
+1. For slinging guns, limbers and limbered wagons, the following method
+has been found to give good results:--
+
+Two four-inch slings are used, one round each axletree, and a hook rope
+hooked into the trail eye. The bights of the slings are placed on the
+tackle hook, to which the end of the hook rope is also made fast.
+
+Limbers are slung in the same way as guns, the hook rope in their
+case being made fast to about the centre of the pole, unless special
+instructions to remove the poles are issued.
+
+Limbered wagons will, as a rule, be embarked loaded on their wheels,
+the poles should not be removed before slinging. If the wheels are
+removed, special care must be taken that the linch pins and washers are
+put away. Those carriages first required on disembarkation should be
+stowed away last.
+
+2. G.S. wagons can be slung by four chain slings connected to a common
+link at the one end and provided with hooks at the other, these four
+hooks are then secured to all four wheels of the vehicle. The poles
+must be removed before slinging, and =made fast to the body of the
+wagons=.
+
+If cordage only is available, two slings each, consisting of one rope 3
+in. by 60 ft., knotted at a suitable length, and two lashings, 1½ in.
+by 30 ft. for guy ropes are required.
+
+To adjust the front sling pass one end inside the wheels and under the
+futchels of the fore carriage in front of the axle. To adjust the back
+sling loop one end of the sling over the nave of the off hind wheel.
+Pass the sling over the load and loop the other end to the nave of the
+near hind wheel. Care must be taken to see that the drag washers are
+turned down to prevent the sling from slipping off.
+
+The hook of the hoisting tackle is then passed through the end of the
+two ends of the front sling and under the centre of the back sling.
+
+The pressure can be taken off the sides of the carriage by making use
+of loops made with polechains or ropes at the end of poles through
+which the slings are passed.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX I.
+
+
+The following syllabus of training for recruits of R.H. and R.F.A. is
+given as a guide to officers charged with the training of recruits. It
+is not intended that it should be followed rigidly.
+
+                    SYLLABUS OF TRAINING.
+                          GUNNERS.
+
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+                             |  1st   |    |    |    |    |    |Total
+               Subject.      | fort-  |2nd |3rd |4th |5th |6th |hours
+                             | night. |    |    |    |    |    | per
+                             |        |    |    |    |    |    |subject.
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Physical training        |  10    | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 |10  |  60
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Dismounted drill--       |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+          without arms       |  30    | 20 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 |  90
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Rifle exercises--        |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      including              |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      musketry and           |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      visual training        |        |  5 |  5 |  5 | 5  | 5  |  25
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Cordage, knotting, &c.   |        |  5 |  5 |  3 | 3  | 3  |  19
+    Semaphore                |        |    |  5 |  5 | 5  | 5  |  20
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Gun drill--including     |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      gunnery, laying,       |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      fuze setting, and      |        |    |    |    |    |    |
+      visual training        |        |    | 10 | 12 |12  | 12 |  46
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Lectures                 |   5    |  5 |  5 |  5 | 5  | 5  |  30
+                             +-------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+    Total hours per fortnight| 45[44] | 45 | 50 | 50 |50  |50  | 290
+    -------------------------+--------+----+----+----+----+----+--------
+
+[44] It is calculated that in addition about 2½ hours a week in the
+first fortnight are spent on medical inspection, fitting clothing, and
+school tests.
+
+                                   DRIVERS.
+
+    ---------------------------+---------------------------------+-------
+                               |             Fortnight.          |
+                 Detail.       +------+---+---+-----+-----+------+ Total.
+                               | 1st  |2nd|3rd| 4th | 5th |  6th |
+    ---------------------------+------+---+---+-----+-----+------+-------
+     1. Physical training      |  10  | 10| 10| 10  | 10  | 10   |  60
+     2. Foot drill             |  30  | 20| 10| 10  | 10  | 10   |  90
+     3. Rifle exercises and    |      |   |   |     |     |      |
+         visual training       |      |  5| 10|  5  |  5  |  5   |  30
+     4. Cordage, knotting, &c. |      |  5|   |  2½ |     |      |   7½
+     5. Semaphore              |      |   |  5|  5  |  5  |  5   |  20
+     6. Wooden horse           |      |   |   |  2½ |  2½ |  2½  |  7½
+     7. Fitting and cleaning   |      |   |   |  2½ |  5  |  5   |  12½
+          harness, &c.         |      |   |   |     |     |      |
+     8. Stable management      |      |   | 10| 10  | 10  | 10   |  40
+     9. Lectures               |   5  |  5|  5|  2½ |  2½ |  2½  |  22½
+                               +------+---+---+-----+-----+------+-------
+    Total hours per fortnight  |45[45]| 45| 50| 50  | 50  | 50   | 290
+    ---------------------------+-------+---+---+-----+-----+------+-------
+
+[45] It is calculated that in addition about 2½hours a week in the
+first fortnight are spent on medical inspection, fitting clothing, and
+school tests.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX II.
+
+PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN FIRING BLANK AMMUNITION.
+
+
+1. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or gunner, is to command or
+form part of a section or gun detachment firing blank ammunition at
+salutes or on field days who has not been trained and passed in gun
+drill.
+
+2. When bare charges are used, no gun is to be reloaded within 30
+seconds after firing. When firing Q.F. blank cartridges, no gun is to
+be reloaded within 15 seconds after firing.
+
+Even after these intervals no gun is to be reloaded unless the No.
+1 has examined the chamber and the bore and removed any “debris”
+remaining from the previous round. (N.B.--With the 4·5-inch Q.F.
+Howitzer the lid of the cartridge is not to be removed when firing
+blank ammunition.)
+
+3. In firing salutes not less than four guns are to be used. When
+firing signal rounds at field days and manœuvres, however, any number
+of guns may be used provided that the conditions of paragraph 2 are
+fulfilled.
+
+4. In the event of a missfire, at least one more attempt should be made
+to fire the gun, when it is again its turn, but in any case the breech
+must not be opened for at least one minute with “black powder” charges
+and ten minutes with “smokeless powder” charges after the last failure
+to fire the gun. None of the detachment should be directly in rear of
+the breech when it is opened.
+
+In firing salutes, an officer or senior non-commissioned officer
+should be detailed for the special duty of timing the interval after
+a missfire, and informing the No. 1 of that gun when he may open the
+breech.
+
+
+
+
+INDEX.
+
+    =NOTE.--No reference to drill movements is made in this
+             Index. Headings of sections dealing with drill
+             will be found in the Contents.=
+
+                            A                    PAGE.
+
+    Abbreviations to be used in signalling, 321
+         ”          ”     ”     words of command, 301
+    Action, advance of battery for, 302
+       ”    field battery in, 306
+       ”    method of coming into, 303
+       ”    preparation for, by battery, 294
+    Advance of battery in action, 360
+       ”    of horse artillery into action, 270
+    Advanced guard artillery action of the, 245
+       ”       ”      ”      to conform to action of, 215
+       ”     observation posts, 244
+    Aerial reconnaissance, 246
+    Aeroplane observing, men to be detailed to watch, 328
+    Aeroplanes, location of targets by, 324
+       ”        method of engaging, 351
+       ”        observation of fire from, 325
+       ”        signals from and to, 328
+    Aiming point, angular corrections necessary
+                  for different positions, 186
+       ”     ”    auxiliary, 181
+       ”     ”    selection of, 300
+       ”   points, position and use of, 181
+       ”   posts, planting of, 300
+    Air, resistance of, on a shell during flight, 148
+    Aircraft, advantage to be taken of woods, &c.,
+                          for concealment against, 231
+       ”      advantages of concealment modified by use of, 23
+       ”      co-operation with Artillery, 238
+       ”      employment of, 238
+       ”      methods of engaging, 350
+       ”      placed at disposal of divisional artillery commander, 244
+       ”      prevention against discovery by, 398, 399
+       ”      signalling from, 239
+       ”          ”        ”   the ground to, 239
+       ”      with artillery co-operation of, 238
+    Airships, method of engaging, 351
+    All guns ranging, 331, 334
+    Ammunition, 155
+       ”     blank, precautions to be taken when firing, 411
+       ”     column, brigade, 367
+       ”        ”    howitzer brigade, 369
+       ”     columns, divisional, 370
+       ”        ”     horse artillery, 370
+       ”        ”     with heavy batteries, 369
+       ”        ”       ”  mountain batteries, 369
+       ”     control of expenditure of, 280
+       ”     distribution in action, 364
+       ”     expenditure of to be guided by importance of objective, 233
+       ”     liberal expenditure of when permissible, 245, 247
+       ”     mountain artillery, replenishment of, 367
+       ”     parks, 371
+       ”     receipt for, 369
+       ”     replenishment of, 366
+       ”         ”          ”  for cavalry and horse artillery, 276
+       ”     reserves on the line of communication, 371
+       ”     supply, general instructions, 364
+       ”       ”     not restricted to troops of own formation, 364
+       ”       ”     of, to a rearguard, 265
+       ”       ”     within the battery, 365
+       ”     transfer of, 369
+       ”     waste of, 255
+    Angle of sight, alteration in, 178
+      ”    “ how found when target not visible from guns, 176
+      ”    ”  ”  measured, 176
+      ”   switch, 189
+    Angles, form of ordering, 302
+      ”     use of hand for measuring, 180
+    Angular corrections for different positions of aiming point, 186
+    Annual practice, 19
+    Approach march, horse artillery with cavalry, 268
+    Artillery, advanced guard, action of the, 245
+       ”       and infantry, forming of, into groups, 236, 241
+       ”       attack, opening phase of the, 246
+       ”         ”     second phase of the, 247
+       ”         ”     third phase of, 250
+       ”       defence, opening phase of, 255
+       ”          ”    second phase of, 256
+       ”          ”    third phase of, 257
+       ”       distribution of, in defence of a position, 254
+       ”       employment of, in war, 227
+       ”       field, characteristics of, 227
+       ”       fire, natures of, 144
+       ”       forward movement, 249
+       ”       horse, action in cavalry pursuit or retreat, 273
+       ”         ”    advance into action, 270
+       ”         ”    escorts for, 267
+       ”         ”    in a general engagement, 275
+       ”         ”     ”  cavalry fight, 272
+       ”         ”      position on the march 267
+       ”         ”      with cavalry 265
+       ”         ”        ”     ”    acting dismounted, 273
+       ”       in attack, 245
+       ”       ”  defence, general instructions and
+                           preliminary measures, 252
+       ”       ”  hand, objects and methods of keeping, 234, 245
+       ”       ”  irregular warfare, 278
+       ”       ”  retirements and retreats, 263
+       ”       location of enemy’s batteries, 246
+       ”       methods of engaging, 346
+       ”       mobile, in the attack and defence of a fortress, 276
+       ”       protection of, 234
+       ”       territorial, training of, 22
+       ”       transport of, by rail, 401
+       ”       with aircraft, co-operation of, 324
+    Assembly, positions of, when selected, 303
+    Atmosphere, state of, affects accuracy of shooting, 154, 166
+    Attack, artillery in, 245
+      ”     of a fortress, mobile artillery in the, 276
+      ”     opening phase of the, 246
+      ”     second phase of the, 247
+      ”     third phase of the, 250
+
+                           B
+
+    Ballistic coefficient, 149
+    Balloons, captive, method of engaging, 351
+    Batteries, nomenclature and position of at brigade drill, 191
+    Battery acting independently, responsibility of commander, 293
+       ”    advance for action, 302
+       ”    coming into action, method of, 303
+       ”    commander, duties of, in action, 308
+       ”        ”      orders by, 300
+       ”        ”      responsibility of, 9
+       ”    commanders, position in brigade in column, 284
+       ”    drill, 215
+       ”    field, in action, 306
+       ”    fire, 323
+       ”    in action, advance of, 360
+       ”     “ retirement of, 361
+       ”    leader at mounted drill, 206
+       ”    observing station, 295, 316
+       ”    position, methods of occupying, 297
+       ”    preparation for action, 294
+       ”    reconnaissance by commander, 295
+       ”    recruit training in, 15
+       ”    serjeant-major, duties of, in action, 309
+       ”    signallers, 391
+       ”    tactics, general instructions, 293
+       ”    training, 17
+    Bending lessons in equitation, 86
+    Billeting areas, 396
+       ”      orders, 397
+       ”      party, 396
+    Billets, descriptions of, 396
+    Bivouacs, 398
+    Blank ammunition, precautions to be taken when firing, 411
+    Boys, course of instruction for, 12
+    Bracket, 331
+    Brake, application of, 113
+    Bridge, construction of with battery stores, 378
+    Bridling, 63
+    Brigade ammunition columns, 367
+       ”        ”        ”      position of, 368
+       ” commander, reconnaissance by, 281
+       ”     ”      responsibility of, 9
+       “ drill, 222
+       ” leader at mounted drill, 207
+       ”    ”      duties of, 283
+       “ selection of position for, 282
+       ” signallers, 391
+       “ tactics, general instructions, 280
+       ” training, 19
+    Buildings, effect of field gun fire on, 228
+        ”      use of percussion shrapnel against troops defending, 160
+    Bursts, how judged, 165
+
+                           C
+
+    Calls, field, 205
+    Camp commandants, practice, duties, &c., 21
+    Canter, the true, 58, 85
+    Cantering, disunited and false, 59, 86
+    Captain, duties of, in action, 308
+    Carriages, loading of, 403
+    Cart, loading a, 137
+    Casualties in action, 363
+        ”      on the move, 362
+        ”      replacement of, 362
+    Cavalry acting dismounted, horse artillery with, 273
+       ”    employment of horse artillery with, 265
+       ”    fight, horse artillery in, 272
+       ”    functions of in war, 266
+       ”    methods of engaging, 345
+       ”    pursuit or retreat, action of horse artillery in, 273
+    Centring of shell, 147
+    Civil employment, qualifications for, 13
+    Clinometer laying, 177
+        ”      sight to be set level, 174
+    Coast fortress, defence of, 277
+    Collective ranging, 331, 332, 352
+        ”      training, 17
+        ”         ”      object of, 11
+    Combined employment of the various arms, knowledge of essential, 227
+        ”    observation, 317
+    Command, abbreviated words of, 301
+    Commandants, practice camp, duties, &c., 21
+    Commander horse artillery, duty of, 264, 271
+    Communication between artillery and infantry to be maintained, 238
+        ”         means of available, 236, 390
+    Communications, external, 390, 392
+        ”           internal, 390, 391
+    Compass, use of, to obtain line of fire, 312
+    Compliments, paying of when mounted without arms, 92
+        ”          ”    with drawn sword, 97
+    Concealed positions, utilization of, 245, 246
+    Concealing guns, 373
+    Concealment, 231, 243, 254
+        ”        training in, 388
+    Concentration of fire, 339
+    Cone of dispersion, 158
+    Control by brigade commander, 290
+    Control of fire of a battery, 320
+    Co-operation of aircraft with artillery, 238
+    Cordite, 155
+    Corrector settings, 162, 300
+        ”        ”      form of ordering, 301
+    Counter-attack, support against, 252
+    Counter-attacks, decisive, 258
+           ”         local, 258
+    Covering fire, combination of guns, machine guns and rifles, 247
+    Crest, clearing the, 181
+
+                           D
+
+    Darkness, advantages gained from moving batteries
+           under cover of, 232
+    Defence, artillery in, 252
+       ”         ”     opening phase of, 255
+       ”         ”     second phase of, 256
+       ”         ”     third phase of, 257
+       ”     of a fortress, mobile artillery in the, 277
+       ”         ”     position, form taken, 248, 253
+    Definitions, 1
+        ”       of gunnery terms, 142
+    Deflection, causes and counteraction of, 178
+        ”       corrections for difference in level of wheels, 178
+        ”       for moving targets, 179
+        ”        ”  wind, 179
+        ”       method of ordering, 180
+    Despatch riders, 391
+    Dial sight, use of, 312
+    Direct laying, advantages and disadvantages of, 174
+      ”      ”     when employed, 173, 174
+      ”      ”    with 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. and other field guns, 174
+    Director, use of, 311, 312
+    Discipline on the march, 394
+    Dismounting from horse, 73
+        ”       importance of, 56
+    Dispersion, cone of, 158
+        ”       of guns, 245
+    Displacement, 186
+    Distance at which artillery can fire over own troops
+             with safety, 251
+       ”     judging, training in, 382
+    Distribution of fire, general principles, 338
+    Divisional ammunition column to be acquainted with dispositions
+               of artillery units, 243
+        ”         ”       columns, 370
+        “ artillery commander, duties of, 9, 240, 249
+        ”    ”          ”      position of, 240, 244
+        ”    ”      training, 21
+    Double displacement, 188
+    Drift, 149
+      ”    deflection for, 169
+      ”    how counteracted, 179
+    Drill, dismounted, 23
+      ”    mounted, _see_ =M.=
+      ”    squad, general instruction, 23, 35, 38
+    Driver, position of, with mountain artillery, 137
+       ”       ”      ”  mounted and dismounted, 104
+    Drivers, course of instruction, 12
+    Driving a pair of horses from the box, 113
+       ”    application of brake in, 113
+       ”    band, 146
+       ”    down hill, 113, 115
+       ”    general principles of, 102
+       ”    reversing in narrow roads, 113
+       ”    up hills, 111, 115
+       ”    without vehicles, 106
+    Duties of personnel of battery in action, 308
+
+                           E
+
+    Economy of force, 232
+    Elevation, 151
+       ”       form of ordering, 301
+       ”       how to find, 331
+    Employment of artillery in war, general instructions, 227
+    “ with other arms, 22
+    Engaging objectives, methods of, 343
+    Engineering, field, knowledge of necessary, 8
+    Entrenching guns, 373
+    Epaulments, gun, 374
+    Equitation, 54
+        ”       standard required, 54
+        ”       terms used in, 58
+    Escorts for horse artillery, 267
+       ”    necessity of, 235
+
+                           F
+
+    Field artillery, characteristics of, 227
+      ”   calls, 205
+      ”   engineering, 373
+      ”   guns, characteristics of, 227
+      ”    ”    effect and use of, 227
+      ”   howitzers, characteristics of, 228
+    Fire action with mounted action, 269
+      ”  artillery, distribution of, 338
+      ”     ”       natures of, 144
+      ”  battery, 323
+      ”  concentration of, 339
+      ”  control of, 320
+      ”    ”      ” in action, 251
+      ”  converging, effect of, 250
+      ”  covering, combination of guns, machine guns and rifles, 247
+      ”  discipline, 293
+      ”  distribution of, general principles, 338
+      ”  effect of, 248
+      ”  gun, 323
+      ”  in defence, 256
+      ”  justification for opening of, 233
+      ”  line of, laying out the, 310
+      ”  lines of parallelism of, 182
+      ”  not to be opened with more guns than necessary, 233
+      ”  objects of, 230
+      ”  observation of, 316
+      ”      ”        ”  from aircraft, 238, 325
+      ”      ”        ”    ”  kites, 329
+      ”  on hostile firing lines, 256
+      ”  searching and sweeping combined, 343
+      ”      ”    341
+      ”  section, 323
+      ”  sweeping, 342
+      ”  unit, 293
+      ” when to be opened by horse artillery, 272
+    Firing battery, composition of, 294
+       ”   blank ammunition, precautions to be taken, 411
+    First line wagons, composition of, 294
+    Force, economy of, 232
+    Flight, time of, 169
+    Fortress, mobile artillery in the attack and defence of, 275
+    Furlough, arrangement of, 15
+    Fuze indicator, object and theory of, 162
+      ”      ”      use of, 165
+      ”  scale, 168
+      ”  setters, list of qualified to be kept, 190
+      ”    ”      numbers maintained, 190
+      ”    ”      to be tested, 190
+      ”  to find the, 334, 337
+    Fuzes, time and percussion, 161
+
+                           G
+
+    Gallop, the true, 58
+    Galloping, disunited and false, 59
+    Games, value of, 8
+    Gravity, force of, action on shell during flight, 149
+    Ground scouts, 284
+    Gun arcs, use of, 312
+     ”  epaulments, 374
+     ”  field, number of men required for service of, 213
+     ”  fire, 323
+     ”  heavy, number of men required for service of, 214
+     ”  horse, number of men required for service of, 209
+     ”  layers and fuze setters, list of qualified to be kept, 190
+     ”    ”     ”  numbers maintained, 190
+     ”    ”     ”  to be tested, 190
+     ”  mountain, number of men required for service of, 214
+     ”  parks, sites for, 397
+     ”  pits, 374
+     ”  when laid, 172
+    Gunners, course of instruction, 12
+    Gunnery, general instructions, 142
+       ”       ”     principles of, 145
+       ”     terms, 142
+    Guns, concealment of, 373
+     ”    dispersion of, 245
+     ”    entrenchment of, 373
+     ”    field, characteristics of, 227
+     ”      ”    effect and use of, 227
+     ”    heavy, characteristics of, 229
+     ”    how mounted, 172
+     ”    loading of, 403
+     ”    not to be parked in the open, 397
+     ”    objects and methods of keeping in hand, 234, 245
+     ”    selection of position for, 295
+     ”    slinging of, 407
+
+                           H
+
+    Halting, when driving, 108
+    Hand, use of, for measuring angles, 180
+    Harness, care of, 133
+       ”     disposal of, 134, 135
+       ”     fitting of, 102
+    Headquarters of battery, movement of, 295
+        ”        ”  brigade ”, 281
+    Heavy artillery, characteristics of, 229
+      ”      ”       use of, 276, 277
+      ”   batteries, observing parties for, 319
+      ”   guns, ranging for, 336, 338
+    Hill, driving down, 113, 115
+    Hills, driving up, 111, 115
+    Hooking in and unhooking, 106
+    Horse artillery action in cavalry pursuit or retreat, 273
+      ”      ”      advance into action, 270
+      ”      ”      commander, duty of, 264, 271
+      ”      ”      employment with cavalry, 265
+      ”      ”      escorts for, 267
+      ”      ”      fire, when to be opened, 272
+      ”      ”      in a general engagement, 275
+      ”      ”       ”   cavalry fight, 272
+      ”      ”      position on the march, 267
+      ”      ”      with cavalry acting dismounted, 273
+      ”   balance, 59
+      ”   bending a, 86
+      ”   brows, 405
+      ”   collected, 59, 84
+      ”   how to pick up a foot, 73
+      ”    ”  run in hand, 73
+      ”   paces of the, 58
+      ”   to jump, teaching of, 123
+      ”   to stand still without being held, teaching a, 123
+      ”   training of, first stage, 118
+      ”        ”       general principles, 116
+      ”        ”       second stage, 120
+      ”        ”       third stage, 124
+      ”   wooden, use of, 71
+    Horseback, first movements on, 80
+    Horseman, qualifications of, 54
+    Horsemastership, general instructions, 55
+          ”          necessity of, 54
+    Horses, awkward, riding and retraining of, 126
+       ”    draught, refractory, 132
+       ”    feeding of, 56
+       ”    fretting, 130
+       ”    jibbing, 112
+       ”    leading of, 92
+       ”    loading of, 402
+       ”    off saddling, 56
+       ”    practising swimming, 18
+       ”    pulling, causes and cure of, 127
+       ”    refusing, causes and cure of, 128
+       ”    rolling in the sand, 57
+       ”    securing of, 92
+       ”    shoeing, 57
+       ”    slinging of, transports alongside, 403
+       ”       ”      ”  transports not alongside, 404
+       ”    sore backs, cause of, 56
+       ”    standard required of, 55
+       ”    temper and vice, 132
+       ”    that decline to leave the ranks, 130
+       ”      ”     ”    to stand still when being mounted, 131
+       ”      ”  fret, 130
+       ”      ”  rush at their fences, 130
+       ”    training of remounts, 54
+       ”    vice and bad temper, 132
+       ”    watering of, 56
+       ”    weight off the back, 56
+    Howitzers, field, characteristics of, 228
+        ”      ranging for, 336
+        ”      use of, 277, 278
+
+                           I
+
+    Indicator, fuze, 162
+    Indirect laying, advantages and disadvantages of, 175
+       ”       ”     for direction, 176
+       ”       ”      ”  elevation, 175
+       ”       ”     when employed, 175
+    Individual training, 15
+        ”         ”      object of, 11
+    Infantry advance, stopping of hostile, 256
+       ”     advancing, artillery to support attack of, 249
+       ”     assault, 250, 251
+       ”     co-operation with, duty of artillery commander, 242
+       ”     deployment, cover and support of, 246
+       ”     grouping of, with artillery, 236, 241, 254
+       ”     hostile methods of engaging, 348, 357
+       ”        ”    prevent movements of, 230
+       ”     howitzers adapted to support of in later stages
+                       of attack, 228
+       ”     intended action to be communicated to artillery
+                       commander, 281
+       ”     sacrifice of artillery to support, 232
+       ”     support of primary object, 247
+       ”        ”     ” principle of all artillery tactics, 230
+    Information, advanced guard obtains, 245
+    Intercommunication, N.C.O. from ammunition column to accompany
+                        headquarters of brigade for, 368
+           ”            service of, 390
+           ”               ”     ”  brigade headquarters, 288
+           ”             system of, 235
+    Irregular warfare, artillery in, 278
+
+                           J
+
+    Jibber, method of starting a, 112
+    Judging distance, training in, 382
+    Jumping, instruction of recruits in, 81
+       ”     teaching of horses in, 123
+       ”     training of mules in, 140
+
+                           K
+
+    Kites, method of engaging, 351
+      ”    observation of fire from, 329
+
+                           L
+    Lands, 146
+    Layers, list of qualified to be kept, 190
+      ”     numbers maintained, 190
+    Laying, to be tested, 190
+      ”     clinometer, 177
+      ”     direct, advantage and disadvantages of, 174
+      ”       ”    when employed, 173, 174
+      ”       ”    with 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. and other field guns, 174
+      ”     general instructions for, 172
+      ”     indirect, advantages and disadvantages of, 175
+      ”        ”      for direction, 176
+      ”        ”       ”  elevation, 175
+      ”        ”      when employed, 175
+      ”     main factors in, 172
+      ”     methods of instruction in, 172
+      ”     out the line of fire, 310
+      ”     with open sights, 173
+    Leading of battery, 302
+      ”     brigade, 281, 283
+      ”     in mounted drill, 206
+    Leave, arrangement of, 15
+    Lectures, importance of, 15
+    Limbering up, 110
+    Line of fire, how marked, 310, 311
+      ”   “ laying out the, 310
+      ”  to find the, 335
+    Lines of fire, how obtained, 310
+      ”    ” parallelism of, 182
+    Loading a wagon or cart, 136
+    Localities, method of engaging, 344
+    Look-out men, 319
+    Lyddite shell, 157
+
+                           M
+
+    Machine guns, cavalry, position of, 271
+       ”      ”   methods of engaging, 350
+    Main body, protection of, 245
+    Map reading, training in, 388
+    Maps, rough, those who reconnoitre should be able to execute, 385
+    Marches and march discipline, 394
+    Mountain artillery, characteristics of, 229
+       ”        ”       mounted drill, 193, 194, 214
+       ”        ”       organization for drill and manœuvre, 193
+       ”        ”       special instructions re equitation
+                                and driving, 137
+    Mounted drill, battery, 215
+       ”      ”    brigade, 222
+       ”      ”    commands used at, 201
+       ”      ”    falling in for parade, 194
+       ”      ”    field battery, 213
+       ”      ”      ”   calls used at, 205
+       ”      ”    frontages and depths, 196
+       ”      ”    general instructions, 191
+       ”      ”    heavy battery, 214
+       ”      ”    horse battery, 209
+       ”      ”    intervals and distances, 195
+       ”      ”    leading and dressing, 206
+       ”      ”    markers, 208
+       ”      ”    mountain artillery, 193, 194
+       ”      ”       ”     battery, 214
+       ”      ”    object of, 191
+       ”      ”    posts of officers, N.C.O’s. &c., 197
+       ”      ”    signals used at, 202
+       ”      ”    wheeling, 207
+    Mounting a horse, 73
+    Movements, 394
+    Moving off, when driving, 108
+       ”   targets, deflection for, 179
+       ”      ”     use of direct laying against, 174
+    Mules, leading of, 140
+      ”    ordnance, fitting saddlery of, 138
+      ”    training young, 139
+    Musketry, knowledge of necessary, 8
+
+                           N
+
+    Night firing, 292
+      ”   operations, general instructions, 261
+    Nitro-glycerine, freezing in cordite, 156
+    Nos. 1, duties of in action, 310
+
+                           O
+
+    Objectives, allotting, by brigade commander, 288
+        ”       choice of by battery commander, 293
+        ”       methods of engaging, 343
+    Observation, combined, 317
+        ”        of fire, 316
+        ”        ”   ”    from aircraft, 238, 325
+        ”        ”   ”      ”  kites, 329
+        ”        posts, advanced, 242
+        ”          ”    when established, 246
+        ”        responsibility of brigade commander, 290
+        ”        training in, 383
+    Observing officer, definition of, 316
+        ”       ”      heavy artillery, duties of, in action, 309
+        ”     station and battery, how to measure distance between, 314
+        ”       ”     battery, 295
+        ”       ”     definition of, 316
+        ”       ”     selection of, 281
+    Obstacles, passage of, 377
+    Officers, duties of, in action, 308
+    Officers’ patrols, 240, 380
+    Operation orders, 243
+    Orderlies, use of, 322
+        ”       ”    ” for communication, 236
+    Orders by battery commander, 300
+      ”    operation, 243
+    Overseas dominions, training of artillery, 22
+
+                           P
+
+    Pace, length of, 30
+    Paces of the horse, 58
+    Panorama sketches, those who reconnoitre should be
+             able to execute, 385
+    Parallel lines of fire, how obtained, 312
+    Parallelism of lines of fire, 182
+    Patrols, look-out men not to be used as, 320
+       ”     officers’, 240, 380
+    Percussion shrapnel, 160
+    Picketing rope, 399
+    Pits, gun, 374
+    Planeing, 151
+    Position, change of, 291
+       ”      covered, definition of, 297
+       ”      defence of, form taken, 248, 253
+       ”      for batteries, selection of, 282
+       ”       ”  guns, selection of, 295
+       ”      in observation, meaning of, 286
+       ”      ”  readiness, meaning of, 286
+       ”      methods of occupying by battery, 297
+       ”      occupation of a, by a brigade, 286
+       ”      of battery, change of, 360
+       ”       “ wagon line, selection of, 303
+       ”      open, definition of, 296
+       ”      semi-covered, definition of, 296
+    Positions of assembly, when selected, 303
+    Principles of employment, 230
+    Protection of artillery, 234
+       ”       ”  the main body, 245
+    Pulling horses, causes and cure of, 127
+
+                           Q
+
+    Quarters, 394
+
+                           R
+
+    Rail, transport by, 401
+    Range, 152
+    Range-finders, all officers to be capable of using, 390
+         ”          ”  reserve to be maintained, 389
+         ”         finding, definition of, 155
+         ”            ”     general instructions, 388
+         ”         tables, 166
+         ”           ”     information in, 168
+         ”         takers, training of, 389
+    Ranging, 155
+       ”    all guns, 331, 334
+       ”    collective, 331, 332, 352
+       ”    examples of, 351
+       ”    for heavy guns, 336, 338
+       ”     ”  howitzers, 336
+       ”    general instructions, 330
+       ”    in brigade, 288
+       ”    method of detailing, 332
+       ”    section, 331, 333, 355, 358
+       ”    single gun, 331, 333, 359
+       ”    use of percussion and time shrapnel for, 160
+    Rations, preparation of, 18
+    Ravines, passage of, 378
+    Rearguards, 264
+    Reconnaissance, 253, 280, 295
+         ”          aerial, 246
+         ”          by battery commander, 295
+         ”          ”  brigade commander, 281
+         ”          object of, and general instructions, 380
+         ”          reports, detail of, 386
+    Recruits, course of instruction, 12
+       ”      training in the battery, 13
+       ”         ”     of, 10
+    Reference point, definition of, 289
+       ”        ”    laying out lines of fire on, 290
+    Refusers, causes and cure of, 128
+    Rein, right and left, 58
+    Reins, how to hold the, 76, 114
+      ”    to lengthen or shorten the, 78, 115
+    Remounts, training of, 54
+    Reporting, training in, 388
+    Reports and sketches, 385
+    Reserve brigade commander, responsibility of, 9
+       ”    special, training of, 22
+    Retirement, action of artillery in, 263
+        ”       of battery in action, 361
+    Retraining awkward horses, 126
+    Reversing in narrow roads, 113
+    Revolver shooting, 101
+    Riding awkward horses, 126
+      ”    first lessons to the recruit, 71
+      ”      ”   movements on horseback, 80
+      ”    general instructions, 66
+      ”    hints to instructors, 68
+      ”    how to hold the reins, 76
+      ”     ”  rise in the stirrups, 80
+      ”    mounting and dismounting, 73
+      ”    over a fence, teaching recruit, 81
+      ”    position in the saddle at attention, 79
+      ”    preliminary training, 71
+      ”    spurs in, use of, 89
+      ”    the aids in, 67, 83
+      ”     ”  seat, 75
+      ”    various exercises in, 89
+      ”    with the rifle, 98
+      ”      ”   ”  sword, 95
+    Rifle drill, general instructions, 44
+      ”   exercises not to be performed at inspections, 44
+      ”   riding with the, 98
+      ”   saluting when carrying, 53
+    Rifling, definition and object of, 147
+       ”     twist of, 147
+    Road spaces, 197
+
+                           S
+
+    Saddle-fitting, 59
+    Saddlery, care of, 133
+       ”      disposal of, 134, 135
+       ”      miscellaneous details, 65
+       ”      of ordnance mules, fitting of, 138
+    Saddling, 61
+    Salute, drivers’, 105
+      ”     officers’, 97
+    Saluting, rules as to, 28
+       ”      when carrying rifle, 53
+       ”       ”   leading horse, 73
+    Salvoes, when used, 325
+    School, attendance of recruits in, 12
+    Scouting, training of men at, 381
+    Searching and sweeping fire combined, 348
+       ”      fire, 341
+    Searchlights, use of, 292
+    Section commander, duties of, in action, 308
+       ”        ”      qualifications for, 10
+       ”        ”      responsibility of, 10
+       ”    control of fire, 322
+       ”    fire, 323
+       ”    ranging, 331, 333, 355, 358
+       ”    training, 17
+    Sections, nomenclature and position of, 191
+    Semaphore signalling, 393
+       ”         ”        use of, 320
+    Shell during flight, forces acting on, 148
+      ”   elongated, advantages of, 146
+      ”   in the bore, forces acting on, 148
+      ”   lyddite, 157
+      ”   shrapnel, 157
+      ”   star, 161
+    Shoeing of horses, 57
+    Shooting, causes of, affecting the accuracy of, 154, 166
+       ”      effect on, when wheels not level, 153
+    Shrapnel bullets, 158
+       ”     percussion, 160
+       ”     shell, 157
+       ”     time, 160
+    Sight, angle of, alteration in, 178
+      ”      ”    ”  how found when target not visible from guns, 176
+      ”      ”   how measured, 176
+      ”    clinometer, to be set level, 174
+    Sight, telescopic, when useful, 174
+    Sighting, principle of, 152
+    Sights, open, laying with, 173
+    Signal service, divisional, 237
+    Signallers, brigade and battery, 391
+    Signalling, abbreviations to be used in, 321
+        ”       from aircraft, 239
+        ”        ”  the ground to aircraft, 239
+        ”       use of, in control of fire, 320
+    Signals from and to aeroplanes, 328
+       ”    used at mounted drill, 202
+    Single displacement, 186
+       ”   gun ranging, 331, 333, 359
+    Sketches and reports, 385
+    Sketching, training in, 388
+    Slinging guns, 407
+       ”     horses, 403
+       ”     vehicles, 407
+    Soldierly spirit, development of, 7
+    Special reserve, training of, 22
+    Spurs, use of, in riding, 89
+    Squad drill, general instructions, 23, 35, 38
+      ”   formation of, 12
+      ”   instructors, selection of, 12
+    Staffs, method of engaging, 345
+    Star shell, 161
+    Sub-base, use of, 314
+    Subsections, numbering and position of, 191
+    Surprise, concealed manœuvre favours, 232
+    Sweeping and searching fire combined, 343
+        ”    fire, 339, 342
+    Switch angle, method of obtaining, 189, 190
+    Sword, riding with the, 95
+    Syllabus of training, 409
+
+                           T
+
+    Tables, range, 166
+      ”       ”    information in, 168
+    Tactical practice, schemes on which based, 20
+        ”    situation, knowledge of, essential, 332
+    Tactics, battery, general instructions, 293
+       ”     brigade     ”         ”      , 280
+    Target, change of, 343
+    Targets, concealed, indication of by aircraft, 238
+       ”     location of, from aircraft, 324
+       ”     moving, deflection for, 179
+       ”       ”     use of direct laying against, 174
+    Telephone equipment, use of, 237
+    Telephones, 320, 393
+    Telescopic sight, when useful, 174
+    Territorial artillery, training of, 22
+    Time and percussion fuzes, 161
+      ”  in marching, 30
+      ”  of flight, 169
+      ”  shrapnel, 160
+    Traces, position of, 107
+    Training, artillery of the overseas dominions, 22
+       ”      battery, 17
+       ”      brigade, 19
+       ”      collective, 17
+       ”          ”       object of, 14
+       ”      divisional artillery, 21
+       ”      individual, 15
+       ”          ”       object of, 14
+       ”      object and method of, 7
+       ”      of recruits, 11
+       ”      ”  special reserve artillery, 22
+       ”      ”  territorial artillery, 22
+       ”     responsibility for, 8
+       ”     section, 17
+       ”     syllabus of, 409
+       ”     system of, 10
+       ”     the young horse, 116
+       ”     to be progressive and continuous, 14
+       ”     with other arms important, 9
+    Trajectory, 151
+    Transport of artillery by rail, 401
+
+                           U
+
+    Unhooking, 106
+    Unlimbering, 110
+
+                           V
+
+    Vehicles, care of, 136
+       ”      not to be parked in the open, 398
+       ”      slinging of, 407
+    Villages, attack of, by artillery, 261, 344
+       ”      defence of, 261
+    Visual signalling, 237, 239
+      ”    training, 381
+
+                           W
+
+    Wagon line, selection of position for, 305
+      ”   loading a, 136
+    Wagons, care of, 136
+    Wheels, deflection due to difference in level of, 178
+       ”    not level, effect on shooting, 153
+    Wheeling, mounted drill, 207
+        ”     when driving, 108, 109
+    Whip, use of, 105, 115
+    Whistle, use of, 322
+    Wind, deflection for, 179
+      ”   effect of, on shooting, 155
+    Wireless telegraphy, 239
+    Wood, attack on a, 345
+      ”   fighting, artillery in, 259
+    Woods, advantage to be taken of, for concealment
+                  against aircraft, 231
+      ”    use of mountain artillery in the defence of, 230
+    Wounded, disposal of, 363
+
+                           Z
+
+    Zone, to register a, 344
+    Zones, 282
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78053 ***
diff --git a/78053-h/78053-h.htm b/78053-h/78053-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f26914
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/78053-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,22199 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html>
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+    <meta charset="UTF-8">
+    <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1">
+    <title>
+      Field Artillery Training 1914 | Project Gutenberg
+    </title>
+    <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover">
+    <style>
+
+body { margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; }
+
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { text-align: center; clear: both; }
+.h_subtitle{font-weight: normal; font-size: smaller;}
+
+p            { margin-top: .51em; text-align: justify; text-indent: 1.5em; margin-bottom: .49em; }
+p.no-indent  { margin-top: .51em; text-align: justify; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .49em;}
+p.author     { margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 5%; text-align: right;}
+p.neg-indent { text-indent: -1.5em; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; padding-left: 1.5em;}
+p.f90        { font-size: 90%;  text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; }
+p.f110       { font-size: 110%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; }
+p.f120       { font-size: 120%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; }
+p.f150       { font-size: 150%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; }
+p.f200       { font-size: 200%; text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; }
+
+.fs_90  { font-size:   90%; }
+.fs_110 { font-size:  110%; }
+.fs_120 { font-size:  120%; }
+
+.spa1 { margin-top: 1em; }
+.spa2 { margin-top: 2em; }
+.spb1 { margin-bottom: 1em; }
+.spb2 { margin-bottom: 2em; }
+
+hr { width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; clear: both; }
+hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;}
+         @media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} }
+hr.r10   {width: 10%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 45%; margin-right: 45%;}
+hr.r60  {width: 60%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%;}
+
+div.chapter {page-break-before: always;}
+h2.nobreak  {page-break-before: avoid;}
+
+ul.index  { list-style-type: none; white-space: nowrap; }
+li.ifrst  { margin-top: 1em; }
+li.isub2  {text-indent: 2em;}
+li.isub3  {text-indent: 3em;}
+li.isub4  {text-indent: 4em;}
+li.isub5  {text-indent: 5em;}
+li.isub6  {text-indent: 6em;}
+li.isub7  {text-indent: 7em;}
+li.isub8  {text-indent: 8em;}
+li.isub9  {text-indent: 9em;}
+li.isub10 {text-indent: 10em;}
+li.isub20 {text-indent: 20em;}
+
+table { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; white-space: nowrap;
+        border-spacing: 0px; border-collapse: collapse; }
+
+th, td { padding-top:  0px; padding-bottom: 0px;
+         padding-left: 0px; padding-right:  0px; }
+
+.tdl {text-align: left;}
+.tdr {text-align: right;}
+.tdc {text-align: center;}
+.tdc_top    {text-align: center; vertical-align: top;}
+.tdl_top    {text-align: left; vertical-align: top;}
+.tdr_top    {text-align: right; vertical-align: top;}
+.tdc_wsp    {text-align: center; vertical-align: middle; padding-left: 0.5em; padding-right: 0.5em;}
+.tdl_ws1    {text-align: left; vertical-align: middle; padding-left: 1em;}
+.tdl_ws2    {text-align: left; vertical-align: middle; padding-left: 2em;}
+.tdl_wsp    {text-align: left; vertical-align: middle; padding-left: 0.5em;}
+.tdr_ws1    {text-align: right; vertical-align: middle; padding-right: 1em;}
+.tdr_wsp    {text-align: right; vertical-align: middle; padding-right: 0.5em;}
+
+.pagenum { position: absolute;
+    left: 92%;
+    font-size: smaller;
+    text-align: right;
+    font-style: normal;
+    font-weight: normal;
+    font-variant: normal;
+}
+
+.blockquot { margin-left: 12%; margin-right: 12%; }
+
+.bb    {border-bottom: solid thin;}
+.bb2   {border-bottom: solid medium;}
+.bt    {border-top: solid thin;}
+.bt2   {border-top: solid medium;}
+.br    {border-right: solid thin;}
+.bl    {border-left: solid thin;}
+.bbox  {border: solid medium;}
+
+.no-wrap  {white-space: nowrap; }
+.center   {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;}
+.smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+.allsmcap {font-variant: small-caps; text-transform: lowercase;}
+.u        {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+img { max-width: 100%; height: auto; }
+
+.figcenter { margin: auto; text-align: center;
+             page-break-inside: avoid; max-width: 100%; }
+
+.figleft { float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em;
+           margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center; page-break-inside: avoid;
+           max-width: 100%; }
+
+.x-ebookmaker .figleft {float: left;}
+
+
+div.figcontainer { clear: both; margin: 0em auto; text-align: center; max-width: 100%;}
+div.figsub { display: inline-block; margin: 1em 1em; vertical-align: top;
+                      max-width: 100%; text-align: center; }
+
+.footnotes        {border: 1px dashed;}
+.footnote         {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
+.footnote .label  {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+.fnanchor {
+    vertical-align: super;
+    font-size: .8em;
+    text-decoration:
+    none;
+}
+
+.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA;
+    color: black;
+     font-size:smaller;
+     padding:0.5em;
+     margin-bottom:5em;
+     font-family:sans-serif, serif; }
+
+.ws2   {display: inline; margin-left: 0em; padding-left:  2em;}
+.ws3   {display: inline; margin-left: 0em; padding-left:  3em;}
+.ws4   {display: inline; margin-left: 0em; padding-left:  4em;}
+
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78053 ***</div>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p class="author">[<i>Crown Copyright Reserved.</i>]</p>
+
+<h1>FIELD ARTILLERY<br> TRAINING.<br>1914.</h1>
+
+<hr class="r60">
+<p class="f150">GENERAL STAFF, WAR OFFICE.</p>
+<hr class="r60">
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <img src="images/coat_of_arms.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="200" >
+</div>
+
+<p class="f110">LONDON:</p>
+
+<p class="f90 no-wrap">PRINTED UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF HIS MAJESTY’S STATIONERY OFFICE<br>
+<span class="smcap">By</span> HARRISON and SONS, <span class="smcap">45-47, St. Martin’s Lane, W.C.,</span> <br>
+<span class="smcap">Printers in Ordinary to His Majesty</span>.</p>
+
+<hr class="r10">
+
+<p class="f90 no-wrap">To be purchased, either directly or through any Bookseller, from<br>
+WYMAN and SONS, <span class="smcap">Limited, 29, Breams Buildings, Fetter Lane, E.C.</span>,<br>
+and<br><span class="smcap">54, St. Mary Street, Cardiff</span>; or<br>
+H.M. STATIONERY OFFICE (<span class="smcap">Scottish Branch</span>),<br>
+<span class="smcap">23, Forth Street, Edinburgh</span>: or<br>
+E. PONSONBY, <span class="smcap">Limited, 116, Grafton Street, Dublin</span>;<br>
+or from the Agencies in the British Colonies and Dependencies,<br>
+the United States of America and other Foreign Countries of<br>
+T. FISHER UNWIN, <span class="smcap">Limited, London, W.C.</span></p>
+
+<p class="f110 spa1"><i>Price Ninepence.</i></p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p>This Manual is issued by command of the Army Council. It deals with
+the general principles which are to govern the training in peace and
+leading in war of Horse, Field, Mountain, and Heavy Artillery, and
+forms the basis of the Training of R.G.A. Companies armed with movable
+armament. The attention of commanders is drawn to “Training and
+Manœuvre Regulations,” Section 2.</p>
+
+<p>Any enunciation by officers responsible for training, of principles
+other than those contained in this Manual, or any practice of methods
+not based on those principles, is forbidden as tending to cause
+confusion of thought and to prejudice successful co-operation in war.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <img src="images/signature.jpg" alt="" width="300" height="98" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">War Office, S.W.</span> <br>
+<span class="ws3">&nbsp;</span><i>9th April, 1914</i>.</p>
+</div>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_iii">[Pg iii]</span></p>
+<p class="f150 u"><b>CONTENTS.</b></p>
+</div>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Sec.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdr">Page.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Definitions</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Page_1">&nbsp;1</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc f120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER I.</b><br>PRINCIPLES OF TRAINING.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Object and method of training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_1">7</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Responsibility for training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_2">&nbsp;8</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc f110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Training of Recruits.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Preliminary training of recruits</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_3">10</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Recruit training in the battery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_4">14</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc f110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">The Annual Training of the Soldier.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">System of training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_5">14</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Individual Training.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_6">15</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Collective Training.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Section training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_7">17</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">8.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Battery training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_8">17</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">9.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Brigade training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_9">19</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">10.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Annual practice</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_10">20</a>
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">11.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Divisional artillery training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_11">21</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">12.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Training of Special Reserve and Territorial</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">artillery and of the artillery of the</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Overseas Dominions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_12">22</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc f120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER II.</b><br>
+                            DISMOUNTED DRILL WITH AND WITHOUT ARMS.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Squad Drill With Intervals.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">13.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_13">23</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">14.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Position and movements at the halt</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_14">24</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">15.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Saluting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_15">27</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">16.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Movements</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_16">29</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Squad Drill in Single Rank.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">17.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_17">35</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">18.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Movements</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_18">36</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Squad Drill in Two Ranks.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">19.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_19">38</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">20.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Movements</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_20">39</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Rifle Drill.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">21.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_21">44</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">22.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Rifle exercises</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_22">44</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">23.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Inspection of arms</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_23">51</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">24.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Guards and compliments</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_24">53</a>
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</span></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER III.</b><br>
+                            EQUITATION AND DRIVING.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">25.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Standard required of men and horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_25">54</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">26.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horsemastership</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_26">55</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">27.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Paces of the horse</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_27">58</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">28.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Terms used in equitation</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_28">58</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Fitting Saddlery.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">29.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">How to fit a saddle</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_29">59</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">30.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Saddling</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_30">61</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">31.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Bridling</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_31">63</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">32.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Miscellaneous details</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_32">65</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Riding.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">33.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_33">66</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">34.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Hints to instructors</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_34">68</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">35.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Preliminary training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_35">71</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">36.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">First lessons to the recruit</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_36">71</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">37.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Mounting and dismounting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_37">73</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">38.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The seat</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_38">75</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">39.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">How to hold the reins</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_39">76</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">40.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Position in the saddle at attention</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_40">79</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">41.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">First movements on horseback</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_41">80</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">42.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Teaching the recruit how to ride his horse</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">over a fence</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_42">81</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">43.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The aids</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_43">83</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">44.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Bending</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_44">86</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">45.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Spurs</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_45">89</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">46.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Various exercises</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_46">89</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">47.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Paying compliments mounted without arms</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_47">92</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">48.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Leading horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_48">92</a>
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">49.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Securing horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_49">92</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">50.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Riding with the sword</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_50">95</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">51.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Riding with the rifle</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_51">98</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">52.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Revolver shooting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_52">101</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Driving.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">53.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General principles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_53">102</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">54.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Fitting harness</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_54">102</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">55.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Position of a driver standing to his horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">and mounted</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_55">104</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">56.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Use of the whip</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_56">105</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">57.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Driving without vehicles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_57">106</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">58.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Hooking in and unhooking</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_58">106</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">59.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Traces</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_59">107</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">60.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Moving off</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_60">108</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">61.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Halting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_61">108</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">62.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Wheeling to the right</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_62">108</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">63.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Wheeling to the left</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_63">109</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">64.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Wheeling about</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_64">109</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">65.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Unlimbering</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_65">110</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">66.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Limbering up</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_66">110</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">67.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Driving up steep hills</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_67">111</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">68.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Jibbing</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_68">112</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">69.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Driving down hill</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_69">113</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">70.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Applying the brake</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_70">113</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">71.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Reversing in narrow roads</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_71">113</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">72.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Driving a pair of horses from the box</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_72">113</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Training the Young Horse.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">73.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General principles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_73">116</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">74.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">First stage</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_74">118</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">75.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Second stage</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_75">120</a>
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">76.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Teaching a horse to stand still without being held</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_76">123</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">77.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Teaching the young horse to jump</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_77">123</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">78.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Third stage</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_78">124</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Riding and Retraining Awkward Horses.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">79.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General remarks</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_79">126</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">80.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Pullers</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_80">127</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">81.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Refusers</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_81">128</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">82.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horses that rush at their fences</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_82">130</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">83.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horses that decline to leave the ranks and</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">“fretting” horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_83">130</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">84.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horses that decline to stand still when</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">being mounted</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_84">131</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">85.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General vice and bad temper</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_85">132</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">86.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Refractory draught horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_86">132</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Care and Disposal of Saddlery<br> and Harness.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">87.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Care of saddlery and harness</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_87">133</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">88.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Disposal of saddlery and harness in harness</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">rooms or stables</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_88">134</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">89.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Disposal of saddlery and harness in bivouac</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_89">135</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Care of Wagons.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">90.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_90">136</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Loading a Wagon or Cart.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">91.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_91">136</a>
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_viii">[Pg viii]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Special Instructions for<br> Mountain Artillery.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">92.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Position of driver</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_92">137</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">93.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Fitting saddlery of ordnance mules</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_93">138</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">94.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Training young mules</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_94">139</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">95.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Leading mules</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_95">140</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER IV.</b><br>GUNNERY.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">96.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_96">142</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">97.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Gunnery terms</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_97">142</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">98.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Natures of artillery fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_98">144</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">99.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Gunnery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_99">145</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">100.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Rifling</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_100">147</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">101.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Centring</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_101">147</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">102.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Forces acting on a shell in the bore</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_102">148</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Forces Acting on a Shell During Flight.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">103.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The resistance of the air</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_103">148</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">104.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The force of gravity</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_104">149</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">105.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Trajectory</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_105">151</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">106.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Elevation</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_106">151</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">107.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Causes affecting the accuracy of shooting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_107">154</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Ammunition.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">108.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Cordite</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_108">155</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">109.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Lyddite shell</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_109">157</a>
+               <span class="pagenum" id="Page_ix">[Pg ix]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">110.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Shrapnel shell</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_110">157</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">111.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Star shell</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_111">161</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">112.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Time and percussion fuzes</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_112">161</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">113.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Fuze indicator</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_113">162</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">114.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Range tables</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_114">166</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER V.</b><br>LAYING.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">115.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_115">172</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">116.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Direct laying</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_116">173</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">117.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Indirect laying</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_117">175</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">118.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Angle of sight</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_118">176</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">119.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Deflection</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_119">178</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">120.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Aiming points</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_120">181</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">121.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Clearing the crest</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_121">181</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">122.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Parallelism of lines of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_122">182</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">123.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Displacement</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_123">186</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">124.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Gun layers and fuze setters</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_124">190</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER VI.</b><br>MOUNTED DRILL.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">125.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_125">191</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">126.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Falling in for parade</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_126">194</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">127.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Intervals and distances</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_127">195</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">128.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Frontages and depths</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_128">196</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">129.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Posts of officers, N.C.Os., etc.</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_129">197</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">130.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Commands and signals</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_130">201</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">131.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Leading and dressing</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_131">206</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">132.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Wheeling</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_132">207</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">133.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Markers</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_133">208</a>
+                     <span class="pagenum" id="Page_x">[Pg x]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">134.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The battery of horse artillery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_134">209</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">135.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The field battery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_135">213</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">136.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The mountain battery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_136">214</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">137.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The heavy battery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_137">214</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">138.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Battery drill</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_138">215</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">139.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Brigade drill</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_139">222</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER VII.</b><br>EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY<br> IN WAR.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">140.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_140">227</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Characteristics of Field Artillery.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">141.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Field guns</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_141">227</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">142.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Field howitzers</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_142">228</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">143.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Heavy artillery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_143">229</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">144.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Mountain artillery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_144">229</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Principles of Employment.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">145.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Objects of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_145">230</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">146.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Concealment</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_146">231</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">147.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Economy of force</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_147">232</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">148.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Protection</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_148">234</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">149.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Intercommunication</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_149">235</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Co-operation of Aircraft with Artillery.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">150.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Employment of aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_150">238</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">151.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Signalling from aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_151">239</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">152.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Signalling from the ground to aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_152">239</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Duties of Divisional Artillery Commander.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">153.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_153">240</a>
+                    <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xi">[Pg xi]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Attack.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">154.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Action of the advanced guard artillery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_154">245</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">155.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Opening phase of the attack</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_155">246</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">156.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Second phase of the attack</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_156">247</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">157.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Third phase of the attack</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_157">250</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Defence.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">158.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions and preliminary measures</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_158">252</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">159.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Opening phase of the defence</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_159">255</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">160.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Second phase of the defence</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_160">256</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">161.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Third phase of the defence</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_161">257</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Counter-Attacks.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">162.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Artillery support to local counter-attacks</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_162">258</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">163.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Artillery support to the decisive counter-attack</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_163">258</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Wood and Village Fighting.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">163<span class="allsmcap">A</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The employment of artillery in wood fighting</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_163A">259</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">163<span class="allsmcap">B</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Artillery in the attack and defence of villages</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_163B">261</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Night Operations.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">164.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_164">261</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Retirements and Retreats.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">165.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Retirements</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_165">263</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">166.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Rearguards</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_166">264</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Employment of Horse Artillery<br> with Cavalry.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">167.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_167">265</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">168.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Position on the march</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_168">267</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">169.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Escorts</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_169">267</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">170.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The approach march</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_170">268</a>
+            <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xii">[Pg xii]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">171.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The advance into action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_171">270</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">172.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The fight</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_172">272</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">173.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Pursuit or retreat</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_173">273</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">174.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horse artillery with cavalry acting dismounted</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_174">273</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">175.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Horse artillery in a general engagement</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_175">275</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">176.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Ammunition supply</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_176">275</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Mobile Artillery in the Attack and Defence<br>
+                            of a Fortress.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">177.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The attack</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_177">276</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">178.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The defence</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_178">277</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Artillery in Irregular Warfare.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">179.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General principles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_179">278</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER VIII.</b><br>BRIGADE TACTICS.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">180.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_180">280</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">181.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Reconnaissance</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_181">280</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">182.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Leading</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_182">283</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">183.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Ground scouts</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_183">284</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">184.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Occupation of a position</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_184">286</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">185.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Intercommunication service</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_185">288</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">186.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Allotting objectives and ranging</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_186">288</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">187.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Observation and control</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_187">290</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">188.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Change of position</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_188">291</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">189.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Night firing</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_189">292</a>
+                     <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xiii">[Pg xiii]</span></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER IX.</b><br>BATTERY TACTICS.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">190.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_190">293</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">191.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Preparation for action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_191">294</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">192.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Reconnaissance of a position</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_192">295</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">193.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Methods of occupying a position</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_193">297</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">194.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Orders</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_194">300</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">195.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Advance for action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_195">302</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">196.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To come into action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_196">303</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">197.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Duties of officers, etc., in action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_197">308</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">198.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Laying out the line of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_198">310</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">199.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Observation of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_199">316</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">200.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Look-out men</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_200">319</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">201.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Control of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_201">320</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">202.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Methods of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_202">323</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">203.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Location of targets from aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_203">324</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">204.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Observation of fire from aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_204">325</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">205.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Signals from and to aeroplanes</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_205">328</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">206.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Observation of fire from kites</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_206">329</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Ranging.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">207.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General Instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_207">330</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">208.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To find the elevation</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_208">331</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">209.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To find the fuze</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_209">334</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">210.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To find the line</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_210">335</a>
+                  <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xiv">[Pg xiv]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Ranging for Howitzers and Heavy Guns.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">211.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_211">336</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">212.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Howitzers</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_212">336</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">213.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_213">338</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Distribution of Fire.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">214.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General principles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_214">338</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">215.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Searching</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_215">341</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">216.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Sweeping</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_216">342</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">217.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Change of target</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_217">343</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Methods of Engaging Various Objectives.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">218.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_218">343</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">219.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To register a zone</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_219">344</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">220.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Localities</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_220">344</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">221.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Staffs</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_221">345</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">222.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Cavalry</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_222">345</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">223.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Artillery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_223">346</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">224.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Infantry</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_224">348</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">225.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Machine guns</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_225">350</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">226.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Aircraft</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_226">350</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">227.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Examples of ranging</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_227">351</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Change of Position.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">228.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To advance</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_228">360</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">229.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">To retire</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_229">361</a>
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xv">[Pg xv]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Replacement of Casualties.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">230.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Casualties on the move</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_230">362</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">231.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Casualties in action</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_231">363</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER X.</b><br>AMMUNITION SUPPLY.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">232.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_232">364</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">233.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Ammunition supply within the battery</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_233">365</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">234.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Replenishment of ammunition</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_234">366</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">235.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Brigade ammunition columns</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_235">367</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">236.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Divisional ammunition columns</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_236">370</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">237.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Ammunition reserves on the line of commmunication</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_237">371</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER XI.</b><br>FIELD ENGINEERING.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">238.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Entrenching and concealing guns</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_238">373</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">239.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Passage of obstacles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_239">377</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER XII.</b><br>RECONNAISSANCE DUTIES,
+                     RANGE-FINDING,<br> AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">240.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_240">380</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">241.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Visual training</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_241">381</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">242.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Training in judging distance</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_242">382</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">243.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Training in observation</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_243">383</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">244.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Reports and sketches</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_244">385</a>
+               <span class="pagenum" id="Page_xvi">[Pg xvi]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Range-finding.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">245.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General instructions</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_245">388</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Service of Communication.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">246.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">General system and principles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_246">390</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">247.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Internal communications</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_247">391</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">248.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">External communications</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_248">392</a></td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>CHAPTER XIII.</b><br>MOVEMENTS AND QUARTERS.<br></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">249.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Marches and march discipline</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_249">394</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">250.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Billets</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_250">396</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">251.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Bivouacs</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_251">398</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Transport of Artillery.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">252.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Transport by rail</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_252">401</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">253.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Slinging horses</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_253">403</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">254.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Slinging guns and vehicles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Para_254">407</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>APPENDIX I.</b></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Syllabus of Training</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Page_409">409</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp;<br><b>APPENDIX II.</b></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Precautions to be Taken when Firing</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2"><span class="smcap">Blank Ammunition</span></td>
+        <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Page_411">411</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_xvii">[Pg xvii]</span></p>
+<p class="f150"><b>LIST OF PLATES.</b></p>
+</div>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdr">To face<br>page.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate I.—Gunnery terms illustrated</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_1">144</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate II.—Gunnery terms illustrated</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_2">144</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate III.—Gunnery terms illustrated</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_3">144</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate IV.—Protected observing station</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_4">376</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate V.—Gun epaulment for shielded gun</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_5">376</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate VI.—Gun pit for shielded gun</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_6">376</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate VII.—Passage of obstacles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_7">378</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate VIII.—Passage of obstacles</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_8">379</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate IX.—Panoramic sketch</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_9">387</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate X.—Range-Taker’s card</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_10">387</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Plate XI.—Temporary ramps</td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#PLATE_11">402</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;<br><span class="smcap">Index</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp"><a href ="#Page_412">412</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent"><b>NOTE.</b>—Amendments, other than minor corrections, are
+indicated by a black line in the margin.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</span></p>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p class="f200"><b>FIELD ARTILLERY<br> TRAINING.<br>1914.</b></p>
+</div>
+
+<hr class="r10">
+<div class="chapter">
+  <h2 class="nobreak">DEFINITIONS.</h2>
+</div>
+
+<p><i>Alignment.</i>—The straight line on which a body of troops is
+formed, or is to form.</p>
+
+<p><i>Base.</i>—An alignment generally indicated by markers on which it
+is desired to form troops.</p>
+
+<p><i>Base body.</i>—That on which a formation is made, or on which the
+alignment is made at the halt, <i>e.g.</i>, “base battery,” “base
+section.”</p>
+
+<p><i>Battery.</i>—A battery of horse, field or mountain artillery
+consists of two or three sections, each of two guns with their
+complement of ammunition wagons. In the case of heavy and territorial
+artillery as well as of most of the artillery of the Overseas Dominions
+a battery consists of two sections only.</p>
+
+<p><i>Battery column.</i>—A battery with the sections in open column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Battery quarter column.</i>—A battery with the sections in quarter
+column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Brigade of artillery.</i>—Two batteries of horse artillery or three
+batteries of field artillery, in each case with an ammunition column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Change of front.</i>—A new alignment facing to a new front.</p>
+
+<p><i>Change of position.</i>—A movement by which a body of troops moves
+altogether off its ground, either to the front, flank, or rear, and
+re-forms on a new alignment.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Close order.</i>—The ordinary distance between front and rear rank
+when formed in line.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column.</i>—Bodies of troops formed one in rear of another. When
+they are at a distance from one another equal to their own frontage
+plus interval, if any, the formation is known as “open column.”</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of batteries.</i>—Batteries in open column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of masses.</i>—Two or more artillery brigades in open
+column, each formed in mass.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of sections.</i>—A formation used in brigade drill, when all
+the sections are in open column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of subsections.</i>—A column of single guns, each with a
+wagon right or left of it, at full interval unless otherwise ordered.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of route.</i>—A column of single carriages.</p>
+
+<p><i>Covering.</i>—The act of a body placing itself correctly in rear of
+another.</p>
+
+<p><i>Deploying interval.</i>—The interval between columns necessary to
+enable them to form line to the front.</p>
+
+<p><i>Deployment.</i>—The formation of line from column.</p>
+
+<p><i>Depth.</i>—The space occupied by a body of troops from front to
+rear.</p>
+
+<p><i>Directing body.</i>—The body on which the direction, pace and
+alignment of a line, or the direction, pace and relative positions of
+the several parts of a column or échelon depend.</p>
+
+<p><i>Distance.</i>—The space between men or bodies of troops from front
+to rear.</p>
+
+<p><i>Divisional line of masses.</i>—A line of two or more artillery
+brigades each formed in mass at deploying interval.</p>
+
+<p><i>Divisional mass.</i>—A divisional line of masses at 25 yards
+interval.</p>
+
+<p><i>Double échelon.</i>—A form of échelon in which the centre body is
+in advance with other bodies on its right and left rear.</p>
+
+<p><i>Dressing.</i>—The act of taking up an alignment correctly or of
+maintaining that alignment on the move.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Échelon.</i>—Échelon when used with reference to drill signifies a
+formation of successive and parallel units facing the same way, each on
+a flank and to the rear of the unit in front of it. “Échelon” is when
+the units are at wheeling distance, and “short échelon” when they are
+at 20 yards distance.</p>
+
+<p><i>File.</i>—A front rank man with his coverer.</p>
+
+<p><i>Firing battery.</i>—Six guns and 6 ammunition wagons, except in the
+case of 4-gun batteries, when it consists of 4 guns and 4 wagons.</p>
+
+<p>In mountain artillery the firing battery consists of the mules carrying
+the various portions of the gun and carriage, and 2 ammunition mules
+per subsection, 1 pioneer mule per section, 1 mule for telephone
+equipment, and relief mules for the gun and carriage complete of one
+subsection.</p>
+
+<p><i>First line wagons.</i>—Those battery ammunition wagons not included
+in the firing battery.</p>
+
+<p>In mountain artillery the first line mules are those battery ammunition
+and relief mules not included in the firing battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>Fixed pivot.</i>—The term applied to the pivot when, during a
+wheel, the pivot man is halted and turns upon his own ground.</p>
+
+<p><i>Flank.</i>—Either side of a body of troops; also the direction to
+either hand of a body at right angles to its front.</p>
+
+<p><i>Fours.</i>—Four front rank men with their coverers.</p>
+
+<p><i>Front.</i>—The direction towards which a body of troops, or a
+single man, is facing; in a general sense, the direction of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><i>Frontage.</i>—The extent of ground covered laterally by troops.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ground scouts.</i>—Men employed to ascertain whether the ground in
+the immediate vicinity is passable for artillery.</p>
+
+<p><i>Half-section.</i>—Two front rank men with their coverers.</p>
+
+<p><i>Horse-length</i>—A term of measurement (8 feet).</p>
+
+<p><i>Horse-width.</i>—A term of measurement (3 feet), which includes 3
+inches outside the rider’s knee on either side.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Inclining of carriages.</i>—A movement in which each carriage of a
+subsection makes a half-wheel independently on its own ground.</p>
+
+<p><i>Inner flank.</i>—The flank which serves as a pivot when a body is
+changing its direction.</p>
+
+<p><i>Interval.</i>—The space between men or bodies of troops from flank
+to flank.</p>
+
+<p><i>Line.</i>—Bodies of troops formed on the same alignment.</p>
+
+<p><i>Line of battery columns.</i>—Battery columns in line at deploying
+interval.</p>
+
+<p><i>Line of columns.</i>—A line of two or more columns formed on the
+same alignment.</p>
+
+<p><i>Look-out men.</i>—Men specially detailed to assist the battery
+commander in watching the movements of the enemy and friendly troops,
+and in discovering new objectives.</p>
+
+<p><i>Mass.</i>—A line of battery columns at 25 yards interval.</p>
+
+<p><i>Markers.</i>—Men employed in certain cases to mark points on which
+to march.</p>
+
+<p><i>Moving pivot.</i>—The term applied to the pivot when, during a
+change of direction, the pivot man moves on the arc of a circle without
+halting.</p>
+
+<p><i>Oblique march and inclining.</i>—Movements by which ground is
+gained to the front and flank simultaneously, while a front parallel to
+the original alignment is maintained.</p>
+
+<p><i>Outer flank.</i>—The flank opposite to the inner flank.</p>
+
+<p><i>Pace.</i>—The denomination of different degrees of speed; also a
+measurement of distance (30 inches) on foot.</p>
+
+<p><i>Parade line.</i>—The line on which troops form for drill or for
+ceremonial purposes.</p>
+
+<p><i>Parade movements.</i>—The movements laid down for the inspection of
+a body of troops.</p>
+
+<p><i>Patrols.</i>—A party of men detached for any purpose, such as to
+reconnoitre, to prevent surprises, to report fire effect, to pick out
+and report favourable targets, or to keep a commander informed of
+movements of either side.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Pivot.</i>—The flank on which a body wheels. The man on that flank
+is the “pivot man,” or simply the pivot.</p>
+
+<p><i>Quarter column.</i>—Batteries in column at 12 yards, sections in
+column at 6 yards, distance from one another. When at full interval,
+each gun has a wagon on its left at close interval.</p>
+
+<p><i>Rank.</i>—Two or more men in line side by side.</p>
+
+<p><i>Scouts.</i>—Selected men detached to obtain information of the
+enemy, country, supplies, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>Section.</i>—A section consists of two subsections.</p>
+
+<p><i>Serrefiles.</i>—Officers, non-commissioned officers, and others
+whose posts are in rear of a battery when in line.</p>
+
+<p><i>Shouldering.</i>—Wheeling on a moving pivot.</p>
+
+<p><i>Single file.</i>—One front rank man or his coverer.</p>
+
+<p><i>Subsection.</i>—One gun, with its complement of men, horses, and
+ammunition wagons.</p>
+
+<p><i>Taking ground to a flank.</i>—A movement in which each carriage of
+a subsection wheels independently on its own ground.</p>
+
+<p><i>Wheeling.</i>—A movement by which a body changes direction on a
+fixed or moving pivot.</p>
+
+
+<h3><i>Special for Mountain Artillery.</i>&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_1_1" href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></h3>
+
+<p><i>Subsection.</i>—One gun with its complement of men and mules,
+divided into two parts called firing battery mules and first line mules.</p>
+
+<p><i>Battery column.</i>—A column of sections, in which the firing
+battery mules of each section follow each other in succession and are
+followed by the first line mules in the same order.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of route.</i>—A column of single mules in which each
+subsection moves complete.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Column of sections.</i>—A column in which each section moves
+complete.</p>
+
+<p><i>Column of subsections.</i>—A column of single mules, in which the
+mules of the firing battery of each subsection follow each other in
+succession and are followed by the first line mules in the same order.</p>
+
+<p><i>Mule-length.</i>—A term of measurement (6 feet).</p>
+
+<p>Width of a loaded ammunition mule = 4 feet.</p>
+
+<p><i>Relief Mules.</i>—For some of the more difficult loads a second
+mule is provided, which acts as a relief to the firing battery mule.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER I.<br><span class="h_subtitle">PRINCIPLES OF TRAINING.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p class="f120" id="Para_1"><b>1.</b> <i>Object and method of training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The object of training is to fit all ranks for the performance of
+their duties in war. This volume deals with the general principles
+which govern the training in peace and leading in war of horse,
+field, mountain, and heavy artillery. It also forms the basis of the
+training of companies R.G.A. armed with movable armament (except 6-inch
+howitzers) for the defence of land fronts.</p>
+
+<p>2. The training must include both moral and physical instruction. The
+development of a soldierly spirit is needed to help the soldier to
+bear fatigue, privation and danger cheerfully; to embue him with a
+sense of honour; to give him confidence in his superiors and comrades;
+to increase his powers of initiative, of self-confidence, and of
+self-restraint; to train him to obey orders or to act suitably in their
+absence; to impress upon him that so long as he is physically capable
+of fighting, surrender to the enemy is a disgraceful act; and finally
+to produce such a state of discipline that each individual will perform
+his duty coolly and correctly in the stress of battle.</p>
+
+<p>The training of the body is required to develop the soldier’s capacity
+for resisting fatigue and privation, in order that he may always be fit
+to perform his duty.</p>
+
+<p>It is only after some development in these qualities of mind and
+body has been made by the individual that instruction in working
+collectively in the field should be undertaken.</p>
+
+<p>3. As soon as a man enters the service, every endeavour should be made
+to foster in him a soldierly spirit. Officers and non-commissioned
+officers must remember that it is chiefly by their example that the
+development of a soldierly spirit will be achieved.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</span></p>
+
+<p>The soldier should be instructed in the deeds which have made the
+British Army and his own regiment famous, and as his education
+progresses simple lessons drawn from military history may be explained
+to him.</p>
+
+<p>The privileges which he inherits as a citizen of a great empire should
+be explained to him, and he should be taught to appreciate the honour
+which is his, as a soldier, of serving his King and country.</p>
+
+<p>4. The management, care, and handling of his gun and horse must always
+be the principal aim in the artilleryman’s training, but he must also
+have some knowledge of musketry and field engineering, either of which
+he may be called upon to employ in the course of a campaign.</p>
+
+<p>Drill is an essential factor of all training, in order to establish
+and maintain a mutual understanding between a commander and his
+subordinates.</p>
+
+<p>Mounted and dismounted games are also of value in teaching the
+importance of co-operation, discipline and determination. The greater
+number, therefore, that take part in such sports the better.</p>
+
+<p>It should be impressed on all ranks throughout their training that the
+sole object of the various courses of instruction is to fit them for
+their duties in war. By keeping this fact constantly in view training
+will develop on sound and practical lines.</p>
+
+<p class="f120" id="Para_2"><b>2.</b> <i>Responsibility for training.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>See also</i> T. and M. Regs. Sec. <b>2</b>.</p>
+
+<p>1. Responsibility for the training of the troops committed to their
+charge rests on all commanders from those of sections upwards. Subject
+to the principles laid down in the various Training Manuals and
+Regulations, commanders are at liberty to employ such methods as appear
+best calculated to attain the desired end. Superior commanders while
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</span>
+holding their subordinates responsible for the training of their
+units will never forego their functions of guidance and control, and
+will exercise a general and continuous supervision over their work.
+In carrying out this duty they must not curb the initiative of their
+subordinates or interfere unnecessarily so long as the training is
+conducted on sound lines.</p>
+
+<p>2. The importance of artillery being regularly trained to work with
+the other arms cannot be overestimated. It is the function of the
+divisional commander to afford the necessary opportunities to his
+batteries, when the divisional artillery commander reports that they
+are ready. (<i>See</i> T. and M. Regs., Sec. <b>40</b> (6).)</p>
+
+<p>3. The divisional artillery commander is a subordinate commander and
+as such is responsible for the efficiency of the artillery of the
+division. (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part II, Sec. <b>9</b>.)</p>
+
+<p>It is his duty to superintend the tactical training of the artillery,
+to conduct the higher education of its officers, and to see that the
+principles laid down in the various training manuals for the guidance
+of the artillery are adhered to.</p>
+
+<p>4. The commander of an artillery brigade is responsible for the
+training and efficiency of his brigade and for supervising the
+instruction of his officers. He will also see that the numbers and
+efficiency of the officers, non-commissioned officers and men required
+for special duties are maintained in accordance with the regulations.
+(<a href="#Para_6"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>6</b> (6)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The commander of a reserve brigade, is responsible for the system of
+training the recruits as well as for the efficiency of the permanent
+cadres of the depôt and reserve batteries.</p>
+
+<p>5. The commander of a battery is responsible for the training and
+efficiency of his officers, non-commissioned officers, men and horses.
+He is also responsible that the equipment of his battery is complete
+and fit for service. He is assisted in these duties by the captain. A
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</span>
+battery commander will hold his section commanders responsible for the
+training and efficiency of their sections, and also for the condition
+of the horses and equipment belonging to them to such an extent as
+he considers desirable. It should be his aim, while maintaining a
+general control, to develop the self-reliance and readiness to accept
+responsibility of all ranks.</p>
+
+<p>6. To qualify for the command of a section an officer should himself
+be capable of performing all the ordinary duties which his men may be
+called upon to undertake in the field.</p>
+
+<p>Young officers, before being dismissed drill, should therefore be
+capable of stripping and putting together a saddle, correctly saddling,
+bitting and turning out a horse in marching order, putting together
+the harness and harnessing a draught horse and driving in the centre,
+lead or wheel. He should also have a thorough knowledge of the gun, its
+equipment and ammunition, the system of laying and of the duties of the
+various numbers.</p>
+
+<p>When qualified they should personally train their own section to take
+its place in the battery, making the most of the opportunities thus
+afforded to study the characters of their men, to find out the special
+qualifications of each and to gain their confidence.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Training of Recruits.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="f120" id="Para_3"><b>3.</b> <i>Preliminary training of recruits.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The training of the recruit will commence as soon as he joins the
+depôt or training brigade. As it is here that the foundation of his
+military education is laid, great importance attaches to the system of
+instruction adopted.</p>
+
+<p>The daily programme of work should be varied so as to avoid monotony
+with its consequent loss of interest.</p>
+
+<p>A syllabus of training is given in Appendix I. This syllabus can only
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</span>
+be taken as a guide since weather and other conditions will often make
+it impossible to carry out the programme laid down.</p>
+
+<p>2. A practical character should be given to the instruction from the
+beginning. Officers and non-commissioned officers should themselves
+show the proper position or way to do whatever they are teaching: for
+it is much easier to learn when the eye assists than when the ear alone
+is the medium of instruction.</p>
+
+<p>3. The language used should be as simple as possible and technical
+terms which are necessary must be carefully explained. Questions which
+admit of a simple answer should frequently be asked, but attempts
+to extract long parrot-like quotations from drill-books should be
+forbidden. Every encouragement should be given to recruits to take an
+interest in all details connected with their work and to question their
+instructors on any points they do not understand.</p>
+
+<p>The attainments of recruits on joining are to be noted and all should
+be encouraged to attend school until they obtain a second-class
+certificate.</p>
+
+<p>4. Recruits should be formed for instructional purposes in squads; the
+number of men in each squad should not exceed ten. It may be advisable
+to rearrange the squads periodically, so that the more intelligent men
+may not be kept back by those of inferior ability.</p>
+
+<p>Recruits should be called out in turn to drill when they have
+progressed sufficiently, for this gives a man confidence, helps him to
+learn, and causes him to take additional interest in his work.</p>
+
+<p>5. The squad instructors must be carefully selected and should, if
+possible, receive some previous training as instructors at the depôt.
+They must be firm, but patient, making allowances for the different
+capacities of the men, and it will be of advantage if the same
+instructors remain with the same squads throughout their course.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</span></p>
+
+<p>An instructor should place himself where he can be seen and heard by
+all in the squad, should stand in a smart, soldierlike attitude, and
+should avoid pacing up and down, looking down on the ground, turning
+his back to the squad, and similar habits, which fidget the men and
+distract their attention. His explanations should be given in a
+distinct voice; his word of command should be sharp and decisive.</p>
+
+<p>6. Alertness of attitude and smartness of movement should be enforced
+throughout all drill; but while details or explanations of drill and
+equipment are being given, squads should be allowed to stand easy.</p>
+
+<p>7. The recruits course will consist of instruction in the following
+subjects:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="2"><i>All recruits.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">i.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Physical training.&emsp;(<i>See</i> Manual of Physical Training.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">ii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Foot drill.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">iii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Rifle exercises, and Musketry exercises.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="2">(Musketry Regulations, Part I.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">iv.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">The use of cordage, tackles, knots, &amp;c.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">v.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Semaphore signalling.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="2">&nbsp;<br><i>Gunners.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">vi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Gun drill and elementary gunnery.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">vii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Laying, fuze setting.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">viii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Visual training.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="2">&nbsp;<br><i>Drivers.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">ix.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Fitting, cleaning and disposal of harness.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">x.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Stable management.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc fs_120" colspan="2">&nbsp;<br><i>Boys.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">xi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Signalling (flag, lamp and helio).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">xii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Map reading.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>8. In addition to short lectures connected with the above, others
+should be given on the following subjects, illustrated whenever
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</span>
+possible, by reference to incidents of actual warfare:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Moral education, including patriotism, devotion to</li>
+<li class="isub4">duty, the soldierly spirit and self-respect.</li>
+
+<li class="isub2">ii. Interior economy and barrack duties, including the</li>
+<li class="isub4">organization of a battery; dress, clothing and its</li>
+<li class="isub4">care; names and ranks of superiors, &amp;c.; regulations</li>
+<li class="isub4">and orders; leave and passes, hospital rules,</li>
+<li class="isub4">pay, promotion, school.</li>
+
+<li class="isub2">iii. Discipline: its object: punctuality, regularity and</li>
+<li class="isub4">obedience: saluting: method of making requests:</li>
+<li class="isub4">behaviour out of barracks: meaning of esprit de</li>
+<li class="isub4">corps, regimental motto, &amp;c.</li>
+
+<li class="isub2">iv. Sanitation, its object and rules to follow: hints on</li>
+<li class="isub4">marching and care of feet, &amp;c.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Lectures should be given under the most comfortable circumstances to
+the hearers and use should be made of models and the blackboard, in
+order to engage and hold their attention and interest.</p>
+
+<p>9. No definite period for the course above outlined can be laid down,
+since it will depend on a number of varying circumstances, but it is
+considered that 12 weeks would be needed to give the average recruit a
+sound preliminary training. To enable his training in more important
+subjects to go on uninterruptedly after joining his unit, every effort
+must be made to complete that portion of the course which consists of
+physical training and marching drill.</p>
+
+<p>10. It should be impressed on recruits that their prospects of civil
+employment in after life depend on their conduct whilst in the army,
+that preference is given to such as have exemplary or very good
+characters, and that sobriety is a very important qualification for
+employment.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_4" class="f120">4. <i>Recruit training in the battery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Recruits should, if possible, be posted to batteries in batches.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</span>
+Further training in the various subjects referred to in Sec. <b>3</b>
+will usually be necessary. The same instructors should, if possible,
+deal with the same subjects throughout this training and one officer
+should be specially charged with superintending the work and giving the
+class a series of lectures.</p>
+
+<p>2. During this period a careful watch should be kept for men who are
+likely to become useful non-commissioned officers, or who show an
+aptitude for any special duties; and every encouragement should be
+given them to improve themselves.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">The Annual Training of the Soldier.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_5" class="f120"><b>5.</b> <i>System of training.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>See also</i> T. and Man. Regs., Sec. <b>3</b>.</p>
+
+<p>1. The conditions in which the artillery is raised in different parts
+of the Empire vary so greatly that rigid adherence to any one system
+of training is impossible, but the methods described in the following
+pages should be followed as closely as circumstances allow.</p>
+
+<p>2. The training of the soldier must be progressive and continuous.</p>
+
+<p>With this object the training year will be divided into two periods,
+which will be devoted respectively to—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. Individual training.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. Collective training.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The object of individual training is to prepare the individual officer,
+non-commissioned officer or soldier for the duties which he will be
+required to carry out in war.</p>
+
+<p>The object of collective training is to render the sections, batteries
+and larger units and formations capable of manœuvre and co-operation in
+battle.</p>
+
+<p>3. Whatever periods are allotted for individual and collective training
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</span>
+the instruction of individuals and units is not to be considered as
+limited to these periods respectively. Advantage must be taken of any
+opportunities which may arise for individual training during the period
+of collective training, and <i>vice versâ</i>. (<i>See</i> T. and Man.
+Regs., Sec. <b>7</b>.)</p>
+
+<p>4. It is undesirable to lay down fixed courses of training, and it
+will rest with commanders to design for themselves programmes for each
+training period which will ensure the necessary standard of efficiency
+being reached within the limits of time allowed.</p>
+
+<p>Under special circumstances, detailed instructions may be issued by
+higher authority for the training of subordinate commands. Detailed
+instructions should, however, be sparingly employed as they cramp
+initiative and increase rather than facilitate the work of subordinates.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Individual Training.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="center"><i>See also</i> T. and Man. Regs., Chap. II.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_6" class="f120"><b>6.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Individual training must be, as far as possible, progressive and
+uninterrupted.</p>
+
+<p>The success of each year’s collective training will largely depend
+on the care and attention devoted to the individual training which
+precedes it.</p>
+
+<p>2. Leave and furlough should, if possible, be so arranged that each
+battery is at full strength for a period, or periods amounting in
+all to not less than 24 working days. When this is not possible, the
+application of this rule may be limited to the section. During this
+period or periods the battery or section should be struck off duty
+in order to allow its commander to carry out a complete and thorough
+course of individual training for his officers and men.</p>
+
+<p>3. Short lectures, practically illustrated, form one of the best means
+of imparting instruction and are also of value in educating officers and
+non-commissioned officers to express themselves in clear and simple terms.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. Individual training comprises:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">i.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Instruction of officers in professional duties (King’s</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Regulations, and T. and Man. Regs., Chap. II).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">ii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Instruction of non-commissioned officers and men</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">likely to become non-commissioned officers in the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">duties which they may be called upon to perform.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">iii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Reconnaissance duties. (<a href="#Para_240">Secs. <b>240-244</b></a>
+                and F.S. Regs., Part I.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">iv.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Range-finding. (<a href="#Para_245">Sec. <b>245</b></a>.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">v.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Intercommunication duties. (<a href="#Para_246">Sec. <b>246-248</b></a>.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">vi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Physical training and marching drill.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">vii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Gun drill, laying, and fuze setting.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">viii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Equitation. (<a href="#Page_54">Chap. III</a>.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">ix.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Musketry.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">x.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Training of eyesight and observation, and in judging</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">distances. (<a href="#Para_241">Secs. <b>241-243</b></a>.)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">xi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Semaphore signalling for captains, subalterns, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">non-commissioned officers, and at least 20% of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">gunners and drivers.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">xii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Practice, so far as means are available, or can be improvised,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">in entraining and embarking guns and horses,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">and in slinging horses, vehicles and stores which form</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">part of their war equipment. (<a href="#Para_252">Secs. <b>252-254</b></a>.)</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>5. In addition, lectures on the following should also be included:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. The principles of artillery tactics, ammunition supply,</li>
+<li class="isub4">the employment of artillery in war in conjunction</li>
+<li class="isub4">with the other arms and the general characteristics</li>
+<li class="isub4">of those arms.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. The care of horses, saddlery, and equipment and</li>
+<li class="isub4">stable management, combined with practical</li>
+<li class="isub4">illustration. (<i>See</i> Animal Management.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>6. The instruction in signalling, range-finding and reconnaissance
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</span>
+duties should be carried out under the direct instructions of the
+brigade commander, who will also supervise the training of the officers
+in professional duties.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Collective Training.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="center"><i>See also</i> T. and Man. Regs., Chap. III.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_7" class="f120"><b>7.</b> <i>Section training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. At the commencement of battery training each section will be trained
+in the field under its own section commander to such an extent as the
+battery commander considers desirable. For this purpose one or two
+sections, as convenient, can be lent the horses and carriages of the
+remainder, the latter being meanwhile trained in dismounted work, gun
+drill, laying, fuze setting, semaphore signalling, &amp;c. Arrangements
+should be made so that every man may be trained with his own section
+during this time.</p>
+
+<p>2. The battery commander will personally supervise the section
+commanders and thus ensure that each section is fit to take its place
+in the battery.</p>
+
+<p>The period of section training offers a convenient time for the
+education of the battery headquarters by the battery commander or
+captain.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_8" class="f120"><b>8.</b> <i>Battery training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. To ensure efficiency in the command of a battery it is essential
+that its training should be devoted to foreseeing and removing all
+possible causes of friction between its component parts.</p>
+
+<p>2. Each battery should be struck off duty for at least 36 days
+(inclusive of section training). It will seldom be possible for these
+to be consecutive, but the brigade commander is responsible for making
+the best arrangements possible for the general good of his command.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The chief points to which the battery commander should devote his
+attention are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Fire discipline.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Supply and replenishment of ammunition.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Internal communication in the battery and co-operation</li>
+<li class="isub4">between the various members of battery headquarters.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Fire tactics (the selection, occupation and preparation</li>
+<li class="isub4">of positions and co-operation with the other arms).</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; v. Field engineering. (<i>See</i> M.F.E. and
+<a href="#Para_238">Secs. <b>238</b></a>, <a href="#Para_239"><b>239</b></a>.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>4. At first it will often be advisable to take out only the officers,
+senior non-commissioned officers and parties required for observation
+and communication. When these individuals have got to know their work
+and to understand each other, the whole battery can be taken out.</p>
+
+<p>Parties may with advantage be sent out to the positions against which
+the guns are to come into action to note where and when any of the
+personnel or material of the battery are exposed to view, and to form
+targets for the guns. By such means the men will be enabled to see the
+mistakes made, and learn to avoid them.</p>
+
+<p>5. The difficulties which attend the supply of ammunition in the field
+make it important that each battery should practise it with its full
+number of wagons as often as possible. In order to do this arrangements
+should be made to place the horses of the brigade at the disposal of
+each battery in turn.</p>
+
+<p>6. Before the training of the battery is finished an opportunity of
+bivouacking for 24 hours should be obtained. It will be of advantage if
+the site selected affords facilities for practising swimming horses,
+entrenching and the passage of obstacles.</p>
+
+<p>If arrangements can be made for issuing flour and live stock, useful
+training in the preparation of rations under active service conditions
+may be gained.</p>
+
+<p>7. All training, other than formal parades, carried out beyond the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</span>
+precincts of barracks, whether other arms are present or not, should be
+based on some simple tactical scheme, which should be explained to all
+ranks beforehand.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_9" class="f120"><b>9.</b> <i>Brigade training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. As soon as the batteries have completed battery training they will
+be inspected by their brigade commander, after which the training of
+the brigade should commence.</p>
+
+<p>Each brigade should be at the disposal of its commander for at least 18
+working days.</p>
+
+<p>2. The object of brigade training is to fit the brigade to take
+part, either alone or as part of a larger force of artillery, in any
+operation involving the employment of other arms.</p>
+
+<p>To achieve this object training in the following is necessary:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. The selection, and change of positions and of objectives</li>
+<li class="isub4">in accordance with the tactical plan.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. The concentration and distribution of fire in accordance</li>
+<li class="isub4">with the progress of the fight, and the</li>
+<li class="isub4">procedure to be adopted to carry out these objects.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Co-operation with the other arms, and intercommunication</li>
+<li class="isub4">between the artillery brigade commander,</li>
+<li class="isub4">his batteries and ammunition column, and also</li>
+<li class="isub4">between the artillery brigade commander and the</li>
+<li class="isub4">divisional artillery commander and subordinate</li>
+<li class="isub4">infantry commanders.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>3. If arrangements cannot be made to carry out tactical training with
+the other arms (<a href="#Para_2"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>2</b></a> and T. and Man. Regs. Secs.
+<b>40</b> and <b>42</b>) the action and effect of those arms must be
+considered in the solution of tactical problems.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_10" class="f120"><b>10.</b> <i>Annual practice.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The object of the annual course of gun practice is two-fold, viz.:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. To instruct all ranks in the application in the field of the</li>
+<li class="isub5">approved principles of gunnery and artillery tactics</li>
+<li class="isub5">with service ammunition.
+          <span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</span></li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. To accustom commanders to acquire the habit of appreciating</li>
+<li class="isub5">a situation quickly and correctly, of arriving</li>
+<li class="isub5">at an immediate decision, of translating that decision</li>
+<li class="isub5">into suitable orders and of ensuring their intelligent</li>
+<li class="isub5">and rapid execution.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. The schemes on which the tactical practice is based should deal with
+problems such as would be likely to confront a commander in war. These
+schemes for batteries and brigades of divisional artillery will be
+drawn up by the divisional artillery commander in consultation with the
+general staff officer of the division. Schemes for larger formations
+will be prepared by the general staff officer of the division under the
+direction of the divisional commander.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of horse artillery the camp commandant will draw up the
+schemes for tactical practice in consultation with the inspector of
+cavalry. In the case of heavy artillery and unallotted brigades of
+field artillery the tactical schemes will be prepared by the camp
+commandant.</p>
+
+<p>The divisional commander will, whenever possible, be present at the
+tactical practice of his divisional artillery and act as director of
+the operations, assisted by the commandant, who is the divisional
+artillery commander in the case of batteries and brigades of divisional
+artillery. The commandant will act as director in the absence of the
+divisional commander.</p>
+
+<p>The director or assistant director will give out the schemes and,
+if he himself is acting as the commander of the force engaged, will
+explain the tactical situation and will issue such orders as he would
+in war. Should the divisional commander so desire, a senior officer of
+another arm may be placed in command, in which case he will describe
+the situation and issue his orders. Before doing so he should be made
+fully acquainted with the lessons which the director wishes to teach,
+and with any limitations imposed by range conditions.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. It is the duty of practice camp commandants to record the state of
+efficiency of the various batteries and brigades, to bring to notice
+matters affecting the efficiency of the equipment and to report on the
+suitability for war of the technical methods employed.</p>
+
+<p>4. Accurate observation of fire is of very great importance. Practice
+camp commandants should, therefore, make sure that officers and
+selected non-commissioned officers are given opportunities of watching
+as many series fired as possible.</p>
+
+<p>5. Further instructions for the conduct of practice are contained in
+“Instructions for Practice, Horse, Field, and Heavy Artillery.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_11" class="f120"><b>11.</b> <i>Divisional artillery training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Divisional artillery training will generally take place between the
+annual practice and divisional training, and under the supervision of
+the divisional commander who will decide the duration and locality of
+the training.</p>
+
+<p>2. During this period attention will first be devoted to perfecting
+the methods by which orders are issued to brigades, and communication
+maintained between them and the commander of the divisional artillery
+and to the reconnaissance and selection of artillery positions.</p>
+
+<p>It will not always be necessary to take out the batteries in the
+earlier stages of the training as much of the work in connection
+with the above can be carried out by the headquarters of divisional
+artillery and of brigades and batteries working together under the
+divisional artillery commander.</p>
+
+<p>3. Subsequently, schemes, in which the whole divisional artillery will
+take part, should be framed to illustrate definite points in connection
+with the tactical employment of artillery in various situations, the
+higher command of artillery in battle, the allotment of zones or tasks,
+the application of fire, and the replenishment of ammunition.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</span></p>
+
+<p>The other arms should usually be associated with the divisional
+artillery in working out these schemes. Infantry may be utilised for
+the purpose of showing in skeleton the positions and movements of that
+arm in a scheme designed principally for the training of the divisional
+artillery. When units are not available officers of other arms should
+be attached for the purpose of stating the action that would be taken
+by their arms.</p>
+
+<p>Occasionally the artillery of a division may carry out exercises
+independently of the other arms, but in such cases the effect which the
+presence of other troops would have on the operations must never be ignored.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_12" class="f120"><b>12.</b> <i>Training of Special Reserve and Territorial<br>
+Artillery and of the artillery of the<br> Overseas Dominions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The annual training should be earned out on the same principles as
+have been indicated above for the Regular Forces. It is not possible
+for citizen forces, in the limited time at their disposal, to carry
+out the whole course. The perfecting of the battery as the fire unit
+should be the principal object kept in view. Beyond this officers,
+senior non-commissioned officers and battery headquarters should be
+instructed, both with respect to their battery duties and also as
+part of a brigade, for which purposes the presence of the batteries
+themselves is not essential.</p>
+
+<p>2. The training of the Special Reserve should be devoted to fitting
+individuals to take a place in the battery suited to their special
+qualifications. Thus any men who show aptitude as layers, signallers,
+&amp;c., should be encouraged to perfect themselves so far as the time
+available for their training will allow.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</span></p>
+  <h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER II.<br>
+<span class="h_subtitle">DISMOUNTED DRILL WITH AND<br>
+WITHOUT ARMS.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_2_2" href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+
+<p class="f110"><span class="smcap">Squad Drill with Intervals.</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_13" class="f120"><b>13.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Instruction can be imparted most easily to a squad in single rank. A
+squad of recruits should, therefore, be placed in single rank at arm’s
+length apart; but if want of space makes it necessary, the squad may
+consist of two ranks, in which case the men of the rear rank will cover
+the intervals between the men in the front rank.</p>
+
+<p>2. At first recruits may be placed in position by the instructor,
+afterwards they should not be touched, but made to correct themselves,
+when faults are pointed out. The instructor should teach as much as
+possible by illustration, performing the movements himself, or making a
+smart recruit perform them.</p>
+
+<p>Recruits will be advanced progressively from one exercise to another,
+men of inferior capacity being put back to a less advanced squad.</p>
+
+<p>When the various motions have been learnt, instruction by numbers
+will cease.</p>
+
+<p>3. Commands which consist of one word will be preceded by a caution.
+The caution, or cautionary part of a command will be given deliberately
+and distinctly; the last or executive part which, as a rule, should
+consist of only one word or syllable will be given sharply. A pause
+will be made between the caution and the executive word.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</span></p>
+
+<p>When the formation is moving, executive words will be completed as
+the men begin the pace which will bring them to the spot on which the
+command is to be executed. The caution must be commenced accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>Young officers and non-commissioned officers should be frequently
+practised in giving words of command.</p>
+
+<p>4. In the following sections the various words of command are printed
+in small block capitals, the cautionary part of the command being
+separated from the executive part by a stroke thus—</p>
+
+<p id="Para_14" class="f120"><b>14.</b> <i>Position and movements at the halt</i>.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="30">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The position</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Heels together and in line. Feet turned</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of attention.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">out at an angle of about 45 degrees. Knees</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">straight. Body erect, and carried evenly</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="27"><span class="smcap">Attention.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">over the thighs with the shoulders (which</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">should be level, and square to the front)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">down and moderately back—this should</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">bring the chest into its natural forward</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">position, without any straining or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">stiffening. Arms hanging easily from the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">shoulders as straight as the natural bend</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the arm, when the muscles are relaxed,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will allow, but with the hands level with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the centre of the thighs. Wrists straight.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Palms of the hands turned towards the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">thighs, with the heel of the hand and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inside of the finger tips lightly touching</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">them, fingers hanging naturally together</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and slightly bent. Neck erect. Head</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">balanced evenly on the neck, and not poked</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">forward, eyes looking their own height and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">straight to the front.
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The weight of the body should be balanced</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on both feet, and evenly distributed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">between the fore part of the feet and the heels.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The breathing must not in any way be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">restricted, and no part of the body should</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">be either drawn in or pushed out.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The position is one of readiness, but</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">there should be no stiffness or forced</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">unnatural straining to maintain it.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To stand</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Keeping the legs straight, carry the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>at ease.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">foot about one foot-length to the left so</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">that the weight of the body rests equally</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Stand at</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on both feet, at the same time carry the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6"><span class="smcap">—Ease.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hands behind the back and place the back of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">one hand in the palm of the other, grasping</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">it lightly with the fingers and thumb, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">allowing the arms to hang easily at their</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">full extent. (It is immaterial which hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">grasps the other.)</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To stand</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The limbs, head and body may be moved, but</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>easy</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the man will not move from the ground on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">which he is standing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Stand</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>Note.</i>—Troops “<i>standing easy</i>” who receive</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2"><span class="smcap">—Easy.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">a caution such as “<i>squad</i>”, “<i>section</i>,” &amp;c., will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">assume the position of “<i>stand at ease</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Dressing</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>a squad by</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the flank.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Eyes—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">On the word “<i>Right</i>” the head will be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">turned, and the eyes directed to the right.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top">(<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="13">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Dress.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Dress</i>,” each recruit, except</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the right-hand man, will take up his dressing in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">line by moving, with short quick steps, until he</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">is able to see the lower part of the face of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">second man from him, taking care to keep his</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body in the position of attention.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">At the same time, all but the right-hand man</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will extend their right arm, back of the hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">up, finger tips just touching the shoulder of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the man on their right.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Eyes—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Front</i>” the head and eyes</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Front.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will be turned smartly to the front, and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">arm dropped, and the position of attention resumed.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_top">&nbsp; <i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Keeping both knees straight and the body</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3"><i>turns.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">erect, turn to the right on the right heel</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and left toe, raising the left heel and right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">toe in doing so.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Right Turn</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the completion of this preliminary</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4"><span class="smcap">—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">movement, the right foot must be flat on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the ground and the left heel raised, both</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">knees straight and the weight of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body, which must be erect, on the right foot.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Bring the left heel smartly up to the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">without stamping the foot on the ground.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">Left Turn</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Turn to the left, as described above, on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left heel and right toe, the weight of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the body being on the left foot on the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">completion of the movement.
+                          <span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Bring the right heel smartly up to the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">without stamping the foot on the ground.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top"><span class="smcap">About—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Turn fully about to the right, as described,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Turn</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">for the “<i>Right turn</i>” by numbers.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>As soon as the recruit understands the different motions he should be
+practised in performing these movements, judging the time.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_15" class="f120"><b>15.</b> <i>Saluting.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Saluting</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Bring the right (left) hand smartly, with a</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to the front</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">circular motion, to the head, palm to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><i>by numbers.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front, fingers extended and close together,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">point of the forefinger touching the peak of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Right (Left)</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the cap in front of the right (left) eye, thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Hand—Salute</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close to the forefinger, elbow in line and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">nearly square with the shoulder.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Cut away the arm smartly to the side.
+                       <span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Saluting</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Salute</i>,” go through the two</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to the front</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">motions described in para. 1 and, after a pause</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>judging the time.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">equal to two paces in quick time, cut away the arm.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right (Left)</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Hand—Salute.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2" colspan="3">Recruits should also be practised in marching two or three</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2" colspan="3">together, saluting points being placed on either side, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2" colspan="3">the man nearest to the point giving the time.</td>
+
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>3. <i>Rules as to saluting.</i></p>
+
+<p>The salute will always be with the hand farthest from the person
+saluted.</p>
+
+<p>When a soldier passes an officer he will salute three paces before
+reaching him, and will lower the hand on the third pace after passing
+him. As the hand is brought to the salute, the head will be turned
+towards the person saluted; if carrying a whip, the soldier will place
+it smartly under the disengaged arm, cutting away the hand before
+saluting. If standing still, he will face the officer as the latter
+passes and salute.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier, if sitting when an officer approaches, will rise, stand
+at attention, and salute; if two or more men are sitting or standing
+about, the senior non-commissioned officer or oldest soldier will call
+the whole to “<i>Attention</i>,” facing the officer, and will alone salute.</p>
+
+<p>When a soldier addresses an officer, he will halt two paces from him
+and salute. He will also salute before withdrawing.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</span></p>
+
+<p>When appearing before an officer in a room, he will salute without
+removing his cap.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier, without his cap, or when carrying anything other than his
+arms will, if standing still, come to attention, and face the officer
+as he passes; if walking without his cap or riding a bicycle, he will
+turn his head smartly towards the officer in passing him.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier when wearing a sword will salute with the right hand.
+Officers and soldiers passing troops with uncased colours will salute
+the colours, and the commander if senior to them. When passing a
+military funeral, they will salute the body.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier driving a vehicle will bring his whip to a perpendicular
+position, with the right hand resting on the thigh and turn his head
+smartly towards an officer when passing him.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier riding on a vehicle will turn his head smartly towards an
+officer when passing him.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_16" class="f120"><b>16.</b> <i>Movements.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Before the squad is put in motion, the instructor will take care
+that the men are square individually and in correct line with each
+other. Each soldier must be taught to move straight to his front by
+fixing his eye upon some object on the ground directly in front of him
+and then observing some nearer point in the same straight line, such as
+a stone or a tuft of grass. The two objects must be kept in line when
+he advances.</p>
+
+<p>2. The legs should be swung forward freely and naturally from the hip
+joints, each leg as it swings forward being bent sufficiently at the
+knee to enable the foot to clear the ground. The foot should be carried
+straight to the front and, without being drawn back, placed firmly upon
+the ground with the knee straight, but so as not to jerk the body.</p>
+
+<p>3. The body should be maintained as erect as possible, its relative
+position being as described for the position of “<i>Attention</i>,”
+well balanced over the legs and carried evenly forward without swaying
+from side to side, and with head erect.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. The aims must not be stiffened but should swing freely and naturally
+from the shoulders, the right arm swinging forward with the left leg
+and <i>vice versâ</i>. If the arms are swung in this way they will bend
+naturally at the elbow as they swing forward and will straighten as
+they swing back, the movement being free without being forced.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Length of pace.</i>—In <i>slow</i> and <i>quick time</i> the
+length of pace is 30 inches. In <i>stepping out</i> it is 33 inches, in
+<i>double time</i> 40, in <i>stepping short</i> 21, and in the <i>side
+step</i> 14 inches.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Time.</i>—In <i>slow time</i> 75 paces are taken in a minute.
+In <i>quick time</i>, and in the <i>side step</i> 120 paces, and in
+<i>double time</i> 180 paces are taken in a minute.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Marching</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in quick</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><i>time.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>March</i>,” the squad will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">step off together with the left foot, in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Quick—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">quick time, observing the instructions</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">contained in the previous paragraphs.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+     <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">8.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The halt.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The moving foot will complete its pace,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Squad—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and the other will be brought smartly up</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Halt.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in line with it, without stamping.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+     <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">9.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Stepping</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Out</i>” the moving foot will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>out when</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">complete its pace, and the soldier will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>marching</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">lengthen the pace by 3 inches, leaning</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in quick</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">forward a little but without altering the time.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>time.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>Note.</i>—This step is used when a slight</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Step—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">increase of speed, without an alteration of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Out.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">time, is required; on the command</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Quick—March</span>, the usual pace will be resumed.
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">10.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Stepping</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>short when</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>marching</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in quick time.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Short</i>,” the foot advancing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will complete its pace, after which each</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Step—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">soldier will shorten the pace by 9 inches</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Short.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">until the command <span class="smcap">Quick—March</span> is</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">given, when the quick step will be resumed.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">11.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Marking</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Time</i>,” the foot then advancing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>time.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will complete its pace, after which the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">time will be continued, without advancing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by raising each foot alternately about</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">six inches, keeping the feet almost parallel</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the ground, the knees raised to the front,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mark—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the arms steady at the sides, and the body</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Time</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">steady. On the command <span class="smcap">Forward</span>,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the pace at which the men were moving</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will be resumed.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">12.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Stepping</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>March</i>,” step back the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>back from</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">named number of paces of 30 inches straight</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the halt.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the rear, commencing with the left foot.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">——<span class="smcap">Paces</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>Note.</i>—Stepping back should not exceed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Step Back</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">four paces.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;
+                  <span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="24">13.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>March</i>,” step off with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>double</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left foot and double on the toes</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>march.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with easy swinging strides, inclining the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body slightly forward, but maintaining its</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Double—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">correct carriage. The feet must be picked</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">up cleanly from the ground at each pace and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="18">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the thigh, knee, and ankle joints must all</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">work freely and without stiffness. The whole</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body should be carried forward by a thrust</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">from the rear foot without unnecessary effort,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and the heels must not be raised towards the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">seat but the foot carried straight to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front and the toes placed lightly on the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground. The arms should swing easily from the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">shoulders and should be bent at the elbow,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the forearm forming an angle of about 135</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">degrees with the upper arm (<i>i.e.</i>,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">midway between a straight arm and a right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">angle at the elbow), fists clenched, backs of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the hands outward, and the arms swung</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">sufficiently clear of the body to allow of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">full freedom for the chest. The shoulders</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">should be kept steady and square to the front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and the head erect.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">14.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Halting</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>double</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>march.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Squad—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">As in para. 8, at the same time dropping</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—Halt.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the hands to the position of attention.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">15.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Marking</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>time in</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>double time</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from double</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Time</i>,” act as in para. 11, the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>march.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">arms and hands being carried as when marching</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in double time, but with the swing of the arms</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mark—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">reduced.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Time.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="12">16.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Moving</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to the right</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or left by</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the side step.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>March</i>,” each man will carry</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">his right foot 14 inches direct to the right,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">Close—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and instantly close his left foot to it, thus</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">completing the pace; he will proceed to take</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or</i>—<span class="smcap">Paces</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the next pace in the same manner. Shoulders</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to be kept square, knees straight, unless on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">Close—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rough or broken ground. The direction must</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">be kept in a straight line to the flank.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">17.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Halting</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the command “<i>Halt</i>,” which will be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">given when the number of paces has not been</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>side step.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">specified, the men will complete the pace they</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">are taking, and remain steady.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Squad—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><i>Note.</i>—Soldiers should not usually be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Halt.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">moved to a flank by the side step more</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">than twelve paces.
+              <span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">18.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Turning</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Turn</i>,” each soldier will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>when on</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">turn in the named direction, and move on at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the march.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">once, without checking his pace.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><i>Note.</i>—A soldier will always turn to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right on the left foot; and to the left on the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right foot. The word <span class="smcap">Turn</span> will be given</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Turn</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">as the foot on which the turn is to be made</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">is coming to the ground; if it is not so given</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the soldier will move on one pace and then turn.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">About—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Turn</i>,” the soldier will turn</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">Turn.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right-about on his own ground in three beats</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the time in which he is marching. Having</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">completed the turn about the soldier will at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">once move forward, the fourth pace being a</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">full pace.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Incline</i>,” each soldier will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">make a half-turn in the named direction and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Incline</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">move forward diagonally.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The soldier will turn in the original direction</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on the word <span class="smcap">Forward</span>.
+          <span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</span></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Squad Drill in Single Rank.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_17" class="f120"><b>17.</b> <i>General instructions</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Recruits will next be formed in single rank without intervals, each
+man occupying a space of 27 inches.</p>
+
+<p>2. When soldiers are on the alignment they have to occupy, they will
+except at the commencement of drill, or at ceremonial parades, take up
+their own dressing without orders. When a squad is halted each man will
+look towards the flank by which the squad was previously dressing with
+a smart turn of the head and commencing with the man nearest the flank
+will move up or back to his place. Each man will look to his front as
+soon as he has got his dressing.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Numbering</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The squad will number off from the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>a squad.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand man, the right hand man calling out</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“one,” the next on his left “two,” and so on.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Squad—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">As each man calls out his number he will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Number.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">turn his head smartly towards his left and at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">once turn to the front again.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Proving.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Those ordered to prove stretch out their</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hands to the full extent of the arm,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Even (Odd)</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">palm of the hand to the left, fingers extended</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Numbers</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and close together, thumb close to the forefinger,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—Prove.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl bb">and in line with the top of the shoulder.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">As you</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Those proving bring their right hands</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Were.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the side, bending the elbow in so doing.
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Opening</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>a squad to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The odd numbers will take two paces forward;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>drill with</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">when the paces are completed the whole</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>intervals.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">squad will look to the flank ordered and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">correct the dressing quickly, looking to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Open Ranks</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front as soon as the dressing is correct.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>A squad</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>with intervals</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>closing to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>single rank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Reform</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The odd numbers will step back two paces,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Ranks—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">when the paces are completed the squad will</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">dress.</td>
+
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_18" class="f120"><b>18.</b> <i>Movements.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Marching in squad.</i></p>
+
+<p>The caution will be given “<span class="smcap">The Squad will Advance</span>,” followed
+by the command “<span class="smcap">Eyes Right, Quick—March.</span>” The man on the
+flank by which the dressing is ordered will take up a point to march on.</p>
+
+<p>During the march the shoulders must be kept square to the front, and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</span>
+the eyes kept off the ground, everybody moving at the same pace, and
+keeping their correct distances and intervals by uniformity of pace and
+an occasional glance towards the directing flank.</p>
+
+<p>The recruit will be practised in changing the pace, without halting,
+from quick to double, by the command, “<span class="smcap">Double March</span>.” On the
+command “<span class="smcap">Quick March</span>,” the arms will be dropped to the usual
+position.</p>
+
+<p>The instructor will insure that the flank man selects two distant
+points to march on, and, before approaching the first, takes another in
+advance on the same line, and so on.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>diagonal</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>march.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Incline</i>,” the men will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">all turn half right together, and march</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in that direction, each regulating his pace so</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">that his own shoulders are parallel with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Incline.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl bb">shoulders of the man on his right.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Forward.&nbsp;</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">On the word “<i>Forward</i>” every man will</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">move forward together in the original</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">direction.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><i>Note.</i>—If the incline is properly performed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the squad after the word <span class="smcap">Forward</span> will</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">be parallel to its original position.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>3. <i>Wheeling.</i></p>
+
+<p>Recruits will first be taught to wheel from the halt, after which they
+will be instructed to wheel while on the march. It will be explained
+to the squad that, in wheeling, the flank which is brought forward is
+termed the outward flank; the other, the inward, or pivot, flank.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</span></p>
+
+<p>The method of wheeling will be the same as laid down in <a href="#Para_20">Sec. <b>20</b> (3)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Movements by fours, half-sections, and single files.</i></p>
+
+<p>The above will be performed in accordance with the instructions given
+in <a href="#Para_19">Secs. <b>19</b></a> and <a href="#Para_20"><b>20</b></a>.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Dismissing.</i> &nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The squad will turn to the right, and, after</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">a pause, break off quickly and leave the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">parade ground. If an officer is on parade the</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Dis-miss.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">men will salute together as they break off.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Squad Drill in Two Ranks.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_19" class="f120"><b>19.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The recruits, when thoroughly grounded in the foregoing
+instructions, will be practised on foot in two ranks, the rear rank
+at three paces distance from the front rank. The two ranks will be
+equalized, as far as possible, a blank file being, if necessary, the
+second from the left of the rear rank. The squad having been formed
+up, the instructor will give the command, “<span class="smcap">From
+the right tell off by fours.</span>” The man on the right of the front
+rank numbers himself 1, the next man on his left 2, and so on to the
+fifth man, who then begins a fresh sequence by numbering himself 1. The
+same procedure is continued till the left flank is reached. As soon
+as the squad has finished telling off, the instructor will prove the
+flanks of four by the command, “<span class="smcap">Flanks of fours,
+prove.</span>” Each number 1 and 4 in the front rank will then prove as
+described in <a href="#Para_17">Sec. <b>17</b> (4)</a>, as well as those
+who cover them in the rear rank.</p>
+
+<p>2. All movements and formations will be made from or on a named flank.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</span>
+When moving by fours, half-sections or files, if there should be an
+incomplete unit on the left, the files will open out to cover the front
+of the whole unit. Should the incomplete unit consist of only half the
+number of files in the full unit, or less, the rear rank will move up
+on the left of, and in line with its front rank.</p>
+
+<p>3. When on the move, increasing or decreasing the front on foot the
+pace is not increased, but the front or rear is ordered to mark time as
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p>4. N.C.Os. or more advanced recruits should be posted without coverers
+on the flanks of the front rank and the point of direction for dressing
+will be given to one or other flank as a rule. These men are termed
+flank guides and do not tell off.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_20" class="f120"><b>20.</b> <i>Movements.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>March</i>” the whole squad</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>march in</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">moves off together at the pace ordered.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The principles which regulate the march in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">line are:—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Eyes Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">(<i>a</i>) Strict uniformity of pace.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Quick</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">(<i>b</i>) Correct direction.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Double</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">(<i>c</i>) Correct intervals and distances without</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">&nbsp;&emsp;crowding. Every man looking</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">&nbsp;&emsp;straight to the front, except for</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">&nbsp;&emsp;an occasional glance to the flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">&nbsp;&emsp;of direction.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="19">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Inclining.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Incline</i>,” each man turns</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">half right (or left). The rear rank moves in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the same manner, regulating itself by the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front rank, so that each individual would</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Incline</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">cover the corresponding front rank number</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">if both were turned to the front.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The flank guide of the directing flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">having made the half turn, picks up a point
+                     <span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="11">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on which to march, and moves forward at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the original pace. The remainder of the men</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">move parallel to him, preserving the same</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">relative direction and position with regard</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to each other, as when the turn was first</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">made.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the command <span class="smcap">Forward</span> each man at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the same instant turns to the former front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">when the frontage of the squad should be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">parallel to the original frontage. The incline</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">should be employed for short distances only.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="21">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Wheeling.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Wheel</i>,” the inner flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">guide marks time, glancing to the outer flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and coming gradually round with his rank.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The outer flank guide glances inwards and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Wheel</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">quickens his pace, regulating his direction</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="16">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">so as to maintain the same extent of front.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Each front rank man keeps touch with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">next man to him on the inner flank, glancing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the outer flank and increasing or decreasing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">his pace in accordance with the relative position</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">which he occupies in the wheel.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">As soon as the front rank begins to wheel</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the rear rank men gain ground towards</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the outer flank by a combination of inclining and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">wheeling.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The following are the words of command for</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the different degrees of wheel:—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><span class="smcap">Quarter Right</span> (<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>). <span class="smcap">Half Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Left</span>). <span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i>
+      <span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">Wheel. Three-quarters</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>)
+                 <span class="smcap">About</span>. <span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"> <span class="smcap">About Wheel</span>.
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Decreasing</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the front from</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the halt.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The right section of fours advances, followed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Fours from</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by the next on its left, which inclines</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">The Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">so as to cover the leading section. The</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Quick—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">remainder follow in succession.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Nos. 1 and 2 of the right section, followed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Half-sections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by their coverers advance and these in turn</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">are followed by Nos. 3 and 4 and their</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">the Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">coverers. The remaining half-sections follow</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Quick—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in succession inclining and covering the leading</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">half-sections.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="14">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">No. 1 of the right section of fours advances,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Single File</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">followed by his coverer. Nos. 2, 3 and 4, followed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by their coverers move off in succession,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inclining and covering the leading file. The</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Quick—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">remainder act similarly. If an advance from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left is ordered, the same rules as above</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="8">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will apply if left be substituted for right and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Nos. 4, 3, 2, 1, for 1, 2, 3, 4.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">When done on the move the command</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Rear</span>, <span class="smcap">Mark Time</span>, must be substituted for</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Quick March</span> in the above words of command.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><i>Note.</i>—Each of the movements can be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">carried out in a similar manner from the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by substituting “<i>Left</i>” for “<i>Right</i>.”
+                       <span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Increasing</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the front.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From single</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>files.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading man advances 6 paces and halts,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">To the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">his rear-rank man moving up to his proper</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Halt, Form—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">distance and covering him; the remainder</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Half-Sections.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">move up into line by inclining to the left.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>half-sections.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">To the Halt,</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading half-section advances 6 paces</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form—Fours.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and halts. Those in rear conform as above.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="14">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From fours.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading section of fours advances</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">6 paces and halts. Those in rear conform as</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">above.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">To the Halt,</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">This command will also be used when it is</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form—Squad.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">required to form squad from Single Files or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Half-Sections.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="8">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If an advance from the left has been made</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and it is desired to increase the front, the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">same command as above will be given, but</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the files, &amp;c., will move up on the right of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">those in front.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">When done on the move the command <span class="smcap">Front</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Mark Time</span>, must be substituted for the words,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">To the Halt</span>, in the above commands.
+              <span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Formations</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">On the word “<i>Right</i> (or <i>Left</i>),” the leading</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to a</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body will wheel at once to the flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>flank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">named, advance 6 paces and halt; those in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rear advance until nearly opposite the inner</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Forming</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">flank of the body next in front of them and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>squad to a</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">then wheel and come up into the alignment.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>flank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In order to maintain the relative position</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the numbers in each section of fours,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">To the Halt,</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Fours” must be formed before the order</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Fours—Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to wheel is given when advancing in single</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>).</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">files or half-sections.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Moving to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">A squad may be moved to either flank in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>a flank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">column of Fours, Half-sections, or Single</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Files.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Fours</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In each case on the word “<i>March</i>,” the men</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<span class="smcap">Half-Sections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the front rank wheel in the required</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Single</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">direction, followed by their rear rank men.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Files</span>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The remainder of the squad follow in succession.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>).</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">A squad may be moved a short distance</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Quick—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to a flank in file by the command <span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">Turn</span>.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>8. <i>Formations to the rear.</i></p>
+
+<p>Formations to the rear are made when in single files,
+half-sections or fours by wheeling about, or when in line by
+wheeling fours about and then acting as described above. In these
+cases the first command will be <span class="smcap">Files</span>,
+<span class="smcap">Half-sections</span> <i>or</i>
+<span class="smcap">Fours—About</span>, the wheel being carried
+out to the right on a fixed pivot.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Rifle Drill.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_21" class="f120"><b>21.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Recruits, before they commence the Rifle Exercises, are to be taught
+the names of the different parts of the rifle and the care of arms as
+laid down in the “Musketry Regulations,” Part I.</p>
+
+<p>2. The rifle exercises will not be performed at inspections, and will
+only be practised by formations larger than a squad for ceremonial
+purposes.</p>
+
+<p>3. Drilling by numbers should be restricted in the regular forces to
+the instruction of recruits, and should be curtailed as far as possible
+in the other forces.</p>
+
+<p>4. The recruit having learnt the rifle exercises by numbers, will be
+taught to perform them in quick time, the words of command being given
+without the numbers, with a pause of one beat of quick time between
+each motion.</p>
+
+<p>5. Squads with arms will be practised in the different marches and
+variations of step, described in the foregoing sections. During these
+practices, the closest attention must be paid to the position of each
+individual recruit.</p>
+
+<p>The disengaged arm will be allowed to swing naturally as described for
+marching in quick or double time without arms.</p>
+
+<p>6. The following instructions apply to the Short Lee-Enfield,
+Lee-Enfield, and Lee-Metford Rifle.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_22" class="f120"><b>22.</b> <i>Rifle exercises.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Falling in with the rifle at the order.</i></p>
+
+<p>The recruit will fall in as described in <a href="#Para_14">Sec. <b>14</b> (1)</a>,
+with the rifle held perpendicularly at his right side, the butt on the ground,
+its toe in line with the toe of the right foot. The right arm to be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</span>
+slightly bent, the hand to hold the rifle at or near the band (with the
+L.E. or L.M. rifle near the lower band) back of the hand to the right,
+thumb against the thigh, fingers together and slanting towards the
+ground. The left arm in the position of attention.</p>
+
+<p>When each man has got his dressing he will <i>stand at ease</i>.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Standing</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Keeping the legs straight, carry the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>at ease</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">foot about one foot-length to the left so that</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the weight of the body rests equally on both</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>order.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">feet, at the same time incline the muzzle of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the rifle slightly to the front with the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Stand at—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand, arm close to the side, the left arm to be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;<span class="smcap">Ease.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">kept in the position of <i>attention</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="7">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>attention</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from stand</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>at ease.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Squad—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The left foot will be brought up to the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Attention.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and the rifle returned to the order.
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The slope</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the order</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Give the rifle a cant upwards with the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and vice versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand, catching it with the left hand behind</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the backsight, and the right hand at the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Slope</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">small of the butt, thumb to the left, elbow to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Arms—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the rear.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Carry the rifle across the body, and place it</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="8">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">flat on the left shoulder, magazine outwards</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">from the body. Seize the butt with the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand, the first two joints of the fingers grasping</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the upper side of the butt, the thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">about one inch above the toe, the upper part</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the left arm close to the side, the lower part</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">horizontal, and the heel of the butt in line</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the centre of the left thigh.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Cut away the right hand to the side.</td>
+  </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="13">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The order</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>slope.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Bring the rifle down to the full extent of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left arm, at the same time meeting it</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Order</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the right hand just above the backsight</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Arms—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">(at the lower band L.E. and L.M. rifle), arm</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close to the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Bring the rifle to the right side, seizing it</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">at the same time with the left hand just</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">below the foresight, butt just clear of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt"><i>Place the butt quietly on the ground</i>, cutting</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left hand away to the side.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The slope</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the  stand,</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>easy and</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>vice versâ.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Squad</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">After taking up the positions of <i>stand at</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Slope—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>ease</i> and <i>the order</i> in succession,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the squad will slope arms as described in para. 4.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The squad orders arms as described in para.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Stand—Easy.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">5 and, after taking up the position of <i>stand at</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>ease</i>, will stand easy.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="30">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The present</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the slope,</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and vice versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Present</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Grasp the rifle with the right hand at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Arms—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the small, both arms close to the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Raise the rifle with the right hand perpend-</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="8">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">icularly in front of the centre of the body,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">sling to the left; at the same time place the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left hand smartly on the stock, wrist on the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">magazine, fingers pointing upwards, thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close to the forefinger, point of the thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in line with the mouth; the left elbow to be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close to the butt, the right elbow and butt</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close to the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Bring the rifle down perpendicularly close</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="9">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in front of the centre of the body, guard to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the front, holding it lightly at the full extent</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the right arm, fingers slanting downwards,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and meet it smartly with the left hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">immediately behind the backsight, thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pointing towards the muzzle; at the same time</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">place the hollow of the right foot against the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left heel, both knees straight. The weight</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the rifle to be supported by the left hand.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Slope</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Bring the right foot in line with the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Arms—One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and place the rifle on the left shoulder as</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">described in the second motion of the <i>slope</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">from the <i>order</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Cut away the right hand to the side.
+              <span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="9">8.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To trail</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">By a slight bend of the right arm give the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms from</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rifle a cant forward and seize it at the point</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the order,</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of balance, bringing it at once to a horizontal</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and vice</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">position at the right side at the full extent of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the arm, fingers and thumb round the rifle and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Trail—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">behind the seam of the trousers.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Order—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Raise the muzzle, catch the rifle at the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">band (with L.E. or L.M. rifle at the lower</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">band) and come to the <i>order</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="21">9.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Give the rifle a cant upwards with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>shoulder</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the right hand, catching it with the left hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in line with the elbow; at the same time</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">slipping the second finger of the right hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>order, and</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inside the guard, close the first and second</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>vice versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">fingers on the magazine, thumb and remaining</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">fingers pointing downwards; the upper part</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Shoulder—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the barrel to rest in the hollow of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">shoulder.
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl bt">Drop the left hand to the side.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Order—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Take hold of the rifle with the left hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">immediately below the band (with L.E. or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">L.M. rifle at the lower band), arm close to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Bring the rifle down in the left hand nearly</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the ground, keeping the arm and rifle close</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the body; then seize it with the right hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">at the band (with L.E. or L.M. rifle at the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">lower band), drop the left hand to the side,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and place the butt quietly on the ground at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>order</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="14">10.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>shoulder arms</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the trail,</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Tightening the grasp of the right hand,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and vice versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">bring the rifle to a perpendicular position,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and hold it with the left hand in line with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Shoulder—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">elbow, then seize it with the right hand as at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>shoulder</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Drop the left hand to the side.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Trail—Arms</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Hold the rifle with the left hand in line with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the elbow, arm close to the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&emsp;<span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Take hold of the rifle with the right hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">at the point of balance; then bring it down to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>trail</i>, at the same time dropping the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand to the side.
+               <span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">11.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The short</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>trail.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Raise the rifle about three inches from the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground, keeping it otherwise in the position</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the <i>order</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If standing with ordered arms, and directed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to close to the right or left, to step back,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">or to take any named number of paces forward,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">men will come to the <i>short trail</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">12.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>ground</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms from</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the order,</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and vice</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Place the rifle gently on the ground at the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>versâ.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right side, magazine to the right. The right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand will be in line with the toe as it places</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Ground—Arms</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the rifle on the ground. Then return smartly</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the position of <i>attention</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Take up—Arms</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Bend down, pick up the rifle and return to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>order</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">13.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>Dismissing</i>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The squad will turn to the right, and after</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">a pause break off quietly and leave the parade</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Dis-miss</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground with sloped arms.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_ws2" colspan="2"><i>Note.</i>—Arms will be sloped before the squad is dismissed.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</span></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_23" class="f120"><b>23.</b> <i>Inspection of arms.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When arms are inspected at the <i>port</i> only, the officer will
+see that the wind-gauge is properly centred, the fine adjustment at its
+lowest point, the keeper screw and the screw on the right charger guide
+in proper position, and that the magazine platform works freely.</p>
+
+<p>Each soldier, when the officer has passed the file next to him, will,
+without further word of command, <i>ease springs</i> and <i>order
+arms</i> and <i>stand easy</i>.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="22">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To port</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms for</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Cant the rifle, muzzle leading, with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>inspection</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hand smartly across the body, guard to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>on parade</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left and downwards, the barrel crossing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">opposite the point of the left shoulder, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>order.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">meet it at the same time with the left hand</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close behind the backsight, thumb and fingers</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">round the rifle, the left wrist to be opposite</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left breast, both elbows close to the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">For Inspection</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Turn the safety catch completely over to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Port—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the front with the thumb or forefinger of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="10">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hand (<i>Charger-loading Lee-Enfield rifle.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Lower the safety catch with the thumb of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hand). Pull out the cut-off if closed,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">first pressing it downwards with the thumb,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">then seize the knob with the forefinger and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">thumb of the right hand, turn it sharply</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">upwards, and draw back the bolt to its full</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">extent, then grasp the butt with the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand immediately behind the bolt, thumb</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pointing to the muzzle.
+                      <span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="18">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To ease </i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Close the breech (with L.E. or L.M. rifle,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>springs</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the cut off should first be closed) press the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>and come</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">trigger, close the cut off by placing the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand over the bolt and pressing the cut off</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>order.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inwards, turn the safety catch over to the rear,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and return the hand to the small.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Ease—Springs.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Close the breech (with L.E. or L.M. rifle,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">or</span> (<i>if the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the cut off should first be closed), then turn</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>magazine is</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the safety catch over to the rear and return</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>charged</i>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the hand to the small.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Lock Bolt.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Holding the rifle firmly in the left hand,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Order—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">seize it with the right hand at the band (with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Arms—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">L.E. or L.M. rifle at the lower band).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">As in the second motion of the <i>order</i> from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>slope</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">As in the third motion of the <i>order</i> from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the <i>slope</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If it is necessary to examine arms, the men</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>examine</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">will be cautioned to remain at the <i>port</i>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms from</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Both ranks will come to the position for</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the position</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">loading (<i>see</i> Musketry Regulations, Part I),</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>for</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the muzzle so inclined as to enable</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>inspection.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the officer to look through the barrel, the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">thumb nail of the right hand being placed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Examine—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in front of the bolt to reflect light into</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the barrel.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The soldier, when the officer has passed the</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">next file to him, will act as detailed in para. 3.
+                    <span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</span></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_24" class="f120"><b>24.</b> <i>Guards and compliments.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When a soldier carrying a rifle passes or addresses an officer he
+will do so at the <i>slope</i> and will salute by carrying the right
+hand smartly to the small of the butt, forearm horizontal, back of the
+hand to the front, fingers extended. The salute will begin and end at
+the same number of paces from the officer as when saluting without arms
+(<a href="#Para_15"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>15</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>In passing an officer the soldier will always turn his head towards
+him, in the same manner as when unarmed.</p>
+
+<p>A soldier, if halted when an officer passes, will turn towards him and
+stand at the <i>order</i>.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Guards and sentries.</i>—Guards, including reliefs, will march
+with sloped arms.</p>
+
+<p>Sentries, when saluting otherwise than by presenting arms, will halt,
+turn to the front, and carry the right hand to the small of the butt as
+directed in para. 1.</p>
+
+<p>Further instructions concerning guards and sentries are given in
+“Ceremonial.”</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</span></p>
+  <h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER III.<br>
+<span class="h_subtitle">EQUITATION AND DRIVING.</span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_25" class="f120"><b>25.</b> <i>Standard required of men and horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The efficiency of horse and field artillery depends so largely on
+the riding of the men and on the training and condition of the horses
+that the maintenance of a high standard of equitation must be the aim
+of the commander of every unit.</p>
+
+<p>2. Horsemanship and horsemastership are as essential to success as
+good eyesight or a knowledge of gunnery. The development of a horse’s
+powers by means of a progressive course of physical training and by the
+adoption of uniform methods of control is as important as the training
+of a man to ride.</p>
+
+<p>3. Horsemastership is a necessary qualification for all artillery
+commanders, and horse-training should also be studied to ensure a high
+standard of equitation in a unit. Every section commander should be
+capable of instructing his men in horsemastership. In addition to being
+good military horsemen and instructors in riding, all officers must be
+able to train and direct the training of remounts.</p>
+
+<p>4. The qualifications of a good horseman from an artilleryman’s point
+of view, are as follows:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. He should have a strong seat, quite independent of the reins;</li>
+<li class="isub5">in this way alone can he have good hands.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. He must understand and be able to apply correctly the “<i>aids</i>”</li>
+<li class="isub5">by which the horse is controlled.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. He must be a good groom, have a practical knowledge of the care</li>
+<li class="isub5">of horses both in barracks and in the field, and must understand</li>
+<li class="isub5">how to detect and treat the minor ailments to which horses are</li>
+<li class="isub5">liable.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. He should be able to cover long distances on horseback</li>
+<li class="isub5">with the least possible fatigue to his horse.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</span></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>If a driver, he should be able to drive a pair of horses in any
+position in a gun team and make them do even work, without distressing
+them. He should also be able to get a fallen horse out of harness or
+out of a ditch.</p>
+
+<p>No mounted man who does not attain this standard can be considered a
+really efficient horseman.</p>
+
+<p>In every unit a limited number of men should be able to train an
+unbroken horse, and improve a badly-trained one.</p>
+
+<p>5. The requisites of a useful artillery horse are as follows:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. He must be a quiet ride, and capable of conveying a heavy weight</li>
+<li class="isub5">over long distances, without undue fatigue.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Handy and quick in obeying the correct “<i>aids</i>.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Steady both in and out of the ranks or team and capable of being</li>
+<li class="isub5">ridden with one hand at any pace either in the company of other horses</li>
+<li class="isub5">or alone.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Be a good jumper and ready to face water and swim.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p id="Para_26" class="f120"><b>26.</b> <i>Horsemastership.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>General instructions.</i>—The importance of being a good
+horsemaster should be impressed upon the mind of every recruit from the
+moment of his joining. He should understand that the efficiency of any
+body of mounted troops on service depends first and foremost on the
+condition of each horse, and that one tired horse in a gun team puts
+more work on the other five, and may necessitate extra weight being put
+on some other vehicle.</p>
+
+<p>This important part of the soldier’s education demands individual
+attention on the part of every battery officer and non-commissioned
+officer, and it is their duty to see that the principles of
+horsemastership are so thoroughly explained to each man that the care
+of his horse becomes a second nature.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</span></p>
+
+<p>The recruit should receive careful instruction in the prevention and
+cure of the minor ailments of a horse, in his feeding and watering, and
+in his treatment on the march, in the field and in quarters. (<i>See
+also</i> Animal Management.)</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Watering.</i>—Men should be impressed with the importance of
+watering their horses when opportunity offers, particularly on hot
+days. Many a horse has died on service through his rider not taking
+what proved to be the only chance of giving him water during a long
+day. Horses which are accustomed to be watered in buckets drink slowly
+at a shallow stream, and consequently they should be given plenty of
+time. They never suffer ill-effects from being watered when heated,
+unless they are put to very severe exercise soon after it or are left
+to stand and get chilled.</p>
+
+<p>All horses will benefit if water is available in their stalls.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Feeding.</i>—Every opportunity should be taken when on service,
+or on a long march or field day to allow the horses to water and feed.
+Even a few mouthfuls of grass during a five minutes’ halt are worth
+consideration.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Weight off the back.</i>—Even the lightest driver is a heavy
+burden (generally more than 11 stone including the saddle), and every
+minute that weight is removed from the horse’s back is a refreshing
+period of relief.</p>
+
+<p>Instructors should impress this on recruits by frequently making them
+dismount for a few minutes at a time, so that it may become second
+nature with them to dismount and walk a good deal, especially down
+hill, if they should be called upon to work alone at any time. It
+should hardly ever be necessary for a man to remain on his horse at the
+halt, except in the case of teams that may come under fire.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Off saddling.</i>—The two most frequent causes of sore backs
+are:—i. continued friction on one spot; ii. the stoppage of the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</span>
+circulation by continued pressure. Either of these is liable to occur
+if the saddle is left on for hours without being shifted or the girths
+slackened.</p>
+
+<p>The “<i>off saddle</i>” can be effected very rapidly by all outriders
+and by horse artillery gunners if it be regularly practised. It is
+advisable in warm weather to do so once a day on the drill ground, or
+in the open county, whenever the horses are absent from their stables
+for any length of time. When the saddles are removed, the backs
+should be immediately hand-rubbed, slapped, or massaged by means of
+the flat of the hand for a few minutes, with steady pressure against
+the direction of the hair, in order to restore circulation. In cold
+weather, the girths should only be slackened, and the saddle shifted,
+as its removal may result in a chill.</p>
+
+<p>The horses of gun teams cannot readily be off saddled, but any
+opportunity for loosening their girths and shifting the saddles should
+be taken. Such action relieves the horses in the same way that the
+removal of a tight boot does a man.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Shoeing.</i>—From the first men should be taught to pay
+attention to their horses’ shoes, both in stables and in the field. The
+least sign of a shoe loose or clinches broken or knocked up should be
+reported and put right without delay.</p>
+
+<p>A shoe lost in the field is a reflection on the man in charge of the
+horse as well as on the section commander, No. 1 and farrier.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Rolling in the sand.</i>—Nothing rests a horse and freshens him
+up more than a good roll in the sand, and, when it can be arranged, a
+sand bath in barracks is most useful for teaching horses to roll in
+when sweating. The bath should be about 20 feet square, with sand 1
+foot deep. A handful of sand poured over the back often induces a horse
+to lie down and roll. After rolling, any sand remaining on the horse’s
+back must be removed before he is again saddled.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_27" class="f120"><b>27.</b> <i>Paces of the horse.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The following are the regulation paces for drill and manœuvre:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Walk 4 miles an hour, at which rate 117 yards are passed</li>
+<li class="isub4">over in 1 minute, or ¼ mile in 3 minutes 45 seconds.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Trot 8 miles an hour, at which rate 235 yards are passed</li>
+<li class="isub4">over in 1 minute, or ¼ mile in 1 minute 52 seconds.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Gallop is 12 miles an hour, at which rate 352 yards are</li>
+<li class="isub4">passed over in 1 minute.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. The canter, about 9 miles an hour, and the jog or slow trot, 6 miles
+an hour, should be constantly employed, both in teaching recruits to
+ride and in training young horses. Except in the case of artillery
+moving with infantry horses should always be made to walk up to the
+regulation pace of 4 miles per hour.</p>
+
+<p>3. In marching, especially along a road, and when men are riding singly
+or in small groups not at drill a much slower trot should be used than
+the regulation drill or manœuvre trot of 8 miles per hour.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_28" class="f120"><b>28.</b> <i>Terms used in equitation.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. “<i>Right rein</i>” and “<i>Left rein</i>.”—A horse is said to be
+on the “<i>right rein</i>” when he is going round the school to the
+right, or on a circle to the right. The term “<i>left rein</i>” is used
+when he is proceeding to the left in a similar manner.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid confusing the pupils the instructor as far as possible should
+use the terms “Right” or “Left” instead of “Outward” or “Inward” when
+giving explanations.</p>
+
+<p>2. “<i>The true canter</i>” is a pace of three time. The legs of the
+horse should move in such a manner that whichever fore leg leads, the
+hind leg on the same side also leads. (<a href="#Para_43"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>43</b> (8)</a>).</p>
+
+<p>3. “<i>The true gallop</i>” is a pace of four time, in which the feet
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</span>
+follow one another in succession, with an interval of suspension
+between the coming down of the leading fore foot and that of the
+opposite hind foot. As when cantering whichever fore leg leads, the
+hind leg on the same side must also lead.</p>
+
+<p>4. “<i>Cantering disunited</i>” or “<i>galloping disunited.</i>”—When
+a horse is cantering or galloping in such a way that the leading hind
+leg is on the opposite side to the leading fore leg, <i>e.g.</i>,
+when he leads with the off fore and near hind leg, he is said to
+be “<i>disunited</i>.” It is a common fault with bad riders in
+changing the bend of their horses to allow them to change their
+fore legs but not their hind legs. This results in the horse going
+“<i>disunited</i>,” a faulty action which should not be allowed.</p>
+
+<p>5. “<i>Cantering false</i>” or “<i>galloping false.</i>”—A horse is
+said to be cantering false or galloping false, when at either of these
+paces, he goes on a circle to the left with the off fore and off hind
+leading, or to the right with the near fore and near hind leading.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Balance.</i>—A riding horse on the move is said to be balanced
+when he carries his head and neck in the right position for balancing
+his weight and that of his rider.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Collected.</i>—A horse is said to be collected when he is made
+to bring his limbs properly under him so that he has the maximum
+control over them. The collected paces are the school, or regulation,
+walk or trot, and the canter. The extended paces are the walk out, the
+trot out, and the gallop.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Fitting Saddlery.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> Animal Management.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_29" class="f120"><b>29.</b> <i>How to fit a saddle.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. There are four axioms in saddle-fitting:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. The withers must not be pinched or pressed upon.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. The spine must have no pressure on it.
+             <span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</span></li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. The shoulder-blade bones must have free and</li>
+<li class="isub4">uncontrolled movement.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. The weight must not be put on the loins, but upon</li>
+<li class="isub4">the ribs through the medium of the muscles</li>
+<li class="isub4">covering them.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. In fitting a saddle the bare tree should first be placed on the
+back, the front arch resting in the hollow behind the shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>The arch and seat should be clear of the spine. This is not always
+possible with horses possessing high withers, but it is desirable in
+order to ascertain the fit of the side bars.</p>
+
+<p>The front arch must be wide enough to admit the hand on either side of
+the withers, and its points must clear the ribs.</p>
+
+<p>The side bars must not be too long and must bear evenly on the back, or
+as nearly so as possible. Care must be taken that their edges do not
+press the withers or ribs.</p>
+
+<p>3. The numnah pannels should then be fitted on and the tree replaced on
+the back, but without a blanket.</p>
+
+<p>The proper thickness of the blanket having been estimated, it is folded
+and placed on the horse’s back with the tree on it. The blanket must be
+pressed up well into the front arch, and before girthing up it should
+be noticed whether the burrs are off the shoulders and the fans off the
+loins; if they are not, the thickness of the blanket beneath the side
+bars must be increased by turning it up on either side.</p>
+
+<p>4. The girths should now be pulled up and a man placed in the saddle.
+The first thing to ascertain is whether there is freedom from wither
+pressure. The hand must readily find admission beneath the blanket and
+over the top and along both sides of the withers. To make the test
+effective, the man should lean forward, and the examiner must not be
+satisfied with anything less than the introduction of his entire hand.</p>
+
+<p>The next thing is to ascertain whether there is freedom for
+shoulder-blade bone pressure. This is done by passing the hand beneath
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</span>
+the blanket to the play of the shoulder. It should be possible to
+advance the horse’s foreleg to its full extent without the examiner’s
+fingers being pinched between the blade-bone and side-bar, even if
+the man is leaning forward in the saddle. If the fingers are pinched
+the blade-bone will also be pinched, and the saddle must be raised by
+fitting thicker numnah pannels on the side bar or by an extra fold of
+blanket.</p>
+
+<p>5. To ascertain whether the pressure of the side-bars is evenly
+distributed, the saddle, having been ridden in for about half an hour,
+is carefully ungirthed, and the tree lifted from the blanket without
+disturbing it. The blanket will be found to bear the imprint of the
+side-bars, and a glance will show whether they are pressing evenly from
+top to bottom and from front to rear.</p>
+
+<p>The examination must be made without delay, as the elasticity of the
+blanket soon causes it to lose the impression of the side-bars.</p>
+
+<p>If there is a deeper impression on one part of the blanket than
+elsewhere, the pressure is not evenly distributed, and a sore back is
+liable to result.</p>
+
+<p>Irregularity in the fit of the side-bars may be remedied by the
+introduction of pieces of numnah to fill up the space between the
+side-bars and the blanket.</p>
+
+<p>In peace these strips of felt can be fixed in position with glue, but
+in the field they may have to be tied on, or secured with tacks, or
+best of all, bound in position by means of a piece of leather (basil)
+which can be tacked to the edge of the side-bar or laced with string
+across the top.</p>
+
+<p>By means of these strips of felt the most radical alterations in the
+fit of a side bar can be effected in a few minutes by a man who has no
+technical skill.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_30" class="f120"><b>30.</b> <i>Saddling.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The <i>saddle</i> should be placed in the middle of the horse’s
+back; the front of it so much behind the withers as not to interfere
+with the play of the shoulder.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</span></p>
+
+<p>The fans should clear the back, and the front arch should clear the
+withers to the breadth of not less than 2 fingers when the rider is in
+the saddle. The saddle, to afford a suitable seat for the rider, should
+have a level bearing on the horse’s back.</p>
+
+<p>2. The <i>blanket</i> is not to rest on the horse’s withers, but should
+be slightly raised by placing the hand under it.</p>
+
+<p>It can be folded in several ways. With a horse of normal shape and
+condition the following method is recommended:—The blanket is folded
+lengthways in three equal folds, one end is then turned over 24 inches,
+and the other turned into the pocket formed by the folds; the blanket
+thus folded is placed on the horse’s back with the thick part near the
+withers. Size when folded 2’ O“ × 1’ 8”, when unfolded 5’ 5“ × 4’ 8”.
+The folding of the blanket may be modified to suit special horses and
+to meet alterations in shape consequent upon falling way in condition,
+or from other causes. In the case of a horse which has fallen away
+in condition, and for certain shapes of back, a useful method is the
+“<i>channel fold</i>” The blanket is folded lengthways in three equal
+parts, each end is then turned over and folded towards the centre (two
+or three folds may be taken as required to suit the horse’s back),
+leaving a channel in the centre.</p>
+
+<p>3. The <i>girth</i> should be sufficiently tight to keep the saddle
+in its place and no tighter. In saddling a horse, the girth must be
+tightened gradually, and not with violence. It is recommended that the
+girths of all except young and growing horses should be fitted with the
+buckle in the second or third hole from the free end of the tab.</p>
+
+<p>4. The <i>surcingle</i> should lie flat over the girth, and be no
+tighter than the latter.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Adjustment of the “<b>V</b>” attachment.</i>—The <b>V</b>
+attachment, fitted to the saddle as issued, admits of limited
+adjustment to suit the conformation of the horse.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</span></p>
+
+<p>The front straps of the <b>V</b> attachment, Marks II and III, should
+not be buckled and unbuckled daily when girthing, nor utilised for
+shortening or lengthening the girth.</p>
+
+<p>The normal position of the attachment is with the buckle in the centre
+hole of the three—6½ inches from the rivet—this position will suit a
+very large number of horses; the upper and lower holes are provided for
+the adjustment; additional holes are not to be punched.</p>
+
+<p>On animals with straight shoulders that carry the saddle too far
+forward, the strap should be buckled in the lower hole.</p>
+
+<p>On animals that have deep chests and sloping shoulders, and are thick
+in front of the saddle, the front strap should be worn long.</p>
+
+<p>But in no case is it to be worn as a true <b>V</b>, <i>i.e.</i>, the
+front and rear straps of equal length, which would depress the hinder
+part of the saddle, and cause other difficulties.</p>
+
+<p>Care should be taken in all cases to buckle the “near” and “off” straps
+in corresponding holes.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_31" class="f120"><b>31.</b> <i>Bridling.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Care should be taken to fit each horse with a bit of the correct
+size. A narrow bit pinches the horse’s lips, and a wide bit moves from
+side to side and bruises them.</p>
+
+<p>The bit should be fitted so that the mouthpiece is 1 inch above the
+lower tusk of a horse, and 2 inches above the corner tooth of a mare.</p>
+
+<p>This can only be laid down as a general rule, as much depends on the
+shape and sensitiveness of the horse’s mouth and on his temper.</p>
+
+<p>2. Figs. <a href="#FIG_1">1</a> and <a href="#FIG_2">2</a> represent bits,
+with and without a port, with a section of the horse’s tongue and lower jaw.</p>
+
+<p>The tongue is less sensitive than the bars of the mouth. A straight
+mouthpiece, <a href="#FIG_1">Fig. 1</a>, rests on the tongue and bars of the mouth. When
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</span>
+the reins are pulled the tongue is able to take the greater part of the
+pressure. A mouthpiece with a port, <a href="#FIG_2">Fig. 2</a>, rests
+chiefly on the bars. When the reins are pulled the tongue slips into
+the port and is unable to relieve the bars of the greater part of the
+pressure. A bit with a straight mouthpiece is therefore less severe
+than one with a port.</p>
+
+<div class="figcontainer">
+  <div class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 1.</span></p>
+   <img id="FIG_1" src="images/fig_01.jpg" alt="" width="250" height="283" >
+  </div>
+  <div class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 2.</span></p>
+   <img  id="FIG_2" src="images/fig_02.jpg" alt="" width="250" height="272" >
+   </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>3. The <i>curb</i> should be laid in the chin-groove and be so adjusted
+that when the bit is pulled back to its greatest extent the angle
+which the bit forms with the mouth should never exceed 45° even with
+the lightest-mouthed horse, and should vary between that and 30°
+according to the degree of hardness of the mouth. The curb should be
+fixed permanently on to the off curb-hook. The chain should be adjusted
+by twisting it to the right, putting the last link on to the near
+curb-hook, and then taking up as many more links as may be necessary.
+It should admit two fingers easily between it and the jawbone.</p>
+
+<p>4. The <i>headstall</i> should be parallel to and behind the cheek-bone.</p>
+
+<p>5. The <i>noseband</i> should be the breadth of two fingers below the
+cheek-bone and should admit two fingers between it and the nose.</p>
+
+<p>6. The <i>throat lash</i> should fit loosely, being only sufficiently
+tight to prevent the headstall slipping over the horse’s ears.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</span></p>
+
+<p>7. The <i>reins</i> should be of such a length that when held by the
+middle, in the full of the left hand, with a light feeling of the
+horse’s mouth, they will touch the rider’s waist.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_32" class="f120"><b>32.</b> <i>Miscellaneous details.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The <i>head rope</i> is put on as follows:—The point of the rope
+is passed through the lower ring of the jowl piece from the near to
+the off side, and then through its own ring. It is next passed over
+the horse’s neck from the off to the near side, and fastened off by
+doubling back the end, and laying the loop so formed on the standing
+end of the rope 6 inches from the ring. The free end is then wound
+round the three returns, passed through the loop, and the loop is
+hauled taut to it. The number of times the free end is wound round the
+returns will vary according to the length of the horse’s forehand.</p>
+
+<p><i>Special for mountain artillery ponies.</i>—Buckle the strap at
+the end of the rope, buckle down, to the rear D of the head collar:
+pass the free end from off to near side over the animal’s neck, fasten
+off by doubling a piece of the rope long enough to make five complete
+turns, and lay this loop on the standing end of the rope 6 inches from
+the brass ring; the free end is now wound five times completely round
+the three returns, and passed down through the loop which is hauled
+taut to it. The bight of the rope is fastened off the front D on the
+saddle by a leather tie.</p>
+
+<p>2. The <i>wallets</i> (officers only) are to be placed on the pommel of
+the saddle with the hollowed side of the connecting piece to the front.
+The wallet strap is to be passed from the rear through the rearmost
+staple on the saddle, then through the rear keeper of the wallet, next
+through the front staple of the saddle, and finally through the front
+keeper of the wallet and buckled, the point of the strap pointing to
+the rear, the buckles being in line with the front edge of the wallet.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The <i>sword frog</i> is attached to the rear arch of the saddle on
+the near side, the girth being passed through the steadying strap.</p>
+
+<p>4. The <i>breast-piece</i> should hang horizontally from the supporting
+straps, the bottom of it about 1 inch above the point of the shoulder,
+and should admit the breadth of the hand between it and the horse’s
+chest.</p>
+
+<p>5. The <i>breastplate</i> should be so fitted that the upper edge of
+the rosette or leather is the breadth of three fingers above the sharp
+breast bone, and it should admit the breadth of the hand between it and
+the flat of the shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>6. The <i>martingale</i> should be used only for exceptional horses. It
+may be either running or standing, according to which suits the horse
+the better.</p>
+
+<p>It should be of such a length that it will not interfere with the horse
+until he gets his head above the proper position. If it is shorter than
+this it will tend to make him set his head and neck, and lean against
+it.</p>
+
+<p>If a running martingale is used on reins other than those sewn to the
+bit or bridoon they should be fitted with “stops” to prevent the rings
+of the martingale getting caught by the buckles or studs, which fasten
+the reins to the bit or bridoon.</p>
+
+<p>Running martingales should, as a rule, be put on the bit reins and
+sufficiently loose to have no bearing on the reins till the horse
+attempts to raise his head.</p>
+
+<p>The standing martingale should, as a rule, be fastened to the noseband,
+but under exceptional circumstances it may be fastened to the bridoon
+or cheek of the portmouth bit.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Riding.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_33" class="f120"><b>33.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The instructions should be divided into three periods, and the pupil
+should be gradually advanced from one to the other.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</span></p>
+
+<p>The proper sequence of instruction is a matter of extreme importance,
+in order to obtain early and satisfactory results and to avoid spoiling
+horses.</p>
+
+<p>2. The first period should be devoted to the attainment of a firm seat
+independent of the reins, and its natural consequence—suppleness of
+the body from the hips upwards. Individual instruction should be the
+rule during this period.</p>
+
+<p>It is important to give the recruit confidence from the first, and to
+start with he should be given a quiet, well-trained horse. He should
+be allowed a saddle and stirrups for the first few days, after which
+some of his work each day should be without stirrups. The greater part
+of the instruction at this stage should be without reins. To save the
+horse’s mouth the pupil should only be allowed to hold his reins when
+he is riding with stirrups.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the recruit begins to be at home in the saddle and can rise
+in his stirrups, cantering and jumping should commence.</p>
+
+<p>3. Before he enters the second period the recruit should be able to
+control his horse in straightforward movements and simple turns in
+the school or manège and be able to ride over low jumps at all paces
+without reins. From now onwards a considerable portion of the work
+should be outside the riding school.</p>
+
+<p>This second period should be devoted to teaching what are commonly
+called the “<i>aids</i>,” <i>i.e.</i>, the use of the hand and lower
+part of the leg and the distribution of the rider’s weight to indicate
+the rider’s will to his horse. (<a href="#Para_43"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>43</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The instructor should aim at cultivating freedom and elasticity in the
+shoulders, arm, and wrists. Stiff shoulder-action cramps the play of
+the elbow-joints and wrists and makes good hands impossible.</p>
+
+<p>The recruit should be instructed to keep the knee firm to the saddle
+when the lower part of the leg is used.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. In the third period more advanced instruction in horsemanship is
+given. This should commence when the pupil has attained to suppleness
+of the body and the limbs, and consists in combining the play of both
+so that the rider may learn to move in unison with his horse.</p>
+
+<p>Exaggerated movement of any sort must be discouraged, and the necessity
+of quietness and of sitting still emphasized. The best horsemen attain
+their ends with the minimum of exertion to themselves and to their
+horses.</p>
+
+<p>During this period the horse artillery recruit should be taught to use
+his sword, and mounted men should receive instruction in riding with
+the rifle.</p>
+
+<p>5. After the first few lessons the recruit’s horse should be constantly
+changed, and he should not be passed in riding until the average animal
+goes pleasantly with him at any pace.</p>
+
+<p>Concurrently with his instruction in riding the recruit should be
+taught the principles of saddling and bitting, also the points of the
+horse and other elementary but useful knowledge connected with horses
+and stables.</p>
+
+<p>6. By following out the methods described an average man, with careful
+individual instruction, should be able to ride at a trot and canter and
+over small jumps without reins after about 30 continuous lessons. He
+should be fit for dismissal in about 60 lessons.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_34" class="f120"><b>34.</b> <i>Hints to instructors.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. It is necessary that an instructor should himself be a practical
+horseman.</p>
+
+<p>2. Recruits should be carefully taught from the first how to put on
+and fit their saddles and bridles. The ill effects resulting from bad
+fitting saddlery should be explained to them.</p>
+
+<p>Examples of horses badly saddled and bridled should be shown to the
+men, and they should be made to point out what is wrong, and how the
+mistake should be put right, <i>e.g.</i>, if the front tab of the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</span>
+<span class="fs_120"><b>V</b></span>-shaped girth attachment is not
+buckled tightly up, the saddle will slip forward. They should also be
+taught clearly how the bit acts on the bars of the mouth, and how it
+should be fitted.</p>
+
+<p>3. An instructor should be mounted, and in addition to a short verbal
+description, should give a practical illustration of what he requires.
+A recruit who may have great difficulty in learning his work by mere
+verbal instruction will quickly do so by copying an expert horseman.</p>
+
+<p>4. A feature of all instructional work should be its quietness; an
+instructor should never shout and must always keep his temper. He must
+endeavour from the first to create a spirit of emulation amongst his
+pupils, and avoid keeping the more forward amongst them back for the
+sake of the others.</p>
+
+<p>5. An instructor should aim at making his lesson progressive, and as
+interesting as possible. In order to give recruits confidence, they may
+be allowed occasionally to amuse themselves in the riding school with
+their horses, by doing anything they like without interference from the
+instructor, beyond his taking care that the horses are not ill-treated.</p>
+
+<p>When teaching men in the open they should be encouraged to ride about
+independently, so as to get into the habit of making their horses
+go where they like and do what they wish. As the men improve, the
+instructor should accustom them to riding under as varied conditions as
+possible.</p>
+
+<p>6. The first portion of the early training can be pushed on much more
+quickly in a riding school than in the open. The horses are under
+better control, the nervousness natural to beginners and usually felt
+by recruits is greatly lessened, for they know that the horse cannot
+run away, and there is nothing to distract the attention of men or
+horses. The more advanced training must, however, always be carried out
+in the open, in order that the pupil may learn real control over his
+horse and improve his hands.</p>
+
+<p>7. The first object of the instructor is to give his pupils confidence,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</span>
+to teach them balance, the knee and thigh grip, and to sit well down in
+the saddle. The lungeing whip should not be allowed inside the school,
+it does more harm than good, frightens the other horses and upsets the
+men; if necessary, the recruit should be allowed to carry a stick or
+whip. No riding school lesson should exceed one hour.</p>
+
+<p>8. Falls should be avoided: they tend to spoil the beginner’s nerve
+and retard his progress. To this end the recruit’s stirrups should be
+connected in the initial stages by a strap passing under the horse’s
+belly, of such a length that the man’s knees are not drawn away from
+the saddle. The strap saves falls, because it prevents the rider’s legs
+from flying out far in any direction and the confidence it engenders
+enables him to acquire balance more quickly. It should not be used when
+jumping obstacles over 2 feet high.</p>
+
+<p>9. More horses are spoilt from being “<i>jobbed</i>” in the mouth
+than from any other cause; particularly when jumping; hence the
+immense importance of teaching the men from the first to leave their
+horses’ heads alone except for the purpose of control and for applying
+particular aids.</p>
+
+<p>Men may, with advantage, be taught to ride with their reins fully long.</p>
+
+<p>10. An instructor should be careful not to keep horses reining back,
+passaging, or bending for more than a few minutes at a time. Generally
+speaking, half the length of the school is sufficient for one of these
+exercises.</p>
+
+<p>11. In order to teach a man to have a strong seat, with the knee firmly
+in the saddle, and at the same time to keep his feet pressed down
+home in the stirrups with the leathers practically taut, he should
+frequently be practised in standing up in his stirrups. At first this
+should be done with the horse standing still, the man resting his hand
+on the horse’s neck, if necessary, to assist his balance. Afterwards at
+the walk, trot and canter.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_35" class="f120"><b>35.</b> <i>Preliminary training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Before a recruit is allowed to mount a horse his riding muscles
+should, if possible, have been strengthened on a wooden horse, either
+under a riding instructor or under a gymnastic instructor who is a
+good horseman. At the same time he should be taught the correct seat.
+(<a href="#Para_38"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>38</b></a> and <a href="#FIG_4">Fig. 4</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>2. The following are good exercises:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Rising from the knee with stirrups.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Rising from the knee without stirrups.</li>
+ <li class="isub2">iii. Touching the foot with the hand on each side, with</li>
+<li class="isub4">and without stirrups.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Leaning forwards and backwards in the saddle, with</li>
+<li class="isub4">and without stirrups.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; v. Swinging the lower part of the leg, with a circular</li>
+<li class="isub4">motion to the rear, and towards the horse’s side.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;vi. Without stirrups and with arms folded, making the</li>
+<li class="isub4">horse rock by swinging the body backwards and</li>
+<li class="isub4">forwards, maintaining a firm grip with the thighs.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>iii and iv should be practised on the move when riding proper begins.
+Before commencing, the pupil must be placed well down in the saddle,
+and he must be taught to keep his knees firm to the flap and not to
+cling with the lower part of the leg.</p>
+
+<p>3. These exercises on the wooden horse may be usefully employed during
+subsequent training, but should not immediately precede or follow
+a riding lesson. Exercising tired muscles is not only useless, but
+harmful.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_36" class="f120"><b>36.</b> <i>First lessons to the recruit.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Squads should not exceed 8 in number, and should parade in line,
+leading their horses.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Stand to your
+horses.</span>”—The man stands at attention on the near side of the
+horse, toes in line with the horse’s fore feet; the reins, taken over
+the horse’s head, are held in the palm of the right hand near the ring
+of the bit, little finger between the reins, back of the hand up; the
+right arm bent, the hand as high as the shoulder; the end of the reins
+in the left hand, which hangs down by his side without constraint. This
+is the position of <i>attention</i> when the man is leading his horse.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>When the horse is about to be ridden, the position of attention will
+be the same as above, except that the reins will not be taken over the
+horse’s head and will be held by the right hand only near the bit.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Stand at ease.</span>”—The
+right hand slides down the near rein to the full extent of the arm, the
+end of the reins being retained in the left hand. The position of the
+man’s legs and feet are the same as at dismounted drill.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><i>Note.</i>—If the reins have not been taken over the horse’s head,
+they will be held in the right hand only, the left arm hanging by the
+man’s side without constraint.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">In front of your
+horses.</span>”—Each man being at <i>attention</i> will take a full
+pace forward with the right foot, turn to the right-about on the ball
+of it, and take one rein in each hand near the rings of the bit, still
+holding the end of them in the left hand if the reins are over the
+horse’s head; hands and elbows to be as high as the shoulders.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>This is the position in which a man should stand when showing a horse
+at the halt.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Stand to your horses.</span>”—Each
+man will take a full step forward to the horse’s near side with the right
+foot, and turn left-about on the ball of it.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</span></p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Quick march.</span>”—Each
+man will move off holding the reins as above.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Single files right
+(or left)</span>” “<span class="smcap">Quick</span>
+<span class="smcap">march.</span>”—Each man will move off in
+succession, one horse-length from the file in front of him.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>2. A man when leading a horse through a narrow gate or doorway should
+walk slowly backwards, taking care that the horse’s hips clear the
+uprights. The head collar should be held in both hands, one on either
+side of the horse’s head, which, however, should be sufficiently free
+for the horse to see where he is going.</p>
+
+<p>When a soldier, leading a horse, passes an officer he will look towards
+him.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>How to pick up a horse’s foot.</i>—The recruit should be taught
+the right way to pick up a horse’s foot. To do this he should face the
+rear and run his hand lightly down the leg from the shoulder or quarter
+along the back of the knee or hock before attempting to lift the foot
+from the ground.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>How to run a horse in hand.</i>—The reins should be held as
+described above in “<i>Stand to your horses</i>” and the horse led off.
+As soon as he breaks into a steady trot the man should leave go the
+reins with the hand nearest the horse, and only hold the end of the
+reins in his outer hand. In turning a horse about when in hand, the
+man should always move round the horse and not swing the horse round
+himself. In leading a horse past an officer for inspection, the man
+should place himself on the side nearest the officer.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_37" class="f120"><b>37.</b> <i>Mounting and dismounting.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Without stirrups.</i>—The reins hanging evenly on his neck, the
+command will be given:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Prepare to mount.</span>”—Turn
+to the right and close 6 inches to the right. Take the reins in
+the left hand properly separated as for riding (<a href="#Para_39"><i>see</i> Sec.
+<b>39</b></a>), and place the left hand on the front of the saddle.
+The reins should be of such a length that the horse’s mouth is not
+interfered with while mounting. The right hand will grip the back of the saddle.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</span></p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Mount.</span>”—Spring up,
+straightening the arms to assist, pass the right leg over the horse and
+drop gently into the saddle. When mounting without a saddle the left
+hand will be placed in front of the horse’s withers, and the right arm
+on his loins, forearm well to the off side, fingers closed.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Prepare to
+dismount.</span>”—Place both hands, with a rein or reins in each,
+on the front of the saddle, and rise from the horse’s back by
+straightening the arms. Without saddles, both hands will be placed on
+the horse’s withers.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Dismount.</span>—Vault
+lightly to the ground and assume the position of ”<i>Stand to your
+horses</i>.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>Mounting and dismounting should also be practised on the
+offside.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>With stirrups.</i>—“<span class="smcap">Prepare to mount.</span>”—Turn to the
+right about. Take the reins in the left hand properly separated as for
+riding (<a href="#Para_39"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>39</b></a>) and with a
+light and equal feeling on the horse’s mouth. Place the left hand on
+the horse’s withers, and grasp his mane, or the front of the saddle if
+he has no mane; then place the left foot in the stirrup, and the right
+hand on the back of the saddle.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Mount.</span>”—Spring
+quietly into the saddle, place the right foot in the stirrup without
+looking down and assume the position of attention (<a href="#Para_40"><i>see</i> Sec.<b>40</b></a>).</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>Mounting on the offside will be taught in the same manner, and recruits
+should be made to practise it regularly.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Prepare to
+dismount.</span>”—Shorten the reins (<a href="#Para_39"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>39</b></a>)
+and grasp the mane with the left hand, place the right hand on the front
+part of the saddle and take the right foot out of the stirrup.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</span></p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Dismount.</span>”—Carry the
+right leg over and lower the body gently to the ground; place the left
+foot in line with the horse’s fore feet, turn to the left and come to
+the position of “<i>Stand to your horses</i>.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>3. Whenever the men are dismounted and have been allowed to <i>Stand
+easy</i> from the position of <i>Stand at ease</i>, they will be
+recalled to attention by the command “<span class="smcap">Stand to your horses</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>4. For instructional purposes the order for mounting and dismounting is
+given by two words of command, <i>e.g.</i>:—</p>
+
+<p>“<span class="smcap">Prepare to mount.</span>”—“<span class="smcap">Mount</span>”; “<span class="smcap">Prepare to
+dismount.</span>”—“<span class="smcap">Dismount</span>”; but for trained men there is only
+one word of command in each case, <i>i.e.</i>, “<span class="smcap">Mount</span>” or
+“<span class="smcap">Dismount</span>.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_38" class="f120"><b>38.</b> <i>The seat.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The recruit must be made to sit evenly on his seat, well down in the
+saddle, and not on his fork; the flat of the thigh and the inside of
+the knee pressed against the saddle, but not so tightly that the man
+rides on his thighs, as the weight of the body should rest principally
+on the seat. Below the knee the leg should hang free, and in the early
+stages much attention need not be paid to the position of the body,
+though from the first the recruit should be taught to get his seat well
+under him.</p>
+
+<p>2. Great care should be taken to fit the stirrups to the right length
+to suit the build of the rider. The man should be made to place himself
+in the saddle with his knees at the height which appears to suit his
+thigh. The stirrups should then be adjusted so that the bars are in
+line with the soles of his boots. If a man standing in his stirrups can
+just clear the pommel with his fork the stirrups are about the right
+length.</p>
+
+<p>The end of the stirrup leather should be passed under both returns and
+then under the surcingle. It should not be passed downwards through the
+buckle.</p>
+
+<p>A man with a short thick leg, however, requires his stirrups shorter
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</span>
+in proportion than a man of equal height but with a flat thigh and thin
+leg. The stirrups are intended to be an aid and convenience to the
+rider; if they are too long he will lose his seat by leaning forward in
+his endeavour to retain them; if they are too short, the seat becomes
+cramped and the rider is prevented from using the lower part of the leg
+correctly.</p>
+
+<p>In ceremonial work the stirrups should be kept on the ball of the foot,
+but at other times the feet may be pushed right home.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_39" class="f120"><b>39.</b> <i>How to hold the reins.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The recruit should next be taught how to hold the reins as described
+below. In the early stages he should only be allowed a snaffle or
+single rein attached to the cheek of the universal bit, and no curb,
+and should ride with the reins in both hands. The instructor should
+impress upon him the importance of not hanging on by the reins and
+explain that if he does so he will not make progress, but by injuring
+his horse’s mouth will make him difficult to ride.</p>
+
+<p>2. The hands should be low and close in front of the body, thumbs
+uppermost, back of the hands to the front. Wrists should be rounded and
+supple and the movements of the horse should be followed by means of
+the play of the shoulders, elbows (which should be kept close to the
+body), and wrists.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Reins in left hand.</i> i. <i>Bridoon or check reins
+only.</i>—Take the two reins in the left hand, the right rein between
+first and second fingers, the left rein outside the fourth finger,
+slack passed across the palm and secured between the thumb and first
+finger.</p>
+
+<p>ii. <i>All four reins.</i>—Place the right bit rein between the second
+and third fingers, and the left bit rein between the third and fourth
+fingers. The right bridoon rein between the first and second fingers,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</span>
+and the left bridoon rein outside the fourth finger, the slack of all
+four reins thrown back over the first finger and secured by the thumb.</p>
+
+<p>At riding drill drivers when holding the reins in the left hand should
+place the right hand on the thigh, as described in <a href="#Para_55">Sec. <b>55</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Reins in both hands.</i>—In the first place, whether using
+single or double reins, take them in the left hand as described above,
+then take up the right rein or reins in the right hand by placing it in
+front of the left, pulling sufficient of the slack forward through the
+left hand to obtain an even bearing on the mouth with both hands held
+low, just in front of the body and close to the horse’s withers.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of single reins only, the right rein should be held between
+the third and fourth fingers; with double reins, the two right reins
+should be separated by the third finger. In each case the right hand
+should hold only the right rein or reins, the slack of these being
+secured between the right thumb and forefinger and passing thence into
+the left hand which holds both the left and right reins.
+(<a href="#FIG_3"><i>See</i> Fig. 3</a>.)</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_3" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 3.</span></p>
+    <p class="center">(<i>Bit reins shown shaded.</i>)</p>
+    <img src="images/fig_03.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="271" >
+    <p class="center spb2"><span class="smcap">VIEW FROM FRONT.</span></p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <img src="images/fig_03b.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="312" >
+    <p class="center"><span class="smcap">VIEW FROM ABOVE.</span></p>
+</div>
+
+<p>5. <i>To lengthen the reins.</i>—Allow sufficient rein to slip gently
+through the fingers.</p>
+
+<p><i>To shorten the reins.</i>—Keep the reins in the left hand but drop
+the slack from between the thumb and forefinger, and take hold of this
+in the right hand behind the left, slide the left hand forward until
+the desired length is obtained. Then as before secure the slack, and if
+riding with both hands on the reins, take up the right rein or reins
+again in the right hand.</p>
+
+<p>6. The recruit should be well grounded in the proper manner of holding
+the reins, and frequently practised in changing them quickly from one
+hand to both and <i>vice versâ</i>, also in shortening and lengthening
+them at all paces. The importance of keeping the reins supple and
+unpolished should be impressed on him.</p>
+
+<p>7. Normally the reins should be held in the left hand only, bit reins
+inside except in the case of beginners, and when riding young or
+awkward horses, when both hands should often be used. Occasionally the
+left hand may be required to be free, as when leading another horse, in
+which case the reins of the ridden horse can be held in the right hand.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_40" class="f120"><b>40.</b> <i>Position in the saddle at attention.</i></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_4" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 4.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_04.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="507" >
+</div>
+
+<p>1. The correct position of the rider at attention is shown in Fig. 4.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</span>
+The head and body should be erect and square to the front; upper arm
+hanging perpendicular; forearm nearly horizontal; thighs flat on the
+saddle; legs from the knee down nearly vertical; knees turned inwards
+so as to enable the toes to point towards the front; the heels should
+be sunk lower than the toes and the feet pressed down into the stirrups
+(<a href="#FIG_4"><i>see</i> Fig. 4</a>).</p>
+
+<p>2. On the command “<span class="smcap">Sit at ease</span>” the reins should be relaxed
+by dropping the left hand on the front of the saddle. The right hand
+should rest on the left, back up.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_41" class="f120"><b>41.</b> <i>First movements on horseback.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The recruit should now be shown how to start his horse off at a
+walk from the halt, <i>i.e.</i>, he should be made to ease the reins
+slightly, though still keeping a light feeling on the horse’s mouth,
+and press him forward with the legs from the knees downwards. He should
+be prevented from jogging his horse in the ribs with his heels and from
+advancing his hands to slacken the reins. At the same time he should be
+taught how to halt without jerking his horse’s mouth.</p>
+
+<p>The trot should be slow and for short periods and there should be no
+cantering for the first few lessons.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>How to rise in the stirrups.</i>—The loins must be perfectly
+lissom, so that the seat may be easy and comfortable; the back should
+not be hollowed, but the upper part of the body should be inclined a
+little forward.</p>
+
+<p>The recruit should not try, by rising, to follow or to anticipate the
+movements of the horse, but should let himself be raised.</p>
+
+<p>His knees (and ankle-joints if riding with the stirrup on the ball
+of the foot) will sustain his movement and will allow him to descend
+softly into the saddle. It is advisable to let the recruit commence
+this at a walk.</p>
+
+<p>3. At the trot without stirrups the recruit should allow his body to be
+thrown up at each step, and fall on his seat.</p>
+
+<p>In cantering, the knees, the inside of the thighs and the seat itself
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</span>
+must remain close to the saddle, the whole body pliant and accompanying
+the movement of the horse, so that with each stride the rider feels a
+forward thrust through his seat from the animal’s back.</p>
+
+<p>4. A few turns and circles may now be introduced, and in executing them
+the recruit should be told how to use the weight of his body. He should
+be instructed, whilst preserving the grip of his knees and thighs, to
+incline his weight from the hips slightly backwards and to the side to
+which he is turning.</p>
+
+<p>5. As soon as he has gained some confidence, the recruit should ride
+without reins; he should then be taught to jump, at first over small
+obstacles, such as the bar lying on the ground. (<a href="#Para_42"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>42</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The recruit should not be allowed to cling with the back of the calf;
+it should be explained to him that the principal use of the lower part
+of the leg will be taught to him later.</p>
+
+<p>6. Much of the early training should be without reins, the arms being
+folded in front of the body, never behind, as the latter tends to throw
+the upper part of the body forward.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_42" class="f120"><b>42.</b> <i>Teaching the recruit<br>
+how to ride his horse<br> over a fence.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Jumping, when carried out with discretion, is an excellent training
+for men and horses. Constant practice throughout the recruit’s training
+will enable the man to acquire, and afterwards to maintain, a firm
+seat, whilst at the same time the muscles of the horse’s back and
+thighs are developed and strengthened.</p>
+
+<p>2. Riding over the bar laid on the ground makes a good beginning, the
+men trotting round the school with suitable distances between horses
+and jumping it in turn. This has the advantage of leading both men and
+horses to think that they are doing nothing out of the common, and
+results in an orderly and quiet procedure.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</span></p>
+
+<p>The recruit should at first be allowed to hold the end of the rein in
+the flat of the hand to give him confidence, but should be encouraged
+as soon as possible to drop the reins altogether. The arms should
+be folded across the chest. Stirrups should be allowed until the
+instructor considers it advisable for the beginner to jump without them.</p>
+
+<p>In the first jumping lessons the recruits may be allowed to hold the
+mane, head rope, or front of the saddle in one hand and the reins
+loosely in the other. With this assistance they will be found to get
+confidence, attain their proper balance in a short time and be in a
+position to control their horses without jerking their mouths.</p>
+
+<p>3. As the horse takes off, the pupil should be instructed to lean
+forward and to tighten his leg-grip; if he is successful in this his
+body will soon swing in harmony with the horse. The movements of the
+body from the hips upwards when riding over a jump vary so much with
+different horses and different fences, that it is impossible to lay
+down any rule. It is a matter of the rider balancing his body assisted
+by a leg-grip. The horse should be eased up gently after a jump, on no
+account should his pace suddenly be checked.</p>
+
+<p>When the initial stage is passed frequent change of horses expedites
+progress.</p>
+
+<p>4. The pupil should be gradually trained to handle the reins when
+jumping, and the greatest care must be exercised to avoid ill-treatment
+of the horse’s mouth during the process. If the shoulder-joints are
+given free play when the horse requires more rein, all jerky movements
+of the arms and wrists will be avoided as the hands go forward. Reins
+must be held long, and the man taught to keep his hands low and allow
+them to come freely forward as the horse is on the downward plane. When
+riding with the reins in one hand, the left shoulder can be brought
+forward as the horse is descending.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. Jumping low obstacles is very little exertion to the horse, and the
+more the recruit has of it the sooner he will be ready to enter the
+third period of instruction. Before he enters this stage he should sit
+his horse with ease, both with and without reins, and, when jumping,
+should be able to keep a light feeling on the horse’s mouth without in
+any way interfering with it.</p>
+
+<p>6. The pupil should then be given horses that require “<i>riding</i>”
+at their fences, and be taught to handle them with resolution. A
+combination of the qualities of determination and patience are
+invaluable in a horseman, and should be developed and encouraged at
+this stage of the training.</p>
+
+<p>The method of dealing with refusers is given in <a href="#Para_81">Sec. <b>81</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_43" class="f120"><b>43.</b> <i>The aids.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>General principles.</i>—The “<i>aids</i>” are the signals used
+by the rider to assist him in directing his horse. These signals are
+made by means of the reins, legs, spurs, shifting the weight of the
+body, whip, and voice. For instance, the reins can be used to bend the
+neck, to raise, lower, or turn the head to any one side; and to make
+the horse decrease his speed, halt, or rein back.</p>
+
+<p>The necessity of impressing on all recruits the importance of
+preserving the sensitiveness of the horse’s mouth cannot be over-rated.</p>
+
+<p>The pressure of both legs is an indication to the horse to go forward,
+and should normally be applied just behind the girth; the leg should
+only be drawn back when the horse fails to respond to ordinary
+pressure. The pressure of the leg drawn back on one side is employed to
+make the hind quarters turn towards the opposite side, or to prevent
+them from turning towards the side on which the pressure is applied.</p>
+
+<p>When it is necessary to use the spur it should be applied as described
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</span>
+in <a href="#Para_45">Sec. <b>45</b></a>. If when the horse is on the move the
+weight of the body is shifted, say to the right, the horse will be inclined to
+put out a foot on that side, in order to equalize the distribution of
+weight on its limbs. The hind quarters and forehand are respectively
+lightened by the rider’s body being brought forward and back, or by
+lowering or raising the horse’s head. The movement of the body as an
+“<i>aid</i>” should be slight, except in the case of a man riding a
+heavy horse, when more movement may often be necessary, but it should
+not lead to interference with the horse’s mouth.</p>
+
+<p>The indications of the whip are closely akin to those of the leg and
+spur.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>To walk or trot.</i>—Without drawing them back, close both legs
+to the horse according to his temperament, and slightly ease both reins
+by a slight turn of the wrist or wrists. As soon as the horse advances
+at the desired pace relax the pressure of the legs and feel the reins
+again as before.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>To halt.</i>—Close both legs and feel both reins, at the same
+time bring the weight of the body slightly back. As soon as the horse
+halts relax the pressure of the legs.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>To turn to the right on the haunches.</i>&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_3_3" href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a>—Close
+both legs to the horse, using more pressure with the left leg drawn back to
+prevent his haunches from flying out to the left. At the same time feel the
+right side of the horse’s mouth, press the left rein against his neck,
+and lean the body slightly back and to the right.</p>
+
+<p><i>To turn to the left on the haunche.s</i>—Reverse the above.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>To turn right about on the haunches.</i>—The same as “<i>right
+turn</i>,” except that the rider should lean his body slightly back
+as well as to the right and as required apply more continued pressure
+on the right rein and firmer pressure with the drawn back left leg to
+compel the horse to turn on his haunches.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>To collect the horse.</i>—Make the horse bring his hindquarters
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</span>
+well under him by a pressure of both legs, and induce him to flex his
+jaw and bring his nose slightly in by a light feeling of the bit rein.
+The pressure of the legs should precede any feeling of the reins. In
+this way the rider causes the horse to stand, walk, trot or canter, at
+attention.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>To rein back.</i>—Collect the horse as described in the previous
+paragraph, then feel the horse’s mouth as an indication for the horse
+to step backwards; the rider must never have a dead pull on the horse’s
+mouth, but when the horse has taken a step back, should ease the reins
+and then feel them again. The horse should be kept up to his bit by a
+pressure of both legs.</p>
+
+<p>The trained horse should rein back collectedly, with head carried
+fairly high, and the body balanced on all four legs. He must move in
+a straight line, and must not be allowed to run back out of hand, but
+must make each movement in obedience to the properly applied indication
+of the rider. He should not be allowed to halt in an uncollected
+position.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>To canter off fore and off hind leading.</i>—Collect the horse,
+and by a strong pressure of the drawn back left leg make him strike off
+into a canter. Prevent him from turning his quarters to the right by a
+supporting pressure of the right leg as required. When cantering the
+horse’s body, head and neck should be kept in the direction in which
+he is moving. The horse should be collected and slightly bent in the
+direction of the leading leg. The horse must be made to canter true and
+united.</p>
+
+<p><i>To canter near fore and near hind leading.</i>—Reverse the above
+aids.</p>
+
+<p>Methods of telling if a horse is cantering true:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;i. Look at his shoulders and fore feet: the
+shoulder and foot of the leading leg should be the most advanced.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">ii. Look at his hind legs. The leading one of
+these should be on the same side as the leading fore leg. The horse’s
+croup will be slightly turned towards the side of the leading legs.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</span>
+If “<i>disunited</i>,” the movement felt in the seat will be a jolting
+and twisting motion.</p>
+
+<p>9. <i>To change from off fore and off hind to near fore and near hind
+at the canter.</i>—Close both legs to the horse and turn his head
+slightly to the right; prevent him from turning his body to the right
+by the pressure of the left leg, put the weight of the body slightly
+backwards and cause him to change by a stronger pressure of the drawn
+back right leg.</p>
+
+<p><i>To change from near fore and near hind to off fore and off hind, at
+the canter</i>.—Reverse the above aids.</p>
+
+<p>10. <i>To circle right at canter</i> (from the halt, walk, or
+trot).—Apply the aids described for the “<i>Canter, off fore and off
+hind leading</i>,” and guide the horse round to the right.</p>
+
+<p><i>To circle left at the canter.</i>—Apply the aids described for the
+“<i>Canter, near fore and near hind leading</i>,” and guide the horse
+round to the left.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_44" class="f120"><b>44.</b> <i>Bending.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Bending affords the advanced recruit a lesson in applying the
+“<i>aids</i>.” It is tiring exercise for the horse and should be
+practised with discretion.</p>
+
+<p>In all bending work it is very important to get the horse to yield his
+jaw slightly as this conduces to lightness of hand.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule, bending should be done on the move.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>To bend a horse:</i>—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;i. <i>On the snaffle.</i>—If to the right,
+the rider should bend the horse by a gentle pressure on the right rein,
+at the same time giving to him slightly with the left rein but still
+retaining a gentle feeling on the left side of his mouth, and using the
+pressure of the legs as required; as soon as the horse bends to the
+hands cease bending and make much of him.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</span></p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">ii. <i>On the bit.</i>—The left hand, holding
+the reins, should have an equal feeling on all four reins. In bending
+to the right, place the third finger of the right hand between the two
+right reins and slightly feel the horse’s mouth, using the pressure of
+the legs as required; when the horse yields to the feeling by relaxing
+his jaw and bending as required, the hand should immediately yield to
+him.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>The outer rein in bending should always retain a steady feeling to
+support the inner and to ensure the bend being made at the poll.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Bending lesson.</i>—With beginners it is advisable that this
+should take place in the riding school or closed-in manège, but as the
+instruction progresses it should be practised outside.</p>
+
+<p>The following movements should be practised (<a href="#FIG_5"><i>see</i> Fig. 5</a>):—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2"><i>Right shoulder in.</i></li>
+<li class="isub2"><i>Left shoulder in.</i></li>
+<li class="isub2"><i>Right pass</i> }</li>
+<li class="isub6">&nbsp; } To move across the school or to a flank.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; <i>Left pass</i>  }</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>In all these movements the horse’s neck should be kept straight from
+the withers onwards to near the poll, his head itself being turned in
+the direction in which he is moving.</p>
+
+<p>In the “<i>shoulder in</i>” the horse’s body should be inclined at
+about a half turn to the direction in which he is to move.</p>
+
+<p>In “<i>right</i>” or “<i>left pass</i>” the horse’s body should be kept
+approximately at right angles to the direction in which he is moving,
+being inclined only just sufficiently in that direction to enable him
+to cross his legs.</p>
+
+<p>These movements should all be made in the same way. Thus in “<i>right
+shoulder in</i>,” the left rein bends and leads the horse assisted by
+the right rein. The pressure of the rider’s right leg makes the horse
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</span>
+cross his legs (except in the case of the half passage) whilst the
+rider’s left leg keeps him up to the hand and prevents him from
+swerving.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_5" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 5.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_05.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="450" >
+</div>
+
+<p>Horses should not be turned at the corners when in the position of
+“<i>shoulder in</i>.” On reaching a corner each horse should be walked
+on and again “<i>shoulder in</i>” after passing it.</p>
+
+<p>To turn to the right when passaging to the right:—Stay the hind
+quarters with the right leg, lead the forehand round with the right
+rein, keep the left leg closed to prevent the quarters from flying out.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</span></p>
+
+<p>In working the shoulder in and passages, fore and hind feet should move
+on four distinct lines parallel to each other.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_45" class="f120"><b>45.</b> <i>Spurs.</i></p>
+
+<p>When the recruit has learned to preserve his proper seat and balance,
+and has a knowledge of the “<i>aids</i>” made with hands and legs, he
+may ride with spurs. In making use of them he must not open his thighs
+or move his body forward; the leg from the knee downwards only should
+move. Spurs with sharp rowels should only be allowed in exceptional
+circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>The spurs should be used as little as possible, but when they are
+necessary the horse should be made to feel them; a continual light
+touch will either make the horse kick or cause him to become insensible
+to them; a jogging motion of the leg with the heel drawn up should,
+therefore, never be allowed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_46" class="f120"><b>46.</b> <i>Various exercises.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>General principles.</i>—The recruit’s course should proceed by
+degrees according to the progress made, and any or all of the following
+exercises may be found useful.</p>
+
+<p>Others which suggest themselves to the instructor may be added. Each
+exercise or game, however, should have some definite object, and should
+be looked on merely as a means to an end.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>To circle.</i>—The ride being told off by fours, on the command
+“Nos. 1 <span class="smcap">Circle right</span> (or <span class="smcap">left</span>),” each No. 1 will ride
+his horse in a circle and fall-in the rear of his section of fours,
+Nos. 2, 3 and 4 doing the same when ordered by the instructor.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Odd</span> (or
+<span class="smcap">even</span>) <span class="smcap">numbers
+circle</span> <span class="smcap">right</span> (or
+<span class="smcap">left</span>).”—Each odd (or even) number will ride in a
+small circle and fall-in behind the even (or odd) number immediately
+behind him.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</span></p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">“<span class="smcap">Heads of fours circle
+right</span> (or <span class="smcap">left</span>).”—The leading man of
+each fours will ride in a circle followed by 2, 3, 4, and will continue
+in the circle until he gets the command “<span class="smcap">Go
+Large</span>,” when he will cease circling and resume his original
+direction; or the rein may be changed by the word of command “
+<span class="smcap">Heads of fours—change</span>.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>3. <i>Figure of 8.</i>—For preliminary training in this movement the
+horse should be cantered quietly on a large circle or an oblong of
+about the same length as the school.</p>
+
+<p>i. <i>In the riding school or manège.</i></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_6" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 6.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_06.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="287" >
+</div>
+
+<p>The change of rein and leading legs should be made as soon as the new
+circle is commenced at X. (<a href="#FIG_6"><i>See</i> Fig. 6</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>ii. <i>Outside.</i>—First start off at a canter on a moderate sized
+circle on either rein. As soon as the horse is moving correctly and
+collectedly, turn inwards and describe a small circle still on the same
+rein, but about half the size of the first, when this is completed
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</span>
+change the bend of the horse and the leading legs, and make a similar
+circle on the other rein, the two circles describing the figure of 8
+within the original circle. (<a href="#FIG_7"><i>See</i> Fig. 7</a>.)</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_7" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 7.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_07.jpg" alt="" width="400" height="354" >
+</div>
+
+<p>In changing the bend, jerking the horse’s head across from one side to
+the other should not be allowed; to compel the horse to change legs it
+is necessary to turn his head slightly outwards, the rider at the same
+time inclining his weight to the side to which he wishes the horse to
+change, and pressing with his outer leg; these movements should be made
+gently, and as soon as the horse has changed the leading legs, both fore
+and hind, his neck and head should be turned to look the way he is going.</p>
+
+<p>4. The “<i>Ladies Chain</i>” is a useful practice for both man and
+horse. The leading file turns about, and rides a slightly zig-zag
+course through the remainder of the ride (who will be at three or four
+horse-lengths distance from each other), passing on their right and
+left hands alternately. When each man in succession has done this, the
+rear file, at increased pace, will zig-zag through the ride from the
+rear, and the remainder will follow in succession.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. Practice in crossing a big V-shaped ditch, about 18 feet wide and 10
+feet deep, <i>i.e.</i>, large enough to compel the horses to go down
+one side and up the other, is a particularly valuable exercise, as no
+horse will face the opposite bank unless his head is left absolutely alone.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_47" class="f120"><b>47.</b> <i>Paying compliments mounted<br>
+without arms.</i></p>
+
+<p>When riding with both hands on the reins a soldier passing an officer
+turns his head and eyes in the direction of the officer without moving
+his hands. When holding the reins in one hand only he should drop
+the right hand to the full extent of the arm behind the right thigh,
+fingers half closed, back of the hand to the right, and turn his head
+in the direction of the officer.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_48" class="f120"><b>48.</b> <i>Leading horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When riding one horse and leading another, the led horse should be
+on the near side, so that when meeting or being overtaken by traffic
+the man, by keeping on the left of the road, will have the ridden horse
+between the led horse and the traffic. The end of the led horse’s rein
+should be held in the left hand lying flat against the reins of the
+ride horse. If the led horse is fresh his rein should be held short,
+about 1 foot from his head. If he tries to break away, the man should
+circle the two horses to the left.</p>
+
+<p>2. When leading two horses one should be on each side.</p>
+
+<p>3. When leading three horses one should be on the near side and two on
+the off side. When leading two horses on the same side the reins of the
+outer horse should be passed between the jaw and the jowl piece of the
+head collar of the inner horse before being gathered up.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_49" class="f120"><b>49.</b> <i>Securing horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Tying up a horse.</i>—The chief considerations in securing a
+horse by the reins or head rope are to prevent him injuring himself
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</span>
+(wire fences or spiked iron railings should obviously not be used) or
+breaking his reins by treading on them. The knot used should be capable
+of being quickly tied and untied and should not be likely to come
+unfastened through the horse fidgetting about.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#FIG_8">Fig. 8</a> shows how a horse may be secured to a
+suitable branch by first placing the loop of the reins under and round
+it, and then doubling back the end of the branch and passing it through
+the reins. A piece of stick will answer the same purpose. The more the
+horse pulls the tighter the knot becomes.</p>
+
+<p>2. Single horses can also be kept from straying as follows:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">i. By knee-haltering. One end of a rope is made
+fast above the knee by a clove hitch, fairly tight, with a keeper knot
+(half-hitch) round the rope to prevent it from coming loose. The other
+end is then carried back to the head collar and so secured that the
+horse cannot tread on it. The rope should be from 1 foot to 1 foot 6
+inches from the knee to lower ring of jowl piece of head-collar.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcontainer">
+  <div class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 8.</span></p>
+   <img id="FIG_8" src="images/fig_08.jpg" alt="" width="270" height="231" >
+  </div>
+  <div class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 9.</span></p>
+   <img  id="FIG_9" src="images/fig_09.jpg" alt="" width="250" height="239" >
+   </div>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;ii. By securing the bit to the stirrup iron by
+means of the rein or a strap.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">iii. By securing the bridoon rein to the girth
+on the near side; this is done by taking the bridoon reins over in the
+usual way and passing them under the girth from front to rear. They
+should then be drawn sufficiently tight to bend the horse’s head to
+the left and fastened by a single hitch, but without drawing the slip
+end through. (<a href="#FIG_9"><i>See</i> Fig. 9</a>.) When mounting in
+haste the rider can easily loosen the slip knot after mounting, and
+then pull the reins clear and pass them over the horse’s head.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>3. <i>Coupling horses.</i>—Horses can be securely coupled by turning
+them head to tail and tying each with the bridoon rein to the off
+back-strap or arch of the saddle of the other, taking care that the
+reins, when tied, are not more than 6 to 8 inches long.
+(<a href="#FIG_10"><i>See</i> Fig. 10</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>With three horses one can be tied to the head collar of either of the
+two horses so coupled. Four horses are secured by tying a horse to each
+of the two originally coupled. No horse should have more than 1 foot
+length of rein, and the best knot to be used is a slip knot round the
+rein itself.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_10" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 10.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_10.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="175" >
+</div>
+
+<p>4. <i>Linking horses.</i>—The head ropes are brought over the horses’
+heads clear of the reins, without unfastening the coil or knot. Each
+man hands his rope to the man on his right, who passes it through
+the upper ring of his own horse’s head collar, and ties it with two
+half-hitches.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_50" class="f120"><b>50.</b> <i>Riding with the sword.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="23">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To draw</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Pass the right hand smartly across the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>swords.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">body, over the bridle arm, draw out the blade</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the sword knot on the wrist, give it two turns</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Draw</span>—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inward to secure it, and then grasp the handle</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Swords.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the right arm close to the body, shoulders</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">square to the front.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bt"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">With an extended arm draw the sword</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">slowly from the scabbard, in the rear of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left shoulder, and bring it smartly to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<i>Recover</i>,” that is, with the bar of the hilt in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">line with the bottom of the chin, blade</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">perpendicular, edge to the left, elbow close to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the body.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Lower the sword smartly to the “<i>Carry</i>,”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="9">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">that is, with the top of the guard resting on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the top of the hand, blade perpendicular, edge</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the front, the first and second fingers</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">gripping the handle under the resistance</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">piece, the little finger behind the handle to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">steady it, the wrist resting on the leg and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pommel pressed against the side of it, upper</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">part of the arm close to the body, and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">elbow lightly touching the hip.
+                  <span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To slope</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Bring the lower part of the arm at right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>swords.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">angles to the upper, hand in front of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">elbow, relax the grasp of the second and third</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Slope—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">fingers, and allow the sword to fall lightly on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Swords.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the shoulder, midway between the neck and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">point of the shoulder, the top of the hilt resting</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on the top of the hand, the little finger</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">still in rear of the hilt.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To sit at</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Keeping the sword at the slope, place the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>ease.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hands on the front part of the saddle, with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Sit at Ease.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hand over the left.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To come</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to position</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of attention.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Come smartly to the position of “<i>Slope</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>swords</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Resume the grasp of the second and third</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>carry</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">fingers and bring the blade perpendicular,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>swords.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the hilt resting on the thigh, as in the third</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Carry—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">motion of drawing swords.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Swords.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Carry the hilt smartly to the hollow of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>return</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left shoulder, blade perpendicular, edge to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>swords.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the left, elbow level with the shoulder; then</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by a quick turn of the wrist drop the point</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Return—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in rear of the left shoulder slowly into the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Swords.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">scabbard, and resume the position at the end</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the first motion in “<i>Draw swords</i>,”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">One.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">shoulders being kept square to the front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">throughout this motion.
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Push the sword lightly into the scabbard,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">release the hand from the sword knot by giving</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">it two turns outwards, the right hand remaining</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">across the body in line with the elbow,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">fingers extended and close together, back of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the hand up.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Drop the right hand smartly to the side.</td>
+
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>7. When “<i>Draw swords</i>” is ordered at the walk, the men
+after drawing will remain at the “<i>Carry</i>” until ordered to
+“<i>Slope</i>”; but if “<i>Draw swords</i>” is ordered at the trot or
+gallop, the men will come to the “<i>Slope</i>” after drawing.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Proving.</i>—In proving with a drawn sword, the sword is brought
+to the “<i>Carry</i>,” and again sloped on the command “<span class="smcap">As you
+were</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>9. <i>Paying compliments with drawn sword.</i>—An officer or soldier
+should “<i>Carry</i>” his sword and turn his head and eyes in the
+direction in which the compliment is to be paid.</p>
+
+<p>10. <i>Officers’ salute.</i>—i. The officers’ salute in marching past
+commences ten yards from the reviewing officer, the sword being at the
+“<i>Carry</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>First motion: Carry the sword direct to the right to the full extent of
+the arm, hand as high as the shoulder, back of the hand to the rear,
+blade perpendicular.</p>
+
+<p>Second motion: Bring the sword by a circular motion to the
+“<i>Recover</i>,” keeping the elbow as high as the shoulder.</p>
+
+<p>Third motion: Still keeping the elbow the height of the shoulder, bring
+the hilt to the right shoulder; during this motion let the finger nails
+come in line with the edge of the sword.</p>
+
+<p>Fourth motion: Lower the sword to the front to the full extent of the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</span>
+arm, blade 3 inches below the knee, edge to the left, thumb extended
+in the direction of the point, hand directly under the shoulder. There
+should be no pause between these motions, but all should be combined in
+one graceful movement.</p>
+
+<p>The head is slightly turned towards the reviewing officer whilst
+passing him.</p>
+
+<p>After passing the reviewing officer ten yards, the sword is brought
+to the “<i>Recover</i>” carrying it well to the front, and to the
+“<i>Carry</i>” in two deliberate movements.</p>
+
+<p>ii. <i>The officers’ salute at the halt.</i>—The sword being at the
+“<i>Carry</i>.” First motion: Bring the sword to the “<i>Recover</i>,”
+but with the thumb pointing upwards.</p>
+
+<p>Second motion: As described in fourth motion of the salute when
+marching past.</p>
+
+<p>Third motion: Bring the sword to the “<i>Recover</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>Fourth motion: Bring the sword to the “<i>Carry</i>.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_51" class="f120"><b>51.</b> <i>Riding with the rifle.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">1.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Take hold of the barrel of the rifle with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>mount.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left hand, about 3 inches below the muzzle,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">butt downwards, and prepare to mount, but</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Prepare to</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the rifle held in the left hand on the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mount.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">off side of the horse.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Mount as usual, raise the rifle with the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mount.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand, seize it with the right hand in front of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the magazine, and place it in the bucket.
+                    <span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="21">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>dismount.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Prepare to</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Seize the rifle with the right hand at the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Dismount.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">small of the butt.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Draw the rifle out of the bucket far enough</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to allow the hand to re-grasp it just in front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the magazine; raise it so as to clear the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front of the saddle.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Lower the butt under the bridle hand, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hold the barrel with the left hand about</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">3 inches below the muzzle.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Four.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Place the right hand in front of the saddle,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="7">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and quit the right stirrup. On the command</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+       <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<span class="smcap">Dismount</span>,” dismount as usual, bringing the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+       <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rifle to the position of the “<i>Order</i>” in the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+       <td class="tdl_wsp bl">hand, and hold the bridle with the right hand.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If required for dismounted service, as soon</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">as the horse is given up, the rifle is passed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">from the left hand to the right.
+               <span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>The</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The rifle is held with the right hand in front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the magazine resting on the upper part of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the right thigh, thumb and fingers round the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rifle, muzzle pointing to the left front and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">just clear of the horse’s near ear, trigger guard</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the front.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To draw</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Grasp the rifle at the small of the butt.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Draw—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">Draw the rifle out of the bucket far enough</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><span class="smcap">Two.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to allow the hand to re-grasp it just in front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the magazine.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Three.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl bt">Retaining the same grasp, bring the rifle to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the “<i>Advance</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To carry</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">From the “<i>Advance</i>.”—Without moving the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right hand from its grasp of the rifle, place,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the butt on the upper part of the right thigh,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Carry.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">with the right eye, trigger guard to the left,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">back of the hand down, arm slightly bent,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">elbow close to the side.
+                  <span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>To return</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">This is done in one motion as follows:—Raise</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>arms.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the butt of the rifle and lower the muzzle</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">into the mouth of the bucket, pressing the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Return</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">rifle well home with the right hand, trigger</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—Arms.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">guard to the rear, taking care that the bolt lever</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">does not catch on the edge of the bucket.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_52" class="f120"><b>52.</b> <i>Revolver shooting.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Revolver shooting is to be practised mounted by all ranks armed with
+that weapon.</p>
+
+<p>2. At least 10 days’ preliminary instruction, including snapping,
+should be given immediately before firing the first year’s course,
+while 5 days’ practice will generally be advisable before subsequent
+courses. This preliminary instruction is important, in order to
+inculcate correct methods and to train the eye and muscles of the hand,
+wrist and arm.</p>
+
+<p>3. The allowance of blank ammunition is required to accustom men to the
+shock of discharge and horses to the noise. Firing should be carried
+out first at a walk and finally at a canter.</p>
+
+<p>4. When loaded the revolvers should be carried muzzle down and the
+finger away from the trigger.</p>
+
+<p>5. To take aim the revolver should be raised on to the mark, keeping
+the wrist stiff with the forearm, wrist and barrel in the same vertical
+plane, or it may be brought direct into the alignment. The arm may be
+kept straight or slightly bent.</p>
+
+<p>Mounted men should learn to shoot, without taking aim along the sights,
+at the centre of the body of the target. With a little practice they
+should learn to keep their eyes on the object and, as it were, “throw
+the bullet” at it.</p>
+
+<p>6. Practice with ball ammunition should be divided into two parts,
+dismounted and mounted. The latter should not be carried out until a
+man thoroughly understands the handling of the weapon.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Driving.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_53" class="f120"><b>53.</b> <i>General principles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. All officers, non-commissioned officers, and drivers must possess a
+thorough knowledge of the principles of driving and of fitting harness.</p>
+
+<p>2. Even and steady draught is a matter of paramount importance; the
+respective weights behind teams are calculated on the assumption that
+every horse will do his fair share of work; this is impossible unless
+the driving is of a high order. If the driving is not good, neither
+quick manœuvre, long marches, nor efficient transport serviceman be
+assured.</p>
+
+<p>3. When draught is even and steady every trace in the team is taut, and
+the horses’ heads are facing straight to the front. If, for example, an
+off horse’s head is pulled inwards, his draught power is reduced and he
+is liable to become collar galled.</p>
+
+<p>4. The lead driver is responsible for direction, distance, and pace; it
+is the duty of the centre and wheel drivers to keep the traces taut and
+cover him.</p>
+
+<p>5. Temperament should be the first consideration in teaming horses. A
+slug should therefore, if possible, not be included in a team of very
+willing horses.</p>
+
+<p>6. The position of the horses should frequently be changed; a hand
+horse, for example, loses his back muscles if he is never ridden, and
+is also apt to acquire the habit of leaning on the off side of the bit.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_54" class="f120"><b>54.</b> <i>Fitting harness.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The <i>saddle</i>, <i>saddle blanket</i>, <i>girth</i>,
+<i>surcingle</i>, <i>bit</i>, <i>curb</i>, <i>chain</i>, <i>head
+rope</i>, <i>nose band</i>, and <i>throat lash</i> will be fitted as
+for the riding horse. (<a href="#Para_30"><i>See</i> Secs. <b>30-32</b></a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. The <i>riding rein</i>&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_4_4" href="#Footnote_4_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a>
+should be fitted of such a length that the
+driver has complete control over his horse.</p>
+
+<p>In the <i>leading rein</i> the short piece on the near side should
+be carefully fitted so that the bearing of the bit in the horse’s mouth
+may be even when the rein is held in the driver’s hand.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>side rein</i>, if required, should be buckled to the cheek of
+the bit of the horse, the end being buckled to the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>4. The <i>breast collar</i> should hang horizontally from the padded
+neck straps, the lower edge about one inch above the point of the
+shoulder. The higher it is in reason the less chance there is of the
+horse galling.</p>
+
+<p>5. The <i>pole bar supporting straps</i> should be sufficiently short
+to carry the bar the width of a hand above the sharp breast bone; if
+lower, the bar will gall the horse’s chest. Care must be taken to have
+the bar horizontal.</p>
+
+<p>6. The <i>loin straps</i> should be so fitted that the traces shall be
+in a straight line when the horse is in draught.</p>
+
+<p>7. The length of the <i>traces</i> must depend on the size of the
+horses. The distance between horses in a team should not be less than
+one yard from nose to tail, but the traces of each pair of horses must
+be the same length.</p>
+
+<p>8. The <i>breeching</i> should be fitted about 16 inches below the
+upper part of the dock; it is kept horizontal by the long loin straps.
+When put back in the breeching the horse should be at least a foot from
+the footboard.</p>
+
+<p>9. <i>Pole chains</i> should be so fitted that when wheel horses are
+standing up to their collars there is no pull on the chains. By the use
+of a tug neck piece in connection with the pole bar supporting straps,
+horses with wheel harness can be harnessed to G.S. wagons whether the
+latter are fitted with pole chains or pole straps.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</span></p>
+
+<p>10. <i>The kicking strap</i> should be so fitted as to give the play of
+a hand’s breadth between it and the horse’s croup when he is standing
+in his collar.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_55" class="f120"><b>55.</b> <i>Position of a driver standing<br>
+to his horses and mounted.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The driver stands to his horses on the near side of his riding horse
+in line with the fore feet, holding the reins of both horses (the
+leading rein passing over the riding horse’s neck) in his right hand,
+right arm extended and level with his shoulder; left arm hanging down
+by his side; whip, stock upwards, in his legging.</p>
+
+<p>2. On the command “<span class="smcap">Prepare to mount</span>,”
+the driver turns to his right about, places the leading rein over the
+riding rein in the palm of his left hand, puts his left foot in the
+stirrup, and takes hold of the front of the saddle with his left hand
+and the back of the saddle with his right; if he cannot reach the back
+of the saddle, he must take hold of the flap.</p>
+
+<p>With the universal reins, the riding horse’s rein is held in the full
+of the hand, the end hanging down between the first finger and thumb,
+little finger dividing the reins. The leading rein is held in the full
+of the hand, the end hanging down from the opposite side of the hand to
+that of the ride horse’s reins.</p>
+
+<p>At “<span class="smcap">Mount</span>” he raises himself in the
+stirrup, passes his right leg over the horse and drops quietly into
+his saddle. He then adjusts his reins so that he has an even feeling
+on both horses’ mouths, takes the whip out of his legging with his
+right hand, which he passes through the loop at the end of the stock
+and places on his right thigh back up, grasping stock and thong close
+together, with his elbow a few inches from his body.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>This is the position of attention, mounted.</i></p>
+
+<p>3. On the command “<span class="smcap">Sit at Ease</span>,” both hands are placed on the
+pommel of the saddle, the right hand holding stock and thong of whip
+over the left.</p>
+
+<p>4. On the command “<span class="smcap">Prepare to Dismount</span>” the driver places the
+whip in his legging.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</span></p>
+
+<p>At “<span class="smcap">Dismount</span>.”—If the driver cannot reach the ground with his
+right foot while the left is still in the stirrup, he takes both feet
+out of the stirrups, and the body, at first supported by both hands, is
+gently lowered to the ground. He then comes to the position of standing
+to his horses.</p>
+
+<p>5. On the command “<span class="smcap">Stand at Ease</span>,” keeping both legs straight,
+he carries the left foot about one foot-length to the left, and slides
+the right hand (retaining hold of the leading rein) down the riding
+rein of the riding horse as far as it will go; his left hand hanging
+down the thigh.</p>
+
+<p>“<span class="smcap">Stand Easy.</span>”—He fastens the leading rein to the riding rein
+by means of a thumb knot.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_56" class="f120"><b>56.</b> <i>Use of the whip.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The whip is chiefly used to control the off horse: <i>i.e.</i>, to
+start him, to keep him in the collar, and to guide him when turning. It
+should be applied lightly on to the off side of the neck just in front
+of the withers, fingers closed on stock and thong.</p>
+
+<p>2. The driver also salutes with his whip when at a walk, in the
+following manner:—He brings it to the recover as with a sword, passes
+it over the withers of the off horse, right arm extended, but with the
+elbow raised and slightly bent, hand in a line with the waist, back
+of the hand up and inclined to the front, fingers firmly closed on
+the stock and thong. The driver should hold his body erect with the
+shoulders square to the front, and look the officer full in the face.
+When the salute is finished, the whip is brought to the recover and
+then down to the position of attention. The salute commences four paces
+from the officer, and finishes four paces beyond him. A driver when
+halted, or at the trot, salutes by coming to attention and looking the
+officer full in the face.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. On rare occasions the whip may be used to punish a horse, when the
+thong should be applied once on the shoulder. This procedure is seldom
+justified, and is liable to upset the other five horses in the team.</p>
+
+<p>At all other times the thong should be held close against the stock
+with the end of the lash hanging down.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_57" class="f120"><b>57.</b> <i>Driving without vehicles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Before recruits are allowed to drive horses in draught they should
+be practised in manœuvring the team alone. The centre and wheel drivers
+thus learn in the initial stages to keep the traces taut, and all
+likelihood of either spoiling or overtiring horses is avoided.</p>
+
+<p>2. The riding school is well suited for this training; three teams can
+be worked together in an ordinary sized building, and they are more
+under the instructor’s eye than in the open.</p>
+
+<p>3. The positions of the drivers in the teams should frequently be
+changed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_58" class="f120"><b>58.</b> <i>Hooking in and unhooking.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Hooking in and unhooking should be done as in action, that is in
+complete teams with drivers mounted, and by the same men who perform
+the duty in action. The supporting bars for the poles are brought up
+from the footboards of the carriages and attached to the neck pieces of
+the wheelers. If possible the team should come up on the left of the
+carriage, as it is easier for the wheel driver to get his horses into
+position from the near than from the off side.</p>
+
+<p>2. Traces should be fastened and unfastened at the swingle-trees. The
+two highest available numbers at the gun and wagon respectively hook in
+and unhook the teams of their own carriage. All numbers work on their
+own side.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The inside traces of the centre horses pass over the supporting bar
+to prevent the pole tipping up. When hooking in, the outside trace of
+each horse is attached before the inside one. In unhooking, each man
+unfastens what he fastened when hooking in, commencing where he left
+off.</p>
+
+<p>4. In the case of heavy artillery, should additional horses (over the
+normal team of eight) be required, they should be attached to the
+outriggers on the limber and not hooked in front of the team, as the
+traces are not designed to stand the extra strain.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Hooking in.</i>—At “<span class="smcap">Hook in</span>” the higher number holds
+up the pole near the footboard, and the lower number goes round by
+the head of the off wheeler, and as the wheel driver backs his horses
+guides the ring of the supporting bar on to the pole. As soon as the
+ring is on the pole the two gunners fasten the wheel traces (<i>see</i>
+paras. <a href="#Para_2">&nbsp;2</a> and <a href="#Para_3">&nbsp;3</a>).</p>
+
+<p><i>Drivers only.</i>—The centre driver dismounts, and having secured
+his leading rein to his driving rein, raises the pole at the point and
+guides it into the ring on the pole bar. He then fastens the wheel
+traces (<a href="#Para_3"><i>see</i> para. 3</a>).</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Unhooking.</i>—The two gunners unhook the wheel traces
+(<i>see</i> paras. <a href="#Para_2">&nbsp;2</a> and <a href="#Para_3">3</a>),
+and as soon as the attachments are released, the wheel driver gives
+the word “<span class="smcap">Drive on</span>.” The team drives on,
+allowing the pole to fall to the ground.</p>
+
+<p><i>Drivers only.</i>—The centre driver dismounts and unhooks the wheel
+traces.</p>
+
+<p>7. In exceptional circumstances the team can be unhooked in the
+following manner. The wheel driver releases the trace attachments
+of both wheel horses at the breast-collars, and the team drives on,
+allowing the pole to fall to the ground. The breechings and traces
+should be replaced on the horses as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_59" class="f120"><b>59.</b> <i>Traces.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When not in draught, the traces of lead and centre horses are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</span>
+crossed in rear of the saddle and the ends passed forward under the
+neck strap of the breast collar. In the case of spare horses the ends
+of the traces are brought forward and fastened by the quick release
+attachment to the rings on the breast collars, the short traces being
+carried on the footboards of the vehicles.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of wheel horses the traces are passed through the trace
+bearers, then turned up under the loin straps and fastened back to the
+bearers by their quick release attachment.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_60" class="f120"><b>60.</b> <i>Moving off.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On the command “<span class="smcap">March</span>” the drivers
+ease the reins and close their legs to the riding horse, laying the
+whip over the neck of the off horse, to ensure both horses starting
+together. On the command being given every man in a team should start
+his horses to prevent loss of distance.</p>
+
+<p>2. In all alterations to a quicker pace the drivers use their legs on
+the riding horse, and the whip on their off horse as described in Sec.
+<b>56</b>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_61" class="f120"><b>61.</b> <i>Halting.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The lead and centre drivers raise the whip hand as high as the head,
+the whip horizontal across the front, as a signal to the wheel driver.</p>
+
+<p>All three drivers feel their reins and take their horses out of the
+collar. The wheel driver, with his right hand on the leading rein, puts
+his horses back in the breeching.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the carriage stops, every horse is again put into the collar.</p>
+
+<p>2. At any pace but the walk the lead and centre drivers must allow the
+wheel driver sufficient time to stop the carriage before they come to
+the halt.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_62" class="f120"><b>62.</b> <i>Wheeling to the right.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The lead driver wheels his riding horse by leaning his body to the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</span>
+right and feeling the right rein; he brings his off horse round at the
+same time by feeling the leading rein with his right hand.</p>
+
+<p>The centre and wheel drivers follow the track of the lead driver,
+laying their whips over their hand horses’ necks in front of the
+withers to keep them from flying out or hanging back.</p>
+
+<p><i>Note.</i>—On a horse that is not properly trained the lead driver
+may have to apply his right leg as an additional aid. No application of
+the left leg is necessary, as the traces prevent the horse’s quarters
+from flying out. (<a href="#Para_43"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>43</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_63" class="f120"><b>63.</b> <i>Wheeling to the left.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The lead driver wheels his riding horse by leaning his body to the
+left and feeling the left rein; he brings his off horse round at the
+same time by applying the whip over his neck.</p>
+
+<p>The lead driver may have to apply his left leg on an untrained horse
+(<i>see</i> note above).</p>
+
+<p>The centre and wheel drivers follow the track of the lead driver,
+applying the same aids at the point of wheel.</p>
+
+<p>Riding horses must not be allowed to hang back.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_64" class="f120"><b>64.</b> <i>Wheeling about.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. In this case the drivers lean their bodies slightly back, and to
+whichever side they are turning. In going to the right about the wheel
+driver should take the leading rein in his right hand instead of
+placing his whip over the neck of the off horse. In wheeling to the
+left about it may be necessary for him to use both hands on the riding
+horse to keep him from turning too soon. Otherwise the aids are the
+same as for wheeling to the right or left, but are continued longer.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. In order to prevent the carriage from locking, the wheel driver must
+be very careful to keep up his hand, or riding horse, as the case may
+be, and the lead driver must on no account make the circle too small.</p>
+
+<p>3. Carriages should be advanced one yard before being wheeled about
+from the halt.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_65" class="f120"><b>65.</b> <i>Unlimbering.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On the command “<span class="smcap">Action Front</span>” the guns
+are unlimbered and brought into action as detailed in the respective
+handbooks. As soon as the limber is free, the order is given “
+<span class="smcap">Limber drive on</span>.” The drivers advance one yard,
+wheel to the right about at a trot, and proceed direct to the wagon
+line.</p>
+
+<p>2. On the command “<span class="smcap">Action Right</span>
+ (or <span class="smcap">Left</span>)” the guns are unlimbered and the order
+“<span class="smcap">Limber drive on</span>” is given.</p>
+
+<p>The drivers advance one yard, wheel to the left (or right) and proceed
+to the wagon line as directed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_66" class="f120"><b>66.</b> <i>Limbering up.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On the command “<span class="smcap">Front limber up</span>” the gun
+is reversed, the drivers trot up on the right of the gun, keeping one yard
+clear in passing it.</p>
+
+<p>When clear of the gun wheel they throw their right shoulders forward,
+until the near wheel of the limber has just passed the trail eye.</p>
+
+<p>They then halt and pass their horses off to the right until square, the
+lead and centre drivers easing their traces sufficiently to do so.</p>
+
+<p>The wheel driver must be careful not to let the limber run back on the gun.</p>
+
+<p>2. On the command “<span class="smcap">Rear limber up</span>” the
+drivers trot up on the right of the trail eye inclining to the right,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</span>
+if necessary, to allow room for wheeling. The lead driver when he is
+level with the trail eye wheels to his left and again to his left as
+soon as he has passed it. To enable the wheel driver to wheel short
+round, the lead and centre drivers must ease their traces as soon as
+they have passed the trail eye. The wheel driver by holding in his
+riding, and keeping up his hand horse, squares the limber, at the same
+time preventing it running back on the gun.</p>
+
+<p>3. To limber up to the right the drivers trot up; the lead driver
+passing close to the trail turns to the right when the wheel driver is
+in line with it; the lead and centre drivers then case their traces and
+pass their horses off until square. The wheel driver, as soon as he is
+in line with the trail, turns his horses to the right. In all limbering
+up the limber is halted by order of the No. 1, but the drivers must
+look over their shoulders to see that the limber is properly placed.</p>
+
+<p>In limbering up to the left the procedure is similar to the above
+except that either the wagon or the gun must first be moved clear.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_67" class="f120"><b>67.</b> <i>Driving up steep hills.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. To exert his strength to the utmost when pulling up hill, the
+draught horse must get as much weight as possible forward and into the
+collar. By assuming a lower and more advanced carriage of the head and
+neck than he would do if moving balanced and out of draught, he is able
+to add considerably to his power. He should therefore be allowed full
+liberty of rein when ascending a steep hill.</p>
+
+<p>2. A draught horse can put more weight into his collar if ridden.
+Gunners should, therefore, be mounted on the off lead and centre horses
+when circumstances demand it. All men riding draught horses up hill
+should lean forward.</p>
+
+<p>3. When manœuvring off the road, steep ascents should be taken in line
+to avoid checks.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</span></p>
+
+<p>When on a road or track, and if circumstances permit, the battery
+should be halted at the foot of the hill and sent up either by sections
+or subsections, with about 10 yards’ distance between carriages.</p>
+
+<p>4. On exceptional occasions, such as when the team is exhausted, an
+extra pair may be hooked in to each carriage, but it must be remembered
+that this is of little use unless the ascent is straight, and that in
+any case it makes steady draught more difficult.</p>
+
+<p>5. Should a check occur when the column is closed up, the lead drivers
+in rear must be prepared to throw off their horses to the right or left.</p>
+
+<p>6. The pace should be a steady walk during the whole ascent, by which
+the top will be reached more easily and surely than if an attempt is
+made to “<i>spring</i>” the hill.</p>
+
+<p>7. The detachments can also assist with drag ropes hooked into the
+drag washers, or by applying “<i>wheel purchases</i>,” if the carriage
+actually sticks. To use a drag rope as a “<i>wheel purchase</i>” it
+is hooked round the felloe near the lowest spoke, and is then laid on
+the tyre and passed over the wheel to the front. Should the wheel slip
+round, a drag rope may be wound round the felloe and tyre, with the
+turns about a foot apart to enable it to get a grip.</p>
+
+<p>8. After going up a steep hill, the horses should be halted, but when
+this cannot be done, they should be allowed to move slowly to recover
+their wind.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_68" class="f120"><b>68.</b> <i>Jibbing.</i></p>
+
+<p>Horses jib from various causes, such as sore shoulders, a too heavy
+load, bad driving, sore mouth, lameness, and vice.</p>
+
+<p>The whip only aggravates the evil. A handful of gravel placed in the
+horse’s mouth often starts a jibber pulling at once especially if the
+wheels are manned at the same moment. The latter is important in any case.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_69" class="f120"><b>69.</b> <i>Driving down hill.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. In driving down hill, the lead and centre drivers hold their horses
+back to allow the wheel driver the management of the carriage, but the
+traces must be kept up; the wheel driver with his right hand on the
+leading rein keeps his horses steadily in the breeching, taking care
+not to throw them on their haunches, and, in the case of shaft draught
+harness, not to let too much work fall on the off horse.</p>
+
+<p>2. For moderately steep descents, the brake can be used. Should a
+descent be so steep that the brake is not sufficient, the detachment
+must hold on with the drag ropes hooked into the drag washers on the
+gun carriage or wagon body.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_70" class="f120"><b>70.</b> <i>Applying the brake.</i></p>
+
+<p>The brake should be put on sufficiently tight to check but not to skid
+the wheel. In crossing a valley the man in charge of the brake must
+begin taking it off soon enough for the wheels to be quite free before
+the beginning of the rise on the other side is reached, or in fording a
+river before the carriage gets into the water.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_71" class="f120"><b>71.</b> <i>Reversing in narrow roads.</i></p>
+
+<p>Before attempting to reverse, the carriage should be drawn up as close
+to the side of the road as possible. The carriage is next unlimbered,
+and the lead and centre horses unhooked and taken out. The gun or wagon
+body is then reversed, followed by the limber.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_72" class="f120"><b>72.</b> <i>Driving a pair of horses from the box.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When driven from the box, horses will neither work comfortably nor
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</span>
+be under perfect control, unless so coupled that when on the move with
+an even bearing on the reins their heads are straight. The bearing of
+the bits on their mouths should be light, but constant, and the reins
+should never be allowed to slip through the driver’s fingers.</p>
+
+<p>A pair of horses, worked as such, should frequently be interchanged.
+This will prevent the acquirement of bad habits, such as pulling away
+from the pole, shouldering the pole, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>To put to.</i>—The horses should be led up alongside the pole
+by the noseband (not by the bit), the chain should then be passed
+through the ring of the breast collar or kidney link of the hames. The
+traces should next be fastened, the outer ones first, and finally the
+horses should be poled up and coupled together. In unhooking the above
+procedure is reversed.</p>
+
+<p>The correct adjustment of the <i>coupling reins</i> requires great
+care. With a view to this, the outer reins have a number of holes
+punched in them, up and down which the buckles of the coupling reins
+can be shifted, thus enabling them to be shortened or lengthened to
+suit each particular horse’s mouth. For instance, if the near horse
+carries his head to the near side, the coupling rein on the off side
+should be taken up, when his head will be straightened, and <i>vice
+versâ</i>.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Sitting on the box.</i>—The driver should sit square to his
+front on the box, which should be low enough to allow of his legs being
+well bent at the knee. If the box seat is too high he is liable to be
+pulled off when a horse stumbles.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>How to hold the reins and whip.</i>—The near rein passes over
+the forefinger, the off rein between the middle and third fingers of
+the left hand, both reins fall through the palm of the hand and hang
+loose on the left side of the driver’s knees. The reins are kept in
+position in the hand by the pressure of the third and fourth fingers
+assisted by the second; the thumb and forefinger should not be used for
+this purpose. The wrist should be rounded.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</span></p>
+
+<p>The whip should be held between the lower part of the thumb and the
+base of the forefinger of the right hand, thus leaving the fingers
+free. The point of the whip should be carried up, the stick inclined
+across the body and to the front. The position of the whip should not
+be changed when the right hand manipulates the reins. When required,
+the right hand can be placed on the reins in front of the left, the
+first and second fingers on top of the near rein, and the other two
+between the reins. The former grip the near rein and the latter the off
+rein.</p>
+
+<p>Reins should always be shortened or lengthened from the front;
+<i>i.e.</i>, either pushed back through the left hand or pulled out
+through the left hand.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Use of the whip.</i>—The whip should be employed as sparingly as
+possible. When used, the thong should be applied on the shoulder and
+drawn across from right to left, or <i>vice versâ</i>.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Turning.</i>—To turn or incline to the right, the right hand
+grasps the right rein in the full of the hand, knuckles up and inclined
+to the front. This gives the firmest hold and at the same time allows
+of the position of the whip being maintained. To turn to the left, the
+left rein is grasped in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Driving up hill.</i>—An even and steady walk should be
+maintained when travelling up a steep hill; if the load is
+exceptionally heavy and circumstances permit, the horses should be
+allowed to incline from one side of the road to the other as the wagon
+ascends.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Driving down hill.</i>—The pace cannot be too slow in descending
+a hill, and the brake should not be applied until the horses take the
+breeching. When the shoe is used the wheel to which it is applied
+should be chained to the carriage; this prevents all chance of accident
+should the shoe become unshipped when travelling over rough ground.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Training the Young Horse.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_73" class="f120"><b>73.</b> <i>General principles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The training of the horse must be gradual, and accompanied by a
+steady development of his physical powers.</p>
+
+<p>It is better to give a remount two short lessons a day than one long
+one, for it must be remembered that the tendons and muscles of a young,
+immature animal are easily injured by too much continuous work, and
+they must be gradually strengthened in order to stand the strain to
+which they will be subjected.</p>
+
+<p>Simplicity and suggestion should be prominent features in the first
+stage of training; the horse not only has to learn the meaning of the
+bridle and the leg, but must also adjust his balance to carrying a
+weight on his back.</p>
+
+<p>2. Free forward movement should, therefore, be the first aim of the
+trainer, and as the horse learns the meaning of the bridle he should
+gradually be made to move well up to it and at the same time taught to
+carry his head for height in as good a position as nature will allow.</p>
+
+<p>This may be called the first stage of the training, and should be
+carried out on a snaffle, if available. When the horse will go forward
+quietly he should be worked in the open.</p>
+
+<p>3. The second stage of the training should consist in balancing and
+collecting the horse, in teaching him to turn on his hocks, to passage,
+to rein back, and to obey the aids quickly when ridden with one hand;
+to go quietly by himself or in company and to leave other horses
+freely; and where necessary to become accustomed to sword and rifle.</p>
+
+<p>A few horses are naturally so well balanced, that if they have good
+tempers and are properly ridden, this part of their education offers no
+difficulties, but most artillery remounts will be heavy in front and
+awkward to turn excepting on the forehand. For handiness and for the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</span>
+safety of the rider they should be taught to carry more weight on their
+hocks—in fact to move in the most balanced manner that is possible,
+having regard to their make and to the retention of their liberty of
+movement.</p>
+
+<p>This portion of the training, or most of it, should be carried out with
+the universal bridle, and while the pressure of the legs will often
+have to be strong, the handling of the reins should be of the gentlest,
+or the trainer will defeat his own ends.</p>
+
+<p>4. The third stage of the training consists in teaching the horse to go
+quietly in draught in any position in a team.</p>
+
+<p>5. Patience, firmness, and pluck are necessary to all entrusted with
+the training of young horses. Some horses are very much quicker at
+learning than others, and no rule can be laid down; on no account
+should the trainer attempt to hurry matters.</p>
+
+<p>The trainer should communicate to his pupil his appreciation of any
+progress made by immediately rewarding him with a handful of corn or
+a carrot. Under no circumstances should he lose his temper with his
+horse, and punishment should only be resorted to when it is certain
+that the horse understands what he is required to do, but will not do it.</p>
+
+<p>Instructors must not imagine that the animal can learn a lesson only by
+constant repetition. A horse is quick to receive new impressions, and
+remembers them after comparatively few lessons, provided they are given
+in a proper way.</p>
+
+<p>6. As with recruits, jumping should be constantly practised throughout
+the training, commencing at an early stage over very low obstacles and
+always with a due consideration for the horse’s legs.</p>
+
+<p>7. The same system of training is not applicable to every breed and
+condition of horse. The principles, however, are the same, and must be
+modified to suit the temperament of the animal, and his condition when
+he reaches the trainer.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</span></p>
+
+<p>Factors, which greatly influence the duration of the training and its
+ultimate success, are the capability of the rider and instructor; the
+temperament, make, and condition of the horse; and the training ground
+available.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_74" class="f120"><b>74.</b> <i>First stage.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Remounts arrive in all kinds of condition, and the methods adopted
+with them should be those best suited to their nature, condition and age.</p>
+
+<p>The first day or two will be profitably spent by the trainer in getting
+thoroughly acquainted with his pupil. A snaffle having been put in the
+horse’s mouth, the trainer should lead him about, giving him confidence
+and making him acquainted with his voice. He may then handle him about
+the head and forehand. To prevent injuries to the mouth, it is a good
+plan at this early stage to lead the horse by reins attached to the
+D’s. of the head-collar, the snaffle being left to hang loosely in his
+mouth. During these lessons the horse should be given a handful of corn
+or green meat from time to time.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Backing a remount.</i>—As soon as the remount has become
+accustomed to being led from either side and is quiet, he may be
+saddled, but before he is mounted he should be allowed time to accustom
+himself to the feel of the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>An assistant should stand in front of the horse, holding a rein of
+the snaffle in each hand; the man saddling him should hold the saddle
+by the back arch with the pommel over his right hip (the stirrups and
+girths having previously been thrown over the seat); he should then
+place the saddle, quickly and quietly, on the horse’s back, let the
+girths down, and tighten them gradually.</p>
+
+<p>In backing a horse for the first time the help of two assistants is
+advisable, one on the off side, who should hold the head collar in his
+right hand and the off stirrup in his left, the other on the near side
+holding the snaffle rein in his left hand. The trainer grasping the
+back arch of the saddle in his right and the front arch in his left
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</span>
+hand, should stand close to his horse on the near side, and raise his
+left foot up behind him by bending his knee; the second assistant will
+then grasp his leg just above the ankle and raise him quietly into the
+saddle on his stomach. This should be repeated several times until the
+horse is accustomed to the weight, when the assistant will place the
+rider’s left foot in the stirrup, who will then raise himself in the
+stirrup and throw his right leg clean over the horse’s quarters and
+drop quietly into the saddle; the remount should then be led a pace or
+two forward by the assistant in order to accustom him to the weight
+whilst moving; the rider avoiding too strong a pressure with the legs.</p>
+
+<p>After two or three lessons, if the horse is quiet, the trainer may
+mount with the stirrup in the usual way, great care being taken not to
+touch him with the toe.</p>
+
+<p>3. Considerable time and special pains should be taken to teach the
+young horse to stand absolutely still when being mounted or dismounted.</p>
+
+<p>In dismounting the first few times it is advisable for an assistant to
+stand in front of the horse, and the rider after throwing his right
+leg over to the near side should remain lying across the saddle as in
+mounting, then quit his left stirrup and slide quietly to the ground.
+This method will prevent any possibility of the rider sticking his toe
+into the horse’s ribs, which is liable to make him unsteady.</p>
+
+<p>4. During this period the trainer should devote his time to riding the
+horse about at a free walk, slow trot and canter, and to teaching him
+to stand still when required, and to lead easily.</p>
+
+<p>To teach the remount to move forward freely at the walk, the rider
+should hold his reins long and use his legs.</p>
+
+<p>To teach him to stand still, constant practice and the use of an
+assistant when necessary are required; the trainer should mount and
+dismount from either side, time after time, not allowing the horse to
+move forward immediately after mounting.</p>
+
+<p>The horse should also be taught to do large circles to either hand and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</span>
+practised over very small jumps and should be ridden frequently outside
+barracks.</p>
+
+<p>5. In exceptional cases it may be necessary to devote time to raising
+or lowering the horse’s head to the right position as far as nature
+will allow. It should be borne in mind that the same good carriage of
+head and suppleness of neck cannot be expected of all makes and shapes
+of horses.</p>
+
+<p>The raising or lowering of the horse’s head must be done gradually, and
+as much as possible on the move, for if done at the halt he is apt to
+get behind the bit, and his freedom of action will be endangered. It
+should be effected by the combined action of the legs and hands. The
+legs compel the horse to move forward, drive and keep him up to the
+bit; the hands through the reins and snaffle regulate the position of
+the horse’s head and neck. The trainer must ride with a sympathetic
+hand; that is, he must relax the pressure as soon as the horse places
+his head in the required position, only retaining sufficient feeling
+on the mouth to maintain the head in position. If the horse’s head
+requires raising, the rider does so by holding his hands high. If the
+head requires lowering, the hands are depressed, but without jerking
+the reins.</p>
+
+<p>6. This stage may seem tedious, but it must not be hurried. It is most
+important towards moulding the horse’s future disposition, and for
+building up his physical strength and preparing him for harder work
+later on.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_75" class="f120"><b>75.</b> <i>Second stage.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Balancing and collecting the young horse.</i>—Hitherto the
+rider’s only endeavour has been to teach the horse to go freely up to
+the bridle keeping his head at the proper height. He must now be taught
+to give to the bridle by bending his neck at the poll and slightly
+yielding his lower jaw, care being taken that in yielding the head is
+not lowered.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</span></p>
+
+<p>The trainer must not attempt much at one time. The longer a continuous
+pressure on the reins is maintained, the less inclined is the horse
+to yield, for the discomfort becomes less, the mouth losing its
+sensitiveness. The application of the legs must often be strong to make
+the horse yield.</p>
+
+<p>A natural law of leverage governs the position of the horse’s head
+as the head and neck are moved forward and downwards, the centre of
+gravity of the whole horse is brought forward and he becomes heavier in
+the forehand and freer or lighter behind. At a trot or canter the horse
+naturally draws his head up to lighten the weight on his fore legs, and
+to give them free and equal play with the hind legs.</p>
+
+<p>The young horse should be trained to carry his head fairly high at the
+trot and canter, and at such angle with the neck as will allow the bit
+to have the best bearing on the bars of the mouth. As a horse cannot
+put his fore feet down on the ground beyond his nose, he extends his
+neck when galloping in order to lengthen his stride. By thus moving his
+centre of gravity forward he lightens the weight on his quarters and
+obtains the full propelling power of his hind legs.</p>
+
+<p>A horse when jumping makes use of his neck both as an assistance in
+taking off and to adjust his balance on landing; his head therefore
+should remain perfectly free during every phase of the jump.</p>
+
+<p><i>The bending lesson</i> (<a href="#Para_44"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>44</b></a>)
+is useful for balancing and collecting the young horse
+and for teaching him to obey the rider’s legs. Instruction should
+commence either on foot or with the horse’s head towards the wall, care
+being taken to make him bend correctly.</p>
+
+<p>The exercises described in <a href="#Para_46">Sec. <b>46</b></a>
+are useful for teaching the young horse to walk, trot and canter
+collectedly, but at first plenty of time must be allowed for the horse
+to settle down quietly at each successive period of cantering, trotting
+or walking.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. <i>The rein back</i> is also a useful exercise in the training of a
+young horse. It collects him and teaches him to get his haunches under
+him, but it should never be practised for more than a few minutes at a
+time, nor should it be attempted until the horse will move well up to
+his bridle.</p>
+
+<p>To teach a horse to rein back, it is best to begin on foot and to
+continue mounted, assisted by a man on foot.</p>
+
+<p>The man on foot should stand in front of the horse and endeavour to
+make him go back quietly one or two paces at a time. He should feel the
+bit gently, but without a dead continuous pressure; if necessary, he
+may give a light tap to the horse’s leading foreleg, should he decline
+to move backwards.</p>
+
+<p>When mounted, collect the horse by leg pressure and bring the weight of
+the body slightly forward; feel one side (say the right) of the horse’s
+mouth by the least movement of the wrist, at the same time apply the
+pressure of the left leg to the horse’s side so as to prevent him from
+moving his hindquarters to the left; lean the body a little to the
+right, and feel both reins. As soon as the horse draws back the off
+fore leg, reverse the aids until he draws back the near fore leg and so
+on. The ultimate object in view is to teach him to go backwards with
+his head carried as high as when going forward.</p>
+
+<p>3. During this stage the remount should also be taught to change his
+legs at the canter, for which purpose the figure of eight
+(<a href="#Para_46"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>46</b></a>) is a good exercise,
+provided the horse is first of all made to go kindly and collectedly on
+the larger circle.</p>
+
+<p>4. In order that the horse may retain his full freedom of movement he
+should frequently be made to walk out fast and canter with a loose
+rein. To make a horse walk out, ease the reins and close the legs
+alternately, not both legs together as in the trot.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_76" class="f120"><b>76.</b> <i>Teaching a horse to stand<br>
+still without being held.</i></p>
+
+<p>A horse can be trained to stand still without being held in the
+following way:—</p>
+
+<p>Replace the rein with a strong piece of rope, throw the rope rein thus
+made over the animal’s head, and fasten a sack to the end of it; the
+effect of this is that as the horse moves forward he treads on the
+sack, and gives himself a severe job in the mouth; after a few lessons
+it will be found that the horse will not move when the reins are thrown
+over his head, and the sack can be left off.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_77" class="f120"><b>77.</b> <i>Teaching the young horse to jump.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>General principles.</i>—The aim of the instructor should be
+to teach the horse to jump ordinary natural obstacles willingly
+and safely. To this end outdoor jumping courses will be found very
+valuable. There should be one with small and another with fair-sized
+jumps, all as much like natural fences as possible, and laid out on
+cinder-tracks so as to be available all the year round.</p>
+
+<p>Jumps in the school should not only represent height, but breadth; the
+horse to be useful must learn to jump out as well as up.</p>
+
+<p>The secret in making a safe fencer is gradual and systematic training;
+even if a horse shows great promise when first jumped his education
+should in no way be hurried. He may lose his courage through an early
+and unnecessary fall.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>First lessons.</i>—There are many ways of commencing; if the
+horse is fairly fit and will answer to the hand and leg he may be
+ridden over low and simple fences at once. To avoid all chance of
+failure it will, however, generally be found best to begin on foot and
+either to lead or lunge him over the jump. In a school or confined
+space the best method is first to lead the horse over a bar laid on the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</span>
+ground, and afterwards to lead him up to it and let him go. The
+obstacle should be gradually raised, always being put up firmly, and a
+man should stand at the far end of the school with a basket of corn.
+In a very short time most horses will jump a fence 3 feet 6 inches
+high with enjoyment. The class of obstacle should be varied as much as
+possible as time goes on.</p>
+
+<p>The lungeing whip should never be used, as the horse will watch it
+instead of measuring his distance and calculating the jump.</p>
+
+<p>If the single lungeing-rein and cavesson are used, the rein may be
+attached to the front of the cavesson and the animal led over the
+jump, or it may be fastened to a side D, when he should be made to
+take the fence on the circle. If done in this way it is a good plan to
+have a wing made to carry the rein over and prevent it catching in the
+obstacle and checking the horse suddenly.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Further training in jumping.</i>—After a sufficient schooling
+following any of the above methods, the remount may be sent down a
+jumping-lane if one is available, an old horse acting as pilot on the
+first occasion, or if there is no lane he may be ridden over small
+fences in the open. The first jumping lessons should be given at a
+trot. At this pace horses learn where to take off and jump from their
+hocks without chancing a fence.</p>
+
+<p>When a young but not impetuous horse is being ridden at a fence, he
+should be allowed to go his own pace in reason; in this way he learns
+to adopt the pace most suited to the obstacle and to get back on his
+hocks for a high one.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_78" class="f120"><b>78.</b> <i>Third stage.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Before a horse is put into draught he should fulfil the following
+conditions:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp; i. Stand still to be mounted or dismounted.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;ii. Be balanced, as well as make and shape will allow.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">iii. Be able to do a figure of 8 correctly, passage, rein
+back, halt collectedly; change his legs when turning, so
+as to lead with the correct fore and hind leg, and when
+turned about do so actively on his hocks and not on his
+fore hand.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;iv. Be a good jumper.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp; v. Be accustomed to gun fire and traffic.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;vi. Go alone or in company, at any pace required of him
+without pulling, and be ready to shorten his stride and
+pull up when required.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>2. All officers should understand how to train horses to draught.</p>
+
+<p>The remount should be harnessed with great care, and led about until
+the novelty has worn off. He should then be put into the hand centre in
+the following manner:—</p>
+
+<p>The drivers being mounted, and the remaining five horses in the team
+standing just out of draught, the remount should be led up to his place
+by two men, one on each side, the man on the off side holding the
+horse’s head rope, which should previously have been undone. The man on
+the near side should then hand the leading rein to the centre driver,
+and go to the off quarters of the remount, moving round the horse’s
+head to get there. He should next push the horse’s quarter gently over
+until the animal stands square to its front in the team, and make much
+of him. He should then take the traces quietly and hook in as described
+in <a href="#Para_58">Sec. <b>58</b></a>. The remaining five horses should now be
+put into their collars, and at the command “<span class="smcap">Walk march</span>”
+the team should move straight to its front. The centre driver’s whip
+should be in his leg iron, and he should use his right hand to make
+much of his hand horse. The remount should not be asked to take the
+collar until he settles down and walks along quietly, When this is the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</span>
+case, the man who has been holding the head rope on the off side may
+knot it round the animal’s neck. He must, however, keep with the team,
+and be prepared to hold the rope or head collar again when turning is
+undertaken. All wheeling should be to the left at first. When turns to
+the right are attempted the greatest care should be taken to prevent
+the remount from running back and getting a leg over a trace.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the animal goes quietly in the off centre, knows his work,
+and understands the application of the whip as an aid, he should be put
+into the hand lead and then into the hand wheel. When he goes well in
+any place in the team his education is complete.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Riding and Retraining<br> Awkward Horses.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_79" class="f120"><b>79.</b> <i>General remarks.</i></p>
+
+<p>Remounts joining the Service unbacked or unspoilt, unless exceptionally
+vicious, ought never to come under this heading. A horse properly
+trained in the first instance will only develop faults through
+subsequent bad riding or ill-treatment.</p>
+
+<p>The results of bad handling are shown in defective carriage and paces;
+in a nervous, sulky, or irritable temperament; or in a combination of
+the two.</p>
+
+<p>When the animal is put back into the ranks, he should be given to a
+good horseman, and if possible not be ridden by anyone else. Horses
+rarely forget bad habits, and quickly relapse into them.</p>
+
+<p>The work of retraining a horse is much more difficult than that of
+“<i>making</i>” a young and untrained one; riders should therefore be
+specially selected.</p>
+
+<p>The trainer should first make himself thoroughly acquainted with the
+animal’s faults, and then set to work to systematically and patiently
+eradicate them. It will, in some cases, be found best to treat the
+horse as untrained and begin his education afresh.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</span></p>
+
+<p>As the work will usually be of a corrective character the horse’s corn
+and exercise should be carefully regulated according to his amenability
+to discipline: good results cannot be obtained as long as the animal is
+“above himself.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_80" class="f120"><b>80.</b> <i>Pullers.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The usual causes of pulling are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Excitability.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Pain.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Fear.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Freshness and want of work.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; v. Hard-mouth.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;vi. Bad training.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. <i>Excitability.</i>—Some horses, which are naturally of a nervous,
+highly-strung disposition, become upset by unaccustomed sights and
+sounds, a crowd, or galloping at a fast pace, especially in company
+with other horses.</p>
+
+<p>No special bit will cure this kind of puller, the only remedy is plenty
+of work commencing at slow paces. Only the best horsemen in the unit,
+possessing patience and good hands, should be allowed to ride them.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Pain.</i>—Another frequent cause of pulling is pain. A horse’s
+mouth is most sensitive, and many horses pull through the pain caused
+by the bit, or because their grinder teeth are long and sharp and thus
+cut the sides of their cheeks. Horse’s mouths, especially of those
+who have suddenly taken to pulling, should be constantly examined,
+particularly the bars, under the tongue and close up against the
+grinders. A neglected wound in the mouth may make a young horse pull or
+spoil his mouth by forcing him to hold the bit on one side to protect
+the injured part. If a horse’s mouth is found to be sore, he should be
+given a rest, being exercised if necessary on a cavesson, and when the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</span>
+wound is healed ridden for a time in a snaffle. If the grinders are
+long and sharp it is a simple operation to remove the sharp points and
+edges with a rasp. The corners of the lips also may become sore owing
+to the bit being too narrow, or through being rubbed; the curb chain
+may also injure the chin-groove, in which case the wound should first
+be healed and then a guard should be used.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Fear.</i>—Some horses pull through fear. The only remedy for
+this is to endeavour to accustom them to the cause of their alarm. They
+should be treated kindly and only ridden by careful, patient men. If
+a horse in his early training has been taught to obey the voice, this
+will often be of great assistance in calming him.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Freshness.</i>—The remedy for a horse which pulls from this
+cause is to give him more slow, steady work, and less food.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Hard-mouth and bad training.</i>—The best results are, as a
+rule, obtained from retraining by a good horseman and plenty of school
+work, especially cantering in small circles and figures of 8. If he
+pulls with his mouth open, it should be shut by an adjustable noseband.</p>
+
+<p>7. The great object with a puller is to get him to go collectedly. His
+head should be kept up, but a dead pull on the reins must be avoided,
+as this enables him to set his head and neck against the pressure on
+the bit; instead, give and take to him alternately with the reins.</p>
+
+<p>If a horse throws his head up, and pulls with his head in that
+position, the standing martingale, properly applied, will stop him.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_81" class="f120"><b>81.</b> <i>Refusers.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Refusals may be due to any of the following reasons, or to a
+combination of several:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</span></p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;&nbsp; i. Insufficient elementary schooling.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ii. Want of heart or nerve in the rider.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iii. From the horse having been jobbed in the mouth or</li>
+<li class="isub4">unintentionally spurred when jumping, thus receiving</li>
+<li class="isub4">severe punishment for obeying the rider’s wishes.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; iv. Sickened by too much jumping, especially on hard ground.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;&nbsp; v. Seeing other horses refuse.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; vi. Lameness or sore shins.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;vii. Ill-fitting or too severe a bit.</li>
+<li class="isub2">viii. Sore back or badly fitting saddle.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ix. Want of heart or nerve in the horse.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;&nbsp; x. Vice.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. Before attempting to effect a cure every effort should be made to
+diagnose the cause.</p>
+
+<p>In many cases it is advisable to do a good deal of work on foot,
+leading and lungeing the horse over low fences. As soon as obedience is
+assured, the horse should be mounted again.</p>
+
+<p>3. The best way to deal with a horse that has been unintentionally
+ill-treated in the mouth is to remove the curb chain if he has one, and
+to jump him over low obstacles without reins, and then gradually to
+bring him on to jumping with reins.</p>
+
+<p>4. A horse may sometimes refuse because he has lost his nerve
+temporarily. In such a case, if he is taken three or four times over
+quite a small fence, and then brought back to the original one, he will
+probably jump it all right.</p>
+
+<p>5. Sharp rowels may be necessary on a slug or a cur, but the liability
+of the rider to spur his mount under some conditions without meaning to
+do so is a disadvantage.</p>
+
+<p>6. The faint-hearted or vicious horse should be treated with
+resolution, and be made to feel that the rider is determined to jump.
+This is communicated to the horse by holding the reins in both hands
+and feeling his mouth with firmness, but not roughly or with undue
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</span>
+pressure, and above all by pressing him to the bit by the legs. Care
+must be taken not to ride the horse slantingways at the jump or at a
+spot near the outside edge of the fence; the rider should be on the
+look out for the horse swerving round or running out. The horse should
+be taken slowly up to within a few lengths of the fence and then put
+straight at it by the rider increasing his leg pressure and decreasing
+slightly the feeling on the horse’s mouth.</p>
+
+<p>If he whips round, the horse should be turned back the opposite way
+to face the fence, then reined back a short distance and when quite
+square, put at it again. If necessary he should be helped on with the
+spur without relaxing the leg pressure. Once over the fence the horse
+should be made much of.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_82" class="f120"><b>82.</b> <i>Horses that rush at their fences.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Horses that persist in rushing at their fences and that get very
+excited when jumping are best cured by steady, quiet practice. Such a
+horse should be circled round in front of the fence as though he were
+not going to jump it, until he settles down, when he may be jumped over
+the obstacle.</p>
+
+<p>He should be taught to stand quietly in front of a fence.</p>
+
+<p>On no account should he be spurred or have his mouth jerked. After
+landing over a fence he should be eased up gently to a slow pace and
+never allowed to get out of hand.</p>
+
+<p>He should not be jumped when very fresh.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_83" class="f120"><b>83.</b> <i>Horses that decline to<br> leave the ranks, and
+<br>
+“fretting” horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>In addition to putting a good man on their backs such horses may be
+greatly improved by being kept stabled alone and ridden alone for some
+months. If a horse refuses to leave the ranks, do not slacken the reins
+by pushing the hands forward, but feel his mouth and press him on with
+the legs. Jogging the horse in the ribs with the heels or spurs and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</span>
+slackening the reins will make him worse. It he continues to decline to
+leave the ranks, rein him back two or three feet, then suddenly take
+him unawares and urge him forward with leg pressure.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_84" class="f120"><b>84.</b> <i>Horses that decline to stand<br>
+still when being mounted.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Such horses should be mounted and dismounted on both sides slowly,
+time after time every day.</p>
+
+<p>2. If the horse refuses to stand still after this treatment the
+following method may be efficacious.</p>
+
+<p>Put a loop under the horse’s upper lip and over the poll with a
+slip knot, and when he becomes restive give it a slight jerk and
+say “Steady.” The horse connects the sound of the voice with the
+pain caused by the twitch, and he will learn to remain still even
+without the word being said. The twitch must never be used except in
+conjunction with the voice.</p>
+
+<p>After doing this a few times, when mounting, the trainer should
+dispense with the twitch, and with the left hand holding the reins and
+the cheek piece of the bridle, should say the word “steady,” and swing
+himself into the saddle, without leaving go of the cheek piece till he
+is firmly seated; the horse connects the word and the pressure of the
+hand on the cheek piece with the twitch, and will, as a rule, stand as
+steadily as he would with the twitch still on him.</p>
+
+<p>3. The best way to mount a horse that will not stand still is as
+follows: With the left hand gather the reins loosely and seize the
+cheek piece, hold the stirrup iron in the right hand and allow the
+horse to walk round. Then place the left foot in the stirrup, and
+transfer the right hand to the pommel or other part of the saddle. The
+horse will then revolve in a small circle, of which the right toe of
+the rider is the centre, and the latter should be able to mount without
+difficulty.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_85" class="f120"><b>85.</b> <i>General vice and bad temper.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Such horses are most likely to be improved by a careful regulation
+of work and feeding, by being stabled by themselves, and by gentle
+treatment both in the stable and outside.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Kicking and bucking.</i>—If a horse begins to kick or buck, sit
+back, and take the reins in both hands—keep the horse’s head up or
+pulled right round to one side—get him on the move and away from other
+horses as quickly as possible.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Rearing.</i>—If a horse starts to rear, take the reins in both
+hands, lean forward and leave his mouth alone. If the rider leans
+his weight on that part of the reins which passes from one hand to
+the other over the withers (<a href="#Para_39"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>39</b>, 4</a>)
+it is an assistance. Get the horse on the move at the first opportunity, if
+necessary hitting him over the quarters, but not between the ears.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_86" class="f120"><b>86.</b> <i>Refractory draught horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The vices enumerated in this section should only occur in the case
+of hired horses or of remounts joining on mobilization.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>A horse that refuses to be led up to his place in
+draught.</i>—If all persuasion fails he should be blindfolded with a
+horse rubber, and then led up; the cloth should not be removed until
+the team starts.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>A horse that refuses to stand still when being hooked
+in.</i>—One fore leg should either be held up or strapped up.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>A horse that jibs at starting.</i>—Jibbing has already been
+dealt with in <a href="#Para_68">Sec. <b>68</b></a>. If there is plenty of time
+one of the horse’s fore legs should be strapped up until he tires, and then the
+attempt may be made to start him. Tapping a horse below and behind the
+knee is sometimes effective.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>A kicker.</i>—Use either a kicking strap or a tight bearing rein.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</span></p>
+
+<p>6. <i>A puller.</i>—Use a bearing rein and side rein.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_5_5" href="#Footnote_5_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a>
+Both should be fitted tight when the horse is standing still, or they
+will be useless when he moves.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Leaning on the pole.</i>—A dandy brush strapped to the pole will
+often cure this.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Leaning away from the pole.</i>—Change the horse’s side.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Care and Disposal of Saddlery<br> and Harness.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_87" class="f120"><b>87.</b> <i>Care of saddlery and harness.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Care should be exercised in the handling of all articles of harness
+and saddlery. Saddles should not be dropped or thrown about as
+fractured arches or broken side bars may result, and the usefulness of
+collar pads is liable to be destroyed if subjected to unfair usage.</p>
+
+<p>Minor defects should be attended to at once. Stitching should be tested
+from time to time, as the life of thread is short compared with that of
+leather.</p>
+
+<p>Stirrup leathers should be exchanged occasionally or be shortened at
+the buckle end, so as to bring the wear on fresh holes.</p>
+
+<p>Girth tabs require special attention and must be renewed as the holes
+wear.</p>
+
+<p>2. The leather work of all saddlery should be kept soft and supple.
+Seats and flaps of saddles and handled parts of reins should not be
+polished. It is particularly important to keep leather girths supple
+with grease.</p>
+
+<p>3. It is rarely necessary to scrub leather work. Parts affected by
+sweat from the horse, such as inside surfaces of breast collars,
+girths, &amp;c., should be sponged after use with clean cold water, and
+then soaped.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. Leather must not be washed with soda or in very hot water, as its
+vitality is quickly affected by either; nor must it be subjected to
+heat from a fire, as this destroys its durability.</p>
+
+<p>5. All saddlery and harness should be taken to pieces periodically
+and carefully inspected. Once or twice a year certain parts, such as
+the inside of breechings, should be dubbed, the leather having first
+been moistened with a sponge, and in cold weather the dubbin should be
+warmed before use. After two or three days the residue of the dubbin
+should be removed with a dry brush or rubber.</p>
+
+<p>All leather work should be dubbed before being put away in store, and
+should be overhauled from time to time, especially in hot or damp
+climates.</p>
+
+<p>6. Ropes, web girths and whips should be scrubbed with clean cold water
+when necessary, and pipeclay should not be used on them.</p>
+
+<p>Saddle blankets, panne’s, and numnahs should be placed in the sun or
+wind to dry, and then beaten and brushed.</p>
+
+<p>7. Steel or iron work such as bits should be wiped over immediately on
+arriving in billets, stables or camp, and then rubbed with an oil rag.
+This will save much subsequent trouble if done before rust has time to form.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_88" class="f120"><b>88.</b> <i>Disposal of saddlery and harness<br>
+in harness rooms or stables.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Saddlery.</i>—The <i>breastpiece</i> is placed on the saddle
+peg, the sides hanging straight down.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>traces</i> are folded in three equal lengths, secured by the
+bearing straps, and are hung by the hooks to the Ds on the breastpiece.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>bridle</i> should be hung up complete, as on the horse’s head,
+the curb hooked over the front of the bit.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>head rope</i> is hung up as on the horse.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>saddle</i> is placed on the peg cantle outwards, with the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</span>
+surcingle and girth buckled as if on the horse. The stirrups hang at
+riding length inside the backband of the head collar.</p>
+
+<p><i>Nose bags</i> if not in use are kept with the other articles of
+horse kit.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Harness.</i>—The <i>saddles</i> are hung from the pegs, the
+blankets being placed over the pegs and under the breast collars.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>breast collar</i> is hung on the harness peg by the padded neck
+strap under the blanket. In the case of lead harness the short traces
+are hooked to the end link of the chains attached to the tugs and hang
+straight down. The traces are hung by hooking the Ds on to small pegs
+on each side of the harness peg.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>bridle</i> is hung on the harness peg as if on the horse’s
+head—the reins should hang down from the bit.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>head rope</i> is hung up as on the horse.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>breeching</i> is hung under the padded neck strap.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>legging</i> is hung on the same peg as the inside trace of the
+riding set, by the top strap, which is buckled; the other straps are
+left unbuckled ready to put on.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>whip</i> is hung by the hand loop on the same peg as the inside
+trace of the hand set of harness.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_89" class="f120"><b>89.</b> <i>Disposal of saddlery<br>
+and harness in bivouac.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Saddlery.</i>—The <i>saddle</i> complete is placed on the ground
+resting on the pommel; the stirrup irons are hooked on the points of
+the side bars.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>bridle</i> is placed with the head piece of the bit on the side
+bars.</p>
+
+<p>The whole is wrapped in the harness wrapper.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Harness.</i>—<i>Harness and saddlery</i> are to be laid down
+one yard in rear of the line of heel pegs. The <i>breast collar</i> is
+placed on its lower edge in a circle. The <i>breeching</i> is coiled
+round it. The traces are round the breeching. The <i>saddle</i> is
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</span>
+placed on top, seat uppermost, the bottom of the flaps being turned
+up inwards—this keeps the breast collar from being crushed when the
+harness is tied up.</p>
+
+<p>The whole of the head gear is laid across the top of the seat.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>legging</i> is placed inside the breast collar under the saddle
+of the riding set. The <i>whip</i> is placed inside the breast collar
+of the hand set. The whole is wrapped in the harness wrapper.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Care of Wagons.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_90" class="f120"><b>90.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also Handbooks of the various guns.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>1. It is only by giving constant attention to the vehicles that
+transport service can be efficient.</p>
+
+<p>The axles and the pipe-boxes of wheels should be frequently greased,
+and should be kept free of dust, grit and old grease which contains
+small particles of metal and sand, that wear down the surrounding parts.</p>
+
+<p>2. To grease the axle, remove the wheel and carefully clean the axle
+and inside of the pipe-box. Then smear the inside of the pipe-box and
+the outside of the axle with fresh grease and replace the wheel.</p>
+
+<p>3. Wheels, showing too much play on the axletree arm, should have
+a leather or steel washer placed on the arm at the outer end of the
+pipe-box, between it and the linch-pin washer.</p>
+
+<p>In very dry climates it may be necessary at times to keep the wheels
+constantly wetted to prevent the woodwork warping, cracking and
+shrinking.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Loading a Wagon or Cart.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_91" class="f120"><b>91.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Wagons.</i>—The battery commander should have an inventory of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</span>
+what each wagon is to carry made out the day previous to a march,
+unless they are G.S. wagons horsed and loaded according to the official
+tables in the Field Service Manual. Bulk as well as weight must be
+taken into consideration in assessing the loads, this is necessary to
+secure good packing and efficient transport service. The weights of the
+various articles are given in the Field Service Manual.</p>
+
+<p>The load which is to go in each wagon should be placed beside it before
+the packing begins. An experienced man should then get up into the
+wagon and name the articles in the order in which he wishes them to be
+handed up to him. When the packing is complete the tarpaulin should be
+roped carefully over the wagon to ensure against wet and loss.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Loading a two-wheeled cart.</i>—Care should be taken that the
+cart when loaded is properly balanced. There should be a weight of
+about 10 lbs. on the tugs. If the load is placed too far forward, the
+off horse is unnecessarily weighted: if too far back, draught becomes
+more difficult.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Special Instructions for<br> Mountain Artillery.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_92" class="f120"><b>92.</b> <i>Position of driver.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On parade the driver stands to attention on the near side of his
+mule, holding the loop of the rein in his left hand, which should hang
+down by his side; while with the right hand he takes hold of the double
+rein about 6 inches behind the mule’s jaw, keeping the animal’s head in
+its natural position.</p>
+
+<p>“<span class="smcap">Stand at Ease.</span>”—Keeping both legs
+straight, carry the left foot about one foot-length to the left as at
+dismounted drill, and slide the right hand down the rein to the full
+extent of the arm.</p>
+
+<p>“<span class="smcap">March.</span>”—Every driver will at once step
+off as at dismounted drill, causing the mule to start off steadily at
+the same time by a gentle feeling of the leading rein. He will march
+abreast of his mule, and should rarely pull at the leading rein, as
+mules move best with a loose rein and require a light hand.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</span></p>
+
+<p>“<span class="smcap">Halt.</span>”—The driver halts as at dismounted
+drill, coming to the position of attention and halting the mule at the
+same time by a gentle pressure on the leading rein. Drivers should be
+taught to lead their mules from either side.</p>
+
+<p>To salute when passing an officer, a driver should look towards him
+without moving his hand or altering his position.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_93" class="f120"><b>93.</b> <i>Fitting saddlery of ordnance mules.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The saddle should be placed in the middle of the mule’s back so
+as to interfere as little as possible with its free action. The two
+pannels should contain the same quantity of stuffing, should feel
+elastic, and have an even bearing on the back and sides throughout. It
+is best to have a distinct channel between the pannels along the top of
+the mule’s back; the broader the channel the better.</p>
+
+<p>The pannels should be so fitted that the saddle rides level along the
+mule’s back as low as possible. They must not pinch the withers, nor
+touch the backbone, and should allow of at least three fingers being
+inserted in front and rear of the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Girths.</i>—Should be crossed beneath the mule, and should be
+drawn slightly tighter than with riding saddles, but should be loose
+enough to allow one finger to be inserted between them and the mule’s
+body when the load is on.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Breast-piece and breeching.</i>—Should hang from their
+supporting straps as horizontally as possible at such a height as will
+not impede the free action of the limbs or breathing.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Crupper.</i>—Should not be tighter than is necessary to keep the
+saddle from shifting forward, and should be loose enough to admit the
+breadth of the hand between it and the mule’s croup. Care must be taken
+that none of the mule’s hair remains between it and its dock. The dock
+of the crupper must at all times be kept very soft and pliable.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Bits</i>, <i>head collar</i>, and <i>curb chain</i> as for horses.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</span></p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Leading rein.</i>—To be fastened to both rings of bridoon bit.
+The Ts of the rein passed through from inside to outside, the reins
+double in the driver’s right hand, loop of rein in left hand.</p>
+
+<p>The following method of attaching the rein to the bridoon bit may be
+adopted to gain more control over restive mules and to prevent mules
+stampeding when under fire, etc.:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;i. Pass one of the Ts of the rein through the
+near ring of the bit from inside to out.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">ii. Pass the other T through the off ring of the
+bit from outside to in and then through the near ring from inside to
+out.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>The rein can now be used in the ordinary way; when, however, it is
+required to restrain a restive mule, or it is apprehended that mules
+may be frightened by coming under fire or otherwise, pull the T of the
+near rein, thus pulling the rein through the near ring of the bit, pass
+the loop of the rein in round the mule’s nose and haul fairly taut. The
+rein is now single in the driver’s hand, and when hauled on, compresses
+the mule’s nose and stops him.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_94" class="f120"><b>94.</b> <i>Training young mules.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Young mules are naturally timid and easily startled, but they are,
+as a rule, docile and easily broken in, if treated with great kindness
+and patience. Rough treatment of any kind must be avoided as likely
+to prove fatal to the successful training of the mule. Men must be
+carefully selected to break remount mules, and gunners will assist, if
+the drivers are natives, so as to accustom the mules to be handled by
+Europeans.</p>
+
+<p>2. Saddling must be done at first with great caution, the saddle only
+being placed gently on the mule’s back and moved about quietly so as to
+accustom the animal to the feel of it before putting on the girths. In
+girthing up care must be taken not to draw the girths so tight as to
+cause any uneasiness to the mule, which will then be walked about and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</span>
+allowed to get used to the saddle before the other harness is gradually
+added. With the crupper especially great patience must be exercised, as
+it is likely at first to upset a timid mule.</p>
+
+<p>3. A mule should be thoroughly accustomed to walking about with the
+saddle and harness before it is tried under a load. It is as well
+to start training a mule to carry loads by using two bags of sand
+or earth, weighing 80 lbs. each, and when it walks about with these
+quietly the training can be completed by substituting other loads. A
+young mule should always be allowed to become familiar with the sight
+of a load before this is tried on the saddle.</p>
+
+<p>4. Young mules should accompany the battery on all hill parades from
+the first to accustom them to difficult ground and train their head and
+wind for hill work. They should be barebacked at first and when broken
+to the saddle should be saddled for parade.</p>
+
+<p>5. They should not be loaded on the hillside till five years old, and
+at first the load should be a light one and only carried for a short
+distance; it should be gradually increased up to the full weight which
+the mule will be required to carry.</p>
+
+<p>6. Finally, young mules must be trained to jump small ditches and
+similar obstacles without hesitation, and, at the end of the training,
+this should be done with a load on. In leaping a mule, the rein must
+always be left loose and a whip should not be used.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_95" class="f120"><b>95.</b> <i>Leading mules.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On good ground pack animals should always move closed up to their
+proper distance, but in going up or down hill and in crossing difficult
+ground the drivers will increase their distance and regulate their pace
+as circumstances may require. Should any mules appear distressed, they
+should be halted to enable them to recover their breath.</p>
+
+<p>2. The driver should always give the mule a long rein when moving over
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</span>
+rough or hilly country; this is quickly effected by the driver letting
+go the rein with the right hand, seizing the T-piece from the outside
+of the ring of the bit and pulling the rein through. In difficult
+ground the gunners will assist by steadying the loads and helping the
+mules along. It may even be necessary to unload the mules and carry the
+loads over an obstacle by hand. It is frequently advisable to attach
+drag ropes to top loads when descending steep places.</p>
+
+<p>For ascents the driver must tighten the breastpiece and loosen the
+breeching of his mule, and for descents he will tighten the breeching
+and loosen the breastpiece. This can be quickly done without halting by
+means of the chain attachments of the breastpiece and breeching.</p>
+
+<p>3. When a halt is ordered, any driver who has lost ground will continue
+to move with his mule until he has recovered his proper distance.
+Closing up to recover distance must be done steadily and by a gradual
+increase of pace, not by rushing. Trotting should not be allowed except
+by order.</p>
+
+<p>When halting on hill roads, mules should be turned to stand level
+across the roads with their heads outwards from the hillside. If the
+width of the road does not admit of this, the drivers must stand to
+the head of their mules and keep them from turning, so as to avoid
+accidents.</p>
+
+<p>4. It will happen sometimes on narrow roads that the driver must
+march in front of his mule. When this is the case, he must resume his
+position beside the mule and close up again to his proper distance as
+soon as the road widens sufficiently.</p>
+
+<p>5. If a load becomes disarranged, the driver will fall out to the most
+convenient flank as soon as he can find room on the road, and when the
+load has been readjusted, he will, as soon as practicable, regain his
+place in column.</p>
+
+<p>When a laden mule falls, its head should be held down to prevent it
+struggling, and the load must be removed before the mule is allowed
+to get up. In very difficult or dangerous ground the saddle should be
+removed as well as the load.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IV.<br><span class="h_subtitle">GUNNERY.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_96" class="f120"><b>96.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The subjects dealt with in this chapter are only divided into
+sections for purposes of reference. The contents of many of the
+sections are so closely connected that portions of several of them must
+often be included in one lecture. In addition it must be realized that
+it is impossible to deal fully within the limits of a manual with the
+various subjects mentioned. All that is attempted is to give a brief
+outline of the principles of modern gunnery.</p>
+
+<p>2. A description of the various patterns of ordnance used in the field,
+their stores and drill will be found in the respective handbooks; while
+for further information of a more technical nature reference should
+be made to the “Text Book of Gunnery,” the “Treatise on Ammunition,”
+and the “Treatise on Service Explosives.” Instructors should endeavour
+to use the simplest language; but, as a large number of more or less
+technical terms must be employed, they must take care that their
+meaning is clear.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_97" class="f120"><b>97.</b> <i>Gunnery terms.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Angle of Departure.</i>—The angle which the line of departure makes
+with the horizontal plane, in other words, the quadrant angle plus the
+jump. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 5, Plate II</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Angle of Descent.</i>—The angle which the trajectory makes with the
+line of sight at the point of their second intersection.</p>
+
+<p><i>Angle of Incidence.</i>—The angle which the trajectory makes with
+the normal to the surface struck.</p>
+
+<p><i>Angle of Elevation.</i>—The angle which the line of sight makes
+with the axis of the gun. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 2, Plate II</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Angle of Sight.</i>—The angle which the line of sight makes with
+the horizontal plane. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 3, Plate II</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Axis of the Gun.</i>—A line passing down the centre of the bore.
+(<a href="#PLATE_1"><i>See</i> A B, Plate I</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Axis of the Trunnions.</i>—A line passing through the centre of the
+trunnions. (<a href="#PLATE_1"><i>See</i> C D, Plate I</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Battery Angle.</i>—The angle formed at the battery by imaginary
+lines drawn to the target and the observing station.</p>
+
+<p><i>Calibre.</i>—The diameter of the bore in inches measured across the
+lands.</p>
+
+<p><i>Drift.</i>—The constant deflection of the shell due to the rotation
+imparted by the rifling. (<a href="#PLATE_3"><i>See</i> A, Plate III</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Direct Laying.</i>—When the gun is laid by looking over or through
+the sights at the target.</p>
+
+<p><i>Indirect Laying.</i>—When the gun is laid for direction on an
+aiming point, or on aiming posts, the angle of sight is adjusted by
+clinometer and the elevation by the range indicator or drum. (With the
+5“ B.L. howitzer the range drum is set at the quadrant elevation.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Jump.</i>—The angle between the line of departure and the axis of
+the piece before firing. It is due to the vertical movement of the gun
+on firing, and for any gun differs according to the mounting and the
+charge used. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 6, Plate II</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Lateral Deviation.</i>—The distance of the point of impact of the
+projectile right or left of the line of fire.</p>
+
+<p><i>Line of Departure.</i>—The direction of the shell on leaving the
+muzzle. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 4, Plate II</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Line of Fire.</i>—A line joining the muzzle of the piece and the
+target.</p>
+
+<p><i>Line of Sight.</i>—A straight line passing through the sights and
+the point aimed at. (<a href="#PLATE_3"><i>See</i> E F, Plate III</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Muzzle Velocity</i>—The velocity in feet per second with which a
+shell leaves the muzzle.</p>
+
+<p><i>Point Blank.</i>—A gun is laid point blank when the line of sight
+is parallel to its axis.</p>
+
+<p><i>Quadrant Angle.</i>—The angle which the axis of the piece makes
+with the horizontal plane. It is termed quadrant elevation or
+depression according as the gun is laid above or below the horizontal
+plane. (<a href="#PLATE_2"><i>See</i> 1, Plate II</a>.) The angle of elevation and the
+quadrant angle are the same when the line of sight is horizontal.</p>
+
+<p><i>Range.</i>—The distance to the second intersection of the
+trajectory with the line of sight.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ranging.</i>—Ranging is the process of finding the elevation, fuze,
+and line.</p>
+
+<p><i>Remaining Velocity.</i>—The velocity of a shell at any given point
+of its trajectory.</p>
+
+<p><i>Striking Velocity.</i>—The velocity of a shell at the point of
+impact.</p>
+
+<p><i>Trajectory.</i>—The curve described by the shell in its flight.
+(<a href="#PLATE_3"><i>See</i> D F, Plate III</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_98" class="f120"><b>98.</b> <i>Natures of artillery fire.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<a href="#FIG_11"><i>See</i> Fig. 11</a>.)</p>
+
+<p><i>High Angle Fire.</i>—Fire from guns and howitzers at all angles of
+elevation exceeding 25 degrees. But in coast defence the term “High
+Angle Fire” is used in connection with guns of mountings specially
+designed for extreme angles of elevation laid by means of instruments
+specially provided.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="PLATE_1" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Plate I.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_1.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="248" >
+    <hr class="r60">
+    <p id="PLATE_2" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Plate II.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_2.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="497" >
+    <hr class="r60">
+    <p id="PLATE_3" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Plate III.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_3.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="225" >
+    <hr class="r60">
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_11" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 11.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_11.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="462" >
+</div>
+
+<p><i>Enfilade Fire.</i>—Fire which sweeps a line of troops or defences
+from a flank.</p>
+
+<p><i>Frontal Fire.</i>—When the line of fire is perpendicular to the
+front of the target.</p>
+
+<p><i>Oblique Fire.</i>—When the line of fire is inclined to the front of
+the target.</p>
+
+<p><i>Reverse Fire.</i>—When the rear instead of the front of the target
+is fired at.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_99" class="f120"><b>99.</b> <i>Gunnery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Gunnery is the science of directing a projectile so that it will
+strike a given object.</p>
+
+<p>2. A gun serves two purposes. First to confine the gases of the charge
+so as to allow them to act upon the base of the shell; and second to
+give the shell the proper initial direction. In order to maintain the
+shell in its proper direction after it leaves the bore of the gun, some
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</span>
+means of making it spin or rotate rapidly is necessary; since it is a
+well-known fact that any rapidly-rotating body tries to keep the same
+direction in which it was pointed when first made to spin. Rifling
+which consists in a number of grooves cut down the bore, leaving
+raised ribs called “<i>lands</i>” between them, is the means employed
+in modern guns, in combination with a soft copper band called a
+“<i>driving band</i>” secured to the shell near its base. The result
+of this combination is that when the gun is fired the shell is forced
+along the bore, but, the diameter of the driving band being bigger than
+that of the bore, the lands cut into the copper of which it is made and
+the shell is consequently compelled to follow their course and rotate.
+Without this spin an elongated shell would soon lose its velocity and
+accuracy of direction and become as unreliable in its flight as round
+shot were in the days of smooth bore guns.</p>
+
+<p>3. By the use of elongated shell the following additional advantages
+besides accuracy of direction are obtained:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp; i. A longer and therefore heavier shell
+can be fired from a field gun than would be possible if the shell had
+to be round (spherical). Consequently there is more room in the shell
+for explosive or bullets.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;ii. Greater range and greater power at
+a given range are obtained, because there is a smaller surface,
+as compared with a round shot of the same weight, offered to the
+resistance of the air.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">iii. By varying the length different kinds of
+shell for the same gun can be brought to the same weight and thus
+complications in range tables can be avoided. If necessary a specially
+heavy projectile can be used.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;iv. The flight of the shell being regular,
+allowance can be made for any deviation observed and thus increased
+accuracy may be obtained.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_100" class="f120"><b>100.</b> <i>Rifling.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The “<i>system of rifling</i>” is the term applied to the method
+adopted in any particular type of rifled gun for giving rotation to the
+shell.</p>
+
+<p>2. The aim of each system is to produce accuracy of fire, but it is
+also essential that it should be simple, that it should not seriously
+weaken the durability of the gun, and that the shell should not be
+liable to jam in loading or firing. The “<i>twist of rifling</i>” by
+which is meant the distance measured in calibres, in which the grooves
+make one complete circuit of the bore, may be uniform, increasing or a
+combination of the two.</p>
+
+<p>3. In the case of a uniform twist the distance in which the grooves
+make a complete circuit of the bore is the same wherever measured,
+but with an increasing twist the distance decreases as the muzzle is
+approached.</p>
+
+<p>With a uniform twist the shell is compelled to rotate rapidly as soon
+as it begins to move, and thus a severe strain is caused both to the
+gun and shell.</p>
+
+<p>With an increasing twist, this rotation is imparted more gradually,
+thus relieving the strain, but at the same time causing more friction,
+and consequent loss of velocity. The shell, moreover, is not so well
+centred as with a uniform twist.</p>
+
+<p>4. In designing a gun the twist has to be made to suit the shell which
+it is desired to employ, and its intended velocity. Generally speaking,
+a long shell with low velocity necessitates a rapid twist to make it
+steady in flight.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_101" class="f120"><b>101</b>. <i>Centring.</i></p>
+
+<p>It is important that the shell when it leaves the bore should be
+centred, <i>i.e.</i>, that the shell should rotate round its longer
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</span>
+axis which should coincide with the prolongation of the axis of the
+gun at the moment it leaves the bore. Should this not be the case, the
+shell becomes unsteady and noisy in its flight, and the shooting will
+be irregular.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_102" class="f120"><b>102.</b> <i>Forces acting on a shell<br>
+in the bore.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The velocity attained by a shell at the muzzle of a gun is due to
+the pressure of the gas during its passage through the bore. The more
+gradually this velocity is imparted to the shell the less will be the
+strain upon it and the gun. The object sought is to distribute, as far
+as possible, the pressure over the whole length of the bore and to
+obtain the maximum work from a given charge without undue strain on
+either gun or shell. Theoretically the last atom of the charge should
+be converted into gas as the shell leaves the muzzle.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Forces Acting on a Shell<br> During Flight.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_103" class="f120"><b>103.</b> <i>The resistance of the air.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The air consists of innumerable small particles through which a
+shell has to force its way. This produces a rapid loss of velocity; for
+instance, the velocity of a shell from the 18-pr. Q.F. gun, which at
+the muzzle is about 1,610 feet a second, is at 2,000 yards only about
+1,030 feet a second, and at 6,000 yards about 740 feet a second.</p>
+
+<p>2. The retardation due to the resistance of the air varies according to
+the weight and diameter of the shell. If, for instance, two shells of
+equal diameter, but of different weights, start with the same muzzle
+velocity, the heavier will lose its velocity more slowly and have the
+longer range, because it has the greater weight with which to overcome
+the resistance of the air. On the other hand, if two projectiles are of
+the same weight but of different diameters, the one with the smaller
+diameter will have the advantage, because it presents less surface to
+the resistance of the air.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The shape of the head also materially affects the question, for a
+shell with a blunt head is plainly not so suited for forcing its way
+through the air as one with a more pointed head. Thus the longer the
+shell (other things being equal), the greater will be its remaining
+velocity at any given range, and the greater will be its range for any
+given muzzle velocity; but other considerations limit its length, such
+as the strength of its walls, and the liability to turn over in flight.</p>
+
+<p>4. The relationship between the weight and diameter of a shell,
+represented by the expression</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_120">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">W</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">(n d²)</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="no-indent">is called the “<i>ballistic coefficient</i>” of
+the gun. The factor n includes sub-factors which vary with the density
+of the atmosphere, the shape of the head, the steadiness in flight,
+&amp;c. The greater the ballistic coefficient the less rapidly does the
+projectile lose its velocity.</p>
+
+<p>5. It has already been pointed out (<a href="#Para_99">Sec. <b>99</b></a>)
+that spin is necessary to the shell if elongated projectiles are to be used.
+The effect of the resistance of the air on a spinning shell is to deflect
+it in the same direction as the spin. With all service shell this spin
+or rotation is right handed, and consequently all shell deflect towards
+the right in the course of their flight. This deflection is called “<i>drift</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>As this rotation is definite and diminishes very slightly during the
+flight of the shell, the amount of drift can be determined for each
+nature of gun by actual experiment and compensation made for it. A
+description of the method by which this is done will be found in <a href="#Para_119">Sec. 119</a>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_104" class="f120"><b>104</b>. <i>The force of gravity.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The force of gravity is the natural attraction which causes every
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</span>
+unsupported body to fall towards the centre of the earth. Moreover, the
+longer a body is exposed to its influence the faster does it fall; thus
+a body falls,</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_110">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">About</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">16</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">feet</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">in</td>
+      <td class="tdr">the 1st</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">second</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">48</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">2nd</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">80</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">3rd</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="no-indent">that is, the total drop at the end of any given
+second of time is proportionate to the square of the time.</p>
+
+<p>Now a shell leaves the muzzle of a gun with a certain velocity, due to
+the forces which acted on it in the bore, and, if the effect of these
+forces and of the resistance of the air had alone to be taken into
+account, it would proceed in a straight line, but at a decreasing pace.</p>
+
+<p>Gravity, however, comes into play and causes the shell to fall with a
+constantly increasing velocity. Thus in <a href="#FIG_12">Fig. 12</a>,
+supposing AB is the direction in which a shell starts, the distances it
+would travel in the first three seconds of its flight, if there were no
+gravity, might be represented by AC, CE, EG. Owing to gravity, however,
+it would at the end of the 1st second have dropped to some point D; at
+the end of the 2nd second it would have dropped four times as far, to a
+point F; while at the end of the 3rd second it would have fallen nine
+times as far, to a point H.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_12" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 12.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_12.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="175" >
+</div>
+
+<p>2. The force of gravity is to some extent counterbalanced by the air,
+which acts as a cushion and tends to support a body falling through it.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</span>
+In the case of a heavy body, such as a bullet or shell, the distances
+fallen are but slightly affected by the air.</p>
+
+<p>Gravity is, however, appreciably counterbalanced by the
+“<i>planeing</i>” effect on an elongated projectile forced at
+considerable velocity through the air at high angles of elevation so
+that the value of “g” drops below 32 to about 26.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_105" class="f120"><b>105.</b> <i>Trajectory.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The result of the three forces acting on the shell—the force
+of projection tending to drive it forward in a straight line in
+prolongation of the axis, the force of gravity drawing it down from
+that line, and the resistance of the air tending to stop its progress
+in each successive instant of time, and also to deflect it to the
+right—is that it describes a curve, whether regarded from the side or
+from above. This curve is called the trajectory.
+(<a href="#FIG_12"><i>See</i> ADFHI, Fig. 12</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>2. The shell in consequence of its high velocity, and of the short
+time gravity has had to act upon it, falls at first very little, but
+this fall—and consequently the curve—increases very rapidly with the
+range; for example, at 100 yards the 18-pr. Q.F. shell if fired point
+blank would fall about 8½ inches, but at 500 yards its drop would be
+about 18¼ feet; at 1,000 yards, about 80 feet; at 2,000 yards, about
+372 feet; at 3,000 yards, about 970 feet. The greatest height attained
+by the trajectory is roughly four times the square of the time of flight.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_106" class="f120"><b>106.</b> <i>Elevation.</i></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_13" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap">Fig. 13.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_13.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="123" >
+</div>
+
+<p>1. It is evident from what has been said that a shell fired from a gun
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</span>
+at a mark, S (<a href="#FIG_13">Fig. 13</a>) will not hit that mark,
+but will strike some point, D, below it. To allow for the fall, it is
+necessary to point the axis as much above the object to be hit as the
+shell would have fallen below it if the axis had been pointed straight
+at the mark. This act of tilting the gun so as to allow for the curve
+of the trajectory, is what is meant by the expression “<i>giving
+elevation</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>2. The theory of giving elevation may be illustrated by reference to
+the flight of an 18-pr. Q.F. shell for the first 100 yards. This shell
+falls about 8½ inches below the line at which the projectile leaves the
+bore in passing over the first 100 yards of its flight. Assuming that
+S (<a href="#FIG_13">Fig. 13</a>) is 100 yards from the muzzle and that
+SD represents 8½ inches, the axis of the gun must be elevated so that,
+when produced, it would pass 8½ inches above S, viz., through F
+(<a href="#FIG_14">Fig. 14</a>), if an object at S is to be hit.</p>
+
+<p>3. The method of giving elevation to the gun to enable the shell to
+reach a certain distance called the “<i>range</i>” should then be
+explained, and it should be shown how the elevation can be marked in
+yards on the range drum, tangent sight or clinometer.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_14" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 14.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_14.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="130" >
+</div>
+
+<p>4. The principle of the sighting can be shown by means of a rifle
+barrel placed on a tripod a few yards from a blackboard. If then aim be
+taken at some mark on the board with the leaf of the sight upright, and
+set to (say) 1,000 yards; and subsequently, without moving the barrel,
+the bore be looked through, it will be seen that the axis produced
+meets the blackboard considerably above the mark aimed at.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. The effect on the shooting of the gun, if the wheels are not level,
+can be explained by similar means. A stick to represent the trunnions
+of the gun should be fastened across the barrel. It can then be shown
+that if the wheels of a gun are not level, or in other words if the
+axis of the trunnions is not horizontal, the gun (barrel) will not
+elevate in a vertical plane; the muzzle will move towards the lower
+side and the breech towards the higher, thus causing the shell to move
+towards the lower wheel.</p>
+
+<div class="figleft">
+    <p id="FIG_15" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 15.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_15.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="447" >
+</div>
+
+<p>6. The effect on the sight, if the axis of the trunnions is not level,
+can also be demonstrated. The more the sight is tilted over to one side
+the less will the elevation become and the more will the gun point to
+the right or left of the target, according to the way the sight is
+inclined. In these circumstances the shell, instead of hitting the
+target, will fall below it and to one side. The greater the elevation
+on the sight and the more it is inclined, the greater will be the
+resulting error.</p>
+
+<p>To make this clear, a vertical line, AB (<a href="#FIG_15">Fig. 15</a>), may be
+drawn on the blackboard, with A as a spot to aim at. The recruit should then be
+directed to aim at this spot with the sight, which must be perfectly
+upright, set at 1,000 yards, and afterwards to look through the rifle
+barrel, his attention being drawn to the fact that the axis cuts the
+vertical line at C above the spot aimed at. He should then be made
+to aim at the same spot with the same sight, <i>but inclined to one
+side</i>, and to look through the barrel again, when he will see
+that the axis, instead of being directed upon C as before, is now
+directed low, and to that side to which the sight is inclined, as at
+D; consequently as the trajectory always conforms to the movement of
+the axis, the bullet, instead of hitting the mark, would strike as much
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</span>
+below D as A is below C. Draw a new vertical line through D and measure
+off on it a distance equal to CA; this will give the spot E, which the
+bullet would hit. From A draw a horizontal line AF to the new vertical
+line DF, then AF will show the error of direction, and FE the loss of
+elevation. The latter may practically be neglected; and a rule is given
+in Sec. <b>119</b> for correcting the former, when the small size of
+the target renders it necessary.</p>
+
+<p>If it can be arranged it is better to show this with a gun, but a rifle
+barrel is usually more convenient.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_107" class="f120 spa2"><b>107.</b> <i>Causes affecting the accuracy of shooting.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. With the exception of the effect of the difference of level of
+wheels, the various forces which act on a projectile and their effects
+on its flight are calculated and compensated for before the gun is
+issued for service.</p>
+
+<p>They will not, therefore, come under the observation of the practical
+gunner; but there are other causes affecting the accuracy of shooting
+about which he must have a knowledge.</p>
+
+<p>These are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Varying effect of the charge due to:—</li>
+<li class="isub5">Incorrect weighing.</li>
+<li class="isub5">Variation in strength.</li>
+<li class="isub5">State of the atmosphere.</li>
+<li class="isub5">Variation in space occupied by the cartridge</li>
+<li class="isub7">in the bore (<i>Loading density</i>).</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Force and direction of wind.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Trail not being well supported.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. If the shell is not rammed home to the same spot each round, the
+amount of space available for the cartridge will vary and this will
+cause the shooting to be irregular. The smaller the space left for the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</span>
+cartridge the greater will be the range, but the greater also becomes
+the pressure of the gas in the chamber.</p>
+
+<p>The possibility of this occurring in the case of Q.F. guns is prevented
+if fixed ammunition is used.</p>
+
+<p>3. Wind has considerable effect on the range and direction of the
+shell. According to its direction it may increase or reduce the range,
+or drive the shell to right or left. If gusty, and of great force, the
+shooting will be irregular, especially at long ranges. This becomes of
+importance only when the target is a narrow one.</p>
+
+<p>4. Unless the trail rests on firm level ground, and is similarly
+supported during successive rounds, the shooting will be irregular,
+on account of the variation of the jump. A carriage allowing of axial
+recoil has practically no jump.</p>
+
+<p>5. It is important that the effect which the above conditions may have
+on the shooting should be fully understood, in order that the necessity
+of the process called “ranging”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_6_6" href="#Footnote_6_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a>
+may be realized. By means of this process the total effect of these
+causes is found out and the sight set so as to counterbalance them.
+(<a href="#Para_103"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>103</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<h3>AMMUNITION.</h3>
+
+<p id="Para_108" class="f120"><b>108.</b> <i>Cordite.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> Treatise on Service Explosives.)</p>
+
+<p>1. Cordite is the smokeless explosive adopted for propulsive purposes.</p>
+
+<p>2. Cordite consists of nitro-glycerine, gun cotton and mineral jelly,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</span>
+worked into a dough and forced through a die, from which it comes
+out in long cords. Its composition for small arms and all natures of
+ordnance is the same, the required rate of combustion being obtained by
+varying the diameter of the cord. The smaller the diameter the quicker
+the rate of burning.</p>
+
+<p>3. The cordite in general use for modern guns is termed “Cordite MD”
+(modified) when in sticks or cords, “Cordite MDT” when in tubes, in
+order to distinguish it from the earlier pattern of cordite which was
+found to wear out the rifling of the gun too quickly. Cordite Mk. I is
+still used in India and for the older patterns of guns and howitzers.</p>
+
+<p>4. Tubular cordite is distinguished by two numbers representing in
+hundredths of an inch the mean external and internal diameters of
+the finished article. Other cordite is distinguished by a number
+representing in hundredths of an inch the diameter of the die through
+which it was pressed in the course of manufacture.</p>
+
+<p>5. When any particular size is made to more than one length, the length
+will be included, <i>e.g.</i>:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">Cordite, Size—, length 12-inch.</li>
+<li class="isub4">Cordite, Size—, on drums.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>6. Cordite will keep in all climates, but it is laid down that the
+temperature of magazines in which cordite is stored should not
+habitually exceed 80° F. or fall below 45° F.</p>
+
+<p>The nitro-glycerine in cordite freezes at about 40° F., and if frozen
+cordite is suddenly thawed it is liable to “sweat.” It should not be
+handled till the nitro-glycerine has been reabsorbed.</p>
+
+<p>7. The ballistic properties of cordite are affected by heat; the
+higher the temperature of a charge the greater the muzzle velocity and
+pressure.</p>
+
+<p>8. Cordite charges are somewhat difficult to ignite, so that a priming
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</span>
+of guncotton yarn, fine grain gunpowder, or some other easily-lighted
+substance is necessary to assist the flame from the cap or tube.</p>
+
+<p>9. Cordite is safe to handle and store. It is not affected by damp or
+water; this does not apply, of course, to the gunpowder priming. If
+wetted with fresh, water a cordite charge may be fired when dried.
+Before returning a wetted charge to store it should be thoroughly dried
+in a ventilated building. Cordite wetted with sea water should be well
+washed in fresh water and dried before repacking.</p>
+
+<p>10. In some cases, after firing cordite charges to windward, a flame
+issues from the breech when it is opened. This is not of sufficient
+importance to require, in the case of field guns, any special
+precautions being taken.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_109" class="f120"><b>109.</b> <i>Lyddite shell.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Lyddite is the high explosive used for filling common shells.</p>
+
+<p>It consists of picric acid, melted and poured into the shell, where it
+solidifies. In order to detonate the charge the shell are primed with
+exploders containing picric powder. Complete detonation of a lyddite
+shell may be assumed to have occurred when the smoke is black and not
+tinged with yellow, when there is no picric acid colouring the crater
+formed by the burst, and when the fragments of the forged steel shell
+present a torn and jagged appearance.</p>
+
+<p>2. Shell filled with lyddite are effective against <i>matériel</i> and
+artificial cover. They are not intended nor are they suitable for use
+against personnel in the open owing to the limited numbers of pieces
+into which they break up and to the very local effect caused by their
+explosion.</p>
+
+<p>Lyddite shell are carried with howitzer, heavy batteries and mountain
+batteries armed with 2·75“ B.L. equipment.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_110" class="f120"><b>110.</b> <i>Shrapnel shell.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Shrapnel shell are hollow shell containing as many bullets as
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</span>
+possible together with a bursting charge sufficient to open the shell,
+release the bullets, and give enough smoke to allow the burst to be
+observed. They are provided with T. and P. fuzes, thus making it
+possible to burst them, either on graze (percussion action) or at some
+selected point of their trajectory (time action).</p>
+
+<p>In the latter case each bullet as soon as it is free follows a
+trajectory of its own, according to its position in the shell, to the
+direction and velocity given to it by the bursting charge and by the
+centrifugal force imparted by the rotation of the shell. Regarded as a
+whole, however, the bullets form a cone the apex of which is located at
+the spot where the shell bursts. This cone is called the “<i>cone of
+dispersion</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>2. If the height of burst is normal, the body of the shell which does
+not as a rule break up has a trajectory which corresponds approximately
+to, but is always lower than, that which the shell would have described
+if it had not burst.</p>
+
+<p>3. The effect of an individual shrapnel depends upon:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; i. The number of bullets.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;ii. The energy of the bullets on impact.</li>
+<li class="isub4">iii. The spread of the bullets.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;iv. The size of the target.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; v. The curve of the trajectory, or the angle of descent.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>4. The number of the bullets is very closely connected with the weight
+and construction of the shrapnel, and also depends upon the weight and
+specific gravity of the bullets.</p>
+
+<p>The greater the weight of the shell, the greater under similar
+conditions will naturally be the weight and also the number of the
+bullets. The weight of the total content of bullets increases, however,
+more rapidly than the weight of the shell, so that of two shells
+constructed on the same principles, the heavier contains more bullets
+in proportion to its weight than the lighter. Thus for example, the
+13-pr. Q.F. shell which has a weight of 12½ pounds contains 236 bullets
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</span>
+of 41 to the pound, while the 18-pr. Q.F. has a weight of 18½ pounds
+and contains 375 bullets.</p>
+
+<p>5. A very small energy is required to put living targets out of action.
+According to experiments it is considered that a striking energy of 60
+foot-lbs. is sufficient; which means that a bullet of 41 to the pound
+would require a striking velocity of about 400 foot-seconds.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_7_7" href="#Footnote_7_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a></p>
+
+<p>The velocity on impact of shrapnel bullets depends upon their velocity
+at the point of burst, their weight and upon the distance they travel
+after burst. The latter is of the more importance, since the light
+shrapnel bullets fall off very much in velocity owing to the resistance
+of the air.</p>
+
+<p>6. In shrapnel shell with base bursters the spread of the bullets is
+principally caused by the rotation of the shell. In the 13-pr. and
+18-pr. shell, however, the central tube is filled with powder, which
+tends to increase the angle of opening.</p>
+
+<p>It is difficult to measure this angle accurately; but its tendency is
+to increase as the range increases. In estimating the front covered by
+the spread of the bullets, it may be taken as about 35 per cent. of the
+distance burst short.</p>
+
+<p>7. The effect of the shrapnel depends largely on the nature of the
+target and the position of the burst. As the distance of the burst
+short of the target increases, the density of the hits diminishes,
+and theoretically this distance should be regulated according to the
+surface presented by the target. The normal height of burst of 13 and
+18-pr. Q.F. shrapnel is about 10 minutes above the line of sight at all
+ranges. In the case of the 15-pr. B.L.C. and 15-pr. Q.F. this height is
+12½ minutes, and in the case of 4·5-inch howitzers about 20 minutes, of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</span>
+5-inch howitzers 30 minutes, and in the case of the 60-pr. B.L. and
+4·7-inch Q.F. about 15 minutes. If the target be of the nature of a
+column, a lower burst must be obtained.</p>
+
+<p>8. The curve of the trajectory diminishes the depth of the forward
+effect of the shrapnel. The flatter the trajectory the greater the
+depth of effect. On the other hand there is little searching effect
+on troops behind cover, and for this reason the shrapnel of howitzers
+fired at high angles of elevation are particularly effective, although
+the ground covered by their cone of dispersion is small.</p>
+
+<p>9. Shrapnel shell is the principal field artillery projectile, and is
+carried for most natures of field artillery.</p>
+
+<p>10. <i>Percussion shrapnel.</i>—Percussion shrapnel is used for
+ranging, and in the case of the 18-pr. Q.F. has given excellent results
+at targets placed behind a brick wall 24 inches thick. It may therefore
+be considered that the fire of percussion shrapnel will be effective
+against troops defending any ordinary buildings.</p>
+
+<p>Good effect has also been obtained with it against guns and personnel
+behind shields when direct hits are obtained.</p>
+
+<p>11. The action of percussion shrapnel differs from that of time
+shrapnel, for the shell opens after graze, having an ascending angle,
+and a velocity considerably lessened by the retardation on graze. Its
+effect depends largely on the nature of the ground at the point of
+impact; in soft or marshy soil the shell are smothered and results are
+usually poor.</p>
+
+<p>12. Percussion shrapnel, even at short ranges, must be burst very
+close to the foot of the target to be effective, otherwise the cone
+of dispersion passes over it, and descends in a shower some 250 yards
+beyond graze: consequently, a small error in range is a matter of great
+consequence.</p>
+
+<p>13. <i>Time shrapnel.</i>—Time shrapnel is used against living
+targets, against aircraft and balloons, and for ranging.</p>
+
+<p>14. The best effect from time shrapnel fire is obtained when the
+trajectory passes through or close to the target, and the position of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</span>
+the mean point of burst should be as close as possible to the target
+without entailing an undue proportion of grazes. To attain this
+“ranging” must be carried out till the correct range and length of fuze
+are determined. (<a href="#Para_207"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>207</b> <i>et seq.</i></a>)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_111" class="f120"><b>111.</b> <i>Star shell.</i></p>
+
+<p>Star shell are carried by mountain artillery. They contain a number of
+stars and are fired with T. fuzes. When the shell bursts these stars
+are ignited and illuminate the foreground.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_112" class="f120"><b>112.</b> <i>Time and percussion fuzes.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See</i> Handbooks for description of various fuzes.)</p>
+
+<p>1. Fuzes manufactured under varying atmospheric conditions have
+variable rates of burning; care should, therefore, be taken in packing
+limbers and wagons that fuzes of the same thousand should be as far as
+possible together, so as to obtain uniformity of results.</p>
+
+<p>2. The rate of burning of a time and percussion fuze is influenced
+by the climate in which it has been kept, and the pressure of the
+atmosphere.</p>
+
+<p>3. Fuzes also burn longer as the height above the sea level increases,
+that is, as the height of the barometer decreases. For each fall of 1
+inch in the barometer (corresponding to about 1,000 feet in height) the
+time of burning increases by <span class="fs_120">¹/₃₀</span>.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_8_8" href="#Footnote_8_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a></p>
+
+<p>4. The <i>mean error</i> in the time of burning of the No. 80 time and
+percussion fuze in use with the 18-pr. Q.F. gun may be taken as about
+·14 seconds.</p>
+
+<p>This error represents a distance of 48 yards at 2,000 yards range, and
+this distance multiplied by 1·69 (= 81) gives the length of the zone
+which will contain 50 per cent. of the bursts. If 10 per cent. of the
+bursts are on graze, the distance of the mean point of burst from the
+target should be equal to half the length of the 80 per cent. zone,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</span>
+since 10 per cent. must be taken off the other end in order to keep the
+mean point of burst in the same place. The 80 per cent. zone is equal
+to the 50 per cent. zone × 1·90, <i>i.e.</i>, 81 × 1·90 = 154. Thus at
+2,000 yards, the mean point of burst should be approximately 80 yards
+short, and at 5,000 yards 55 yards short. Though with the 13-pr. Q.F.
+the error of the fuze is rather greater than with the 18-pr. Q.F., the
+same data may be accepted. A larger percentage of grazes must, however,
+be expected.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_113" class="f120"><b>113.</b> <i>Fuze indicator.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The object of the fuze indicator is to give the correct fuze setting
+for effective burst at any range, when once the instrument has been
+adjusted for <i>one</i> range.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Theory.</i>—When the graduation 150 on the corrector scale
+is opposite the arrow on the fuze scale slider, the length of fuze
+opposite each range is that which will give “<i>an effective point of
+burst</i>” under normal conditions. It will be noted that any corrector
+setting found suitable with any particular range will be approximately
+correct for all ranges under like conditions.</p>
+
+<p>To arrive at this result the indicator has to be graduated on the same
+principle as a “slide rule.” The fuze scale is graduated in such a way
+that the linear spaces occupied are proportional to the logarithms
+of the times of flight. The yard scale is similarly graduated. This
+explains how in the table in para. 5 below an alteration of corrector
+makes a proportional correction at various ranges and not an equal
+correction throughout.</p>
+
+<p>3. In the case of the 18-pr. Q.F. the effective points of burst are
+taken to be as follows:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_110">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards<span class="ws2">&nbsp;</span></td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">80</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">short.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">70</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">60</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 5,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">55</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 6,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</span>
+These distances represent approximately an angular height of 10 minutes
+at all ranges.</p>
+
+<p>The corrector settings likely to give effective points of burst at
+various altitudes are with the bar indicator as follows:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_110">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="4">At sea level, or with barometer</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">30</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Corrector</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">150.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 1,000 ft.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">altitude</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">or with</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">barometer</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">29</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">144.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">28</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">138.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">27</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">132.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">26</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">126.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>4. Alterations in the barometer will affect the corrector setting, the
+normal being when the barometer stands at 30. A fall in the barometer
+necessitates a decrease, and a rise in the barometer an increase in the
+corrector setting.</p>
+
+<p>5. Different corrector settings give different heights of burst. To
+raise the point of burst the corrector settings have to be shortened,
+and to lower the point of burst the corrector settings have to be
+lengthened. The amount of the alteration in the corrector settings
+depends upon the range and the amount that it is desired to alter the
+point of burst.</p>
+
+<p>By altering the corrector setting from 150 to 140, the fuzes may be
+expected to burst as follows:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_110">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">range</td>
+      <td class="tdr">70</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">shorter.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">100</td>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="2">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">125</td>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="2">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 5,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">150</td>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="2">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At 6,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">175</td>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="2">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>It will be seen, therefore, that even smaller alterations than 5 in the
+corrector settings may be made at long and distant ranges, when it is
+desired to alter the point of burst of shell already bursting in the
+air. (<a href="#Para_227"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>227</b> Examples</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</span></p>
+
+<p>6. Comparing the first and third of the above tables it will be seen
+that 150 corrector at 2,000 yards gives bursts approximately 80 yards
+short and that an increase or decrease of 10 in the corrector varies
+the burst 70 yards. Consequently if it is desired to bring the burst on
+to the line of sight (as in time shrapnel ranging), the corrector must
+be increased by an amount equal to</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_120">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">80</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">× 10&emsp;<span class="fs_90">(<i>i.e.</i>,
+                 10 for each 70 yards) = 11.</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">70</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>7. The following tables show the approximate difference in corrector
+settings necessary to effect an alteration in the angular height of
+burst at various ranges:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2 bb">
+      <th class="tdc">Range.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">&nbsp;13 and 18-pr.&nbsp;<br>Q.F.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">4·5-inch Q.F.<br>&nbsp;Howitzer ranging&nbsp;<br>in yards.<br>
+                         All charges.<br>“Gun range.”</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">60-pr. B.L.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">15-pr. Q.F.<br>and<br>15-pr. B.L.C.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc">&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">To raise<br>height<br>10 minutes.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">To raise<br>height<br>20 minutes.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">To raise<br>height<br>15 minutes.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">To raise<br>height<br>12½ minutes.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">corrector.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc">corrector.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">13</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">corrector.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;7</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">24</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">corrector.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">18</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">5,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;2</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">6,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;3</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;9</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;3</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">7,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"></td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">8,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"></td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb2">
+      <td class="tdl">9,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"></td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">4·5-inch Q.F. Howitzer.</p>
+<p class="center"><i>Ranging in degrees.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2 bb">
+      <th class="tdc" colspan="2">Elevation<br> (all charges).&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" colspan="2">&nbsp;To raise height<br> 20 minutes.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">degrees.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">16</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">corrector.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;3</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">35</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#8199;2</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>Officers should know the figures for the equipment with which their
+unit is armed.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Use.</i>—When a corrector is ordered, the fuze scale slider
+is moved till the arrow is opposite the required graduation, and
+clamped. The fuze for any range can now be read off. For the purpose
+of recording the particular range and so avoiding possible error, the
+sliding pointer on the top can be moved and set to such range.</p>
+
+<p>Once having found the corrector setting, it is the “corrector setting
+for the day,” provided that, if indirect laying is employed, the angle
+of sight is correct. If, when finding the corrector setting, the angle
+of sight is incorrect, the corrector setting found will be a false one,
+being too short if the angle of sight is underestimated, and <i>vice
+versâ</i>.</p>
+
+<p>9. To obtain the corrector setting, an échelon of three rounds may be
+fired, each round at a different corrector setting. When selecting the
+échelon of corrector settings an endeavour should be made to choose
+such lengths of corrector as will give bursts in air and on graze.</p>
+
+<p>10. Bursts should always be judged with reference to the “<i>line of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</span>
+sight</i>,” otherwise when the target is situated on sloping ground, an
+unsuitable length of corrector may be selected, as rounds bursting in
+air short of the target below the “<i>line of sight</i>” would, with
+the same corrector, give bursts on graze when the trajectory passes
+through the target.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_114" class="f120"><b>114.</b> <i>Range tables.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Range tables represent the ordinary performance of the gun with
+service ammunition under normal conditions. They can, therefore,
+only be taken as a guide. With the object of compiling these tables
+and of finding out, in a general way, the relative accuracy of the
+service ordnance and ammunition, series of rounds are fired at varying
+elevations for range and accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>From these series mean ranges and deviations are obtained for each
+elevation; the difference of each round from the “<i>mean</i>” gives
+the “<i>error</i>” and the mean of the errors of the series gives an
+estimate of the accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>2. The chief causes of inaccuracy, which may exist on the experimental
+practice ground, where all the conditions are most favourable, are as
+follows:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. Want of accuracy in the gun, faulty ammunition, or</li>
+<li class="isub3">unsuitable mounting.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. External causes, such as wind, and varying density</li>
+<li class="isub3">of the air.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Errors due to the gun will arise if the twist of rifling is unsuited to
+the length of the projectile.</p>
+
+<p>Errors due to the projectiles will arise if their density has not been
+distributed in the best manner, or if they are inaccurately centred or
+vary in weight.</p>
+
+<p>Errors due to the charge can be reduced to a minimum by using explosive
+of the same lot throughout the experiment, and by giving each charge
+the same air space to secure uniformity of loading density.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</span></p>
+
+<p>Errors will also arise if the mounting, or the gun on its mounting,
+is unsteady when the gun is fired, as this would cause a variable
+“<i>jump</i>” and consequently a variable angle of departure.</p>
+
+<p>3. The following is an example of one series:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2 bb">
+      <th class="tdc">No. of &nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Range.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Difference<br>&nbsp;from mean.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Deviation&nbsp;<br>right.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Difference<br>&nbsp;from mean.&nbsp;</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">yds.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">yds.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">yds.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">yds.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4,968</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">22·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">24·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3·0</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4,954</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;8·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">21·6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">0·2</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4,962</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">16·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">22·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1·4</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4,908</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">37·2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20·0</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1·4</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4,934</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">11·2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">18·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3·0</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">24,726&#8199;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">96·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">107·2&#8199;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">9·0</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb2">
+      <td class="tdc">Mean</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;4,945·2&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">19·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">21·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1·8</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>The second column in the above table gives the actual ranges. The mean
+range is obtained by adding all together and dividing by 5, since 5
+rounds were fired.</p>
+
+<p>The third column contains the difference of each round, <i>irrespective
+of sign</i>, from the mean range just found. The mean of these
+differences is then obtained, and called the mean error in range or
+mean longitudinal error. Evidently, if all the projectiles fall nearly
+at the same range, this mean error must be small.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth column gives the lateral deviation from the direction in
+which the axis of the gun points; the mean deviation is at the bottom
+of this column. If any shot had fallen to the left, then the deviation
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</span>
+would be reckoned from a line passing through either the extreme right
+or the extreme left shot.</p>
+
+<p>The fifth column gives the difference from the mean deviation, with a
+mean at the bottom called the mean error in deviation or mean lateral
+error.</p>
+
+<p>Collecting the results from the table we have:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Mean range</td>
+      <td class="tdr">4945·2</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Mean longitudinal error&emsp;&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdr">19·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Mean deviation right</td>
+      <td class="tdr">21·4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Mean lateral error</td>
+      <td class="tdr">1·8</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>It can be shown by the theory of probabilities that if each mean error
+is multiplied by the factor 1·69, the breadths of zones (of infinite
+length), which will contain 50 per cent. of the hits, are obtained.</p>
+
+<p>4. As a result of these and other tests the following information is
+embodied in the various columns of the range table.</p>
+
+<p>i. <i>Elevation and Range.</i>—The angle of elevation in degrees and
+minutes is shown for every hundred yards up to the limit of effective
+range of the gun.</p>
+
+<p>ii. <i>Fuze Scale.</i>—The fuze scale column shows the graduation at
+which the fuze must be set due to the time of flight for the range
+shown on the table. In the range table for the 18-pr. Q.F. we find for
+a range of 4,000 yards the fuze graduation is 12·8. As the fuze scales
+are compiled for a barometric pressure of 30 inches, this means that
+a shell with a fuze set at 12·8 will burst at 4,000 yards from the
+gun when fired at the sea level under normal conditions. For various
+reasons mentioned in Sec. 112, the fuze scale can only be taken as a guide.</p>
+
+<p>iii. <i>Angle of Descent.</i>—The angle of descent is shown either in
+degrees and minutes or as a slope.</p>
+
+<p>As a field gun has only one charge, the only way to increase the angle
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</span>
+of descent is to increase the range. With field howitzers varying
+charges are used, so that any required angle of descent can be obtained
+by a judicious selection of the position of the gun and the charge to
+be used.</p>
+
+<p>iv. <i>Remaining Velocity.</i>—This column shows the actual velocity
+of the projectile at any given range.</p>
+
+<p>v. <i>Five Minutes Alteration of Elevation or Deflection.</i>—These
+columns show what alteration in the range or point of impact is caused
+by an alteration of 5 minutes in elevation or deflection. The former
+is useful in ranging a howitzer battery, and the latter is useful in
+calculating the deflection to be given to concentrate the fire of
+the guns of a battery on to one point, and also in calculating the
+correction required to get parallel lines of fire when using an aiming
+point (<a href="#Para_122"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>122</b></a>.) Thus, suppose the range to an
+aiming point is estimated at 2,800 yards, and the virtual displacement
+of the gun 16 yards, the displacement difference will be 20 minutes,
+as the range table shows that 5 minutes deflection alters the point of
+impact 4 yards at that range.</p>
+
+<p>vi. <i>Time of Flight.</i>—Time of flight is shown in seconds.</p>
+
+<p>vii. <i>Deflection for Drift.</i>—The sights of some howitzers not
+being arranged to counteract the drift of the projectile, it is
+necessary to give deflection. The amount required at the various angles
+of elevation is shown in the table. It is always given to the left.</p>
+
+<p>viii. <i>Accuracy Tables.</i>—These columns give the length or breadth
+or height within which 50 per cent. of rounds should fall and are based
+upon actual practice.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example.</i>—As an example take the 18-pr. Q.F. gun. At 3,000
+yards the 50 per cent. length is given as 20 yards, and the breadth as
+1·44 yards. A series of rounds might fall, as in <a href="#FIG_16">Fig. 16</a>,
+round about a target T. Of these 50 per cent. would be contained between the two
+lines AB, CD, 20 yards apart, 10 yards on each side of the centre of
+the group. All the rounds should fall within two lines four times that
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</span>
+distance apart, that is 40 yards on each side of the centre of the
+group.</p>
+
+<p>Again, of the rounds that fell right and left of the centre of the
+group 50 per cent. would be enclosed by the two lines FE, HG, <a href="#FIG_17">Fig. 17</a>,
+1·44 yards apart, and all should be contained by two lines four times
+that distance apart.</p>
+
+<p>If now one pair of parallel lines are placed over the other as in
+<a href="#FIG_18">Fig. 18</a>, evidently the rectangle enclosed by them
+will contain 50 per cent. of 50 per cent., that is 25 per cent. of the total.</p>
+
+<div class="figcontainer">
+  <div id="FIG_16" class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 16.</span></p>
+   <img src="images/fig_16.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="303" >
+  </div>
+  <div id="FIG_17" class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 17.</span></p>
+   <img  src="images/fig_17.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="303" >
+   </div>
+  <div id="FIG_18" class="figsub">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 18.</span></p>
+   <img  src="images/fig_18.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="269" >
+   </div>
+</div>
+
+<p>The width of other zones (containing a different percentage of hits)
+can be obtained by multiplying the width of the 50 per cent. zone by a
+varying factor (<i>see</i> Text Book of Gunnery).</p>
+
+<p>If the target is a vertical one, the figures in the column
+“<i>height</i>” should be taken, instead of those under “<i>length</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>5. It is important to realize the effect of these laws in cases of
+ordinary practice, where errors in range are of chief moment. We have
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</span>
+seen that at 3,000 yards, with the 18-pr. Q.F. gun, a series of rounds
+would fall within two lines 40 yards on each side of the centre of
+the series; therefore a shell falling 39 yards short is within normal
+limits of error, but it should be counterbalanced by other shots
+falling over.</p>
+
+<p>6. Accuracy of fire is a comparative term; it is said to be good when
+a group of projectiles, fired under as nearly as possible the same
+conditions, falls close together.</p>
+
+<p>The probable percentage of hits obtainable from an 18-pr. Q.F. on a
+shield 4 feet 6 inches high and 5 feet wide, fired under experimental
+conditions,</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" >is at</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">60</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">per cent.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">2,500</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">33</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">16</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">3,500</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">&#8199;8½</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>Under service conditions these percentages would be considerably
+reduced.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER V.<br><span class="h_subtitle">LAYING.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_115" class="f120"><b>115.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. All guns are so mounted that two motions can be given
+to the axis of the gun, viz., motion in a vertical direction,
+termed elevation, and motion in a horizontal direction,
+termed traversing. Elevation is always given by mechanism,
+traversing is sometimes carried out by mechanism and sometimes
+by hand.</p>
+
+<p>A gun is said to be “<i>laid</i>,” when, by elevating and traversing,
+its axis is made to point in the required direction.</p>
+
+<p>2. Accuracy and rapidity are the two main factors in good
+laying. Accuracy is required against stationary targets, while
+rapidity becomes of more importance against large and moving
+targets.</p>
+
+<p>3. Instruction in laying should be divided into four
+stages:—</p>
+
+<p><i>1st Stage.</i>—Instructional target at close distance, explanation
+of terms and rules, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>2nd Stage.</i>—Laying at well-defined natural objects at effective
+ranges, and continued at less well-defined objects at long and
+distant ranges.</p>
+
+<p><i>3rd Stage.</i>—Laying at moving targets. This can be practised
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</span>
+by sending out men, mounted or on foot, to move at the pace and in the
+direction desired. In order to check the laying they should be halted
+by signal on the word “<i>fire</i>.”</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>4th Stage.</i>—Indirect laying.</p>
+
+<p>4. The instructional target will be found valuable in teaching the men
+of a battery to lay guns correctly and uniformly, as with it personal
+errors can be shown, both in elevation and direction, and the practical
+rules for correcting errors can be demonstrated.</p>
+
+<p>5. When laying with open sights, in order to obtain uniform results,
+one method should be strictly adhered to. The service method of laying
+a gun is to direct it so that the centre of the imaginary line joining
+the two highest points of the notch of the hind sight, the point of the
+fore sight and the target are in line.</p>
+
+<p>The gun should be approximately laid before looking over the sight; the
+laying should then be completed by depressing the gun and sights on to
+the target so as to avoid any error due to play of the elevating gear.</p>
+
+<p>The distance of the eye from the sight should be the same from round to
+round, and all layers of a battery should be trained to keep the eye at
+the same distance.</p>
+
+<p>6. After the gunner has attained a thorough knowledge of the sights,
+and can lay accurately and rapidly on well-defined targets, he should
+be taught to lay on natural objects, such as troops halted and in
+motion, hedges, batteries, entrenchments, crest lines, at varying
+ranges and under varying conditions of light, background, &amp;c. The
+ground line should always be laid on unless orders to the contrary are
+given.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_116" class="f120"><b>116.</b> <i>Direct laying.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Direct laying can only be employed when the target is visible over
+or through the sights.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. With 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. field guns the elevating mechanism is
+so designed that, after the sights have been directed on the target,
+the axis of the gun can be moved independently of the sights, and
+inclined in a vertical direction at any angle to the line of sight,
+which remains directed on the target. The angle at which the axis of
+the gun is inclined to the line of sight, and the range due to it, is
+shown on the range indicator on the right side of the gun. With the
+independent line of sight, once the sights are laid on the target any
+angle of elevation can be given without having to re-lay the gun. To
+lay the gun, align the sights, or telescope, on the target, and adjust
+the range indicator to the elevation ordered.</p>
+
+<p>With other field guns the sight is set at the elevation ordered, and
+the gun is laid by directing the sights or telescope on the target.</p>
+
+<p>3. The advantage of direct laying is that, when the gun is laid, the
+correct angle of sight is automatically included, and complications
+will not arise in determining the corrector settings or length of fuze.</p>
+
+<p>The disadvantages are the personal error of the layers, and the
+difficulties due to light and distance; with the telescopic sight,
+slowness, over-laying for direction, and difficulty in picking up the
+target.</p>
+
+<p>4. At medium ranges and against moving targets direct laying, or
+an aiming point as described in Sec. <b>120</b>, should be used,
+according as the formation of the ground and local circumstances render
+advisable. The telescopic sight is particularly useful against guns in
+action, trenches, &amp;c., when great accuracy of line is important.</p>
+
+<p>5. When laying direct the sight clinometer should be set level at the
+earliest opportunity. This enables the laying for elevation to be
+checked, or a change from direct to indirect laying to be made, should
+the target become obscured from any cause.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_117" class="f120"><b>117.</b> <i>Indirect laying.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Indirect laying can be employed whether the target is visible
+over the sights or not, and <i>is the normal method employed in the
+field</i>.</p>
+
+<p>If a change from direct to indirect laying is desired, the order
+“<span class="smcap">Indirect</span>” must be given, and the layer must
+immediately pick up an auxiliary aiming point to lay on for direction.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>For elevation.</i>—With sights provided with an adjustable level
+the level is set at the angle of sight, and the range indicator or drum
+at the elevation ordered. The gun is elevated and depressed until the
+bubble is level.</p>
+
+<p>With sights not provided with an adjustable level, or with field
+clinometer, the angle of sight is added to the elevation due to the
+range, if it is one of elevation, and subtracted if it is one of
+depression. The sight or clinometer is set at the elevation ordered,
+the gun elevated and then depressed until the bubble is level.</p>
+
+<p>3. The advantages of laying in this way are that the personal error of
+the layer is eliminated, and the accuracy of the laying is not affected
+by light or distance.</p>
+
+<p>The disadvantage is that, if the angle of sight has not been accurately
+measured and allowed for, the range shown on the range indicator or
+drum will not be the true range, and complications will arise in
+determining the corrector setting or length of fuze.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_19" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 19.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_19.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="99" >
+</div>
+
+<p>In <a href="#FIG_19">Fig. 19</a> let T be the target, G the gun (18-pr. Q.F.),
+T being on a higher level than G.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</span></p>
+
+<p>If the angle of sight be underestimated, the range on the range
+indicator will not be the true range.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Supposing</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">true</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">range GT</td>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3"><span class="ws3">&nbsp;</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">= 3,900 yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">angle of sight</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">= 2° 45′ elevation.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Angle of sight ordered</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">= 2° elevation.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>It follows that, in order to hit T, the range on the range indicator
+must be 3,900 yards + 45 minutes, or about 4,150 yards.</p>
+
+<p>The fuze, however, required will be that for 3,900 yards, but the
+battery commander being unaware that he has wrongly estimated the angle
+of sight, the fuzes will be set for 4,150 yards with the corrector
+ordered, and all grazes may be expected. The corrector setting obtained
+will not be a true one for the day, nor will the range be true.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>For direction.</i>—Direction is obtained by laying on an aiming
+point, or on a line marked by two aiming posts. The method of carrying
+this out is described in <a href="#Para_198">Sec. <b>198</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>When indirect laying is used in the open with guns not provided with
+the No. 7 Dial Sight, the layer after the gun has been put on the line
+by the section commander will pick up an auxiliary aiming point with
+his rocking bar sight or over the dial sight to lay on from round to
+round. (<a href="#Para_198"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>198</b>, b, ii</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_118" class="f120"><b>118.</b> <i>Angle of sight.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The angle of sight can be measured by the sights on the gun, by
+the level on the director, or by any other angle of sight instrument.
+Considerable care should be taken in making this measurement, as on it
+depends the accurate determination of the fuze.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. When the target is not visible from the guns, or from a
+position near the guns, the angle of sight can be found by means
+of the following formula:—</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 20.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_20.jpg" alt="" width="300" height="275" >
+</div>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_120">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb"><b>(<i>a</i>¹ × BO + <i>a</i>² × OT)</b></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc"><b>BT</b></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<ul class="index fs_120">
+<li class="isub5">where T is the target, B the battery, and O the observer.</li>
+<li class="isub5"><i>a</i>¹ is the angle of sight from B to O.</li>
+<li class="isub5"><i>a</i>² is the angle of sight from O to T.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Angles of elevation are read as plus. Angles of depression as minus.</p>
+
+<p>The No. 3 director is designed to work out this problem automatically,
+excepting when battery, observing station, and target are approximately
+in line.</p>
+
+<p>3. When indirect laying is employed, and the sights are provided with
+adjustable levels, the battery commander should invariably order the
+angle of sight to the battery, both on first coming into action, and on
+every subsequent change of target, either by giving out a fresh angle
+of sight, or by raising or lowering the old angle of sight (<i>see</i>
+para. <b>4</b> below).
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</span></p>
+
+<p>The battery commander must also order the necessary correction in the
+angle of sight to allow for the differences in levels between the guns
+or different parts of the target.</p>
+
+<p>4. Any alteration in angle of sight will be effected by the order
+“<span class="smcap">Raise (or Lower) angle of sight—minutes</span>.” When engaging
+stationary targets and the correct trajectory has been found, it is
+unwise to alter the angle of sight to correct the height of burst.</p>
+
+<p>At moving targets, however, it is better to alter the angle of sight
+rather than to vary the corrector, except for small final adjustments.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_119" class="f120"><b>119.</b> <i>Deflection.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. During its flight various causes are at work tending to make a
+projectile deviate to right or left of its initial direction.</p>
+
+<p>To counteract deviation it is necessary to set the line of sight at an
+angle to the axis of the gun in a horizontal direction. This angle is
+called “<i>deflection</i>.” If the hind sight is moved to the right
+(called right deflection) the axis of the gun will point to the right
+of the line of sight and the shot will fall more to the right in
+accordance with the amount of deflection allowed. Similarly, if the
+shot is required to go to the left, left deflection must be given.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Difference in level of wheels.</i>—<a href="#Para_106"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>106</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>The practical rule for making corrections for difference in level
+of wheels with gun carriages having a wheel track of 60 inches or
+thereabouts, is: number of inches or degrees difference in level of
+wheels × number of degrees of elevation on the range indicator or
+tangent sight = number of minutes deflection to be given on the side
+of the higher wheel. When possible, it is better to dig in the higher
+wheel and level the wheels in this way. This also helps to steady the
+carriage and improve the shooting.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Drift</i> is the deviation of a projectile, due to rotation, that
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</span>
+occurs in all rifled guns. The deviation is to the right or left
+according as the gun has a right or left-hand twist. Drift increases
+with the elevation and range of the gun, and is counteracted either
+by:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp; i. Permanently inclining the sight (15-pr.
+B.L.C.) or axis of the trunnions (13 and 18-pr. Q.F.);</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;ii. The “<i>set</i>” of the dial sight (5-inch
+B.L. Howitzer);</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">iii. An automatically actuated mechanism in the
+sight carrier (4·5-inch Q.F. Howitzer).</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>4. <i>Moving targets.</i>—In the case of a target moving across the
+line of fire, it may be necessary to give deflection; if so, the
+following is a useful guide:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">If the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">target</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">is moving</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">at</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">a walk</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">give</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">20′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">a trot</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">40′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">a gallop</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">1°.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>This should be given by the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Wind.</i>—The wind, especially at long ranges, causes a shell
+to deviate to the right or left. Although the strength of a wind may
+vary at different points of the trajectory of a shell, allowance can be
+approximately made for it by observing its strength and direction.</p>
+
+<p>A rough estimate of the deflection per thousand yards in the range
+necessary to allow for a wind blowing directly across the line of fire
+is given below:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">15</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">minutes when</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the wind is</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">“Very strong.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">“Strong.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">7</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">“Fresh.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">“Moderate.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>In the case of howitzers these amounts should be slightly increased.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</span></p>
+
+<p>These corrections decrease as the direction of the wind approaches the
+line of fire.</p>
+
+<p>Practically each minute of deflection on the sight gives a difference
+of 1 inch in every 100 yards of range.</p>
+
+<p>6. All officers and N.C.O’s. should know what angles are subtended by
+various parts of the hand when placed at arm’s length. Thus:—</p>
+
+<p>Thumb and fingers extended, as in <a href="#FIG_21">Fig. 21</a> (about 19 degrees),
+fist clenched (8 degrees), first and second fingers extended (6 degrees),
+the various knuckles, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_21" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 21.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_21.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="214" >
+</div>
+
+<p>For the purpose of instruction a degree scale calculated for a given
+distance and painted on a wall will be found useful.</p>
+
+<p>7. In ordering deflection it must be clearly understood that the
+amount ordered is in addition to any deflection that may be already
+on the sight, for this reason the word “more” is always to be used.
+Thus:—sight has 25′ right deflection; if “10′ more right” be ordered
+the sight will be set at 35′ right. Similarly, if “10´ more left” had
+been ordered the sight would have been set at 15′ right.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_120" class="f120"><b>120.</b> <i>Aiming points.</i>&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_9_9" href="#Footnote_9_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a></p>
+
+<p>1. Aiming points are conspicuous points capable of easy description
+on which the gun sight or dial sight is laid. They are used for two
+specific purposes, namely:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;i. For obtaining the original lines of fire to a target.</li>
+<li class="isub5">ii. For laying on from round to round.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>As regards i. the aiming point should be as distant as possible and,
+with a view to reducing the necessary correction for parallelism, as
+much in prolongation of the line of guns as practicable.</p>
+
+<p>It should, however, be noted that a well-defined aiming point not in
+prolongation of the line of guns is better than an ill-defined one
+which is in prolongation, provided that the correction for parallelism
+is not forgotten. (<a href="#Para_122"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>122</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>As regards ii. when the aiming point cannot be laid on from round to
+round an auxiliary aiming point must be picked up by the layer.</p>
+
+<p>2. The aiming point or auxiliary aiming points must be made known to
+the section commander and No. 1, and to the other numbers at the gun as
+opportunity offers.</p>
+
+<p>3. When the lines of fire are laid out by means of an aiming point,
+then either two aiming posts can be planted in the line of fire and
+laid on over the rocking bar sight, or the aiming point or an auxiliary
+aiming point can be laid on through the No. 7 dial sight, or over the
+No. 1 dial sight if neither the aiming point nor the auxiliary aiming
+point are within the field of the rocking bar sight.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_121" class="f120"><b>121.</b> <i>Clearing the crest.</i></p>
+
+<p>When guns are in action under cover the section commanders are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</span>
+responsible that the shell will clear the crest. Immediately on coming
+into action the section commanders must report to the battery commander
+the lowest elevation which will clear the crest with zero angle of
+sight, if no angle of sight has been ordered. The various methods of
+carrying out this operation are fully dealt with in the handbooks of
+the guns.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_122" class="f120"><b>122.</b> <i>Parallelism of lines of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>It is very important that the lines of fire of the guns of a
+battery should be parallel when first laid out, and every effort
+should be made to attain this object.</b> Its commander will then have
+a definite condition from which to make his calculations, and should
+be able to switch his guns from one target to another without losing
+parallelism, to distribute his fire correctly over a given front, or to
+concentrate it on a given point.</p>
+
+<p>2. When the guns of a battery are laid off an aiming point with the
+same angle, their lines of fire will not be parallel unless the aiming
+point is either at an infinite distance, or in exact prolongation of
+the line of guns.</p>
+
+<p>In <a href="#FIG_22">Fig. 22</a> A and B are the positions of the flank
+guns and CD is the prolongation of the line of guns.</p>
+
+<p>Suppose P is an aiming point which, for simplicity, is taken as the
+correct line of fire for the right gun, and is at right angles to the
+line of guns.</p>
+
+<p>If AE is drawn parallel to BP, it will represent the line of fire
+required for the left gun.</p>
+
+<p>The correction for parallelism for the left gun is consequently the
+angle EAP, which is equal to the angle APB, <i>i.e.</i>, the angle
+subtending the front of the battery at the range of the aiming point.</p>
+
+<p>This position of the aiming point, namely, at right angles to the line
+of guns, entails the greatest amount of correction for parallelism for
+an aiming point at any given distance.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_22" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 22.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_22.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="461" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_184"></a>[Pg 184]</span>
+If the aiming point is in any other position at the same distance, such
+as P¹, the angle AP¹ B becomes smaller, as the front of the battery
+A¹ B becomes foreshortened when viewed from the aiming point. This
+foreshortening continues until the frontage of the battery disappears,
+<i>i.e.</i>, the aiming point is in prolongation of the line of guns,
+in which case no correction for parallelism is necessary.
+<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_185"></a>[Pg 185]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The correction necessary to make the line of fire of A parallel to
+the line of fire of B varies with the distance BP, and the angle PBD.</p>
+
+<p>The total correction, divided by the number of gun intervals, gives the
+amount of distribution or concentration necessary for each gun.</p>
+
+<p>When the aiming point is in front of the line of guns distribution is
+required; when in rear the same rule holds good, but concentration is
+required.</p>
+
+<p>4. The following table gives angular corrections for each gun interval
+for different positions of the aiming point:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc bb" rowspan="2">Angle between&nbsp;<br>line to aiming<br>point and line<br>of guns.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="7">Range to aiming point.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;1000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;2000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;3000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;4000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;5000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;6000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;7000ˣ&nbsp;</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Mins.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">10 degrees.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">20 &nbsp;&emsp;”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">30 &nbsp;&emsp;”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">35</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">40 &nbsp;&emsp;”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">45</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">50 to 70 “</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">60</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">30</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb2">
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">80 &nbsp;” 90 “</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">70</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">35</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>A good rough rule to ascertain the parallelism required is to divide
+the angle between the line to the aiming point and the line of guns by
+the number of thousands of yards range to the aiming point. The result
+is the number of minutes concentration or distribution for each gun.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. Another method is as follows:—Two guns (preferably the flank guns)
+after their sights have been laid on the aiming point at the angle
+ordered, may be ordered to lay on each other and report to the battery
+leader the angles read. The battery leader then adds them together,
+subtracts their sum from 180° and the result divided by the number of
+gun intervals gives the distribution or concentration required per gun.</p>
+
+<p>Thus in <a href="#FIG_23">Fig. 23</a>, supposing No. 1 gun reports
+“my angle 15°,” and No. 6 gun reports “my angle 160°,” the battery
+leader knows that 5° is the total distribution for the battery and that
+1° is the distribution per gun.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_123" class="f120"><b>123.</b> <i>Displacement.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Single displacement.</i>—When the battery leader is unable to
+place his director in or quite near to the line of guns a correction
+known as single displacement becomes necessary to compensate for the
+difference in the angles between the aiming point and the target,
+measured at the director and at the battery respectively.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_23" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 23.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_23.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="328" >
+</div>
+
+<p>This correction is given to all guns in such a way as to bring the
+lines of fire towards the director.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</span></p>
+
+<p>In <a href="#FIG_24">Fig. 24</a> suppose T is the target, B the
+battery, D the battery leader’s director and P the aiming point. If no
+allowance for displacement was made the lines of fire would be as much
+to the left of the target as B is to the left of D.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_24" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 24.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_24.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="567" >
+</div>
+
+<p>2. A simple rule for calculating the displacement angle is as follows:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp" rowspan="2">×</td>
+      <td class="tdc bb">Base in yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">= Displacement angle.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Range in hundreds of yards</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="blockquot"><i>Example.</i>—Suppose in <a href="#FIG_24">Fig. 24</a> the base
+(BD) is 200ˣ, the range (DT) is 4,000ˣ, and the angle to the aiming point (PDT) is 79°.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</span></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" rowspan="2">Then the displacement angle = &nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bb">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp" rowspan="2">×</td>
+      <td class="tdc bb">200</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">= 3°,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">40</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="blockquot no-indent">and the battery leader would give out the angle
+“82° (<i>i.e.</i>, 79 and 3) Right” to the battery.</p>
+
+<p>If the aiming point had been to the right of the target, the
+displacement angle would have been deducted from the battery angle.</p>
+
+<p>3. When it is desired to give the line of fire to the battery leader’s
+director, or to the flank gun, from the observing station and the
+distance is not enough to warrant the use of the plotter, the above
+method of computing the displacement angle will be found useful.
+(<a href="#Para_198"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>198</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The battery commander will make the necessary correction before sending
+the angle to the gun or director.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Double displacement.</i>—When the observing station is some
+distance from the battery, the switch angle measured to a new target
+will usually differ from that required at the guns. This difference is
+known as <i>double displacement</i>.</p>
+
+<p>5. In <a href="#FIG_25">Fig. 25</a>, suppose B is the battery, D the director,
+A the original target, and T the new target.</p>
+
+<p>The angle measured between the original target and the new target at
+the director will only coincide with that required at the battery, that
+is the angle ADT will only be equal to ABT, when all the four points
+happen to be on the circumference of a circle. If T is in any position
+such as T¹, outside that circle, the angle at D is less than the angle
+at B; if in any position T², inside the circle, the angle at D is
+greater than that at B.</p>
+
+<p>6. In practice it is useless to attempt to calculate the difference of
+the apex angles at A and T. The most accurate method is to work out the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</span>
+problem on the plotter as described in <a href="#Para_198">Sec. <b>198</b></a>.
+The difference between the battery angle and that for the first target will
+be the switch angle.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_25" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 25.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_25.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="512" >
+</div>
+
+<p>If the line to the first target has been found otherwise than by the
+plotter, and the observing station is some distance from the battery,
+the battery leader should measure the battery angle to the first target
+as soon as possible, and communicate it to the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>With this information the battery commander, after working out the new
+battery angle, can ascertain the switch angle to order to the guns.</p>
+
+<p>7. If the tactical situation does not admit of this method, or when,
+owing to a small difference in range between the two targets, the
+displacement is likely to be small, an approximation may be arrived at
+as follows:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</span></p>
+
+<p>Decide whether the line joining the two targets is more foreshortened
+to the battery or to your own eye. If the former the switch angle will
+be less than that measured, if the latter it will be greater.</p>
+
+<p>8. Another method is to switch over one gun through the estimated angle
+to the new target, correct its line by observation of fire, and, when
+line is correct, to order parallel lines to that gun.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_124" class="f120"><b>124.</b> <i>Gun layers and fuze setters.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. In all batteries of horse, field and heavy artillery, a list
+of qualified layers and fuze setters is to be kept by the battery
+commander.</p>
+
+<p>2. In order to qualify to be placed on the list of layers, a
+non-commissioned officer or gunner is to be examined as described in
+“Instructions for Practice.” All serjeants should also be tested in
+laying.</p>
+
+<p>3. Every battery should have at least 3 men qualified as layers and
+6 men as fuze setters per subsection, exclusive of serjeants. These
+should be tested periodically.</p>
+
+<p>Any non-commissioned officer or gunner with good sight should be able
+to pass this test.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VI.<br><span class="h_subtitle">MOUNTED DRILL.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_125" class="f120"><b>125.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. At drill or manœuvre, the sections of a battery are termed “right,”
+“centre” or “left,” and the subsections are numbered from 1 to 6 as
+they stand in line without reference to any number or letter in use for
+administrative purposes. In column they are termed “leading,” “centre,”
+and “rear.”</p>
+
+<p>A four-gun battery is organized on similar lines.</p>
+
+<p>At brigade drill batteries are termed “right,” “centre,” and “left,” or
+“leading,” “centre,” and “rear,” according to their position in line or
+column respectively.</p>
+
+<p>2. The object of drill is to acquire accuracy and flexibility in
+carrying out movements necessary for manœuvre.</p>
+
+<p>These movements should be as few and simple as possible, and the
+brigade or battery should be trained to execute them with precision and
+rapidity in any direction passing over as little ground as possible.</p>
+
+<p>3. When a general order is not distinctly heard by a part of the line,
+each commander (when the intention is obvious) will conform as quickly
+as possible to this movement.</p>
+
+<p>4. Numbering in line is from right to left; in column from the right of
+the head of the column.</p>
+
+<p>The relative position of batteries within a brigade, of sections within
+a battery, or of subsections within a section, may be changed at any
+time, but sections must not be broken up.</p>
+
+<p>The battery or the section on the right of the line is always, for the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</span>
+time being, the right battery or section. Line is to be formed in any
+required direction with the utmost rapidity possible, without regard
+to the original positions which batteries or sections or subsections
+within sections, occupied when they were last told off.</p>
+
+<p>5. The command “<span class="smcap">March</span>,” unless preceded
+by some other command, means “Trot.” This does not refer to heavy
+batteries.</p>
+
+<p>When moving at any pace exceeding a walk, the command “
+<span class="smcap">Walk</span>” will precede by a few seconds the
+command “<span class="smcap">Halt</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>Movements and formations will be made on the move unless the order “to
+the halt” is given; in the case of formations “to the halt” the base
+body advances its own depth before halting.</p>
+
+<p>If a formation be ordered when a battery is on the move the original
+pace will be preserved by the base body, while that of each portion
+of the remainder will be increased or diminished as may be necessary,
+until the formation is completed; but in field and heavy batteries, if
+moving at the trot, and the formation is to the head of the column, the
+pace of the base body will be reduced to the walk until the formation
+is completed, when the trot will be resumed.</p>
+
+<p>6. Horse and field artillery cannot be reversed on its own ground;
+when acting with other troops, the battery interval should be allowed
+on each flank to enable the subsections to wheel outwards if required.
+It is generally advisable in parade movements to remain in rear of any
+intended alignment until the other troops are finally formed.</p>
+
+<p>7. When it is intended to increase the front the formation may be to
+either or both flanks. If no special order is given the formation will
+be outwards, the body which is immediately in rear of the head going to
+the right. If it is intended to form on the right or left it must be so
+stated.</p>
+
+<p>To pass obstacles, and to facilitate movement, the batteries may
+increase or decrease the battery intervals.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Mountain Artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>8. Mountain batteries are organized in two lines for drill and
+manœuvre, the firing battery, and 1st line.</p>
+
+<p>The relief mules which form part of the firing battery should be taken
+one from each subsection.</p>
+
+<p>At drill and manœuvre the firing battery moves independently of the 1st
+line, which, if present, follows some distance in rear and conforms
+generally to the movements of the firing battery.</p>
+
+<p>9. Mountain batteries move usually at the walk, and the command
+“<span class="smcap">March</span>” means walk, unless some other pace is ordered.
+A pace of four miles an hour should be maintained on level ground.</p>
+
+<p>A distance of one yard between mules, measured from nose to croup, is
+always maintained on a good road.</p>
+
+<p>Batteries should also be able to move some distance at a slow trot and
+should be trained accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>10. To reverse or take ground.—Every animal is at once turned about,
+or to the right or left, as ordered, the gun detachments moving round
+with the mules and maintaining their position relative to them. As a
+general rule mules are reversed to the left.</p>
+
+<p>In executing a movement to a flank, the half wheel of subsections is to
+be preferred.</p>
+
+<p>11. In the detail of drill movements contained in sections, the
+instructions are generally applicable to mountain batteries with the
+following modifications:—</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;i. All reference to the movement of wagons of
+field artillery may be neglected.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">ii. Where the incline of subsections or carriages
+is ordered for a field battery, the movement will be executed by
+the half wheel of subsections except for diminishing or increasing
+intervals in line. Where a formation into line or column is effected
+in field artillery by one part of the battery increasing its pace, in
+mountain artillery that part of the battery makes no change, but the
+remainder of the battery checks its pace.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</span></p>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_126" class="f120"><b>126.</b> <i>Falling in for parade.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The men of each subsection will fall in on foot in front of their
+own stables, where they will be inspected by their Nos. 1, and the
+reports made to the battery serjeant-major. The drivers and mounted men
+of each subsection will then be marched into stables ready to turn out
+when ordered, and the dismounted men marched to the gun park.</p>
+
+<p>2. The teams will be inspected by the Nos. 1 before they proceed to
+the gun park. When ordered to turn out, the subsections are formed up,
+mounted in front of their stables, marched to the gun park and hooked
+in. Teams should not be hooked in until shortly before the hour for
+parade.</p>
+
+<p>3. Each section will also be inspected by its section commander, whose
+duty it is to see that every man, animal, and carriage is properly
+equipped, that each gun is in working order, the buffer filled and the
+bore clear.</p>
+
+<p>He should then dismount drivers and detachments and make his report to
+the captain.</p>
+
+<p>If a section is without an officer, the senior non-commissioned officer
+of that section takes his place and commands it.</p>
+
+<p>4. When bare charges are carried and when the cartridge is contained in
+a case which is not attached to the shell, all drill ammunition will be
+left in barracks or camp.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Mountain Artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>5. When ordered to turn out, the drivers will turn out with their mules
+by subsections and be marched to the gun park, where they will form up
+behind the guns in the position for action.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</span></p>
+
+<p>Mules will not be loaded or the girths tightened till the last possible
+moment.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_127" class="f120"><b>127.</b> <i>Intervals and distances.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Intervals are measured from No. 1 to No. 1 when limbered up, from
+muzzle to muzzle when in action, and from knee to knee between files.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="4">Between files</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">inches.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="4">Open files</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;2</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="4">Half extended files</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="4">Extended files</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Close interval</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">between</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">subsections</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">heavy batteries&emsp;&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Half interval</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">between</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">subsections</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdc">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Full interval</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">between</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">subsections</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdc">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl fs_110" colspan="6">Battery intervals—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr_wsp">Between</td>
+      <td class="tdl">batteries at</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">full intervals</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">close&emsp;”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl fs_110" colspan="6">Intervals—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">between</td>
+      <td class="tdl">brigades</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">artillery and other troops</td>
+      <td class="tdc">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>2. Distances are measured between animals from tail to head, between
+carriages from rear end of carriages to head of the following team, and
+between the units of a column or Échelon from No. 1 to No. 1, except
+when otherwise stated:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</span></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Between ranks</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1" colspan="3">half a horse-length (4 feet).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Battery column, column or échelon of sections</td>
+      <td class="tdr">40</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Column or échelon of sections, heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Column&emsp;of</td>
+      <td class="tdl">batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdr">125</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;100</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Short échelon of sections or batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Short échelon of section or batteries,</td>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr" colspan="3">heavy batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">25</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Quarter column of batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">between carriages and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr" colspan="6">lead horses’ heads.&emsp;&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1" colspan="3">&nbsp; ”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">sections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdr">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Column of route</td>
+      <td class="tdr">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Between brigades and larger bodies in</td>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr_ws1" colspan="3">column of route</td>
+      <td class="tdr">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Between batteries in column of route</td>
+      <td class="tdr">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">Column or échelon of sections</td>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr_ws1" colspan="3">of mountain batteries</td>
+      <td class="tdr">100</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp; ”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_128" class="f120"><b>128.</b> <i>Frontages and depths.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The frontage at full interval of a horse, field or mountain battery
+(6 guns) may be taken to be 100 yards, and that of a heavy battery 75
+yards.</p>
+
+<p>2. The depth in column of route of a horse battery with detachments on
+a flank, or of a field battery, is obtained by allowing 20 yards for
+each carriage with an allowance for the headquarters. Horse artillery
+with detachments front or rear requires an extra 8 yards for each
+detachment; if the detachments are in files, 4 yards must be allowed
+for every two horses in the detachment.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</span></p>
+
+<p>The road spaces occupied by batteries in column of route are as
+follows:—</p>
+
+<p>A horse artillery battery (6 guns and 12 wagons):—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">With</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">detachments</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">right or left of the guns<span class="ws3">&nbsp;</span></td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">390</td>
+      <td class="tdl">yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">front or rear</td>
+      <td class="tdc">440</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">in files</td>
+      <td class="tdc">490</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">A field battery (with 6 guns and 12 wagons)&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc">390</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">A heavy battery (with 8 wagons)</td>
+      <td class="tdc">340</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>The depth of a mountain battery, in column of route, is obtained by
+allowing 3 yards for each mule or pony, and adding 25 yards for Nos. 1,
+coverers, range-takers and signallers.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_129" class="f120"><b>129.</b> <i>Posts of officers, N.C.Os., &amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The positions assigned to the brigade and battery commanders are
+those to be taken up when the formation is completed; while it is in
+progress their posts are wherever they can best superintend and be seen
+and heard by their commands.</p>
+
+<p>In order to carry out this principle effectually, commanders of
+batteries and brigades should not remain too close to their commands.
+When moving in line, or in line of battery columns, their normal
+position is in front of the centre.</p>
+
+<p>In quarter column formations officers (other than those in front) and
+serrefiles take half distance.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="smcap">Brigade Commander.</span> <i>In line.</i>—In the centre, two
+horse-lengths in front of battery commanders.</p>
+
+<p><i>On other occasions.</i>—In the best place from which he can command
+the brigade.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="smcap">Battery Commander.</span> <i>In line.</i>—One horse-length in
+front of the centre of the line of section commanders.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column or quarter column of batteries.</i>—One horse-length in
+front of, and three from the directing flank of, the battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In all other formations.</i>—In front of the battery.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="smcap">Captain.</span> <i>In line.</i>—One horse-length in rear of the
+centre of the serrefile rank.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of batteries.</i>—As in line.</p>
+
+<p><i>In quarter column of batteries, full or close interval.</i>—Half a
+horse-length on the outer flank of the battery, in line with the front
+rank or gun leaders.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column.</i>—Three horse-lengths on the right flank of
+the centre of the battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and column of route.</i>—One horse-length
+in rear of the rear carriage.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="smcap">Section Commander.</span> <i>In line.</i>—One horse-length in
+front of the centre of his section.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column or quarter column.</i>—The leading section
+commander as in line, the remainder in centre of sections in line with
+front rank or gun leaders.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and column of route.</i>—Where he can best
+command his section.</p>
+
+<p>6. <span class="smcap">Observation Officer (Heavy Batteries).</span>—With the
+observation party.</p>
+
+<p>7. <span class="smcap">Adjutant.</span>—The adjutant will, as a rule, accompany the
+brigade commander and assist him as required.</p>
+
+<p>When a formation is completed he will place himself as follows:—</p>
+
+<p><i>In line.</i>—On the right flank of the brigade, one horse-length
+from and in line with the front rank or gun leaders.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column and échelon.</i>—Three horse-lengths on the right flank
+of the leading battery in line with the front rank or gun leaders.</p>
+
+<p>8. <span class="smcap">Brigade Serjeant-Major.</span> <i>In line, in column, and in
+échelon.</i>—Covering the adjutant at one horse-length distance.</p>
+
+<p>9. <span class="smcap">Brigade Trumpeter.</span>—With brigade commander.</p>
+
+<p>10. <span class="smcap">Battery Staff-Serjeants.</span> <i>In line and in column of
+batteries.</i>—One horse-length in rear of the flank subsections; the
+serjeant-major on the right.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>In quarter column of batteries, full and close interval.</i>—As in
+line, but half a horse-length in rear.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column.</i>—The serjeant-major and the
+quarter-master-serjeant in the centre of the leading and rear section
+respectively in line with the gun axles. In mountain artillery as for
+line.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and in column of route.</i>—The
+serjeant-major on the off side of the leading gun in line with
+the leaders (in column of route, with the battery commander); the
+quarter-master-serjeant one horse-length in rear of the rear carriage
+in line with and on the left of the captain.</p>
+
+<p>11. <span class="smcap">Serjeant-Farrier and Mounted Shoeing-Smith.</span> <i>In
+line.</i>—The farrier, one horse-length in rear of No. 2 subsection,
+and the shoeing-smith (saddler in a British mountain battery) the same
+distance in rear of No. 5.</p>
+
+<p><i>In quarter column of batteries, full and close interval.</i>—As in
+line, but half a horse-length in rear.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column.</i>—One horse-length in rear of the rear
+carriages, the farrier in rear of that on the right. In mountain
+artillery as for line.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and in column of route.</i>—One
+horse-length in rear of the captain and quartermaster-serjeant, except
+in mountain artillery, where they will be in single file, farrier
+leading.</p>
+
+<p>12. <span class="smcap">Trumpeters.</span>—One with the battery commander, the other
+with the captain.</p>
+
+<p>13. <span class="smcap">Nos. 1.</span>—Of horse artillery, on the left of the lead
+driver of the gun or with their detachments. (<a href="#Para_134"><i>See</i> Sec.
+<b>134</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Of field artillery, on the left of their gun leaders.</p>
+
+<p>Of mountain and heavy artillery at drill and manœuvre in front of their
+subsections.</p>
+
+<p>14. <span class="smcap">Coverers.</span>—On the left of their wagon leaders (of heavy
+artillery in front).</p>
+
+<p>15. <span class="smcap">Patrol, Range-Takers, Signallers, and Observers.</span>—<i>In
+line.</i>—In line one horse-length in rear of the centre of the
+battery from right to left in the order named; at open files when the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</span>
+battery is at full or half interval; at close files when it is at close
+interval.</p>
+
+<p>In mountain artillery these men are dismounted and form in single rank
+one pace in rear of the centre of the battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and column of route.</i>—In a column of
+parties from front to rear in the order named; the men of each party
+abreast of one another, and the rear party one horse-length in front of
+the leading section commanders.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column or quarter column.</i>—In column as above, one
+horse-length on the right flank of the centre of the battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In quarter column of batteries full or close interval.</i>—As in
+line, but at half a horse-length distance.</p>
+
+<p>16. <span class="smcap">Spare Horses.</span> <i>In line.</i>—In the serrefile rank in
+rear of the centre of their sections, those of the centre section on
+the left of the line of patrols, range-takers, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>In quarter column of batteries, full or close interval.</i>—One
+horse-length in rear of the rear battery. Those of the leading battery
+on the right, and those of the rear battery on the left.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Mountain artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>17. <span class="smcap">Senior Driver</span> N.C.O. <i>of British Mountain Batteries</i>,
+(Driver Havildar Major).</p>
+
+<p><i>In line.</i>—One pace in rear of the pioneer mule of the right
+section.</p>
+
+<p><i>In action.</i>—He is in charge of the firing battery mules.</p>
+
+<p>18. <span class="smcap">Pioneer Mules.</span> In column of route and
+subsections.—Leading their section.</p>
+
+<p><i>On all other occasions.</i>—In the centre of the section, in line
+with the second ammunition mule.</p>
+
+<p>Two gunners, or one only if short-handed, per subsection are detailed
+as pioneers, and walk alongside the pioneer mules in the order of march.</p>
+
+<p>19. <span class="smcap">Relief Mules with Firing Battery.</span> <i>In
+line.</i>—Distributed in rear of the 2nd ammunition mules.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</span></p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column and in column of subsections.</i>—Following in
+rear of the firing battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of route.</i>—With their subsections.</p>
+
+<p>20. <span class="smcap">Wheel and Axle Mule.</span> (10-pr. B.L. equipment only.) <i>In
+line and battery column.</i>—One yard in rear of the pioneer mule of
+the centre section.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections.</i>—One yard in rear of the last mule of
+the relief mules with the firing battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of route.</i>—The last of the firing battery mules of its
+subsection.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Indian mountain batteries.</i></p>
+
+<p>21. <span class="smcap">Indian Officers.</span> <i>In line at close order and in battery
+column.</i>—One horse-length in rear of the centre of firing battery
+of their sections.</p>
+
+<p><i>At drill and in action.</i>—Two native officers assist the captain,
+the third is with the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p><i>On all other occasions.</i>—On the outer flank of and near the rear
+of their sections.</p>
+
+<p>22. <span class="smcap">Battery Staff-Serjeants.</span>—The havildar-major and
+quartermaster-havildar as for the battery serjeant-major and battery
+quartermaster-serjeant, but at one pace instead of a horse-length
+distance.</p>
+
+<p>23. <span class="smcap">Pay Havildar.</span>—<i>In line</i> in rear of No. 3 subsection.</p>
+
+<p><i>In battery column.</i>—In rear of right subsection of centre
+section.</p>
+
+<p><i>In column of subsections and column of route.</i>—In front of the
+quartermaster-havildar.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_130" class="f120"><b>130.</b> <i>Commands and signals.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Orders may be given:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; i. By word of command.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;ii. By signal.</li>
+<li class="isub4">iii. By trumpet sound.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p class="center"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</span>
+<i>Words of command.</i></p>
+
+<p>2. Direct word of command is not suitable for any larger body at the
+halt than a brigade, or on the move than a battery.</p>
+
+<p>3. All words of command should be given in a firm and explicit manner,
+and loud enough to be heard by all concerned. The executive part of the
+command must be clearly distinguished from the preparatory part, and
+must not follow it too quickly. <b>Commands will be accompanied by the
+corresponding signals.</b></p>
+
+<p>4. Battery commanders repeat the brigade whistle and then give their
+own executive word or signal.</p>
+
+<p>Section commanders, as a rule, command by signal, and give orders by
+word of mouth only in case of necessity.</p>
+
+<p>Nos. 1 do not repeat commands or signals.</p>
+
+<p>The leader of every unit is responsible that the command is passed on
+correctly to the next leader.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Signals.</i></p>
+
+<p>5. The following signals are to be employed to represent the words of
+command mentioned:—</p>
+
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="fs_110 bb">
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc"><i>Signal.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdc bl"><i>To Indicate.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr_top" rowspan="3">i.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm swung from rear to front</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Advance</i>,” <i>or</i> “<i>Forward</i>,”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">below the shoulder, finishing</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">or “<i>Commence movement</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">with the hand pointing to the front.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">ii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm circled above the head.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Retire</i>,” or “<i>Subsections—Right</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>about wheel</i>.” (In mountain batteries)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<i>Left reverse</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">iii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Hand raised in line with the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Walk</i>,” or “<i>Quick-time</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">shoulder, elbow bent, and close</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">to the side.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">iv.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Clenched hand moved up and</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Trot</i>” or “<i>Double</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">down between thigh and shoulder.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">v.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Circular movement of hand below</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Gallop</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the shoulder in a vertical plane.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">vi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm raised at full extent above</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Halt</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the head.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">vii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Body or horse turned in the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Incline</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">required direction and arm extended</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">in a line with the shoulder.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">viii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Clenched hand brought to the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Right</i> (or <i>left</i>) <i>take ground</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">shoulder, and the arm then extended</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">sharply in the required direction</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">two or three times.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="3">ix.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Circular movement of extended arm</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Shoulders</i>,” or “<i>Wheel</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">arm in line with the shoulder in the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">required direction.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="4">x.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm waved from above the head</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Sections right</i> (or <i>left</i>) <i>wheel</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">to a position in line with the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">shoulder, pointing in the required</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">direction.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="13">xi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm waved horizontally from right</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">1. “<i>Form line</i>” from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">to left and back again as though</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">battery column or line</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">cutting with a sword, finishing with</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of battery columns or mass.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the delivery of a point to the front.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="9">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">2. “<i>Form mass</i>” from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">line, column of route</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">or column of sections.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">3. “<i>Advance in battery</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>column</i>” (for a single</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">battery in line) or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<i>Advance in mass</i>”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">(from brigade in line).
+               <span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">xii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Two or three slight movements</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Form line</i>” from échelon.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">of the open hand, palm to the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">front (arm extended, hand waist</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">high) denoting a forward movement,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">looking to each flank in turn.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xiii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">As above, but arm to the rear,</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Form échelon</i>” from line.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">denoting a backward movement.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xiv.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Two or three slight movements of</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Dismount</i>” or “<i>Lie down</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the open hand towards the ground.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xv.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Two or three slight movements with</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Mount</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the open hand upwards (palm up).</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xvi.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Arm raised as for “<i>Halt</i>” and then</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<i>Action</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">pointed to the ground.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xvii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Weapon held up above and as if</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Enemy in sight in</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">guarding the head.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>small numbers</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xviii.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">As in xvii, but weapon raised</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>Enemy in sight in</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">and lowered frequently.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>large numbers</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="2">xix.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Weapon held up at full extent of</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“<i>No enemy in sight</i>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">arm, point of muzzle uppermost.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>Signals for formations from line also apply to échelon.</p>
+
+<p>For signals to first line wagons in action, <a href="#Para_201"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>201</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>6. Officers giving signals should, as far as possible, face the same
+way as those to whom the signals are made, but when a signal ordering a
+change of direction is made, the body or horse should be turned in the
+required direction.</p>
+
+<p>All signals should be made with whichever arm will show most clearly
+what is meant.</p>
+
+<p>In order to ensure uniformity in the system of giving signals, they
+must be practised in the riding school.</p>
+
+<p>7. Signals of position, such as “<i>Halt</i>” or “<i>Incline</i>,”
+should be maintained. Signals of movement, such as “<i>Advance</i>” or
+“<i>Shoulders</i>,” should be repeated until it is clear that they are
+understood.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</span></p>
+
+<p>8. The whistle (<a href="#Para_201"><i>see also</i> Sec. <b>201</b></a>) will be used:—</p>
+
+<p>i. By brigade and battery commanders to draw attention to a signal
+about to be made—a short blast. The whistle must not be used when
+approaching guns or infantry already in action.</p>
+
+<p>ii. To turn out troops from bivouac or camp to fall in or to occupy
+previously arranged positions—a succession of alternate long and short
+blasts.</p>
+
+<p>When a battery is manœuvring as part of a brigade, the battery
+commander will only repeat the brigade commander’s whistle, to whom he
+will look for his signal.</p>
+
+<p>Section commanders will wait for their battery commander’s whistle and
+act on his signals, not on those of the brigade commander.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Field calls.</i></p>
+
+<p>9. The following field calls should be understood, and such as are
+applicable maybe used <i>see</i> (Trumpet and Bugle Sounds for the
+Army):—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">“Forward” <i>or</i> “advance.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Walk.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Trot.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Gallop.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Charge.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“March.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Halt.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Annul,” <i>or</i> “As you were.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Troops, half-right.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Troops, half-left.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Form line.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Retire” or “Troops right (or left) about wheel,”</li>
+<li class="isub4">or (for artillery) “Subsections—Right about wheel.”
+           <span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</span></li>
+<li class="isub2">“Squadron columns.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Head of column change direction, half-right.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Head of column change direction, half-left.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Pursue.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Rally,” <i>or</i> “Close.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Mass.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“March at ease,” <i>or</i> “Sit at ease.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Attention.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Stand to your horses.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Prepare to mount, or dismount.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Mount.”</li>
+<li class="isub2">“Dismount.”</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p id="Para_131" class="f120"><b>131.</b> <i>Leading and dressing.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. To preserve uniformity of movement, men and horses must be trained
+to maintain the regular pace of trot and gallop.</p>
+
+<p>For the same reason the trot and gallop must commence simultaneously
+throughout the battery.</p>
+
+<p>As large bodies cannot move in perfect order as rapidly as smaller
+bodies, the leader must regulate the pace accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>2. The “<i>battery leader</i>” is the officer personally leading and
+controlling the movements of the battery. He should be well to the
+front.</p>
+
+<p>Should the battery commander for any reason temporarily cease to act as
+battery leader, his place will be taken by the senior section commander.</p>
+
+<p>3. The “<i>battery guide</i>” is the commander of the directing
+section, which is the second from the right (or in column and échelon
+the leading section). He is responsible for the direction and pace of
+the battery, following and conforming to the movements of the battery
+leader.</p>
+
+<p>The other sections will keep their relative positions from the
+directing section.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. Similarly in brigade the officer personally leading is the
+“<i>brigade leader</i>,” and the battery leader of the second battery
+from the right the “<i>brigade guide</i>.” A line of columns is
+considered a line in all matters connected with dressing.</p>
+
+<p>In échelon or column movements the battery leader of the leading
+battery is the brigade guide.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_132" class="f120"><b>132.</b> <i>Wheeling.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When wheeling, dressing is to the opposite flank to that to which
+the wheel is made. This flank regulates the pace at which the wheel is
+made, care being taken that the correct interval is preserved from the
+pivot.</p>
+
+<p>2. To wheel half or quarter, right or left, the word of command
+is “<span class="smcap">Half</span> (or <span class="smcap">Quarter</span>), <span class="smcap">Right</span> (or
+<span class="smcap">Left</span>).” If it is required to complete the wheel to the full
+quarter circle, after having wheeled half right or half left, the
+command is “<span class="smcap">Right</span> (or <span class="smcap">Left</span>).” When a definite degree
+of wheel has been ordered no further command is required, the battery
+or brigade guide being responsible for taking up the proper direction
+at the conclusion of the wheel ordered.</p>
+
+<p>3. In throwing shoulders forward both flanks are kept in motion, the
+pivot describing part of a circle, and the outer flank and intermediate
+subsections by a compound of inclining and wheeling, conforming to the
+pivot movements. To perform wheels on this principle the command is
+“<span class="smcap">Right</span> (or <span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">shoulders</span>,” followed by
+“<span class="smcap">Forward</span>” when the required degree of wheel has been attained.</p>
+
+<p>4. In small changes of direction (which are usually done by
+shouldering) the battery leader takes the new direction and the battery
+guide conforms. When a wheel amounts to a quarter of a circle or nearly
+so, the battery leader must give the signal to wheel and if desired the
+word of command and place himself in front of where the centre of the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</span>battery will be when the wheel is completed. He gives the signal
+“<span class="smcap">Forward</span>” and moves in the new direction as soon as the
+battery is facing in the required direction.</p>
+
+<p>5. If it is desired to move the line or column consisting of guns and
+wagons to a flank, the command is “<span class="smcap">Right</span> (or <span class="smcap">Left</span>)
+<span class="smcap">take ground</span>,” upon which each carriage wheels at once to
+the flank named. To move each carriage to the rear the command is
+“<span class="smcap">Right reverse</span>,” upon which each carriage wheels about to the
+right.</p>
+
+<p>When horse artillery receive the command “<span class="smcap">Right</span> (or
+<span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">take ground</span>, or <span class="smcap">Right</span> (or
+<span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">reverse</span>,” if the detachments are in front or
+rear of their guns they wheel right, left, or about on their own ground.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_133" class="f120"><b>133.</b> <i>Markers.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The duties of markers will be restricted at drill to indicating the
+points for the assembly and formation of the battery or brigade for
+rendezvous.</p>
+
+<p>2. The markers for a battery are the battery serjeant-major and battery
+quartermaster-serjeant, who are termed respectively the right and left
+markers. Battery markers mark for the points nearest to their positions
+in the original formation. They are placed and dressed by the captain.</p>
+
+<p>3. The markers for a brigade are the brigade serjeant-major and the
+right marker of each battery. They are termed the brigade and battery
+markers respectively. They are placed and dressed by the adjutant.</p>
+
+<p>4. On the command “<span class="smcap">Markers</span>” being given they move to their
+places, are dressed by the officer in charge of them, and when dressed
+receive the word “<span class="smcap">Steady</span>” from him. When the formation is
+completed he gives the command “<span class="smcap">Eyes front</span>” and the markers
+fall in.</p>
+
+<p>5. When marking for line, markers face the new alignment, their horses’
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</span>heads 6 inches from it, battery markers opposite the points where the
+horses of the Nos. 1 of the flank subsections will be, and the brigade
+marker in line with, and 1 yard outside, the flank marker on the
+directing flank.</p>
+
+<p>6. When marking for column of batteries, each marker should place
+himself 1 yard to the left of the spot where the No. 1 of the
+subsection for which he is marking will rest when the formation is
+completed, and should face the front. The brigade marker faces the
+marker on the directing flank of the leading battery; the adjutant
+places himself behind the brigade marker and corrects the covering.</p>
+
+<p>Markers are not required for a single battery in battery column.</p>
+
+<p>A line of columns is considered a line in all matters connected with
+marking.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_134" class="f120"><b>134.</b> <i>The battery of horse artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is 11, of
+whom 9 are mounted. In addition a man is required with each section as
+section commander’s horseholder. He is numbered 12, and falls in on the
+right of the detachment of the left subsection of his section, except
+in column of route, when he rides with the leading subsection of his
+section.</p>
+
+<p>2. The senior N.C. officer of each detachment is the No. 1 in charge of
+the gun, and rides on the left of the lead driver of the gun, except
+in the case of “<i>detachment front</i>” when he is on the right of
+the detachment. The next senior is No. 7 the coverer in charge of the
+wagons, who rides on the left of the lead driver of the firing battery
+wagon. Having taken this wagon into action he returns with the team
+or limber to the selected position and is employed in the supply of
+ammunition as the commander of the wagon line may direct. Nos. 1, 2, 3,
+4, 5, 6 are active numbers (<i>see</i> Handbook); Nos. 10 and 11 are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</span>
+horseholders and hold the horses of the active numbers, except those
+of 1 and 6 which are held by the centre driver of the gun and wagon
+respectively. Nos. 8 and 9 are dismounted men and are carried on the
+first line wagon. The horses of the battery commander and of the man,
+who works the director, are held by the first trumpeter.</p>
+
+<p>3. A section of horse artillery, with full detachments, is shown in
+<a href="#FIG_26">Fig. 26</a> (the shaded figures representing the horses
+of active numbers).</p>
+
+<p>In cases of reduced detachments Nos. 6, 5, 10 are omitted in succession.</p>
+
+<p>4. A battery forms for drill and manœuvre as above. Detachments one
+horse-length on the right of and in line with the gun muzzles. This
+formation is termed “Detachments right rear.” Lead horses of the firing
+battery wagons one horse-length on the left of and in line with the gun
+muzzles.</p>
+
+<p>5. To decrease the front of the subsection the following formations may
+be adopted:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Detachments&emsp;&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Lead horses of guns one horse-length</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">front.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">in rear of the detachments covering</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">the centre.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Detachments</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Detachments one horse-length in rear</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">rear.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">of and covering the guns.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>In each case the firing battery wagons will cover the gun or detachment
+at a distance of four yards.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</span></p>
+
+<p>The front may be still further reduced by advancing from the right or
+left of detachments by files.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_212"></a>[Pg 212]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_26" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 26.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_26.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="289" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_213"></a>[Pg 213]</span>
+6. <i>To dismount and mount detachments, in line, close interval, guns rear.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">At the caution, the front rank advances</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Prepare to</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">one horse-length and halts; the odd</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Dismount—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">numbers, both of front and rear ranks,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">advance one horse-length,and at the word</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Dismount.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<i>Dismount</i>,” the whole dismount</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">together.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">After mounting, the odd numbers of both</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Prepare to</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front and rear ranks rein back and dress</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mount—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on the even numbers. The front rank then</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">reins back one horse-length and halts</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="5">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">Mount.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If this is required to be done with</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“detachments left” at close interval, the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">detachments must be advanced one</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">horse-length in front of the guns, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">then dismounted, as laid down above.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_135" class="f120"><b>135.</b> <i>The field battery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The number of men required for the service of each nature of gun
+is given in the handbooks. No. 1 is the senior; and the coverers, who
+are the next senior, are mounted non-commissioned officers. Nos. 1
+ride on the left of the lead drivers of their guns and the coverers
+will occupy a similar position as regards the wagons of the firing
+battery, will take them into action, and will return with the teams
+to the first line wagons. They will subsequently be employed for the
+supply of ammunition, as the commander of the wagon line may direct.
+The positions of the other numbers of the detachment are given in the
+handbook of the gun.</p>
+
+<p>2. In action the horses of officers and non-commissioned officers are
+held as follows. (<a href="#FIG_29"><i>See</i> Fig. 29, p. 306</a>.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; i. Battery commander’s and that of the man who works the</li>
+<li class="isub5">director by the 1st trumpeter;</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. Captain’s by the 2nd trumpeter.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</span></li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. Battery leader’s or that of the officer accompanying</li>
+<li class="isub5">the battery commander, by an orderly.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;iv. Battery serjeant-major’s by one of the battery</li>
+<li class="isub5">headquarters.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; v. Section commander’s by the lead drivers of right</li>
+<li class="isub5">subsections.</li>
+<li class="isub3">vi. Nos. 1 by their centre drivers.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p id="Para_136" class="f120"><b>136.</b> <i>The mountain battery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is given in
+the handbook. No. 1 is the senior and leads his subsection, walking in
+front of the leading mule. The gunners walk alongside the mules in the
+order shown in the handbook. In bad or hilly ground they help the mules
+whenever necessary.</p>
+
+<p>2. A N.C.O. is detailed to be in charge of and lead the 1st line mules
+of each subsection, and will be employed in the supply of ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>3. In action the horses of the battery commander and battery
+serjeant-major are taken by the 1st trumpeter, that of the captain by
+the 2nd trumpeter, and those of the section commanders by a N.C.O. or
+driver of their right subsection.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_137" class="f120"><b>137.</b> <i>The heavy battery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The number of men required for the service of each gun is given in
+the handbooks. The senior N.C.O. is called the No. 1, and the next
+senior, the coverer. The No. 1 is in charge of the gun, and the coverer
+in charge of the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>2. In action the horses of officers and non-commissioned officers are
+held as follows:—</p>
+
+<p>i. Battery commander’s and serjeant-major’s by the 1st trumpeter.</p>
+
+<p>ii. Captain’s by the 2nd trumpeter.</p>
+
+<p>iii. Section commander’s by a man detailed for the purpose.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_138" class="f120"><b>138.</b> <i>Battery drill.</i></p>
+
+<p>i. The formations of a battery are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index fs_110">
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp; i. Line.</li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;ii. Échelon or short échelon.</li>
+<li class="isub5">iii. Battery column.</li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;iv. Battery quarter column.</li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp; v. Column of subsections.</li>
+<li class="isub5">vi. Column of route.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The battery leader moves in the required</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">direction. The battery guide follows preserving</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl"><i>advance.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">smooth and uniform pace. The remaining</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">section commanders dress by the battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">guide and keep section interval from him, but</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">without constantly fixing their attention on him.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span>&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The Nos. 1 keep correct interval and distance</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">from the section commanders. If</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">obstacles are met section commanders lead</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">their sections round them, or direct individual</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">guns to evade them.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="14">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in échelon</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or short</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>échelon.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The named section advances, the others</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">échelon</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">follow at the distance ordered.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">short</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">echelon</span>)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from the</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<span class="smcap">centre</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">left)—March.</span>
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="12">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>retire.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">i. <span class="smcap">Subsections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Wagons and serrefiles follow their gun</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">round.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">about wheel—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">ii. <span class="smcap">Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl bt">Each carriage wheels to the right about and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">reverse—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">follows in rear of the serrefiles, who turn about</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on their own ground.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>Note.</i>—If it is required to make the rear the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front the order is “<span class="smcap">Guns front, Serrefiles</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">rear</span>.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p><i>Note.</i>—The retirement of a mountain battery at full and
+half interval is usually carried out by the order “<span class="smcap">Left
+reverse—March</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>Nos. 1 and serrefiles turn about on their own ground.</p>
+
+<p>On the order “<span class="smcap">Guns front, serrefiles rear</span>,” the leading mules
+step short, and the axle mules move to the front by inclining to the
+right, followed by the others in succession from the rear.</p>
+</div>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The odd subsections advance at the pace</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to retire</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ordered while the even subsections check the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>when at</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pace. When the odd subsections are clear of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>half</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the even subsections the battery commander</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>interval.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">orders “<span class="smcap">Subsection right about wheel</span>,”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and when the subsections are all in line again</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the original pace is taken up.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">The battery</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">will retire—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><i>Note.</i>—A line may reverse when at half</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">interval in a similar manner.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="24">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">All the section commanders turn half right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to incline.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">(or left) while the lead drivers of all the carriages</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">wheel their horses half right (or left),</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">i. <span class="smcap">Right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">(<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">Left</span>)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">incline—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and all move off in the new direction. The</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">lines of the section commanders, guns and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="8">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">wagons remain parallel. To resume the original</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">direction the order is “<span class="smcap">Forward</span>.” In horse</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">artillery the detachments preserve their</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">positions relative to their guns.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In a mountain battery the incline is</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">executed by every man and animal turning</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">half right (or left) on his own ground and</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+       <td class="tdl_wsp bl">moving in the new direction.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">ii. <span class="smcap">Subsections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl bt">In this case, the wagons follow the guns</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">half</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">instead of inclining independently. All resume</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the original direction on the command</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“<span class="smcap">Subsections half left</span> (or <span class="smcap">right</span>).”</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Inclining should only be done for short</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">distances.</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In a mountain battery each subsection</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">follows its No. 1, who turns half right (or left)</td>
+  </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">as ordered.</td>
+  </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to take</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Each carriage wheels at once. Officers, &amp;c.,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>ground to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">move to their places in column.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>a flank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In a mountain battery every animal is at</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Right</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">once turned to the right (or left) as ordered,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">take</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Nos. 1 and serrefiles turn on their own</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">ground</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground. The dressing is towards the axle</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">mules.
+                 <span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="19">8.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The closing or opening is done upon the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to diminish</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">battery guide. He moves straight forward,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or increase</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">while the other section commanders and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the intervals.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">carriages incline inwards or outwards, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">when at the required interval, move forward</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in succession. When all are in their places,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Half</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the trot is resumed by order of the battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<span class="smcap">close</span> <i>or</i> <span class="smcap">full</span>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">leader.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">interval</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Should it be required to diminish or increase</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="9">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the intervals without advancing the battery,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the battery guide stands fast, the carriages</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">reverse, move inwards or outwards, and form</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">up to the halt at the required interval.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Should the battery commander desire it, he</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">may order the formation on any section or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">subsection, when his command will be “<span class="smcap">Half</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">(<span class="smcap">close</span> or <span class="smcap">full</span>) <span class="smcap">interval on the right (or</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">left</span>) <span class="smcap">section</span> (or No.    ).”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="17">9.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The subsection on the named flank (or, in</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to advance</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the case of an advance from the centre, the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>(or retire)</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right subsection of the centre section) moves</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">forward, the section commander placing himself</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of route.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in front. The remaining subsections</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">incline to their right or left, checking the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pace as required, and turn forward in succession</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">when in rear of the head of the column.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In advancing from the centre, the left subsection</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the centre section follows the right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">route from</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">subsection, then those of the right section.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">the right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<span class="smcap">left</span> <i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">A retirement is carried out in a similar</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">centre</span>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">manner, the command being, “<span class="smcap">Retire in</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">—<span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">column of route from the right</span> (<span class="smcap">left</span>, or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">centre</span>)—<span class="smcap">March</span>.” The subsections wheel</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">about and proceed as before.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">10.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">This is carried out in a similar manner to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the previous movements, except that on</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>(or retire)</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">leaving the alignment the wagons move up</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">as ordered on the right or left of their guns</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of subsections.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">at 20 yards interval.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The command for a retirement is “<span class="smcap">Retire</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">in column of subsections from the right</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">subsections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">(<span class="smcap">left</span>, or <span class="smcap">centre</span>)—<span class="smcap">Wagons right (or left)</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">from the</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">—<span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span> (<span class="smcap">left</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In mountain artillery the advance or retirement</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or</i> <span class="smcap">centre</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in column of subsections is done in a similar</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(or <span class="smcap">left</span>)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">way, the firing battery mules of subsections</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">—<span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">following each other in succession, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the 1st line, when this is on parade, moving</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in the same order in rear.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">11.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The advance unless otherwise ordered is</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">always from the centre or directing section.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance in</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The centre section advances straight to its</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">front. The right section inclines to its</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">left and follows immediately in rear of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">centre section, checking the pace as required
+                       <span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to do so. Similarly the left section inclines</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">battery</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to its right and follows the right section.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The wagons of 3 and 2 disengage and move</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">forward at an increased pace so as to allow</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span> <i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the guns of the right and left sections to get</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">left</span>)—<span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">into their places without checking. This done</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="4">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">they drop back again.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">To advance in battery column from a flank</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the named section advances, followed by the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">remainder in succession.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="12">12.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">After the subsections have wheeled about</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>retire in</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the movement is carried out as in para. 11,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the section is now on the right following the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">centre section.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Retire in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">battery</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"><i>Note.</i>—In mountain artillery the retirement</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in battery column may be done similarly by</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Subsections</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">reversing, the order being “<span class="smcap">Retire in battery</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">about</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">column—Left Reverse—March</span>,” and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Wheel—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">movement is carried out as above when the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">reversing is completed.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">13.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The rear subsections of sections incline to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">their right and move up at the prescribed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of route</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">interval on the right of those in front.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to form</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">If the order “<span class="smcap">On the left form battery</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="smcap">column</span>” is given, the rear subsections form</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in a similar manner on the left of those in front.
+                   <span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In mountain artillery battery column is</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">battery</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">formed from column of subsections in the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">same way.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="12">14.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The right (or left) subsection of the leading</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">section moves straight to the front, the other</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to advance</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inclines and follows.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The rear section acts similarly, checking</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of route.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the pace until there is room for them to move</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">forward.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">route from</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In mountain artillery an advance in column</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">the right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of subsections is similarly carried out.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<i>or</i> <span class="smcap">left</span>)—</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="11">15.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The wagons incline to the left and move</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">up on the left of their guns at close interval.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to form</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The sections close up to quarter column</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">distance.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>quarter</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">Should it be desired, the wagons can be</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">brought on the right or at half interval by</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">quarter</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the command “<span class="smcap">Wagons right half interval</span>.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">16.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery column</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading section follows the battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to form line.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">guide.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The centre and rear sections incline outwards</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">line—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and follow their commanders on to the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp; <span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">alignment.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt bb">
+      <td class="tdc fs_110" colspan="3"><i>Special for Mountain Artillery.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">17.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>battery</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>form line</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The right (or left) subsections of sections</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to a flank.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">come into action at once in the required direction.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The left (or right) subsections wheel to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Line to the </span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the right (or left) at their proper interval,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">moving at a trot, if possible, and come into</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">left</span>) <span class="smcap">for</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">action on the alignment.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Action—March</span>.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_139" class="f120"><b>139.</b> <i>Brigade drill.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The formations of a brigade are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; &nbsp; i. Line.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; &nbsp;ii. Échelon or short échelon.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; iii. Line of battery columns.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; iv. Mass.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; &nbsp;v. Column of batteries.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp; vi. Column of sections.</li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;vii. Column of subsections.</li>
+<li class="isub4">viii. Column of route.
+        <span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</span></li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">2.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The brigade advances straight to the front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">at an even pace. The brigade leader gives</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the direction to the brigade guide, and the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">other battery leaders regulate themselves</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and consequently their batteries, by the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">latter.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="15">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="7">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance,</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in échelon</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>or short</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>échelon of</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>batteries.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The named battery advances—the others</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">échelon</span> (<i>or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">follow at the distance ordered.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">short</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Échelon</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from the</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">(<span class="smcap">centre</span> <i>or</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">left</span>)—<span class="smcap">March</span>.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="10">4.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in line</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of battery</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>columns.</i> </td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">Each battery advances straight to the front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">line of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">in battery column, the direction, dressing, and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">battery columns</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">pace being regulated as in line.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">5.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The batteries advance in battery column.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">The heads of the flank columns make half</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">a wheel inwards and move up in line with the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in mass.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">centre column, at 25 yards interval.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">With two batteries, the battery of direction</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Mass—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">moves straight forward, the other closes on it.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">6.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The battery of direction forms line and moves</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>mass to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">straight forward.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>form</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading sections of the flank batteries</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the front.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">make a half wheel outwards and move in that</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">direction till they have taken their correct</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form line</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">distance in line from the brigade guide. They</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">then wheel to the front and line is formed.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="8">7.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading battery forms battery column,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column of</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">continuing to move straight forward.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>route to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The centre and rear battery form battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>form</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">column and incline to the right and left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>mass.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">respectively, coming up on either side of the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form mass</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">leading battery at 25 yards interval.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">In a similar manner mass may be formed</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">on either flank.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="6">8.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column of</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>sections to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>form mass.</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form mass—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">As in 7.
+              <span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="15">9.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="7">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>advance</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>in quarter</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of batteries</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>from a</i> </td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>flank (or</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The right battery advances to clear the front</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the centre).</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and the other batteries incline to the right.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Advance in</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">They successively incline to the front and</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">quarter</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">close up to quarter column, the wagons of all</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">coming up on the left of their guns at close</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">batteries</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">interval (or on the right or at half interval if</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">from the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ordered).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">10.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>form</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>quarter</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column</i></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>of batteries</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The centre and left batteries reverse and move</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to the</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the rear. The centre battery takes ground to</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>halt.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">its left, and again to its left when in rear of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the right battery, and closes up to quarter</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">To the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">column. The left battery inclines to its left,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">halt,</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">again to its left when it has room, and takes</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">quarter</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">ground to its left when in rear of the column,</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">column of</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">also closing up to quarter column. The wagons</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">batteries.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">all come up on the left of their guns at close</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">on the</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">interval (or on the right or at half interval</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">right—March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">if ordered).
+                     <span class="pagenum" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl_top" rowspan="16">11.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>From</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">The leading battery moves forward till clear</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>quarter</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">of the one behind it. The centre battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>column of</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inclines (shoulders at close interval) to its</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>batteries</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">right and continues in that direction till the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>to form</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">battery guide has got his interval in line from</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>line to</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">the brigade guide, when it inclines to the left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><i>the front.</i></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">and comes up in line on the right of the directing</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">battery. Similarly the rear battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">inclines to the left and comes up on the left.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">Form line—</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">When the line is formed the trot is taken up</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp"><span class="smcap">March.</span></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">by all. The wagons drop into their places as</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">soon as possible.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">When this movement is performed from the</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">halt to the halt, the rear batteries take ground</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">to the right and left respectively, and come</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">up in line by a square movement.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VII.<br>
+<span class="h_subtitle">EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY IN WAR.</span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_140" class="f120"><b>140.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. F.S. Regs., Part I, lay down certain principles for the guidance of
+commanders in the combined employment of the various arms. A knowledge
+of these principles by artillery commanders is essential for effective
+co-operation.</p>
+
+<p>2. The instructions contained in this chapter are based on those
+principles, and are intended further to assist artillery commanders
+in the solution of problems which will confront them on the field of
+battle and in training their commands on a uniform system.</p>
+
+<p><b>These principles are generally applicable to any force of artillery
+acting under an independent commander, whether his command is of a
+temporary nature or not.</b></p>
+
+<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Characteristics of Field Artillery.</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_141" class="f120"><b>141.</b> <i>Field guns.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The principal characteristics of modern field guns are the flatness
+of the trajectory of their shell, the rapidity and accuracy of their
+fire and their power to deliver effective fire from concealed positions
+as well as from those in the open. Other characteristics are mobility,
+increased power of concealment, owing to the use of smokeless powder,
+and decreased vulnerability, due to the adoption of shields.</p>
+
+<p>2. The effect of field guns is most fully developed against troops in
+the open, either in movement or stationary.</p>
+
+<p>They may be used effectively against personnel in entrenchments, in
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</span>
+buildings or behind gun shields. Against personnel protected by
+entrenchments the effect will be slight unless the defenders are
+compelled to man their entrenchments by the action of the other arms.
+Against buildings the effect is usually limited to the rooms facing
+the guns, as the projectiles are arrested by a second wall, and their
+destructive and incendiary effect is not great. The destructive effect
+of direct hits on artillery <i>matériel</i> is considerable, but at
+long ranges this would entail a great expenditure of ammunition.
+(<a href="#Para_114"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>114</b> (6)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_142" class="f120"><b>142.</b> <i>Field howitzers.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Field howitzers by reason of their high explosive shell and the
+steep angle of descent of their shrapnel bullets are specially suited:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; i. To attack artillery personnel protected by shields.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. To destroy artillery <i>matériel</i>.</li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. To attack the defenders of entrenchments.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;iv. To destroy defended localities such as villages, farms,</li>
+<li class="isub5">or the strongly entrenched portions of a position.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; v. To support an attack up to the moment of assault.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. Their wide field of fire enables howitzers to cover a zone of
+considerable extent, and they are particularly adapted to the support
+of infantry in the later stages of an attack, owing to the steep angle
+of descent of their projectiles. (<a href="#Para_157"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>157</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Troops in movement or other targets presenting only a fleeting
+opportunity do not come within the normal rôle of howitzers, which,
+however, should be prepared to engage such objectives, if circumstances
+make such action advisable.</p>
+
+<p>3. The chief conditions for effective howitzer fire are good gun
+platforms, and facilities for both observation of fire and the exercise
+of command. A position behind natural cover is obviously preferable,
+provided these conditions are fulfilled.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_143" class="f120"><b>143.</b> <i>Heavy artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The special characteristics of heavy artillery are accurate
+long-range fire and great shell power, but these advantages are to a
+certain extent discounted by a limited mobility. The long-range fire
+of guns of this nature should be utilized to bring enfilade and cross
+fire to bear on the enemy’s positions. The sites chosen for them should
+be such as to facilitate fire being brought to bear on as much of the
+ground occupied by the enemy as possible. In normal circumstances these
+conditions are most likely to be obtained by dispersion.</p>
+
+<p>The fire of guns of this nature is of special value against shielded
+guns, fortified localities and buildings.</p>
+
+<p>2. Owing to the limited mobility of these guns and the fact that they
+are unprovided with shields, considerable risk may be incurred without
+adequate compensation, if they are placed too far forward, or exposed
+on a flank.</p>
+
+<p>Occasions may, however, occur, when to gain decisive results, it will
+be necessary to use them in line with those of lighter calibre.</p>
+
+<p>3. If well protected and placed on the flanks of a defensive position
+in an open country, their long-range fire may compel a turning movement
+to be made on so wide an arc, that time, valuable to the defenders, may
+be gained.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_144" class="f120"><b>144.</b> <i>Mountain artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. In country where wheeled traffic is impracticable, light guns
+carried on pack animals are the only substitute for field artillery,
+but the use of mountain artillery is not restricted to such country.
+Infantry requires effective support throughout the attack, and as pack
+animals can go practically anywhere that an infantry soldier can go
+without using his hands, batteries of mountain artillery are peculiarly
+suited to work with infantry in difficult country of any kind.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. Hills, woods, and broken or enclosed country, which might be
+impassable to wheeled artillery, present little difficulty to pack
+animals, and, as cover, which will conceal a man standing upright is
+sufficient for them also, batteries of mountain artillery will often
+be able to work their way forward on a battlefield without attracting
+attention, where the movement of wheeled artillery could not escape
+detection.</p>
+
+<p>Moreover, the utility of mountain artillery is not confined to
+supporting the infantry in the various forms an attack may assume, for
+in the defence of woods, in temporary forward positions occupied by the
+defence, and in rearguard action, its mobility and easy concealment
+will often enable it to render valuable service.</p>
+
+<p>In short, mountain batteries are capable of being of great value on
+many occasions when circumstances are unfavourable to the use of
+wheeled artillery, with which, however, they compare unfavourably in
+respect of shell power.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Principles or Employment.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_145" class="f120"><b>145.</b> <i>Objects of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p><b>1. Artillery cannot ensure decisive success in battle by its own
+destructive action.</b> It is the advance of the infantry that alone is
+capable of producing this result.</p>
+
+<p><b>To help the infantry to maintain its mobility and offensive power by
+all the means at its disposal should be the underlying principle of all
+artillery tactics.</b></p>
+
+<p>The primary objects of artillery fire should therefore be:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. <b>To assist the movements of its own infantry.</b></li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. <b>To prevent the movements of the enemy’s infantry.</b></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>These objects may be attained by—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">(<i>a</i>) Inflicting losses on the enemy, and breaking down</li>
+<li class="isub4">his fighting spirit.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>b</i>) Destroying his <i>matériel</i>.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>c</i>) Reducing the resisting power of fortified</li>
+<li class="isub4">localities and rendering them more easy of approach.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</span></p>
+
+<p>It is legitimate, therefore, to use artillery fire for any of these
+purposes, in so far as they contribute towards the end in view.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_146" class="f120"><b>146.</b> <i>Concealment.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The provision of suitable equipment enables batteries to deliver
+effective fire from positions in which they are completely concealed
+from the enemy. The batteries may thus be able to retain their
+mobility, and remain at the disposal of the commander of the force in
+the event of a change in the situation.</p>
+
+<p>2. <b>Concealment in action increases the difficulties of the hostile
+batteries, possibly even to the extent of conferring immunity from
+their fire, thus enabling the concealed artillery to devote its
+attention to the support and assistance of its own infantry.</b></p>
+
+<p>Although the employment of aircraft for reconnaissance has modified the
+possibilities of complete concealment to some extent, guns in action
+may escape observation from the air if they are carefully sited.</p>
+
+<p>Groups of horses and wagons in the open are very easily seen from
+aircraft and even when the guns are not visible may be an indication
+of the presence of artillery. Advantage should therefore be taken of
+woods, avenues of trees, or other features whenever possible to conceal
+the limbers, first line wagons and horses of artillery.</p>
+
+<p>The power of delivering effective fire from concealed positions is,
+however, limited. Rapid movement or very fleeting opportunities are
+difficult to deal with. Distant observing stations involving the
+passage of orders by mechanical means increase the difficulty. The
+amount of dead ground which can be left in front of the guns may also
+be a matter of serious concern.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_10_10" href="#Footnote_10_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</span>
+On the other hand batteries exposed to view will usually be compelled
+to enter into an artillery engagement for their own protection, in
+which they will start at a disadvantage. This is less likely to occur
+at the crisis of the fight when the struggle of the infantry at close
+quarters may monopolize the attention of the combatants.</p>
+
+<p><b>3. Concealed manœuvre favours surprise</b>, and should therefore
+be sought for up to the moment of opening fire, due regard being had
+to tactical requirements. Even if the enemy is at once able to locate
+the flashes the more vulnerable portions of the battery will probably
+have been safely disposed and some measure of surprise attained. The
+advantages to be gained from moving batteries into position under
+cover of darkness have increased owing to the difficulty of evading
+observation by hostile aircraft.</p>
+
+<p><b>4. Concealment, both as regards position and manœuvre, must
+invariably be foregone for adequate reasons. To support infantry and to
+enable it to effect its purpose the artillery must willingly sacrifice
+itself.</b></p>
+
+<p>To move in column of route on a road in circumstances where a lucky
+shot will bring the column to a standstill is to court disaster. On the
+other hand, when deployed, rapid movement over open ground exposed to
+fire for a short distance is accompanied by but slight risk; or, when
+the enemy’s attention is fully occupied elsewhere, movements may become
+possible which would have no reasonable chance of succeeding if the
+enemy was on the look out for them.</p>
+
+<p>5. Knowledge of the general tactical situation and discrimination are
+essential on the part of all who order artillery movements on the
+battlefield.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_147" class="f120"><b>147.</b> <i>Economy of force.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Artillery, owing to its mobility till subjected to effective fire,
+its great rapidity of fire and its power to fire effectively while
+remaining concealed, is able in most situations to conserve its energy,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</span>
+selecting its own time for action and realizing to a great extent the
+value of surprise effect.</p>
+
+<p><b>The principle of economy of force is, therefore, particularly
+suitable to the tactical employment of the arm, but must always be
+subordinate to the necessity of employing sufficient force to attain
+the object in view.</b></p>
+
+<p>2. When an encounter with the enemy takes place sufficient artillery
+should be deployed to support the advanced troops and to cover the
+deployment of the infantry. The remaining batteries should be assembled
+in positions of readiness.</p>
+
+<p>As the plan of action develops, tasks will be assigned to the different
+artillery units, and they will be brought into positions suitable for
+their purpose. If it is not necessary to open fire immediately they
+will remain in observation of the zones assigned to them.</p>
+
+<p>3. <b>Fire will not be opened with more guns than are necessary for
+the task in hand.</b> In deciding on the number of guns with which
+to open fire, the total number available, the frontage that they
+can conveniently cover with their fire and the extent and tactical
+importance of the objective must be considered. Efforts must also be
+made to foresee the course of the action, and to keep a reserve of
+fire power in hand to meet successive requirements as they arise.</p>
+
+<p>To justify the opening of fire there must be a definite tactical object
+and a reasonable probability of attaining it. Ineffective fire is not
+only a waste of ammunition, but affords encouragement to the enemy and
+gives him information. It should therefore be avoided whenever possible.</p>
+
+<p>4. <b>Expenditure of ammunition should, as a rule, be proportionate
+to the tactical importance of the objective and the probability of
+obtaining results commensurate with the expenditure.</b> In deciding
+whether to engage an objective its vulnerability and tactical
+importance should, therefore, be considered.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</span></p>
+
+<p>When an objective is both vulnerable and tactically important a
+considerable expenditure of ammunition is obviously justified, but
+important tactical objectives are frequently invisible or relatively
+invulnerable. The expenditure of ammunition in such cases must be
+governed by the urgency of the tactical situation.</p>
+
+<p>5. The objects of keeping artillery in hand are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. To be able to open fire on new objectives that become</li>
+<li class="isub4">menacing without disturbing the allotment of tasks of</li>
+<li class="isub4">that already engaged.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. To be in a position to deal with unforeseen</li>
+<li class="isub4">contingencies.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. To have guns available for any force detached to a</li>
+<li class="isub4">distance, such as a general reserve employed on a wide</li>
+<li class="isub4">turning movement.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The methods by which these objects may be attained are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">(<i>a</i>) By bringing batteries into action in concealed</li>
+<li class="isub4">positions, where they can remain in observation, their</li>
+<li class="isub4">fire power being in hand till they are actually ordered</li>
+<li class="isub4">to open fire. A battery need not employ the fire of the</li>
+<li class="isub4">whole of its guns; some may be kept temporarily in hand.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>b</i>) By keeping batteries in positions of readiness</li>
+<li class="isub4">in which they retain their mobility and can be moved to</li>
+<li class="isub4">other parts of the field.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>c</i>) By keeping batteries actually in reserve, if</li>
+<li class="isub4">their withdrawal from action or from positions in</li>
+<li class="isub4">readiness would cause delay and compromise the success</li>
+<li class="isub4">of any contemplated operation.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>It follows as a consequence of the above that the power of the Q.F. gun
+must be utilized on occasion to its full extent to compensate for the
+small number of guns employed on a given task.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_148" class="f120"><b>148.</b> <i>Protection.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On the march, artillery, owing to its inability to defend itself,
+requires protection which is provided by the other arms under
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</span>
+ the orders of the commander of the force to which the artillery belongs.</p>
+
+<p>2. On the field of battle artillery will generally be protected by
+the distribution of the other arms. When, however, guns are in an
+exposed position, an escort should be detailed, and, if this has not
+been done, it is the duty of the artillery commander concerned to
+apply to the commander of the nearest troops, who will provide an
+escort.—(<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec. <b>105</b>). In moving
+from one part of a battlefield to another artillery commanders must
+consider, if no escort has been provided, whether one is necessary or
+whether to avoid delay they should rely on their own patrols.</p>
+
+<p>3. When an escort is provided its commander is responsible for the
+protection of the artillery. This fact, however, does not absolve the
+artillery commander from all care for the safety of his guns. He should
+consult with the escort commander when necessary and should be ready to
+assist him with any available artillery patrols, when their employment
+would conduce to greater security.</p>
+
+<p>4. Once in action artillery should be able to protect its own front,
+provided there is no ground within effective rifle range upon which the
+fire of the guns cannot rapidly be brought to bear in case of need.</p>
+
+<p>5. Rifles are carried on artillery wagons, except in horse artillery.
+In action these rifles should, if considered necessary, be distributed
+to the gunners with the wagon lines, who should assist the escort, if
+one has been provided, in protecting these vehicles. This precaution is
+especially desirable in the case of artillery in action on the exposed
+flank of a force, where hostile cavalry may be operating.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_149" class="f120"><b>149.</b> <i>Intercommunication.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Intelligent co-operation depends largely on the receipt of timely
+information, and this in turn is dependent on the efficiency of the
+system of intercommunication.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. In open country where the features are bold and the field of fire
+and view extensive, infantry can often be supported more effectively
+from a flank than by batteries situated in its immediate zone; and
+the possibility of bringing effective converging fire to bear on a
+given locality may be capable of realization. For this to be done the
+divisional artillery commander must have the means of readjusting
+from time to time the tasks that have been assigned to the artillery
+brigades in the original dispositions for battle.</p>
+
+<p>In close or intricate country, on the other hand, where the view is
+restricted, artillery will rarely be able to do more than support
+the infantry in its own immediate front. In these circumstances the
+artillery and infantry may be formed temporarily into groups and
+the units thus associated must co-operate closely with one another.
+The limitations of central artillery control must then be met by
+an increased devolution of responsibility to subordinate artillery
+commanders. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b>, (7)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Artillery communications therefore involve two distinct ideas, viz.,
+i. communication between the divisional artillery commander and
+his subordinates; ii. between infantry and artillery subordinate
+commanders. Both must be kept in view and organized as far as possible,
+but the relative importance of each varies to a great extent with the
+nature of the country.</p>
+
+<p>3. The means of communication available are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Staff or orderly officers.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Mounted orderlies.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Artillery brigade telephones.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Visual signalling.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; v. Divisional signal service.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For the purposes of communication between the divisional artillery
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</span>
+commander and his subordinates orderlies are probably the most
+reliable, but the number of officers and men available for the purpose
+is limited, and moreover their employment involves the expenditure of
+considerable time and horseflesh.</p>
+
+<p>The telephone equipment with which each artillery brigade is provided
+is primarily intended to link up the brigade commander with his
+batteries. But it may also be possible to utilize this equipment for
+communication with the divisional artillery commander. When it is
+desired to maintain direct communication with the divisional artillery
+commander, and the nature of the country makes it possible, the
+telephone should be employed. It is impossible, however, to trust
+entirely to this means, and arrangements must be made to supplement it
+by others that will be available in the event of breakdown.</p>
+
+<p>Visual signalling is apt to disclose positions to the enemy and, except
+when the use of the heliograph is possible, is slow and uncertain. In
+any case the number of signallers available make it impossible to trust
+exclusively to this method of communication. In open country, and for
+lateral communications, where it is possible to conceal the use of
+flags, etc., from the enemy’s view visual signalling is valuable as a
+means of supplementing other methods.</p>
+
+<p>The divisional signal service affords a useful alternative. When it
+is desired to use this means of communication it will be advantageous
+if the subordinate artillery commander can station himself near the
+infantry brigadier with whom he is co-operating, as it is then possible
+for him to communicate with the divisional artillery commander by using
+the cable that connects divisional and infantry brigade headquarters.
+This line, however, cannot be relied on for urgent messages, as it is
+often very congested.</p>
+
+<p>4. For the purpose of establishing an understanding between infantry
+and artillery subordinate commanders the most satisfactory results in a
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</span>
+combined operation are obtained by a personal exchange of views between
+the commanders concerned before the operation begins.
+(<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> sec. <b>153</b>. (7)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>If this is impossible or if the artillery commander is unable to remain
+in the vicinity of the infantry commander he should be represented by
+an officer.</p>
+
+<p>5. It is of the utmost importance that communication should be
+maintained between the artillery and infantry commanders throughout the
+operation. It is unsafe to rely on one means of communication only,
+and two, or even more, should usually be arranged for. The mutual
+adoption of some system of describing the features of the ground,
+such as squared maps or panorama sketches, will often save delay and
+misunderstanding.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Co-operation of Aircraft<br> with Artillery.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_150" class="f120"><b>150.</b> <i>Employment of aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Both during the period of tactical reconnaissance which precedes the
+battle, and in the battle itself, the employment of aircraft may assist
+the artillery.</p>
+
+<p>2. If it is possible before a battle to ascertain the general position
+and number of the hostile batteries by reconnaissances from aircraft, a
+valuable clue to the probable grouping of the hostile artillery may be
+obtained and the allotment of tasks to his artillery by the divisional
+commander facilitated.</p>
+
+<p>3. During the battle aircraft can assist artillery as follows:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. By the indication of concealed targets.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. By observation of fire.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Aeroplanes may be used for both these objects, but kites are of
+value chiefly for observation of fire. The latter, however, can only
+operate in a wind of from 20 to 40 miles an hour. They can lift an
+observer to a height of 1,500 to 2,000 feet and can keep in telephonic
+communication with the ground. They cannot easily be damaged by fire.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_151" class="f120"><b>151.</b> <i>Signalling from aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The means of communication from aircraft are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Wireless telegraphy.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Visual signals.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Sound signals.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Dropping written messages.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Wireless telegraphy, in its present state of development, can be used
+only in a limited number of aircraft and will not generally be provided
+in aeroplanes allotted for work with artillery.</p>
+
+<p>Visual signals can be made by means of Very’s signal lights, coloured
+flags or weighted streamers. Electric lamps may also prove of value.
+Very’s lights are used in three colours; white, red and green.
+The distance at which they can be seen and distinguished varies
+with atmospheric conditions, but on a clear day they are easily
+distinguishable at 3,000 feet overhead, and if the sun is not very
+bright and in the eyes of the observer at a distance of 2 miles with
+the naked eye. On a clear evening they can be seen and distinguished
+as far as 6 miles. Specially prepared lights can be seen at greater
+distances. Red, yellow, or blue flags, 18 inches square, held out by an
+observer can be seen with field glasses at a distance of 1 mile with
+the aeroplane at a height of 2,000 feet. Dark and light streamers can
+be distinguished with the naked eye at a distance of 1 mile.</p>
+
+<p>A Klaxon horn in an aeroplane can be heard on the ground from a height
+of 2,000 feet and a distance of 1 mile.</p>
+
+<p>Messages may be written on special weighted message blocks and thrown
+over, or written on an ordinary form and placed in a weighted bag with
+streamers, or in a parachute.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_152" class="f120"><b>152.</b> <i>Signalling from the ground to aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>Any place where it is desired to have messages dropped will be marked
+by a cross on the ground, made of two strips of white cloth about 15
+feet by 3 feet.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</span></p>
+
+<p>White strips on the ground, 6 feet by 1 foot, can be seen from a height
+of 3,000 feet, and a prearranged code of signals can be made by this
+means. (<a href="#Para_205"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>205</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>On a clear evening Very’s lights fired from the ground can be seen from
+aircraft at a height of 2,000 feet and a distance of 6 miles, and the
+different colours distinguished.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Duties of the Divisional<br> Artillery Commander.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_153" class="f120"><b>153.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The divisional commander is at all times responsible for the
+tactical employment of the artillery under his command. The divisional
+artillery commander is responsible for the execution of his orders so
+far as they affect the artillery.</p>
+
+<p>2. When a force is marching towards the enemy and an encounter is
+anticipated, the divisional artillery commander will detail officers’
+patrols (<a href="#Para_240"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>240</b></a>) to accompany the
+advanced troops. These patrols will be found by the artillery brigades of the
+division, their number depending on the nature of the country and the front
+occupied by the division when on the march. As soon as an action
+appears likely these officers’ patrols will rapidly reconnoitre the
+ground on which it is probable that the force will deploy, and send
+information as soon as possible to the divisional artillery commander
+as to the nature and extent of the available artillery positions. A
+brief report received at the right time will be of greater value than
+a more elaborate and detailed report which is received too late to be
+acted upon.</p>
+
+<p>3. The divisional artillery commander will usually accompany the
+divisional commander on the march. He must be careful to let all
+concerned, particularly his patrols, know where reports can reach him,
+both on the march and in action.</p>
+
+<p>4. Should time be of importance and a rapid deployment essential there
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</span>
+may be no opportunity for a detailed reconnaissance by either the
+divisional or the artillery commander. If time permits, however, it is
+advisable for the divisional artillery commander to make a personal
+reconnaissance and report the result to the divisional commander before
+the manner of the deployment is settled, stating how best in his
+opinion the artillery can be utilized to further the object in view.</p>
+
+<p>5. In forming a plan of action the manner in which the artillery and
+infantry will co-operate should be clearly defined, and will depend, as
+a rule, on the character of the country. If the country is such that
+the task assigned to the division can be carried out by the troops of
+the division acting in combination under the immediate control of the
+divisional commander, it will, generally, be inadvisable to delegate
+the command of portions of the divisional artillery to subordinate
+commanders.</p>
+
+<p>Batteries may be able by crossing their fire to afford effective
+support to infantry other than that operating in their immediate front.
+To tie them down to limited tasks might reduce the fighting capacity
+of the division as a whole. In such circumstances, the bulk of the
+artillery will deploy and occupy positions under the orders of the
+divisional artillery commander, who will allot tasks to each brigade
+commander or zones in which he thinks their fire can be employed most
+effectively.</p>
+
+<p>6. The country may, however, be such as to necessitate the employment
+of the division on more than one tactical operation, in such a manner
+that their efforts cannot be directly combined. In such cases it
+will be advisable that the artillery and infantry should be formed
+temporarily into groups. <b>The units of the two arms thus associated
+for a distinct tactical operation should be under one commander.</b> It
+is the function of the divisional commander to organize these temporary
+groups. It is then the function of the divisional artillery commander
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</span>
+to convey the necessary orders to the subordinate artillery commanders,
+placing them at the disposal of the group commanders.</p>
+
+<p>It is the duty of a group commander to report to divisional
+headquarters when his special task is accomplished. When the special
+task has been accomplished, unless a new combined task is then to be
+allotted, the artillery of that group should be again placed at the
+disposal of the divisional artillery commander without delay, with
+a view to the issue of fresh instructions by him for its further
+employment. The artillery commander of the group is responsible for
+keeping the divisional artillery commander informed as to the course of
+the operation in which he is engaged, the general disposition of his
+batteries and the expenditure of ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>7. <b>Whenever a subordinate artillery commander is allotted a task
+necessitating co-operation with a certain force of infantry, whether he
+is placed under the orders of the commander of that force or not, it
+becomes his duty to open communication with its commander, reporting
+to him in person, if possible, in order to obtain full information as
+to the character of the operation that he is to support and as to the
+proposed method of its execution.</b> (<a href="#Para_149"><i>See</i> Secs. <b>149</b> (4)</a>
+and <a href="#Para_248"><b>248</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>8. The manner in which the divisional commander’s plan is translated
+into orders and in which these orders are conveyed to the artillery
+must depend to a great extent on the nature of the operation.
+Divisional operation orders lay down what is required of the artillery
+and contain such information about it as it is necessary for the
+other arms to know. If infantry and artillery are grouped together
+temporarily as indicated above, divisional operation orders will give
+particulars of the grouping, and will also state the task or mission
+that is assigned to each group. Consequently in cases where divisional
+operation orders are issued to commanders of artillery brigades the
+divisional artillery commander will usually only require to supplement
+them with a few technical instructions.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</span></p>
+
+<p>In his capacity as a subordinate commander (<i>see</i> F.S. Regs.,
+Part II. Sec. 10), however, the divisional artillery commander is
+responsible that the necessary orders are issued to his own units.
+When, therefore, divisional orders are not issued to artillery
+brigades, or when they do not give sufficient information respecting
+the artillery, it is his duty to issue his own orders, and he is
+responsible that they convey to the units under his command all the
+information respecting the intention of the divisional commander and
+the movements of the other arms which it is desirable for them to know.
+It will frequently be necessary to give these orders verbally, and for
+this purpose the divisional artillery commander may find it convenient
+to assemble his brigade commanders.</p>
+
+<p>It is his duty to make sure that the necessary orders are issued to
+the divisional ammunition column commander and that the latter is
+acquainted with the dispositions of the various artillery units.</p>
+
+<p>9. The divisional artillery commander must bear in mind that during the
+course of an action unexpected developments are always liable to occur
+and that the artillery must be prepared to deal with them promptly.</p>
+
+<p>Concealed positions have greatly facilitated this task. Batteries that
+are in action, but have not been located by the enemy, can often be
+moved rapidly to other parts of the field. The tasks allotted to some
+of these batteries may have become of minor importance and they will
+be available if required. Other batteries may have accomplished the
+tasks assigned to them and thus be at the disposal of the divisional
+artillery commander. Notwithstanding these possibilities, however, it
+may often be advisable to keep some guns in hand ready to reinforce
+guns already in action or to open fire in a new direction.</p>
+
+<p>10. As the action progresses it may be necessary to rearrange the
+tasks or zones allotted to artillery brigades to meet the changing
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</span>
+circumstances, or to order changes of position. The position of the
+divisional artillery commander during an action should, therefore, be
+chosen with a view to the facilities it affords for keeping in touch
+with the divisional commander as well as for observing the progress of
+events and for communicating with his subordinate artillery commanders.
+(<a href="#Para_149"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>149</b> (2)</a>.) If the divisional
+artillery commander cannot find a suitable position in the vicinity of
+divisional headquarters, he must take steps to keep himself in constant
+touch therewith, in order that he may learn at once all information
+reaching the headquarters which might be of use to him.</p>
+
+<p>11. For the purposes of directing and controlling the fire of his
+batteries the information that is of primary importance to an artillery
+commander is firstly to know exactly where the infantry that he is
+supporting is from time to time; secondly, what is its immediate
+objective; and thirdly, what it is that prevents it from attaining its
+object.</p>
+
+<p>The comparative effect of fire from different portions of the enemy’s
+position is, however, difficult to estimate from the artillery
+positions. The establishment of advanced observation posts may,
+therefore, be necessary to watch the situation generally, to obtain
+information from infantry commanders, and to report to the artillery
+commander concerned. Responsibility for establishing posts for this
+purpose will rest either with the divisional artillery commander or
+with the commander of the artillery in a temporary group. (<i>See</i>
+para. 6.)&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_11_11" href="#Footnote_11_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a></p>
+
+<p>12. The task of the artillery is likely to be much facilitated in
+future by the use of aircraft, by means of which targets may be located
+and the observation of fire assisted.</p>
+
+<p>The divisional artillery commander should therefore point out to
+the divisional commander whenever necessary the directions in which
+aircraft can be usefully employed in obtaining information which would
+be of value to the artillery.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Attack.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_154" class="f120"><b>154.</b> <i>Action of the advanced guard artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 68.)</p>
+
+<p>1. The advanced guard affords protection to the main body and obtains
+information; either function may compel it to fight. When the enemy
+is encountered, and offensive action is intended, the advanced guard
+should drive back the enemy’s advanced troops till the dispositions
+of his main body are disclosed, after which the advanced guard will
+usually be compelled to limit its action to holding the ground gained
+until the commander has formed his plan and deployed his force.</p>
+
+<p><b>It follows that the action of the advanced guard may alternate
+between the offensive and the defensive. The action of the artillery
+must conform.</b></p>
+
+<p>2. The commander of the artillery of the advanced guard will accompany
+the advanced guard commander on the march, so that he may receive early
+instructions as to his action. The artillery will be allotted positions
+that will enable it to co-operate with the rest of the advanced guard
+in carrying out the plan of action that the advanced guard commander
+may decide to adopt.</p>
+
+<p>The occupation of concealed positions, a wide dispersion of the
+available guns and a liberal expenditure of ammunition will then assist
+to deceive the enemy as to the strength of the force opposed to him,
+and may so contribute materially to the success of the operation.</p>
+
+<p>3. If the enemy is in strength the advanced guard will eventually
+encounter opposition which it is unable to overcome. The artillery
+should then occupy the best positions available to assist the advanced
+guard in holding the ground gained and in repelling any attack that may
+be made upon it, in which case the principles involved are identical
+with those discussed later under the heading “Artillery in Defence.”
+(<a href="#Para_158"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>158</b> <i>et seq.</i></a>)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. As it is impossible to foresee, when an advanced guard action
+is entered upon, where and when the main battle will be fought,
+considerations as to possible eventualities should not be allowed to
+influence the choice of the most suitable positions for the immediate
+purpose. Any breaking up of units that may result must be rectified
+later, if possible.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_155" class="f120"><b>155.</b> <i>Opening phase of the attack.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 105.)</p>
+
+<p>1. If the divisional commander decides to attack, the first functions
+of the artillery will be to support the advanced guard against any
+possible offensive on the part of the enemy in order to cover the
+deployment of the infantry of the main body. Usually concealed
+positions will be the best for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>2. If the infantry deployment takes place successfully and the enemy is
+definitely thrown on the defensive the next stage will be the advance
+of the infantry through the zone swept by the hostile artillery fire.
+The enemy will probably use his artillery to delay this advance and to
+inflict loss on the infantry whenever opportunity offers. His guns are
+likely to be concealed. <b>The task of the artillery at this stage will
+usually be to locate the enemy’s batteries and, by subduing the fire of
+those in action, to support the infantry.</b></p>
+
+<p>To carry this out observation posts must be established and every
+effort made to locate the hostile batteries or their observation posts.
+Valuable help can be rendered by aerial reconnaissance, but artillery
+officers and look-out men should be trained to detect readily the
+flashes of guns, the dust thrown up by their discharge and the other
+indications of the presence of a battery in action or of an observing
+party. When a hostile battery that is impeding the advance of the
+infantry has been located, every effort should be made to subdue its
+fire. The range should be obtained as accurately as circumstances
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[Pg 247]</span>
+permit, and the battery should be subjected to an accurate, rapid,
+and intense fire&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_12_12" href="#Footnote_12_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a>
+with the object of demoralizing the personnel and driving them
+temporarily from their guns or compelling them for the time being to
+cease fire. Should this object be achieved the hostile battery should
+be closely watched and any further attempt to intervene should be dealt
+with by a repetition of the same process. (<a href="#Para_223"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>223</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>3. Unless the enemy’s artillery by exposing itself offers an
+opportunity for its destruction, commensurate with the expenditure of
+ammunition involved, fire should be confined to those hostile batteries
+that can be located, which are impeding the infantry advance. If the
+hostile batteries cannot be located ammunition should be husbanded and
+efforts directed towards further reconnaissance. <b>The primary object
+being to assist the infantry to close with the enemy, an artillery
+engagement should not be entered into at this stage for its own sake.</b></p>
+
+<p id="Para_156" class="f120"><b>156.</b> <i>Second phase of the attack.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. As soon as the infantry reach a point where the effect of the
+enemy’s rifle fire begins to be seriously felt a fresh stage of the
+operations is entered upon.</p>
+
+<p><b>The forward movement of the infantry is henceforward dependent
+largely on effective covering fire. To be effective this covering fire
+must be developed by guns, machine guns and rifles in combination.
+The artillery commanders must therefore have a thorough grasp of the
+tactical situation and appreciate fully the needs of the infantry.</b></p>
+
+<p>The two arms must communicate freely and the artillery must watch the
+progress of the infantry closely. The actual method by which this
+co-operation should be obtained will vary in accordance with the
+general nature of the operation. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (5)</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[Pg 248]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. The defence of a position usually takes the form of the occupation
+of certain localities with unoccupied intervening spaces. If the
+terrain is suitable to defence these localities will mutually support
+one another and will each be supported by artillery. It follows that
+the attack must resolve itself into the attack of these localities, and
+protracted struggles will take place for their possession. When the
+country is intricate and enclosed the attacks on localities tend to
+become isolated actions and the system of temporary groupings referred
+to in <a href="#Para_153">Sec. <b>153</b></a> will be resorted to.
+The mission assigned to each group will be the capture of a certain
+locality. When the country is open the attacks on the localities, like
+the defence, can and should be mutually supporting.</p>
+
+<p>3. The fire which prevents the development of an attack on a defended
+locality may come from the locality itself, or from other localities
+which are able to give support, or from supporting artillery. Inasmuch
+as infantry has difficulty in bringing fire to bear on objectives other
+than those in its immediate front, it follows that the artillery fire
+of the attack must be distributed according to requirements on all
+objectives from which effective fire is being brought to bear on the
+attacking infantry, if it is to be effective in helping the infantry
+forward.</p>
+
+<p>Judicious distribution rather than over-concentration of artillery
+fire is therefore indicated, and to arrange for this distribution, and
+to allot suitable tasks or zones to each unit, is the function of the
+divisional artillery commander. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (5) and (6).</a>)</p>
+
+<p>The method of fire to be employed by each unit will depend on the
+nature of the actual target that it is engaging. A battery engaging
+hostile artillery which is seriously impeding the advance of the
+infantry by its fire should endeavour to overwhelm the hostile
+artillery as described in <a href="#Para_223">Sec. <b>223</b></a>. A battery engaging infantry
+should, by bursts of fire, endeavour temporarily to disturb the enemy’s
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[Pg 249]</span>
+aim and reduce the volume and effect of his fire so as to afford its
+own infantry an opportunity of gaining ground. These bursts of fire
+should become more frequent and intense as the infantry approaches
+the enemy’s position and the further advance becomes more difficult.
+(<a href="#Para_224"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>224</b></a>.) Covered in this
+manner by the fire of the artillery the infantry approaches nearer and
+nearer to the enemy till it reaches a point from which it is possible
+to assault.</p>
+
+<p>4. During the progress of the fight it will usually become necessary
+for the artillery to move forward to positions from which it will
+have a clearer view of the infantry fight and thus be able to afford
+to the infantry more effective support, especially against local
+counter-attacks. For this forward movement to be carried out with
+success and to attain its object certain conditions are necessary,
+namely:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. A line of advance that is either protected from fire or</li>
+<li class="isub4">over which the guns can move deployed and at speed, so</li>
+<li class="isub4">as to avoid the risk of columns of guns and wagons being</li>
+<li class="isub4">brought to a standstill under fire.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. The possibility of reasonable protection from fire</li>
+<li class="isub4">during deployment and up to the moment of opening fire.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>These conditions may be found to obtain for small forces of artillery
+such as sections or single guns, when they do not obtain for a large
+number of batteries moving simultaneously. In such cases guns should
+be dribbled forward a few at a time as may be found practicable. The
+advancing batteries should, when necessary, be supported by the fire of
+those in action. In cases of extreme difficulty it may be necessary for
+the forward movement to take place under cover of darkness.</p>
+
+<p>5. To support an attack with success a battery commander must be able
+to see the ground over which the infantry is advancing and also be able
+to control the fire of his battery rapidly and effectively, but the more
+cover that can be obtained compatible with control by voice the better.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[Pg 250]</span></p>
+
+<p>6. Artillery as at present equipped has certain limitations as regards
+dealing with rapid movement from under cover, such as might be the
+case if a counter-attack were made unexpectedly, and must reach the
+crest to develop the full effect of its fire against such targets. Its
+conduct in such cases must be guided by the principle laid down in
+<a href="#Para_146">Sec. <b>146</b> (4)</a>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_157" class="f120"><b>157.</b> <i>Third phase of the attack.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The infantry covered by the fire of the artillery will endeavour to
+reach a position from which it will be possible to deliver the assault.
+The distance between this position and the enemy must depend upon the
+ground and the resisting power of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>2. The bursts of artillery fire should become frequent and intense
+at this period, the object of the artillery being to demoralise the
+defenders and reduce the volume and effect of their fire so as to
+afford to the infantry the opportunity to assault.</p>
+
+<p>3. <b>Every effort should be made to bring a converging fire to bear on
+the immediate objective of the attack, such fire being by far the most
+demoralizing and decisive in its effect.</b></p>
+
+<p>At the same time no portion of the enemy’s position from which
+effective fire is being brought to bear on the attackers should be
+ignored.</p>
+
+<p>4. The number of batteries employed should be limited to the number
+that can be effectively controlled, and should be proportionate to
+the extent of the objectives that it is necessary to engage. Provided
+sufficient batteries are in action for the extent of the objectives a
+greater volume of fire, if required, should be obtained by an increased
+rapidity of fire from those batteries that have got the range, rather
+than by engaging fresh batteries.</p>
+
+<p>5. The losses that may be inflicted by wild artillery fire at this
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_251">[Pg 251]</span>
+period may imperil the success of the whole operation, and unless the
+infantry has confidence in the artillery the effect of the covering
+fire of the latter may be to delay and hamper rather than facilitate
+the delivery of the assault.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_13_13" href="#Footnote_13_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a></p>
+
+<p><b>Battery commanders must, therefore, do all in their power to improve
+their facilities for observing closely the course of the action and
+must keep the most complete control over the fire of their batteries
+that it is possible for them to exert.</b></p>
+
+<p>6. Whether the artillery can continue its fire until the assaulting
+infantry is actually on the point of closing with the enemy, or whether
+it should increase its range on the first signs of the commencement
+of the assault, must depend on the circumstances of each case. The
+distance between the combatants just prior to the assault and the slope
+of the ground are important factors. Where the ground in front of
+the enemy’s position is steep and broken this distance will probably
+be short, but a steep slope gives a better view to the artillery and
+small errors in elevation will not be so dangerous to the infantry as
+on flat ground. If the ground is flat and exposed the infantry may
+be compelled to assault from further off, while the artillery will
+experience increased difficulties in estimating the relative positions
+of the combatants, and errors in elevation and fuze setting will be
+more dangerous to the attacking infantry.</p>
+
+<p>The advantages of artillery support at this period are, however, so
+great that the danger from a few shells falling short must not be
+allowed to prevent the artillery from continuing their fire till
+the latest possible moment. (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec.
+<b>106</b>.)</p>
+
+<p>By changing from time shrapnel to percussion shrapnel it may be
+possible to defer the moment when the artillery must cease firing at
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_252">[Pg 252]</span>
+the immediate objective of the infantry. When it is no longer possible
+to continue firing at that objective the range of the artillery
+should be increased so as to search the rear of the position, but no
+considerable amount of ammunition should be devoted to this object.</p>
+
+<p>7. If the assault is seen to succeed, it is more important to move
+some batteries forward to pursue the enemy with fire or to support the
+successful infantry in holding the ground gained against a possible
+counter-attack than to continue firing over the position. The flanks of
+the locality that has been captured will often prove the best positions
+for support against counter-attack.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Defence.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 107-109.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_158" class="f120"><b>158.</b> <i>General instructions and preliminary measures.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When an encounter takes place a force may be thrown temporarily on
+the defensive by the numerical superiority of the enemy or by his more
+rapid deployment and greater readiness for action. In such a case time
+may be required in which to deploy or to bring up reinforcements, or
+possibly it may be desired to extricate the troops that are engaged and
+break off the action.</p>
+
+<p>2. If it is desired to gain time for deployment, or to bring up
+reinforcements, it is usually gained by the action of advanced troops
+or the occupation of advanced posts. The artillery plays an important
+part in the support of these troops and in covering their withdrawal
+later. To give effective support an early deployment of a sufficient
+force of artillery for the purpose is necessary.</p>
+
+<p>A commander may, however, deliberately assume a defensive attitude in
+one part of the field in order to exhaust the enemy’s powers, while he
+prepares an offensive stroke elsewhere. In such a case he will occupy a
+position with a portion of his force; strengthening it artificially if
+time permits, in order to reduce as much as possible the force to be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_253">[Pg 253]</span>
+locked up in its defence and to free as many as possible for the
+subsequent offensive. It is the action of the artillery in the defence
+of a position of this kind that is considered in the following sections.</p>
+
+<p>3. The defence of a position usually takes the form of the occupation
+of certain localities with unoccupied intervening spaces. (<a href="#Para_156"><i>See</i>
+Sec. <b>156</b> (2)</a>.) The troops holding these localities are supported
+by local reserves, whose functions include the attack of any hostile
+force penetrating between the localities and the recapture at once of
+any locality that may be successfully assaulted by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>In order to carry out this general scheme of defence the position to
+be defended is divided into sections each comprising one or more of
+these localities. Commanders are appointed to the sections and troops
+allotted for their defence, including the local reserves. The remainder
+of the force forms the general reserve, which is kept in hand for the
+decisive counter-attack. The artillery allotted to the position will be
+distributed, in accordance with the general scheme of defence, by the
+divisional commander after a careful reconnaissance of the ground, in
+which the divisional artillery commander will take part.</p>
+
+<p>4. The tasks which the artillery allotted to the defence of the
+position may be called upon to perform are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. To make the enemy’s infantry deploy at a distance, to</li>
+<li class="isub4">delay the advance through the zone in which the hostile</li>
+<li class="isub4">infantry is exposed to artillery fire only, and to make</li>
+<li class="isub4">this advance as laborious and as costly as possible.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. To prevent the hostile artillery obtaining the mastery</li>
+<li class="isub4">in such a way as to facilitate the advance of its</li>
+<li class="isub4">infantry.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. To combine with the infantry in the close defence of</li>
+<li class="isub4">each defended locality so that if possible there is
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_254">[Pg 254]</span></li>
+<li class="isub4">no line of approach by which the enemy can move without</li>
+<li class="isub4">being subject to the fire of the two arms in combination.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. To support local counter-attacks and, if possible, the</li>
+<li class="isub4">decisive counter-attack.
+        (<a href="#Para_162"><i>See</i> Secs. <b>162</b></a>, <a href="#Para_163"><b>163</b></a>.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><b>The distribution of the artillery will be settled in accordance with
+the relative importance of each of the above tasks in the general plan
+of battle and with due regard to the nature of the ground.</b></p>
+
+<p>5. When the country is enclosed and the field of fire restricted it
+will usually be desirable to distribute a large proportion of the
+artillery to the sections of the defence and to form temporary groups
+of the two arms as has been advocated in the case of the attack.
+(<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (5), (6), (7)</a>.)
+In such country the close defence of each defended locality is the
+chief requirement, and the other tasks assume a minor importance.</p>
+
+<p>When the country is open with bold features and a good field of fire it
+will often be found that the defended localities can be made mutually
+supporting, and that artillery posted in one section of the defence can
+assist the defence of a locality in another section better than the
+batteries actually posted in that section. In this case the formation
+of more or less independent groups should seldom be necessary, and the
+positions will be selected and tasks allotted to the artillery by the
+divisional artillery commander under instructions from the divisional
+commander.</p>
+
+<p>In either case it is inadvisable to commit many guns to action until
+the direction of the enemy’s attack is definitely ascertained.</p>
+
+<p><b>6. At the commencement of the action it is advisable that the
+artillery should be concealed as much as possible.</b></p>
+
+<p>If the intricacies of the ground make such a course desirable, it is
+permissible to post guns in open positions for the close defence of a
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_255">[Pg 255]</span>
+locality and to reserve the fire of these guns for the crisis of the
+fight. If this is done great care should be taken to conceal the
+emplacements.</p>
+
+<p>A ridge in rear of the main position and dominating it will facilitate
+the co-operation of the artillery with the infantry defence, provided
+the distance between the two is not too great.</p>
+
+<p>Positions where the defender receives the support of his artillery,
+while the attacker does not, are usually strong for defence.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_159" class="f120"><b>159.</b> <i>Opening phase of the defence.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The use to be made of the artillery fire of the defence during the
+opening phase of the attack must depend on the general plan for the
+conduct of the action. A commander may desire to draw the enemy on and
+induce him to commit himself in a certain direction so as to offer a
+favourable opportunity for early counter-attack, or he may desire to
+delay the enemy’s advance and make the progress of his attack as slow,
+laborious and costly as possible.</p>
+
+<p>In the former case he will reserve his artillery fire and will rely
+largely on surprise effect when he eventually decides to open fire.
+Communication must be established throughout the position and control
+must be rigidly maintained.</p>
+
+<p>In the latter case the artillery of the defence will endeavour to
+make the enemy deploy at a distance and to delay the advance of his
+infantry. The enemy will make use of covered approaches and will cross
+open spaces as rapidly as possible when exposed to view, adopting
+formations that are the least vulnerable to artillery fire.</p>
+
+<p>2. Searching the covered approaches when the effect of the fire cannot
+be observed is not likely to have the desired result, and will lead to
+the waste of valuable ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>The limits of the open spaces over which the enemy is likely to attempt
+to move and, if necessary, the range of any prominent objects within
+those limits should be registered (<a href="#Para_219"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>219</b></a>),
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_256">[Pg 256]</span>
+and all arrangements made to establish a belt of fire through which the enemy
+must pass (<a href="#Para_224"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>224</b> (4)</a>). <b>The fire
+should be of such a nature as to impress upon the enemy the certainty
+of loss if he attempts to cross open spaces without deploying.</b> The
+result will be to instil caution, cause deployment to take place at a
+distance, and make the advance slow and difficult.</p>
+
+<p>3. The enemy’s artillery will endeavour to support the advance of the
+infantry. The best way to defeat this object is for the defending
+batteries to be concealed. Batteries that are located at this stage may
+be moved and take up other positions, if such are available.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_160" class="f120"><b>160.</b> <i>Second phase of the defence.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>It is only in exceptional circumstances that the artillery of
+the defence can hope, by the effect of its own fire, to prevent the
+attacking infantry closing with the defence.</b> A new phase of the
+operations will be entered upon when the attacking infantry comes under
+the effective rifle fire of the defence.</p>
+
+<p>2. The object of the attacking infantry at this stage will be to build
+up firing lines in suitable positions from which to develop effective
+covering fire to support a further advance.</p>
+
+<p>From now onward the hostile infantry will be compelled to move in
+extended order by rushes; the number of men moving, and the length of
+the rushes, depending on the ground, the distance from the defender’s
+position, and the volume and effect of his fire. The shorter the
+distance from the position and the more effective the defender’s fire,
+the shorter will be the length of each rush and the fewer the number of
+men taking part in it.</p>
+
+<p>Artillery cannot hope to deal effectively with each individual rush.
+<b>At this stage the object of the artillery should be to foresee the
+positions where the hostile firing lines will be formed, and to subject
+these firing lines to bursts of fire of such rapidity and intensity as
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_257">[Pg 257]</span>
+to keep them glued to the ground, and to prevent them from developing
+effective covering fire.</b> The more threatening the hostile infantry
+is the more frequent and intense should be the bursts of artillery fire.</p>
+
+<p>3. The hostile artillery will do all in its power to reduce the volume
+and effect of the fire of the defence, both gun and rifle fire.</p>
+
+<p>If the hostile artillery is able to locate the position of the
+defender’s infantry the latter may suffer severely, and the power of
+the defence may be seriously weakened thereby. The artillery of the
+attack therefore must not be ignored, but instead of endeavouring to
+destroy the hostile batteries by an overwhelming concentration of fire,
+the object will be to neutralize their fire with as few batteries as
+possible, so as to free as many as possible to fire on the attacking
+infantry.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_14_14" href="#Footnote_14_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a></p>
+
+<p>4. <b>Infantry conquers and retains the ground. The principal effort
+must therefore be directed to bringing the infantry advance to a
+standstill. When the infantry loses its power of forward movement it is
+no longer capable of forcing a decision.</b></p>
+
+<p>When this occurs the enemy’s reserves should be expected and a careful
+watch kept for their appearance, so that they may be crushed without
+delay.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_161" class="f120"><b>161.</b> <i>Third phase of the defence.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. If the attacking infantry is successful in reaching a position
+from which it is possible to threaten an assault, no effort must be
+spared to increase the effect of the fire of the defence. If a forward
+movement to an open position is likely to contribute to this object it
+must be undertaken without hesitation. The principle laid down in
+<a href="#Para_146">Sec. <b>146</b> (4)</a> applies to this situation.</p>
+
+<p>Should a successful assault be delivered there is sure to be some
+confusion in the ranks of the attackers, who will probably endeavour to
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_258">[Pg 258]</span>
+re-form. The captured locality should at once be subjected to artillery
+fire, converging if possible.</p>
+
+<p>2. If a counter-attack is launched for the recapture of the locality
+the artillery will give it the most effective support that is possible
+in the circumstances. If time permits the divisional artillery
+commander should organize this support under instructions from the
+divisional commander; but subordinate artillery commanders must not
+wait for orders, when aware that such an attack is taking place.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Counter-Attacks.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_162" class="f120"><b>162.</b> <i>Artillery support to local counter-attacks.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. During the course of the fight all favourable opportunities for
+local counter-attacks must be seized. (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part
+I, Sec. 109.) These local counter-attacks must be assisted by the
+fire of any guns conveniently situated for the purpose. The time for
+preparation will usually be short, and subordinate artillery commanders
+must therefore often decide for themselves how this support can best be
+given and what proportion of the guns to employ. Extensive changes of
+position should be avoided and should rarely be necessary.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_163" class="f120"><b>163.</b> <i>Artillery support to the<br> decisive counter-attack.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 110.)</p>
+
+<p>1. The nature of the artillery support to the decisive counter-attack
+must depend on the nature of the ground over which it is delivered and
+the direction which it takes.</p>
+
+<p>It may be that the counter-attack can best be supported from the
+positions already occupied by the artillery in the main position. If
+that is the case it will not be necessary to keep artillery in reserve
+for the purpose. A change of zones or objectives may suffice to afford
+the necessary support.</p>
+
+<p>This will not always be the case. If the troops with which it is
+intended to carry out the counter-attack have been placed at a distance
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_259">[Pg 259]</span>
+from the main position, and if the direction of the counter-attack and
+the ground over which it moves prevents adequate artillery support
+being given from the main position, special provision must be made.
+Either artillery must from the outset form part of the troops destined
+for the counter-attack or batteries must be withdrawn from the main
+position for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p>Either course is legitimate, and the method to be adopted is a matter
+for the decision of the commander of the force. If he decides to
+withdraw guns that are in action every effort must be made to ensure
+their timely arrival in their new positions. As the success of the
+counter-attack is usually dependent on correct timing this is a matter
+of great importance.</p>
+
+<p>2. <b>The action of the artillery in support of the counter-stroke
+should be characterized by boldness.</b> The moral effect of batteries
+advancing boldly in support of their infantry may decide the issue,
+when success or failure hang in the balance.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Wood and<br> Village Fighting.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_163A" class="f120"><b>163</b> <span class="allsmcap">A</span>. <i>The employment of artillery in wood
+fighting.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. As obstacles to movement and view woods exercise an important
+influence on artillery tactics both in attack and defence. A wooded
+area increases the difficulty of observation of fire.</p>
+
+<p>2. A wood of small extent that is held by the enemy lends itself to
+envelopment, and the hostile troops will usually be posted outside it.
+In such a case the wood itself should not materially interfere with
+artillery support for the attacking infantry.</p>
+
+<p>3. A wood of large area presents a serious obstacle to effective
+co-operation between the attacking artillery and infantry. The enemy
+may have prepared the wood for internal defence, using existing
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_260">[Pg 260]</span>
+clearings and making others; or he may have taken up a position behind
+it, sufficiently near to bring a concentrated artillery and rifle fire
+to bear upon the attacking troops as they attempt to debouch. In either
+case the problem which confronts the attacking infantry is the same,
+namely, to issue from a belt of wood and cross an open space under
+close fire from hostile artillery and infantry.</p>
+
+<p>Provided observation parties can establish themselves in suitable
+positions and adequate means of intercommunication are available, the
+attacking artillery may be able to support the infantry from positions
+outside the wood.</p>
+
+<p>The most effective means of assisting the infantry, however, will be
+the employment of sections or even single guns in the wood itself in
+close support of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p>4. In dealing with a wood of considerable extent the best position for
+troops compelled to act on the defensive will often be in rear of the
+wood at such a distance from it that artillery and infantry fire can be
+brought to bear at close ranges on the hostile infantry as it attempts
+to issue from the wood.</p>
+
+<p>The edge of the wood should be prepared with abatis or entanglements
+and arrangements should be made for artillery fire to be brought to
+bear on any gaps between the obstacles or other places where hostile
+bodies are likely to assemble when emerging from the wood.</p>
+
+<p>Arrangements should further be made for artillery to support the action
+of local reserves against hostile bodies that may succeed in issuing
+from the wood, and to deal with outflanking movements by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>If a clearing of suitable extent exists or can be made within the wood,
+troops may be placed in position along the edge of it furthest from the
+enemy, the opposite edge being prepared with obstacles as explained
+above. Guns should be placed in position with the infantry, care being
+taken to dispose them so that their fire can be brought to bear on any
+open spaces likely to be crossed by the enemy.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_261">[Pg 261]</span></p>
+
+<p>Special arrangements should be made for the timely withdrawal of the
+guns to positions behind the wood should the infantry be driven back to
+the main position.</p>
+
+<p>5. Against troops located in a wood high explosive shell or percussion
+shrapnel will be more effective than time shrapnel.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_163B" class="f120"><b>163</b> <span class="allsmcap">B</span>.
+ <i>Artillery in the attack and defence<br> of villages.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Villages not only lend themselves to conversion into strong tactical
+localities, but troops are instinctively attracted towards them.</p>
+
+<p>2. In defending a village infantry will usually be entrenched outside
+it, in front of it, and on its flanks. Artillery should also be placed
+outside the village in positions where the guns command the approaches
+to it and the exits from it.</p>
+
+<p>A portion of the artillery may be posted in advance of the village at
+the outset, in order to compel the enemy to make an early deployment.
+In this case careful arrangements should be made for the timely
+withdrawal of the guns to positions on the flanks or in rear of the
+village, as the attack develops.</p>
+
+<p>As in the case of wood fighting it is important to arrange for adequate
+artillery support for local counter-attacks by the local reserves.</p>
+
+<p>3. In the attack of a village artillery fire should be concentrated on
+the hostile infantry as soon as it is located.</p>
+
+<p>When the enemy has been driven from his trenches the fire of the
+artillery should be concentrated on the village itself in order to deny
+its cover to the hostile troops retiring through it.</p>
+
+<p>When the attacking infantry reaches the village the artillery should
+push forward on the flanks and engage any hostile bodies posted in rear
+of the village to command the exits from it.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Night Operations.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_164" class="f120"><b>164.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. “Night operations may be classified as <i>night marches</i>,
+<i>night advances</i> and <i>night assaults</i>.” (<i>See</i> F.S.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_262">[Pg 262]</span>
+Regs., Part I, Sec. 129.) Artillery must be prepared to take part in
+any of these operations. It may also be required to participate in the
+defence, at night, of a position or locality.</p>
+
+<p>2. In a night march artillery usually marches at the least exposed
+portion of the column, <i>i.e.</i>, in rear or on the protected flank.
+In this case preliminary reconnaissance by the artillery is not
+possible, its preparations being chiefly directed to reducing the noise
+caused by the horses’ harness and by the vehicles.</p>
+
+<p>3. “The purpose of a night advance is to gain ground from which further
+progress will be made in daylight and not to deliver a decisive assault
+during darkness.” (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 134.)</p>
+
+<p>Such advances are made when in contact with the enemy, either as a
+preliminary to opening a battle, or to gain an advantage during its
+course. The ultimate object in view in each case may be either an
+assault at dawn, or to gain better fire positions. The immediate aim of
+the artillery must be to get the guns during darkness into favourable
+fire positions, ready to open fire at dawn. Careful reconnaissance of
+the positions to be occupied is an essential preliminary.
+(<a href="#Para_189"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>189</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>4. Night assaults may be undertaken to gain a point of support for
+further operations in daylight, to drive in an enemy’s advanced troops
+or to secure an outpost position as a preliminary to an attack at dawn.
+(<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Pt. I, Sec. 135.)</p>
+
+<p>The extent to which artillery can participate in a night assault
+depends principally on whether the assault follows immediately on a
+night march or is a continuation of previous operations. In the former
+case artillery can rarely be of assistance during darkness; in the
+latter, guns may occasionally be able to assist, provided thorough
+preparations have been made in daylight, and careful steps taken to
+ensure the timely cessation of fire.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_263">[Pg 263]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. In the defence artillery may be able to give effective assistance
+when the front to be defended is narrow, and there is limited ground
+over which the enemy must pass if he wishes to attack. In these
+circumstances all arrangements for concentrating fire on various zones
+should be made in advance.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Retirements and Retreats.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_165" class="f120"><b>165.</b> <i>Retirements.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 113.)</p>
+
+<p>1. It must be a point of honour with troops never to retire, without
+orders, from a position they have been detailed to hold to the end.
+On occasions it may be advisable to order batteries when exposed to
+accurate and destructive fire to cease fire temporarily; or they may
+be compelled to do so by want of ammunition. In either case they must
+remain in action and wait for the fire to diminish, or the arrival of
+more ammunition. When any movement to the rear is ordered it must be
+carried out in an orderly manner, otherwise it cannot fail to have a
+bad moral effect.</p>
+
+<p>2. Should it become necessary to abandon a position, a portion of the
+artillery will usually be required to establish itself as quickly as
+possible in positions from which the retirement of the rest of the
+force can be covered. The fire of heavy guns from positions overlooking
+the main position, combined with that of field guns which, owing to
+their greater mobility, may occupy more advanced positions, would
+usually form the most effective means for securing the withdrawal of
+the rest of the force.</p>
+
+<p>When it is a question of ensuring the safe withdrawal of the main body,
+artillery must be ready to take any risk, and loss of <i>matériel</i>
+is then fully justified.</p>
+
+<p>3. The organization of a rearguard to cover further retreat is the
+function of the commander assisted by the general staff, but, in order
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_264">[Pg 264]</span>
+that the most efficient artillery units may be allotted to such a
+force, it is necessary for divisional artillery commanders to keep
+themselves acquainted with the position and relative condition of each
+artillery brigade as regards losses and ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>It is also the duty of the artillery commander to appoint a commander
+of the rearguard artillery, and to inform him of the batteries at his
+disposal and of the name of the commander of the rearguard.</p>
+
+<p>4. The withdrawal of the rest of the artillery and its subsequent
+formation on the march is the next most important duty for the
+divisional artillery commander in co-operation with the general staff
+of the division.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_166" class="f120"><b>166.</b> <i>Rearguards.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. <b>71</b>, <b>72</b>.)</p>
+
+<p>1. The object of a rearguard is to gain time and then to withdraw
+without becoming too deeply engaged. This is best effected by
+compelling the enemy to halt and deploy for attack as frequently and at
+as great a distance as possible.</p>
+
+<p>With these objects in view a rearguard is usually strong in artillery.</p>
+
+<p>2. The commander of the artillery of a rearguard should, as a rule,
+accompany the rearguard commander, in order that he may have early
+information as to the next position to be occupied, its extent and the
+general dispositions for its occupation.</p>
+
+<p>3. Batteries in direct fire positions are apt to be pinned to their
+positions by the hostile artillery, and withdrawal from such positions
+is often difficult. As, moreover, the close defence of a position
+is rarely required in a rearguard action it will not, as a rule, be
+necessary for artillery to bring fire to bear on the ground close in
+front of the position. Positions in rear of the crest are therefore
+preferable but battery commanders must arrange to keep their immediate
+front under observation.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_265">[Pg 265]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. The flanks of a rear guard position are specially important and some
+guns should usually be employed in their defence. It is the duty of the
+commander of these guns to see that they have an escort. Any artillery
+patrols that may be available should also be allotted to them rather
+than to guns centrally situated whose position is more secure.</p>
+
+<p>5. While it is the duty of the rearguard commander to select the
+time and method of retiring and the position where the next stand is
+to be made an artillery officer should, if possible, accompany the
+officer detailed to reconnoitre this position in order to select the
+most suitable positions for the batteries and to supply the artillery
+commander with information.</p>
+
+<p>Subordinate artillery commanders must endeavour to have lines of
+retirement reconnoitred, in order to avoid interfering with the
+movements of other troops.</p>
+
+<p>6. The supply of ammunition to a rearguard requires careful
+arrangements to be made by the divisional artillery staff in accordance
+with the orders of the divisional commander. Sections of brigade
+ammunition columns may be disposed at suitable points; or sometimes
+small depôts of ammunition may be left in easily recognized localities
+at which empty ammunition wagons can refill. The commander of the
+rearguard artillery must be informed of the arrangements made for
+replenishing ammunition.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Employment of Horse Artillery<br> with Cavalry.</span></h3>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> “Cavalry Training.”)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_167" class="f120"><b>167.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>The paramount duty of horse artillery is to prepare the way for
+the cavalry and to support it in the fight.</b></p>
+
+<p>The principles laid down in the preceding sections regarding the
+employment of artillery apply equally to the horse artillery, although
+the special characteristics and functions of cavalry may call for
+modification in methods.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_266">[Pg 266]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. The main functions of cavalry in war are—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. To discover the enemy’s dispositions and movements.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. To screen and protect its own army from the observation</li>
+<li class="isub4">of the enemy and hostile interference,</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. To take its place as part of the fighting machine in</li>
+<li class="isub4">co-operation with the other arms on the battlefield.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>3. Cavalry is trained to fight either mounted or dismounted, and the
+power to combine shock with fire action, or to adopt either method at
+will, not only increases its independence, but adds materially to its
+offensive and defensive power.</p>
+
+<p>For the full development of fire power artillery is required, hence a
+force of cavalry is usually accompanied by one or more batteries of
+horse artillery.</p>
+
+<p>4. The duty of the horse artillery commander being to help and support
+the cavalry, it is essential that he should know the general intentions
+and tactical plan of the cavalry leader. It will, however, frequently
+be impossible for the cavalry leader to do more than give a general
+indication of his plans and intentions; the horse artillery commander
+must therefore study his superior’s methods, and endeavour to regard
+the situation, as it develops, from the point of view of that officer,
+training himself to appreciate his wishes rapidly and to anticipate his
+orders.</p>
+
+<p>5. The horse artillery commander and his subordinates must have a
+thorough understanding of the principles upon which the conduct of a
+cavalry fight is based, to enable them to grasp at once the object of
+each movement and to ensure co-operation on the part of the guns.</p>
+
+<p>6. The methods to be adopted by the horse artillery will vary according
+as the cavalry to which it is attached is opposed to cavalry or other
+troops and whether fire or shock action is to form the principal means
+of reaching the desired result.</p>
+
+<p>Where shock action is anticipated, opportunities for effective
+participation in the fight will occur with so little warning, and be of
+so fleeting a nature that horse artillery must be granted a greater
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_267">[Pg 267]</span>
+measure of independence than is the case with other artillery in the
+field.</p>
+
+<p>To take advantage of such opportunities promptness of decision,
+readiness of resource, and rapidity of action are essential, and these
+characteristics should distinguish all ranks.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_168" class="f120"><b>168.</b> <i>Position on the march.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. On the march the distribution of the horse artillery will be decided
+by the commander of the force. As a rule, the artillery of a mounted
+force is kept concentrated with the main body. When marching in column,
+horse artillery is usually placed near the head of the column, normally
+in rear of the leading unit.</p>
+
+<p>2. Whether the first line wagons accompany the guns or march in rear
+of the fighting portion of the column will depend upon the tactical
+situation; within striking distance of the enemy, and when the power
+to deploy quickly and manœuvre with freedom is desirable, the latter
+course will usually be advisable.</p>
+
+<p>3. When moving on a broad front, or across country, guns should be
+allowed a certain latitude in conforming to the pace and movements of
+the cavalry, advantage being taken of roads or firm ground.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_169" class="f120"><b>169.</b> <i>Escorts.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. In normal conditions horse artillery requires no special escort.
+When guns are detached from the main body or otherwise exposed, it is
+the duty of the horse artillery commander to ensure that a suitable
+escort is detailed.</p>
+
+<p>Should no escort have been detailed and should the development of the
+situation at any time render an escort desirable, it is the duty of the
+horse artillery commander on the spot to call upon the commander of the
+nearest body of cavalry to provide one.</p>
+
+<p>2. The principal duties of the escort are—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_268">[Pg 268]</span></p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. To give timely warning of any threatened attack.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. To keep hostile riflemen beyond effective range</li>
+<li class="isub4">of the guns.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. To cover the withdrawal of the guns if attacked by</li>
+<li class="isub4">greatly superior forces.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>3. It is important that communication be maintained between the guns
+and their escort. For this purpose the escort commander will attach an
+officer or non-commissioned officer to the artillery commander.</p>
+
+<p>4. The senior officer with the wagon line, whether in action or on the
+move, will make such dispositions as may be possible for their defence.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_170" class="f120"><b>170.</b> <i>The approach march.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The object of the approach march of a force of cavalry is to close
+upon the enemy in order to attack him. The principles governing the
+disposition of the force are dealt with in “Cavalry Training.”</p>
+
+<p>2. The position of the horse artillery will be ordered by the cavalry
+commander. As a rule, horse artillery will move massed on the flank
+of the cavalry in line with the head of the main body. The formation
+adopted must ensure elasticity and allow the guns some latitude in
+conforming to the pace of the main body when moving over undulating
+country.</p>
+
+<p>The guiding principle is that the guns shall be readily detachable and
+free to move at a rapid pace to the selected fire position without
+interfering with the deployment of the remainder of the force.</p>
+
+<p>3. On commencing the approach march the horse artillery will assume
+the most convenient formation, probably divisional mass or column of
+brigade masses, all wagons other than those of the firing batteries
+joining the first line transport of the force.</p>
+
+<p>4. The horse artillery should usually remain concentrated with a view
+to bringing the most intense fire possible to bear on the hostile
+formations when encountered, but occasions will occur especially in
+undulating country when it will be advisable to leave some guns on
+one ridge, to cover the occupation of the next. It may sometimes be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_269">[Pg 269]</span>
+advisable to place the guns on both flanks, in order to deny ground to
+the enemy by which he might otherwise approach.</p>
+
+<p>5. The horse artillery commander must accompany the cavalry commander
+during the approach march. He will thus be in a position to receive the
+earliest information regarding his superior’s plans and will himself be
+well placed to watch the situation and examine the ground on which the
+action is expected to take place. His headquarters will not actually
+accompany him, but such of its members as he requires will remain in
+close touch.</p>
+
+<p>6. As a general rule, the plan will consist of a mounted attack
+combined with the fire attack of guns, machine guns and, if the range
+admits, of their escort.</p>
+
+<p>In combining fire action with mounted action the chief factors of
+success are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;i. The timely separation of the guns, etc., from the</li>
+<li class="isub4">mounted attack, so that their fire may be available</li>
+<li class="isub4">the moment that collision is inevitable, and in order</li>
+<li class="isub4">that the freedom of manœuvre of the cavalry may not be</li>
+<li class="isub4">cramped nor the fire of the guns masked by the movement</li>
+<li class="isub4">of the cavalry which they are supporting. <a href="#FIG_27">Fig. 27</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">illustrates this principle, which generally holds good.</li>
+<li class="isub2">ii. The correct timing of the attacks, so that the enemy</li>
+<li class="isub4">will not be allowed to deal with the two separately. For</li>
+<li class="isub4">this reason it will often be necessary to push the guns</li>
+<li class="isub4">and machine guns boldly forward.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The nature of the country, the time available, the action of the enemy
+and the safety of the guns are factors to be considered when deciding
+to what extent the guns can be separated from the cavalry.</p>
+
+<p>7. As soon as the cavalry commander has settled on his general plan of
+attack he informs his artillery commander of the general rôle that he
+wishes the artillery to take in it. The situation is liable to change
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_270">[Pg 270]</span>
+with such rapidity that more than this is usually impossible, and the
+exact spot for coming into action, and the moment for opening fire or
+changing position, can only be decided by the artillery commander in
+accordance with the development of the fight.</p>
+
+<p>After receiving his instructions, therefore, the artillery commander
+proceeds to reconnoitre for positions and will have complete freedom of
+action within the limits of the instructions he has received. It will
+generally be advisable for the artillery commander to leave an officer
+with the cavalry commander, to keep him informed, as far as possible,
+of the latter’s plans and intentions.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_27" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 27.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_27.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="383" >
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_171" class="f120"><b>171.</b> <i>The advance into action.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The manœuvres which precede the charge take place in such rapid
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_271">[Pg 271]</span>
+succession that little time will be available for elaborate orders or
+dispositions. Horse artillery brigade commanders must therefore be
+ready to join the artillery commander as quickly as possible, when he
+proceeds to carry out his reconnaissance, so as to receive his verbal
+orders and communicate them without delay to brigade leaders.</p>
+
+<p>2. The two chief duties of the horse artillery commander are to
+reconnoitre a position for his brigades and to watch the manœuvres
+of his own and the corresponding movements of the opposing cavalry.
+To save delay and to enable him to devote more time to the tactical
+situation he should usually be accompanied and assisted in his
+reconnaissance by the commanders of horse artillery brigades.</p>
+
+<p>3. <b>The principal considerations involved by the above duties are,
+firstly, the selection of a position the fire from which will not
+easily be masked by the advance of the cavalry, and, secondly, the
+correct moment for coming into action, taking into account the time
+which must elapse between opening fire and obtaining effect.</b> If
+the cavalry machine guns are to act on the same flank as the horse
+artillery their commander must ascertain the position of the guns, so
+that he may avoid masking their fire at a critical moment.</p>
+
+<p>4. Every effort should be made to conceal the guns till the last
+moment, so that the fire may come as a surprise. A covered line of
+advance, to the selected position should, therefore, be sought, while,
+if exposed ground has to be crossed, the distance of the enemy and the
+possibility of coming under fire must be considered in deciding on the
+formation to be adopted, it may be possible to deceive hostile patrols
+by masking the guns with the detachments. The position itself must be
+suitable for direct laying.</p>
+
+<p>5. Both in the advance to and occupation of the position the artillery
+commander should ensure that the exposed flank of the guns is watched
+by artillery patrols, if no escort has been provided. If no natural
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_272">[Pg 272]</span>
+obstacle covers this flank in action, it may be advisable to dispose
+some of the guns so as to cover it with their fire.</p>
+
+<p>6. Batteries should be retained in positions of readiness as long as
+possible, in order not to lessen their mobility, should the situation
+change unexpectedly.</p>
+
+<p>The temptation of gaining a temporary advantage must not be allowed to
+lead artillery into premature action. Such tactics, far from assisting
+in the defeat of the hostile cavalry, are liable to divulge the cavalry
+leader’s plans and may give the enemy a chance of immobilizing, with
+a fraction of his own artillery, the guns thus engaged, while the
+remainder of his troops are able to manœuvre in a direction out of
+reach of fire.</p>
+
+<p>As a general rule, fire should not be opened until the cavalry is in a
+position to take immediate advantage of its effect. On the other hand
+the cavalry commander’s plan may render it desirable to open fire for
+some special purpose, such as to occupy the enemy’s attention or to
+force him to deploy prematurely or in a faulty direction.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_172" class="f120"><b>172.</b> <i>The fight.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>The most favourable moment for the guns to open fire will usually
+be when the opposing cavalry has definitely committed itself.</b></p>
+
+<p>2. As success depends on the result of the cavalry charge, it is the
+paramount duty of the horse artillery to concentrate its fire on that
+portion of the enemy’s cavalry on which the decisive attack is about to
+be delivered.</p>
+
+<p>The time during which this portion of the enemy’s force is likely to be
+exposed to fire being of very brief duration, effect must be sought by
+the greatest rapidity of fire and well judged distribution.</p>
+
+<p>3. When the guns can no longer engage the immediate object of the
+attack, fire should be directed on any supports or reserves that may be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_273">[Pg 273]</span>
+visible. It is most important that any formed bodies of fresh troops be
+dealt with at once.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule, it is only when the guns become masked from the hostile
+cavalry, that their fire should be directed on to the enemy’s
+artillery. If, however, the enemy’s artillery exposes itself while
+limbered up or is bringing a heavy fire to bear on the main body of
+the cavalry during its approach march, the artillery commander will be
+justified in modifying the above procedure to meet such cases.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_173" class="f120"><b>173.</b> <i>Pursuit or retreat.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. If the attack succeeds the artillery commander should send forward
+part of the artillery at once to support and assist the immediate
+pursuit. The object of these guns is to prevent the enemy re-forming or
+holding positions which would check the pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time the artillery commander should retain control of
+some portion of the artillery so that he may be ready to comply with
+any demand which the cavalry commander may make on him for guns to
+co-operate in an organized pursuit.</p>
+
+<p>2. If the attack fails the horse artillery must remain in action and by
+its fire form a screen in rear of which the cavalry may rally.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_174" class="f120"><b>174.</b> <i>Horse artillery with cavalry<br>
+acting dismounted.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Occasions will frequently occur on reconnaissances, in advanced
+or rearguard actions, and in the seizure of advanced positions, when
+mounted troops will be involved in a fire fight, where mounted shock
+action is either not contemplated or is not of primary importance.</p>
+
+<p>2. In such circumstances the mobility of mounted troops is generally
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_274">[Pg 274]</span>
+employed in enabling successive fractions to move rapidly from one
+tactical point to another covered by the fire of those at rest. When
+taking part in such a fight, horse artillery should be guided by the
+general principles laid down for artillery co-operating with infantry.
+(<a href="#Para_154"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>154</b> <i>et seq.</i></a>)</p>
+
+<p>As a rule an action of this nature will be initiated more deliberately
+than in a purely mounted combat.</p>
+
+<p>The first requisite is information. The second that, in order to keep
+in touch with the developments of the action—conducted as it will
+probably be over a wide area—the positions for the guns should be
+chosen with a view to affording facilities for movement as well as for
+effective fire support.</p>
+
+<p>3. A combination of a mounted attack with the fire attack will often
+form part of the plan of action.</p>
+
+<p>In this case the mounted attack will usually endeavour to gain the
+flank of its objective while the artillery with the dismounted part of
+the force brings fire to bear at the right moment, in order to distract
+the enemy’s attention and pin him to his ground and so prevent any
+change of position to meet it.</p>
+
+<p>4. Sometimes, however, it will be essential for mounted troops to drive
+home an attack against a locality on foot. On such occasions they must
+be formed for attack in depth, the object being to establish a firing
+line in a position as close as possible to the enemy and to obtain
+superiority of fire over him. When such is the case the action of the
+horse artillery will resemble that of field artillery in co-operation
+with infantry, and time will usually be available to draw up a
+systematic plan of attack. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>5. The assistance of horse artillery will also be of great value when
+a mounted force has recourse to dismounted action either with a view
+to holding a locality till other troops arrive or simply to denying
+it to the enemy. Its method of employment will approximate to that of
+field artillery in the defence, but full advantage should be taken of its
+mobility to support any extensions or changes of front which may be adopted.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_275">[Pg 275]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_175" class="f120"><b>175.</b> <i>Horse artillery in a<br> general engagement.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Occasions for the employment of shock tactics against infantry or
+artillery may arise on the battlefield of the future, as they have in
+the past. Success can, however, only be anticipated when the enemy is
+either taken by surprise or when demoralized.</p>
+
+<p>2. Surprise may be achieved by a skilful use of the ground or through
+the enemy’s attention being absorbed by the attack of the other arms.
+The enemy’s demoralization will depend on the action of the guns and
+infantry. Hence cavalry before attacking the enemy’s infantry or
+artillery must chiefly look to the way being prepared for it by the
+action of the other arms.</p>
+
+<p>Horse artillery must be ready to assist in this preparation, and it
+will be the duty of its commander, under the instructions of the
+cavalry commander, to ascertain how best this assistance can be
+rendered. To this end the establishment of communication with the
+commanders of adjacent bodies of troops will be advisable.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_176" class="f120"><b>176.</b> <i>Ammunition supply.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Previous to an action the commander of each horse artillery brigade
+ammunition column should send an officer or non-commissioned officer to
+artillery headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>2. The artillery commander is responsible for informing the ammunition
+column commanders as early as possible of the intended course of action
+and of the localities to which they are to move.</p>
+
+<p>The original positions of these columns should be chosen with a view to
+the facilities for replenishing ammunition and suitability for defence.</p>
+
+<p>3. If the force is to operate on a wide front, or if part of it is to
+act independently, instructions as to detaching sections or attaching
+orderlies to the various cavalry and artillery brigades will be necessary.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_276">[Pg 276]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. In the event of a cavalry or horse artillery brigade requiring more
+ammunition its commander will either send back the orderly to the
+ammunition column or apply direct to cavalry divisional headquarters as
+may be most convenient. The place to which the ammunition is to be sent
+and what arrangements, if any, have been made for its protection should
+be stated.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Mobile Artillery in the Attack and<br>
+Defence of a Fortress.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_177" class="f120"><b>177.</b> <i>The attack.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 118-125.)</p>
+
+<p>1. In the attack of a fortress the first object will be to capture any
+advanced positions which the enemy may have occupied. These positions
+will often be provided with field works the extent of which will depend
+on a variety of circumstances. To drive the enemy out of such positions
+the employment of heavy mobile artillery may be necessary, but
+opportunities will also occur for the employment of the lighter guns in
+support of the infantry attacks.</p>
+
+<p>These operations should be conducted on the same principles as laid
+down in Secs. <b>154-157</b>, every opportunity being taken to cause
+losses to the enemy which he cannot replace.</p>
+
+<p>2. During the siege operations the field artillery will be employed
+as directed by the commander of the besieging force. The whole, or
+a portion of it, may be temporarily or permanently placed under the
+orders of the siege artillery commander.</p>
+
+<p>The positions of batteries, which have not been placed under the siege
+artillery commander’s orders, will be selected by divisional artillery
+commanders, under the orders of divisional commanders. Care must be
+taken to ensure that the fire from these batteries will assist, and not
+interfere with, the siege artillery.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_277">[Pg 277]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. In the attack of permanent works, the fire of field guns being
+of little or no value, their use should be restricted to supporting
+infantry assaults, or to repelling sorties, which compel the enemy’s
+troops to expose themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Howitzers and heavy artillery, on the other hand, would usually be
+called upon to take part in destroying the enemy’s armament and works.</p>
+
+<p>4. Accuracy of fire being most important, the judicious selection of
+observing stations and positions is as important for field batteries as
+for heavier guns. The gun sites should be concealed and artificially
+protected, and, when possible, platforms for the howitzers should be
+provided. A good system of intercommunication and an efficient supply
+of ammunition are additional factors of importance.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_178" class="f120"><b>178.</b> <i>The defence.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 126-128.)</p>
+
+<p>1. In the defence of a fortress delay is usually one of the principal
+objects. The longer the close investment can be prevented the more will
+it assist this object.</p>
+
+<p>2. If assisting in the defence of a coast fortress, the first duty of
+the mobile artillery will be to oppose hostile landing parties. For
+this purpose it must be able to sweep the probable landing-places with
+shrapnel fire. It should, if possible, be screened from view of the
+ships supporting a landing. The best positions for opposing a hostile
+advance, from whatever quarter it may come, should be chosen in peace,
+and the sites for the guns thoroughly reconnoitred.</p>
+
+<p>3. With the object of delaying the investment of the fortress one or
+more advanced positions may be occupied in front of the main line
+of defence. The distance of an advanced position from the main line
+of defence cannot be precisely laid down, but it must be far enough
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_278">[Pg 278]</span>
+forward to deny to the enemy artillery positions from which fire can
+be opened against the main works, and should be strengthened by all
+artificial means available. In the advanced position will be placed the
+heavier guns of the movable armament; the light guns being employed in
+the counter-attacks that will be made from it with a view of inflicting
+loss upon the enemy, and hindering the establishment of his batteries.
+Sites for the various guns and howitzers available should be got ready
+in good time if this has not been done in peace.</p>
+
+<p>4. As the assailants make good the ground, the last of the advanced
+positions will eventually be evacuated. The mobile artillery will
+then be distributed amongst the various sections of the defence, a
+proportion being retained with the general reserve.</p>
+
+<p>5. As soon as the direction of the main attack has been made clear, the
+artillery on this front will be reinforced by all the guns that can
+be spared from elsewhere. The disposition of this armament will vary
+according to its nature and local conditions. Well-concealed positions
+for the howitzers and for Q.F. guns, positions from which they can fire
+direct against assaulting infantry, must be sought.</p>
+
+<p>6. The same general rules apply to the use of projectiles in the
+defence as in the attack; high explosive shell being employed against
+<i>matériel</i>, and shrapnel fire against personnel.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Artillery in Irregular Warfare.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_179" class="f120"><b>179.</b> <i>General principles.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. X.)</p>
+
+<p>1. The extent to which tactical methods differ in small wars from those
+obtaining in regular campaigns varies widely in different cases.</p>
+
+<p>In each instance the special characteristics, armament and tactics of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_279">[Pg 279]</span>
+the enemy must be considered, in addition to the nature of the country
+in which the operations are to take place, and the object in view.
+General indications, therefore, can alone be given as to the form which
+artillery tactics should assume.</p>
+
+<p>2. The importance of impressing such foes as are met with in these
+campaigns with a feeling of inferiority cannot be overestimated.
+Consequently a bold offensive is generally adopted and every endeavour
+made to inflict serious loss on the enemy. Against opponents such
+as are met with in irregular warfare the moral effect of guns is
+very great, but without material effect, moral effect is like to be
+transitory. Sometimes it may be expedient merely to drive the enemy off
+by shell fire, but, as a rule, this should not be the primary object of
+the guns.</p>
+
+<p>3. In irregular warfare, guns should generally be dispersed rather
+than concentrated, so as to bring effective fire to bear at any point
+where opportunities may present themselves. Moreover any artillery the
+enemy may possess will usually be inferior in numbers and certainly
+in training and efficiency, and therefore direct fire and shorter
+ranges than are usual in regular warfare should be employed. Against
+irregulars armed with rifles, who rely chiefly on fire action, covering
+fire from part of the artillery may be necessary, but a prolonged
+preparation of the attack may cause the enemy to disperse before the
+attack can be pushed home and is incompatible with anything in the
+nature of a surprise. The guns not used for covering fire should be
+pushed forward in order that when the enemy is finally driven out of
+his position he may be vigorously pursued by shell fire.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_280">[Pg 280]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VIII.<br><span class="h_subtitle">BRIGADE TACTICS.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_180" class="f120"><b>180.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The brigade is the tactical unit. Its commander is responsible for
+reconnoitring and selecting positions for the batteries composing the
+brigade, for the method of occupying them, and for the allotment of
+zones, tasks, or objectives to each battery within the limits of the
+orders he has received.</p>
+
+<p>2. When the brigade commander finds it necessary to change the
+objective of one of its batteries he should inform other batteries whom
+it may concern.</p>
+
+<p>Should it become necessary to open fire on a target outside the area
+allotted to him, he must be careful to report the circumstances to the
+divisional artillery commander.</p>
+
+<p>As changes of target entail fresh ranging and consequently some loss of
+fire effect, they should not be lightly ordered.</p>
+
+<p>3. The brigade commander exercises general control over the expenditure
+of ammunition, but the ranging, the method of engaging an objective and
+the rate of fire should be left in the hands of battery commanders.
+The brigade commander may, if in close touch with a battery commander,
+give him precise orders as to the nature and rate of fire; otherwise he
+should only interfere if he has convinced himself that the fire of a
+battery is ineffective, or unsuited to the tactical situation.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_181" class="f120"><b>181.</b> <i>Reconnaissance.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. As soon as the brigade commander has received his orders, which
+should include full information as to the tactical situation and the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_281">[Pg 281]</span>
+intention of the divisional artillery commander with regard to
+the action of his batteries, he communicates them to his battery
+commanders, and informs them if they are to accompany him during his
+reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p><b>As a rule, he should then seek out the commander of any infantry
+with which he is to co-operate, and obtain from him full information as
+to his intended action.</b> (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (7)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>2. Before proceeding to reconnoitre with a view to selecting the most
+suitable positions from which to carry out the task allotted to him,
+the brigade commander should indicate to the brigade leader the pace
+and general direction of the advance.</p>
+
+<p>If he is unable to direct the brigade to any definite spot near its
+probable position in action he should select a point or series of
+points, if possible marked on the map, which the brigade is to pass in
+its advance and at which he can communicate to the brigade leader any
+necessary instructions as to its further movements.</p>
+
+<p>If the brigade commander thinks it necessary to supplement this system
+of intercommunication he may be accompanied in his reconnaissance by a
+few additional men to direct the brigade at doubtful points. These men
+will join the brigade when it reaches them unless they receive orders
+to the contrary.</p>
+
+<p>In carrying out his reconnaissance the brigade commander should be
+accompanied only by such men as are essential for the purpose and for
+communication between himself and the brigade, the remainder of the
+headquarters with the telephone wagon following at the head of the
+brigade.</p>
+
+<p>A natural eye for country, and previous training will materially assist
+him in coming to a decision as to the best position to be occupied. At
+the same time he should be well ahead of his batteries, so that he may
+have as much time as possible to reconnoitre the position before they
+arrive.</p>
+
+<p>3. The selection of an observing station, which is not likely to be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_282">[Pg 282]</span>
+readily recognized as such by the enemy, which affords cover to the
+observing officer and his assistants, from which the tactical situation
+can be watched, and which offers facilities for intercommunication with
+the infantry and the batteries should be one of the brigade commander’s
+first cares. This position should be occupied and the enemy observed by
+himself or another officer from the earliest possible moment.</p>
+
+<p>4. In selecting the position for the batteries the first consideration
+is that they should be able to carry out the task allotted to them. If
+this task involves bringing fire to bear over an extensive area, it may
+be advisable to divide the area into zones, and to select positions for
+the batteries, which will ensure each of them observing a different
+zone.</p>
+
+<p>5. The extent to which dispersion, combined with concealment, may be
+possible, must depend partly on the ground available and partly on the
+amount of dead ground that can safely be left near the guns.</p>
+
+<p>The further a position is in rear of a crest the greater become the
+difficulties of command or of a change to a position in which direct
+fire is possible, and the greater must the interval be between units.
+On the other hand greater immunity will be obtained from hostile fire,
+of which oblique or enfilade fire is the most dangerous.</p>
+
+<p>At a distance of 400 yards from the crest it is doubtful if the enemy’s
+searching fire would be effective.</p>
+
+<p>6. A position with rising ground behind and with a wood or rising
+ground in front has the advantage that concealment can be obtained
+without sacrificing spaces for observation, since the battery
+commanders can observe and control the fire from a position in rear.
+In such a position special arrangements for the replenishment of
+ammunition will be necessary, if concealment is to be maintained.</p>
+
+<p>7. The following points, some of which must often be left to battery
+commanders to decide, are also important:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_283">[Pg 283]</span></p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. A good platform for the guns.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. The position and cover available for wagon lines.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. If the position is under cover the shell must be able</li>
+<li class="isub4">to clear the crest at all ranges at which fire is likely</li>
+<li class="isub4">to take place (<a href="#Para_121"><i>See</i> See. <b>121</b></a>).</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. The position, if not behind cover, should give a clear</li>
+<li class="isub4">view over the sights not only of the target, but also of</li>
+<li class="isub4">all ground on to which fire may have to be turned.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; v. The approaches should facilitate the supply and</li>
+<li class="isub4">replenishment of ammunition.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p id="Para_182" class="f120"><b>182.</b> <i>Leading.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Having due regard to the urgency of the tactical situation the
+leader’s aim is to bring the brigade to its position for action
+without being discovered by the enemy and with as little distress as
+possible to the teams. Correct utilization of the ground is, therefore,
+important.</p>
+
+<p>To judge whether troops moving by a certain route will be concealed or
+not from ground which the enemy may be occupying requires experience
+and a good eye for country.</p>
+
+<p>2. The brigade leader should keep well to the front to get early
+information as to the brigade commander’s intentions, and to
+reconnoitre the routes between the various points which the brigade is
+to pass in its advance (<a href="#Para_181"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>181</b> (2)</a>).
+The brigade guide will follow and conform to the directions he receives from the
+brigade leader.</p>
+
+<p>The number of men required to maintain communication between the
+brigade guide and the brigade leader may sometimes be reduced if the
+latter selects intermediate points, which the brigade is to pass in its
+advance and at which any necessary changes of direction or formation
+can be communicated to the brigade guide.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_284">[Pg 284]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. The brigade leader should try to avoid ground, such as a dusty road,
+which would be likely to give indication of movement to a vigilant
+enemy. He will sometimes have to make up his mind whether to make
+a long detour to ensure concealment or to risk detection by moving
+over a sky line. If he selects the latter alternative he must decide,
+according to his knowledge of the situation, in what formation he
+should move.</p>
+
+<p>To take advantage of local conditions, column of sections or even
+column of route may often be retained until close to the position,
+but changes of formation and flank movements within view of the enemy
+should be avoided and line or double échelon is then the most suitable
+formation.</p>
+
+<p>4. The procedure of each battery need not be identical. Each battery
+leader, while employing the formation that appears most suitable, must
+conform as far as possible to the general direction and pace of the
+brigade.</p>
+
+<p>In passing through obstacles where only a few passages exist, no
+battery or section should increase its proper frontage, if by so doing
+it will interfere with troops on its flank.</p>
+
+<p>5. When artillery is obliged to move through other troops, notice
+should be sent to their commander so that an opening may be made.</p>
+
+<p>6. Movements under fire should be carried out as rapidly as is
+consistent with steadiness and a proper regard for the horses and
+equipment. Modern equipments are complicated and delicate and care must
+be taken that guns are not moved over rough ground with unnecessary
+rapidity.</p>
+
+<p>7. Battery commanders should ride at the head of the brigade when in
+column, so as to be ready to join the brigade commander quickly.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_183" class="f120"><b>183.</b> <i>Ground scouts.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Ground scouts are mounted men, whose duty it is to precede the
+brigade and ascertain whether the ground is suitable for its movement,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_285">[Pg 285]</span>
+to point out obstacles, and to look for and indicate the best points of
+passage. Artillery should never manœuvre without them.</p>
+
+<p>In mountain artillery dismounted men are employed as ground scouts and
+the gunners detailed to act as pioneers may often be used for this
+purpose.</p>
+
+<p>2. The number of scouts employed must depend upon the nature of the
+ground and the rapidity with which the movement is to be made. In
+ordinary circumstances one man per battery is sufficient, but when a
+single battery is moving fast over difficult ground, two or more scouts
+may with advantage be sent out; one man can then halt to point out a
+passage while the others explore further on.</p>
+
+<p>3. Ground scouts must be told the original direction of the movement,
+but they must be careful to keep an eye on their batteries so as to
+conform to any change in pace or direction, and must avoid exposing
+themselves to view on high ground or against the sky line.</p>
+
+<p>They must be sufficiently far in advance to give ample warning of
+obstacles, but never out of sight of their batteries. As a rule they
+should not be less than 200 or more than 500 yards to the front.</p>
+
+<p>4. If the ground is boggy or otherwise impassable, a scout will halt
+and raise his right arm perpendicularly; he will then make for whatever
+point appears practicable, indicating the direction in which the
+brigade or battery should move. If the ground within view in front and
+on either side is quite impracticable, a scout will face the brigade,
+raise his right arm, and ride in to report.</p>
+
+<p>5. Ground scouts must be careful not to ride on to the position on or
+behind which the brigade is about to come into action.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_286">[Pg 286]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_184" class="f120"><b>184.</b> <i>Occupation of a position.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The brigade commander, having completed his reconnaissance, will
+send an officer back to meet the brigade. This officer will point out
+the position of the brigade commander to the battery commanders, who
+at once ride on to receive their instructions. He will direct the
+telephone detachment to the brigade observing station and, if ordered
+to do so, the remainder of the headquarters, and will lead the brigade
+in the required direction.</p>
+
+<p>2. The brigade commander should first point out the areas to be
+observed by each battery or the objectives for their fire, and his
+own observing station. He should then give orders as to the positions
+for the batteries and whether they are to occupy “<i>positions in
+readiness</i>,” “<i>positions in observation</i>,” or to open fire
+without delay.</p>
+
+<p>A “<i>position in readiness</i>” implies that a battery is limbered
+up under cover, but that all possible alternative positions in the
+immediate neighbourhood have been reconnoitred and preparations made
+for their occupation.</p>
+
+<p>The actual positions for the guns should be determined, aiming points,
+reference points, and observing stations selected, and arrangements
+made to watch the situation.</p>
+
+<p>A “<i>position in observation</i>” implies that a battery is in action,
+concealed as much as possible, that it is ready to open fire, and that
+it is watching all ground within the zone allotted to it.</p>
+
+<p>3. In deciding whether he will occupy positions in observation or
+retain all or any of his batteries in readiness, the brigade commander
+will be guided by the principles laid down in <a href="#Para_147">Sec. <b>147</b></a>,
+bearing in mind that to commit his batteries to action prematurely may, upon
+the development of the tactical situation, necessitate a change of
+positions and consequent delay in opening fire.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_287">[Pg 287]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. The extent, to which detailed instructions for the occupation of the
+position can be given will vary, but, as a rule, some latitude should
+be allowed battery commanders in the choice of the actual sites for
+their batteries.</p>
+
+<p>If, however, the position is a covered one, confusion and delay will be
+avoided if the brigade commander indicates generally the positions for
+the battery observing stations. This difficulty does not arise in the
+case of howitzers, where observation can take place from immediately in
+front of the battery.</p>
+
+<p>5. The brigade commander’s orders to battery commanders should in every
+case include instructions as to opening fire.</p>
+
+<p>If the batteries are to come into action, the brigade commander decides
+by which of the two following methods he will occupy the position.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Ordinary method.</i>—The adjutant or other officer leads the
+brigade to the position, taking care not to arrive too close to it
+before the battery commanders have completed their reconnaissance and
+marked the line of fire. If necessary, he must check the pace or even
+halt the brigade under cover.</p>
+
+<p>The subsequent procedure is as described in <a href="#Para_193">Sec. <b>193</b></a>,
+unless the advance into action is to be simultaneous, in which case the adjutant
+or other officer himself gives the order to advance when he sees that
+all is ready.</p>
+
+<p>To facilitate the leading of the brigade, the brigade commander may,
+if he thinks desirable, mark the line of fire for the centre of the
+brigade by placing the brigade serjeant-major about 200 yards in rear
+of his own position, or by any other method so long as the officer
+leading the brigade understands it.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Special method.</i>—The brigade commander selects the
+preliminary position (<a href="#Para_193"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>193</b> (7)</a>),
+and the adjutant or other officer guides the brigade to it.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_288">[Pg 288]</span></p>
+
+<p>The battery commanders select the exact positions for their batteries
+and then proceed as laid down in <a href="#Para_193">Sec. <b>193</b> (8)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The batteries come into action independently by their own commander’s
+order.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_185" class="f120"><b>185.</b> <i>Intercommunication service.</i></p>
+
+<p>Communication between brigade and battery commanders should be
+established immediately on coming into action, and it is the duty of
+the battery commanders to see that it is so established. The adjutant
+is responsible for organizing the communications between the brigade
+observing station and their points. (<a href="#Para_149"><i>See</i> Secs. <b>149</b></a>,
+<a href="#Para_246"><b>246</b></a> and <a href="#Para_247"><b>247</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Instructions regarding field artillery telephone equipment and drill
+for its use are contained in “Training Manual—Signalling.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_186" class="f120"><b>186.</b> <i>Allotting objectives and ranging.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The extent of front which a battery can cover is given in
+<a href="#Para_214">Sec. <b>214</b> (2)</a>. As a general rule it is better
+to increase the rate of fire rather than add to the number of guns
+engaging any given objective.</p>
+
+<p>2. If the batteries of a brigade are in action close together, and
+the objective is sufficiently broad, it would usually be desirable to
+divide it into suitable widths and allot one to each battery.</p>
+
+<p>The batteries of the brigade may, however, be dispersed in order to
+obtain the advantages of enfilade, oblique or cross-fire as well as for
+the sake of concealment. Or it may be desired to cross the fire of the
+whole or a portion of the guns of the brigade with those of another
+brigade for the same purpose. In such cases special arrangements may be
+necessary to enable each battery to obtain the range. The principle of
+economy of force still applies, and when once the fire of the desired
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_289">[Pg 289]</span>
+number of batteries has been made effective an increased volume of fire
+should be obtained by the increasing rapidity of fire of the batteries
+engaged rather than by the introduction of fresh batteries.</p>
+
+<p>3. When the probable objectives are dispersed, the extent to which
+oblique or cross-fire can be secured, and the facilities for observing
+its effect will be the principal factors in deciding which battery
+shall engage any particular target, and the latitude to be allowed its
+commander in the selection of other objectives.</p>
+
+<p>4. It will be of great assistance in allotting objectives it
+conspicuous features and prominent points are given names, and all
+concerned made acquainted with them.</p>
+
+<p>5. One method of pointing out objectives is to describe them with
+reference to some prominent point, making use of the figuring of the
+face of a clock. This point is termed the “<i>reference point</i>” and
+must not be confused with the “<i>aiming point</i>.”
+(<a href="#Para_120"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>120</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The reference point being considered to be the centre of the face of
+the clock, the direction of any object with reference to it can be
+indicated by the figuring of the face thus:—</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_28" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 28.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_28.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="278" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_290">[Pg 290]</span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">Reference point—Chimney of cottage on Green Hill.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Nature of objective—Artillery in action behind hedge,</li>
+<li class="isub2">flashes visible.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Left extremity of objective—2.30 o’clock, 3 degrees.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Extent of objective—4 degrees 30 mins.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>In <a href="#FIG_28">Fig. 28</a>, A is the left of the objective, AB
+its extent, C is the chimney of the cottage on Green Hill.</p>
+
+<p>Having pointed out the objective and its extent as above, it can be
+allotted to batteries by naming a number of degrees and minutes for
+each to engage. Thus:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">Reference point. Chimney of cottage on Green Hill.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Left battery. From 3° to 4° 30′.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Centre battery. From 4° 30′ to 6°.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Right battery. From 6° to 7° 30′.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+
+<p>Changes of objective can be indicated in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>6. Another method of indicating targets is by means of panorama
+sketches. (<a href="#Para_244"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>244</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Each battery having prepared sketches of the enemy’s position forwards
+two copies to the brigade commander, who letters all prominent points
+on the sketches in such a way that the same letter refers to the same
+point on each sketch. The duplicates are returned to the batteries, and
+the brigade commander can then refer to any target or locality with
+reference to the letters on the sketches.</p>
+
+<p>Thus:—“Target H” or “crest of hill, 3 o’clock, from Wood B”. The
+brigade commander having a copy of the sketch from the position of
+each battery, can at once tell which battery is best able to engage
+any target, also whether all batteries can concentrate fire on any
+particular spot or not.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_187" class="f120"><b>187.</b> <i>Observation and control.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Responsibility for watching the tactical situation and
+redistributing the fire of his batteries in accordance with the
+progress of the fight rests with the brigade commander.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_291">[Pg 291]</span></p>
+
+<p>To maintain touch with the situation a position near the commander of
+the infantry brigade or other body with whom the artillery is acting
+has many advantages. (<a href="#Para_149"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>149</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>2. If the brigade commander is unable to accompany the infantry
+commander himself, it will usually be advisable to detail an officer
+with the necessary means of communication to do so. The duty of this
+officer will be to keep the brigade commander informed as to the
+position of the infantry and as to the localities from which the
+hostile fire is most damaging. (<a href="#Para_149"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>149</b> (4) (5)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>3. If the batteries of the brigade are dispersed the brigade commander
+can usually only indicate fresh targets by means of telephone,
+signalling or messenger. Such instructions may be amplified by the use
+of panoramic sketches. (<a href="#Para_186"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>186</b> (5) (6)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_188" class="f120"><b>188.</b> <i>Change of position.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. During the fight, the brigade commander should endeavour to have
+fresh positions and the best lines of advance to them reconnoitred. In
+the event of an advance to a new position being ordered, the procedure
+is as far as possible the same as described in <a href="#Para_181">Sec. <b>181</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>2. Before going forward himself, the brigade commander will send word
+of his intention to the battery commanders, indicate the general
+direction of the advance, and give orders when it is to commence,
+and if all the batteries are to move together or not. The subsequent
+procedure is similar to that described in <a href="#Para_184">Sec. <b>184</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>3. In the case of a retirement, the adjutant precedes the brigade
+and selects the new positions. He is accompanied by one or more
+range-takers from the batteries if they can be spared and by sufficient
+men of the brigade headquarters to guide the brigade commander to the
+position. He will communicate the dispositions to the battery captains.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_292">[Pg 292]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_189" class="f120"><b>189.</b> <i>Night firing.</i></p>
+
+<p>(<i>See also</i> Secs. <a href="#Para_164"><b>164</b></a> and
+<a href="#Para_199"><b>199</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>1. In favourable circumstances a fairly effective fire can be achieved,
+both in attack and defence, at close and effective ranges.</p>
+
+<p>2. The use of searchlights is confined to defensive action, and is
+referred to in F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 140. In addition to their use
+as fixed beams, as therein stated, they may be used to search for
+targets.</p>
+
+<p>Up to 3,400 yards under favourable conditions of atmosphere and
+background a well-defined target can be picked up, but not an
+ill-defined one. Movement, however, can be detected and ranging can be
+carried out at this distance.</p>
+
+<p>3. Before moving guns into positions by night the following
+arrangements should be made:—</p>
+
+<p>i. The roads or tracks leading to the gun positions should be
+thoroughly reconnoitred by those who will lead the guns.</p>
+
+<p>ii. The route should be marked where required by patches of white,
+bundles of straw, or anything else that will be visible.</p>
+
+<p>iii. The actual gun positions should be carefully marked and the
+bearing of the line of fire taken. In doing this every precaution must
+be taken not to give any hint to the enemy of the intended occupation.</p>
+
+<p>iv. The officers concerned should be furnished with orders in writing
+notifying the time of moving off from rendezvous, order of march, route
+they are to follow, and time of opening fire.</p>
+
+<p>4. Care must be taken to prevent limbers or teams of a battery which
+has occupied its position clashing with batteries or other troops which
+are still advancing.</p>
+
+<p>5. All ranks must understand that no lights or smoking are allowed, and
+that the occupation of the position as well as the entrenching must be
+carried out as silently as possible.</p>
+
+<p>Steps should be taken to deaden the noise of wheels and jingling of
+harness as far as possible.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_293">[Pg 293]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IX.<br><span class="h_subtitle">BATTERY TACTICS.</span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_190" class="f120"><b>190.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The battery is the fire unit, except in heavy artillery, in which,
+each section being self-contained, the battery or the section is the
+fire unit according to circumstances. To enable effective fire to be
+brought to bear in the shortest possible time on such objectives as
+the tactical situation may require, correct observation and promptness
+of decision on the part of the battery commander are as essential as a
+high standard of fire discipline throughout the battery.</p>
+
+<p>2. By fire discipline is meant not only careful attention to all the
+details of drill when in action, but also ready response to the signals
+and orders of all superiors. It demands, in addition, endurance of the
+enemy’s fire, even when no reply is possible.</p>
+
+<p>3. The battery commander should be allowed latitude as regards the
+choice of objectives within the task allotted to him, which may be wide
+or circumscribed. (<a href="#Para_184"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>184</b> (2)</a>.)
+If the battery commander assumes the responsibility of departing from
+his allotted task he must be prepared to justify his action, which
+should be reported at once to the brigade commander.</p>
+
+<p>4. The principles which guide a commander in applying the fire of his
+battery in different circumstances should be known to all officers and
+non-commissioned officers.</p>
+
+<p>5. When a battery is acting independently, its commander is responsible
+not only for its fire action, but for those other duties which are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_294">[Pg 294]</span>
+described under the head of brigade tactics, In this case it may be
+desirable for the commander to devote his whole attention to watching
+the tactical situation, and to leave the conduct or fire to the next
+senior officer; this may sometimes be advisable even when the battery
+is in brigade,</p>
+
+<p>6. For manœuvre the battery is divided into:—</p>
+
+<p class="center">The firing battery.&emsp;&nbsp;<br>The first line wagons.
+</p>
+
+<p>The “<i>firing battery</i>” consists of 6 guns and 6 ammunition wagons,
+except in the case of 4-gun batteries, when it consists of 4 guns and 4
+wagons. The wagon of the firing battery always accompanies its gun.</p>
+
+<p>The “<i>first line wagons</i>” consist of the remainder of the
+ammunition wagons authorized to accompany a battery. In Q.F. batteries
+these are 6 in number.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st line mules of a mountain battery correspond to the 1st line
+wagons of a field battery for the purpose of manœuvre. References to
+the procedure of the 1st line wagons in the succeeding paragraphs apply
+therefore to the 1st line mules of mountain batteries.
+(<a href="#Para_125"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>125</b> (8)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_191" class="f120"><b>191.</b> <i>Preparation for action.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The object of preparation for action is to minimise as far as
+possible the pause between coming into action and opening fire. The
+exact time and place for this cannot be laid down. If the enemy is
+likely to be met it is advisable to prepare for action before the march
+commences; if this has not been done a short halt will be necessary for
+the purpose.</p>
+
+<p>2. When preparing for action the firing battery will be separated from
+the first line wagons which will be formed up by the captain as may be
+most convenient. If preparation for action takes place while in column
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_295">[Pg 295]</span>
+of route on a road, the 1st line wagons will follow in rear of the
+battery when it moves oil, but if the road is narrow it may be better
+to delay the separation of the firing battery from the 1st line wagons,
+in order to avoid blocking the road.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_192" class="f120"><b>192.</b> <i>Reconnaissance of a position.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The battery commander, as soon as he receives his orders, rides
+forward to the brigade commander accompanied by not more than two
+of his headquarters. The latter should remain under cover while the
+battery commander is receiving his instructions, when they proceed with
+him to reconnoitre the position for the battery.</p>
+
+<p>It may also be advisable for the battery commander to take a section
+commander with him. This officer should be accompanied by a signaller
+and horseholder with director, and he can then be utilized to select
+the actual position for the guns, to convey any information required to
+the battery leader, and to mark the line of fire, should the battery
+commander remain at his observing station.</p>
+
+<p>2. The remainder of the battery headquarters, including the observation
+wagon will follow at the head of the battery until they are required
+by the battery commander, who will then send for such portions of the
+headquarters as he requires before the arrival of the battery. They
+should then be brought up under suitable command, care being taken to
+make use of any available cover, so as not to attract the attention
+of the enemy. For the same reason they should not follow the battery
+commander on to the actual position, nor should ranges be taken from it.</p>
+
+<p>3. The first object of this reconnaissance, if a position under cover
+is to be occupied, should be the selection and occupation of the
+observing station (<a href="#Para_199"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>199</b></a>), the
+concealment of which from the enemy is of great importance. The battery
+commander must then decide on the approximate position for the guns, ascertain
+that the trajectory will clear the crest, settle how the position is to be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_296">[Pg 296]</span>
+occupied and mark the line of fire, unless he delegates this duty to
+the section commander, who may have accompanied him. He must also
+decide whether he will use his observation wagon or not, and must give
+orders as to the placing of the wagon, with a view to its concealment,
+as far as possible, from all portions of the enemy’s position.</p>
+
+<p>4. In estimating the amount of cover that will be necessary, regard
+must be paid to the general tactical situation. Defilade from the
+immediate objective is not sufficient. All ground in occupation of the
+enemy from which fire may be observed and controlled should receive
+consideration.</p>
+
+<p>5. The orders issued to the battery commander will, as a rule, include
+instructions as to the position to be occupied.</p>
+
+<p>A battery position may be either an “<i>open position</i>,” a
+“<i>semi-covered position</i>” or a “<i>covered position</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>6. An “<i>open position</i>” is one in which the objective can be
+seen over the sights and in which direct laying is possible. In such
+positions the guns may or may not be exposed to the enemy’s view before
+fire is opened. If they can be concealed up to the moment of opening
+fire the value of surprise effect may be gained coupled with good
+facilities for control of fire, for distribution, and for dealing with
+movement. When once located accurately by the enemy the guns are fully
+exposed to the effects of hostile fire, and in conditions favourable to
+the enemy are liable to destruction by direct hits and by oblique fire.</p>
+
+<p>7. A “<i>semi-covered position</i>” is one in which it is necessary
+to employ indirect laying but in which the degree of cover obtained
+is insufficient to conceal the flashes of the guns or the dust raised
+by them after fire has been opened. Such positions, as a rule, enable
+direct control by voice to be used. As compared with covered positions
+they facilitate the engaging of fresh objectives, and if required the
+guns can be run up to the crest. Heavy manual labour is sometimes
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_297">[Pg 297]</span>
+necessitated in their occupation. Searching fire may be effective
+against such positions.</p>
+
+<p>8. A “<i>covered position</i>”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_15_15" href="#Footnote_15_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a>
+is one in which the guns and their flashes are completely concealed
+from the enemy and in which it is necessary to use indirect laying.
+Such positions confer immunity from fire, but they increase the
+difficulty of control, frequently necessitating artificial means of
+communication such as telephones, signalling and the use of plotters.
+For this reason they increase the difficulties of engaging fresh
+objectives and of dealing with movement.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_193" class="f120"><b>193.</b> <i>Methods of occupying a position.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. There are two methods of occupying a position:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;i. The ordinary.</li>
+<li class="isub4">ii. The special.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><b>The words ordinary and special apply to the method by which the
+battery is brought to the firing position and have no reference to
+cover, concealment, or the method of fire.</b></p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>The ordinary method.</i></p>
+
+<p>2. The battery commander having completed his reconnaissance and
+selected the exact position for the battery, places himself where its
+centre will halt for action, the battery serjeant-major marking the
+prolongation of the line of fire at least 50 yards in his rear. The
+battery commander will use his discretion as to whether he and his
+serjeant-major, or he alone, should dismount while marking the line
+of fire, but he must ensure that they are both visible to the officer
+leading the battery.</p>
+
+<p>3. This will be the procedure in an open position when the battery
+commander intends to command from the centre of the battery, but if he
+decides to command from a flank the line of fire may be marked by the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_298">[Pg 298]</span>
+battery serjeant-major and another man, or by any other means so long
+as the battery leader understands them. In many cases instead of
+marking the line of fire it may be preferable to mark where the flanks
+of the battery will rest.</p>
+
+<p>The battery is then led up, halted and brought into action by the
+battery leader.</p>
+
+<p>4. When the battery commander is at an observing station some distance
+from the battery the exact position for the guns may be chosen by
+the battery leader, or by the section commander, who accompanies the
+battery commander in his reconnaissance, see <a href="#Para_192">Sec. <b>192</b> (1)</a>.
+The battery leader or the section commander with the battery commander
+assisted by a signaller marks the line of fire for the battery, or the
+position where its flanks will rest. The battery leader brings the
+battery into action. The officer who chooses the position for the guns
+is responsible that the battery commander’s observation station shall
+not be within the danger angle of the guns when in action. To ensure
+that the observing station shall not be within the danger angle
+(<a href="#Para_197">Sec. <b>197</b> (3)</a>) the battery commander
+should after laying his director on the target or on the centre of the
+zone allotted to him, swing it round through an angle of 120° towards
+the position for the battery. The battery must not be behind this line,
+which allows for a subsequent switch of about 15°.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>On rough ground</i> the Nos. 1 should be sufficiently ahead to
+enable them to select the best platforms for their guns. They must be
+careful to halt their guns on the selected spots, for which purpose it
+may be advisable for them to dismount. They should not, however, be so
+far ahead that they prematurely disclose the position.</p>
+
+<p>6. A covered position should be occupied by the ordinary method if the
+cover is sufficient to completely conceal the guns and teams while
+coming into action.</p>
+
+<p>If the nature of the ground compels the battery to adopt a column
+formation till the position itself is nearly reached, and it is
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_299">[Pg 299]</span>
+important to open fire without delay, guns may be brought into action
+by sections, or even singly.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>The special method.</i></p>
+
+<p>7. This method should only be employed when it is impracticable to
+occupy the position by the ordinary method.</p>
+
+<p>The battery commander, having chosen his position of observation,
+selects or indicates a position for the battery in action and a
+preliminary position under cover and close in rear, and sends his
+serjeant-major, or section commander if he has one with him, to guide
+the battery to it.</p>
+
+<p>8. The battery commander then gives the order “<span class="smcap">Section
+commanders</span> (mounted or dismounted, as the case may be), <span class="smcap">one
+aiming post</span>.” The section commanders, with an aiming post for
+each of their guns, fall out to the battery commander, who points out
+to them the target, general alignment of the battery and position of
+one gun. They then mark with an aiming post the exact spot for each of
+their guns according to the accidents of the ground, care being taken
+to avoid danger angles. (<a href="#Para_197"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>197</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>If the soil renders the planting of aiming posts difficult, the layers
+may be fallen out to mark the positions the guns will occupy.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as these arrangements are completed each section commander
+brings his section into action by the simplest method.</p>
+
+<p>9. When using the special method in a semi-covered position, in order
+to avoid exposing the battery, the guns and wagons should be driven as
+near the position as possible, and run up the remainder of the distance
+by hand. It may sometimes be advisable to bring up the carriages with
+wheel horses only, leaving all other horses under cover.</p>
+
+<p>10. In the case of guns not fitted with the No. 7 dial sight care must
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_300">[Pg 300]</span>
+be taken when occupying a semi-covered position to select an aiming
+point which can be laid on from round to round, as the planting of
+aiming posts might disclose the position to the enemy. If it is found
+necessary to plant aiming posts, care should be taken that the men
+planting them are not exposed.</p>
+
+<p>11. When using the special method in a covered position it should
+be possible to drive the guns to the position they will occupy by
+following the line formed by the aiming posts, and coming into action
+right or left. After the guns are in position, the wagons should be
+driven as near as possible to the position they ought to occupy.
+Drivers should not be dismounted to lead their horses if there is any
+danger of coming under fire.</p>
+
+<p>12. This method has many advantages for heavy artillery, where
+platforms are all important, and the guns difficult to man handle.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_194" class="f120"><b>194.</b> <i>Orders.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The battery commander should give section commanders as much
+information as possible before bringing the guns into action, in order
+to eliminate as far as possible the pause that takes place after the
+guns are unlimbered and before fire is opened.</p>
+
+<p>2. He must clearly point out or indicate the target and extent to be
+engaged by each section when visible, and the aiming point or reference
+point (if one is used).</p>
+
+<p>His orders must also include:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">The angle of sight, or the sight to be used.</li>
+<li class="isub2">The method of ranging.</li>
+<li class="isub2">The nature of projectile, if necessary.</li>
+<li class="isub2">The corrector settings, if necessary.</li>
+<li class="isub2">The first elevation or elevations.</li>
+<li class="isub2">The interval, if required.</li>
+<li class="isub2">If under cover, the order to fire.
+           <span class="pagenum" id="Page_301">[Pg 301]</span></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>These orders should always be given out in the above sequence.</p>
+
+<p>3. The following abbreviated words of command will be used:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Collective</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp">&nbsp; for &nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Collective ranging.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Right ranging</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Right section ranging.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">No. 1 ranging</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">No. 1 gun ranging.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Fire</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Commence firing.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Stop</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Stop firing.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Corrector</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Time shrapnel corrector.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Échelon</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl">Échelon corrector.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>4. To avoid mistakes and for the sake of uniformity the elevation will
+be ordered as shown in the following examples:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“One thousand.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1,800</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Eighteen hundred.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1,950</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Nineteen fifty.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Two thousand.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2,100</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Two one hundred.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2,350</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Two three fifty.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>If two ranges are ordered at the same time the order would be as
+follows:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1,800-1,500</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Eighteen hundred, fifteen hundred.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2,400-2,100</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Two four, two one,”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">5,000-4,700</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Five thousand, four seven.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>5. Corrector settings will be ordered as shown in the following
+examples:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">136</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“One three six.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">150</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“One five o.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_302">[Pg 302]</span>
+6. Angles from an aiming point will be ordered as shown in the
+following examples:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">80</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">degrees</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Eight o degrees.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">58</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">“Five eight degrees.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p id="Para_195" class="f120"><b>195.</b> <i>Advance for action.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The senior section commander with the battery leads it, and the
+captain directs the movements of the first line wagons, which will
+be led by a non-commissioned officer detailed by him, communication
+between the two being kept up by means of the mounted non-commissioned
+officers of the wagon line.</p>
+
+<p>2. The directions for the maintenance of communication between the
+brigade commander and his brigade, for the leading of a brigade and
+for the employment of ground scouts (<i>see</i> Secs. <a href="#Para_181"><b>181</b></a>,
+<a href="#Para_182"><b>182</b></a> and <a href="#Para_183"><b>183</b></a>)
+are applicable to a battery acting by itself. The officer leading
+the battery must avoid pressing on the battery commander during his
+reconnaissance, and should not lead the battery on to the position
+until he sees that the line of fire has been marked, if it is to come
+into action by the ordinary method. If the special method is to be
+employed he will receive instructions as to the preliminary position to
+be occupied. (<a href="#Para_193"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>193</b> (7).</a>)</p>
+
+<p>3. Section commanders and Nos. 1 when advancing in line will ride
+ahead of their guns to select the best ground and to give warning of
+obstacles.</p>
+
+<p>It is the duty of section commanders to dismount their detachments if
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p>4. The first line wagons conform to the movements of the firing
+battery. The distance to be maintained between the firing battery and
+the first line wagons cannot be laid down, but should not, as a rule,
+exceed half a mile. The captain must go forward and obtain information,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_303">[Pg 303]</span>
+as soon as possible, as to the intended position of the battery, in
+order to select a position for the wagon line, which offers facilities
+for the supply of ammunition, and where the men and horses will be
+under cover.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid searching fire directed at the firing battery, the position of
+the wagon line should be to a flank, or if directly in rear of the guns
+not less than 400 yards distant.</p>
+
+<p>If it is impossible to obtain cover for the whole wagon line in one
+place, the captain must use his discretion as to how best he can
+sub-divide it.</p>
+
+<p>In selecting the position for the wagon line the captain must be
+careful not to block lateral communication, or the lines of advance of
+troops in rear, nor must he endeavour to forestall another battery in a
+position which more naturally belongs to the latter. Easy access to his
+own battery is essential.</p>
+
+<p>5. As soon as the battery is in action he will select alternative
+positions of assembly for possible use when changing position
+(<a href="#Para_228"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>228</b> (1) iii</a> and
+<a href="#Para_229">Sec. <b>229</b> (1) ii)</a>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_196" class="f120"><b>196.</b> <i>To come into action.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> Secs. <a href="#Para_65"><b>65</b></a>,
+<a href="#Para_66"><b>66</b></a>, and <a href="#Para_233"><b>233</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Horse artillery.</i>—On approaching the position the wagons do
+not drop back unless ordered to do so, but on the command “<span class="smcap">Action
+front</span>” are at once driven up alongside their guns, halting with
+their axletrees one yard in rear of the axletrees of the gun and 6
+inches to a flank. They are then unlimbered (unless otherwise ordered)
+by No. 6, who lowers the perch to the ground at the same time giving
+“<span class="smcap">Limber drive on</span>.” The limbers reverse to their left and go
+to the place selected for the 1st line wagons, forming up in front of
+their own gun limbers.</p>
+
+<p>2. One of the wagon limbers of the firing battery may be utilized to
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_304">[Pg 304]</span>
+give protection to the battery headquarters and will be placed where
+ordered by the battery commander. Instructions to this effect must be
+sent to the battery before it arrives on the position.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the limbers and teams are clear, they will proceed to the
+wagon line under the direction of the captain, who, however, will not
+wait to collect them, but will indicate the direction they should take
+and allow all horses to get clear as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>3. All led horses except those accompanying the teams go at once to the
+wagon line independently.</p>
+
+<p>4. Detachments should remain as far as possible under cover of the
+shields and unnecessary movement in the battery must be avoided, as
+such movement may enable the enemy to locate the position of the guns.
+If, however, the guns are in action on a forward slope it will usually
+be necessary to dig in the trails.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Field artillery.</i>—On approaching the position the wagons will
+drop back about 10 yards in rear of the guns. As soon as the trail of
+each gun is on the ground, its wagon will drive up on its left and halt
+with the axletree of the wagon body one yard in rear of the axletree
+of the gun and not more than 6 inches to a flank, in order to obtain
+the full benefit of the shields. Wagons may, however, be placed on the
+right of guns by order of the section commander, when he considers it
+advisable. In either case the wagon teams will be immediately unhooked.</p>
+
+<p>When the battery is coming into action under cover and the line of fire
+has to be obtained, the wagons should not drive up to their guns until
+the latter are in the correct line.</p>
+
+<p>The procedure of the wagon limber for the protection of the battery
+commander, and of teams, led horses and detachments will be similar to
+that laid down above for horse artillery.</p>
+
+<p>In special cases, the wagons of the firing battery may be unlimbered.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_305">[Pg 305]</span></p>
+
+<p>The approximate positions&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_16_16" href="#Footnote_16_16" class="fnanchor">[16]</a>
+of individuals and led horses not mentioned in the handbook of the gun
+are as shown in <a href="#FIG_29">Fig. 29</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The position of the wagon line in the figure has no reference to the
+position of the battery.</p>
+
+<p>The 2nd trumpeter, farrier, and shoeing smith will be used as desirable
+to maintain communication between the firing battery and 1st line
+wagons.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Howitzer and heavy batteries.</i>—The procedure is as described
+above for field gun batteries, except that 2 yards must be left between
+guns and wagons in the case of 5“ B.L. howitzers and 1 yard in the case
+of heavy batteries, for the free working of the guns in action, and in
+howitzer and heavy batteries the centre of the perch should be in line
+with the gun axletree.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_17_17" href="#Footnote_17_17" class="fnanchor">[17]</a></p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Mountain batteries.</i>—On the command “<span class="smcap">Action front</span>,”
+the guns are unlimbered and brought into action just in front of the
+wheel and axle&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_18_18" href="#Footnote_18_18" class="fnanchor">[18]</a>
+mule of each subsection. The mules move off to the rear independently
+as each is unloaded, and proceed to join the 1st line mules under the
+direction of the captain. The ammunition boxes of the firing battery
+are placed on the ground immediately to the left of the gun, unless
+cover is available close by.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes a suitable position for the firing battery mules can be
+obtained under cover in close proximity to the battery, where it is
+inconvenient to bring, or there is not sufficient space to accommodate,
+all the 1st line mules as well. In such cases the captain will select
+another position for the 1st line mules further to the rear, and only
+order up such extra ammunition mules to join the firing battery mules
+as are necessary to ensure facility of ammunition supply.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_306">[Pg 306]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="FIG_29" class="f120"><b><i>Field battery in action.</i></b></p>
+    <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 29.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_29.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="278" >
+    <p class="center">Look-out men and signallers posted as convenient.<br>
+              Range-takers under cover if not employed.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_307">[Pg 307]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p class="f120"><i>Explanation of the symbols used in</i> Fig. 29.</p>
+    <img src="images/fig_29b.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="401" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_308">[Pg 308]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_197" class="f120"><b>197.</b> <i>Duties of officers, &amp;c., in action.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <i>Battery commander.</i>—The battery commander controls and
+directs the fire of the battery.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Captain.</i>—The captain commands the 1st line wagons and in
+action controls the vehicles and horses of the firing battery. He is
+responsible for the supply of ammunition to the firing battery and for
+seeing that the wagon line is kept filled with ammunition. It is his
+duty to arrange for the replacement of casualties in men, horses, and
+<i>matériel</i> (<a href="#Para_230"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>230</b> <i>et seq.</i></a>),
+and to select positions of assembly (<a href="#Para_195"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>195</b> (5)</a>).
+To carry out these duties in action the captain must be as much as possible in
+personal communication with the firing battery; when he is not with
+the line of guns he will leave one of his assistants with the firing
+battery to carry orders to him. The commander of a wagon line situated
+on an exposed flank is responsible for taking measures for protecting
+the wagon line (<a href="#Para_148"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>148</b> (5)</a>).</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Section commanders.</i>—Section commanders will place themselves
+where they can best see and hear the battery commander and will only
+move about their sections when necessary for the supervision of their
+command. In ordinary circumstances each should be in rear of the wagon
+of his section which is the nearer to the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>They will acknowledge the battery commander’s orders by saluting. When
+the orders cannot be heard throughout the battery they are to be passed
+from one section commander to the next, not repeated simultaneously.
+Each section commander is responsible that the next section commander
+receives the order. If in giving an order the battery commander makes
+an obvious verbal slip, it is the duty of the section commander nearest
+to him to draw his attention to it.</p>
+
+<p>They are responsible that their guns are laid in the direction ordered.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_309">[Pg 309]</span>
+When the target is visible from the battery, they will give alterations
+in deflection to their guns when ordered to do so by the battery
+commander.</p>
+
+<p>They are responsible that their guns are not fired when within the
+danger angle, <i>i.e.</i>, the line of fire of any gun must not make
+a less angle than 45 degrees with a line joining its muzzle and the
+muzzle of any other gun.</p>
+
+<p>In firing from behind cover they must ascertain that the trajectory
+will clear the crest (<a href="#Para_121"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>121</b></a>),
+running their guns up or back as necessary without waiting for orders
+if slight alterations only are required, but informing the battery
+commander if a considerable change of position is necessary.</p>
+
+<p>Before reporting a gun out of action or a casualty to any part of the
+equipment of their section, section commanders must first ascertain
+personally whether it is possible to repair the damage with the means
+at their immediate disposal in the firing line; if not, application
+should be made to the captain. No casualty should be reported to the
+battery commander during ranging, unless it is of a permanent nature or
+likely to interfere with the process of ranging.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Observing officer, heavy artillery.</i>—He is responsible for
+the efficiency of the observing parties in all respects.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Battery serjeant-major.</i>—The battery serjeant-major
+supervises the placing of the battery commander’s limber or observation
+wagon, and the work of the battery headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>During ranging he reports the number of each gun as it is fired, if the
+battery commander wishes him to do so; reports prematures, and calls
+the attention of the battery commander to verbal slips or omissions.
+(<a href="#Para_210"><i>See</i> <b>210</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>He will be frequently used to pass the battery commander’s orders, but
+if desired some other man from the battery headquarters may be employed
+for this purpose instead of him. The megaphone should be used when
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p>If the battery commander becomes a casualty the battery serjeant-major
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_310">[Pg 310]</span>
+must be in a position to give all information as to the situation,
+target, and point on which lines of fire were laid out, &amp;c., to the new
+battery commander, and to carry on until he arrives.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Nos. 1.</i>—Nos. 1 are responsible for the correct service of
+their guns. They will see that the correct angle of sight has been put
+on, and will order the necessary allowance in deflection for difference
+in level of wheels. They will acknowledge all orders relating to their
+guns by saluting, and when difficulty is experienced in passing orders
+they should assist.</p>
+
+<p>If a section commander is temporarily absent from his section or
+occupied with damaged equipment, the senior No. 1 not engaged with him
+must act for him.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_198" class="f120"><b>198.</b> <i>Laying out the line of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(a) <i>In a covered position.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. If the target can be seen from the vicinity of the position selected
+for the battery to come into action, or its direction obtained from
+the flashes of the enemy’s guns, from a map, or from patrols, &amp;c., the
+battery commander, or the section commander who has accompanied him in
+his reconnaissance, marks the line by planting two aiming posts.</p>
+
+<p>2. The battery having been brought into action on the selected
+position, lines of fire in the direction of the target can be obtained
+by one of the following methods:—</p>
+
+<p>i. The battery leader, or section commander who accompanied the battery
+commander in his reconnaissance, sets up his director in line with the
+two aiming posts and as close to the battery or its intended position
+as possible, and selects an aiming point. He then measures the angle
+between the direction of the target and the line from the director
+to the aiming point and gives it out as an order to the battery.
+(<a href="#Para_123"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>123</b> (3)</a>.) He will leave the director
+laid and clamped on the aiming point for the information of the battery. The dial
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_311">[Pg 311]</span>
+sight of each gun is set at the angle ordered and laid on the aiming
+point.</p>
+
+<p>ii. The director is clamped at zero and laid in the line of the aiming
+posts with the foresight towards the target. The battery commander or
+battery leader then faces the battery and laying back over the director
+(namely, foresight—backsight) aligns it on the dial sight of each gun
+in turn. The angles are noted down and communicated to the battery, or
+by word of mouth to each individual gun. Thus:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr>
+      <th class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Lines of Fire</span>”</th>
+      <th class="tdc" colspan="2">(Director<br>behind battery.)</th>
+      <th class="tdc">&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc" colspan="2">(Director in front<br>of battery.)</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 1</td>
+      <td class="tdr">152</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Right”</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp bl br" rowspan="6">&nbsp;&emsp;or&emsp;&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdr">28</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Right</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 2</td>
+      <td class="tdr">164</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Right”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">16</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 3</td>
+      <td class="tdr">176</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Right”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">4</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 4</td>
+      <td class="tdr">172</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Left”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">8</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Left</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 5</td>
+      <td class="tdr">160</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Left”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">20</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">“No. 6</td>
+      <td class="tdr">148</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">Left”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">32</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>The dial sight of each gun is set at the angle ordered, and laid on the
+director.</p>
+
+<p>When using this method the director must be at least 80 yards in front
+or rear of the line of guns.</p>
+
+<p>iii. If the line of fire cannot be marked by planting two aiming
+posts (<i>See</i> para. 1) the procedure will be as follows, or as in
+method iv. below. From his observing station the battery commander,
+using his director as in ii., sends down the angle to one gun or to
+the battery director. In the latter case the battery leader or officer
+who is working the director obtains the line of fire by setting it to
+the angle ordered. He then measures the angle to an aiming point as
+described in i. and gives it out to the battery. When the angle is sent
+to one gun the section commander to whom the gun belongs directs his
+gun on to the line of fire and the subsequent procedure is as in para. 4
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_312">[Pg 312]</span>
+below. In both cases the battery commander will make the necessary
+correction for displacement before sending down the angle.
+(<a href="#Para_123"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>123</b> (3)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>iv. From his observing station the battery commander, having fixed the
+compass on the No. 3 director, measures the angle which the direction
+of the target makes with magnetic North, and after making the necessary
+correction for displacement sends this angle down to the battery as ...
+degrees Right or Left of magnetic North.</p>
+
+<p>The officer working the battery director, having fixed his compass to
+the director, sets the director at the angle ordered with reference to
+magnetic North and the subsequent procedure is as in i or
+ii.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_19_19" href="#Footnote_19_19" class="fnanchor">[19]</a></p>
+
+<p>3. In each method the aiming point is laid on, either through the No.
+7 dial sight or over the No. 1 dial sight, or else auxiliary aiming
+points are picked up and laid on, from round to round. Should aiming
+posts be used, they are planted in line with the No. 7 dial sight, or
+the rocking bar, or gun sights set at zero.</p>
+
+<p>4. To obtain parallel lines of fire to that of a gun whose line is
+correct, the battery commander gives the order “<span class="smcap">Parallel lines
+to No</span> ________” The dial sight of the named gun is used as a
+director, and lines obtained as in method i.</p>
+
+<p>5. In the case of guns which are not provided with dial or panoramic
+sights, but with gun arcs, or the shields graduated as gun arcs, slight
+modifications of the three methods mentioned above are necessary.</p>
+
+<p>i. The best aiming points will be such as are within the capacity of
+the arc, right or left of the line of fire, either to the front or to
+the rear. Any angle can, however, be employed either by repeating the
+process of switching, or by using the whole extent of the gun arc, or
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_313">[Pg 313]</span>
+by using the prolongation of the gun arc in order to obtain an angle of 90°,</p>
+
+<p>ii. When the director is behind the battery the gun layer must lay back
+on the director. As the large angles cannot be read on the gun arc the
+officer laying out the lines of fire will, after clamping the director
+at zero on the target, align it backsight—foresight on the centre of
+each breech and give out the angles.</p>
+
+<p>6. If the direction of the target cannot be obtained from a position
+near that selected for the battery and the distance of the observing
+station is too great to render any of the above methods available, the
+battery commander as soon as he has completed his reconnaissance and
+pointed out the approximate position of the battery to the battery
+leader, returns to his observing station; where he has previously
+left his range-takers, signallers, and such other portions of his
+headquarters as he requires.</p>
+
+<p>Communication is at once opened up, the signallers taking care to keep
+under cover. The telephone if available is laid between the battery and
+the observing station. The range-takers take the range to the target,
+and to the battery (if the “sub-base,” para. 7, is not used), and
+afterwards to other objects in the field of fire.</p>
+
+<p>The battery commander sets up his director under cover and measures the
+angle between the battery and the target.</p>
+
+<p>When necessary, a flag is placed on the battery director, but the
+observing station director should be rendered conspicuous in some other
+manner.</p>
+
+<p>He then works out by means of the plotter the battery angle (<a href="#FIG_30">T B O in
+Fig. 30</a>) and the range from the battery to the target, and communicates
+them to the battery leader, <b>taking care that the battery angle is
+sent down right or left according as the target is right or left of the
+line joining the battery and the observing station</b> (<a href="#FIG_30">B O in Fig.
+30</a>). He then calculates the angle of sight and communicates it to the
+battery leader.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_314">[Pg 314]</span></p>
+
+<p>If the dial sight is used, it is set at the battery angle, and when
+laid on the observing station director the gun is in the line of fire.
+If the director is used, it is set at the battery angle and laid on the
+observing station director; the direction of the target is shown, when
+the arrow head is brought to zero.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_30" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 30.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_30.jpg" alt="" width="400" height="466" >
+</div>
+
+<ul class="index fs_120">
+<li class="isub4"><i>T = Target.</i></li>
+<li class="isub4"><i>B = Battery.</i></li>
+<li class="isub4"><i>O = Observing Sta.</i></li>
+<li class="isub4"><i>F = Flag.</i></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The direction of the target having been obtained at the battery, lines
+of fire for the guns can be given by one of the methods described above.</p>
+
+<p>7. The distance from the observing station to the battery can be
+rapidly measured by the use of a sub-base at the battery. An aiming
+post or signalling flag, F (<a href="#FIG_30"><i>see</i> Fig. 30</a>) having been
+placed at a convenient distance, 20 to 50 yards, from the battery director and at
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_315">[Pg 315]</span>
+right angles to the line B O, the angle that this base subtends at O is
+measured with the director and the range deduced from the formula:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_110">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">6</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">×&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bb">Sub-base in yards</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">=  Base in hundreds of yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Apex angle in degrees</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>8. Should preparations for opening fire be required and no target be
+visible, a suitable reference point in the enemy’s position is selected
+and lines of fire laid out to this point.</p>
+
+<p>The switch angles, ranges, and angles of sight to all points on which
+fire may have to be directed are then ascertained, and all other
+preparations made which will conduce to fire being opened as quickly as
+possible when required.</p>
+
+<p>The fire is controlled and the ranging carried out in the ordinary
+manner by the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>If the observing station is so far from the battery or the intervening
+ground so broken that in case of emergency it would be difficult for
+the commander of the battery to reach the guns in time, it may be
+necessary for him to remain with the guns and to detail another officer
+to control the fire. (<a href="#Para_199"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>199</b>(2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p class="center">(b) <i>In an open or a semi-covered position.</i></p>
+
+<p>9. In an open or semi-covered position where the target can be seen by
+the section commanders standing up, the target and its extent may be
+indicated:—</p>
+
+<p>i. By the director placed in the centre of where the battery will be
+when in action, pointing on the centre of the target or zone, with a
+N.C.O. in charge to inform the section commanders on their arrival as
+to its direction and extent, or—</p>
+
+<p>ii. By the director placed as before, but pointing on the reference
+point, the target and its extent with reference thereto being described
+to the section commanders by the N.C.O. left in charge.</p>
+
+<p>In both i. and ii. the section commanders will throw their guns on to
+the line themselves but the battery commander will frequently put the
+first gun on to the line himself.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_316">[Pg 316]</span></p>
+
+<p>When indirect laying is used in such a position, the layer, after his
+gun has been thrown on to the line by the section commander, will
+immediately pick up an auxiliary aiming point to lay on from round to
+round. With guns not provided with No. 7 dial sights, an auxiliary
+aiming point must be picked up which is in the field of the rocking bar
+sight or which can be laid on over the dial sight.</p>
+
+<p>In a semi-covered position when the section commander cannot see the
+target, the procedure will be as in a covered position.</p>
+
+<p>10. Guns not provided with No. 7 dial sights will be laid if possible
+on auxiliary aiming points; otherwise they will be laid from round to
+round over the No. 1 dial sight on the original aiming point. Aiming
+posts should seldom be necessary.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_199" class="f120"><b>199.</b> <i>Observation of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. To derive full benefit from the accuracy and rapid fire of modern
+equipment and to ensure effective support to the other arms, correct
+observation with reference to the objective is most important.</p>
+
+<p>2. To enable a battery to engage an objective, a position must be
+selected from which to observe and control the fire of the battery.
+This is called the “<i>observing station</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>The position of this station should be as close to the battery as
+possible, provided a good view of the field of fire is obtainable.
+With this object use should be made of any means such as a tree,
+house, haystack, limber, ladder, &amp;c. When the observing station is
+near the battery it should, if possible, be behind the line of section
+commanders to facilitate the passage of orders, due regard being paid
+to the direction of the wind.</p>
+
+<p>The officer who observes and controls the fire from the observing
+station is the battery commander for the time being. Any other
+officer sent out to assist in the observation of fire is called an
+“<i>observing officer</i>.”
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_317">[Pg 317]</span></p>
+
+<p>Observation should be made with glasses having as large a field of
+view as is compatible with good power of magnification, and graticules
+will be found of the greatest assistance. The telescope, on account of
+the smallness of its field, is unsuited for the observation of fire
+when ranging, but is very useful for watching the effect of fire when
+ranging has been completed.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Combined observation.</i>—In the case of targets which are
+distant, very difficult, or behind an intervening crest, and in night
+firing, the battery commander will generally find it useful to combine
+his own observations with those of a flank or advanced observing
+party. In the case of a flank party the method of its employment is
+illustrated in the figure which follows:—
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_318">[Pg 318]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 31.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_31.jpg" alt="" width="400" height="487" >
+</div>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">T. is the target.</li>
+<li class="isub4">B. C. is the battery commander.</li>
+<li class="isub4">O. P. is the observing party.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr>
+      <th class="tdc">B.C.’s<br>Observations. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc">O.P.’s<br>Observations.</th>
+      <th class="tdc">B.C.’s<br>Deductions.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp; 1. Right</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc">-</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2. Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Right</td>
+      <td class="tdc">+</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3. Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc">+</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">4. Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc">T</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">5. Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc">Left, give right deflection.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_319">[Pg 319]</span>
+This method is also applicable when the battery commander, being unable
+to observe himself and great accuracy being required, decides to make
+use of two observing parties.</p>
+
+<p>When this system is employed each observing party will only send in
+results of its observations as right or left of the line from it to
+the target. The amount right or left should be measured in degrees and
+minutes.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Heavy batteries.</i></p>
+
+<p>4. In a heavy battery there are two observing parties, one to each
+section. When the battery is intact both parties are under the direct
+command of the “<i>observing officer</i>.” When a section acts
+independently, its own observing party accompanies it.</p>
+
+<p>When the battery commander goes forward to reconnoitre he will be
+accompanied by the observing officer, in addition to the section
+commander mentioned in <a href="#Para_192">Sec <b>192</b> (1)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The observing officer will take charge of the observing party when one
+is employed. If two observing parties are employed he will superintend
+the work of both as far as possible. When the battery commander observes
+for himself, the observing officer will assist as may be required.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_200" class="f120"><b>200.</b> <i>Look-out men.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. As the attention of battery commanders is so much taken up by the
+observation and control of the fire of their batteries, men, termed
+“<i>look-out men</i>” are to be trained in every battery, whose duty
+it is to assist the commander in watching areas of ground and the
+movements of hostile and friendly troops.</p>
+
+<p>2. Look-out men should be selected for their intelligence and good
+sight, and should be adepts in the use of the telescope. There should
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_320">[Pg 320]</span>
+usually be two in each battery (not the range-takers or signallers).
+One of these men may be employed, if desired, by the battery commander
+to assist him in taking angles of sight, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>In action they should take up a position as near the battery observing
+station as is compatible with the instructions they have been given.</p>
+
+<p>They should be trained to co-operate with the range-takers so that the
+latter may receive early information as to possible objectives.</p>
+
+<p><b>It is not their business to observe the fall of the shell, nor
+should they be used as patrols.</b></p>
+
+<p id="Para_201" class="f120"><b>201.</b> <i>Control of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The fire of a battery is controlled by means of the voice or through
+the medium of the telephone, signalling, orderlies, or whistle.</p>
+
+<p>2. <i>Voice.</i>—If the observing station is near the battery, the
+battery commander gives his orders direct to the battery, or he may
+employ a selected man to call them out.</p>
+
+<p>If the observing station is at a distance the battery leader repeats
+the orders of the battery commander. Whilst performing this duty he
+will cease for the time to act as section commander, and will supervise
+the means of communication at the battery. In this case a position
+in rear of the line of section commanders, with due regard to the
+direction of the wind, is generally best.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Telephone.</i>—When the telephone is the means of communication,
+signalling communication should also be established. (<i>See</i>
+“Training Manual—Signalling.”)</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Signalling.</i>—The semaphore code will be used.</p>
+
+<p>Semaphore signalling with small flags can be read in a clear atmosphere
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_321">[Pg 321]</span>
+without glasses up to 1,200 yards, and with the telescope up to
+2,000 yards; signalling with the arms can be read up to 600 yards in
+favourable conditions.</p>
+
+<p>A quick method of utilizing semaphore signalling is to employ two sets
+of signallers, each pair having different coloured flags. Those with
+the same coloured flags should communicate with each other only.</p>
+
+<p>The procedure for “attracting attention,” “moving of signallers,” and
+“erasing of signals,” will be as ordinarily employed in signalling.
+Special attention should be paid to light, background, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>5. In sending orders or the result of observations by signal, the
+following abbreviations will be used:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Aiming point</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AP</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Fuze</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">FZ</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Air</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AR</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Go on</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">GO</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Air high</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AR</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Graze</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">GZH</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">All guns</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AL</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Gun fire</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">GFL</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Angle</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AN</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">LG</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Angle of sight</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">AS</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Left-half battery</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">LH</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Battery fire</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">BY</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">LIF</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Both guns</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">BO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Line of fire</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">LOTH</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Centre</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">C</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Lyddite</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">LY</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Collective ranging</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Minutes</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">MIL</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Commence firing</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">FI</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">More left</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">MLRE</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Common shell</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CS</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">More right</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">MR</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Concentrate</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">One round</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">ORN</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Core only or first</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Over or increase</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">PLRE</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Core and one ring</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Parallel</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">PAOR</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Core and two rings</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Percussion shrapnel</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">PSTR</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Corrector</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">CO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Probably</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">PBR</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Deflection</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">DF</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Put flag on director</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">PFN</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Degrees</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">DE</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Range</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RGG</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Depression</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">DE</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Ranging</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RGP</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Distribute</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">DI</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Repeat</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RES</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Doubtful</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">QY</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Right</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RT</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Échelon</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">EC</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Right-half battery</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RHH</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Effective fire</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">EF</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Round</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">RD</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Elevation</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">EL</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Seconds</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">SE</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Far</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">F</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Second charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">SC</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Fourth charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">FO</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Section</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">XC</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Full charge or fifth</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">FC</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Section fire</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">XF
+                       <span class="pagenum" id="Page_322">[Pg 322]</span></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Short or drop</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">MN (minus)</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Third charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">TC</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Stop firing</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">STOP</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Time shrapnel</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">TS</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Target</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">TG</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Unload or empty guns</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">MT</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Take flag off director</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">TFD</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Unobserved</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">UN</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>6. For communicating by signal with the wagon line the following
+abbreviations may be used:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">“Send up wagons to replenish ammunition”—W N.</li>
+<li class="isub3">“Send up gun limbers”—G L.</li>
+<li class="isub3">“Send up wagon limbers”—W L.</li>
+<li class="isub3">“Send up wagon teams”—W T.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Any of these signals may also be used in combination with one another,
+thus:—</p>
+
+<p>“Send up gun limbers and wagon teams”—G L W T.</p>
+
+<p><i>Mountain artillery.</i>—“Send up one ammunition mule per
+subsection”—Both arms above the head.</p>
+
+<p>“Send up firing battery mules to limber up”—Both arms extended
+horizontally.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Orderlies.</i>—A long chain of orderlies is an unsatisfactory
+means of communication which multiplies opportunities for error and is
+not well suited to service conditions, but a chain of not more than two
+specially trained men may be very useful when flag signalling would
+disclose the position.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Whistle.</i>—A long drawn out blast denotes “<i>Stop
+Firing</i>,” only to be used when rendered necessary by the fact that a
+word of command is likely to be either unheard, or to take a long time
+getting through the battery. On hearing the whistle, section commanders
+will order “<span class="smcap">Stop Firing</span>.” Firing will be resumed on the
+command “<span class="smcap">Go On</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>Batteries in brigade, or in action close to other batteries, must avoid
+using the whistle unless it is an absolute necessity.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Section control.</i></p>
+
+<p>9. Should the battery commander consider it advisable at any time to
+place the control of fire in the hands of the section commanders he
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_323">[Pg 323]</span>
+will order “<span class="smcap">Section control</span>.” On this order section commanders
+will direct the fire of their sections, making any alteration in
+elevation, line, or corrector setting that may be necessary, or range
+their sections independently as may be required. The senior No. 1 may
+perform the duties of section commander.</p>
+
+<p>The battery commander will watch the tactical situation and control the
+expenditure of ammunition. When he desires to resume control he will
+give the order “<span class="smcap">Battery control</span>.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_202" class="f120"><b>202.</b> <i>Methods of fire.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. There are three methods of fire:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">Battery fire.</li>
+<li class="isub4">Section fire.</li>
+<li class="isub4">Gun fire.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. In all methods of fire, guns are loaded and fired by order of Nos. 1.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Battery fire.</i>—In battery fire the guns are fired in
+succession throughout the battery commencing from the right at an
+interval of 5 seconds, unless another interval is ordered.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Section fire.</i>—In section fire the guns of each section
+are fired at the interval ordered by the battery commander, without
+reference to other sections.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Gun fire.</i>—In gun fire the battery commander orders the
+number of rounds to be fired, with or without an interval. The
+specified number of rounds is then fired at the interval ordered; if no
+interval is ordered, each gun is fired when reported “<i>ready</i>” and
+“<i>set</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>In the case of an attack at close ranges, the number of rounds to be
+fired is not ordered, but fire is continued until an order to stop
+firing is given.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_324">[Pg 324]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_203" class="f120"><b>203.</b> <i>Location of targets from aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The general method of procedure is as follows:—The pilot, or
+observer, or both, remain close to the artillery commander. When the
+latter wishes to use an aeroplane to locate a target he explains
+what he requires, and if possible the nature of the target and its
+general direction. The aeroplane then rises to the necessary height
+behind the battery in order to run less danger of injury by hostile
+fire. Meanwhile, two strips of white cloth are laid out on the ground
+near the battery so as to give the supposed direction of the target.
+The aeroplane, having got to the required height, flies out over the
+battery to find the exact position of the target.</p>
+
+<p>2. Three different methods may be adopted to convey this information:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. A white Very’s light may be fired from the aeroplane when</li>
+<li class="isub4">it is vertically over the target. At the battery end one</li>
+<li class="isub4">observer follows the machine with a director and another</li>
+<li class="isub4">takes the range with a one-man range-finder. The director</li>
+<li class="isub4">is clamped and the range read as soon as the shot is fired.</li>
+<li class="isub4">Provided the aeroplane is flying at a pre-arranged height</li>
+<li class="isub4">the direction and range of the target can then be found.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. The aeroplane returns along the line target-battery, and</li>
+<li class="isub4">continues its flight over and past the battery in the same</li>
+<li class="isub4">straight line. No light need be fired in this system but</li>
+<li class="isub4">the range of course cannot be communicated.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. An enlargement of the map or in certain cases a written</li>
+<li class="isub4">message may be dropped from the aeroplane giving the exact</li>
+<li class="isub4">position of the target.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>A combination of any two or of all these methods may be used.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_325">[Pg 325]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_204" class="f120"><b>204.</b> <i>Observation of fire from aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. For observation of fire from aeroplanes a different system to that
+ordinarily employed for ranging must be adopted. It is generally
+necessary to correct for line, range and fuze in succession, and not
+simultaneously.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule single rounds are sufficient for observation, but it may
+sometimes be necessary in the case of Q.F. batteries to fire salvoes of
+two or more guns.</p>
+
+<p>Salvoes may also be used when it is desired to carry out the
+observation of fire of one particular battery by aeroplane, and it is
+necessary to distinguish its fire from that of several others firing at
+the same target.</p>
+
+<p>2. Shrapnel bursting in the air can be easily seen, but it is difficult
+to determine the height of burst, and consequently the position
+relative to the target. Bursts on graze are generally visible. In the
+case of 18-pr. guns, it is usually impossible to observe the strike of
+the bullets on the ground. The burst of lyddite shell from howitzers
+can be seen easily.</p>
+
+<p>3. Very’s lights form the best means of signalling from the aeroplane
+to the ground, and white strips of cloth, 6 ft. by 1 ft., for
+communication from the ground to the aeroplane. If available a Klaxon
+horn in the aeroplane is also useful. For code of signals,
+<a href="#Para_205"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>205</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>When possible, the observing aircraft should remain close to their
+own guns at the best height for observation, in order to facilitate
+communication. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to fly out
+further towards, or even over, the target in order to ensure accurate
+observation. In such cases much delay will ensue if the aeroplane has
+to come back over its own guns to signal the results; on the other
+hand, if it remains out in front the signals may not be seen.</p>
+
+<p>4. The observer, having located the position of the target and conveyed
+the information to the artillery commander (<a href="#Para_203"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>203</b></a>)
+receives from him the signal “Observe for line” (<a href="#Para_205"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>205</b></a>).
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_326">[Pg 326]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_32" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 32.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_32.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="195" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_327">[Pg 327]</span>
+The aeroplane now moves as in <a href="#FIG_32">Fig. 32</a>, keeping on that side
+of the battery furthest from the sun, so that the signals can be easily seen.</p>
+
+<p>Shots can only be seen with ease when the aeroplane is moving out
+towards the target. If the distance A to B is about 1 mile, two rounds
+can be observed during each outward flight. As soon as line is obtained
+the signal “Observe for range” (<a href="#Para_205"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>205</b></a>) is sent;
+the aeroplane now moves in an elongated figure of eight, as in <a href="#FIG_33">Fig. 33</a>,
+always turning towards the target. It will keep behind or in front of
+the battery according to the position of the sun. Shots can be seen at
+any time.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_33" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 33.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_33.jpg" alt="" width="300" height="494" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_328">[Pg 328]</span>
+Range having been obtained the signal “Observe for fuze”
+(<a href="#Para_205"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>205</b></a>) is sent,
+the aeroplane still moving as in <a href="#FIG_33">Fig. 33</a>.</p>
+
+<p>Subsequent observation as to the general effect of the fire can best be
+made from over the target, the results being written out in a message
+and dropped at the battery.</p>
+
+<p>When the signal “Land” is sent the aeroplane comes down at a place
+previously selected and not necessarily at the spot whence the signals
+are sent.</p>
+
+<p>Two men should be detailed from the battery to watch the observing
+aeroplane, one with field glasses looking for the signals, the other
+with his naked eye keeping a continuous watch on it so as to make
+certain that no mistake is made as to the actual machine, since, when
+there are several aircraft out in observation, confusion between them
+is very likely to arise.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_205" class="f120"><b>205.</b> <i>Signals from and to aeroplanes.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. With Very’s lights the following code of signals will be used for
+communication from the aeroplane to the ground:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">(<i>a</i>) Before fire is commenced—</li>
+<li class="isub7">One white light<span class="ws2">&nbsp;I am over the target.</span></li>
+<li class="isub7">One green&emsp;”<span class="ws3">I am ready to observe fire.</span></li>
+<li class="isub4">(<i>b</i>) While ranging—</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2 bb">
+      <th class="tdc">Light used.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">For Line.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">For Range.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">For Fuze.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">One red.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Right.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Over.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Air.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">Two reds.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Far right.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Far over.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">One green.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Short.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Graze.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">Two greens.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Far left.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Far short.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">—</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">One red, one green.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Range.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Fuze correct.&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">One green, one red.&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Unobserved.&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Unobserved.&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Unobserved.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">Succession of blasts on</li>
+<li class="isub6">Klaxon horn<span class="ws3">Am about to fire two signals.</span></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_329">[Pg 329]</span>
+The signal “Far right” or “Far left” should be made when the shell
+bursts 8 degrees or more from the target. Any shell bursting 500 yards
+or more short of or beyond the target should be signalled as “Far
+short” or “Far over.” “Fuze correct” will be signalled when some of the
+shells burst on graze and others in air.</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">(<i>c</i>) After fire for effect has commenced—</li>
+<li class="isub7">Red, green<span class="ws3">Fire effective.</span></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>A white light fired at any time after fire has commenced means “Stop,
+am about to drop a message.”</p>
+
+<p>2. Strips of white cloth 6 feet by 1 foot, placed on the ground, can be
+used for signalling from the ground to aeroplanes. The following code
+of letters formed from the white strips placed on the ground will be
+employed.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc_top" rowspan="9">3.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bt">I</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bt bb" rowspan="2">Direction of target.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bb">I</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">L</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Observe for line.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">X</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Observe for range.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Z</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Observe for fuze.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">V</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Observe for general effect of fire.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">N</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Repeat last signal.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">T</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Land.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">F /</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">Fresh target on right. The letters</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">I, K or A may be placed immediately after the F</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">to indicate to the aeroplane observer the nature of</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">the target, viz., I for infantry, K for cavalry, and A</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="3">for artillery.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>All letters should be placed on the ground so that the top of the
+letter is towards the target.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_206" class="f120"><b>206.</b> <i>Observation of fire from kites.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When kites are available the results of the observation can be
+telephoned down to the guns and there is no waste of time, but they can
+only operate in a wind (<a href="#Para_150"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>150</b></a>),
+and their range of vision and power to see behind cover is limited.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_330">[Pg 330]</span></p>
+
+<p>Kites require special consideration and the exact place from which
+they should be flown should be chosen by a kiting officer. Some of the
+requirements are:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Concealment from the enemy of the winch and carrier kite</li>
+<li class="isub4">when on the ground.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Ground not obstructed by obstacles.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Sufficient room in a straight line to haul down 600</li>
+<li class="isub4">or 1,000 yards. This should be measured out down wind</li>
+<li class="isub4">and must be free from obstructions. It is possible to</li>
+<li class="isub4">haul down in a smaller space, but this involves much</li>
+<li class="isub4">preparation and a number of holdfasts are necessary.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Ranging.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_207" class="f120"><b>207.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Ranging is the process of finding the elevation, fuze and line.</p>
+
+<p>2. When the battery commander has given an order to load with any
+nature of projectile, that loading will be continued until an order to
+change is given.</p>
+
+<p>3. With fixed ammunition, if a change of elevation or corrector
+be ordered when time shrapnel is being fired, Nos. 1 order “
+<span class="smcap">Unload</span>,” and guns are reloaded for the new
+elevation or corrector. A similar order should be given when for any
+other reason it is desired to empty guns already loaded, as, for
+instance, when ceasing fire.</p>
+
+<p>If fixed ammunition is not used, and a change of elevation is
+ordered, guns loaded with the fuze for the old elevation will be fired
+at the new elevation. If for any reason it is required to empty guns
+already loaded, the order is “<span class="smcap">Empty guns</span>,”
+and the guns are fired at once without any fixed interval.</p>
+
+<p>4. As soon as ranging is completed the battery commander will send the
+angle of sight, elevation, corrector or fuze to the brigade commander,
+and in the case of howitzers the charge also.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_331">[Pg 331]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_208" class="f120"><b>208.</b> <i>To find the elevation.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Under service conditions it is seldom possible to estimate with
+accuracy the distance the burst of a shell is short or over with regard
+to the target. The principle of ranging for elevation is, therefore, to
+find two elevations, the longer of which will throw the shell beyond
+and the other short of the target, thereby enclosing it in what is
+called a “<i>bracket</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>This bracket is large at first, usually 300 yards.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_20_20" href="#Footnote_20_20" class="fnanchor">[20]</a>
+If a smaller bracket is required one or more rounds, according to the
+nature of the ranging employed, are fired at the intermediate hundreds.
+This gives the 100 yard bracket, which in ordinary circumstances is
+the one required. The elevation is then verified by repeating the two
+ends of the bracket. <b>The important point is to make certain of this
+bracket.</b></p>
+
+<p>2. Ranging is either “<i>Collective</i>,” “<i>Single Gun</i>,”
+“<i>Section</i>,” or “<i>All Guns</i>.”</p>
+
+<p>The method adopted should be that best calculated to obtain effective
+fire with the least delay, and with this end in view a combination of
+the different methods may sometimes be used. An example of combined
+“section” and “collective” ranging is given in <a href="#Para_227">Sec. <b>227</b></a>.</p>
+
+<p>By “<i>Collective Ranging</i>”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_21_21" href="#Footnote_21_21" class="fnanchor">[21]</a>
+is meant more than 2 guns fired in quick succession at the same
+elevation and fuze. The form that collective ranging should take in a
+6-gun unit is the fire of half batteries alternately; in a 4-gun unit
+the fire of the three right guns.</p>
+
+<p>By “<i>Single Gun Ranging</i>,” “<i>Section Ranging</i>” and “<i>All
+Guns Ranging</i>” is meant ranging with one, two, or all guns fired
+singly.</p>
+
+<p>In “<i>All Guns Ranging</i>” a single initial elevation is ordered,
+subsequent elevations being given out singly on the observation of the
+previous round.</p>
+
+<p>In “<i>Section Ranging</i>” two elevations are ordered with or without
+an interval.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_332">[Pg 332]</span></p>
+
+<p>In “<i>Single Gun Ranging</i>” either of the above two methods may be
+followed, but only one gun is used.</p>
+
+<p>3. The fall of the rounds is judged from the smoke of the burst of the
+shell or splash of the bullets, which should be clearly observed as
+short of or beyond the target.</p>
+
+<p>4. In order to obtain good results when ranging with time shrapnel a
+length of corrector or fuze should be employed, which will give bursts
+on or just below the line of sight. When indirect laying is employed
+it may occasionally be advisable to commence with a corrector or fuze
+échelon series, in order to select a suitable length.
+(<a href="#Para_209"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>209</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>5. Elevation should always be given at first in round numbers,
+beginning, in the case of yards, at the nearest 100, or in degrees, at
+the nearest degree or half degree. It is seldom worth while to make a
+smaller change of elevation than 25 yards, or its equivalent.</p>
+
+<p>When the whole series depends on the correct observation of a single
+round, that round should be repeated and another fired with 100 yards
+more (or less) elevation.</p>
+
+<p>Further alterations in the elevation from the observation of the splash
+of the bullets and fall of the case of the shell, when visible, are
+made as required. This will often be necessary for individual guns.</p>
+
+<p>If a shell is observed to strike the target, a verifying series of one
+or two rounds should be fired.</p>
+
+<p>6. The battery commander details the method of ranging and the nature
+of the projectile thus:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Collective</span>”</td>
+      <td class="tdc_wsp bl br" rowspan="8">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Corrector</span>”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">or</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Right</span> (<span class="smcap">Centre</span> or</td>
+      <td class="tdc">or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc"><span class="smcap">Left</span>) <span class="smcap">Ranging</span>”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">or</td>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Percussion</span>”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">No. ... Ranging</span>”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">or</td>
+      <td class="tdc">or</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">All Guns Ranging</span>”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">“<span class="smcap">Lyddite.</span>”
+                <span class="pagenum" id="Page_333">[Pg 333]</span></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="center">“<i>Collective Ranging.</i>”</p>
+
+<p>7. When collective ranging is employed the battery commander gives out
+one elevation and corrector for example:—</p>
+
+<p>“Collective—Corrector 156—4600.”</p>
+
+<p>This elevation is fired by the right half battery,&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_22_22" href="#Footnote_22_22" class="fnanchor">[22]</a>
+commencing from the right at battery fire 3 seconds unless otherwise
+ordered. The battery commander from the result of these rounds alters
+the corrector if necessary, and orders a fresh elevation to the left
+half battery to obtain his 300 yard or other bracket. He then sends
+down corrections for line for the right half battery unless one
+correction to the whole battery is advisable, in which case he will
+send it down before the new corrector and range. This process is
+continued until the size of the bracket is, if possible, reduced to 100
+yards. (<a href="#Para_227"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>227</b>, Example 1</a>.)</p>
+
+<p class="center">“<i>Section Ranging.</i>”</p>
+
+<p>8. When a section is being used for ranging the battery commander gives
+out two elevations differing by 300 yards or multiple of 300 (the
+longer elevation first). The elevation which is given out first is
+fired by the right gun, the second by the left gun of the section, at
+an interval of 5 seconds, unless another interval is ordered. If the
+target is not bracketed two fresh elevations are ordered.</p>
+
+<p>Should a gun of the ranging section become temporarily or permanently
+disabled, the section commander continues with the other gun of the
+section, or informs the section commander next him, who will place the
+nearest gun temporarily under his command.</p>
+
+<p class="center">“<i>Single gun Ranging.</i>”</p>
+
+<p>9. If one gun is used for ranging, elevations will be given out singly
+or in pairs, the general procedure for bracketing the target being
+similar to the above.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_334">[Pg 334]</span></p>
+
+<p class="center">“<i>All guns Ranging.</i>”</p>
+
+<p>10. Ranging with all guns is in certain circumstances admissible,
+particularly when high explosive shell are alone to be used. Elevations
+will be given out singly. In the case of field guns this method would
+only be an advantage in very exceptional cases. It presupposes that the
+range from each gun is identical and that observation is easy.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_209" class="f120"><b>209.</b> <i>To find the fuze.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>As a rule no special ranging for fuze should be necessary.</b>
+The battery commander before or after ranging for elevation will select
+what he considers to be a suitable length of corrector and modify it
+later according to circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>2. When fighting in a hilly country or when from any cause no
+reasonable estimate of the corrector can be formed it may prove
+economical in ammunition to fire an échelon before proceeding to fire
+with time shrapnel. (<a href="#Para_208"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>208</b> (<b>4</b></a>).)
+When an échelon is considered necessary it will, except in the case
+of howitzers and heavy guns, be fired before ranging for elevation
+commences. The échelon is fired by the three right guns from right to
+left at 5 seconds interval unless another interval is ordered. The fuze
+indicators, or fuze setters, are set at lengths increasing by 10, the
+order being “<span class="smcap">Échelon</span>] ...
+<span class="smcap">Range</span>....” In ordering the
+initial corrector settings, the battery commander should endeavour to
+select an échelon which will give bursts in the air and on graze.</p>
+
+<p>On this order the No. 1 of No. 1 gun orders his corrector to be set
+at the graduation ordered. The Nos. 1 of the other guns order their
+correctors to be set at a successive increase of 10. It may in very
+exceptional circumstances be necessary to fire a second échelon. The
+above procedure is then repeated.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_335">[Pg 335]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. If a gun misses its turn during the échelon the fact will be
+reported to the battery commander, and the gun will be fired when ready
+unless otherwise ordered. The section commander will, however, be
+careful that the gun is not fired during the échelon.</p>
+
+<p>4. When fire is being corrected by observation from a distant observing
+station and the battery angle proves to be correct, any considerable
+discrepancy between the gun range and the plotter range will be due to
+a miscalculation of the angle of sight. The correct fuze will then be
+that for the plotter range.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_210" class="f120"><b>210.</b> <i>To find the line.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Except in the case of fleeting opportunities, battery fire will be
+continued till the battery commander is satisfied that the correct line
+of fire for each gun has been obtained. Even in the case of fleeting
+opportunities it will sometimes be advisable to fire a round of battery
+fire at small intervals to check the lines.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid waste of ammunition, especially in the case of guns which
+cannot be unloaded, it may be advisable to increase the normal interval
+between the rounds of an échelon or at battery fire. Line corrections
+are preferably made on the fall of each round, but
+<a href="#Para_208"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>208</b> (7)</a>.</p>
+
+<p>2. The battery commander will correct the deflection for each
+gun unless he has delegated this duty to the section commanders.
+(<a href="#Para_197"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>197</b> (3)</a>.) Should he
+consider from the first ranging rounds that his lines are not correct
+he should order an initial correction for the remaining guns.</p>
+
+<p>3. To assist the battery commander in correcting for line when the
+observing station is not close to the battery, the number of each gun
+as it fires, also all prematures, should be reported by signalling or
+telephone. (<a href="#Para_197"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>197</b> (5)</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_336">[Pg 336]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Ranging for Howitzers and Heavy Guns.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_211" class="f120"><b>211.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The general principles of ranging are the same as for field guns,
+but certain differences exist owing to the equipment, weight of shell,
+etc.</p>
+
+<p>2. As a general rule, a steep angle of descent is a paramount condition
+for effective howitzer fire. When firing lyddite, an angle of descent
+of at least 20° is desirable.</p>
+
+<p>3. Against troops in the open, the full charge should be employed in
+order to obtain the forward effect of a comparatively flat trajectory.
+When engaging objectives such as a wall, or buildings, which present a
+high vertical target, the full charge should also be used.</p>
+
+<p>Redoubts or overhead cover on the contrary require a steep angle of
+descent; the same applies to trenches and shielded guns.</p>
+
+<p>4. Howitzers frequently require individual corrections due to
+variations in the muzzle velocities of the guns, but such corrections
+should only be made on the observation of groups of rounds. The
+smallest correction which it is worth making is one equivalent to 25
+yards.</p>
+
+<p>5. When a change from lyddite to time shrapnel is made and it is known
+that lyddite shell range differently to the shrapnel a few rounds of
+time or percussion shrapnel should be fired to verify the elevation.
+Owing to the steep angle of descent it is often easier to observe the
+splash of the bullets of time shrapnel than the burst of percussion
+shrapnel.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_212" class="f120"><b>212.</b> <i>Howitzers.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Ranging can be carried out with lyddite, percussion or time shrapnel.</p>
+
+<p>The ranging is carried out with one section or one gun of the battery,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_337">[Pg 337]</span>
+but all guns may be used for ranging if lyddite is to be used
+subsequently, and the target is of narrow front, or presents no
+obliquity to the battery.</p>
+
+<p>2. When a section is employed for ranging, a bracket to approximate
+as nearly as possible to 300 yards, or multiple of 300 yards, should
+be ordered, but round numbers should usually be adhered to, such as
+28°-25°, not 28°20´-25°20´.</p>
+
+<p>This bracket is further reduced to one corresponding to about 100
+yards, or 1-3rd of the original bracket. The elevation is then verified
+by repeating the two ends of this bracket.</p>
+
+<p>When lyddite only is to be used, the bracket will be further reduced to
+50 yards, and the two ends of the bracket repeated.</p>
+
+<p>For howitzers fitted with the range drums graduated in yards for the
+fourth charge, the B.C. will range in yards as with other field guns,
+and will select the approximate ranges to start with, in accordance
+with the charge to be used, by means of the ranging rule provided.</p>
+
+<p>If the range rule is not available, the following calculation will give
+the approximate range for different charges:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">When using</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">full charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">subtract ¼ from the <i>real</i> range.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">fourth charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">give the <i>real</i> range.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">third charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">add ⅓ to the <i>real</i> range.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">second charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">add ⅔ to the <i>real</i> range.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">first charge</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">double the <i>real</i> range.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>3. When ranging with one gun, or with all guns, only one elevation will
+be ordered at a time, the principles of bracketting as laid down above
+being adhered to.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>To find the fuze.</i>—The battery commander, after ranging for
+elevation, may find it necessary to order an échelon (this will nearly
+always be necessary for batteries not provided with fuze indicators).
+The échelon is fired from right to left by the three right guns at 5
+seconds interval, unless another interval is ordered, as in field gun
+batteries.</p>
+
+<p>5. In the case of batteries not provided with fuze indicators, a fuze
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_338">[Pg 338]</span>
+and an increment will be ordered, such increment to be a division or
+half division according to which most nearly corresponds with 100 yards.</p>
+
+<p>If the battery commander begins ranging with time shrapnel the
+procedure will be the same as for other field guns except that
+collective ranging will not be used. (<a href="#Para_208"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>208</b> (4)</a>).</p>
+
+<p id="Para_213" class="f120"><b>213.</b> <i>Heavy batteries.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The procedure of these guns is identical with that of field
+howitzers, except that ranging will not be carried out with time
+shrapnel. At long ranges it is advisable to order one elevation at a
+time.</p>
+
+<p>2. When firing with lyddite, as with howitzers, the 50 yard bracket
+should be verified. At distant ranges, however, the bracket should not
+be less than twice the 50 per cent. zone.</p>
+
+<p>When time shrapnel is to be used the 300 yard bracket may be found with
+lyddite or percussion shrapnel.</p>
+
+<p>3. The procedure in ranging for fuze is that of firing an échelon as
+laid down for howitzers.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Distribution of Fire.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_214" class="f120"><b>214.</b> <i>General principles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. <b>Distribution of fire over the target allotted to the battery
+should, whenever possible, commence from the first round.</b></p>
+
+<p>This should not prevent a battery commander in the case of an
+indistinct target from ranging on the most conspicuous portion, and
+distributing his fire subsequently.</p>
+
+<p>2. Assuming 50 yards to be the average distance required to burst a
+shell short of the target, and that the lateral space covered by the
+cone of dispersion of a shell is about 35 per cent. of the distance
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_339">[Pg 339]</span>
+burst short, it will be seen that the width a battery at normal
+intervals can effectively cover when the lines of fire of its guns are
+parallel is approximately equal to its own front. By “<i>sweeping</i>”
+(<a href="#Para_216"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>216</b></a>) it can cover a width
+of 3 times its own front.</p>
+
+<p>3. When section commanders are ordered to correct for line
+(<a href="#Para_197"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>197</b> (3)</a>), each of them
+should be made responsible for a definite portion of the target. The
+extreme edge of a target should not be laid on, as a small error might
+cause the shell to be wasted.</p>
+
+<p>4. If it is required to concentrate or distribute the fire of a battery
+over a front of a lesser or greater width than that covered when the
+lines of fire are parallel, it is effected by ordering concentration
+on, or distribution from, a named gun. When an aiming point is
+employed an angle is given to the battery, followed by the amount of
+concentration or distribution required.</p>
+
+<p>5. The amount of concentration or distribution to be given will depend
+on the width of the target, the angular measurement of which varies
+with the range.</p>
+
+<p>Thus:—</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">At</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">2,000</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">yds.,</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">100 yds.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">measure.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">3°,</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">60 yds.</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">measure</td>
+      <td class="tdr">&nbsp; 1° 45′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">3,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">2°</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">1° 10′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">4,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">1½°</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">50′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">5,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">1° 10′</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">40′.</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">6,000</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp">1°</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc">”</td>
+      <td class="tdr">35′.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>These may be taken as the front covered by a 6-gun or 4-gun battery
+respectively when the lines of fire are parallel.</p>
+
+<p>6. The angle given to the battery must bring the flank guns inside the
+flanks of the target. The total distribution required is the difference
+between the front covered by the battery and the extent of the target.
+This must be divided by the number of gun intervals to obtain the
+distribution between each gun. If the target is narrower than the front
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_340">[Pg 340]</span>
+covered by the battery a similar rule applies, but concentration will
+be needed.</p>
+
+<p>If a switch from one target to another is involved, the angle between
+the line of fire of a flank gun and the spot on which it is desired to
+direct the new line of fire of the same gun should be measured.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Example I.</i>—Supposing a 6-gun battery is required to fire
+at a range of 3,000 yards against a target measuring 3°, the fire of
+the battery with parallel lines will cover a front of 2°. An extra
+distribution of 1° is, therefore, needed. This amount divided by 5
+will give 12 minutes for each gun interval, which would be taken as 10
+minutes to prevent the fire of the further flank gun being outside the
+target. The order would then be “<span class="smcap">Distribute 10 minutes,
+from No. 1</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>No deflection is given to the named gun, but each of the remaining
+guns would be given 10 minutes left deflection for every gun interval
+between it and No. 1 gun.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example II.</i>—Supposing it is desired to concentrate the fire of
+the above battery on the right to cover a front of about 30 minutes
+at a range of 3,600 yards, the battery commander’s order would be
+“<span class="smcap">Concentrate 15 minutes on No. 1</span>.” No deflection
+is given to the gun named; each of the remaining guns would be given 15
+minutes deflection for every gun interval between it and the gun named,
+viz., No. 2 gun 15 minutes more right, No. 3 gun 30 minutes more right,
+and so on.</p>
+
+<p><i>Example III.</i>—A 4-gun battery firing at a target whose angular
+extent is 4°. It is desired to switch the fire on to a target
+whose angular extent is 2°, therefore the difference 2° or 120
+minutes divided by 3 (gun intervals) gives 40 minutes which is the
+concentration to be ordered.</p>
+
+<p>When there is a considerable difference in range from one target to the
+other, parallelism should be first given to the guns before making the switch.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_341">[Pg 341]</span></p>
+
+<p>After the operation of ranging has been completed, the battery
+commander has to determine by what method of fire he will engage the
+objective. He may do so by one of the three methods described in Sec.
+<b>202</b> (1), combined, if desired, with “searching” or “sweeping.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_215" class="f120"><b>215.</b> <i>Searching.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. “<i>Searching</i>” means distributing fire in depth over an area of
+ground by successive alterations in elevation.</p>
+
+<p>2. It will often be impossible to obtain the true range of a target,
+either owing to the difficulty of locating its exact position, or to
+want of time. All that can then be done is to ascertain two limits
+within which the target lies, and to search within those limits. Ranges
+at which fire is seen to be ineffective are cut out and the space under
+fire is thus gradually reduced.</p>
+
+<p>3. Sometimes it will be necessary to range on a crest line behind which
+the target is located. In this case searching should not be attempted
+to a greater depth than 400 yards from the crest or other obstacle
+to view, unless the battery commander can obtain information as to
+the result of his fire or the approximate position of the target,
+as results are unlikely to be proportionate to the expenditure of
+ammunition. In this connection flank observing parties may be of great
+value.</p>
+
+<p>4. Orders as to changes in elevation and number of rounds to be fired
+are given by the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>The amount by which the elevation should be increased for each series
+of rounds will depend on the depth of ground which is effectively
+covered by the burst of the shell. This amount varies from 100 yards at
+short ranges to 50 yards at extreme ranges.</p>
+
+<p>Should the ground to be searched slope considerably to the front, the
+above increments should be increased; if to the rear, they should be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_342">[Pg 342]</span>
+diminished. When such is the case the angle of sight will be different
+for each successive range. It is generally inadvisable to alter this
+angle on the sights, but the slope can be allowed for by altering the
+corrector setting, decreasing it if the angle of sight is increased and
+<i>vice versâ</i>.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_216" class="f120"><b>216.</b> <i>Sweeping.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. “<i>Sweeping</i>” means distributing fire in width over a front
+greater than a battery can cover in the ordinary way.</p>
+
+<p>2. When sweeping fire is employed the lines of fire of the guns must
+first of all be opened out, the amount depending on the width of the
+target. To obtain the amount of sweep required after the guns have been
+opened out multiply the frontage subtended by the target in degrees
+by three for a 6-gun battery, five for a 4-gun battery, and ten for a
+section. This gives approximately the number of minutes sweep required.
+In giving the order to sweep, the battery commander will state in
+degrees or minutes the amount of sweep necessary, and such order
+will always be prefaced by the rate of fire required, thus:—Battery
+commander orders “<span class="smcap">Range ... Section (or battery) Fire ... seconds,
+Sweep ... degrees or minutes</span>.” On this order the first round from
+each gun is fired in the line ordered, and the second ... degrees (or
+minutes) to the right, and the third ... degrees (or minutes) to the
+left of the line of the first. This procedure is repeated for as long
+as is necessary, the fourth round being fired on the line of the first
+and so on.</p>
+
+<p>The guns must be re-laid for elevation and direction after each round.
+If the battery is already at section or battery fire and sweeping
+fire is required, the battery commander must give the order:—“<span class="smcap">At
+Section (or Battery) Fire ... Sweep ... degrees (or minutes)</span>,” as
+otherwise the procedure will be as in para. 3.</p>
+
+<p>3. If it is desired to sweep an area with great rapidity, the battery
+commander will order:—“<span class="smcap">Sweep ... degrees (or minutes)</span>,”
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_343">[Pg 343]</span>
+and the guns will be fired at gun fire. With guns fitted with traversing
+gear on the carriage the layer lays for direction for the first round
+only, the line for the second and third rounds being obtained by moving
+the traversing gear to the amount of sweep, right or left. The guns
+must be re-laid for elevation after each round. After the third round
+is fired the gun is traversed on to the original line and the direction
+checked by the sights. If it is necessary to repeat this procedure, the
+battery commander orders:—“<span class="smcap">Repeat</span>.”</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Searching and sweeping combined.</i>—If the target possesses
+considerable width and depth a combination of searching and sweeping
+may be employed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_217" class="f120"><b>217.</b> <i>Change of target.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When a change of target is ordered, the battery commander measures
+the angle between the new and old target. He determines whether any
+allowance is necessary to counteract the difference between the angle
+he has taken and that required for the battery. (<a href="#Para_123"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>123</b> (4)</a>.)
+He then orders or communicates the angle to the
+battery thus: “<span class="smcap">All guns ... degrees more right</span> (<i>or</i>
+<span class="allsmcap">LEFT</span>).”</p>
+
+<p>2. With guns not fitted with No. 7 dial sight, if the angle is within
+the amount of deflection which can be given on the deflection scale,
+the position of the aiming posts may not have to be changed, and the
+order is given thus:—</p>
+
+<p class="center">“<span class="smcap">All guns ... degrees more right (or left).</span>”</p>
+
+<p>otherwise it is necessary to move the aiming posts and the order will
+be—</p>
+
+<p class="center">“<span class="smcap">Lines of fire ... degrees more right (or left).</span>”</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Methods of Engaging Various Objectives.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_218" class="f120"><b>218.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The choice of objective, the opening of fire, and the expenditure of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_344">[Pg 344]</span>
+ammunition are governed by the tactical situation and are dealt with in
+Chapter VII. The following sections deal primarily with the methods by
+which fire can be applied with effect to various objectives.</p>
+
+<p>2. The methods of ranging are described in <a href="#Para_208">Sec. <b>208</b></a>, and the
+examples in <a href="#Para_227">Sec. <b>227</b></a> illustrate those methods. Officers are
+responsible for using their discretion as to which method should be
+employed so that the fire of their batteries may achieve the object in
+view.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_219" class="f120"><b>219.</b> <i>To register a zone.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. A battery occupying “<i>a position in observation</i>”
+(<a href="#Para_184"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>184</b></a>) may be called upon
+to “<i>register</i>” a certain zone or area of country. To do this the
+range should be obtained to various points in such a manner that fire
+may be opened rapidly on any objective that may subsequently appear in
+their neighbourhood.</p>
+
+<p>Such points may be crest lines, hedges, bridges, roads, clumps of
+trees, buildings, the edges of woods, or the limits of open spaces over
+which the enemy may be expected to move.</p>
+
+<p>Registering may be carried out with a section or single gun, time or
+percussion being used. It is advisable to number or letter the objects
+registered from the right, a careful record being kept of the points
+registered.</p>
+
+<p>2. The degree of accuracy to which it is desirable to obtain the range
+to such points must vary according to the nature of the objective that
+may be expected to appear. The range to a crest on which artillery is
+expected to come into action must be accurately found. The limits of
+open spaces over which movement may be expected cannot, as a rule, be
+accurately defined. A few trial shots, therefore, may give sufficient
+indication for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_220" class="f120"><b>220.</b> <i>Localities.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Villages or individual houses may be fired on by artillery in order
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_345">[Pg 345]</span>
+to reduce their resisting power and render the approach to them easier.
+Field howitzers or heavy artillery firing lyddite should be used if
+available.</p>
+
+<p>2. To destroy an individual house accurate ranging is necessary, only a
+sufficient number of guns or howitzers being employed for the purpose.</p>
+
+<p>3. To destroy a village by setting it on fire or to prevent the massing
+of reserves in the streets a searching fire should be used.</p>
+
+<p>4. To facilitate the attack on a village or house occupied for defence,
+field guns firing percussion shrapnel may be used, as well as howitzers
+and heavy artillery, as their projectiles are effective against
+personnel behind all ordinary walls. Accurate ranging is necessary;
+particularly for line, as it is necessary to hit each individual house.</p>
+
+<p>5. If the edge of a wood is occupied by the enemy’s infantry, it should
+be ranged on in the same manner as a trench (<i>see</i> below). A
+searching fire may be employed against troops taking cover in a wood,
+but as it will usually be difficult, if not impossible, to establish
+a bracket with any certainty, effect must depend to a great extent on
+chance.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_221" class="f120"><b>221.</b> <i>Staffs.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. It may be possible to locate groups of officers forming staffs
+either mounted or dismounted. Such objectives should be ranged on
+rapidly and a quick rate of fire opened for effect till they either
+disperse or disappear.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_222" class="f120"><b>222.</b> <i>Cavalry.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Cavalry when mounted must usually be engaged on the move. It may
+present a variety of targets; a mass, a line more or less at right
+angles or parallel to the line of fire, or an area over which a number
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_346">[Pg 346]</span>
+of comparatively small bodies is moving. The direction and pace of
+movement must always be reckoned with.</p>
+
+<p>2. A mass will break up under artillery fire, so should be dealt with
+by rapid ranging, and an extremely rapid and intense fire till it
+breaks up, followed by a searching fire with suitable deflection to
+allow for movement.</p>
+
+<p>3. To stop an advancing line the chief considerations are a suitable
+distribution and rapid changes of elevation, arranged so that the
+cavalry is always advancing into the fire.</p>
+
+<p>At ranges under 2,000 yards it may be advisable to order lengths of
+fuze instead of corrector settings.</p>
+
+<p>4. To enfilade a cavalry line moving across the front requires
+concentration of the lines of fire with varying elevations for each
+section and suitable deflection to compensate for movement.</p>
+
+<p>5. Cavalry, covering a wide area, requires distribution both laterally
+and in depth, with deflection and alterations of range to compensate
+for movement.</p>
+
+<p>6. Dismounted cavalry will usually be dealt with as infantry. Its led
+horses, if they can be located, form a vulnerable objective, which
+should be dealt with by rapid ranging followed by rapid fire for effect
+till the horses either disperse or gain cover.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_223" class="f120"><b>223.</b> <i>Artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. To engage a battery of which the flashes or dust thrown up by
+discharge are visible behind a crest, the crest should be bracketed,
+and searching fire employed for a suitable distance behind the crest.
+If the slope of the ground behind the crest is known, or can be
+ascertained, it may afford an indication of the distance behind the
+crest to which it is desirable to search.</p>
+
+<p>2. A battery in action or attempting to come into action in the open
+engaged by a battery also in the open should be ranged on as quickly as
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_347">[Pg 347]</span>
+possible and should be subjected to fire for effect at the earliest
+possible moment. The bracket should then be narrowed down and the fire
+maintained till the enemy’s fire slackens or becomes inaccurate. If the
+range is suitable and observation sufficiently easy, efforts may then
+be made to destroy the <i>matériel</i> with percussion shrapnel. To do
+this each gun should engage a hostile gun, and the fire of each gun
+should be carefully corrected.</p>
+
+<p>A concealed battery engaging a hostile battery in the open will adopt
+a similar procedure, but there is not the same need for haste, and the
+ranging may be more deliberate.</p>
+
+<p>3. To neutralize a battery it should be subjected to a rapid, accurate
+and intense fire till its fire is mastered. It should then be observed
+and if it endeavours to intervene again it should be subjected to the
+same treatment. A hostile battery, the fire of which has been mastered,
+may be neutralized by a portion only of a battery, which should employ
+a rapid sweeping fire to compensate for the reduction in the number of
+guns.</p>
+
+<p>If a rapid and intense fire is desired against hostile artillery it is
+preferable to employ a quick rate of section or battery fire.</p>
+
+<p>4. Guns coming into action in the open can usually establish themselves
+in action before the process of ranging on them is completed, unless
+the range to some point in the immediate neighbourhood of the position
+has been previously ascertained. If this has been done the rapid
+opening of fire for effect may cripple the hostile battery before it is
+able to open fire.</p>
+
+<p>5. Howitzers and heavy artillery, if available, are especially suitable
+for dealing with entrenched guns, the former using shrapnel against
+the personnel and lyddite against the entrenchments. The latter would
+preferably use lyddite against the entrenchments. Very accurate ranging
+is desirable.</p>
+
+<p>6. Every effort should be made to locate the enemy’s observing
+stations. When located they should be engaged with a portion of the
+guns available.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_348">[Pg 348]</span></p>
+
+<p>7. The wagon lines of batteries in action form a vulnerable objective
+if they can be located. They should be dealt with in the same manner as
+the led horses of cavalry (<a href="#Para_222"><i>see</i> Sec. <b>222</b> (6)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_224" class="f120"><b>224.</b> <i>Infantry.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Artillery may fire on hostile infantry for any of the following
+reasons:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; i. To facilitate the advance of its own infantry.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. To cause the hostile infantry to deploy.</li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. To delay its advance, bring it to a standstill, or prevent</li>
+<li class="isub5">it resuming its advance.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>These objects are not likely to be fulfilled unless the fire of the
+artillery is sufficiently accurate to cause the infantry loss. The
+losses inflicted should, however, be looked upon as the means to the end.</p>
+
+<p>2. To facilitate the advance of its own infantry against the hostile
+infantry the enemy’s fire position must be subjected to an accurate
+and well distributed fire. The fire position, whether it be a trench,
+a series of trenches, a crest line, the edge of a wood or some other
+tactical feature, will seldom be a continuous straight line parallel
+to the front of the battery. The line may be broken and the range and
+angle of sight to various portions of it may vary.</p>
+
+<p>When engaging irregular shaped targets, such as these, it is advisable,
+after obtaining a bracket on a portion of the target, to correct lines
+and range during battery fire, and to order individual guns or sections
+to add or drop the necessary number of yards.</p>
+
+<p>This applies equally to other irregular targets besides infantry.</p>
+
+<p>In the open “<i>section control</i>” may be desirable, if the target
+is wide and the line broken, but during the infantry advance bursts of
+fire should be in the hands of the battery commander.</p>
+
+<p>Fire for effect should be arranged in bursts of section or battery fire
+during which the infantry may gain ground.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_349">[Pg 349]</span></p>
+
+<p>3. To cause hostile infantry in close formation to deploy requires
+rapid ranging, the obtaining of the best bracket possible in the
+shortest possible time and a rapid searching fire for effect within the
+limits of the bracket found.</p>
+
+<p>If the appearance of formed bodies of hostile infantry in a certain
+locality has been foreseen and the zone has been registered the process
+of ranging may be dispensed with, and the full value of surprise effect
+may be obtained.</p>
+
+<p>4. When the enemy’s infantry is still beyond the range of rifle fire
+it will endeavour to cross open spaces exposed to artillery fire as
+rapidly as possible in the least vulnerable formations. If these open
+spaces have been registered the advance of the infantry may be delayed
+and possibly prevented by establishing a belt of fire through which it
+must pass. This belt can be moved at will but if the enemy’s infantry
+is only visible at intervals, accurate prediction is required as to the
+places where it will be exposed to fire.</p>
+
+<p>5. When the infantry comes under effective rifle fire it will be
+compelled to form firing lines in the best fire positions available.
+These positions should, if possible, be foreseen and the ranges
+ascertained. The method of engaging the infantry when it occupies these
+positions will be similar to that referred to above for supporting
+the advance against infantry in position. The essentials are accuracy
+and suitable distribution. The moral effect of a great volume of fire
+should be borne in mind. A rapid and intense fire for a short period
+may bring an advance to a standstill or prevent it being resumed. In
+a similar way infantry advancing by rushes in extended order may be
+stopped or driven to cover by bursts of fire.</p>
+
+<p>6. The most intense fire possible should be employed to prevent the
+delivery of an assault.</p>
+
+<p>7. Infantry advancing rapidly to counter-attack must be dealt with by
+rapid ranging and rapid fire for effect directed against the front line
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_350">[Pg 350]</span>
+of the infantry and corrected as regards range and line in accordance
+with its movements. If the advance is checked a searching fire directed
+so as to include the supporting troops may be usefully employed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_225" class="f120"><b>225.</b> <i>Machine guns.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Machine guns often form objectives of great tactical importance, and
+it may be necessary to subject them to a very intense fire in order
+to silence them. When employed in sections they present a target with
+a narrow front and accuracy of line is important. Only a sufficient
+number of guns for the purpose should therefore be employed. This
+would usually be a section. When entrenched it may be desirable to use
+howitzers with either shrapnel or lyddite or both against them.</p>
+
+<p>2. The difficulty in dealing with machine guns in action lies in the
+facility with which they can be concealed. If they can be located
+accurate ranging for elevation and line are necessary and a few well
+placed rounds should either disable the detachments or drive them to
+cover. If they cannot be located accurately it may still be possible
+to obtain sufficient indication of their whereabouts to enable a wide
+bracket to be obtained. Searching fire between the limits of such a
+bracket must then be resorted to.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_226" class="f120"><b>226.</b> <i>Aircraft.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. It is at present difficult to distinguish hostile from friendly
+aircraft, but this difficulty will probably decrease in the future as
+the aircraft of different nations tend to develop on distinctive lines.</p>
+
+<p>The strictest control must be exercised over all fire directed against
+aircraft as indiscriminate fire may endanger neighbouring units and may
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_351">[Pg 351]</span>
+disclose the position of the troops to the enemy’s observers.</p>
+
+<p>2. To engage such objectives certain preparations should, if possible,
+be made beforehand. These preparations consist in digging trenches for
+the trails and in organizing flank observing parties with telephones.
+Some modification of the usual procedure is necessary owing to the
+variations which occur in height, range, and direction of these objects
+under different influences.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Captive balloons or kites.</i>—Efforts should be made to enclose
+such targets within the limits of a 500 or 600 yards bracket, employing
+a corrector which gives bursts near the line of sight. The layer must
+devote his attention to keeping the gun on the part of the target
+indicated.</p>
+
+<p>Subsequently the bracket having been reduced and the corrector
+shortened, occasional rounds of gun fire should be fired, each section
+using a different elevation.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Airships.</i>—Provided an airship is not moving across the front
+at a rapid rate it may be engaged successfully in a similar manner. The
+principal points to be attended to are the establishment of a bracket,
+and the employment of a corrector, when fire for effect is being
+attempted, which will give high bursts. A similar procedure will be
+employed against aeroplanes.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_227" class="f120"><b>227.</b> <span class="smcap">Examples of Ranging.</span></p>
+
+<p><i>Note.</i>—These examples are only intended to illustrate the
+different methods of ranging.</p>
+
+<p>The methods of engaging various objectives are described in
+<a href="#Para_218">Secs. <b>218</b></a> to <a href="#Para_226"><b>226</b></a>.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_352">[Pg 352]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120">I.—<i>Example of “Collective Ranging.”</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(For all batteries except howitzer and heavy.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">Position of battery—Under cover.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Target—6-gun battery in action in semi-covered position.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Tops of shields visible from observing station.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Guns in action.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Angle of sight 1° 30′ elevation.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Collective.” “Corrector 154.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“3400.” “Fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3400</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">154</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 1—30′ more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_23_23" href="#Footnote_23_23" class="fnanchor">[23]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 2—1° more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_24_24" href="#Footnote_24_24" class="fnanchor">[24]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 3—30′ more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_25_25" href="#Footnote_25_25" class="fnanchor">[25]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“All guns 30′ more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_26_26" href="#Footnote_26_26" class="fnanchor">[26]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 162.” “3100.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3100</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">162</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl"></td>
+      <td class="tdc bl"></td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 4—10′ more left.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_27_27" href="#Footnote_27_27" class="fnanchor">[27]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="8">N.B.—Notes [23] and [24] apply to 6-gun batteries only. In 4-gun</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" colspan="8">batteries individual corrections for line must be sent down</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb" colspan="8"><i>before</i> the new corrector or elevation is given.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_353">[Pg 353]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">I.—<i>Example of “Collective Ranging”—continued.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3100</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">162</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 5—20′ more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_28_28" href="#Footnote_28_28" class="fnanchor">[28]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“3300.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3300</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 2—20′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;9</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 158” “3350.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Battery fire 10 seconds.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3350</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">158</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">13</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">14</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">16</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">17</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">18</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“5 seconds.” &#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_29_29" href="#Footnote_29_29" class="fnanchor">[29]</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_354">[Pg 354]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">II.—<i>Example of combined “Section” and <br>“Collective Ranging.”</i></p>
+<p class="center">(For all batteries except howitzer and heavy.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">Position of battery—Under Cover.</li>
+<li class="isub4">Target—6-gun battery in action (visible).</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Guns in action.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Angle of sight 1° 30’ elevation.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Right Ranging.” “ Percussion.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_30_30" href="#Footnote_30_30" class="fnanchor">[30]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“45—42.” “Fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4500</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">P.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 1—30′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4200</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">P.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 2—30′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Remainder 30’ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Collective.” “Corrector 154.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3">&#8199;3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">4300</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">154</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bt">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bt">20′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“4300.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc">(Bullets</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bb">short).</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 162.” “4400.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4400</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">162</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 4—10′ more left.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 5—20′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 158.” “4350.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Battery Fire 10 seconds.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;9</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4350</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">158</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 3—10′ more left.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">13</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">14</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Section fire 10 seconds.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_31_31" href="#Footnote_31_31" class="fnanchor">[31]</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_355">[Pg 355]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">III.—<i>Example of “Section Ranging.”</i></p>
+<p class="center">(For all batteries.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">Position of battery—In the open, supporting an infantry attack.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Target—A trench clearly visible from the battery. The trench,</li>
+<li class="isub6">its extent and the portion allotted to each section are</li>
+<li class="isub6">communicated to the section commanders.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Open Sights” (or<br>&emsp;“Telescope sights”).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Right ranging.”<br>
+             &emsp;“Percussion.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_32_32" href="#Footnote_32_32" class="fnanchor">[32]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“28—25.” “10<br>
+               &emsp;seconds.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_33_33" href="#Footnote_33_33" class="fnanchor">[33]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2800</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">P.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Section Commanders</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">&nbsp; correct for line.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2500</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”27—26.“
+           ”2 seconds.“&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_34_34" href="#Footnote_34_34" class="fnanchor">[34]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2700</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2600</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”26—25.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2600</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2500</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 144” “2550.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Battery Fire, 10 seconds.”
+                &#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_35_35" href="#Footnote_35_35" class="fnanchor">[35]</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_356">[Pg 356]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">III.—<i>Example of “Section Ranging”—continued.</i></p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2550</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">144</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5’</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;9</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 138.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">138</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bl">(Bullets</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc bl">over)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">“Left section drop 50.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bl">(Bullets</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc bl">over)</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">13</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">14</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Range</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">16</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">17</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1500</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">18</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">19</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2550</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”2 seconds.“&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_36_36" href="#Footnote_36_36" class="fnanchor">[36]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt bb">
+      <td class="tdc">20<br>to<br>40</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”20 seconds.“&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_37_37" href="#Footnote_37_37" class="fnanchor">[37]</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_357">[Pg 357]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">IV.—<i>Example of engaging advancing (or retiring) infantry.</i></p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">Position of battery—In observation under cover, with orders to delay</li>
+<li class="isub5">the advance of hostile infantry in a certain zone. Ground has been</li>
+<li class="isub5">registered.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Target—Lines of infantry. The angle of sight to a point towards which</li>
+<li class="isub5">they are advancing has been previously registered as 20’ depression,</li>
+<li class="isub5">the range as 3,650 yards.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">No. of<br>&nbsp;Subsection&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Elevation&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;Corrector&nbsp;<br>or P.S.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="3">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>or<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>or<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“All guns 3° more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Angle of sight 20′ depression.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Right ranging.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Percussion.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_38_38" href="#Footnote_38_38" class="fnanchor">[38]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“37—36.” “Fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3700</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">P.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3600</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">“</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”All guns 1° more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 146.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“3650.” “One round battery</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">fire 10 seconds.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3650</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">146</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”No. 2—20′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">15′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”No. 5—10′ mere left.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_39_39" href="#Footnote_39_39" class="fnanchor">[39]</a></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_358">[Pg 358]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">V.—<i>Example of “Section Ranging.”</i></p>
+<p class="center">(Howitzer battery. Ranging in degrees.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">Position of battery—Under cover, supporting an infantry attack.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Target—A trench.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Battery commander issues instructions for obtaining the line of fire.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Range-takers range 3300.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;</li>
+<li class="isub3">LEGEND:</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>A</b> = No. of Subsection</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>B</b> = Elevation.</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>C</b> = Projectile.</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>D</b> = Corrector.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;A&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">B</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">C</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">D</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="4">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>&nbsp;or&nbsp;<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Line.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>&nbsp;or&nbsp;<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Height<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="5">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Trench.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Angle of sight..........”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Right ranging lyddite.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_40_40" href="#Footnote_40_40" class="fnanchor">[40]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">3rd charge.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“26°—23°, fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">26°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">23°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“All guns 1° more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">“25°—24°.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">25°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Right&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 1—20’ more left.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">24°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Repeat.” “Time shrapnel.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">25°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">24°</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Échelon 140.” “24° 30′.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;24°30′&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;T.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;140&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">60′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">150</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">40′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">9</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">160</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Right</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 3—1° more left.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_41_41" href="#Footnote_41_41" class="fnanchor">[41]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 154, one round</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">battery fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">154</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 3—20′ more right.”&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_42_42" href="#Footnote_42_42" class="fnanchor">[42]</a></td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">13</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Right</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”No. 4—30′ more left.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">14</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">15</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">...</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Section fire 40 secs.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdr" colspan="3"><span class="smcap">Notes.</span>—</td>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="7">With 3rd Charge 1° elevation = 85 yards.</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdr" colspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl" colspan="7">With 3rd Charge 50% zone = 45 yards.</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_359">[Pg 359]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2">VI.—<i>Example of “Single Gun Ranging.”</i></p>
+<p class="center">(Heavy battery.)</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">Position of battery—Under cover.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Target—Guns in open.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Battery commander issues instructions for obtaining the parallel lines of fire.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;</li>
+<li class="isub3">LEGEND:</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>A</b> = No. of Subsection</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>B</b> = Elevation.</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>C</b> = Projectile.</li>
+<li class="isub6"><b>D</b> = Corrector.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">No. of&nbsp;<br>round.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp; A &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">B</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">C</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">D</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="4">&nbsp; Observed. &nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">Battery<br>&nbsp;Commander’s<br>Orders.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">+<br>&nbsp;or&nbsp;<br>-</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Line.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">A<br>&nbsp;or&nbsp;<br>G.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;Height&nbsp;<br>of<br>burst.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="6">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Guns in action.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Angle of sight</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws2 bl">—1° 30′” elevation.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 1 ranging.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Lyddite.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“6800.” “Fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;6800&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“All guns 20′ more</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl"> right.” “6500.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6500</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">L</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“6700.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6700</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">P.S.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“6800.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6800</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“6700.”  “Time shrapnel.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">6700</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Échelon 140.” “6700.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;6</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;T.S.&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;140&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">40′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">7</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">150</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 2—30′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;8</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">160</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">G</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“No. 3—20′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">“Corrector 146.” “One<br>&emsp;round battery fire.”</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">&#8199;9</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">1</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">146</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Line</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">30′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">+</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">11</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">-</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">&nbsp;</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">4</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">”</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">?</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">Left</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">A</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">25′</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp bl">”No. 4—10′ more right.”</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdc">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1 bl">“Section fire, 40 seconds.”</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_360">[Pg 360]</span></p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Change of Position.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_228" class="f120"><b>228.</b> <i>To advance.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The alternative methods are as follows, that adopted depending upon
+the circumstances of the moment.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp; i. The battery commander orders
+“<span class="smcap">Prepare to advance</span>” and issues his instructions
+to the battery leader. The captain orders up the gun limbers followed
+by the first line wagons. As these approach the position the battery
+commander orders “<span class="smcap">Cease firing</span>,”
+“<span class="smcap">Front (or rear) limber up</span>.” The firing battery
+wagons remain on the position and are removed under the orders of the
+captain.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;ii. If it is proposed to advance with the firing
+battery wagons the battery commander orders “<span class="smcap">With
+firing</span> <span class="smcap">battery wagons prepare to
+advance</span>.” Procedure is similar to that in i., except that the
+teams (or limbers, if wagons have been unlimbered) of the firing
+battery wagons are sent up in the place of the first line wagons.</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">iii. The battery commander orders
+“<span class="smcap">Prepare to limber up</span>,” and issues
+instructions to the battery leader and section commanders. The guns
+are run back to cover by hand and limbered up independently under the
+supervision of section commanders. The captain directs the first line
+wagons under charge of a non-commissioned officer to the position of
+assembly (<a href="#Para_195">Sec. <b>195</b> (5)</a>), and sends up each
+limber to its gun as soon as he sees that it is required. When limbered
+up each gun proceeds independently to the position of assembly, where
+it is formed up by the non-commissioned officer in charge of the first
+line wagons. The firing battery wagons are left on the position to be
+removed under the orders of the captain as circumstances permit.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_361">[Pg 361]</span>
+In a covered position it will generally be possible to adopt methods i.
+or ii.</p>
+
+<p>In an open or semi-covered position a cessation of hostile fire may
+permit of method i., but more often it will be necessary to adopt
+method iii.</p>
+
+<p>On occasions it may be advisable to move a portion of the battery
+covered by the fire of the remaining guns.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_229" class="f120"><b>229.</b> <i>To retire.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When a retirement is contemplated the battery commander informs
+the captain of his intentions, specifying the general direction to be
+followed, and, should he intend the battery to come into action again,
+the approximate locality of the new position. He will also give orders
+as to whether the first line wagons are to accompany or precede the
+battery in the retirement. The captain arranges for the movement of the
+first line wagons accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>Two alternative methods of carrying out the retirement are given, that
+adopted depending upon the circumstances of the case, and being subject
+to modifications if the battery is under heavy hostile fire.</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent">&nbsp;i. The battery commander orders “
+<span class="smcap">Prepare to retire</span>” and issues his instructions to
+the battery leader. The captain orders up the gun limbers, followed
+by the teams (or limbers, if wagons have been unlimbered) of the
+firing battery wagons. As these approach the position the battery
+commander orders “<span class="smcap">Cease firing</span>,”
+“<span class="smcap">Rear (or front) limber up</span>.”</p>
+
+<p class="neg-indent">ii. The battery commander orders “
+<span class="smcap">To retire, prepare to</span> <span class="smcap">limber
+up</span>,” and issues any necessary instructions to the battery leader
+and section commanders. A few rounds are taken from each wagon and
+laid on the ground beside the gun. The firing battery wagons are run
+back under cover by hand. Their teams (or limbers, if wagons have been
+unlimbered) are then sent up by the captain as required, and the wagons
+driven to the position of assembly. As soon as the battery commander
+sees that the firing battery wagons are clear, he orders
+“<span class="smcap">Cease</span> <span class="smcap">firing</span>,” and
+the guns are run back by hand and limbered up as in method iii.,
+<a href="#Para_228">Sec. <b>228</b></a>.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_362">[Pg 362]</span>
+It may sometimes be advisable to withdraw a portion of the battery
+covered by the fire of the remaining guns.</p>
+
+<p>Should it be intended to come into action again, the captain (or a
+section commander), as soon as his duties allow, accompanied by the
+range-takers, and such other members of the battery headquarters as can
+be spared, proceeds to reconnoitre and select the new position.</p>
+
+<p>In a covered position it will generally be possible to adopt method i.</p>
+
+<p>In an open or semi-covered position a cessation of hostile fire may
+permit of method i., but more often it wall be necessary to adopt method ii.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Replacement of Casualties.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_230" class="f120"><b>230.</b> <i>Casualties on the move.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. If during an advance or retirement a wagon becomes separated from
+its gun, the gun will proceed and come into action with the battery.
+The wagon will drive up into its place as soon as it is able to catch
+up, or in case of a serious breakdown, the captain will send up a wagon
+from the first line wagons. Till the arrival of the wagon, ammunition
+will be obtained from the wagon limber of the other gun of the section.</p>
+
+<p>Should a casualty occur to a gun, the damage should, when possible, be
+made good from its wagon.</p>
+
+<p>2. In mountain artillery, if a firing battery mule becomes a casualty,
+its load will at once be transferred to the relief mule, another relief
+mule to replace this one being immediately ordered up from the first
+line mules. It will sometimes save delay, when the distance to the
+position for action is short, to bring up the load by hand.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_363">[Pg 363]</span></p>
+
+<p id="Para_231" class="f120"><b>231.</b> <i>Casualties in action.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The following rules refer to the immediate replacement of casualties
+in action. They do not preclude other arrangements being subsequently
+made by superior authority. (<i>See also</i> Handbook of the gun.)</p>
+
+<p>1. Casualties are replaced by the next senior as soon as circumstances
+permit. All ranks must, therefore, know what duties they will perform
+in the event of casualties occurring.</p>
+
+<p>ii. If, when the battery commander becomes a casualty, the captain is
+not with the line of guns, the senior section commander will command
+until the latter arrives.</p>
+
+<p>In cases where the battery commander only leaves the battery
+temporarily (as, for instance, when he is the senior battery commander,
+and takes command of the brigade while its commander is reconnoitring),
+the senior section commander leads the battery, the captain remaining
+in charge of the wagons.</p>
+
+<p>iii. Men sent up to replace casualties will report themselves to the
+section commanders who should order such changes of duties in their
+detachments as they consider necessary. Section commanders must
+remember that the layer will probably not show any visible signs of
+fatigue until long after he has for the time being lost his efficiency
+as a layer. When firing is continuous he should be changed after about
+half an hour.</p>
+
+<p>iv. Wounded will be sent back to the line of wagons, if it can be done
+without impediment to the service of the guns, from whence they will be
+removed to the dressing station.</p>
+
+<p>2. Ammunition wagons may be ignited on being struck either by
+projectiles or bullets, the liability increasing with the amount of
+wood used in the construction of the wagons or boxes. Should a wagon
+be ignited by a projectile there is usually very little danger of it
+blowing up immediately; attempts should therefore at once be made to
+put out the fire, remove the ammunition from the wagon, or move the
+wagon away.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_364">[Pg 364]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER X.<br><span class="h_subtitle">AMMUNITION SUPPLY.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_232" class="f120"><b>232.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The necessity for an ample supply of ammunition for guns and rifles
+makes the position of wagon lines and ammunition columns in action a
+matter of great importance.</p>
+
+<p>2. The object to be kept in view therefore is that the various échelons
+should be so situated on the march that when an engagement takes place
+it may be possible to arrange for a regular supply of ammunition from
+rear to front to replace that expended in action.</p>
+
+<p>The supply from ammunition columns is not necessarily restricted to
+troops of their own division or brigade; any troops are to receive
+ammunition on demand during an action, from any column which may be at
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>3. The work of replenishment is divided between:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;i. Units with the fighting troops.</li>
+<li class="isub3">ii. Units on the line of communication, working under the</li>
+<li class="isub4">inspector-general of communications.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>4. The artillery ammunition available with the fighting troops is
+distributed in action as follows:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; i. The firing battery.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. First line wagons. (Mtn. Art., 1st line mules.)</li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. Brigade ammunition columns.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;iv. Divisional ammunition columns.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_365">[Pg 365]</span>
+Details regarding the amounts carried for the various types of ordnance
+are shown in “War Establishments.”</p>
+
+<p id="Para_233" class="f120"><b>233.</b> <i>Ammunition supply within the battery.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>Wagon supply.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>1. The supply of ammunition will be, as a rule, first from the wagon
+body and next from the wagon limber. When the ammunition in the wagon
+body is exhausted it will be unlimbered and run out of the way, and the
+limber will be run back till its axletree is in line with that of the
+gun.</p>
+
+<p>The captain is responsible for maintaining the supply of ammunition in
+the battery.</p>
+
+<p><i>Mountain artillery.</i>—The battery supply of ammunition is carried
+on 8 ammunition mules, of which 2 accompany the firing battery and 6
+go with the 1st line mules. The supply of ammunition will be from the
+first pair of boxes with the firing battery, while the ammunition in
+the second pair of boxes will be kept as a reserve, and only used in
+emergency.</p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>Limber supply.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>2. It may sometimes be necessary for the guns of a firing battery to
+leave the wagons and trust to the ammunition in the limbers. The horses
+will then be unhooked from the limbers as soon as the limbers have
+reversed, and the limbers will be placed in position by hand on the
+right of the guns, poles to the front, axletrees of limbers in line
+with, and 6 inches from, the axletrees of the guns.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of horse artillery taking part in a cavalry action, or of
+field artillery, when limbered up, being charged by cavalry, it may be
+necessary to draw ammunition from the limbers without unhooking. The
+battery commander orders “<span class="smcap">Without unhooking limber supply</span>,”
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_366">[Pg 366]</span>
+and on coming into action, the limber is halted 5 yards in rear of the
+trail eye, the team facing to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>In either case if the wagons arrive, they will not be brought up to the
+firing battery, unless specially ordered, but will be halted in such a
+position as to be available for the next move, when, if required, the
+wagon limbers may be substituted for the gun limbers.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_234" class="f120"><b>234.</b> <i>Replenishment of ammunition.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. When the captain becomes aware, either by personal observation or
+by the receipt of information from the battery that ammunition is
+required, he will send or order forward the first line wagons.</p>
+
+<p>2. It is his duty to arrange how the wagons can best be brought up to
+the firing battery and to inform section commanders of his proposed
+arrangements.</p>
+
+<p>If the battery is not under a heavy fire, and there is no danger of
+disclosing the position of guns hitherto undetected by the enemy, the
+wagons can be driven into position on the right of the guns, the teams
+subsequently hooking into the empty wagons and taking them back to the
+wagon line.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes it may be feasible to push forward a few wagons from the
+first line wagon position to a point nearer to the battery, from which
+the replenishment of ammunition can be carried out by hand, using
+ammunition carriers.</p>
+
+<p>3. Whenever the brigade commander, or battery commander if acting
+independently, considers that the tactical situation or the position
+the guns will occupy, make it desirable to have more ammunition with
+the guns than is contained in the six wagons, he may order the first
+line wagons to accompany the battery into action. In this case the
+first line wagons follow the firing battery wagons. The latter form up
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_367">[Pg 367]</span>
+and unhook in the usual manner; the former halt as close as possible in
+rear of the guns, unlimber, and the limbers return with the gun limbers.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Mountain Artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>When the ammunition in the first pair of boxes is becoming exhausted,
+the captain orders up one mule per subsection from the 1st line; these
+will be sent up under a N.C.O.</p>
+
+<p>The reserve numbers take off the full boxes and load up the empty ones,
+while No. 5 takes out any rounds that may be unexpended from the first
+pair of boxes, placing them under the lid of one of the second pair.</p>
+
+<p>The mules with the empty boxes will be led back to the 1st line by the
+N.C.O. who brought them up. If the firing battery mules are separated
+from the 1st line, six more ammunition mules will then be sent under a
+N.C.O. to join them.</p>
+
+<p>In order that the battery may always move with two full pairs of
+boxes per subsection in the firing battery, the captain will see that
+one ammunition mule per subsection loaded with a full pair of boxes
+accompanies the firing battery mules, when the order to limber up is
+given. The partly empty pair of boxes will be loaded upon the mule sent
+up for the purpose, which will then join the 1st line.</p>
+
+<p>The ammunition in partly empty boxes will be redistributed so as to
+keep as many full boxes as possible, and mules with empty boxes will be
+sent to the ammunition column to replenish.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_235" class="f120"><b>235.</b> <i>Brigade ammunition columns.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Brigade ammunition columns form an integral part of the artillery
+brigades to which they belong. Besides supplying ammunition, they form
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_368">[Pg 368]</span>
+a reserve in men, horses, and <i>matériel</i> to the batteries of their
+brigade. If necessary their own efficiency must be sacrificed to make
+good losses in the batteries. In cases of emergency help should also be
+extended to batteries of other brigades.</p>
+
+<p>2. Brigade ammunition columns usually march in the rear of the
+fighting troops of their division, or brigade in the case of a cavalry
+brigade not allotted to a cavalry division. <b>When an action is
+probable a non-commissioned officer from the ammunition column should
+accompany the headquarters of the artillery brigade for purposes of
+intercommunication</b>.</p>
+
+<p>3. The position of the columns during a battle will normally be
+regulated by artillery brigade commanders in accordance with the
+instructions of divisional artillery commanders. It may sometimes be
+necessary for the higher commanders to issue special orders as to
+their positions and as to the units they are to supply. The positions
+selected should offer facilities for intercommunication and movement,
+and should be about a mile in rear of the battery wagon lines.</p>
+
+<p>4. On arriving at the position allotted him the commander of a
+brigade ammunition column will inform the commander of the artillery
+brigade of his arrival, and place himself in communication with the
+units he receives orders to supply. He will provide the commander of
+the infantry brigade ammunition reserve and each battery wagon line
+commander with an orderly, who is to be used only in connection with
+ammunition supply. One of the mounted men with the battery wagon line
+should also know the position of the column and the best way to it.</p>
+
+<p>5. If troops are scattered, it may be necessary to distribute the
+sections of the ammunition column in order to bring the reserves of
+ammunition nearer the troops engaged. Commanders of sections will then
+deal direct with wagon line or infantry brigade ammunition reserve
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_369">[Pg 369]</span>
+commanders, keeping the brigade ammunition column commander informed of
+the issues made by them.</p>
+
+<p>6. On receipt of a message that ammunition is wanted, the column
+commander will send forward the number of wagons or carts demanded
+(under an officer if possible) the orderly who brought the message
+being used to guide them to their destination. The ammunition is then
+either transferred from the full to the empty vehicles, or an exchange
+of vehicles is effected. If the latter procedure is adopted, it will be
+necessary to transfer men’s cloaks and equipment from one set of wagons
+to the other.</p>
+
+<p>If the position of the wagon line or infantry brigade ammunition
+reserve is much exposed, the empty vehicles should be withdrawn and the
+transfer of ammunition carried out under cover.</p>
+
+<p>7. Indents on ammunition columns are unnecessary. Receipts will be
+prepared by the officer handing over the ammunition for the number of
+full wagons or carts issued from the column, and will be signed by the
+officer receiving them, who is responsible for seeing that they contain
+what he requires.</p>
+
+<p>The account of rounds fired by any unit during an action is not the
+affair of the brigade ammunition column commander. Such accounts must
+be kept under the orders of the commander of the unit.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center"><i>Field artillery (howitzer) brigade ammunition<br>
+columns, and ammunition columns with mountain<br>or heavy batteries.</i></p>
+
+<p>8. The procedure of field artillery (howitzer) brigade ammunition
+columns and ammunition columns with mountain or heavy batteries, will,
+as regards artillery ammunition, be similar to that laid down in the
+foregoing paragraphs.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_370">[Pg 370]</span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Horse artillery ammunition columns.</i></p>
+
+<p>9. The procedure of horse artillery ammunition columns, as regards the
+provision of gun ammunition to batteries will be carried out as far as
+possible on similar lines to those laid down in paras. 1 to 7 above.
+(<a href="#Para_176"><i>See also</i> Sec. <b>176</b></a>.)</p>
+
+
+<p id="Para_236" class="f120"><b>236.</b> <i>Divisional ammunition columns.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Divisional ammunition columns form part of the divisional artillery.
+They are under the immediate orders of divisional artillery commanders.
+Normally, their position on the line of march is regulated by
+divisional headquarters, but may, if necessary, be fixed by army or
+general headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>2. Each divisional ammunition column consists of four sections, of
+which the first three carry small arm and 18-pr. ammunition and the
+fourth ammunition for the howitzer brigade and heavy battery.</p>
+
+<p>3. When an action is imminent sections of the divisional ammunition
+columns will be ordered to form reserves of ammunition at convenient
+points, which will also be the refilling points for such sections.
+(<a href="#Para_237"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>237</b> (4)</a>.) The position
+of these points will be fixed by divisional headquarters, if necessary
+under instructions from army headquarters, and should usually be about
+two miles in rear of brigade ammunition columns.</p>
+
+<p>4. The divisional ammunition column commander should establish his
+headquarters at the rendezvous selected for the divisional ammunition
+park. (<a href="#Para_237"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>237</b> (4)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>It is his duty to ascertain the position of this rendezvous if this
+information is not sent to him, and to arrange for the replenishment of
+ammunition within the limits specified in such orders as he may have
+received from the divisional artillery commander.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_371">[Pg 371]</span></p>
+
+<p>5. Each commander of a section which is detached will notify his
+arrival at his destination to the divisional artillery commander and
+to the divisional ammunition column commander, and will also send an
+orderly to open communication with each brigade ammunition column which
+he is to supply.</p>
+
+<p>6. The supply of ammunition from these sections to brigade ammunition
+columns will be carried out on the same principles as those laid
+down for brigade ammunition columns and batteries, ammunition being
+sent forward to the brigade columns in the vehicles belonging to the
+divisional columns.</p>
+
+<p>7. There are no divisional ammunition columns for the cavalry division
+or army troops.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_237" class="f120"><b>237.</b> <i>Ammunition reserves on the
+line of communication.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The ammunition held in reserve on the line of communications is
+divided between ordnance depôts and ammunition parks. The proportion
+of ammunition to be held at each depôt is determined by the
+inspector-general of communications in accordance with the instructions
+he receives from general headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>2. The inspector-general of communications is responsible that the
+ammunition reserves are pushed up by means of the railway and parks to
+within reach of the fighting troops.</p>
+
+<p>3. During an action, the ammunition park will be sent forward to a
+rendezvous as directed by the inspector-general of communications under
+instructions from general or army headquarters. This rendezvous should
+be placed sufficiently far behind the fighting troops to ensure freedom
+of movement to the latter.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule the best position for the headquarters of the ammunition park
+will be at railhead or corresponding locality but either the commander
+of the park or his representative will be required at the rendezvous,
+which will also be the headquarters of the divisional ammunition
+column. (<a href="#Para_236"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>236</b> (4)</a>.)
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_372">[Pg 372]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. From the rendezvous sections or portions of sections will be sent
+forward to the refilling points (<a href="#Para_236">Sec. <b>236</b> (3)</a>)
+to replenish sections of the divisional ammunition column in accordance with
+the demands of the divisional ammunition column commander, who is
+responsible for regulating the amount of ammunition sent forward from
+the parks to refill these sections.</p>
+
+<p>In favourable circumstances it may be possible to refill brigade
+ammunition columns direct from park vehicles.</p>
+
+<p>After reaching the rendezvous the movements of the ammunition park for
+a cavalry division and for a cavalry brigade (with attached troops)
+not allotted to a cavalry division will normally be regulated by the
+headquarters of the cavalry formations concerned under instructions
+received from general headquarters. Ammunition parks for these troops
+carry ammunition direct to brigade ammunition columns or to regiments,
+&amp;c., as may be convenient.</p>
+
+<p>5. Ammunition required to replenish ammunition parks will be demanded
+by park commanders through the headquarters of the inspector-general
+of communications, who is responsible that the ammunition required to
+refill the parks is sent to suitable localities on the railway.</p>
+
+<p>6. An artillery officer is allotted to each ammunition park who is
+responsible for seeing that the lorries forwarded to the various
+refilling points contain the nature of ammunition required. In order to
+carry out this duty he should, during an action, locate himself at the
+rendezvous.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_373">[Pg 373]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XI.<br><span class="h_subtitle">FIELD ENGINEERING.</span></h2>
+</div>
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> “Manual of Field Engineering.”)</p>
+
+<p id="Para_238" class="f120"><b>238.</b> <i>Entrenching and concealing guns.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The importance of concealment, both in attack and defence, has
+increased with the destructive effect of quick firing artillery, but
+is valuable only so long as its employment does not interfere with
+effective fire.</p>
+
+<p>2. There is a two-fold object in making use of cover, viz., concealment
+from view and protection from fire. By these means the possibility of
+surprising the enemy with fire is increased, while the possibility of
+being immobilized by hostile fire is diminished.</p>
+
+<p>3. Guns may be concealed either by making use of natural or artificial
+cover, and sometimes by the selection of sites with a suitable
+background, but reconnaissance of the position can alone show if
+concealment is likely to be temporary or permanent. If circumstances
+permit, the sites for the guns should be viewed from the most suitable
+observation posts for the enemy’s artillery before they are finally
+fixed, bearing in mind that positions which are effectively hidden from
+the front often become visible by moving a short distance to a flank.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_374">[Pg 374]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. Advantage should invariably be taken of any natural cover available,
+but to give efficient protection against fire some artificial cover
+will usually be required.</p>
+
+<p>When the contour of the ground is favourable trees will give valuable
+cover from view, and so make it more difficult for the enemy to obtain
+the range. A position behind a wood, a hedge or belt of trees can often
+be found where the guns can be brought into action unseen by the enemy,
+the fire being observed from a position in rear.</p>
+
+<p>5. Experience shows that anything that breaks the view close in front
+of distant objects greatly increases the difficulty of seeing them.
+Such material as nets or bamboo trellis with bits of the surrounding
+vegetation stuck into them may be used for this purpose. If guns have
+to be placed on a skyline, a strip of sacking stretched in front
+of them may serve as a false skyline when viewed from the enemy’s
+position. Similarly brushwood hurdles placed behind guns to act as a
+background will often conceal them for the time being.</p>
+
+<p>To prevent guns being located by the dust thrown up on discharge the
+ground should be watered for some yards in front of the muzzles, or
+such material as raw hides, and sacking, pegged down over it.</p>
+
+<p>For a similar reason the movements of guns and individuals must be
+restricted as much as possible when there is any likelihood of the
+enemy being able to observe them.</p>
+
+<p>6. In entrenching guns the first consideration is fire effect, the
+second that while getting some cover in the shortest possible time the
+form of the work should be such as to admit of gradual improvement in
+the event of more time being available.</p>
+
+<p>The site of a gun emplacement having been selected, the first step is
+to decide whether an epaulment or pit is most suitable, the next is to
+mark out the platform for the gun, which must be large enough to enable
+it to be traversed so as to engage any likely objective.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_375">[Pg 375]</span></p>
+
+<p>In deciding whether gun pits or epaulments are to be made, it must be
+remembered that sinking the guns reduces their field of fire and makes
+more dead ground in front of them if the position is not already under
+cover.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand the difficulty of locating guns from aircraft is
+greater if sunken sites without parapets are employed.</p>
+
+<p>7. At first, a simple parapet to supplement the cover afforded by the
+shield and to protect the detachment, when kneeling, from oblique
+fire should be provided. For this purpose some empty corn sacks may
+be carried by guns on active service. These may also be found useful
+in bright weather in preventing the glint from the tyres disclosing
+their position. Subsequently the cover can be improved and pits, with
+ammunition shelves or recesses in front or rear to cover the detachment
+standing, may be added, but a clear space of 13 feet between these
+pits is necessary for working field guns. The breadth of the embrasure
+will depend on the field of fire to be covered. The recoil of the gun
+carriage should be prevented by digging a trench for the spade, butting
+it against a plank or sleeper.</p>
+
+<p>8. Every effort should be made to assimilate the emplacement with its
+surroundings. Sharp angles, steep ends and clearly defined embrasures,
+which throw dark shadows, should be avoided as likely to attract
+attention, and the intervals between the emplacements themselves may be
+filled with some form of screen with advantage.</p>
+
+<p>Any newly-turned earth, if liable to be seen by the enemy, should be
+covered with turf, bushes, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>9. If time and tools permit, cover for an ammunition wagon near each
+gun, and a blinded communication trench for the men replenishing
+ammunition should be provided; or, where this is not practicable, some
+shelter pits to afford resting places for the men supplying ammunition
+by hand from the wagon line.</p>
+
+<p>Where still more time is available traverses against enfilade fire and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_376">[Pg 376]</span>
+overhead splinter-proof cover may be prepared. For the latter purpose
+uprights are needed to carry horizontal transoms on which planks or
+corrugated iron are arranged to support earth to the thickness of 12
+inches. Uprights and transoms should be 8 to 10 inches in diameter,
+except in the case of such of the latter as are only required for short
+spans.</p>
+
+<p>Special cover is required for the battery commander and his
+headquarters, the battery leader and his signallers, and section
+commanders. A type of protected observing station is shown in Plate IV.
+If time admits, head cover with some form of loophole should be added.</p>
+
+<p>10. Diagrams of an epaulment and gun pit are shown on Plates V and
+VI, but they are not intended as types to be rigidly copied on all
+occasions.</p>
+
+<p>For heavy guns a parapet about 3 feet in height should be carried round
+in front of the carriage, and should be constructed with a radius
+admitting of ample interior space and a wide field of fire. The gun
+should be run as close to the parapet as possible. It is generally
+inadvisable, unless artificial platforms are available, to disturb the
+natural surface of the ground.</p>
+
+<p>11. Cover from both view and fire may sometimes be obtained by a
+combination of natural and artificial cover:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">i. By scarping the reverse crest of a steep ridge</li>
+<li class="isub4">(<a href="#FIG_34"><i>See</i> Fig. 34</a>).</li>
+<li class="isub3">ii. By sinking pits close to the front crest of a feature</li>
+<li class="isub4">(<a href="#FIG_35"><i>See</i> Fig. 35</a>).</li>
+</ul>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_34" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 34.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_34.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="162" >
+
+    <p id="PLATE_4" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate IV.</b></span></p>
+    <p class="f120"><b>Protected Observing Station.</b></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_4.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="573" >
+
+    <p id="PLATE_5" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate V.</b></span></p>
+    <p class="f120"><b><span class="smcap">Gun Epaulment for Shielded Gun.</span></b></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_5.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="264" >
+    <p class="center">(<i>Not drawn to Scale.</i>)</p>
+</div>
+
+<p class="blockquot">The breadth of the embrasure must depend on
+circumstances; if the field of fire is limited by ground or by the
+target it can be narrowed, if not it must be fairly broad.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="PLATE_6" class="f120"><b><span class="smcap">Plate VI.</span></b></p>
+    <p class="f120"><b>GUN PIT FOR SHIELDED GUN.</b></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_6.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="293" >
+    <p class="center">(<i>Not drawn to Scale.</i>)</p>
+</div>
+
+<p class="blockquot">The breadth of the embrasure must depend on
+circumstances; if the field of fire is limited by ground or by the
+target it can be narrowed, if not it must be fairly broad.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_377">[Pg 377]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_35" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 35.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_35.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="195" >
+</div>
+
+<p>12. In some circumstances guns may have to be entrenched under cover
+of darkness in readiness to open fire at daylight. Careful preliminary
+reconnaissance is the chief essential to avoid mistakes in carrying
+out the various works (<a href="#Para_189"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>189</b></a>), special
+care being taken to make sure that the principal line of fire is laid out correctly.</p>
+
+<p>While the nature of the soil, the proximity of the enemy and the time
+available will all have their influence on the details of the works,
+every endeavour should be made to conceal them from view.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_239" class="f120"><b>239.</b> <i>Passage of obstacles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The obstacles likely to be met with will vary from walls or ditches
+to unfordable rivers. In the case of the smaller obstacles a few
+minutes’ use of the tools carried with the battery will often be all
+that is required.</p>
+
+<p>2. Obstacles should be crossed at right angles and in column of route,
+as each carriage will make the way easier for the one which follows.
+In the case of boggy places, however, each carriage should cross at a
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_378">[Pg 378]</span>
+different spot. The gunners should always be dismounted from the
+carriages if there is any likelihood of the latter being overturned.</p>
+
+<p>3. For the passage of small ravines a serviceable bridge can be
+quickly made by using a pair of wheels on their axle to support the
+road-bearers. <a href="#FIG_36"><i>See</i> Fig. 36</a>.</p>
+
+<p>If the bottom of the ravine is soft, two spars, D and E, should be
+lashed to the wheels as shown. The wheels are then lowered, hauled into
+position, and secured by guys AB, BC.</p>
+
+<p>One or two transoms (H) are then lashed across the top of the wheels
+with square lashing and the road-bearers (R, R) placed in position. The
+number of the latter depends on their strength and on the weight to be
+passed over.</p>
+
+<p>Transoms 4 × 9 inches (8 inches in mean diameter if round) and 5
+road-bearers, mean diameter 6½ inches, will bear field guns and
+howitzers. The road-bearers should be butted against pieces of timber
+(F, G) sunk in the ground.</p>
+
+<p>If planks are procurable to form the roadway, they should be used. If
+not, the road-bearers must be placed close together and covered with
+branches of trees and brushwood. If horses are to cross the bridge, it
+should be covered with earth to deaden the sound.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_36" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 36.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_36.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="190" >
+</div>
+
+<p>4. Plate VII shows another type of bridge constructed with stores, most
+of which are carried with a battery.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="PLATE_7" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate VII.</b></span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_7.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="364" >
+    <p id="PLATE_8" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate VIII.</b></span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_8.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="478" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_379">[Pg 379]</span>
+5. Should it be required to pass field guns across a river quickly, the
+gun and carriage can be floated across by means of four casks lashed as
+shown in Plate VIII.</p>
+
+<p>The number of casks required can be calculated from the following
+rule:—</p>
+
+<p>The available buoyancy of a cask (<i>i.e.</i>, weight which it will
+support) in pounds is found by multiplying its contents in gallons by
+9. Thus a 108-gallon cask has an available buoyancy of 972 lbs.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+ <p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_380">[Pg 380]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XII.<br>
+<span class="h_subtitle">RECONNAISSANCE DUTIES,<br> RANGE-FINDING, AND<br> COMMUNICATION SERVICE.</span></h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_240" class="f120"><b>240.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The primary object of artillery reconnaissance is to collect and
+transmit information, which is important from an artillery point of
+view, to the commander who orders the reconnaissance. At the same time
+anything which is likely to prove of value to the other arms should be
+noted. While smokeless powder and long-range weapons have increased the
+difficulties of reconnaissance, they have also added to the value and
+importance of accurate information. It is essential, therefore, that
+artillery should be well trained in this difficult work.</p>
+
+<p>2. In each artillery brigade there should be at least one officer’s
+patrol, the members of which are accustomed to work together, and
+capable of carrying out a combined reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>These patrols, which should ordinarily consist of an officer with one
+or two selected non-commissioned officers and range-takers, may often
+be required to carry out reconnaissances for the divisional artillery
+commander. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (2)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>When not so required they are at the disposal of the brigade commander.
+As batteries may also have to act singly, there should be some men in
+each capable of carrying out a simple reconnaissance.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_381">[Pg 381]</span></p>
+
+<p>Men selected for this work should be good riders and horse-masters.</p>
+
+<p>3. The mounted men of brigade or divisional artillery headquarters
+should also be trained in reconnaissance and scouting, so that they may
+be capable of:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. Reconnoitring the enemy’s position and observing the</li>
+<li class="isub4">effect of fire.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Watching and reporting the progress of friendly troops</li>
+<li class="isub4">during an attack.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Reconnoitring and watching ground in the vicinity of</li>
+<li class="isub4">batteries to assist in ensuring their safety.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iv. Supplementing other means of intercommunication.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>These duties cannot all be performed simultaneously with the number of
+men available. A commander must, therefore, husband his resources so as
+to have one or more of his headquarters available in an emergency.</p>
+
+<p>4. The training should be individual and progressive and should be made
+as interesting as possible. The following sections are intended to
+serve as a guide to the principal points to which attention should be
+directed.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_241" class="f120"><b>241.</b> <i>Visual training.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The men should be taken to some ground with a good view all round,
+and each in turn questioned as to what he makes of distant objects such
+as men, cattle, bushes, rocks, &amp;c.; his answers being checked with
+field glasses by the instructor. These practices should be repeated
+till the men are proficient at picking out objects under varying
+circumstances of light, atmosphere, background and surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>2. The effect which these conditions have on the appearance and
+apparent distance of objects should be pointed out. Thus the ranges to
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_382">[Pg 382]</span>
+objects are underestimated in a bright light or clear atmosphere, when
+background and object are of different colours, with the sun at one’s
+back, with water or snow to look over and when looking up or down hill.</p>
+
+<p>With a dark background, with the light in the eyes, on broken ground
+and when looking over a valley or undulating ground, the ranges to
+objects are overestimated.</p>
+
+<p>Objects dimly seen at evening, and in misty weather, appear
+more distant and larger than in reality. When the sun shines on
+entrenchments, the salient parts project their shadows on to the
+re-entering parts and when freshly raised they look lighter than the
+surrounding ground.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_242" class="f120"><b>242.</b> <i>Training in judging distance.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The faculty of judging distances correctly can be developed by
+practice, but rapid and accurate estimates cannot be expected until the
+visual powers of the soldier have been developed.</p>
+
+<p>When judging distance a man must not be allowed to guess, but must be
+made to give reasons for his estimate.</p>
+
+<p>2. The following is the system usually recommended:—</p>
+
+<p>i. Measure out distances of hundreds of yards, from 100 to 500, and
+accustom the soldier to recognize these distances.</p>
+
+<p>ii. Ascertain the exact range of certain objects visible from the
+drill ground or barracks and teach him to note from these places the
+appearance of the objects under varying atmospheric conditions. When he
+has got the measured distances and the appearance of the objects firmly
+into his mind he should be exercised at longer ranges. To judge these
+he should measure the intervening ground by mental comparison with the
+distances with which he is familiar, or, should all the ground up to
+the object not be visible, he must judge the range from the impression
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_383">[Pg 383]</span>
+conveyed to his eye by the object, bearing in mind how this impression may be affected
+by the conditions mentioned in Sec. <b>241</b> (2), as well as those
+which follow.</p>
+
+<p>3. Under normal conditions:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;i. Movement of legs and arms can be distinguished at 1,000 yds.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. Individual men become vertical lines at 1,500 yards.</li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. Infantry and cavalry at 1,500 yards can be</li>
+<li class="isub5">distinguished only by their mode of motion.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;iv. At 2,000 yards infantry presents a thick line, cavalry a</li>
+<li class="isub5">thicker line with a jagged top.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>4. In estimating long distances, the time taken in going over them
+should form a very fair guide. A man should know his own normal pace
+and the various rates at which his horse walks and trots.</p>
+
+<p>5. Distance can also be judged by sound. The time in seconds between
+the flash of a gun and hearing the report multiplied by 370 gives
+the distance (in yards) travelled by the sound approximately: this,
+however, may be affected by wind and atmosphere.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_243" class="f120"><b>243.</b> <i>Training in observation.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The habit of noting and remembering small signs or details, both at
+a distance and near at hand, is important. It is closely connected with
+the two subjects discussed above, and should be gradually introduced
+while they are being taught.</p>
+
+<p>2. The following is one method of training men in this subject:—</p>
+
+<p>The whole terrain in front is roughly divided into right, centre and
+left sections.</p>
+
+<p>These again are divided into:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;i. The background.</li>
+<li class="isub3">ii. The foreground.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_384">[Pg 384]</span>
+The men are formed up in extended order and allowed to observe the
+landscape for a few minutes, and then turned about. The instructor then
+ascertains the number, nature, and distance, of the objects each man
+has noted in these divisions. Even if only one object is noted in each,
+it makes six objects noticed, and this is more than the untrained mind
+usually identifies.</p>
+
+<p>They should learn to classify the objects they see under various
+headings, as for example:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">Human beings.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Animals.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Houses, farms, roads, paths, &amp;c.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Trees and vegetable growths.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Water and rivers.</li>
+<li class="isub3">Rocks, hills, &amp;c.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>They should also know such facts as that dust raised by cavalry forms
+a high light cloud; by infantry a lower and denser one; by wheeled
+vehicles denser still, and broken.</p>
+
+<p>3. Regular instruction of this kind, whether held indoors or in the
+open, gradually educates men to make an intelligent use of their eyes
+until an automatic connection is established between the eye and brain,
+and sight becomes observation.</p>
+
+<p>When the instruction of the men has advanced sufficiently, they may be
+classified both by a “time test” and a “number of objects” test, which
+increases the interest.</p>
+
+<p>4. The men who prove themselves most proficient in these exercises
+should be further instructed in the use of the telescope and field
+glasses. When ground is available, a military aspect should be given
+to the training as much as possible. For instance, a number of objects
+such as dummies, kneeling and lying behind rocks, hats or helmets
+resting on stones or bushes, horses or dummies standing against a dark
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_385">[Pg 385]</span>
+background, and dummies’ heads on the sky line may be arranged on some
+position the distance of which from the selected point of observation
+will depend on the atmospheric conditions. The class is then taken out
+by the instructor, the battery telescope on the tripod set up, each man
+looks through it, identifies as many objects as he can, and writes them
+down. When a certain amount of proficiency has been attained in this
+way the tripod should be dispensed with and the men taught to use the
+telescope kneeling or prone, making use of any improvised rest that may
+be available.</p>
+
+<p>Practice at locating and identifying moving objects should also be
+given.</p>
+
+<p>5. Exercises in observation may be carried out during a march or at
+exercising order. Thus, after going a certain distance each man may
+be questioned upon, or required to jot down what he has observed of
+any military importance, <i>e.g.</i>, rivers, bridges, cross roads,
+sign posts, villages, provision shops, smithies, post and telegraph
+offices, haystacks, &amp;c. These occasions also afford the instructor an
+opportunity of pointing out such objects of interest as the varieties
+of trees and vegetation, and the habits of animals.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_244" class="f120"><b>244.</b> <i>Reports and sketches.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 16.)</p>
+
+<p>1. Officers who may be called upon to carry out reconnaissances should
+be capable of executing rough maps and also panorama sketches. They
+should be trained in selecting aiming points, in calculating the
+necessary deflection from them to various objectives, and in estimating
+slopes over which guns can fire at given ranges.</p>
+
+<p>They should be able to write a concise report containing only such
+information as will be of use to the officer for whom it is intended,
+and which is relevant to the object in view. If an area is being
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_386">[Pg 386]</span>
+reconnoitred for artillery positions the report should commence with
+a brief description of the area reconnoitred, the positions available
+with their special advantages or disadvantages.</p>
+
+<p>The positions recommended to be occupied should then be given and
+information furnished on such points as the following:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; &nbsp;i. The approaches, whether concealed or exposed: and the</li>
+<li class="isub5">nature of the ground, whether hard or boggy.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ii. What formation batteries can advance in.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;iii. Positions of readiness in their vicinity.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; iv. Suitability for direct or indirect laying.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; &nbsp;v. Nature of gun-platform.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; vi. Number of guns for which there is room at full interval.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;vii. Best positions for observation of fire.</li>
+<li class="isub2">viii. Positions for first line wagons.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ix. Description and position of any natural screen in front</li>
+<li class="isub5">or to the flanks.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; &nbsp;x. Necessity for any field work.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; xi. Best method of protecting position from surprise; dead</li>
+<li class="isub5">ground in front or to the flanks.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;xii. Best lines of advance from the position and the extent</li>
+<li class="isub5">to which they are concealed from view.</li>
+<li class="isub2">xiii. Obstacles to movement, such as streams with high banks</li>
+<li class="isub5">and bogs.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>If time admits a rough map on a scale of about 4 inches to 1 mile,
+showing the proposed positions of the guns and 1st line wagons, the
+approaches to them and the position of any natural screens, will be a
+valuable addition to the report and will often save much writing.</p>
+
+<p>Concurrently with the above any information obtainable on the following
+points should be noted and reported:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">(<i>a</i>) Description of the enemy’s position giving</li>
+<li class="isub4">approximate relative heights.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>b</i>) Likely positions for the enemy’s guns or</li>
+<li class="isub4">observing stations.</li>
+<li class="isub2">(<i>c</i>) Any earthworks that can be observed.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="PLATE_9" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate IX.</b></span></p>
+    <img src="images/plate_9.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="292" >
+    <p class="f120"><b>Position P</b></p>
+    <p class="f110"><i>VIEW FROM FARM LOOKING NORTH.</i></p>
+
+    <p id="PLATE_10" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate X.</b></span></p>
+    <p class="f120"><b><span class="smcap">Range-Taker’s Card.</span></b></p>
+    <p class="center">Ranges taken from position P.</p>
+    <img src="images/plate_10.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="402" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_387">[Pg 387]</span>
+2. A panorama sketch of the enemy’s position should, if possible, be
+made and will save much writing. For firing at moving objects from
+under cover, for switches, and in night firing a sketch of this nature
+is invaluable.</p>
+
+<p>Plate IX shows a form on which the sketch may be made so as to render
+it a most useful and practical aid more particularly adapted to hilly
+country. It will be seen that the lateral angle and the angle of sight
+to any point can be judged with considerable accuracy at a glance.
+It has, moreover, the great advantage that, with its assistance, the
+poorest draughtsman can produce a useful, panoramic sketch.</p>
+
+<p>The sketch should show the principal features in outline, one of
+which near the centre of the field of view is chosen as the reference
+point. A line is drawn from each of these features, with the range and
+description marked thereon, also the angle of sight on the right of the
+line and the lateral angle, in degrees, between it and the reference
+point on the left of the line, thus—<b>L.A. 4° | L 3°</b>.</p>
+
+<p>The sketch should state clearly the point from which it is made.</p>
+
+<p>3. If time does not admit of this sketch, it may be replaced by a
+range-taker’s card (Plate X), on which the following should appear:—</p>
+
+<p>i. A line, if possible in red, drawn to the most prominent object near
+the centre of the field of view. (<a href="#PLATE_10"><i>See</i> P.T., Plate X.</a>)
+The object so selected is called the reference point. In drawing this line the
+card should be set so that its longer edge roughly corresponds to the
+line of the position to be occupied. The lateral angle, in degrees,
+between the line to the reference point, and a line to all prominent
+features for ranging upon should be given.</p>
+
+<p>ii. The range to and the angle of sight of these features which should
+be given names. It may often be more convenient to letter and describe
+them with their ranges and angles of sight on a separate paper.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_388">[Pg 388]</span></p>
+
+<p>4. The above instructions apply to officers, but in order that N.C.Os.
+and men employed on reconnaissance work may be of use to them, they
+will require training in the following subjects:—</p>
+
+<p>i. <i>Map reading.</i>—They should be able to find the way in a
+strange country, first, by practical map reading; then by memory of the
+map; by sun and compass; by landmarks; by questioning natives of the
+country. As maps may not always be available on service, they should be
+practised in working without their aid.</p>
+
+<p>It should be a habit with them to notice the general direction taken
+and changes of direction subsequently made.</p>
+
+<p>ii. <i>Sketching.</i>—When they have learnt to read a map, elementary
+instruction in sketching should be given. This to include instruction
+in conventional signs; judging distances by time or by eye; making a
+simple approximate scale, finding approximate north point; dictating a
+map; sketching a piece of simple country; drawing a map from memory;
+estimating heights.</p>
+
+<p>iii. <i>Reporting.</i>—As the value of the men’s work depends largely
+on their ability to furnish a clear report they should receive
+instruction in this subject. Written reports should be in telegraphic
+language, and verbal reports thought out beforehand.</p>
+
+<p>iv. <i>Concealment.</i>—Their attention should be drawn to the
+great importance of dismounting and taking cover and of selecting a
+background to suit the colour of their clothing when observing; the
+importance of remaining perfectly still; of avoiding the sky line; of
+selecting look-out points when on the move, and of getting from one to
+another quickly, and unseen.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Range-Finding.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_245" class="f120"><b>245.</b> <i>General instructions.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. However accurate in itself the instrument for finding the range may
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_389">[Pg 389]</span>
+be, satisfactory results can only be expected if the range-takers are
+themselves efficient. To ensure this, careful training and regular
+practice are essential. In order that the system of instruction may
+be similar in each brigade, the brigade commander should personally
+supervise it; an officer or qualified non-commissioned officer being
+detailed annually to take charge of the instruction of all range-takers
+in the brigade.</p>
+
+<p>2. In addition to the authorized establishment of range-takers an
+adequate and efficient reserve to replace possible casualties must be
+maintained.</p>
+
+<p>3. These requirements necessitate a class being formed each year, which
+should commence work during the period of individual training.</p>
+
+<p>4. The men selected for a course must be active and willing to learn.
+They must have good hearing and eyesight and a steady hand. They should
+be able to write clearly, and it will be an advantage if they can read
+a map and be a good judge of distance before commencing work.</p>
+
+<p>5. The course should be a progressive one, beginning with a few short
+lectures, which should be devoted to explaining the working of the
+instrument, the names of its various parts and their uses, and the
+errors that are commonly made. The proper way to handle the instrument
+can also be taught.</p>
+
+<p>6. The next step is to take the class out of doors and practise them
+in taking ranges to well-defined upright objects, such as chimneys and
+later to smaller objects, such as posts, at close and known ranges. Any
+errors in the handling of the instrument or in the methods employed
+should be pointed out at the time.</p>
+
+<p>7. The men should now be ready to be taken into the country and
+practised in taking ranges at first to well-defined objects from three
+to four thousand yards away, and subsequently to others, such as crest
+lines and hedges, which would form the more usual and less distinct
+objectives in war.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_390">[Pg 390]</span></p>
+
+<p>8. <b>It is a matter of the greatest importance that the men should
+learn to take ranges with the least possible exposure, in order
+to avoid giving any information to the enemy as to the artillery
+positions.</b> The instructor should, from the earliest moment
+possible, act as though he were a battery commander and, having pointed
+out the objects to which he requires the range, should insist on the
+men withdrawing under cover and moving to another position before
+taking it, unless well concealed in their present position. The same
+precautions should be taken when reporting the range, due allowance
+being made for any extra distance to the front or rear that the range
+was taken from.</p>
+
+<p>9. <b>All officers should understand the general working of the
+instrument in use in their unit and be capable of taking ranges with it.</b></p>
+
+<h3>SERVICE OF COMMUNICATION.</h3>
+
+<p id="Para_246" class="f120"><b>246.</b> <i>General system and principles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Artillery communications in the field are divided into:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;i. Internal communications, consisting of those established</li>
+<li class="isub5">between the various artillery headquarters and units.</li>
+<li class="isub3">ii. External communications, which are those formed as a</li>
+<li class="isub5">temporary measure to link up artillery with infantry.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>2. The means of communication available for horse and field artillery
+are given in Sec. <b>149</b>.</p>
+
+<p>3. The signalling personnel allowed is laid down in War Establishments.
+This establishment is based on the principle that signalling personnel
+is required for the purpose of providing communications downwards,
+<i>i.e.</i>, with subordinates, and laterally, <i>i.e.</i>, with equals.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_391">[Pg 391]</span></p>
+
+<p>To enable commanders of artillery brigades to carry out this principle
+they must be able to communicate with brigade stations of the
+divisional signal service as well as with their subordinates. The
+standard of efficiency of a proportion of the signallers must therefore
+be equal to that required of the divisional signal service. On the
+other hand, as long distance work is not needed within the batteries,
+the standard required of their signallers need not be so high.</p>
+
+<p>The signalling personnel is therefore divided into two classes—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;i. Brigade signallers.</li>
+<li class="isub3">ii. Battery signallers.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>4. As it is usually of importance to ensure the continuity of
+communications when once they have been opened between any two points,
+alternative methods should be established, if possible. To enable
+this to be done it is essential that men employed on the service of
+communication should be capable of acting in any of the capacities laid
+down for the classes to which they belong. All signallers should also
+be capable of acting as despatch riders, since it will often be quicker
+to send a message in this way than by signal. Instructions for training
+despatch riders are laid down in Signal Training, Part II.&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_43_43" href="#Footnote_43_43" class="fnanchor">[43]</a></p>
+
+<p id="Para_247" class="f120"><b>247.</b> <i>Internal communications.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. For communicating between brigade headquarters and the headquarters
+of batteries and ammunition columns an establishment of brigade
+signallers is provided as an integral part of brigade headquarters.
+These men should be fully qualified signallers as laid down in Training
+Manual—Signalling.</p>
+
+<p>This establishment has been calculated on the assumption that
+communication with one battery at least will be more conveniently
+carried out verbally or by message. Communication by telephone or
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_392">[Pg 392]</span>
+visual signalling will not, therefore, be required with more than
+two batteries, orderlies being used to communicate with the brigade
+ammunition column.</p>
+
+<p>The officer in charge of communications at brigade headquarters is
+responsible for allotting the brigade signallers to batteries for
+the purpose of maintaining communication between them and brigade
+headquarters in accordance with circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>2. Communication within the battery from the battery commander to his
+guns and observers will be carried out by the battery signallers. These
+battery signallers are maintained solely for purposes of communication
+within the battery. Their training is limited to the use of semaphore,
+telephone and buzzer.</p>
+
+<p>Communication may be carried out by means of:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub4">(<i>a.</i>) Telephones.</li>
+<li class="isub4">(<i>b.</i>) Semaphore.</li>
+<li class="isub4">(<i>c.</i>) Orderlies.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>For the purpose of maintaining communication between a battery and its
+observing station, four signallers are necessary, two at each station.
+They should be provided with telephones and flags, so that alternative
+means of communication may be available.</p>
+
+<p>Semaphore signalling is the most rapid system of visual signalling with
+small flags. (<a href="#Para_201"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>201</b> (4)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The best way of utilizing semaphore signalling is to employ two sets of
+signallers, each pair having different coloured flags. Those with the
+same coloured flags should communicate with each other only.</p>
+
+<p>In sending orders, or the result of observations, by signal the
+abbreviations laid down in <a href="#Para_201">Sec. <b>201</b></a>, will be used.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_248" class="f120"><b>248.</b> <i>External communications.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. Effectual co-operation between artillery and infantry depends
+largely on the receipt of timely information. An efficient system of
+communication is therefore very important.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_393">[Pg 393]</span></p>
+
+<p>2. A personal exchange of views between subordinate infantry and
+artillery commanders is likely to produce the best results in a
+combined tactical operation. If unable to remain in the vicinity of the
+infantry commander, the artillery commander should be represented by an
+officer (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (7)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>3. No rules can be laid down as to the means by which communication is
+to be maintained between this officer and the artillery commander.</p>
+
+<p>If circumstances are favourable communication may be maintained by
+the brigade telephone or by visual signalling, but as the infantry
+commander will usually change his position as the fight progresses, it
+may be necessary to rely on orderlies, or a combination of orderlies
+and telephone or visual signalling.</p>
+
+<p>4. It may be possible to arrange direct communication between the
+artillery commander and advanced observation posts, with a view to
+keeping him informed as to the progress of the attacking infantry and
+the effect of the artillery fire. (<a href="#Para_153"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>153</b> (11)</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>The means of communication which can be employed will depend on the
+nature of the country.</p>
+
+<p>Visual communication will usually be inadvisable on account of the
+difficulty of finding positions which are invisible to the enemy,
+and the telephone may be expected to give the best results. When no
+artillery telephone is available the possibility of sending information
+of equal importance to the artillery and infantry through the infantry
+communication service should be kept in view. It must be borne in mind
+that a message sent by orderly will take an appreciable time to reach
+its destination.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_394">[Pg 394]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIII.<br><span class="h_subtitle">MOVEMENTS AND QUARTERS.</span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+
+<p id="Para_249" class="f120"><b>249.</b> <i>Marches and march discipline.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. III.)</p>
+
+<p>1. March discipline includes everything that affects the
+efficiency of man and horse during a march. On it depends not
+only the comfort of a column of troops as a whole, but also
+the time which is needed to perform a march or deploy for
+battle.</p>
+
+<p>The principles which govern the order of march of a body of
+troops are laid down in F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. III.</p>
+
+<p>2. The following rules should be observed by artillery:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; i. The order of units should be changed daily.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;ii. Brigade signallers and range-takers should ride three</li>
+<li class="isub4">abreast at the head of the brigade to which they</li>
+<li class="isub4">belong.</li>
+<li class="isub2">iii. Batteries should always march in column of route on</li>
+<li class="isub4">the left of the road. The regulation distance between</li>
+<li class="isub4">carriages should be strictly preserved, and care must</li>
+<li class="isub4">be taken that, when a halt is ordered, each carriage</li>
+<li class="isub4">is drawn up on the left side of the road. Cross roads</li>
+<li class="isub4">must be left clear.</li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; iv. Dismounted detachments should keep on the inner flank</li>
+<li class="isub4">of the column, but if this is not possible they should</li>
+<li class="isub4">march in fours behind their respective guns and</li>
+<li class="isub4">wagons. They should never march on the off side of the</li>
+<li class="isub4">carriages.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_395">[Pg 395]</span>
+Men may mount or dismount when the column is moving at a walk.</p>
+
+<p>3. In column of route when two ammunition wagons per subsection are
+present they immediately follow their gun until the batteries prepare
+for action, when those which do not accompany the guns into action,
+will assume a preparatory formation under the command of the captain.
+(<a href="#Para_191">Sec. <b>191</b></a>.)</p>
+
+<p>4. On a march the first halt usually takes place not long after
+the start, when a careful examination should be made of the horses
+and harness. Subsequent halts are made at regular intervals at the
+discretion of the commander of the column. The duration of these halts
+and the time when they are to take place, should be made known in
+advance.</p>
+
+<p>5. It is of great importance to relieve horses as much as possible of
+the heavy weights they have to carry. They should be harnessed up as
+short a time as possible before turning out, and should not be hooked
+in until just before the time for marching off.</p>
+
+<p>When they are standing in harness the drivers should be dismounted.</p>
+
+<p>When marching at a slow pace with other troops men are inclined to
+lounge in their saddles and thus to cause sore backs. On this account
+mounted men should be instructed to walk and lead at intervals, and the
+drivers may be relieved occasionally by capable gunners. For the same
+reason slouching in the saddle, even when riding at ease, should be
+prevented and, when trotting, every man should rise in his stirrups.</p>
+
+<p>6. Opportunities which may occur for watering and feeding horses should
+always be seized. Watering requires to be carried out on a regular
+system if it is to be done smoothly and expeditiously.</p>
+
+<p>7. When artillery is moving independently of other troops, very early
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_396">[Pg 396]</span>
+starts are undesirable, except for some special reason. The men should
+have time to get breakfast and the horses should be fed before the
+march commences.</p>
+
+<p>The maintenance of an even and regular pace is essential, otherwise
+the constant opening out and closing up, which occurs in rear, becomes
+trying, both to men and horses.</p>
+
+<p>In some circumstances, such as when the roads are hilly or dusty, the
+intervals between files and the distances between carriages may be
+increased.</p>
+
+<p>The last couple of miles of a march should be at a walk, so as to bring
+the horses in cool, and during this period they should be watered, if
+there be a convenient place.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_250" class="f120"><b>250.</b> <i>Billets.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The principles to be observed in the allotment of billets, and
+instructions for administration and discipline in billets, are laid
+down in F.S. Regs., Part I, Chap. IV.</p>
+
+<p>2. Billets are of three descriptions, viz.:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp; i. Billets with subsistence.</li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;ii. Billets with partial subsistence.</li>
+<li class="isub3">iii. Billets without subsistence.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>When billets with subsistence are provided, officers and others must
+be satisfied with the usual fare of the householder on whom they are
+billeted.</p>
+
+<p>All billets will include attendance and, when required, the use of
+ordinary cooking utensils, but bedding cannot be demanded as a right.</p>
+
+<p>3. Billeting areas are allotted by the quartermaster-general’s
+branch of the staff. The commanders of these areas then distribute
+the accommodation among the units to be quartered in them and issue
+billeting demands to their representatives.</p>
+
+<p>4. A billeting party should consist of one officer or senior
+non-commissioned officer per brigade, and one rank and file N.C.O. per
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_397">[Pg 397]</span>
+battery or ammunition column. Before starting for his allotted area,
+the commander of the party should obtain a statement showing the number
+of officers, men, and horses for whom accommodation is required.</p>
+
+<p>5. On arrival in the locality in which his formation is to be billeted,
+the commander of the billeting party will first proceed to the mayor,
+or other chief official, hand him the billeting demand, and notify
+him of the hour at which the troops may be expected. If time permits
+billeting orders should be obtained from the local authority for each
+inhabitant on whom men and horses are to be quartered.</p>
+
+<p>6. On receipt of these orders the commander of the billeting party will
+issue them in proper proportion to the representative of each unit, who
+will be given instructions as to the posting of any special notices,
+arrangements for watering, &amp;c., and the rendezvous, when the billets
+have been inspected. The men of the party then proceed to the houses
+and stables allotted to their units, inspect and mark them and hand the
+billeting orders to occupiers. In arranging for billets horses should
+be billeted near the men, and as close as possible to the guns and
+vehicles. Each unit should, if possible, be allotted both sides of a
+street.</p>
+
+<p>7. In the meantime the commander of the party will select and mark
+the position of the headquarters of the brigade, guard-room, sick
+inspection room, and gun parks. (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I,
+Sec. <b>49</b>.) He will also ascertain the most suitable lines for
+communicating with neighbouring units and the best lines into and out
+of the area.</p>
+
+<p>8. In fixing the sites of gun parks and arranging accommodation for
+horses, precautions must usually be taken against discovery by hostile
+aircraft.</p>
+
+<p>Although to avoid blocking roads and communications it may be necessary
+to place guns and other vehicles outside towns or villages, they should
+not be parked in a regular formation in the open. As many vehicles and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_398">[Pg 398]</span>
+horses as possible should be placed under cover, the remainder being
+concealed by placing them close to hedges, buildings, stacks, or any
+other object which will screen them against observation from the air.</p>
+
+<p>Subject to the conditions above, guns and wagons should be parked,
+where possible, on dry ground, but near water, with easy approaches
+and plenty of room. Additional entrances may be needed to facilitate
+movement. Provided there is plenty of room for movement and it is
+possible to conceal the carriages from observation by aircraft a single
+gun park has advantages.</p>
+
+<p>9. After completing the above, the commander of the billeting party
+should, if possible, prepare a rough plan of the area, showing the
+allotment of billets, main roads and communications, position of gun
+parks, together with a statement as to any special arrangements that
+may be necessary as regards watering horses, and other details.</p>
+
+<p>10. On reassembling his men, he will notify them of the positions of
+headquarters, guard, gun parks, etc., and will despatch a proportion to
+convey this information to the units. (<i>See</i> F.S. Regs., Part I, Sec. 48.)</p>
+
+<p>11. When time is not available for the above procedure troops will
+be halted outside their billeting areas. Meanwhile brigade billeting
+parties will proceed to the town hall or similar place, where a
+representative of the commander of the area will allot certain streets
+or groups of houses to them, which they in turn will assign to units.</p>
+
+<p>12. A list of the addresses of the officers should be given to the
+commander of the main guard.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_251" class="f120"><b>251.</b> <i>Bivouacs.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The general rules for the occupation of a bivouac are given in F.S.
+Regs., Part I, Sec. 56.</p>
+
+<p>2. The commander of the billeting party, as soon as he has been shown
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_399">[Pg 399]</span>
+the area allotted to him, selects the sites for the bivouacs for each
+battery, and has the positions of kitchens, slaughter-places, and
+latrines marked out.</p>
+
+<p>He then goes to meet the artillery commander with information on the
+various details dealt with in F.S. Regs., Part I, Secs. 56 and 57.</p>
+
+<p>Orders dealing with any of these points, which it is necessary for the
+troops to know, should be communicated to them before leaving the gun
+park.</p>
+
+<p>3. It will generally be necessary to take precautions against
+observation by hostile aircraft, and when this is the case regular
+formations should be avoided and all possible arrangements made to
+conceal the guns and horses (<a href="#Para_250"><i>See</i> Sec. <b>250</b> (8)</a>).
+Bivouac shelters, if used, should not be put up till after dark. When artillery
+reach their bivouac in darkness and when it is not necessary to take
+precautions against discovery by hostile aircraft the method of
+arranging a bivouac for a battery in <a href="#FIG_37">Fig. 37</a> may be used.</p>
+
+<p>This method, which is quick and economical of space is given as a guide
+and should be followed only so far as the ground allows.</p>
+
+<p>The guns are formed in line at half interval (10 yards) with the firing
+battery wagons on their left at 2 yards interval, three of the first
+line wagons in rear of and at right angles to the line of guns and 5
+yards from them. The remaining three are then formed up parallel and
+about 60 yards from the above.</p>
+
+<p>4. The picketing ropes are stretched between the upper spokes of the
+1st line wagons. The rope can be stretched taut by lifting and heaving
+on the wagons furthest from the gun park, and, if necessary, sinking a
+small trench for the wheels to rest in. If the length of rope required
+is considerable it may be advisable to use other wagons to support it half-way.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_400">[Pg 400]</span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+   <p id="FIG_37" class="f120"><span class="smcap">Fig. 37.</span></p>
+    <img src="images/fig_37.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="505" >
+</div>
+
+<p>The horse lines of each section should be as far as possible in rear of
+the guns of its own section.</p>
+
+<p>The horses of each section are then fastened to one rope, using both
+sides of the rope. No horse should be fastened within 5 yards of a
+carriage in order to prevent the possibility of damage.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_401">[Pg 401]</span></p>
+
+<p>The harness is placed in rear of the heel pegs, blankets folded on the
+saddles and the whole bound up in the harness cover: forage 5 yards
+from the horse lines at the opposite end to the gun park.</p>
+
+<p>The sections are arranged so that the personnel may be as near their
+own horses as possible. The right and left sections parallel to the
+horse lines, the centre section at right angles to them at 10 yards
+distance. The officers 20 yards in rear of the centre section.</p>
+
+<h3><span class="smcap">Transport of Artillery.</span></h3>
+
+<p id="Para_252" class="f120"><b>252.</b> <i>Transport by rail.</i></p>
+
+<p>The transport of troops in peace by land and sea is dealt with in the
+“King’s Regulations.” Owing to the variations in size of carriages and
+trucks in the different countries where campaigns may take place, it
+is impossible to fix the number of vehicles or trains required for a
+battery.</p>
+
+<p>Rolling stock, such as in common use in the United Kingdom, will take:—</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub3">8 men with their equipment in each compartment.</li>
+<li class="isub3">7 harnessed riding or light draught or 6 heavy draught</li>
+<li class="isub4">horses in a cattle truck.</li>
+<li class="isub3">2 or 3 pairs of wheels on the average wagon truck.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>The number of vehicles in a train varies on different railways,
+according to the ruling (<i>i.e.</i>, maximum) gradient, speed, and the
+types of locomotives and trucks.</p>
+
+<p>In the United Kingdom each six gun battery of horse or field artillery
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_402">[Pg 402]</span>
+at war strength would require 2 trains, while the brigade headquarters
+and ammunition column for a howitzer, 13-pr. and 18-pr. artillery
+brigade would occupy 2, 3 and 4 trains respectively.</p>
+
+<p>It may be necessary to entrain and detrain horses and carriages without
+the use of raised platforms by means of ramps. Regular practice in
+doing this is required in order to avoid delay.</p>
+
+<p>Fixed ramps can be made with earth revetted with sleepers, or sleepers
+alone may be used.</p>
+
+<p>Plate XI shows ramps which can be quickly improvised if portable ramps
+are not available. The stores required are two rails, 21 ft. to 24 ft.
+long, and 40 or 50 sleepers for each ramp.</p>
+
+<p>The following are the principal points to which attention should be
+paid when loading horses and guns and carriages.</p>
+
+<p class="f120"><b>i.</b> <i>Horses.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. The entrainment and detrainment of horses will be carried out in
+accordance with the instructions given in F.S. Regs., Part I., Sec. 38.</p>
+
+<p>2. The floors of trucks used for the conveyance of horses should, if of
+wood, be at least 1½ inches thick. Cinders, sand or gravel should be
+sprinkled on them to prevent the horses slipping; on no account should
+straw or any inflammable material be used for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>3. A man leading a horse into a truck should walk freely in with a
+loose head rope, as though leading it into a stall. He should not stare
+in the animal’s face. Much time may be lost in dealing timorously with
+a jibbing horse; two men should be ready to clasp hands above its hocks
+and hustle it into the truck.</p>
+
+<p>4. If possible, on long journeys, horses should be taken out of a train
+at least once every 24 hours, walked about, and allowed to roll on sand
+or grass.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter">
+    <p id="PLATE_11" class="f120 spa2"><span class="smcap"><b>Plate XI.</b></span></p>
+    <p class="f120"><b><span class="smcap">Temporary Ramp</span></b></p>
+    <p class="center"><i>For Entraining Guns.</i><br>(<i>End Loading</i>)</p>
+    <img src="images/plate_11a.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="138" >
+
+    <p class="f120"><b><span class="smcap">Temporary Ramp</span></b></p>
+    <p class="center"><i>For Entraining Horses.</i><br>(<i>Side Loading</i>)</p>
+    <img src="images/plate_11b.jpg" alt="" width="600" height="207" >
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_403">[Pg 403]</span></p>
+
+<p class="f120"><b>ii.</b> <i>Guns and carriages.</i></p>
+
+<p>The general points which should be attended to are:—</p>
+
+<p>To distribute the load evenly over the floor, and if any of the
+flooring planks are rotten, to put a sleeper across them under the
+wheels. The minimum thickness of floor should be 2 inches.</p>
+
+<p>To see that the points of poles or shafts do not stick up so that they
+would strike against bridges, &amp;c., as would usually occur if they were
+more than 7 feet above the floor of the trucks.</p>
+
+<p>To lash the wheels nearest to the ends of the trucks securely to the
+false buffers or to rings by a rope, which is also given a turn round
+the axle of each pair of wheels on the truck to prevent them shifting
+with the jerks of the train.</p>
+
+<p>Generally the best way to stow the carriages is, poles, trails, and
+perches resting on the floor, poles to the front, perches and trails
+to the rear, the wheels of each vehicle interlocking with those of the
+carriage in front of it.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_253" class="f120"><b>253.</b> <i>Slinging horses.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>Transports alongside.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>1. If horses are to be embarked by slinging, they should on arrival
+alongside the ship be unsaddled or unharnessed, the head rope should be
+fastened in the ordinary way round the neck; the ship’s halter will be
+put on under the head-collar; the bridoon reins should be left loose
+(as they may be required for keeping the head in the proper position
+while lowering down the hatchways), but they should be knotted to
+prevent them getting entangled in the horse’s legs. Slings should be
+minutely inspected before the embarkation begins. A double guy should be
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_404">[Pg 404]</span>
+made fast to the horse’s head, one end being held on shore and the
+other on board, in order to keep the head steady; the surcingle must be
+moved round so that the buckle is on the seat.</p>
+
+<p>2. In slinging horses, five men are required, one at the head, one at
+each side, one at the breast, and one behind. One end of the sling is
+passed under the horse’s belly, and both ends are brought up to meet
+over his back; one man passes his loop through the other loop, and it
+is received by the man on the other side, who hauls it through, hooking
+the tackle to it, both men holding up the ends of the sling until it
+is taut. The men at the breast and behind bring their ropes round and
+make them fast to the grummets, and the man who holds the horse’s head
+makes fast the guys to the ship’s head-collar. The breech band and
+breast girth must be securely fastened. Timid or restive horses should
+be blindfolded. When all is ready, the words “<span class="smcap">Hoist away</span>”
+will be given, and the horse is to be rapidly run up from the ground to the
+necessary height, and then carefully lowered down to the hatchway. Two
+or three men should be stationed at the hatchway and between decks to
+guide the horse in being lowered. A soft bed of straw or coir mats must
+be provided for the horse to alight upon, and the men stationed in the
+lower deck must be ready to receive him and take off the sling, as on
+first feeling his legs, unless firmly handled, he is apt to plunge and
+kick violently.</p>
+
+<p>3. In disembarking, sand or straw must be laid on the wharf for the
+reception of the horses. Horses are apt to fall on their knees at once
+unless carefully held up.</p>
+
+<p class="center">(<i>Transports not alongside.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>4. The method of embarking horses in boats or flats will vary according
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_405">[Pg 405]</span>
+to circumstances. If the boats can come alongside a wharf, or can
+approach close to an open beach, the horses can either be led on board
+by gangways (horse brows), or be slung in the manner described above,
+sheers or a derrick being erected. Horse brows may be at steep angles
+of ascent or descent if there is considerable rise and fall of tide.
+When the boats cannot come sufficiently near the shore to enable horses
+to be hoisted on to them, piers or platforms must be constructed. The
+piers should always be provided with stout side railings about three
+feet high, and the floor covered with shingle, straw, or something to
+prevent the horses slipping.</p>
+
+<p>5. When embarking in boats, the detachment should be formed up opposite
+them, and the same rules, so far as practicable, followed as when
+embarking in vessels alongside a wharf. A man must be told off to each
+horse, and take with him in the boat the whole of his kit, equipment,
+saddlery, &amp;c. The men should take off arms, belts, and spurs. The
+horses should, if possible, be placed athwart the boat alternately, the
+head to tail. Each man must hold his horse until the vessel is reached.
+Sand or straw should be put in the boats to prevent the horses slipping.</p>
+
+<p>6. In the absence of boats and appliances, the following method of
+embarking horses by swimming may be employed:—</p>
+
+<p>The horses having been halted a short distance from, and out of sight
+of, the point of embarkation, are stripped of all appointments except
+the bridoon and headstall, which latter should be close fitting.</p>
+
+<p>A horse having been led to the landing place, two men prepare him for
+the water. No. 1 holds his head. No. 2 places the sling in position and
+secures the straps with yarn, so as to prevent the sling opening in the
+water; he then fastens the breast rope and breeching securely. A rope
+of about eight yards in length, with an eye at one end, is next passed
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_406">[Pg 406]</span>
+round the neck and fastened rather tightly by an overhand knot, so
+as to prevent its becoming either looser or tighter. The bridoon is
+then taken off, and to support the horse in the water another rope is
+attached to the lower ring of the headstall under the chin, or else a
+short rope is passed round the girth in front of the sling and close
+behind the elbows, the ends being brought up and fastened over the
+withers. The horse is controlled altogether by the neck rope.</p>
+
+<p>The horse is then led into the water as far as he will walk towards the
+boat, in the stern of which should be a man, who receives the neck rope
+in his right hand, and immediately reeves it through the stern ring of
+the boat to secure additional power in the event of the horse plunging;
+the headstall or girth rope he receives in his left hand.</p>
+
+<p>When once the horse is swimming, the neck rope should be hauled close
+up while the headstall or girth rope gently supports him in the water.</p>
+
+<p>A small rowing boat with two oars will be sufficient. It should not be
+pulled too fast, or the horse will make no attempt to swim.</p>
+
+<p>On reaching the ship’s side the hook and tackle should be lowered, the
+hook passed through the sling’s eye, and the horse hoisted up on board.</p>
+
+<p>Care should be taken to arrange the tackle so that the horse, in being
+hoisted in, is kept clear of the ship’s side.</p>
+
+<p>7. Horses may, in cases of emergency only, be disembarked by swimming.
+When this method is adopted, the horse should be lowered in the sling
+over the side of the vessel without fastening the breast rope or
+breeching. When the tackle is unhooked the sling opens, and is at once
+slipped from under the horse. The neck rope should be hauled up and
+secured, and the horse supported, as explained above. If necessary,
+four horses may be made to swim ashore at a time, two on each side of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_407">[Pg 407]</span>
+the boat. It is important that horses should be kept at the point to
+which the others are to swim.</p>
+
+<p>Horses should be cool before being put into the water.</p>
+
+<p id="Para_254" class="f120"><b>254.</b> <i>Slinging guns and vehicles.</i></p>
+
+<p>1. For slinging guns, limbers and limbered wagons, the following method
+has been found to give good results:—</p>
+
+<p>Two four-inch slings are used, one round each axletree, and a hook rope
+hooked into the trail eye. The bights of the slings are placed on the
+tackle hook, to which the end of the hook rope is also made fast.</p>
+
+<p>Limbers are slung in the same way as guns, the hook rope in their
+case being made fast to about the centre of the pole, unless special
+instructions to remove the poles are issued.</p>
+
+<p>Limbered wagons will, as a rule, be embarked loaded on their wheels,
+the poles should not be removed before slinging. If the wheels are
+removed, special care must be taken that the linch pins and washers are
+put away. Those carriages first required on disembarkation should be
+stowed away last.</p>
+
+<p>2. G.S. wagons can be slung by four chain slings connected to a common
+link at the one end and provided with hooks at the other, these four
+hooks are then secured to all four wheels of the vehicle. The poles
+must be removed before slinging, and <b>made fast to the body of the
+wagons</b>.</p>
+
+<p>If cordage only is available, two slings each, consisting of one rope
+3 in. by 60 ft., knotted at a suitable length, and two lashings, 1½
+in. by 30 ft. for guy ropes are required.</p>
+
+<p>To adjust the front sling pass one end inside the wheels and under the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_408">[Pg 408]</span>
+futchels of the fore carriage in front of the axle. To adjust the back
+sling loop one end of the sling over the nave of the off hind wheel.
+Pass the sling over the load and loop the other end to the nave of the
+near hind wheel. Care must be taken to see that the drag washers are
+turned down to prevent the sling from slipping off.</p>
+
+<p>The hook of the hoisting tackle is then passed through the end of the
+two ends of the front sling and under the centre of the back sling.</p>
+
+<p>The pressure can be taken off the sides of the carriage by making use
+of loops made with polechains or ropes at the end of poles through
+which the slings are passed.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_409">[Pg 409]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">APPENDIX I.</h2>
+</div>
+
+<p>The following syllabus of training for recruits of R.H. and R.F.A. is
+given as a guide to officers charged with the training of recruits. It
+is not intended that it should be followed rigidly.</p>
+
+<p class="f120 spa2"><b>SYLLABUS OF TRAINING.</b></p>
+<p class="center">GUNNERS.</p>
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2 bb">
+      <th class="tdc">Subject.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">1st<br>&nbsp;fortnight.&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;2nd&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;3rd&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;4th&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;5th&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;6th&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">Total hours<br>per subject.</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Physical training</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">60</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Dismounted drill—without arms</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">30</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">90</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl">Rifle exercises—including musketry</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">25</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">and visual training</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Cordage, knotting, &amp;c.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">3</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">19</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Semaphore</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bt">
+      <td class="tdl">Gun drill—including gunnery,</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">12</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl" rowspan="3">46</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">laying, fuze setting, and</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_ws1">visual training</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">Lectures</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5&#8199;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">30</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Total hours per fortnight</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">45&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_44_44" href="#Footnote_44_44" class="fnanchor">[44]</a></td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">45</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">290
+          <span class="pagenum" id="Page_410">[Pg 410]</span></td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p class="center spa2">DRIVERS.</p>
+
+
+<table class="spb1">
+   <thead><tr class="bt2">
+      <th class="tdc" rowspan="2">Detail.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl bb fs_120" colspan="6">Fortnight.</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl" rowspan="2">&nbsp; Total.</th>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;1st&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;2nd&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;3rd&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;4th&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;5th&nbsp;</th>
+      <th class="tdc bl">&nbsp;6th&nbsp;</th>
+   </tr></thead>
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">1. Physical training</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">60</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">2. Foot drill</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">30</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">90</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">3. Rifle exercises and visual training</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">30</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">4. Cordage, knotting, &amp;c.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">7½</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">5. Semaphore</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">20</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">6. Wooden horse</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">7½</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">7. Fitting and cleaning harness, &amp;c.</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">12½</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">8. Stable management</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">10</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">40</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdl">9. Lectures</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">&#8199;5&#8199;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">&#8199;5</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">2½</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl bb">22½</td>
+   </tr><tr class="bb">
+      <td class="tdl_ws2">Total hours per fortnight</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">&nbsp;45&#x2060;<a id="FNanchor_45_45" href="#Footnote_45_45" class="fnanchor">[45]</a>&nbsp;</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">45</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">50</td>
+      <td class="tdc bl">290</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_411">[Pg 411]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">APPENDIX II.</h2>
+</div>
+
+<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Precautions to be Taken when<br> Firing Blank Ammunition.</span></p>
+
+<p>1. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or gunner, is to command or
+form part of a section or gun detachment firing blank ammunition at
+salutes or on field days who has not been trained and passed in gun drill.</p>
+
+<p>2. When bare charges are used, no gun is to be reloaded within 30
+seconds after firing. When firing Q.F. blank cartridges, no gun is to
+be reloaded within 15 seconds after firing.</p>
+
+<p>Even after these intervals no gun is to be reloaded unless the No.
+1 has examined the chamber and the bore and removed any “debris”
+remaining from the previous round. (N.B.—With the 4·5-inch Q.F.
+Howitzer the lid of the cartridge is not to be removed when firing
+blank ammunition.)</p>
+
+<p>3. In firing salutes not less than four guns are to be used. When
+firing signal rounds at field days and manœuvres, however, any number
+of guns may be used provided that the conditions of paragraph 2 are
+fulfilled.</p>
+
+<p>4. In the event of a missfire, at least one more attempt should be made
+to fire the gun, when it is again its turn, but in any case the breech
+must not be opened for at least one minute with “black powder” charges
+and ten minutes with “smokeless powder” charges after the last failure
+to fire the gun. None of the detachment should be directly in rear of
+the breech when it is opened.</p>
+
+<p>In firing salutes, an officer or senior non-commissioned officer
+should be detailed for the special duty of timing the interval after
+a missfire, and informing the No. 1 of that gun when he may open the
+breech.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_412">[Pg 412]</span></p>
+<h2 class="nobreak">INDEX.</h2>
+</div>
+
+<div class="blockquot">
+<p class="neg-indent"><b>NOTE.—No reference to drill movements is made
+in this Index. Headings of sections dealing with drill will be found in
+the Contents.</b></p>
+</div>
+
+<ul class="index">
+<li class="isub10"><span class="fs_120"><b>A</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub20">PAGE.</li>
+<li class="isub2">Abbreviations to be used in signalling, <a href="#Page_321">321</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">”          ”     ”     words of command, <a href="#Page_301">301</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Action, advance of battery for, <a href="#Page_302">302</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">field battery in,</span> <a href="#Page_306">306</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">” <span class="ws2">method of coming into,</span> <a href="#Page_303">303</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">” <span class="ws2">preparation for, by battery,</span> <a href="#Page_294">294</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Advance of battery in action, <a href="#Page_360">360</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">of horse artillery into action,</span> <a href="#Page_270">270</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Advanced guard artillery action of the, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">to conform to action of,</span> <a href="#Page_215">215</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">observation posts,</span> <a href="#Page_244">244</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Aerial reconnaissance, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Aeroplane observing, men to be detailed to watch, <a href="#Page_328">328</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Aeroplanes, location of targets by, <a href="#Page_324">324</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">method of engaging,</span> <a href="#Page_351">351</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” <span class="ws2">observation of fire from,</span> <a href="#Page_325">325</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">signals from and to,</span> <a href="#Page_328">328</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Aiming point, angular corrections necessary</li>
+<li class="isub8">for different positions, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">auxiliary,</span> <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">” </span><span class="ws2">selection of,</span> <a href="#Page_300">300</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">points, position and use of,</span> <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">posts, planting of,</span> <a href="#Page_300">300</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Air, resistance of, on a shell during flight, <a href="#Page_148">148</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Aircraft, advantage to be taken of woods, &amp;c.,</li>
+<li class="isub8">for concealment against, <a href="#Page_231">231</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” advantages of concealment modified by use of, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">co-operation with Artillery,</span> <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">employment of,</span> <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">methods of engaging,</span> <a href="#Page_350">350</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">placed at disposal of divisional artillery commander,</span> <a href="#Page_244">244</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">prevention against discovery by,</span> <a href="#Page_398">398</a>, <a href="#Page_399">399</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">signalling from,</span> <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">”</span> <span class="ws2">”&emsp;the ground to,</span> <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">with artillery co-operation of,</span> <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Airships, method of engaging, <a href="#Page_351">351</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">All guns ranging, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_334">334</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Ammunition, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">blank, precautions to be taken when firing,</span> <a href="#Page_411">411</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">column, brigade,</span> <a href="#Page_367">367</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;howitzer brigade, <a href="#Page_369">369</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">columns, divisional,</span> <a href="#Page_370">370</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;horse artillery, <a href="#Page_370">370</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;with heavy batteries, <a href="#Page_369">369</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;mountain batteries, <a href="#Page_369">369</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">control of expenditure of,</span> <a href="#Page_280">280</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">distribution in action,</span> <a href="#Page_364">364</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">expenditure of to be guided by importance of objective,</span> <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">liberal expenditure of when permissible,</span> <a href="#Page_245">245</a>, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">mountain artillery, replenishment of,</span> <a href="#Page_367">367</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">parks,</span> <a href="#Page_371">371</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">receipt for,</span> <a href="#Page_369">369</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">replenishment of,</span> <a href="#Page_366">366</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;for cavalry and horse artillery, <a href="#Page_276">276</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">reserves on the line of communication,</span> <a href="#Page_371">371</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">supply, general instructions,</span> <a href="#Page_364">364</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;not restricted to troops of own formation, <a href="#Page_364">364</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;of, to a rearguard, <a href="#Page_265">265</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;within the battery, <a href="#Page_365">365</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">transfer of,</span> <a href="#Page_369">369</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">waste of,</span> <a href="#Page_255">255</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Angle of sight, alteration in, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">“</span>&emsp;how found when target not visible from guns, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;measured, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">switch,</span> <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Angles, form of ordering, <a href="#Page_302">302</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">use of hand for measuring,</span> <a href="#Page_180">180</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Angular corrections for different positions of aiming point, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Annual practice, <a href="#Page_19">19</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Approach march, horse artillery with cavalry, <a href="#Page_268">268</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Artillery, advanced guard, action of the, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;and infantry, forming of, into groups, <a href="#Page_236">236</a>, <a href="#Page_241">241</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;attack, opening phase of the, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>     second phase of the, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>     third phase of, <a href="#Page_250">250</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;defence, opening phase of, <a href="#Page_255">255</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>    second phase of, <a href="#Page_256">256</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>    third phase of, <a href="#Page_257">257</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;distribution of, in defence of a position, <a href="#Page_254">254</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;employment of, in war, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;field, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;fire, natures of, <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;forward movement, <a href="#Page_249">249</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;horse, action in cavalry pursuit or retreat, <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">advance into action,</span> <a href="#Page_270">270</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">escorts for,</span> <a href="#Page_267">267</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">in a general engagement,</span> <a href="#Page_275">275</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">”  cavalry fight,</span> <a href="#Page_272">272</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">position on the march</span> <a href="#Page_267">267</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">with cavalry</span> <a href="#Page_265">265</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp; ”<span class="ws2">”</span> &emsp;”&emsp;acting dismounted, <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;in attack, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;”<span class="ws2">defence, general instructions and</span></li>
+<li class="isub10">preliminary measures, <a href="#Page_252">252</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;”<span class="ws2">hand, objects and methods of keeping,</span> <a href="#Page_234">234</a>, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;”<span class="ws2">irregular warfare,</span> <a href="#Page_278">278</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;”<span class="ws2">retirements and retreats,</span> <a href="#Page_263">263</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;location of enemy’s batteries, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;methods of engaging, <a href="#Page_346">346</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;mobile, in the attack and defence of a fortress, <a href="#Page_276">276</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;protection of, <a href="#Page_234">234</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;territorial, training of, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;transport of, by rail, <a href="#Page_401">401</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;with aircraft, co-operation of, <a href="#Page_324">324</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Assembly, positions of, when selected, <a href="#Page_303">303</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Atmosphere, state of, affects accuracy of shooting, <a href="#Page_154">154</a>, <a href="#Page_166">166</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Attack, artillery in, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;of a fortress, mobile artillery in the, <a href="#Page_276">276</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;opening phase of the, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;second phase of the, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;third phase of the, <a href="#Page_250">250</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>B</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Ballistic coefficient, <a href="#Page_149">149</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Balloons, captive, method of engaging, <a href="#Page_351">351</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Batteries, nomenclature and position of at brigade drill, <a href="#Page_191">191</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Battery acting independently, responsibility of commander, <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;advance for action, <a href="#Page_302">302</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;coming into action, method of, <a href="#Page_303">303</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;commander, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_308">308</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">orders by,</span> <a href="#Page_300">300</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">responsibility of,</span> <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;commanders, position in brigade in column, <a href="#Page_284">284</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;drill, <a href="#Page_215">215</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;field, in action, <a href="#Page_306">306</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;fire, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;in action, advance of, <a href="#Page_360">360</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;“ &nbsp;retirement of, <a href="#Page_361">361</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;leader at mounted drill, <a href="#Page_206">206</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;observing station, <a href="#Page_295">295</a>, <a href="#Page_316">316</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;position, methods of occupying, <a href="#Page_297">297</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;preparation for action, <a href="#Page_294">294</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;reconnaissance by commander, <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;recruit training in, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;serjeant-major, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_309">309</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;signallers, <a href="#Page_391">391</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;tactics, general instructions, <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;training, <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bending lessons in equitation, <a href="#Page_86">86</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Billeting areas, <a href="#Page_396">396</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">orders,</span> <a href="#Page_397">397</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">party,</span> <a href="#Page_396">396</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Billets, descriptions of, <a href="#Page_396">396</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bivouacs, <a href="#Page_398">398</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Blank ammunition, precautions to be taken when firing, <a href="#Page_411">411</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Boys, course of instruction for, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bracket, <a href="#Page_331">331</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Brake, application of, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bridge, construction of with battery stores, <a href="#Page_378">378</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bridling, <a href="#Page_63">63</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Brigade ammunition columns, <a href="#Page_367">367</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span><span class="ws4">”</span><span class="ws2">position of,</span> <a href="#Page_368">368</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;commander, reconnaissance by, <a href="#Page_281">281</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">responsibility of,</span> <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;“&emsp; drill, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; leader at mounted drill, <a href="#Page_207">207</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">duties of,</span> <a href="#Page_283">283</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;“&emsp; selection of position for, <a href="#Page_282">282</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; signallers, <a href="#Page_391">391</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;“&emsp; tactics, general instructions, <a href="#Page_280">280</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; training, <a href="#Page_19">19</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Buildings, effect of field gun fire on, <a href="#Page_228">228</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">use of percussion shrapnel against troops defending,</span> <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Bursts, how judged, <a href="#Page_165">165</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>C</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Calls, field, <a href="#Page_205">205</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Camp commandants, practice, duties, &amp;c., <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Canter, the true, <a href="#Page_58">58</a>, <a href="#Page_85">85</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Cantering, disunited and false, <a href="#Page_59">59</a>, <a href="#Page_86">86</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Captain, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_308">308</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Carriages, loading of, <a href="#Page_403">403</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Cart, loading a, <a href="#Page_137">137</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Casualties in action, <a href="#Page_363">363</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;on the move, <a href="#Page_362">362</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;replacement of, <a href="#Page_362">362</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Cavalry acting dismounted, horse artillery with, <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;employment of horse artillery with, <a href="#Page_265">265</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;fight, horse artillery in, <a href="#Page_272">272</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;functions of in war, <a href="#Page_266">266</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;methods of engaging, <a href="#Page_345">345</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;pursuit or retreat, action of horse artillery in, <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Centring of shell, <a href="#Page_147">147</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Civil employment, qualifications for, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Clinometer laying, <a href="#Page_177">177</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;sight to be set level, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Coast fortress, defence of, <a href="#Page_277">277</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Collective ranging, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_332">332</a>, <a href="#Page_352">352</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">training,</span> <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">object of,</span> <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Combined employment of the various arms, knowledge of essential, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;observation, <a href="#Page_317">317</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Command, abbreviated words of, <a href="#Page_301">301</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Commandants, practice camp, duties, &amp;c., <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Commander horse artillery, duty of, <a href="#Page_264">264</a>, <a href="#Page_271">271</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Communication between artillery and infantry to be maintained, <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;means of available, <a href="#Page_236">236</a>, <a href="#Page_390">390</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Communications, external, <a href="#Page_390">390</a>, <a href="#Page_392">392</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;internal, <a href="#Page_390">390</a>, <a href="#Page_391">391</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Compass, use of, to obtain line of fire, <a href="#Page_312">312</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Compliments, paying of when mounted without arms, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">with drawn sword,</span> <a href="#Page_97">97</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Concealed positions, utilization of, <a href="#Page_245">245</a>, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Concealing guns, <a href="#Page_373">373</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Concealment, <a href="#Page_231">231</a>, <a href="#Page_243">243</a>, <a href="#Page_254">254</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">training in,</span> <a href="#Page_388">388</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Concentration of fire, <a href="#Page_339">339</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Cone of dispersion, <a href="#Page_158">158</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Control by brigade commander, <a href="#Page_290">290</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Control of fire of a battery, <a href="#Page_320">320</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Co-operation of aircraft with artillery, <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Cordite, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Corrector settings, <a href="#Page_162">162</a>, <a href="#Page_300">300</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">form of ordering,</span> <a href="#Page_301">301</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Counter-attack, support against, <a href="#Page_252">252</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Counter-attacks, decisive, <a href="#Page_258">258</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">local,</span> <a href="#Page_258">258</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Covering fire, combination of guns, machine guns and rifles, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Crest, clearing the, <a href="#Page_181">181</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>D</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Darkness, advantages gained from moving batteries under cover of, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Defence, artillery in, <a href="#Page_252">252</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;opening phase of, <a href="#Page_255">255</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;second phase of, <a href="#Page_256">256</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;third phase of, <a href="#Page_257">257</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">of a fortress, mobile artillery in the,</span> <a href="#Page_277">277</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;position, form taken, <a href="#Page_248">248</a>, <a href="#Page_253">253</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Definitions, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">of gunnery terms,</span> <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Deflection, causes and counteraction of, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">corrections for difference in level of wheels,</span> <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">for moving targets,</span> <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">&nbsp;”</span>&emsp;wind, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">method of ordering,</span> <a href="#Page_180">180</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Despatch riders, <a href="#Page_391">391</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Dial sight, use of, <a href="#Page_312">312</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Direct laying, advantages and disadvantages of, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">when employed,</span> <a href="#Page_173">173</a>, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">with 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. and other field guns,</span> <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Director, use of, <a href="#Page_311">311</a>, <a href="#Page_312">312</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Discipline on the march, <a href="#Page_394">394</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Dismounting from horse, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” <span class="ws2">importance of,</span> <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Dispersion, cone of, <a href="#Page_158">158</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">of guns,</span> <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Displacement, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Distance at which artillery can fire over own troops with safety, <a href="#Page_251">251</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;judging, training in, <a href="#Page_382">382</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Distribution of fire, general principles, <a href="#Page_338">338</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Divisional ammunition column to be acquainted with dispositions of artillery units, <a href="#Page_243">243</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws4">”</span><span class="ws3">columns,</span> <a href="#Page_370">370</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">“&emsp; artillery commander, duties of, <a href="#Page_9">9</a>, <a href="#Page_240">240</a>, <a href="#Page_249">249</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span> <span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;position of, <a href="#Page_240">240</a>, <a href="#Page_244">244</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;training, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Double displacement, <a href="#Page_188">188</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Drift, <a href="#Page_149">149</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;deflection for, <a href="#Page_169">169</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;how counteracted, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Drill, dismounted, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;mounted, <i>see</i> <b>M.</b></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;squad, general instruction, <a href="#Page_23">23</a>, <a href="#Page_35">35</a>, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Driver, position of, with mountain artillery, <a href="#Page_137">137</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp; mounted and dismounted, <a href="#Page_104">104</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Drivers, course of instruction, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Driving a pair of horses from the box, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;application of brake in, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;band, <a href="#Page_146">146</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;down hill, <a href="#Page_113">113</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;general principles of, <a href="#Page_102">102</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;reversing in narrow roads, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;up hills, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;without vehicles, <a href="#Page_106">106</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Duties of personnel of battery in action, <a href="#Page_308">308</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>E</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Economy of force, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Elevation, <a href="#Page_151">151</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;form of ordering, <a href="#Page_301">301</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;how to find, <a href="#Page_331">331</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Employment of artillery in war, general instructions, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">“<span class="ws3">with other arms,</span> <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Engaging objectives, methods of, <a href="#Page_343">343</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Engineering, field, knowledge of necessary, <a href="#Page_8">8</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Entrenching guns, <a href="#Page_373">373</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Epaulments, gun, <a href="#Page_374">374</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Equitation, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &emsp;standard required, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;terms used in, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Escorts for horse artillery, <a href="#Page_267">267</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;necessity of, <a href="#Page_235">235</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>F</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Field artillery, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;calls, <a href="#Page_205">205</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;engineering, <a href="#Page_373">373</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;guns, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;effect and use of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;howitzers, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_228">228</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Fire action with mounted action, <a href="#Page_269">269</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;artillery, distribution of, <a href="#Page_338">338</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">natures of,</span> <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;battery, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;concentration of, <a href="#Page_339">339</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;control of, <a href="#Page_320">320</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span> in action, <a href="#Page_251">251</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;converging, effect of, <a href="#Page_250">250</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;covering, combination of guns, machine guns and rifles, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;discipline, <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;distribution of, general principles, <a href="#Page_338">338</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;effect of, <a href="#Page_248">248</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;gun, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;in defence, <a href="#Page_256">256</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;justification for opening of, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;line of, laying out the, <a href="#Page_310">310</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;lines of parallelism of, <a href="#Page_182">182</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;not to be opened with more guns than necessary, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;objects of, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;observation of, <a href="#Page_316">316</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>  from aircraft, <a href="#Page_238">238</a>, <a href="#Page_325">325</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;kites, <a href="#Page_329">329</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;on hostile firing lines, <a href="#Page_256">256</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;searching and sweeping combined, <a href="#Page_343">343</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;<a href="#Page_341">341</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;section, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;sweeping, <a href="#Page_342">342</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;unit, <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;when to be opened by horse artillery, <a href="#Page_272">272</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Firing battery, composition of, <a href="#Page_294">294</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;blank ammunition, precautions to be taken, <a href="#Page_411">411</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">First line wagons, composition of, <a href="#Page_294">294</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Force, economy of, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Flight, time of, <a href="#Page_169">169</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Fortress, mobile artillery in the attack and defence of, <a href="#Page_275">275</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Furlough, arrangement of, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Fuze indicator, object and theory of, <a href="#Page_162">162</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;use of, <a href="#Page_165">165</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;scale, <a href="#Page_168">168</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;setters, list of qualified to be kept, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;numbers maintained, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;to be tested, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;to find the, <a href="#Page_334">334</a>, <a href="#Page_337">337</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Fuzes, time and percussion, <a href="#Page_161">161</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>G</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Gallop, the true, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Galloping, disunited and false, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Games, value of, <a href="#Page_8">8</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Gravity, force of, action on shell during flight, <a href="#Page_149">149</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Ground scouts, <a href="#Page_284">284</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Gun arcs, use of, <a href="#Page_312">312</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;epaulments, <a href="#Page_374">374</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;field, number of men required for service of, <a href="#Page_213">213</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;fire, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;heavy, number of men required for service of, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;horse, number of men required for service of, <a href="#Page_209">209</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;layers and fuze setters, list of qualified to be kept, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>  numbers maintained, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>  to be tested, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;mountain, number of men required for service of, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;parks, sites for, <a href="#Page_397">397</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;pits, <a href="#Page_374">374</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;when laid, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Gunners, course of instruction, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Gunnery, general instructions, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;principles of, <a href="#Page_145">145</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;terms, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Guns, concealment of, <a href="#Page_373">373</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;dispersion of, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;entrenchment of, <a href="#Page_373">373</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;field, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;effect and use of, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;heavy, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_229">229</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;how mounted, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;loading of, <a href="#Page_403">403</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;not to be parked in the open, <a href="#Page_397">397</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;objects and methods of keeping in hand, <a href="#Page_234">234</a>, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;selection of position for, <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">&nbsp; ”&emsp;slinging of, <a href="#Page_407">407</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>H</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Halting, when driving, <a href="#Page_108">108</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Hand, use of, for measuring angles, <a href="#Page_180">180</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Harness, care of, <a href="#Page_133">133</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;disposal of, <a href="#Page_134">134</a>, <a href="#Page_135">135</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” &emsp;fitting of, <a href="#Page_102">102</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Headquarters of battery, movement of, <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;brigade<span class="ws2">”</span>, <a href="#Page_281">281</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Heavy artillery, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_229">229</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">use of,</span> <a href="#Page_276">276</a>, <a href="#Page_277">277</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;batteries, observing parties for, <a href="#Page_319">319</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;guns, ranging for, <a href="#Page_336">336</a>, <a href="#Page_338">338</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Hill, driving down, <a href="#Page_113">113</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Hills, driving up, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Hooking in and unhooking, <a href="#Page_106">106</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Horse artillery action in cavalry pursuit or retreat, <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">advance into action,</span> <a href="#Page_270">270</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">commander, duty of,</span> <a href="#Page_264">264</a>, <a href="#Page_271">271</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">employment with cavalry,</span> <a href="#Page_265">265</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">escorts for,</span> <a href="#Page_267">267</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">fire, when to be opened,</span> <a href="#Page_272">272</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">in a general engagement,</span> <a href="#Page_275">275</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">”   cavalry fight,</span> <a href="#Page_272">272</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">position on the march,</span> <a href="#Page_267">267</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2"> ”</span><span class="ws2">with cavalry acting dismounted,</span> <a href="#Page_273">273</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;balance, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;bending a, <a href="#Page_86">86</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;brows, <a href="#Page_405">405</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;collected, <a href="#Page_59">59</a>, <a href="#Page_84">84</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;how to pick up a foot, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;run in hand, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;paces of the, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;to jump, teaching of, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;to stand still without being held, teaching a, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;training of, first stage, <a href="#Page_118">118</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;&emsp;”&nbsp;&emsp;general principles, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;&emsp;”&nbsp;&emsp;second stage, <a href="#Page_120">120</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;&emsp;”&nbsp;&emsp;third stage, <a href="#Page_124">124</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;wooden, use of, <a href="#Page_71">71</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Horseback, first movements on, <a href="#Page_80">80</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Horseman, qualifications of, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Horsemastership, general instructions, <a href="#Page_55">55</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">necessity of,</span> <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Horses, awkward, riding and retraining of, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; draught, refractory, <a href="#Page_132">132</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; feeding of, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; fretting, <a href="#Page_130">130</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; jibbing, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; leading of, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; loading of, <a href="#Page_402">402</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; off saddling, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; practising swimming, <a href="#Page_18">18</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; pulling, causes and cure of, <a href="#Page_127">127</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; refusing, causes and cure of, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; rolling in the sand, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; securing of, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; shoeing, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; slinging of, transports alongside, <a href="#Page_403">403</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;<span class="ws3">” </span><span class="ws3">” </span><span class="ws4">” </span>&emsp;transports not alongside, <a href="#Page_404">404</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; sore backs, cause of, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; standard required of, <a href="#Page_55">55</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; temper and vice, <a href="#Page_132">132</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; that decline to leave the ranks, <a href="#Page_130">130</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; ” <span class="ws2">” </span>&emsp; to stand still when being mounted, <a href="#Page_131">131</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp;   ” &nbsp; fret, <a href="#Page_130">130</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp;   ”&nbsp; rush at their fences, <a href="#Page_130">130</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; training of remounts, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; vice and bad temper, <a href="#Page_132">132</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; watering of, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &nbsp; weight off the back, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Howitzers, field, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_228">228</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&nbsp;&emsp;ranging for, <a href="#Page_336">336</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&nbsp;&emsp;use of, <a href="#Page_277">277</a>, <a href="#Page_278">278</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>I</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Indicator, fuze, <a href="#Page_162">162</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Indirect laying, advantages and disadvantages of, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;for direction, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;elevation, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;when employed, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Individual training, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;object of, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Infantry advance, stopping of hostile, <a href="#Page_256">256</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;advancing, artillery to support attack of, <a href="#Page_249">249</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;assault, <a href="#Page_250">250</a>, <a href="#Page_251">251</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;co-operation with, duty of artillery commander, <a href="#Page_242">242</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;deployment, cover and support of, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;grouping of, with artillery, <a href="#Page_236">236</a>, <a href="#Page_241">241</a>, <a href="#Page_254">254</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;hostile methods of engaging, <a href="#Page_348">348</a>, <a href="#Page_357">357</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;   ”    prevent movements of, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;howitzers adapted to support of in later stages</li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;of attack, <a href="#Page_228">228</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;intended action to be communicated to artillery</li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;commander, <a href="#Page_281">281</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;sacrifice of artillery to support, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;support of primary object, <a href="#Page_247">247</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp;principle of all artillery tactics, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Information, advanced guard obtains, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Intercommunication, N.C.O. from ammunition column to accompany</li>
+<li class="isub10">headquarters of brigade for, <a href="#Page_368">368</a></li>
+<li class="isub5"><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;service of, <a href="#Page_390">390</a></li>
+<li class="isub5"><span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;brigade headquarters, <a href="#Page_288">288</a></li>
+<li class="isub5"><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;system of, <a href="#Page_235">235</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Irregular warfare, artillery in, <a href="#Page_278">278</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>J</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Jibber, method of starting a, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Judging distance, training in, <a href="#Page_382">382</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Jumping, instruction of recruits in, <a href="#Page_81">81</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;teaching of horses in, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;training of mules in, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>K</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Kites, method of engaging, <a href="#Page_351">351</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;observation of fire from, <a href="#Page_329">329</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>L</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Lands, <a href="#Page_146">146</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Layers, list of qualified to be kept, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;numbers maintained, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Laying, to be tested, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;clinometer, <a href="#Page_177">177</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;direct, advantage and disadvantages of, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;  ”    when employed, <a href="#Page_173">173</a>, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;  ”    with 13-pr. and 18-pr. Q.F. and other field guns, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;general instructions for, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;indirect, advantages and disadvantages of, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;   ”&nbsp; &emsp; for direction, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;   ”&nbsp; &emsp;  ”  elevation, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;   ”&nbsp; &emsp; when employed, <a href="#Page_175">175</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;main factors in, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;methods of instruction in, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;out the line of fire, <a href="#Page_310">310</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;with open sights, <a href="#Page_173">173</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Leading of battery, <a href="#Page_302">302</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;brigade, <a href="#Page_281">281</a>, <a href="#Page_283">283</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;in mounted drill, <a href="#Page_206">206</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Leave, arrangement of, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Lectures, importance of, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Limbering up, <a href="#Page_110">110</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Line of fire, how marked, <a href="#Page_310">310</a>, <a href="#Page_311">311</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;“&nbsp; &emsp;laying out the, <a href="#Page_310">310</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;to find the, <a href="#Page_335">335</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Lines of fire, how obtained, <a href="#Page_310">310</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; &emsp;”&nbsp; &emsp;parallelism of, <a href="#Page_182">182</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Loading a wagon or cart, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Localities, method of engaging, <a href="#Page_344">344</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Look-out men, <a href="#Page_319">319</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Lyddite shell, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>M</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Machine guns, cavalry, position of, <a href="#Page_271">271</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;methods of engaging, <a href="#Page_350">350</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Main body, protection of, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Map reading, training in, <a href="#Page_388">388</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Maps, rough, those who reconnoitre should be able to execute, <a href="#Page_385">385</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Marches and march discipline, <a href="#Page_394">394</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Mountain artillery, characteristics of, <a href="#Page_229">229</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">mounted drill,</span> <a href="#Page_193">193</a>, <a href="#Page_194">194</a>, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">organization for drill and manœuvre,</span> <a href="#Page_193">193</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">special instructions re equitation and driving,</span> <a href="#Page_137">137</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Mounted drill, battery, <a href="#Page_215">215</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;brigade, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;commands used at, <a href="#Page_201">201</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;falling in for parade, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;field battery, <a href="#Page_213">213</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”&nbsp;&emsp;calls used at,</span> <a href="#Page_205">205</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;frontages and depths, <a href="#Page_196">196</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;general instructions, <a href="#Page_191">191</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;heavy battery, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;horse battery, <a href="#Page_209">209</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;intervals and distances, <a href="#Page_195">195</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;leading and dressing, <a href="#Page_206">206</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;markers, <a href="#Page_208">208</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;mountain artillery, <a href="#Page_193">193</a>, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws3"> ”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;battery, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;object of, <a href="#Page_191">191</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;posts of officers, N.C.O’s. &amp;c., <a href="#Page_197">197</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;signals used at, <a href="#Page_202">202</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;wheeling, <a href="#Page_207">207</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Mounting a horse, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Movements, <a href="#Page_394">394</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Moving off, when driving, <a href="#Page_108">108</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &nbsp;&emsp;targets, deflection for, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&nbsp;&emsp;use of direct laying against, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Mules, leading of, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;&emsp;ordnance, fitting saddlery of, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;&emsp;training young, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Musketry, knowledge of necessary, <a href="#Page_8">8</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>N</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Night firing, <a href="#Page_292">292</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;&emsp;operations, general instructions, <a href="#Page_261">261</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Nitro-glycerine, freezing in cordite, <a href="#Page_156">156</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Nos. <a href="#Page_1">1</a>, duties of in action, <a href="#Page_310">310</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>O</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Objectives, allotting, by brigade commander, <a href="#Page_288">288</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">choice of by battery commander,</span> <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” <span class="ws2">methods of engaging,</span> <a href="#Page_343">343</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Observation, combined, <a href="#Page_317">317</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;of fire, <a href="#Page_316">316</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;” &nbsp;&emsp;”&emsp;from aircraft, <a href="#Page_238">238</a>, <a href="#Page_325">325</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;” &nbsp;&emsp;” &nbsp;&emsp;”&emsp;kites, <a href="#Page_329">329</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;posts, advanced, <a href="#Page_242">242</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” <span class="ws2">”</span> &nbsp;&emsp;when established, <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;responsibility of brigade commander, <a href="#Page_290">290</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">” &nbsp;&emsp;training in, <a href="#Page_383">383</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Observing officer, definition of, <a href="#Page_316">316</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span> &nbsp;&emsp;heavy artillery, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_309">309</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">” &nbsp;&emsp;station and battery, how to measure distance between, <a href="#Page_314">314</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span> &nbsp;&emsp;battery, <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span> &nbsp;&emsp;definition of, <a href="#Page_316">316</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws3">”</span> &nbsp;&emsp;selection of, <a href="#Page_281">281</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Obstacles, passage of, <a href="#Page_377">377</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Officers, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_308">308</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Officers’ patrols, <a href="#Page_240">240</a>, <a href="#Page_380">380</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Operation orders, <a href="#Page_243">243</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Orderlies, use of, <a href="#Page_322">322</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;”&emsp;for communication, <a href="#Page_236">236</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Orders by battery commander, <a href="#Page_300">300</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;operation, <a href="#Page_243">243</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Overseas dominions, training of artillery, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>P</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Pace, length of, <a href="#Page_30">30</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Paces of the horse, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Panorama sketches, those who reconnoitre should be able to execute, <a href="#Page_385">385</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Parallel lines of fire, how obtained, <a href="#Page_312">312</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Parallelism of lines of fire, <a href="#Page_182">182</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Patrols, look-out men not to be used as, <a href="#Page_320">320</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;officers’, <a href="#Page_240">240</a>, <a href="#Page_380">380</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Percussion shrapnel, <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Picketing rope, <a href="#Page_399">399</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Pits, gun, <a href="#Page_374">374</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Planeing, <a href="#Page_151">151</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Position, change of, <a href="#Page_291">291</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">covered, definition of,</span> <a href="#Page_297">297</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">defence of, form taken,</span> <a href="#Page_248">248</a>, <a href="#Page_253">253</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">for batteries, selection of,</span> <a href="#Page_282">282</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2"> ”&nbsp; guns, selection of,</span> <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">in observation, meaning of,</span> <a href="#Page_286">286</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”&nbsp;  readiness, meaning of,</span> <a href="#Page_286">286</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">methods of occupying by battery,</span> <a href="#Page_297">297</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">occupation of a, by a brigade,</span> <a href="#Page_286">286</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">of battery, change of,</span> <a href="#Page_360">360</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">&nbsp;“&nbsp; wagon line, selection of,</span> <a href="#Page_303">303</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">open, definition of,</span> <a href="#Page_296">296</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">semi-covered, definition of,</span> <a href="#Page_296">296</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Positions of assembly, when selected, <a href="#Page_303">303</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Principles of employment, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Protection of artillery, <a href="#Page_234">234</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span> the main body, <a href="#Page_245">245</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Pulling horses, causes and cure of, <a href="#Page_127">127</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>Q</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Quarters, <a href="#Page_394">394</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>R</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rail, transport by, <a href="#Page_401">401</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Range, <a href="#Page_152">152</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Range-finders, all officers to be capable of using, <a href="#Page_390">390</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;  reserve to be maintained, <a href="#Page_389">389</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;finding, definition of, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” <span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;general instructions, <a href="#Page_388">388</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;tables, <a href="#Page_166">166</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” <span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;information in, <a href="#Page_168">168</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;takers, training of, <a href="#Page_389">389</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Ranging, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; all guns, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_334">334</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; collective, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_332">332</a>, <a href="#Page_352">352</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; examples of, <a href="#Page_351">351</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; for heavy guns, <a href="#Page_336">336</a>, <a href="#Page_338">338</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;howitzers, <a href="#Page_336">336</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; general instructions, <a href="#Page_330">330</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; in brigade, <a href="#Page_288">288</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; method of detailing, <a href="#Page_332">332</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; section, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_333">333</a>, <a href="#Page_355">355</a>, <a href="#Page_358">358</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; single gun, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_333">333</a>, <a href="#Page_359">359</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; use of percussion and time shrapnel for, <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rations, preparation of, <a href="#Page_18">18</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Ravines, passage of, <a href="#Page_378">378</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rearguards, <a href="#Page_264">264</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reconnaissance, <a href="#Page_253">253</a>, <a href="#Page_280">280</a>, <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">aerial,</span> <a href="#Page_246">246</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">by battery commander,</span> <a href="#Page_295">295</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2"> ”</span>&nbsp;  brigade commander, <a href="#Page_281">281</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">object of, and general instructions,</span> <a href="#Page_380">380</a></li>
+<li class="isub5">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">reports, detail of,</span> <a href="#Page_386">386</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Recruits, course of instruction, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">training in the battery,</span> <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span><span class="ws2">of,</span> <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reference point, definition of, <a href="#Page_289">289</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">laying out lines of fire on,</span> <a href="#Page_290">290</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Refusers, causes and cure of, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rein, right and left, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reins, how to hold the, <a href="#Page_76">76</a>, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;to lengthen or shorten the, <a href="#Page_78">78</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Remounts, training of, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reporting, training in, <a href="#Page_388">388</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reports and sketches, <a href="#Page_385">385</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reserve brigade commander, responsibility of, <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">special, training of,</span> <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Retirement, action of artillery in, <a href="#Page_263">263</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">of battery in action,</span> <a href="#Page_361">361</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Retraining awkward horses, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Reversing in narrow roads, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Revolver shooting, <a href="#Page_101">101</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Riding awkward horses, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">first lessons to the recruit,</span> <a href="#Page_71">71</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;   movements on horseback, <a href="#Page_80">80</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">general instructions,</span> <a href="#Page_66">66</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">hints to instructors,</span> <a href="#Page_68">68</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">how to hold the reins,</span> <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;rise in the stirrups, <a href="#Page_80">80</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">mounting and dismounting,</span> <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">over a fence, teaching recruit,</span> <a href="#Page_81">81</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">position in the saddle at attention,</span> <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">preliminary training,</span> <a href="#Page_71">71</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">spurs in, use of,</span> <a href="#Page_89">89</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">the aids in, <a href="#Page_67">67</a>,</span> <a href="#Page_83">83</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;seat, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">various exercises in,</span> <a href="#Page_89">89</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">with the rifle,</span> <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp;<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;sword, <a href="#Page_95">95</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rifle drill, general instructions, <a href="#Page_44">44</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”   exercises not to be performed at inspections, <a href="#Page_44">44</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”   riding with the, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”   saluting when carrying, <a href="#Page_53">53</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Rifling, definition and object of, <a href="#Page_147">147</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”     twist of, <a href="#Page_147">147</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Road spaces, <a href="#Page_197">197</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>S</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Saddle-fitting, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Saddlery, care of, <a href="#Page_133">133</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;disposal of, <a href="#Page_134">134</a>, <a href="#Page_135">135</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;miscellaneous details, <a href="#Page_65">65</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp; &nbsp;of ordnance mules, fitting of, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Saddling, <a href="#Page_61">61</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Salute, drivers’, <a href="#Page_105">105</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp; &nbsp;officers’, <a href="#Page_97">97</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Saluting, rules as to, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;” <span class="ws2">when</span> carrying rifle, <a href="#Page_53">53</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">”</span>&emsp; &nbsp;leading horse, <a href="#Page_73">73</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Salvoes, when used, <a href="#Page_325">325</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">School, attendance of recruits in, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Scouting, training of men at, <a href="#Page_381">381</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Searching and sweeping fire combined, <a href="#Page_348">348</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws3">fire,</span> <a href="#Page_341">341</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Searchlights, use of, <a href="#Page_292">292</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Section commander, duties of, in action, <a href="#Page_308">308</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span><span class="ws2">qualifications for,</span> <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span><span class="ws2">responsibility of,</span> <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; control of fire, <a href="#Page_322">322</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; fire, <a href="#Page_323">323</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; ranging, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_333">333</a>, <a href="#Page_355">355</a>, <a href="#Page_358">358</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; training, <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sections, nomenclature and position of, <a href="#Page_191">191</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Semaphore signalling, <a href="#Page_393">393</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;&nbsp;use of, <a href="#Page_320">320</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Shell during flight, forces acting on, <a href="#Page_148">148</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;elongated, advantages of, <a href="#Page_146">146</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;in the bore, forces acting on, <a href="#Page_148">148</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;lyddite, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;shrapnel, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;star, <a href="#Page_161">161</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Shoeing of horses, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Shooting, causes of, affecting the accuracy of, <a href="#Page_154">154</a>, <a href="#Page_166">166</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;effect on, when wheels not level, <a href="#Page_153">153</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Shrapnel bullets, <a href="#Page_158">158</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;percussion, <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;shell, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;time, <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sight, angle of, alteration in, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;”  how found when target not visible from guns, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;how measured, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”    clinometer, to be set level, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sight, telescopic, when useful, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sighting, principle of, <a href="#Page_152">152</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sights, open, laying with, <a href="#Page_173">173</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Signal service, divisional, <a href="#Page_237">237</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Signallers, brigade and battery, <a href="#Page_391">391</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Signalling, abbreviations to be used in, <a href="#Page_321">321</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;&nbsp;from aircraft, <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;&nbsp; ”&emsp;&nbsp;the ground to aircraft, <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;&nbsp;use of, in control of fire, <a href="#Page_320">320</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Signals from and to aeroplanes, <a href="#Page_328">328</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;used at mounted drill, <a href="#Page_202">202</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Single displacement, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;gun ranging, <a href="#Page_331">331</a>, <a href="#Page_333">333</a>, <a href="#Page_359">359</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sketches and reports, <a href="#Page_385">385</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sketching, training in, <a href="#Page_388">388</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Slinging guns, <a href="#Page_407">407</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;horses, <a href="#Page_403">403</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;vehicles, <a href="#Page_407">407</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Soldierly spirit, development of, <a href="#Page_7">7</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Special reserve, training of, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Spurs, use of, in riding, <a href="#Page_89">89</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Squad drill, general instructions, <a href="#Page_23">23</a>, <a href="#Page_35">35</a>, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;formation of, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;instructors, selection of, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Staffs, method of engaging, <a href="#Page_345">345</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Star shell, <a href="#Page_161">161</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sub-base, use of, <a href="#Page_314">314</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Subsections, numbering and position of, <a href="#Page_191">191</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Surprise, concealed manœuvre favours, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sweeping and searching fire combined, <a href="#Page_343">343</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”<span class="ws2">fire,</span> <a href="#Page_339">339</a>, <a href="#Page_342">342</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Switch angle, method of obtaining, <a href="#Page_189">189</a>, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Sword, riding with the, <a href="#Page_95">95</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Syllabus of training, <a href="#Page_409">409</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>T</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Tables, range, <a href="#Page_166">166</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;&nbsp;information in, <a href="#Page_168">168</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Tactical practice, schemes on which based, <a href="#Page_20">20</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;situation, knowledge of, essential, <a href="#Page_332">332</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Tactics, battery, general instructions, <a href="#Page_293">293</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp; brigade<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">”</span>&emsp;, <a href="#Page_280">280</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Target, change of, <a href="#Page_343">343</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Targets, concealed, indication of by aircraft, <a href="#Page_238">238</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;location of, from aircraft, <a href="#Page_324">324</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;moving, deflection for, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span><span class="ws2">use of direct laying against,</span> <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Telephone equipment, use of, <a href="#Page_237">237</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Telephones, <a href="#Page_320">320</a>, <a href="#Page_393">393</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Telescopic sight, when useful, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Territorial artillery, training of, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Time and percussion fuzes, <a href="#Page_161">161</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;in marching, <a href="#Page_30">30</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;of flight, <a href="#Page_169">169</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;shrapnel, <a href="#Page_160">160</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Traces, position of, <a href="#Page_107">107</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Training, artillery of the overseas dominions, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">battery,</span> <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">brigade,</span> <a href="#Page_19">19</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">collective,</span> <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;&nbsp;object of, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">divisional artillery,</span> <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">individual,</span> <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws4">”</span>&emsp;&nbsp;object of, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">object and method of,</span> <a href="#Page_7">7</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">of recruits,</span> <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span>  &nbsp;special reserve artillery, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">”</span>  &nbsp;territorial artillery, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">responsibility for,</span> <a href="#Page_8">8</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">section,</span> <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">syllabus of,</span> <a href="#Page_409">409</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">system of,</span> <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">the young horse,</span> <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">to be progressive and continuous,</span> <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">with other arms important,</span> <a href="#Page_9">9</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Trajectory, <a href="#Page_151">151</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Transport of artillery by rail, <a href="#Page_401">401</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>U</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Unhooking, <a href="#Page_106">106</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Unlimbering, <a href="#Page_110">110</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>V</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Vehicles, care of, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">not to be parked in the open,</span> <a href="#Page_398">398</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">slinging of,</span> <a href="#Page_407">407</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Villages, attack of, by artillery, <a href="#Page_261">261</a>, <a href="#Page_344">344</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”<span class="ws2">defence of,</span> <a href="#Page_261">261</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Visual signalling, <a href="#Page_237">237</a>, <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”<span class="ws2">training,</span> <a href="#Page_381">381</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>W</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wagon line, selection of position for, <a href="#Page_305">305</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&emsp;&nbsp;loading a, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wagons, care of, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wheels, deflection due to difference in level of, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">&nbsp;”&emsp;&nbsp;not level, effect on shooting, <a href="#Page_153">153</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wheeling, mounted drill, <a href="#Page_207">207</a></li>
+<li class="isub4">”&emsp;&nbsp;when driving, <a href="#Page_108">108</a>, <a href="#Page_109">109</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Whip, use of, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Whistle, use of, <a href="#Page_322">322</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wind, deflection for, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">”&nbsp; effect of, on shooting, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wireless telegraphy, <a href="#Page_239">239</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wood, attack on a, <a href="#Page_345">345</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">” &nbsp; fighting, artillery in, <a href="#Page_259">259</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Woods, advantage to be taken of, for concealment</li>
+<li class="isub9">against aircraft, <a href="#Page_231">231</a></li>
+<li class="isub3">” &nbsp;   use of mountain artillery in the defence of, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Wounded, disposal of, <a href="#Page_363">363</a></li>
+
+<li class="isub10 ifrst"><span class="fs_120"><b>Z</b></span></li>
+<li class="isub2">Zone, to register a, <a href="#Page_344">344</a></li>
+<li class="isub2">Zones, <a href="#Page_282">282</a></li>
+</ul>
+
+<div class="footnotes">
+<p class="f150"><b>Footnotes:</b></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_1_1" href="#FNanchor_1_1" class="label">[1]</a>
+The mule is referred to as the normal pack animal with mountain
+batteries throughout this manual. The same principles are generally
+applicable to pack ponies.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_2_2" href="#FNanchor_2_2" class="label">[2]</a>
+Heavy and mountain artillery drill as laid down for infantry.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_3_3" href="#FNanchor_3_3" class="label">[3]</a>
+<span class="smcap">Note.</span>—Trained horses should never be turned
+except on their haunches.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_4_4" href="#FNanchor_4_4" class="label">[4]</a>
+<span class="smcap">Note.</span>—Special reins for near and off horses will
+eventually be abolished and ordinary reins substituted.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_5_5" href="#FNanchor_5_5" class="label">[5]</a>
+Neither bearing reins nor side reins are part of peace
+equipment stores, but they can be made up by the saddler.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_6_6" href="#FNanchor_6_6" class="label">[6]</a>
+“Ranging” and “Range-finding” must not be confused with
+one another. The latter is the measurement of the distance in yards
+to the target by mechanical means, and the former the process by
+which the elevation necessary to make a shell travel that distance
+is ascertained, an elevation which, owing to the various causes
+mentioned above, will rarely correspond with the distance given by the
+range-finder.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_7_7" href="#FNanchor_7_7" class="label">[7]</a>
+ <span class="smcap">Note.</span>—This is obtained from the formula</p>
+
+<table class="spb1 fs_120">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">v2</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">w × 2g</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+<p class="no-indent">representing the energy of a body. In this case</p>
+ <table class="spb1 fs_120">
+   <tbody><tr>
+      <td class="tdc bb">v2</td>
+      <td class="tdl_wsp" rowspan="2">= 60; whence v = 400 (approx.).</td>
+   </tr><tr>
+      <td class="tdc">41 × 2g</td>
+   </tr>
+ </tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_8_8" href="#FNanchor_8_8" class="label">[8]</a>
+<span class="smcap">Note.</span>—<span class="fs_120">¹/₄₄</span> for the No. 80 fuze.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_9_9" href="#FNanchor_9_9" class="label">[9]</a>
+<span class="smcap">Note.</span>—An aiming point must not be confused
+with a reference point. (<i>See</i> Sec. <b>186</b>.)</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_10_10" href="#FNanchor_10_10" class="label">[10]</a>
+Supposing that guns and target are on the same level, then
+to guns 60 yards in rear of a crest and 16 feet below it all ground is
+dead within 3,000 yards; if 9 feet below it all ground is dead within
+2,000 yards; if 3 feet below it all ground is dead within 1,000 yards.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_11_11" href="#FNanchor_11_11" class="label">[11]</a>
+ This does not preclude subordinate artillery commanders
+from making the arrangements for observation of fire referred to in
+Sec. <b>199</b>.</p></div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_12_12" href="#FNanchor_12_12" class="label">[12]</a>
+Should the limits within which the hostile battery is
+located be wide the fire must be of a searching nature.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_13_13" href="#FNanchor_13_13" class="label">[13]</a>
+The distance at which artillery other than howitzers can with safety
+fire over the heads of its own troops varies. At ranges under 1,500
+yards <i>on the level</i> it would be dangerous to fire over friendly
+troops; at longer ranges infantry should be sufficiently safe at
+500 yards (with heavy artillery 800 yards is necessary) from the guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_14_14" href="#FNanchor_14_14" class="label">[14]</a>
+The methods by which a hostile battery should be
+neutralized are described in Sec. <b>155</b> (2).</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_15_15" href="#FNanchor_15_15" class="label">[15]</a>
+<span class="smcap">Note.</span>—In normal circumstances the amount of
+cover necessary to hide the flashes is about 13 feet for field guns,
+and 20 feet for howitzers and heavy guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_16_16" href="#FNanchor_16_16" class="label">[16]</a>
+Ground scouts’ horses will also be with the wagon line.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_17_17" href="#FNanchor_17_17" class="label">[17]</a>
+In batteries armed with 4·7-inch Q.F. guns the wagons will be placed 2
+yards to the left flank and 10 yards in rear of the trail eye, poles to
+the rear.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_18_18" href="#FNanchor_18_18" class="label">[18]</a>
+Axle mule in the case of the 10-pr. B.L. gun.</p>
+</div>
+
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_19_19" href="#FNanchor_19_19" class="label">[19]</a>
+At present this procedure is only possible with batteries
+provided with two No. 3 directors.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_20_20" href="#FNanchor_20_20" class="label">[20]</a>
+Or multiple of 300.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_21_21" href="#FNanchor_21_21" class="label">[21]</a>
+ Collective ranging does not apply to howitzers and heavy guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_22_22" href="#FNanchor_22_22" class="label">[22]</a>
+In a 4-gun battery by the three right guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_23_23" href="#FNanchor_23_23" class="label">[23]</a>
+These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_24_24" href="#FNanchor_24_24" class="label">[24]</a>
+These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_25_25" href="#FNanchor_25_25" class="label">[25]</a>
+These individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery, as one correction proves sufficient for all guns.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+ <a id="Footnote_26_26" href="#FNanchor_26_26" class="label">[26]</a>
+As the correction is one for all guns it is sent down <i>before</i> the
+new corrector and elevation.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+ <a id="Footnote_27_27" href="#FNanchor_27_27" class="label">[27]</a>
+Individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery until the elevation for the next salvo has been given.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_28_28" href="#FNanchor_28_28" class="label">[28]</a>
+Individual corrections are noted but will not be sent down to the
+battery until the elevation for the next salvo has been given.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_29_29" href="#FNanchor_29_29" class="label">[29]</a>
+Line having been accurately found the battery commander varies his rate
+of fire to such speed as the tactical situation may demand.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_30_30" href="#FNanchor_30_30" class="label">[30]</a>
+—<span class="smcap">Notes</span> Or “Corrector 154.” “45—42.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_31_31" href="#FNanchor_31_31" class="label">[31]</a>
+—Or “Battery fire ... seconds.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_32_32" href="#FNanchor_32_32" class="label">[32]</a>
+Or “Corrector 152”—“28—25.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_33_33" href="#FNanchor_33_33" class="label">[33]</a>
+Interval suitable to time of flight is ordered as
+the battery is firing over the heads of its own infantry which is
+approaching the objective.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_34_34" href="#FNanchor_34_34" class="label">[34]</a>
+The battery commander is satisfied that his infantry is in
+no danger from his fire, so he shortens the interval.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_35_35" href="#FNanchor_35_35" class="label">[35]</a>
+As battery commander is not certain that the whole extent
+of the target is parallel to the front of the battery, he orders a
+longer interval in order that he may correct the range of individual
+guns if necessary.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_36_36" href="#FNanchor_36_36" class="label">[36]</a>
+Battery commander sees that his infantry is checked, so
+orders a burst of fire.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_37_37" href="#FNanchor_37_37" class="label">[37]</a>
+Battery commander seeing that his own infantry has been
+helped to advance, as desired, comes back to a slow rate.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_38_38" href="#FNanchor_38_38" class="label">[38]</a>
+—Or “Corrector 154.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_39_39" href="#FNanchor_39_39" class="label">[39]</a>
+—Battery commander has now corrected his lines and has
+established a “belt” of fire parallel to the front of his guns, through
+which the infantry must pass. In this example lines are not opened
+out. The whole “belt” can be shifted up and down, right or left, as
+the subsequent movement of the enemy may dictate, and a quick rate of
+battery or section fire can be employed as necessary.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_40_40" href="#FNanchor_40_40" class="label">[40]</a>
+Or “Right ranging, 3rd Charge, Corrector 150, 26°—23°. fire.”</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_41_41" href="#FNanchor_41_41" class="label">[41]</a>
+Splash of bullets visible.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_42_42" href="#FNanchor_42_42" class="label">[42]</a>
+Splash of bullets visible.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_43_43" href="#FNanchor_43_43" class="label">[43]</a>
+In course of preparation.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_44_44" href="#FNanchor_44_44" class="label">[44]</a>
+It is calculated that in addition about 2½ hours a week in the first
+fortnight are spent on medical inspection, fitting clothing, and school tests.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p class="no-indent">
+<a id="Footnote_45_45" href="#FNanchor_45_45" class="label">[45]</a>
+It is calculated that in addition about 2½hours a week in the first
+fortnight are spent on medical inspection, fitting clothing, and school tests.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<div class="transnote bbox spa2">
+<p class="f120 spa1">Transcriber’s Notes:</p>
+<hr class="r10">
+<p>Deprecated spellings or ancient words were not corrected.</p>
+<p>The illustrations have been moved so that they do not break up
+      paragraphs and so that they are next to the text they illustrate.</p>
+<p>Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected.</p>
+</div></div>
+
+
+</div>
+<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78053 ***</div>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/78053-h/images/coat_of_arms.jpg b/78053-h/images/coat_of_arms.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10a4c99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/coat_of_arms.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/cover.jpg b/78053-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91fe21a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/cover.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_01.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_01.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa8c6c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_01.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_02.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_02.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f15c44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_02.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_03.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_03.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3081eca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_03.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_03b.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_03b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eaac293
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_03b.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_04.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_04.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a23382b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_04.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_05.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_05.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f23d643
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_05.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_06.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_06.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1516c42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_06.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_07.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_07.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b98f3e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_07.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_08.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_08.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1e1805
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_08.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_09.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_09.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d480e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_09.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_10.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_10.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..239ce8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_10.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_11.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_11.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b788d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_11.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_12.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_12.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cb84f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_12.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_13.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_13.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98487aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_13.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_14.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_14.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..968bbb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_14.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_15.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_15.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4988985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_15.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_16.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_16.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03e76d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_16.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_17.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_17.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e4b569
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_17.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_18.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_18.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e4d616
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_18.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_19.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_19.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d101c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_19.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_20.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_20.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddeddd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_20.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_21.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_21.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddab628
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_21.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_22.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_22.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..247945f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_22.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_23.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_23.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68702f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_23.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_24.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_24.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..777f21b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_24.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_25.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_25.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b497f10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_25.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_26.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_26.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e37091f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_26.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_27.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_27.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5eba73a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_27.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_28.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_28.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..084194f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_28.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_29.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_29.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..428d865
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_29.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_29b.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_29b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c28bae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_29b.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_30.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_30.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2b0681
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_30.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_31.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_31.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..267ecb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_31.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_32.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_32.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..531a339
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_32.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_33.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_33.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0bf7aa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_33.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_34.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_34.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1eeba40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_34.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_35.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_35.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23b0541
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_35.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_36.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_36.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09fdc3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_36.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/fig_37.jpg b/78053-h/images/fig_37.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1dcfad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/fig_37.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_1.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f78d84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_1.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_10.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_10.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28e5604
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_10.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_11a.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_11a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..810be61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_11a.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_11b.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_11b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd2e99c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_11b.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_2.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ac63d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_2.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_3.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_3.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4687254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_3.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_4.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_4.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbc02f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_4.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_5.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_5.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..08bd897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_5.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_6.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_6.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2edde4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_6.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_7.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_7.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b84bd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_7.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_8.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_8.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7f690f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_8.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/plate_9.jpg b/78053-h/images/plate_9.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47541d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/plate_9.jpg
diff --git a/78053-h/images/signature.jpg b/78053-h/images/signature.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfd9e39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78053-h/images/signature.jpg
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c72794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..948918e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #78053
+(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/78053)